Professional Documents
Culture Documents
AT330_TRR_E1
AT330_TRR_E1
Introduction
This Technical Reference Guide is aimed at radio network engineers with an advanced knowledge of Atoll and radio network
planning. It provides detailed information about the inner workings and formulas that are implemented by Atoll.
About Atoll
Atoll is a 64-bit multi-technology wireless network design and optimisation platform. Atoll is open, scalable, flexible, and
supports wireless operators throughout the network life cycle, from initial design to densification and optimisation.
Atoll’s integration and automation features help operators smoothly automate planning and optimisation processes through
flexible scripting and SOA-based mechanisms. Atoll supports a wide range of implementation scenarios, from standalone to
enterprise-wide server-based configurations using distributed and multi-threaded computing.
Atoll Microwave is a complete backhaul and microwave link planning solution based on the leading Atoll platform, which
includes a high performance GIS and advanced data and user management features. Atoll Microwave can share its site data-
base with Atoll radio planning and optimisation modules, thus allowing easy data consistency management across the oper-
ator organisation.
If you are interested in learning more about Atoll, please contact your Forsk representative to inquire about our training solu-
tions.
About Forsk
Forsk is an independent company providing radio planning and optimisation software solutions to the wireless industry since
1987.
In 1997, Forsk released the first version of Atoll, its flagship radio planning software. Since then, Atoll has evolved to become
a comprehensive radio planning and optimisation platform and, with more than 5000 installed licenses worldwide, has
reached the leading position on the global market. Atoll combines engineering and automation functions that enable opera-
tors to smoothly and gradually implement SON processes within their organisation.
Today, Forsk is a global supplier with over 300 customers in 100 countries and strategic partnerships with major players in the
industry. Forsk distributes and supports Atoll directly from offices and technical support centres in France, USA, and China as
well as through a worldwide network of distributors and partners.
Since the first release of Atoll, Forsk has been known for its capability to deliver tailored and turn-key radio planning and opti-
misation environments based on Atoll.
To help operators streamline their radio planning and optimisation processes, Forsk provides a complete range of implemen-
tation services, including integration with existing IT infrastructure, automation, as well as data migration, installation, and
training services.
Getting Help
The online help system that is installed with Atoll is designed to give you quick access to the information you need to use the
product effectively. It contains the same material as the Atoll 3.3.0 User Manual.
You can browse the online help from the Contents view, the Index view, or you can use the built-in Search feature.
You can also download manuals from the Forsk web site.
3
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter : Introduction © 2015 Forsk
4
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
1 Antennas and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
1.1 Antenna Attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.1.1 Calculation of Azimuth and Tilt Angles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.1.2 Antenna Pattern 3D Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.1.3 Additional Electrical Downtilt Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Table of Contents © Forsk 2015
6
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Table of Contents
7
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Table of Contents © Forsk 2015
8
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Table of Contents
9
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Table of Contents © Forsk 2015
10
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Table of Contents
11
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Table of Contents © Forsk 2015
12
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Table of Contents
13
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Table of Contents © Forsk 2015
14
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Table of Contents
15
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Table of Contents © Forsk 2015
16
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Table of Contents
17
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Table of Contents © Forsk 2015
18
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Table of Contents
19
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Table of Contents © Forsk 2015
20
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Table of Contents
21
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Table of Contents © Forsk 2015
22
Chapter 1
Antennas and
Equipment
This chapter covers the following topics:
• "Antenna Attenuation" on page 25
• "Antenna Pattern Smoothing" on page 27
• "Power Received From Secondary Antennas" on page 29
• "Transmitter Radio Equipment" on page 30
• "Repeaters and Remote Antennas" on page 32
• "Beamforming Smart Antenna Models" on page 43
• "Grid-of-Beams Smart Antenna Model" on page 51
• "Adaptive Beam Smart Antenna Model" on page 52
• "Statistical Smart Antenna Gain Model" on page 53
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guidefor Radio Networks
© Forsk 2015
24
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment
aRx and eRx are respectively the azimuth and tilt of the receiver (Rx) in the coordinate system S 0 x y z .
d is the distance between the transmitter (Tx) and the receiver (Rx).
x Rx cos e Rx sin a Rx d
y Rx = cos e Rx cos a Rx d (1)
z Rx – sin e Rx d
Let az and el respectively be the azimuth and tilt of the receiver in the transmitter antenna coordinate system S Tx x'' y'' z'' .
These angles describe the direction of the transmitter-receiver path in the transmitter antenna coordinate system. Therefore,
the receiver coordinates in S Tx x'' y'' z'' are:
and
25
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment ©Forsk 2015
x'' 1 0 0 x'
y'' = 0 cos e Tx – sin e Tx y' (4)
z'' 0 sin e Tx cos e Tx z'
Therefore, the relation between the system S 0 x y z and the transmitter antenna system S Tx x'' y'' z'' is:
We get,
Then, substituting the receiver coordinates in the system S0 from Eq. (1) and the receiver coordinates in the system STx from
Eq. (2) in Eq. (6) leads to a system where two solutions are possible:
1
az = atan ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
cos e Tx sin e Tx tan e Rx
----------------------------------- + ----------------------------------------------
tan a Rx – a Tx sin a Rx – a Tx
and
180 – az – a 0 az – a 0
L antTx az el = H az – ----------------------------------
- H a 0 – V el + -------------------
- H 180 + a 0 – V 180 – el if |el| ≠ 90°
180 180
Atoll assumes that the horizontal and vertical patterns are cross-sections of a 3D pattern. In other words, the description of
the antenna pattern must satisfy the following:
H(0)=V(0) and H()=V()
If the electrical tilt is e0, the horizontal pattern is a conical section with an elevation of e0 degrees off the horizontal plane.
If the electrical azimuth is a0, the vertical pattern is a plane section with a rotation a0 degrees from the vertical plane.
In this case, the description of the antenna pattern must satisfy the following conditions:
H(a0)=V(e0) and H(180+a0)=V(180-e0)
26
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment
27
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment ©Forsk 2015
Atoll first determines the peaks and nulls in the part of the pattern to be smoothed by verifying the slopes of the pattern curve
at each angle.
Then, Atoll verifies whether the difference of attenuation at a given angle is DPeak-to-Null less than the before and after it. This
comparison determines the nulls to be smoothed (NSmoothing).
28
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment
Once the nulls are known, Atoll applies the smoothing algorithm to all the attenuation values at all the angles between the
first peak, the null, and the last peak.
Smoothing Algorithm
For all nulls n N Smoothing surrounded by two peaks P1 and P2 at angles 1 and 2 ,
A 2 – A 1
- i – 1
A i Smoothed = A i – F Smoothing A i – A + ----------------------
1 2 – 1
Where,
i is the angle in degrees from 1 to 2 incremented by 1 degree,
G ant – m Tx G ant – i
P Tx 1 –
X i ----------------------
L Tx P Tx X i -------------------- Tx
L Tx
i
------------------------------------------------------------------ + -
----------------------------------------
L ant – m az m el m L ant – i az i el i
Tx i Tx
P rec = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (not in dB1)
L model
Where,
PTx is the transmitter power (Ppilot in UMTS HSPA and CDMA2000, PP-CCPCH in TD-SCDMA, PPreamble in WiMAX, and PDLRS in
LTE),
i is the secondary antenna index,
xi is the percentage of power dedicated to the secondary antenna, i,
The definition of angles, az and el, depends on the used calculation method.
• Method 1 (must be indicated in an Atoll.ini file):
• azm: the difference between the receiver antenna azimuth and azimuth of the transmitter main antenna,
• elm: the difference between the receiver antenna tilt and tilt of the transmitter main antenna,
• azi : the difference between the receiver antenna azimuth and azimuth of the transmitter secondary antenna, i,
• eli : the difference between the receiver antenna tilt and tilt of the transmitter secondary antenna, i,
• Method 2 (default):
• azm : the receiver azimuth in the coordinate system of the transmitter main antenna,
• elm : the receiver tilt in the coordinate system of the transmitter main antenna,
• azi : the receiver azimuth in the coordinate system of the transmitter secondary antenna, i,
• eli : the receiver tilt in the coordinate system of the transmitter secondary antenna, i.
1. Formula cannot be directly calculated from components stated in dB and must be converted in linear values.
29
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment ©Forsk 2015
In Atoll, the transmitter-equipment pair is modelled a single entity. The entry to the BTS is considered the reference point
which is the location of the transmission/reception parameters.
• According to the book “Radio network planning and optimisation for UMTS” by Laiho
J., Wacker A., Novosad T., the noise figure corresponds to the loss in case of passive
components. Therefore, feeder noise figure is equal to the cable uplink losses.
UL
NF Feeder = L Feeder
• Loss and gain inputs specified in ATL documents must be positive values.
Where,
DL
• L TMA is the TMA transmission loss.
DL DL DL DL DL DL
• L Feeder is the feeder transmission loss ( L Feeder = L Feeder I Feeder + L Connector , where L Feeder , I Feeder and L Connector
are respectively the feeder loss per metre, the transmission feeder length in metre and the connector transmission
loss).
DL
• L Misc are the miscellaneous transmission losses.
DL
• L BTS – Conf are the losses due to BTS configuration (BTS property).
Where,
UL
• L Misc are the miscellaneous reception losses (Transmitter property).
30
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment
UL UL UL UL UL
• L Feeder are the feeder reception losses ( L Feeder = L Feeder I Feeder + L Connector , where L Feeder , I Feeder and
UL
L Connector are respectively the feeder loss per metre (Feeder property), the reception feeder length in metre
(Transmitter property) and the connector reception losses.
UL
• L BTS – Conf are the losses due to BTS configuration (BTS property).
UL
• G Ant – div is the antenna diversity gain (Transmitter property). This gain does not exist in WiMAX and LTE documents.
• NR Repeaters is the noise rise at transmitter due to repeaters. This parameter is taken into account only if the
transmitter has active repeater(s). The noise rise at transmitter due to repeaters is calculated as follows:
1
NR Repeaters = 10 Log 1 +
NIM
------------------
Rp
r r
For each active repeater ( k ), Atoll calculates a noise injection margin ( NIM Rp ). This is the difference between the
k
donor transmitter noise figure ( NF TX ) and the repeater noise figure received at the donor.
Rp k TX – Rp k
NIM Rp = NF TX – NF Rp + G amp – L
r k
Where,
• For each active repeater ( k ), Atoll converts the noise injection margin ( NIM Rp ) to Watt. Then, it uses the values
k
to calculate the noise rise at the donor transmitter due to active repeaters ( NR Repeaters ).
• G TMA is the gain due to TMA, which is calculated as follows:
WithoutTMA WithTMA
G TMA = NF Composite – NF Composite
WithTMA WithoutTMA
Where NF Composite and NF Composite are the composite noise figures with and without TMA respectively.
Friis' equation is used to calculate the composite noise figure when there is a TMA.
NF NF Feeder
--------------------------
NF BTS
-----------------
-------------------
TMA
10 10
– –
= 10 Log 10 + ---------------------------------- + -----------------------------------------------
WithTMA 10 10 1 10 1
NF Composite
UL UL UL
G TMA
----------------
G TMA
---------------- ----------------------
G Feeder
10 10 10
10 10 10
WithoutTMA
And, NF Composite = NF BTS + NF Feeder
Where,
31
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment ©Forsk 2015
DL DL DL DL
L Total – DL = L TMA + L Feeder + L Misc + L BTS – Conf
Where,
DL
• L TMA is the TMA transmission loss.
DL DL DL DL DL DL
• L Feeder is the feeder transmission loss ( L Feeder = L Feeder I Feeder + L Connector , where L Feeder , I Feeder and L Connector
are respectively the feeder loss per metre, the transmission feeder length in metre and the connector transmission
losses).
DL
• L Misc are the miscellaneous transmission losses.
DL
• L BTS – Conf are the losses due to BTS configuration (BTS property).
If a pixel/mobile Mi receives signals from the donor D and its repeater R, the total signal
D R
strength is the sum of the two signals: C DL ic + C DL ic
The received signal level (dBm) from a pixel/mobile Mi at a donor D via a repeater or remote antenna R (see Figure 1.6 on
page 34) is calculated as follows:
Mi Mi R – Mi Mi Mi Mi Mi
R R
C UL = P UL + G Total – L Path – M Shadowing – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body – L Misc – UL
Here:
D
• P DL ic is the downlink transmission power of a donor D on carrier ic.
Mi
• P UL is the uplink transmission power of a pixel/mobile Mi.
32
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment
R
• G Total is the total gain, user-defined or calculated as explained in "Total Gain Calculation" on page 34.
R–M
i
• L Path is the path loss (dB) calculated as follows:
R–M
i R
L Path = L Model + L Ant , with:
Mi
For calculating the useful signal level from the best serving cell, L Ant is determined in the
direction (H,V) = (0,0) from the antenna patterns of the antenna used by Mi. For
Mi
calculating the interfering signal level from any interferer, L Ant is determined in the
direction of the interfering cell from the antenna patterns of the antenna used by Mi,
while the antenna is pointed towards Mi’s best serving cell.
Mi
• L Body is the body loss defined for the service used by the pixel/mobile Mi.
Mi Mi Mi Mi
L ,G , L Ant , and L Body are not used in all the calculations. For more information, see
the technology-specific chapters.
R
• L Misc – DL is the miscellaneous transmission losses defined for the repeater or remote antenna R.
R
• L Misc – UL is the miscellaneous reception losses defined for the repeater or remote antenna R.
33
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment ©Forsk 2015
Figure 1.6: UMTS, CDMA2000, TD-SCDMA, WiMAX, and LTE: Signal Level Calculation
Over-the-Air Repeaters
D D D–R R R R R R
G Total = – L Total – DL + G Ant – L Model + G Donor – Ant – LDonor + G Amp – LCov + G Cov – Ant
R
RX – Feeder TX – Feeder
34
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment
Here:
D
• L Total – DL are the total downlink losses of the donor D.
D
• G Ant is the gain of the antenna used at the donor D.
D–R
• L Model is the path loss between the donor D and the repeater or remote antenna R. This can be user-defined or
calculated using the selected propagation model. If you do not select a propagation model, the propagation losses
between the donor and the repeater or remote antenna are calculated using the ITU 526-5 propagation model.
R
• G Donor – Ant is the gain of the donor-side antenna used at the repeater or remote antenna R.
R
• LDonor are the donor-side reception feeder losses for the repeater or remote antenna R.
RX – Feeder
R
• G Amp is the amplifier gain of the repeater R. For remote antennas, this is 0.
R
• LCov are the coverage-side transmission feeder losses for the repeater or remote antenna R.
TX – Feeder
R
• G Cov – Ant is the gain of the coverage-side antenna used at the repeater or remote antenna R.
Secondary antennas are fully supported in the evaluation of the repeater gains.
D–R R R R
G Total = – L MW + G Amp – LCov + G Cov – Ant
R
TX – Feeder
Here:
D–R
• L MW are the user-defined microwave link losses between the donor D and the repeater or remote antenna R.
R
• G Amp is the amplifier gain of the repeater R. For remote antennas, this is 0.
R
• LCov are the coverage-side transmission feeder losses for the repeater or remote antenna R.
TX – Feeder
R
• G Cov – Ant is the gain of the coverage-side antenna used at the repeater or remote antenna R.
D–R R R R
G Total = – L Fibre + G Amp – LCov + G Cov – Ant
R
TX – Feeder
35
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment ©Forsk 2015
Figure 1.9: Downlink Total Gain: Optical Fibre Link Repeaters or Remote Antennas
Here:
D–R
• L Fibre are the user-defined optical fibre link losses between the donor D and the repeater or remote antenna R.
R
• G Amp is the amplifier gain of the repeater R. For remote antennas, this is 0.
R
• LCov are the coverage-side transmission feeder losses for the repeater or remote antenna R.
TX – Feeder
R
• G Cov – Ant is the gain of the coverage-side antenna used at the repeater or remote antenna R.
Atoll verifies that the downlink power after amplification is consistent with the repeater equipment limitation.
D R R R R
P DL ic + G Total P Max + G Cov – Ant – LCov
TX – Feeder
Here:
D
• P DL ic is the downlink transmission power of a donor D on carrier ic. When the donor has more than one cell, Atoll
considers the highest power.
R
• G Total is the total downlink gain, user-defined or calculated as explained in "Total Gain Calculation" on page 34.
R
• P Max is the maximum downlink power allowed by the equipment.
R
• LCov are the coverage-side transmission feeder losses for the repeater or remote antenna R.
TX – Feeder
R
• G Cov – Ant is the gain of the coverage-side antenna used at the repeater or remote antenna R.
36
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment
The total pathloss, L Total , is calculated by computing a downlink budget. If we take the case of a CDMA project, without
considering any shadowing margin or indoor loss, the power received from the donor transmitter, Txd on a carrier ic, at the
mobile receiver can be stated as (for a link over the air):
D D
D P Pilot ic G Ant
P Rec ic = -------------------------------------------
-
D D – Mi
L Total –DL L Path
Where,
D
P Rec ic is the carrier power received at the receiver from the donor transmitter on a carrier ic (in W)
D
P Pilot ic is the pilot power of the donor transmitter on the carrier ic (in W)
D
G Ant is the donor transmitter antenna gain.
D
L Total – DL is the transmission feeder loss of the donor transmitter.
D – Mi
L Path is the path loss between the donor transmitter and the mobile receiver.
Similarly, the power received at the mobile receiver from the repeater R is:
D R
R P Pilot ic G Total
P Rec ic = --------------------------------------------
-
R – Mi
L Path
Where,
R
P Rec ic is the carrier power received at the mobile receiver from the repeater on a carrier ic (in W)
D
P Pilot ic is the pilot power of the donor transmitter on the carrier ic (in W)
R
G Total is the total gain of repeater linked to a donor transmitter with an air link.
R – Mi
L Path is the path loss between the repeater and the mobile receiver
So, the total carrier power received at the mobile receiver is:
D R
D–R R R D G Ant G Total
P Rec ic = P Rec ic + P Rec ic = P Pilot ic --------------------------------------------- -
- + -------------
– Mi R – Mi
L DTotal – DL L DPath L Path
Since,
D D
P Pilot ic G Ant
L Total = ------------------------------------------------
D D–R
L Total – DL P Rec ic
Therefore,
D D
P Pilot ic G Ant
L Total = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
D R
D D G Ant G Total
L Total – DL P Pilot ic ---------------------------------------------- + --------------
– Mi R – Mi
L DTotal – DL L DPath L Path
Hence,
D
G Ant
L Total = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
D R
D G Ant G Total
L Total – DL --------------------------------------------- - + ------------- -
– Mi R – Mi
L DTotal – DL L DPath L Path
This total path loss depends on the location of the mobile receiver in realistic network scenarios. As a mobile in the donor
transmitter/repeater coverage area is likely to be far from the repeater/donor transmitter coverage area, the respective
pathloss value will be very large. This implies that we can study the two cases separately without influencing the results much.
• Case 1: Receiver in Donor Transmitter Coverage Area
37
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment ©Forsk 2015
R
R – Mi G Total
L Path is likely to be very high, so the term -------------
R – Mi
- can be ignored. This implies that:
L Path
D – Mi
L Total = L Path
Considering this total pathloss value, the total received power in the uplink and in the downlink can be stated as:
D D D D
D P Pilot ic G Ant P Pilot ic G Ant
P Rec – DL ic = -------------------------------------------
- = ---------------------------------------------
-
D D D – Mi
L Total – DL L Total L Total – DL L Path
Mi D Mi D
D P Output ic G Ant P Output ic G Ant
P Rec – UL ic = ----------------------------------------------
- = ----------------------------------------------
-
D D D – Mi
L Total – UL L Total L Total – UL L Path
Where,
Mi
P Output ic is the transmitted power from the mobile terminal on the carrier ic (in W)
D
L Total – UL is the reception feeder loss of the transmitter
D D
G Ant G Ant
L Total = ---------------------------------------------------
- = -----------------------------------------
R R R
D G Total G Total L Total – DL
L Total – DL ------------- - -----------------------------------------
– Mi R – Mi
L RPath L Path
D D D R
D P Pilot ic G Ant P Pilot ic G Total
P Rec – DL ic = -------------------------------------------
- = --------------------------------------------
-
D R – Mi
L Total – DL L Total L Path
Mi D Mi R D
D P Output ic G Ant P Output ic G Total L Total – DL
- ----------------------
- = -------------------------------------------------
P Rec – UL = ----------------------------------------------
D R – Mi D
L Total – UL L Total L Path L Total – UL
Where,
Mi
P Output ic is the transmitted power from the mobile terminal (in W)
D
L Total – UL is the reception feeder loss of the transmitter
In the uplink, the quality level at the transmitter on a traffic channel is:
E b
---- C W
- = --- -----
N t UL I R
Where,
C is the carrier power received from the mobile terminal (in W)
I is the total interference (in W)
W is the spreading bandwidth (Hz)
R is the effective service throughput in the uplink (bits/s)
(W/R is the service processing gain in the uplink)
C and I are both evaluated at the same reference point, which is the entry of BTS using the following formulas.
Mi D
P Output G Ant
C = P Total – UL = ---------------------------------------
D
L Total – UL L Total
I = I Total + N 0
38
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment
Where,
I Total is the sum of the signals received from mobile terminals inside the same cell and those outside (in W)
And,
D
N 0 = NF K T W
Where,
D
NF is the noise figure of the transmitter equipment at the reference point, i.e. the entry of the BTS
K is Boltzman constant
T is the ambient temperature (in K)
Hence
BTS
N 0 = NF KTW
If a pixel/mobile Mi receives signals from the donor D and its repeater R, the total signal
D R
strength is the sum of the two signals: C DL tt + C DL tt
Here:
R
• EIRP DL tt is the effective isotropic radiated power of the repeater or remote antenna R on the TRX type tt. It can be
user-defined or calculated as explained in "EIRP Calculation" on page 40.
• the downlink transmission power of a donor D on carrier ic.
• P tt is the power offset defined for the TRX type tt.
R – Mi
• L Path is the path loss (dB) calculated as follows:
R – Mi
R
L Path = L Model + L Ant , with:
39
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment ©Forsk 2015
s
Figure 1.10: GSM: Signal Level Calculation
Over-the-Air Repeaters
R D D D D–R R R R R R
EIRP DL tt = P DL – L Total – DL + G Ant – L Model + G Donor – Ant – LDonor + G Amp – LCov + G Cov – Ant
RX – Feeder TX – Feeder
Here:
D
• P DL is the downlink transmission power of the donor D.
D
• L Total – DL are the total downlink losses of the donor D.
40
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment
D
• G Ant is the gain of the antenna used at the donor D.
D–R
• L Model is the path loss between the donor D and the repeater or remote antenna R. This can be user-defined or
calculated using the selected propagation model. If you do not select a propagation model, the propagation losses
between the donor and the repeater or remote antenna are calculated using the ITU 526-5 propagation model.
R
• G Donor – Ant is the gain of the donor-side antenna used at the repeater or remote antenna R.
R
• LDonor are the donor-side reception feeder losses for the repeater or remote antenna R.
RX – Feeder
R
• G Amp is the amplifier gain of the repeater R. For remote antennas, this is 0.
R
• LCov are the coverage-side transmission feeder losses for the repeater or remote antenna R.
TX – Feeder
R
• G Cov – Ant is the gain of the coverage-side antenna used at the repeater or remote antenna R.
Secondary antennas are fully supported in the evaluation of the repeater gains.
D D–R R R R
EIRP DL tt = P DL – L MW + G Amp – LCov + G Cov – Ant
R
TX – Feeder
Here:
D
• P DL is the downlink transmission power of the donor D.
D–R
• L MW are the user-defined microwave link losses between the donor D and the repeater or remote antenna R.
R
• G Amp is the amplifier gain of the repeater R. For remote antennas, this is 0.
R
• LCov are the coverage-side transmission feeder losses for the repeater or remote antenna R.
TX – Feeder
R
• G Cov – Ant is the gain of the coverage-side antenna used at the repeater or remote antenna R.
D D–R R R R
EIRP DL tt = P DL – L Fibre + G Amp – LCov + G Cov – Ant
R
TX – Feeder
41
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment ©Forsk 2015
Figure 1.13: Downlink Total Gain: Optical Fibre Link Repeaters or Remote Antennas
Here:
D
• P DL is the downlink transmission power of the donor D.
D–R
• L Fibre are the user-defined optical fibre link losses between the donor D and the repeater or remote antenna R.
R
• G Amp is the amplifier gain of the repeater R. For remote antennas, this is 0.
R
• LCov are the coverage-side transmission feeder losses for the repeater or remote antenna R.
TX – Feeder
R
• G Cov – Ant is the gain of the coverage-side antenna used at the repeater or remote antenna R.
Atoll verifies that the EIRP after amplification is consistent with the repeater equipment limitation.
R R R R
EIRP DL tt P Max + G Cov – Ant – LCov
TX – Feeder
Here:
R
• EIRP DL tt is the effective isotropic radiated power of the repeater R on the TRX type tt.
R
• P Max is the maximum downlink power allowed by the equipment.
R
• LCov are the coverage-side transmission feeder losses for the repeater or remote antenna R.
TX – Feeder
R
• G Cov – Ant is the gain of the coverage-side antenna used at the repeater or remote antenna R.
42
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment
Since this parameter depends on the difference of heights/altitudes between the donor transmitter and the repeater, it can
be automatically calculated in the repeater’s Donor side properties. If the height/altitude of the antenna is modified, the
corresponding tilt angle can be found out and applied using the Calculate button.
Example
The tilt angle repeater’s donor-side antenna in the above figure would be:
R D
R H Donor – Ant – H Ant
T Donor – Ant = atan -------------------------------------------
D–R
-
D
As obvious, this angle will be negative for uptilts and positive for downtilts of the antenna.
Here:
R
• H Donor – Ant is the height of the donor-side antenna of the repeater or remote antenna R.
D
• H Ant is the height of the antenna of the donor D.
D–R
• D is the distance between the antenna of the donor D and the antenna of the repeater or remote antenna R.
43
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment ©Forsk 2015
1.6.1.1 Definitions
Name Value Unit Description
2 2 2 T
j ------ d sin j ------ 2d sin j ------ E SA – 1 d sin
Steering vector for the direction of
S 1 e e ... e None
2
– j ------ nd sin
e
wn None Complex smart antenna weight
with d =
– j n sin
e ---
2
44
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment
K
Average downlink array correlation
--1-
R Avg
K Rk None matrix over a simulation (K
iterations)
k=1
pj Sj Sj
2 H
RN Rn + RI = n I+ None Total noise correlation matrix
j=1
2
Rn n I None Thermal noise correlation matrix
pj Sj Sj
H
RI None Interference correlation matrix
j=1
H
PN w RN w W Total uplink noise power
P p E SA
SA
Q UL ------ = -------------------------- None
Signal quality in the uplink
PN H
w RN w (TD-SCDMA)
--1-
RN
Avg K RN k W Average noise correlation matrix
k=1
H 2
I UL w RN w – n W Uplink interference
Avg
2
I UL + n Angular distribution of uplink noise
NR UL --------------------------- None
n
2 rise
E SA
-----------------------------
- None MMSE optimization constant
H –1
S RN S
45
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment ©Forsk 2015
pj Sj Sj
2 H
RN Rn + RI = n I+ None Total noise correlation matrix
j=1
2
Rn n I None Thermal noise correlation matrix
pj Sj Sj
H
RI None Interference correlation matrix
j=1
E SA 2
I UL - – n
------------------------------------ W Uplink interference
H –1
S RN S
Avg
2
I UL + n Angular distribution of uplink noise
NR UL --------------------------- None
n
2 rise
Beamforming dynamically creates a beam towards the served user. The smart antenna processor applies complex weights,
w n , to each antenna element in order to form a beam towards the served user. The magnitude of these complex weights is
46
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment
set to 1. The beamforming is performed using only the phase of the complex weights. The steering vector, S , representing
the complex weights for forming a beam towards the served user, i.e., at the angle of arrival is given by:
2 2 2 T
j ------ d sin j ------ 2d sin j ------ E – 1 d sin
SA
S = 1 e e ... e
Therefore, the complex weight at any nth antenna element can be given by:
2
– j ------ nd sin
wn = e
In Atoll, d =
– j n sin
--- , therefore, w n = e .
2
Where H represents the Hilbert transform, which is the complex conjugate transpose of a matrix, g n is the gain of the nth
antenna element in the direction , and R is the array correlation matrix for a given user direction , given by:
H
R = S S
For the direction of the served user, i.e., , the smart antenna gain is calculated as follows:
H H H 2
G SA = g n S R S = g n S S S S = g n E SA
The smart antenna gain includes the gain of the beamforming as well as the gain of power combination.
The smart antenna gain in dB will be G SA = 10 Log G SA .
The smart antenna is able to form the beam only in the horizontal plane, therefore, the vertical pattern is assumed to remain
the same.
Cell transmission power is fed to each antenna element of the smart antenna system. Since each element transmits the same
input power, this results in a gain due to power combination, i.e., the powers fed to each antenna element are combined for
transmission.
During Monte Carlo simulations, Atoll calculates the smart antenna gains (array correlation matrix R ) for each served mobile
in a cell’s coverage area in each iteration. The sum of these array correlation matrices for all the users served in one iteration
k is calculated as follows:
J
Rk = pj Rj
j=1
Where R k for any cell is the downlink array correlation matrix for iteration k, J is the number of served mobiles during the
iteration, p j is the EIRP transmitted towards the mobile j, and R j is the array correlation matrix for the mobile j.
Atoll calculates a moving average of the array correlation matrices calculated in each iteration. At the end of a simulation with
K iterations, the average downlink array correlation matrix for any cell is given by:
K
1
R Avg = ---
K Rk
k=1
47
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment ©Forsk 2015
Let w represent the vector of ESA complex weights for the beamformer. w is given by:
S
w = -----------
-
E SA
The total noise received in the uplink, i.e., interference and thermal noise, is stored in a total noise correlation matrix, R N .
The total noise correlation matrix is the sum of the thermal noise correlation matrix R n , and the interference correlation
matrix R I , given by:
pj Sj Sj
2 H
RN = Rn + RI = n I+
j=1
pj Sj Sj
2 H
Where R n = n I and R I =
j=1
2
n is the thermal noise power. I is the identity matrix. p j is the power received by one element of the smart antenna from
the jth interfering mobile. S j is the steering vector in the direction of the jth interfering mobile, . J is the total number of
interfering mobiles.
The total noise power, including thermal noise and interference from all uplink interferers, received by a cell is given by:
H
PN = w RN w
And, the total power received from the served user is given by:
H H
P = p w S S w = p E SA
Where p is the power received by one element of the smart antenna from the served user.
48
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment
From the above equation, we can determine the uplink smart antenna beamforming gain in the direction of the served user,
which equals the number of smart antenna elements, i.e., G SA = E SA .
The noise correlation matrix R N for each iteration k includes the effect of the matrix calculated for the previous iteration. The
result is the angular distribution of the uplink load (TD-SCDMA) or the uplink noise rise (WiMAX), which is calculated from the
noise correlation matrix obtained at the end of the last iteration of a Monte Carlo simulation. This angular distribution of the
uplink load (TD-SCDMA) or the uplink noise rise (WiMAX) can be stored in the Cells table. The average of the noise correlation
matrices is calculated as follows:
K
1
RN
Avg
= ---
K RN k
k=1
Where R N is the average of the noise correlation matrices of all the iterations from k = 1 to K, and R N is the noise
Avg k
Where I UL is the interfering signal in the direction , ESA is the number of smart antenna elements, S is the steering
2
vector in the direction , and n is the thermal noise power.
In TD-SCDMA, the uplink load is calculated from the average noise correlation matrix. In WiMAX, the angular distribution of
the uplink noise rise is given by:
2
I UL + n
NRUL = ---------------------------
2
n
Let ŵ represent the vector of ESA complex weights for the beamformer. ŵ is given by:
49
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment ©Forsk 2015
–1
ŵ = R N S
Where S is the steering vector in the direction of the served user, . , which is a constant value for a given useful signal
that optimizes the beamformer weights. It is given by the equation:
E SA
= -----------------------------
-
H –1
S RN S
–1
R N is the inverse of the total noise correlation matrix. The total noise correlation matrix is the sum of the thermal noise
correlation matrix R n , and the interference correlation matrix R I , given by:
pj Sj Sj
2 H
RN = Rn + RI = n I+
j=1
pj Sj Sj
2 H
Where R n = n I and R I =
j=1
2
n is the thermal noise power. I is the identity matrix. p j is the power received by one element of the smart antenna from
the jth interfering mobile. S j is the steering vector in the direction of the jth interfering mobile, . J is the total number of
interfering mobiles.
The total noise power, including thermal noise and interference from all uplink interferers, received by a cell is given by:
2 H –1
P̂ N = S R N S
And, the total power received from the served user is given by:
2 H –1 2
P̂ = p S R N S
Where p is the power received by one element of the smart antenna from the served user.
P̂ H –1
Q UL = ------ = p S R N S
SA
P̂ N
P̂ H –1
CINR UL = ------ = p S R N S
P̂ N
From the above equation, we can determine the uplink smart antenna beamforming gain in the direction of the served user.
RSCP TCH – UL (TD-SCDMA) or C UL (WiMAX) can be calculated from the above equation by considering the interference and
–1
noise to be null, i.e., R N = I . This gives:
H
In TD-SCDMA, RSCP TCH – UL = p S I S = p E SA
H
In WiMAX, C UL = p S I S = p E SA
From the above equation, the uplink smart antenna beamforming gain equals the number of smart antenna elements, i.e.,
G SA = E SA .
–1
The inverse noise correlation matrix R N for each iteration k includes the effect of the matrix calculated for the previous
iteration. Hence, Atoll is able to calculate an average of the smart antenna interference-cancellation effect. The result is the
angular distribution of the uplink load (TD-SCDMA) or the uplink noise rise (WiMAX), which is calculated from the inverse of
the noise correlation matrix obtained at the end of the last iteration of a Monte Carlo simulation. This angular distribution of
the uplink load (TD-SCDMA) or the uplink noise rise (WiMAX) can be stored in the Cells table. The average of the inverse noise
correlation matrices is calculated as follows:
50
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment
K
1
RN
–1 –1
RN = ---
Avg K k
k=1
–1 –1
Where R N is the average of the inverse noise correlation matrices of all the iterations from k = 1 to K, and R N is the
Avg k
Where I UL is the interfering signal in the direction , ESA is the number of smart antenna elements, S is the steering
2
vector in the direction , and n is the thermal noise power.
In TD-SCDMA, the uplink load is calculated from the average inverse noise correlation matrix. In WiMAX, the angular
distribution of the uplink noise rise is given by:
2
I UL + n
NRUL = ---------------------------
2
n
H V
Where G Beam , L Beam , and L Beam are the gains, horizontal, and vertical attenuations of the beams of the GOB. In words, the
best beam is the one among all the beams of a GOB that has the highest difference between gain, and horizontal and vertical
SA SA SA SA
attenuations. The gains and losses of the GOB ( G DL , G UL , L DL , and L UL ) are determined from the selected best beam.
The following example shows how Atoll calculates the GOB gains and losses.
Example:
Let us assume a GOB with 5 beams that have the same vertical patterns, and whose horizontal patterns are pointed towards
different directions as shown in the figure below:
51
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment ©Forsk 2015
Let us assume that all the beams and the main antenna have the same 18 dBi gain, and the vertical attenuation at the user
location is 15 dB, which is also the same for all the beams because we assume that the vertical patterns are the same.
If the user is located at = 70 azimuth, as shown in the figure below, Atoll determines the best beam, which has the
highest gain towards , as follows:
Transmitter
In our example, the total gain of the beam at 60° is the highest. Therefore this beam is selected as the best beam.
If this beam has been selected in the downlink,
SA SA H V
G DL = 18 dB and L DL = L Beam + L Beam = 17.21 dB
52
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment
The following example shows how Atoll calculates the adaptive beam gains and losses.
Example:
Let us assume an adaptive beam smart antenna selected for a transmitter along with a main antenna. Let us assume that the
adaptive beam and the main antenna have the same 18 dBi gain, and the vertical attenuation at the user location is 15 dB.
If the user is located at = 60 azimuth, as shown in the figure below:
Transmitter
If the adaptive beam smart antenna is selected in the downlink, the gain and losses of the adaptive beam at are:
SA SA H V
G DL = 18 dB and L DL = L Beam + L Beam = 15 dB
If the adaptive beam smart antenna is selected in the uplink, the gain and losses of the adaptive beam at are:
SA SA H V
G UL = 18 dB and L UL = L Beam + L Beam = 15 dB
H
In fact, as the ideal beam steering algorithm steers the beam towards the served user, L Beam = 0 . These values are used in
interference calculation to determine the downlink interfering signal due to transmission towards the served user, as well as
for calculating the uplink interfering signals received at transmitter when decoding signal received from the served user.
You can assign a spreading angle to each clutter class in your document. Atoll reads the clutter class in which the served user
is located to determine the spreading angle. Different clutter types have different spreading effects on the propagation of
radio waves. Urban and dense urban clutter types introduce more multipath and spread the signal at a wider angle than an
open or rural clutte type.
Once you have assigned the spreading angles to clutter classes, you can enter the C/I gains and their cumulative probabilities
for each spreading angle, in the smart antenna equipment based on the statistical model. For each smart antenna equipment
SA
based on statistical modelling, you can set a probability threshold, TProb .
To find the smart antenna gain, Atoll determines the clutter class of the served user, it reads the spreading angle from the
clutter class properties, it reads the probability threshold from the smart antenna properties, and reads the smart antenna C/
SA
I gain defined for the Probability = 1 – TProb corresponding to the spreading angle.
53
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment ©Forsk 2015
The following example shows how Atoll calculates the statistical C/I gains and losses.
Example:
Let us assume that the served user is located at a an urban clutter class with Spread = 10 . The smart antenna equipment
SA SA
has TProb = 80 % . Atoll will read the smart antenna C/I gain G for Prob = 20 % . If a gain for the exact probability
value of 20% is not defined, Atoll linearly interpolates the gain value from the two surrounding values.
SA SA SA
If G Prob = 19%
= 4.6298 dB and G Prob = 20.4%
= 4.7196 dB , then G Prob = 20%
= 4.6941 dB
The smart antenna gains are the same for uplink and downlink. Their are no losses for this type of smart antenna equipment.
Negative values of C/I gains are considered as losses.
54
Chapter 2
Radio Propagation
56
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
2 Radio Propagation
Path loss calculations are carried out between a transmitter and a receiver using propagation models and other calculations
related to radio wave propagation such as diffraction and shadow fading. Propagation models are mathematical
representations of the average loss in signal strength over distance. Diffraction loss and shadow fading margins are added to
this average loss in order to get more precise path loss values.
Path loss matrices are calculated for each transmitter and their results used in other calculations (coverage predictions, Monte
Carlo simulations, point analysis, etc.). The method of calculation may differ depending on the analysis being performed:
Receiver Profile
Analysis type Calculation Result
position extraction
Centre of each bin
Based on path loss One value for the bin’s
Coverage predictions inside the calculation
matrices Radiala surface area
area
Different values inside
Point analysis (Profile) Anywhere Real-time Systematic
a calculation bin
Anywhere inside the Based on path loss One value for the bin’s
Point analysis (other)
calculation areas matrices Radiala surface area
Monte Carlo Based on path loss One value at the
simulations
Mobile coordinates
matrices Radiala mobile location
One value at the
Subscriber lists Subscriber coordinates Real-time Radiala subscriber location
a. With the Standard Propagation Model, you can choose between radial or systematic.
This chapter describes the various propagation models available in Atoll, and other radio wave propagation phenomena such
as diffraction and shadow fading.
Four points (hence, four altitude values) are necessary to describe a “bin”; these points are bin vertices. Therefore, a DTM file
that contains N x N bins requires N2 points (altitude values).
57
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
• In Atoll, DEM (Digital Elevation Model) is the same as Digital Terrain Model (DTM). In
literature, DEM and DTM do not always have the same meaning. By definition, DEM
refers to the altitude above sea level including ground and clutter, while DTM refers
to the ground altitude above sea level alone.
Let us suppose a site S located inside a bin. Atoll knows the altitudes of four bin vertices, S’1, S’’1, S’2 and S’’2, from the DTM
file (centre of each DTM pixel).
1. Atoll draws a vertical line through S. This line respectively intersects (S’1,S’’1) and (S’2, S’’2) lines at S1 and S2.
58
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
Atoll supports a maximum of 255 clutter classes (8 bits/pixel). A clutter classes file file that contains N x N bins requires N2
code values.
If you do not have any clutter height file, Atoll takes clutter height information in clutter classes file. In this case, clutter height
is an average height related to a clutter class.
59
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
Atoll draws radials from the site (where transmitter is located) to each calculation bin located along the transmitter
calculation area border. In other words, Atoll determines a geographic profile between site and each bin centre.
Transmitter location
Radials (Atoll extracts a geographic profile for each radial)
Centres of bins located on the calculation border
Receiver location
Depending on the calculation being carried out, the receiver may be located at the centre of a calculation bin (coverage
predictions) or anywhere within a calculation bin. Atoll uses the profile nearest to the receiver for calculations (the receiver
is assumed to be located on the profile).
60
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
Atoll extracts a precise geographic profile between the site and the receiver.
Transmitter location
Geographic profile
Receiver location
61
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
DTM maps with 40 m and 25 m resolutions and a clutter map with a 20 m resolution are available. The profile
resolution will be 25 m. It means that Atoll will extract geographic information, only the ground altitude, every 25 m.
The profile resolution does not depend on the geographic layer order in the Geo tab of the Explorer window.
However, the geographic layer order has influence on the usage of the data. For example, when DTM 1 is on the top
of DTM 2, Atoll will use DTM 1 for extracting the profile where DTM a is available and it will use DTM 2 elsewhere.
To get ground altitude every 25 m, Atoll uses the bilinear interpolation method described in "Ground Altitude
Determination" on page 57.
> Clutter
> Clutter (20m)
62
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
Okumura-Hata Cost-Hata
Parameters
f 1500 MHz f > 1500 MHz
A1 69.55 49.30
A2 26.16 33.90
A3 -13.82 -13.82
B1 44.90 44.90
B2 -6.55 -6.55
B3 0 0
63
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
When receiver antenna height equals 1.5m, a(hRx) is close to 0 dB regardless of frequency.
1st step: For each calculation bin, Atoll determines the clutter bin on which the receiver is located. This clutter bin corresponds
to a clutter class. Then, it uses the Hata formula assigned to this clutter class to evaluate L model1 .
2nd step: This step depends on whether the ‘Add diffraction loss’ option is checked.
• If the ‘Add diffraction loss’ option is unchecked, Atoll stops calculations.
L model = L model1
where:
E is the field strength for 1 kW ERP
f is the frequency (MHz).
h Tx is the transmitter antenna height above ground (m) (Hb notation is also used in Atoll)
As described above, the Hata formula is valid for urban environment. For other environments and mobile antenna heights,
corrective formulas must be applied.
64
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
f 2
L model1 = Lu – a h Rx – 2 log ------ – 5.4 for suburban area
28
2
L model1 = Lu – a h Rx – 4.78 log f + 18.33 log f – 40.94 for rural area
In the formulas above, a h Rx is the environment correction and is defined according to the area size.
Distance Correction
1st step: For each calculation bin, Atoll determines the clutter bin on which the receiver is located. This clutter bin corresponds
to a clutter class. Then, it uses the ITU 529-3 formula assigned to this clutter class to evaluate L model1 .
2nd step: This step depends on whether the ‘Add diffraction loss’ option is checked.
• If the ‘Add diffraction loss’ option is unchecked, Atoll stops calculations.
L model = L model1
with,
K1: constant offset (dB).
K2: multiplying factor for log(d).
d: distance between the receiver and the transmitter (m).
K3: multiplying factor for log(HTxeff).
HTxeff: effective height of the transmitter antenna (m).
K4: multiplying factor for diffraction calculation. K4 has to be a positive number.
65
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
The transmitter antenna height is determined relative to an average ground height calculated along the profile between a
transmitter and a receiver. The profile length depends on distance min and distance max values and is limited by the
transmitter and receiver locations. Distance min and Distance max are minimum and maximum distances from the transmitter
respectively.
H Txeff = H Tx + H 0Tx – H 0
where,
H 0Tx is the ground height (ground elevation) above sea level at transmitter (m).
H 0 is the average ground height above sea level along the profile (m).
If the profile is not located between the transmitter and the receiver, HTxeff equals HTx
only.
The transmitter antenna height is calculated using the ground slope at receiver.
H Txeff = H Tx + H 0Tx – H 0Rx + K d
where,
66
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
H 0Rx is the ground height (ground elevation) above sea level at receiver (m).
K is the ground slope calculated over a user-defined distance (Distance min). In this case, Distance min is a distance from
receiver.
Spot Ht
Absolute Spot Ht
Distance min and distance max are set to 3000 and 15000 m according to ITU
recommendations (low frequency broadcast f < 500 Mhz) and to 0 and 15000 m
according Okumura recommendations (high frequency mobile telephony).
These values are only used in the two last methods and have different meanings according to the method.
Atoll offers a new method called “Enhanced slope at receiver” to evaluate the effective transmitter antenna height.
Let x-axis and y-axis respectively represent positions and heights. We assume that x-axis is oriented from the transmitter
(origin) towards the receiver.
This calculation is achieved in several steps:
1. Atoll determines line of sight between transmitter and receiver.
The LOS line equation is:
H 0Tx + H Tx – H 0Rx + H Rx
Los i = H 0Tx + H Tx – -----------------------------------------------------------------------
- Res i
d
where,
67
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
3. Hills and mountains are already taken into account in diffraction calculations. Therefore, in order for them not to
unfavourably influence the regression line calculation, Atoll filters the terrain profile.
Atoll calculates two filtered terrain profiles; one established from the transmitter and another from the receiver. It
determines filtered height of every profile point. Profile points are evenly spaced on the basis of profile resolution. To
determine filtered terrain height at a point, Atoll evaluates ground slope between two points and compares it with a
threshold set to 0.05; where three cases are possible.
Some notations defined hereafter are used in next part.
H orig is the original height. Original terrain height is determined from extracted ground profile.
H orig i – H orig i – 1
i. If H orig i H orig i – 1 and ---------------------------------------------------
- 0.05 ,
Res
H orig i – H orig i – 1
- 0.05
ii. If H orig i H orig i – 1 and ---------------------------------------------------
Res
H orig i – H orig i + 1
i. - 0.05 ,
If H orig i H orig i + 1 and ---------------------------------------------------
Res
H orig i – H orig i + 1
ii. If H orig i H orig i + 1 and ---------------------------------------------------- 0.05
Res
Then, for every point of profile, Atoll compares the two filtered heights and chooses the higher one.
4. Atoll determines the influence area, R. It corresponds to the distance from receiver at which the original terrain profile
plus 30 metres intersects the LOS line for the first time (when beginning from transmitter).
The influence area must satisfy additional conditions:
• R 3000m
68
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
• R 0.01 d
• R must contain at least three bins.
• When several influence areas are possible, Atoll chooses the highest one.
• If d < 3000m, R = d.
5. Atoll performs a linear regression on the filtered profile within R in order to determine a regression line.
The regression line equation is:
y = ax + b
d i – dm Hfilt i – Hm
a = ---------------------------------------------------------------------
i and b = H m – ad m
2
d i – dm
i
where,
1
H m = ---
n Hfilt i
i
i is the point index. Only points within R are taken into account.
dm = d – R
---
2
regr i = a i Res + b
H 0Tx + H Tx – b
H Txeff = ---------------------------------
-
2
1+a
If HTxeff is less than 20m, Atoll recalculates it with a new influence area, which begins at transmitter.
7. If H Txeff is still less than 20m (even negative), Atoll evaluates path loss using H Txeff = 20m and applies a correction
factor.
Therefore, if H Txeff 20m ,
d - – 0.3 H 20 1 – H Txeff – 20
where, K lowant = -------
5 Txeff – 20 – --------------------------------------------------------------------------
10 9.63 + ----------- d - 6.93 + ----------- d -
1000 1000
where,
H Rx is the receiver antenna height above the ground (m).
H 0Rx is the ground height (ground elevation) above sea level at the receiver (m).
69
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
H 0Tx is the ground height (ground elevation) above sea level at the transmitter (m).
The calculation of effective antenna heights ( H Rxeff and H Txeff ) is based on extracted
DTM profiles. They are not properly performed if you have not imported heights (DTM
file) beforehand.
When the transmitter and the receiver are not in line of sight, the path loss formula is:
L model = K 1 NLOS + K 2 NLOS log d + K 3 log H Txeff + K 4 Diffraction + K 5 log H Txeff log d + K 6 H Rx + K clutter f clutter
K hill LOS is determined in three steps. Influence area, R, and regression line are supposed available.
1st step: For every profile point within influence area, Atoll calculates height deviation between the original terrain profile and
regression line. Then, it sorts points according to the deviation and draws two lines (parallel to the regression line), one which
is exceeded by 10% of the profile points and the other one by 90%.
2nd step: Atoll evaluates the terrain roughness, h; it is the distance between the two lines.
If 0 h 20m , K h = 0
2
Else K h = 7.73 log h – 15.29 log h + 6.746
2 H 0Rx + H Rx – regr i Rx
Else K hf = – 2 – 1.616 log h + 14.75 log h – 11.21 -----------------------------------------------------
-
h
iRx is the point index at receiver.
2.5.2.5 Diffraction
Four methods are available to calculate diffraction loss over the transmitter-receiver profile.
Along the transmitter-receiver profile, you may consider:
• Either ground altitude and clutter height (Consider heights in diffraction option),
In this case, Atoll uses clutter height information from clutter heights file if available in the .atl document. Otherwise,
it considers average clutter height specified for each clutter class in the clutter classes file description.
• Or only ground altitude.
where,
L: loss due to clutter defined in the Clutter tab by the user (in dB).
w: weight determined through the weighting function.
n: number of points taken into account over the profile. Points are evenly spaced depending on the profile resolution.
Four weighting functions are available:
70
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
dj
j=1
• d i = D – d' i , where d’i is the distance between the receiver and the ith point and D is the maximum distance defined.
d
log ----i + 1
D
• Logarithmic weighting function: w i = ------------------------------------
n
d
log ----j + 1
D
j=1
di
----
D
• e –1
Exponential weighting function: w i = ------------------------
n dj
----
e
D
–1
j=1
The chart below shows the weight variation with the distance for each weighting function.
2.5.2.7 Recommendations
Beware that the clutter influence may be taken into account in two terms, Diffraction loss and f(clutter) at the same time. To
avoid this, we advise:
1. Not to consider clutter heights to evaluate diffraction loss over the transmitter-receiver profile if you specify losses
per clutter class.
This approach is recommended if the clutter height information is statistical (clutter roughly defined, no altitude).
Or
2. Not to define any loss per clutter class if you take clutter heights into account in the diffraction loss.
In this case, f(clutter)=0. Losses due to clutter are only taken into account in the computed Diffraction loss term.
This approach is recommended if the clutter height information is either semi-deterministic (clutter roughly defined,
altitude defined with an average height per clutter class) or deterministic (clutter sharply defined, altitude defined
with an average height per clutter class or - even better - via a clutter height file).
In case of semi-deterministic clutter information, specify receiver clearance (m) per clutter class. Both ground altitude and
clutter height are considered along the whole transmitter-receiver profile except over a specific distance around the receiver
(clearance), where Atoll proceeds as if there was only the DTM map. The clearance information is used to model streets.
71
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
In the above figure, the ground altitude and clutter height (in this case, average height specified for each clutter class in the
clutter classes map description) are taken into account along the profile.
Clearance definition is not necessary in case of deterministic clutter height information. Clutter height information is accurate
enough to be used directly without additional information such as clearance. Two cases can be considered:
1. If the receiver is in the street (clutter height lower than receiver height), Atoll calculates the path loss by considering
potentially some diffraction loss at reception.
2. If the receiver is supposed to be inside a building (clutter height higher than receiver height), Atoll does not consider
any difraction (and clearance) from the building but takes into account the indoor loss as an additional penetration
loss.
• To consider indoor losses in building only when using a deterministic clutter map
(clutter height map), the 'Indoor Coverage' box must not be checked in predictions
unless this loss will be counted twice inside buildings (on the entire reception clutter
class and not only inside the building).
• Even with no clearance, the clutter height (extracted either from clutter class or
clutter height folders) is never considered at the last profile point.
72
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
A is the values of parameter associated variables (log(d), log(heff), etc.) at each measurement point, and
b is the vector of measurement values.
The vector x0 is the set of parameters found at the end of the calibration.
The theoretical mathematical solution of this problem was found by Gauss (around 1830). Further enhancements to the
original method were proposed in the 60's in order to solve the numerical instability problem.
In 1974, Lawson & Hanson [2] proposed a theoretical solution of the least-square problem with general linear inequality
constraints on the vector x0. Atoll implementation is based on this method, which is explained in detail in [1].
References:
[1] Björck A. “Numerical Methods for Least Square Problems”, SIAM, 1996.
[2] Lawson C.L., Hanson R.J. “Solving Least Squares Problems”, SIAM, 1974.
It is recommended to set K6 to 0, and use K7 instead of K6. K6 is a multiplicative coefficient to a value in dB, which means that
slight variations in K6 have considerable impact on the path loss.
K1 depends on the frequency and the technology. Here are some sample values:
The above K1 values for WiMAX are extrapolated estimates for different frequency ranges. It is highly recommended to
calibrate the SPM using measurement data collected on the field for WiMAX networks before using the SPM for predictions.
All K paramaters can be defined by the automatic calibration wizard. Since Kclutter is a constant, its value is strongly dependant
on the values given to the losses per clutter classes. From experience, typical losses (in dB) per clutter class are:
73
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
Suburban From -5 to -3
Industrial From -5 to -3
Open in urban From -6 to -4
Open From -12 to -10
Water From -14 to -12
These values have to be entered only when considering statistical clutter class maps only.
The Standard Propagation Model is derived from the Hata formulae, valid for urban
environments. The above values are normalized for urban clutter types (0 dB for urban
clutter class). Positive values correspond to more dense clutter classes and negative
values to less dense clutter classes.
74
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
• It is not possible to calibrate the unmasked version of the SPM using measurement
data.
• Using the SPM, you can also calculate the angles of incidence by creating a new
instance of the SPM with the following characteristics:
Type: Atoll.StdPropagModelIncidence.1
Signature: {659F0B9E-2810-4e59-9F0D-DA9E78E1E64B}
• The "masked" version of the algorithm has not been changed. It still takes into
account Atoll.ini options. However, the "unmasked" version does not take Atoll.ini
options into account.
• It’s highly recommended to use one method (Atoll.ini options) or the other one (new
identifier & signature) but not to combine both.
Where L FS is the free space loss calculated using the formula entered in the model properties, L Diff is the diffraction loss
calculated using the 3-obstacle Deygout method, and F Diff is the diffraction multiplying factor defined in the model
properties.
For free space loss calculation, see "Free Space Loss" on page 86.
Diffraction
Atoll calculates diffraction loss along the transmitter-receiver profile built from DTM and clutter maps. Therefore, losses due
to clutter are taken into account in diffraction losses. Atoll takes clutter height information from the clutter heights file if
available in the .atl document. Otherwise, it considers average clutter height specified for each clutter class in the clutter
classes file description.
The Deygout construction (considering 3 obstacles) is used. This method is described under "Diffraction" on page 86. The final
diffraction losses are determined by multiplying the diffraction losses calculated using the Deygout method by the Diffraction
multiplying factor defined in the model properties.
• Receiver Clearance
Define receiver clearance (m) per clutter class when clutter height information is either statistical or semi-
deterministic. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific
distance around the receiver (clearance), where Atoll proceeds as if there was only the DTM map (see SPM part). Atoll
uses the clearance information to model streets.
If the clutter is deterministic, do not define any receiver clearance (m) per clutter class. In this case, clutter height
information is accurate enough to be used directly without additional information such as clearance (Atoll can locate
streets).
• Receiver Height
Entering receiver height per clutter class enables Atoll to consider the fact that receivers are fixed and located on the
roofs.
• Visibility
If the option ‘Line of sight only’ is not selected, Atoll computes Lmodel on each calculation bin using the formula defined
above. When selecting the option ‘Line of sight only’, Atoll checks for each calculation bin if the Diffraction loss (as
defined in the Diffraction loss: Deygout part) calculated along profile equals 0.
• In this case, receiver is considered in ‘line of sight’ and Atoll computes Lmodel on each calculation bin using the
formula defined above.
• Otherwise, Atoll considers that Lmodel tends to infinity.
75
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
Where L FS is the free space loss calculated using the formula entered in the model properties and L Diff is the diffraction loss
calculated using the 3-obstacle Deygout method.
For free space loss calculation, see "Free Space Loss" on page 86.
Diffraction
Atoll calculates diffraction loss along the transmitter-receiver profile is built from the DTM map. The Deygout construction
(considering 3 obstacles), with or without correction, is used. These methods are described under "Diffraction" on page 86.
For free space loss calculation, see "Free Space Loss" on page 86.
where,
Cn is the field strength received in dBV/m,
In the following part, let us assume that Cn=En(d,HTxeff) (where En(d,HTxeff) is the field received in dBV/m) is read from
charts for a distance, d (in km), and an effective transmitter antenna height, HTxeff (in m).
First of all, Atoll evaluates the effective transmitter antenna height, H Txeff , as follows:
76
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
where,
H 0Tx is the ground height (ground elevation) above sea level at the transmitter (m).
H 0 3 ;d is the average ground height (m) above sea level for the profile between a point 3 km from transmitter and
the receiver (located at d km from transmitter).
H 0 3 ;15 is the average ground height (m) above sea level for the profile between a point 3 km and another 15 km
from transmitter.
Then, depending on d and HTxeff, Atoll determines Cn using bilinear interpolation as follows.
Therefore,
If HTxeff < 37.5
• AHRxeff Calculation
H Rx
= --- 20 log -------
c -
AH
Rxeff 6 10
where,
HRx is the user-defined receiver height,
c values are provided in the recommendation 370-7; for example, c=4 in a rural case.
• Acl Calculation
2
If f 300 MHz, A cl = 8.1 – 6.9 + 20 log – 0.1 + 1 + – 0.1
2
Otherwise, A cl = 14.9 – 6.9 + 20 log – 0.1 + 1 + – 0.1
f
With = – 4000 ---------
300
where,
is the clearance angle (in radians) determined according to the recommendation 370-7 (figure 19),
77
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
PL = A + 10 a H BS Log 10 -----
d
d 0
4d 0
Where A = 20 Log 10 ------------ . This is a fixed quantity which depends upon the frequency of operation. d is the distance
between the base station antenna and the receiver terminal and d0 is a fixed reference distance (100 m). a(HBS) is the
correction factor for base station antenna heights, HBS:
c-
a H BS = a – b H BS + -------
H BS
Where 10 m HBS 80 m , and a, b, and c are correction coefficients which depend on the SUI terrain type.
The Erceg-Greenstein propagation model is further developed through the correction factors introduced by the Stanford
University Interim model. The standards proposed by the IEEE working group 802.16 include channel models developed by
Stanford University. The basic path loss equation with correction factors is presented below:
PL = A + 10 a H BS Log 10 ----- + a f – a H R
d
d0
Where a(f) is the correction factor for the operating frequency, a f = 6 Log 10 ------------ , with f being the operating
f
2000
HR
frequency in MHz. a(HR) is the correction factor for the receiver antenna height, a H R = X Log 10 ------ , where d depends
2
on the terrain type.
• a(HR) = 0 for HR = 2 m.
• References:
• [1] V. Erceg et. al, “An empirically based path loss model for wireless channels in
suburban environments,” IEEE J. Select Areas Commun., vol. 17, no. 7, July 1999,
pp. 1205-1211.
• [2] Abhayawardhana, V.S.; Wassell, I.J.; Crosby, D.; Sellars, M.P.; Brown, M.G.;
"Comparison of empirical propagation path loss models for fixed wireless access
systems," Vehicular Technology Conference, 2005. IEEE 61st Volume 1, 30 May-1
June 2005 Page(s):73 - 77 Vol. 1
2. The word ‘terrain’ is used in the original definition of the model rather than ‘environment’. Hence it is used
interchangeably with ‘environment’ in this description.
78
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
4d
PL = 20 Log 10 -----------0- + 10 a H BS Log 10 ----- + a f – a H R
d
(1)
d 0
Where,
• f is the operating frequency in MHz
• d is the distance from the transmitter to the received in m in equation (1) and in km in equation (2)
• HBS is the transmitter height in m
• HR is the receiver height in m
The above equation is divided into two parts in Atoll:
PL = Lu – a H R
Where,
Lu = – 7.366 + 26 Log 10 f + 10 a H BS 1 + Log 10 d
The above path loss formulas are valid for d > d0, i.e. d > 100 m. For d < 100 m, the path loss has been restricted to the free
space path loss with correction factors for operating frequency and receiver height:
4d 4d
PL = 20 Log 10 ------------------ + a f – a H R instead of PL = 20 Log 10 ------------------
Where a(f) and a(Hr) have the same definition as given above. Simplifying the above equation, we get,
PL = 12.634 + 26 Log 10 f + 20 Log 10 d – a H R , or Lu = 12.634 + 26 Log 10 f + 20 Log 10 d
The above equation is not user-modifiable in Atoll except for the coefficient of Log 10 f , i.e. 26. Atoll uses the same
coefficient as the one you enter for Log 10 f in Atoll for the case d > d0.
1st step: For each pixel in the calculation radius, Atoll determines the clutter bin on which the receiver is located. This clutter
bin corresponds to a clutter class. Atoll uses the Erceg-Greenstein (SUI) path loss formula assigned to this clutter class to
evaluate path loss.
2nd step: This step depends on whether the ‘Add diffraction loss’ option is selected or not.
• If the ‘Add diffraction loss’ option is not selected, 1st step gives the final path loss result.
• If the ‘Add diffraction loss’ option is selected, Atoll proceeds as follows:
a. It extracts a geographic profile between the transmitter and the receiver using the radial calculation method.
b. It determines the largest obstacle along the profile in accordance with the Deygout method and evaluates losses
due to diffraction L Diffraction . For more information on the Deygout method, see "3 Knife-edge Deygout Method"
on page 87.
The final path loss is the sum of the path loss determined in 1st step and L Diffraction .
79
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
Shadow fading is computed in Atoll independent of the propagation model. For more information on the shadow fading
calculation, see "Shadow Fading Model" on page 90.
The graphs provided for 100 MHz are applicable to frequencies from 30 to 300 MHz, those for 600 MHz are applicable
to frequencies from 300 to 1000 MHz, and the graphs for 1000 MHz are applicable to frequencies from 1000 to
3000 MHz. The method for interpolation is described in the recommendations (Annex 5, § 6).
• Transmitter antenna heights, h 1 : 10, 20, 37.5, 75, 150, 300, 600, and 1200 m
For any values of h 1 from 10 to 3000 m, an interpolation or extrapolation from the appropriate two curves is used, as
described in the recommendations (Annex 5, § 4.1). For h 1 below 10 m, the extrapolation to be applied is given in
Annex 5, § 4.2. It is possible for the value of h 1 to be negative, in which case the method is given in Annex 5, § 4.3.
For land paths, the graphs represent field strength values for a receiver antenna height above ground, equal to the
representative height of the clutter around the receiver. The minimum value of the representative height of clutter is
10 m. For sea paths, the graphs represent field strength values for a receiver antenna height of 10 m.
For other values of receiver antenna height, a correction is applied according to the environment of the receiver. The
method for calculating this correction is given in Annex 5, § 9.
These recommendations are not valid for transmitter-receiver distances less than 1 km or greater than 1000 km. Therefore in
Atoll, the path loss between a transmitter and a receiver over less than 1 km is the same as the path loss over 1 km. Similarly,
the path loss between a transmitter and a receiver over more than 1000 km is the same as the path loss over 1000 km.
Moreover, these recommendations are not valid for transmitter antenna heights less than the average clutter height
surrounding the transmitter.
• The cold sea graphs are used for calculations over warm and cold sea both.
• The mixture of land and sea paths is not supported by Atoll.
Once f n1 and f n1 are known, along with the information about the percentage of time t and the type of path (land or sea),
the sets of graphs which will be used for the calculation are also known.
80
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
E Max = E FS + E SE = 106.9 – 20 Log d + 2.38 1 – exp – d 8.94 Log 50 t for sea paths.
Where E FS is the free space field strength for 1 kW ERP, E SE is an enhancement for sea graphs.
• Sea paths
h 1 = Max 1 h a
Here, all antenna heights (i.e., h 1 , h eff , and h a ) are in expressed in m. h a is the antenna height above ground and h eff is the
effective height of the transmitter antenna, which is its height over the average level of the ground between distances of
0.2 d and d km from the transmitter in the direction of the receiver.
If the value of h 1 coincides with one of the eight heights for which the field strength graphs are provided, namely 10, 20, 37.5,
75, 150, 300, 600, and 1200 m, the required field strength is obtained directly from the corresponding graph. Otherwise:
• If 10 m h 1 3000 m
The field strength is interpolated or extrapolated from field strengths obtained from two curves using the following
equation:
Log h 1 h Low
E h1 = E Low + E Up – E Low -------------------------------------
-
Log h Up h Low
Where h Low = 600 m if h 1 1200 m , otherwise h Low is the nearest nominal effective height below h 1 ,
h Up = 1200 m if h 1 1200 m , otherwise h Up is the nearest nominal effective height above h 1 , E Low is the field
strength value for h Low at the required distance, and E Up is the field strength value for h Up at the required distance.
• If 0 m h 1 10 m
• For land path if the transmitter-receiver distance is less than the smooth-Earth horizon distance
d H h 1 = 4.1 h 1 , i.e., if d 4.1 h 1 ,
E h1 = E 10 d H 10 + E 10 d – E 10 d H h 1 , or
• For land path if the transmitter-receiver distance is greater than or equal to the smooth-Earth horizon distance
d H h 1 = 4.1 h 1 , i.e., if d 4.1 h 1 ,
Where E x y is the field strength value read for the transmitter-receiver distance of y from the graph available
for the transmitter antenna height of x.
81
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
If in the above equation, d H 10 + d – d H h 1 1000 km even though d 1000 km , the field strength is
determined from linear extrapolation for Log (distance) of the graph given by:
Log d D Low
E h1 = E Low + E Up – E Low --------------------------------------
-
Log D Up D Low
Where D Low is penultimate tabulation distance (km), D Up is the final tabulation distance (km), E Low is the field
strength value for D Low , and E Up is the field strength value for D Up .
• For sea path, h 1 should not be less than 1 m. This calculation requires the distance at which the path has 0.6 of
the first Fresnel zone just unobstructed by the sea surface. This distance is given by:
D h1 = D 0.6 f h 1 h 2 = 10 m (km)
Df Dh
Where D 0.6 = Max 0.001 ----------------- (km) with D f = 0.0000389 f h 1 h 2 (frequency-dependent term), and
D f + D h
If d D h1 the 0.6 Fresnel clearance distance for the sea path where the transmitter antenna height is 20 m is also
calculated as:
D 20 = D 0.6 f h 1 = 20 m h 2 = 10 m (km)
Once D h1 and D 20 are known, the field strength for the required distance is given by:
E Max for d D h1
Log d D h1
E h1 = E D + E D – E D ----------------------------------
- for D h1 d D 20
h1 20 h1 Log D 20 D h1
E' 1 – F S + E'' F S for d D 20
Where E Max is the maximum field strength at the required distance as calculated in "Step 2: Calculation of
Maximum Field Strength" on page 81, E D is E Max for d = D h1 ,
h1
Log h1 10 Log h1 10
ED = E 10 D 20 + E 20 D 20 – E 10 D 20 ------------------------------- , E' = E 10 d + E 20 d – E 10 d ------------------------------- , and
20 Log 20 10 Log 20 10
E'' is the field strength calculated as described for land paths. E 10 y and E 20 y are field strengths interpolated
for distance y and h 1 = 10 m and 20 m , respectively, and F S = d – D 20 d .
• If h 1 0 m
A correction is applied to the field strength, E h1 , calculated in the above description in order to take into account the
diffraction and tropospheric scattering. This correction is the maximum of the diffraction correction,, and
tropospheric scattering correction, .
2
Where C h1d = 6.03 – J with J = 6.9 + 20 Log – 0.1 + 1 + – 0.1 and = K eff2 ,
–h1
eff2 = arc tan -----------
- , and K is 1.35 for 100 MHz, 3.31 for 600 MHz, 6.00 for 2000 MHz.
9000
e 180 d- a = 6370 km
C h1t = 30 Log ----------------------
- with e = -------------------- , (radius of the Earth), and k = 4 3 is the
e + eff2 ak
effective Earth radius factor for mean refractivity conditions.
In the field strength graphs in the recommendations, the field strength is plotted against distance from 1 km to 1000 km. The
distance values for which field strengths are tabulated are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25,
30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170, 180, 190, 200, 225, 250, 275, 300,
325, 350, 375, 400, 425, 450, 475, 500, 525, 550, 575, 600, 625, 650, 675, 700, 725, 750, 775, 800, 825, 850, 875, 900, 925,
950, 975, 1000. If the transmitter-receiver distance is a value from this list, then interpolation of field strength is not required
and the field strength can be directly read from the graphs.
82
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
If the transmitter-receiver distance does not coincide with the list of distances for which the field strengths are accurately
available from the graphs, the field strength are linearly interpolated or extrapolated for the logarithm of the distance using
the following equation:
Log d d Low
E d = E Low + E Up – E Low -------------------------------------
-
Log d Up d Low
Where d Low is the lower value of the nearest tabulated distance to d , d Up is the higher value of the nearest tabulated
distance to d , E Low is the field strength value for d Low , and E Up is the field strength value for d Up .
The field strength at the transmission frequency is interpolated from the graphs available for the upper and lower nominal
frequencies as follows:
Log f f Low
E f = E Low + E Up – E Low -----------------------------------
Log f Up f Low
Where f Low is the lower nominal frequency (100 MHz if f < 600 MHz, 600 MHz otherwise), f Up is the higher nominal
frequency (600 MHz if f < 600 MHz, 2000 MHz otherwise), E Low is the field strength value for f Low , and E Up is the field
strength value for f Up .
In the case of transmission frequencies below 100 MHz or above 2000 MHz, the field strength values are extrapolated from
the two nearer nominal frequency values. The above equation is used for all land paths and sea paths.
The receiver antenna height correction depends on the type of path and clutter in which the receiver is located. The field
strength values given by the graphs for land paths are for a reference receiver antenna at a height, R (m), representative of
the height of the clutter surrounding the receiver, subject to a minimum height value of 10 m. Examples of reference heights
are 20 m for an urban area, 30 m for a dense urban area, and 10 m for a suburban area. For sea paths the notional value of R
is 10 m.
For land paths, the elevation angle of the arriving ray is taken into account by calculating a modified representative clutter
1000 d R – 15 h 1
height R' , given by R' = Max 1 ----------------------------------------------------------- .
1000 d – 15
R' – h 2
With J = 6.9 + 20 Log – 0.1 + 1 + – 0.1 and = 0.0108 f R' – h 2 arc tan --------------- .
2
27
83
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
D f D h
d 10 = D 0.6 f h 1 h 2 = 10 m and d h2 = D 0.6 f h 1 h 2 (km), respectively. Here D 0.6 = Max 0.001 ----------------
- as
D f + D h
explained earlier.
h2
• If h 2 10 m , C Receiver = 3.2 + 6.2 Log f Log ------
10
h2
• If h 2 10 m and d d 10 , C Receiver = 3.2 + 6.2 Log f Log ------
10
• If h 2 10 m and d d 10 and d d h2 , C Receiver = 0
h2 Log d d h2
• If h 2 10 m and d d 10 and d d h2 , C Receiver = 3.2 + 6.2 Log f Log ------ ----------------------------------
10 Log d 10 d h2
This correction is only applied when the path loss is to be calculated over land paths, over a transmitter-receiver distance less
than 15 km, in urban and suburban zones. This correction takes into account the presence of buildings in these zones. The
buildings are assumed to be of uniform height.
The correction represents a reduction in the field strength due to building clutter. It is added to the field strength and is given
by:
C Building = – 3.3 Log f 1 – 0.85 Log d 1 – 0.46 Log 1 + h a – R
Where h a is the antenna height above the ground, and R is the clutter height of the clutter class where the receiver is located.
This correction is only applied when d 15 km and h 1 – R 150 m .
This correction is only applied when the path loss is to be calculated over land paths, and over a transmitter-receiver distance
less than 16 km. This correction gives more precise field strength prediction over small reception areas. The correction is
added to the field strength and is given by:
C Clearance = J ' – J
2
Where J = 6.9 + 20 Log – 0.1 + 1 + – 0.1 , ' = 0.036 f , and = 0.065 Clearance f
• : The elevation angle of the line from the receiver which just clears all terrain obstructions in the direction of the
transmitter over a distance of up to 16 km but not going beyond the transmitter.
h 1S – h 2S
• Ref : The reference angle, Ref = arc tan --------------------
- .
1000 d
Where h 1S and h 2S are the heights of the transmitter and the receiver above sea level, respectively.
The resulting field strength is given by E = Min E Calc E Max , from which the path loss (basic transmission loss, L B ) is
calculated as follows:
L B = 139 – E + 20 Log f
84
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
The Sakagami-Kuboi propagation model requires detailed information about the environment, such as widths of the streets
where the receiver is located, the angles formed by the street axes and the directions of the incident waves, heights of the
buildings close to the receiver, etc. The path loss formula for the Sakagami-Kuboi propagation model is [1]:
H 2
L Model = 100 – 7.1 Log W + 0.023 + 1.4 Log h s + 6.1 Log H 1 – 24.37 – 3.7 -------- Log h b +
h b0
13 Log f – 3.23
43.2 – 3.1 Log h b Log d + 20 Log f + e
Where,
• W is the width (in meters) of the streets where the receiver is located
• is the angle (in degrees) formed by the street axes and the direction of the incident wave
• hs is the height (in meters) of the buildings close to the receiver
• H1 is the average height (in meters) of the buildings close to the receiver
• hb is the height (in meters) of the transmitter antenna with respect to the observer
• hb0 is the height (in meters) of the transmitter antenna with respect to the ground level
• H is the average height (in meters) of the buildings close to the base station
• d is the separation (in kilometres) between the transmitter and the receiver
• f is the frequency (in MHz)
The Sakagami-Kuboi propagation model is valid for:
5m <W< 50 m
0° < < 90°
5m < hs < 80 m
5m < H1 < 50 m
20 m < hb < 100 m
0.5 km <d< 10 km
450 MHz <f< 2200 MHz
h b0 H
Studies [2] have shown that the Sakagami-Kuboi propagation model can be extended to frequencies higher than 3 GHz, which
also allows a simplification in terms of the input required by the model.
The path loss formula for the extended Sakagami-Kuboi propagation model is:
L Model = 54 + 40 Log d – 30 Log h b + 21 Log f + a
• W is the width (in meters) of the streets where the receiver is located
• H0 (= hs = H1) is the height (in meters) of the buildings close to the receiver
• hb (= hb0) is the height (in meters) of the transmitter antenna with respect to the ground
• hm is the height (in meters) of the receiver antenna
• H is the average height (in meters) of the buildings close to the base station
• d is the separation (in metres) between the transmitter and the receiver
• f is the frequency (in GHz)
The extended Sakagami-Kuboi propagation model is valid for:
5m <W< 50 m
10 m < H0 < 30 m
10 m < hb < 100 m
0.1 km <d< 3 km
0.8 GHz <f< 8 GHz
1.5 m < hm < 5m
85
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
Studies also show that above 3 GHz, the path loss predicted by the extended model is almost independant of the input
parameters such as street widths and angles. Therefore, the extended Sakagami-Kuboi propagation model can be simplified
to the extended Sakagami propagation model:
L Model = 54 + 40 Log d – 30 Log h b + 21 Log f – 5 Log h m
The path loss calculation formula of the Sakagami extended propagation model resembles the formula of the Standard
Propagation Model. In Atoll, this model is in fact a copy of the Standard Propagation Model with the following values assigned
to the K coefficients:
65.4
K1
(calculated for 3.5 GHz)
K2 40
K3 -30
K4 0
K5 0
K6 0
K7 -5
For more information on the Standard Propagation Model, see "Standard Propagation Model (SPM)" on page 65.
References:
• [1] Manuel F. Catedra, Jesus Perez-Arriaga, "Cell Planning for Wireless
Communications," Artech House Publishers, 1999.
• [2] Koshiro Kitao, Shinichi Ichitsubo, "Path Loss Prediction Formula for Urban and
Suburban Areas for 4G Systems," IEEE, 2006.
where,
f is the frequency in MHz,
d is the Tx-Rx distance in km,
Free space loss is stated in dB.
2.13 Diffraction
The calculation of diffraction is based on ITU 526-5 recommendations. General method for one or more obstacles (knife-edge
diffraction) is used to evaluate diffraction losses (Diffraction loss in dB). Four construction modes are implemented in Atoll.
All of them are based on this same physical principle presented hereafter, but differ in the way they consider one or several
obstacles. Calculations take the earth curvature into account through the effective Earth radius concept (K factor=1.333).
86
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
c0 n d1 d2
R = --------------------------------
f d1 + d2
where,
n is the Fresnel zone index,
We have: = h
---
r
where,
R
r = -------
2
h is the obstruction height (height from the obstacle top to the Tx-Rx axis).
Hence,
2
For 1 knife-edge method, if – 0.7 , J = 6.9 + 20 log – 0.1 + 1 + – 0.1
Else, J = 0
87
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
1 Obstacle
A straight line between transmitter and receiver is drawn and the height of the obstacle above the Tx-Rx axis, hi, is calculated.
The obstruction position, di, is also recorded. i are evaluated from these data. The point with the highest value is termed
the principal edge, p, and the corresponding loss is J(p).
Therefore, we have
DiffractionLoss = J P
3 Obstacles
Then, the main edge (point p) is considered as a secondary transmitter or receiver. Therefore, the profile is divided in two
parts: one half profile, between the transmitter and the knife-edge section, another half, constituted by the knife-edge-
receiver section.
The same procedure is repeated on each half profile to determine the edge with the higher . The two obstacles found, (points
t and r), are called ‘secondary edges’. Losses induced by the secondary edges, J(t) and J(r), are then calculated.
Once the edge hierarchy is determined, the total loss is evaluated by adding all the intermediary losses obtained.
Therefore, if P 0
we have DiffractionLoss = J P + J t + J r
88
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
In case of ITU 526-5 and WLL propagation models, Diffraction loss term is determined as
follows:
• If P – 0.78 , we have DiffractionLoss = J P + J t + J r t
• Otherwise DiffractionLoss = 0
J P
Here, t = min -----------
- 1
6
Therefore, we have
DiffractionLoss = J P + J t + J r
we have DiffractionLoss = J P + J t + J r + C
Otherwise DiffractionLoss = J P + C
In case of ITU 526-5 propagation model, Diffraction loss term is determined as follows:
• If P – 0.78 , we have DiffractionLoss = J P + t J t + J r + C
• Otherwise DiffractionLoss = 0
J P
Here, t = min -----------
- 1 and C = 8.0 + 0.04d with d = distance stated in km between
6
the transmitter and the receiver.
89
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
intersection point between the two horizon lines above the Tx-Rx axis, hh, is calculated. The position dh is recorded and then,
from these values, h and J(h) are evaluated using the same previous formulas.
Therefore, we have
DiffractionLoss = J h
90
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
Different clutter types have different shadowing effects. Therefore, each clutter type in Atoll can have a different standard
deviation representing its shadowing characteristics. For different standard deviations, the shape of the Gaussian distribution
curve remains similar, as shown in Figure 2.20 on page 90.
The accuracy of this model depends upon:
• The suitability of the range of standard deviation used for each clutter class,
• The definition (bin size) of the digital map,
• How up-to-date the digital map is,
• The number of clutter classes,
• The accuracy of assignment of clutter classes.
Shadowing is applied to the predicted path loss differently depending on the technology, and whether it is applied to
predictions or simulations. The following sections explain how shadowing margins are calculated and applied to different
technology documents.
Shadowing margins are calculated for a given cell edge coverage probability. The cell edge coverage probability is the
probability of coverage at a pixel located at the cell edge, and corresponds to the reliability of coverage that you are planning
to achieve at the cell edge. For example, a cell edge coverage probability of 75 % means that the users located at the cell edge
will receive adequate signal level during 75 % of the time. Therefore, a coverage prediction with a cell edge coverage
probability of x % means that the signal level predicted on each pixel is reliable x % of the time, and the overall predicted
coverage area is reliable at least x % of the time.
References:
• [1] Saunders S. “Antennas and propagation for Wireless Communication Systems”
pp. 180-198
• [2] Holma H., Toskala A. “WCDMA for UMTS”
• [3] Jhong S., Leonard M. “CDMA systems engineering handbook” pp. 309-315, 1051-
1053”
• [4] Remy J.G., Cueugnet J., Siben C. “Systèmes de radiocommunications avec les
mobiles” pp. 309-310
• [5] Laiho J., Wacker A., Novosad T. “Radio network planning and optimisation for
UMTS” pp. 80-81
The shadowing margins are calculated as explained in "Shadowing Margin Calculation in Predictions" on page 95, and applied
to signal level or C/I as explained below.
• Signal Level-Based Predictions
Signal level-based predictions include coverage predictions (Coverage by Transmitter, Coverage by Signal Level, and
Overlapping Zones) and calculations in point analysis tabs (Profile and Reception) that require calculation of the
received signal level only, and do not depend on interference.
In these calculations (signal level calculations), a shadowing margin ( M Shadowing – model ) is applied to the received
signal level calculated for each pixel. The shadowing margin is calculated for a given cell edge coverage probability,
and depends on the model standard deviation ( model in dB) associated to the clutter class where the receiver is
located.
• Interference-Based Predictions
Interference-based predictions include coverage predictions (Coverage by C/I Level, Interfered Zones, Coverage by
GPRS/EDGE Coding Scheme, RLC Throughout/Timeslot, Application Throughput/Timeslot, Circuit Quality Indicator
Analysis) and calculations in point analysis window’s Interference tab that require calculation of the received signal
level and interference received from other base stations.
In these calculations, ( C I calculations), the shadowing margin ( M Shadowing – C I ) is applied to the ratio of the carrier
power (C) and the interfering signal levels (I) received from the interfering base stations. This shadowing margin is
calculated for a given cell edge coverage probability and depends on the C/I standard deviation ( C I in dB) associated
to the clutter class where the receiver is located.
The shadowing margins are calculated as explained in "Shadowing Margin Calculation in Predictions" on page 95 and
"Shadowing Margin Calculation in Monte-Carlo Simulations" on page 97, and applied to signal level, Ec/I0, or Eb/Nt as
explained below.
• Signal Level-Based Predictions
91
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
Signal level-based predictions include coverage predictions (Coverage by Transmitter, Coverage by Signal Level, and
Overlapping Zones) and calculations in point analysis tabs (Profile and Reception) that require calculation of the
received signal level only, and do not depend on interference.
In these calculations (signal level calculations), a shadowing margin ( M Shadowing – model ) is applied to the received
signal level calculated for each pixel. The shadowing margin is calculated for a given cell edge coverage probability,
and depends on the model standard deviation ( model in dB) associated to the clutter class where the receiver is
located.
• Interference+noise-Based Predictions
Interference+noise-based predictions include coverage predictions (Pilot Quality Analysis, Downlink Total Noise,
Service Area Analyses, Handoff Status, etc.) and point analysis (AS Analysis tab) that require calculation of the received
signal level and interference and noise received from other base stations.
TD-SCDMA Documents
The shadowing margins are calculated as explained in "Shadowing Margin Calculation in Predictions" on page 95 and
"Shadowing Margin Calculation in Monte-Carlo Simulations" on page 97, and applied to signal level or interference+noise
predictions as explained below.
• Signal Level-Based Predictions
Signal level-based predictions include coverage predictions (Best Server and RSCP P-CCPCH Coverages, P-CCPCG
Pollution Analysis, Baton Handover Coverage, DwPCH and UpPCH Coverages, Cell to Cell Interference, and Scrambling
Code Interference) and calculations in point analysis tabs (Profile and Reception) that require calculation of the
received signal level only, and do not depend on interference.
In these calculations (signal level calculations), a shadowing margin ( M Shadowing – model ) is applied to the received
signal level calculated for each pixel. The shadowing margin is calculated for a given cell edge coverage probability,
and depends on the model standard deviation ( model in dB) associated to the clutter class where the receiver is
located.
• Interference+noise-Based Predictions
Interference+noise-based predictions include coverage predictions (P-CCPCH Eb/Nt and C/I Coverages, Service Area
Analsyses for downlink and uplink Eb/Nt and C/I, etc.) that require calculation of the received signal level and
interference received from other base stations.
M Shadowing – Eb Nt ) are applied to Eb/Nt. These shadowing margins are calculated for a given cell edge coverage
UL
92
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
WiMAX Documents
The shadowing margins are calculated as explained in "Shadowing Margin Calculation in Predictions" on page 95 and
"Shadowing Margin Calculation in Monte-Carlo Simulations" on page 97 , and applied to signal level or C/(I+N) as explained
below.
• Signal Level-Based Predictions
Signal level-based predictions include coverage predictions (Coverage by Transmitter, Coverage by Signal Level, and
Overlapping Zones) and calculations in point analysis tabs (Profile and Reception) that require calculation of the
received signal level only, and do not depend on interference.
In these calculations (signal level calculations), a shadowing margin ( M Shadowing – model ) is applied to the received
signal level calculated for each pixel. The shadowing margin is calculated for a given cell edge coverage probability,
and depends on the model standard deviation ( model in dB) associated to the clutter class where the receiver is
located.
• Interference+noise-Based Predictions
Interference-based predictions include coverage predictions (Coverage by C/(I+N) Level, Coverage by Bearer,
Coverage by Throughput, etc.) that require calculation of the received signal level and interference.
In these calculations, (C/(I+N) calculations), in addition to the shadowing margin ( M Shadowing – model ) applied to the
received signal level calculated for each pixel, the ratio M Shadowing – model – M Shadowing – C I is applied to the
interfering signal levels (I). M Shadowing – C I is calculated for a given cell edge coverage probability and depends on the
C/I standard deviation ( C I in dB) associated to the clutter class where the receiver is located.
The reason why the ratio M Shadowing – model – M Shadowing – C I is used can be understood from the following
derivation (linear, not it dB):
Inputs
C = mC CP
C CP
--- = m C I -----
I IP
mC CP
C - = ---------------------- mC
I = ---------------------- -I
- = ----------
CP CP mC I P
m C I ----- m C I -----
IP IP
mC
Where ----------- corresponds to M Shadowing – model – M Shadowing – C I in dB.
mC I
mC CP
C - = ------------------------------------
--------------- -
I + N m
----------
C
-I +N
mC I P
• Monte-Carlo Simulations
93
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
Random values for shadowing margins are calculated for each transmitter-receiver link and applied to the predicted
signal level. A shadowing margin for each transmitter-receiver link in each simulation is obtained by taking a random
value from the probability density distribution for the appropriate clutter class. The probability distribution is a log-
normal distribution as explained above.
LTE Documents
The shadowing margins are calculated as explained in "Shadowing Margin Calculation in Predictions" on page 95 and
"Shadowing Margin Calculation in Monte-Carlo Simulations" on page 97 , and applied to signal level or C/(I+N) as explained
below.
• Signal Level-Based Predictions
Signal level-based predictions include coverage predictions (Coverage by Transmitter, Coverage by Signal Level, and
Overlapping Zones) and calculations in point analysis tabs (Profile and Reception) that require calculation of the
received signal level only, and do not depend on interference.
In these calculations (signal level calculations), a shadowing margin ( M Shadowing – model ) is applied to the signal level
calculated for each pixel. The shadowing margin is calculated for a given cell edge coverage probability, and depends
on the model standard deviation ( model in dB) associated to the clutter class where the receiver is located.
• Interference+noise-Based Predictions
Interference-based predictions include coverage predictions (Coverage by C/(I+N) Level, Coverage by Bearer,
Coverage by Throughput, etc.) that require calculation of the received signal level and received interference.
In these calculations, (C/(I+N) calculations), in addition to the shadowing margin ( M Shadowing – model ) applied to the
signal level calculated for each pixel, the ratio M Shadowing – model – M Shadowing – C I is applied to the interfering signal
levels (I). M Shadowing – C I is calculated for a given cell edge coverage probability and depends on the C/I standard
deviation ( C I in dB) associated to the clutter class where the receiver is located.
The reason why the ratio M Shadowing – model – M Shadowing – C I is used can be understood from the following
derivation (linear, not it dB):
Inputs
C = mC CP
C C
--- = m C I ----P-
I IP
mC CP
C - = ---------------------- mC
I = ---------------------- -I
- = ----------
CP CP mC I P
m C I ----- m C I -----
IP IP
mC
Where ----------- corresponds to M Shadowing – model – M Shadowing – C I in dB.
mC I
94
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
mC CP
C - = ------------------------------------
--------------- -
I + N m
----------
C
- I P + N
mC I
• Monte-Carlo Simulations
Random values for shadowing margins are calculated for each transmitter-receiver link and applied to the predicted
signal level. A shadowing margin for each transmitter-receiver link in each simulation is obtained by taking a random
value from the probability density distribution for the appropriate clutter class. The probability distribution is a log-
normal distribution as explained above.
Ec Io M Shadowing – Ec Io Ec/I0
UMTS HSPA
Eb Nt M Shadowing – Eb Nt Eb/Nt (DL)
DL DL
Ec Io M Shadowing – Ec Io Ec/I0
CDMA2000
Eb Nt M Shadowing – Eb Nt Eb/Nt (DL)
DL DL
where,
• Lpath is the predicted path loss,
95
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
2
x
– -----
dx = Q --------
1 z
2
P L x z = ---------- e
2 dB
z
----------
dB
where,
• P rec is the signal level predicted at the receiver. P rec = P' Tx – L path – M Shadowing
• P' Tx = EIRP + G antRx – L Rx
• EIRP is the effective isotropic radiated power of the transmitter.
• L Rx are receiver losses.
• G antRx is the receiver antenna gain.
A lookup table is used for mapping the values of Q vs. a set of cell edge coverage probabilities.
M Shadowing
Figure 2.21: Normalised Margin M arg in = --------------------------
-
dB
In interference-based predictions, where signal to noise ratio is calculated, the shadowing margin is only applied to the signal
from the interfered transmitter (C). We consider that the interference value is not altered by the shadowing margin. Random
variations also exist in the interfering signals, but taking only the average interference gives accurate results. [3] explains how
a certain level of interference is maintained by congestion control in CDMA-based networks.
96
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
Here, is a zero mean gaussian random variable G 0 dB representing variation due to shadowing. It can be expressed as
the sum of two uncorrelated zero mean gaussian random variables, L and P . L models the error related to the receiver’s
location (surrounding environment), and remains the same for all links between the receiver and the base stations from which
it is receiving signals. P models the error related to the path between the transmitter and the receiver.
2
2 = L + P for link 2
i
Standard deviations of L L and P P can be calculated from i , the model standard deviation model , and the
correlation coefficient between 1 and 2 .
2 2 2
model = L + P
2
L
= ---------------
-
2
model
Therefore,
2 2
P = model 1 –
2 2
L = model
model model
L = ---------------
- and P = ---------------
-
2 2
Receiver
Therefore, to model shadowing error common to all the signals received at a receiver ( E Shadowing – model ), values are
randomly generated for each receiver. These values have a zero-mean gaussian distribution with a standard deviation of
model
- , where model is the model standard deviation associated with the receiver’s clutter class.
---------------
2
Next, Atoll generates another random value for each transmitter-receiver pair. This values represents the shadowing error
Path
not related to the location of the receiver ( E Shadowing – model ). These values also have a zero-mean gaussian distribution with
model
a standard deviation ---------------
- .
2
So, we have:
Receiver Path
E Shadowing – model = E Shadowing – model + E Shadowing – model
Random shadowing error has its mean value at zero. Hence, this shadowing modelling method has no impact on the simulated
network load. On the other hand, as shadowing errors on the transmitter-receiver links are uncorrelated, the method
influences the calculated macro-diversity gain in case the mobile is in soft handover.
97
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
The calculation and use of macro-diversity gains can be disabled through the Atoll.ini file.
For more information, see the Administrator Manual.
is a zero mean gaussian random variable G 0 dB representing variation due to shadowing. It can be expressed as the
sum of two uncorrelated zero mean gaussian random variables, L and P . L models error related to the receiver local
environment; it is the same whichever the link. P models error related to the path between transmitter and receiver.
2
2 = L + P for the link 2
Knowing i , the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation Eb Nt and the correlation coefficient between 1 and 2 , we can
UL
calculate standard deviations of L L and P P (assuming all P have the same standard deviations).
We have:
2 2 2
Eb Nt = L + P
UL
2
L
= -----------------------
-
2
Eb Nt
UL
Therefore,
2 2
P = Eb Nt 1 –
UL
2 2
L = Eb Nt
UL
In technologies supporting soft handoff (UMTS and CDMA2000), cell is interference limited. As for one link, to ensure a
required cell edge coverage probability R L for the prediction, we add to each link budget a shadowing margin,
2signals
M Shadowing – Eb Nt .
UL
Prediction reliability in order to have Eb/Nt higher or equal to Eb/Nt from the best server can be expressed as:
Cd
1 1
-------1 = P' Tx1 – L 1 – N 1 CI pred 1 P' Tx1 – L path – N 1 – CI pred
N1 1
or
Cd
1 1
-------2 = P' Tx2 – L 2 – N 2 CI pred 2 P' Tx2 – L path – N 2 – CI pred
N2 2
where
i
CI pred is the quality level (signal to noise ratio) predicted at the receiver for link i.
98
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
2signals i
M Shadowing – Eb Nt = P' Txi – L path – N i – CI pred
UL i
and
2 1 2
1 = CI pred – CI pred
2
1 is the minimum needed margin on each link.
Therefore, the probability of having a quality at least equal to the best predicted one is:
noMRC 2signals Cd 1
Cd
1
RL M Shadowing – Eb Nt = 1 – P L1 L2 -------1 CI pred -------2 CI pred
UL 1N N 2
1 2
We can express it using L , P and P
P
2signals
M Shadowing – Eb Nt 2 M Shadowing – Eb Nt
2signals
– 1 L = L
2
1 2 1 UL UL
1 2signals 2 2signals 2
= P L P 1 2 P M Shadowing – Eb Nt – L P M Shadowing – Eb Nt – 1 – L
L P P UL UL
P
2signals
M Shadowing – Eb Nt 2 M Shadowing – Eb Nt
2signals
– 1 L = L
2
1 2 1 UL UL
1 2signals 2 2signals 2
= P L P P M Shadowing – Eb Nt – L P P M Shadowing – Eb Nt – 1 – L
L P UL P UL
noMRC 2signals
RL M Shadowing – Eb Nt
UL
= 1 – P L P P M Shadowing – Eb Nt – L P P M Shadowing – Eb Nt – 1 – L d L
1 2signals 2 2signals 2
L P UL P UL
–
i 2signals
P P M Shadowing – Eb Nt – L
P UL
2
–x -
--------- 2signals
2 P
2
M Shadowing – Eb Nt UL – L
1
= ----------------- e dx = Q ----------------------------------------------------------------
P
P 2 2signals
M – L
Shadowing – Eb Nt UL
Then, we have:
noMRC 2signals
RL M Shadowing – Eb Nt
UL
2signals 2signals 2
M Shadowing – Eb Nt UL – L M Shadowing – Eb Nt UL – 1 – L
= 1 – P L Q ---------------------------------------------------------------- Q ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- d L
L P P
–
If we introduce user defined standard deviation Eb Nt and correlation coefficient , and consider that P is a
UL L
Gaussian pdf:
noMRC 2signals
RL M Shadowing – Eb Nt
UL
2
–xL 2signals
M Shadowing – x L Eb Nt
2signals
M Shadowing – x L Eb Nt – 1
2
--------- – Eb Nt – Eb Nt
Q ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Q ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ dx L
1
2 UL UL UL UL
= 1 – ---------- e
2 Eb Nt 1– Eb Nt 1–
– UL UL
99
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
We can generalize the previous expression to n signals (n is the number of available signals - Atoll may consider up to 3
signals):
noMRC nsignals
RL M Shadowing – Eb Nt
UL
2
–xL
M nsignals – x L Eb Nt M nsignals – x L Eb Nt – 1
2
--------- Shadowing – Eb Nt Shadowing – Eb Nt
Q ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Q ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ dx L
1
2 UL UL UL UL
= 1 – ---------- e
2 Eb Nt 1– Eb Nt 1–
– UL UL
The case where softer handoff occurs (two signals from co-site cells) is equivalent to the one signal case. The Softer/soft case
is equivalent to the two signals case. For the path associated with the softer recombination, we will use combined SNR to
calculate the availability of the link.
There is currently no agreed model for predicting correlation coefficient between 1 and 2 . Two key variables influence
correlation:
• The angle between the two signals. If this angle is small, correlation is high.
• The relative values of the two signal lengths. If angle is 0 and lengths are the same, correlation is zero. Correlation is
different from zero when path lengths differ.
A simple model has been found [1]:
T
= -----
D1
------- when T
D2
T is a function of the mean size of obstacles near the receiver and is also linked to the receiver environment.
In a normal handover status, assuming a hexagonal design for sites, is close to (+/- /3) and D1/D2 is close to 1.
In [1,5], = 0.5 when = 0.3 and T = ------ .
10
is a zero mean gaussian random variable G 0 dB representing variation due to shadowing. It can be expressed as the
sum of two uncorrelated zero mean gaussian random variables, L and P . L models the error related to the receiver local
environment, which is the same for all links. P models the error related to the path between the transmitter and the
receiver.
Therefore, in case of two links, we have:
100
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
1
1 = L + P for the link 1
2
2 = L + P for the link 2
Knowing i , the Ec/Io standard deviation Ec I o and the correlation coefficient between 1 and 2 , we can calculate
standard deviations of L L and P P (assuming all P have the same standard deviations).
We have:
2 2 2
Ec I o = L + P
2
L
= -------------
-
2
Ec I o
Therefore,
2 2
P = Ec I o 1 –
2 2
L = Ec I o
2 Available Signals
In technologies supporting soft handoff (UMTS and CDMA2000) cells are interference limited. As for one link, to ensure a
2signals
required cell edge coverage probability R L for the prediction, we add a shadowing margin, M Shadowing – Ec Io , to each link
budget.
Ec Ec 1 Ec 1
-------1- = P pilot – L 1 – Io ----- 1 P pilot – L m – Io – -----
Io 1 Io pred 1 1 Io pred
Or
Ec Ec 1 Ec 1
-------2- = P pilot – L 2 – Io ----- 2 P pilot – L m – Io – -----
Io 2 Io pred 2 2 Io pred
We note:
1
M Shadowing – Ec Io = P pilot – L m – Io – -----
2signals Ec
i i Io pred
Ec 1 Ec 2
1 = ----- – -----
2
Io pred Io pred
2
1 is the minimum needed margin on each link.
Therefore, probability of having a quality at least equal to the best predicted one is:
Ec 1 Ec 1 Ec 2 Ec 1
M Shadowing – Ec Io = 1 – P L1 L2 -------- ----- -------- -----
noMRC 2signals
RL
Io Io pred Io Io pred
1 2
We can express it by using L , P and P
2signals 2signals 2
P 1 2 1 M Shadowing – Ec Io 2 M Shadowing – Ec Io – 1 L = L
1 2signals 2 2signals 2
= P L P 1 2 P M Shadowing – Ec Io – L P M Shadowing – Ec Io – 1– L
L P P
2signals 2signals 2
P 1 2 1 M Shadowing – Ec Io 2 M Shadowing – Ec Io – 1 L = L
1 2signals 2 2signals 2
= P L P P M Shadowing – Ec Io – L P P M Shadowing – Ec Io – 1 – L
L P P
101
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
noMRC 2signals
RL M Shadowing – Ec Io
2
–x -
---------
2 2signals
1 2 M Shadowing – Ec Io – L
i 2signals P
P P M Shadowing – Ec Io – L = ----------------- e dx = Q -----------------------------------------------------
-
P P 2 P
SHO – L
Then, we have:
2signals 2signals 2
M Shadowing – Ec Io – L M Shadowing – Ec Io – 1 – L
noMRC 2signals
RL M Shadowing – Ec Io = 1– P L Q ------------------------------------------------------ Q ------------------------------------------------------------------ d L
L P P
–
If we introduce a user defined Ec/Io standard deviation and a correlation coefficient and consider that P is a
L
Gaussian pdf:
noMRC 2signals
RL M Shadowing – Ec Io
2
–xL
2signals 2signals 2
1
--------- M Shadowing – Ec Io – x L Ec I o M Shadowing – Ec Io – 1 – x L Ec I o
2
= 1 – ---------- e Q ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Q ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- dx L
2 Ec I o 1 – Ec I o 1 –
–
n Available Signals
We can generalize the previous expression for n signals (n is the number of available signals - Atoll may consider up to 3
signals):
noMRC nsignals
RL M Shadowing – Ec Io
2
–xL n
nsignals nsignals i
1
--------- M Shadowing – Ec Io – x L Ec I o M Shadowing – Ec Io – 1 – x L Ec I o
2
= 1 – ---------- e Q ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
- x Q ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- dx L
2 Ec I o 1 – Ec I o 1 –
– i=2
2
1 =1 dB
2
1 =5 dB
2
1 =10 dB
102
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
2 signals
3
1 =5 dB
3
1 =10 dB
Figure 2.23: Margin - Probability (Case of 3 Signals with sigma = 8dB, delta1 = 1dB)
2 signals
3
1 =5 dB
3
1 =10 dB
Figure 2.24: Margin - Probability (Case of 3 Signals with sigma = 8dB, delta1 = 2dB)
For further information about determination of the correlation coefficient, please see "Correlation Coefficient Determination"
on page 103.
103
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
Computation zone
Rectangle containing the computation zone(s)
Calculation area defined (square)
Transmitter
104
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
Path loss
Downtilta Invalid
matrices
Sufficient Not necessary
Path loss
Azimutha Invalid
matrices
Sufficient Not necessary
Path loss
% Power (secondary antennas) Invalid Sufficient Not necessary
matrices
Path loss
Site position/altitude Invalid Sufficient Not necessary
matrices
Path loss
Grid resolution (main or extended) Invalid Sufficient Not necessary
matrices
Path loss
Propagation model (main or extended) Invalid Sufficient Not necessary
matrices
Path loss
Propagation model parameters Invalid Sufficient Not necessary
matrices
Calculation areas Coverage
Valid Sufficient Not necessary
(Calculation areas gets smaller) predictions
Calculation areas Path loss
Invalid Sufficient Not necessary
(Calculation areas gets larger) matrices
Path loss
Receiver height Invalid Sufficient Not necessary
matrices
Coverage
Receiver losses Valid Sufficient Not necessary
predictions
Coverage
Receiver gain Valid Sufficient Not necessary
predictions
Coverage
Receiver antenna Valid Sufficient Not necessary
predictions
Path loss
Geographic layer order Invalid
matrices Insufficientb Necessary
Path loss
Geographic file resolution Invalid
matrices Insufficientb Necessary
Path loss
New DTM map Invalid
matrices Insufficientb Necessary
Path loss
Clutter class edition Invalid
matrices Insufficientb Necessary
Coverage
Coverage prediction resolution Valid Sufficient Not necessary
predictions
Coverage
Cell edge coverage probability Valid Sufficient Not necessary
predictions
Coverage
Coverage prediction conditions Valid Sufficient Not necessary
predictions
Coverage
Coverage prediction display options Valid Sufficient Not necessary
predictions
a. Modification of any parameter related to main or other antennas makes matrix invalid.
b. Except if this action has an impact on the site positions/altitudes.
105
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
For more information on the tuning files, see the Administrator Manual.
E = ---
1
n ei
i
Ri = 1 – Di M – g – Pi so R i = 1 – D i M – g – P i + E
new old
106
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
When several ellipses overlap a pathloss bin, the final tuned path loss is given by:
1 – d j P j
tuned
j
Pi = -------------------------------------------------
tuned
n –
d j
j
where :
M d represents the contribution of the donor transmitter in the measured value.
If C d and C r represent respectively the filtered signal level from the donor transmitter and the repeater on a pixel, one can
define the contribution of each element as follows:
Cd Cr
M d = M ---------------- and M r = M ---------------- .
Cd + Cr Cd + Cr
Following the path loss tuning process described in "Transmitter Path Loss Tuning" on page 106, the donor transmitter (resp.
the repeater) is then tuned using M d (resp. M r ) values.
107
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
DBF Structure
1st record of fixed length (see next parts); 2nd record (see next part for size, byte10) …; last
n+1 If .dbf is not empty
record
DBF Header
The DBF header size is variable and depends on the field count.
Field descriptor array in the DBF header (32 bytes for each field):
108
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
Field type and size in the DBF header, field descriptor (1 byte):
109
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
110
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
a. In order to benefit from the calculation sharing feature, users must retrieve the propagation models from the same
central database. This can be done using the Open from database command for a new document or the Refresh
command for an existing one. Otherwise, Atoll generates different model_ID (even if same parameters are applied on
the same kind of model) and calculation sharing become unavailable due to inconsistency.
b. These coordinates enable Atoll to determine the area of calculation for each transmitter.
c. These coordinates enable Atoll to determine the rectangle including the computation zone.
111
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
The second part details interference histogram of each interfered subcell-interfering subcell pair. The lines after the header
are considered as comments if they start with "#". If not, they must have the following format:
<Column1><tab><Column2><tab><Column3><tab><Column4><tab><Column5><newline>
The columns 1, 2, and 3 must be defined only in the first line of each histogram.
112
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
Sample
a. If the TCH and BCCH histograms are the same, they are not repeated. A single record indicates that the histograms
belong to TCH and BCCH both.
The second part provides information about transmitters taken into account in AFP. The lines after the header are considered
as comments if they start with "#". If not, they must have the following format:
<Column1><tab><Column2><newline>
113
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
The last four columns describe the interference matrix scope. One transmitter per line is described separated with a tab
character.
Sample
The second part details interference histogram of each interfered subcell-interferer subcell pair. The lines after the header
are considered as comments if they start with "#". If not, they must have the following format:
<Column1><tab><Column2><tab><Column3><tab><Column4><newline>
114
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
Sample
The second part details interference histogram of each interfered subcell-interferer subcell pair. The lines after the header
are considered as comments if they start with "#". If not, they must have the following format:
115
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
<Column1><tab><Column2><tab><Column3><tab><Column4><tab><Column5><newline>
Sample
116
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
Sample
The columns in the sample above are separated with a tab. These columns can also be separated with a semilcolon:
Site0_2;Site0_1;0.226667;0.024
Site0_2;Site0_3;0.27;0.024
Site0_3;Site0_1;0.276;0.02
Site0_3;Site0_2;0.226;0.028
117
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
The format and the content of the DBF file is described here.
In both cases, an XML file describing the prediction is also created in the corresponding
’<doc_name>\{<GUID>}’ folder.
Here, D is the distance from the pixel to be coloured to each pixel within the bounding box and X is the value at that pixel.
In other words, the pixel will be coloured by the most representative value within this bounding box.
118
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
The user-defined filtering percentage Y gives the size of the bounding box: Y 10 pixels in each direction. In other words, the
bounding box is increased by one pixel every 10 % (since Y is defined as a percentage).
Smoothing by Percentage
2 Z
The user-defined smoothing percentage Z gives the approximation tolerance: ------- R ------ , where R is the user-defined
2 20
export resolution. Tolerance is the interval within which Atoll tries to reduce the number of points.
For example, for three successive points, A1, A2, and A3 as shown in Figure 2.29 on page 119, A2 will be deleted if within this
tolerance (and A1 and A3 will be directly linked) and A2 will be conserved if outside this tolerance.
119
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
The second method consists in defining a maximum number of points to be deleted. This number of points helps the algorithm
to determine the optimised tolerance (see "Smoothing by Percentage" on page 119) such that, with this obtained tolerance,
the number of points to be deleted will be lower than this value.
Let’s consider the following example ( 1 ). Starting from the maximum possible tolerance, the number of points to be filtered
out are estimated (circled in red in the following example ( 2 )). If this number is greater than the maximum number of points
defined by the user, Atoll reduces the tolerance until reaching the requested maximum number of points or less ( 3 ). The
first the number of points respecting the constraint is obtained, smoothing is applied by deleting these points and linking the
remaining closest points ( 4 ).
1 2
3 4
120
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
121
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation ©Forsk 2015
122
Chapter 3
GSM GPRS EDGE
Networks
This chapter covers the following topics:
• "Signal Level Calculation" on page 125
• "Interference-based DL Calculations" on page 131
• "GPRS/EDGE Calculations" on page 136
• "Codec Mode Selection and CQI Calculations" on
page 145
• "UL Coverage Predictions" on page 152
• "Traffic Analysis" on page 159
• "Network Dimensioning" on page 171
• "Key Performance Indicators Calculation" on page 181
• "Simulations" on page 184
• "Automatic Neighbour Allocation" on page 191
• "AFP Appendices" on page 196
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guidefor Radio Networks
© Forsk 2015
124
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
• All the calculations are performed on TBC (to be calculated) transmitters. For the
definition of TBC transmitters please refer to "Path Loss Matrices" on page 103.
• Logarithms used in this chapter (Log function) are base-10 unless stated otherwise.
Txi Txi
Path loss ( L path ) L path = L model + L ant
Tx
Here,
• EIRP is the effective isotropic radiated power of the transmitter,
• L model is the loss on the transmitter-terminal path (path loss) calculated by the propagation model,
• L ant is the transmitter antenna attenuation (from antenna patterns),
Tx
• M Shadowing – model is the shadowing margin. This parameter is taken into account when the option “Shadowing taken
into account” is selected,
• L Indoor are the indoor losses, taken into account when the option “Indoor coverage” is selected,
• L Term are the terminal losses,
• L Tx – DL are the total transmitter DL losses,
• G ant is the terminal antenna gain,
Term
• P is the power offset defined for the selected TRX type in the transmitter property dialogue,
• tt is the TRX type (in the GSM GPRS EDGE.mdb document template, there are three possible TRX types, BCCH, TCH and
inner TCH).
Here,
max
• P Term is the maximum terminal allowed power,
125
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
Txi
• L path is the path loss on the transmitter-terminal link, identical in DL and in UL (see above),
• M Shadowing – model is the shadowing margin. This parameter is taken into account when the option “Shadowing taken
into account” is selected,
• L Indoor are the indoor losses, taken into account when the option “Indoor coverage” is selected,
• L Term are the terminal losses,
• L Tx – UL are the total transmitter UL losses,
• G ant is the transmitter antenna gain,
Tx
If the power reduction values defined for all the subcells are the same, the received signal level from the selected transmitter
will be the same for all TRX types.
If the power reduction values defined for all the subcells are the same, the received signal level from the selected transmitter
will be the same for all TRX types.
Reception level bars are displayed in the order of decreasing signal level. The number of displayed bars depends on the signal
level received from the best server. Bars are only displayed for transmitters whose signal level is within a 30 dB margin from
the best server signal level.
You can use a value other than 30 dB for the margin from the best server signal level, for
example a smaller value for improving the calculation speed. For more information on
defining a different value for this margin, see the Administrator Manual.
126
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
Txi
MinimumThreshold P rec tt MaximumThreshold
Txi
For pure signal level-based calculations (not C/I or C/(I+N)), P rec tt can be replaced
Txi Txi
with L total – DL or L path .
Txi
For pure signal level-based calculations (not C/I or C/(I+N)), P rec tt can be replaced
Txi Txi
with L total – DL or L path .
ji
M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is the highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is either the highest or within a 2 dB margin from
the highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 2nd best servers.
Txi
For pure signal level-based calculations (not C/I or C/(I+N)), P rec tt can be replaced
Txi Txi
with L total – DL or L path .
Txi nd Txj
And P rec tt 2 Best P rec tt – M
ji
M is the specified margin (dB). The 2nd Best function considers the second highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is the second highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is either the second highest or within a 2 dB margin
from the second highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 3rd best servers.
Txi
For pure signal level-based calculations (not C/I or C/(I+N)), P rec tt can be replaced
Txi Txi
with L total – DL or L path .
ji
127
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is the highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is either the highest or within a 2 dB margin from
the highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 2nd best servers.
3.1.4.1.5 Second Best Signal Level per HCS Layer and a Margin
For each HCS layer, k, the service area of Txi corresponds to the pixels :
Txi
MinimumThreshold P rec tt MaximumThreshold
Txi
For pure signal level-based calculations (not C/I or C/(I+N)), P rec tt can be replaced
Txi Txi
with L total – DL or L path .
Txi nd Txj
And P rec BCCH 2 Best P rec BCCH – M
ji
M is the specified margin (dB). The 2nd Best function considers the second highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is the second highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is either the second highest or within a 2 dB margin
from the second highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 3rd best servers.
Txi
For pure signal level-based calculations (not C/I or C/(I+N)), P rec tt can be replaced
Txi Txi
with L total – DL or L path .
ji
Txi
And the received P rec tt exceeds the reception threshold defined per HCS layer.
M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is the highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is either the highest or within a 2 dB margin from
the highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 2nd best servers.
Txi
For pure signal level-based calculations (not C/I or C/(I+N)), P rec tt can be replaced
Txi Txi
with L total – DL or L path .
128
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
ji
And Txi belongs to the HCS layer with the highest priority. The highest priority is defined by the priority field (0: lowest).
Txi
And the received P rec tt exceeds the reception threshold defined per HCS layer.
In the case two layers have the same priority, the traffic is served by the transmitter for
which the difference between the received signal strength and the HCS threshold is the
highest. The way the competition is managed between layers with the same priority can
be modified. For more information, see the Administrator Manual.
M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is the highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is either the highest or within a 2 dB margin from
the highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 2nd best servers.
Txi
For pure signal level-based calculations (not C/I or C/(I+N)), P rec tt can be replaced
Txi Txi
with L total – DL or L path .
129
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
Atoll calculates signal level received from the transmitter on each pixel of each transmitter service area. A pixel of a service
area is coloured if the signal level is greater than or equal to the defined minimum thresholds (pixel colour depends on signal
level). Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many
layers as transmitter service areas. Each layer shows the different signal levels available in the transmitter service area.
Atoll calculates signal levels received from transmitters on each pixel of each transmitter service area. When other service
areas overlap the studied one, Atoll chooses the highest value. A pixel of a service area is coloured if the signal level is greater
than or equal to the defined thresholds (the pixel colour depends on the signal level). Coverage consists of several
independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as defined thresholds. Each
layer corresponds to an area the signal level from the best server exceeds a defined minimum threshold.
Atoll calculates path loss from the transmitter on each pixel of each transmitter service area. A pixel of a service area is
coloured if path loss is greater than or equal to the defined minimum thresholds (pixel colour depends on path loss). Coverage
consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as service
areas. Each layer shows the different path loss levels in the transmitter service area.
Atoll calculates DL total losses from the transmitter on each pixel of each transmitter service area. A pixel of a service area is
coloured if total losses is greater than or equal to the defined minimum thresholds (pixel colour depends on total losses).
Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers
as service areas. Each layer shows the different total losses levels in the transmitter service area.
Atoll calculates signal levels received from transmitters on each pixel of each transmitter service area. When other service
areas overlap the studied one, Atoll determines the best transmitter and evaluates path loss from the best transmitter. A pixel
of a service area is coloured if the path loss is greater than or equal to the defined thresholds (pixel colour depends on path
loss). Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many
layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area the path loss from the best server exceeds a defined minimum
threshold.
Atoll calculates signal levels received from transmitters on each pixel of each transmitter service area. service areas overlap
the studied one, Atoll determines the best transmitter and evaluates DL total losses from the best transmitter. A pixel of a
service area is coloured if the total losses is greater than or equal to the defined thresholds (pixel colour depends on total
losses). Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many
layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area the total losses from the best server exceed a defined
minimum threshold.
Number of Servers
Atoll evaluates how many service areas cover a pixel in order to determine the number of servers. The pixel colour depends
on the number of servers. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed.
There are as many layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area the number of servers is greater than or
equal to a defined minimum threshold.
On each pixel of each transmitter service area, the coverage corresponds to the pixels the signal level from this transmitter
fulfils signal conditions defined in Conditions tab with different cell edge coverage probabilities. There is one coverage area
per transmitter in the explorer.
On each pixel of each transmitter service area, the coverage corresponds to the pixels the best signal level received fulfils
signal conditions defined in Conditions tab. There is one coverage area per cell edge coverage probability in the explorer.
Best C2 (dBm)
Atoll calculates C2 values received from transmitters on each pixel of each transmitter service area. When other service areas
overlap the studied one, Atoll chooses the highest value. A pixel of a service area is coloured if the C2 value is greater than or
130
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
equal to the defined thresholds (the pixel colour depends on the C2 value). Coverage consists of several independent layers
whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to
an area the best C2 value exceeds a defined minimum threshold.
In order to understand the difference between each frequency hopping mode from the point of view of a mobile, it is inter-
esting to consider the Mobile Station Allocation. MSA is characterised by the pair (Channel list, MAIO). In the following, we
will use this notion to characterise the interference and resources set of a mobile.
For non-hopping (NH) mode, the channel list is 1 channel. For base-band hopping (BBH) or synthesized frequency hopping
(SFH), the channel list corresponds to the mobile allocation list (MAL).
For BBH, channels of MAL belong to the same TRX type.
Examples:
• Non-hopping (NH): An MSA is the channel assigned to a TRX used by a mobile.
• Baseband hopping (BBH): An MSA is the Mobile Allocation List (MAL) and the TRX index.
• Synthesised frequency hopping (SFH): An MSA is the Mobile Allocation List (MAL) and the Mobile Allocation Index
Offset (MAIO).
Therefore, from the point of view of a mobile station, BBH and SFH work in the same way. An MSA will be attached to each
mobile considered during the simulation and the level of interference will be evaluated on this MSA.
C v m
Several MSAs, m, are related to a transmitter. Therefore, Atoll calculates the DL C/I --------------
- for each victim
Iv m
transmitter v with MSA m (m MSAS(v)).
131
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
C v m
Atoll considers the most interfered MSA, therefore, the displayed C/I or C/(I+N) are --- = Min --------------
C - or
Iv k Iv m
C - C m -
v
--------------------- = Min --------------------------------- , respectively. If the Detailed Results check box is selected, the C/I values for
I + N Term tot
k I v m + N Term
tot
v
all MSAs are displayed.
• i is any potential interfering transmitter (TBC transmitters whose calculation areas intersect the service area of v),
• MSAS(i) is the set of MSAs related to potential interferers i,
• INT(v) is the set of transmitters that interfere v,
v
• C m is the carrier power level received from v on m,
v
• I m corresponds to the interference received from interfering transmitters i on m,
• M Shadowing used in the C/I calculation is based on the C/I standard deviation.
The C/I shadowing margin is applied on the carrier power level. The interference levels
are not changed.
Calculations
The carrier power level is the power received from the victim transmitter at the terminal.
v v
C m = P rec m
Term
If the interference conditions are based on C/(I+N), Atoll takes the total noise N tot into account. The total noise is the sum
Term
of the thermal noise N thermal (-121 dBm by default or user-defined), the terminal noise figure NF , and the inter-
v DL
technology downlink noise rise NR inter – techno log y .
Term Term v DL
N tot = N thermal + NF + NR inter – techno log y
Interference can be received from interfering transmitters i on co-channel and adjacent channels. Interference may also be
received from the transmitters of another technology.
v v v DL i v
Therefore, I m = I co m + I adj m + I inter – techno log y – G PC – G Div
i v
G PC is the average power control gain defined for the interfering transmitter i and G Div is the diversity gain defined for the
considered subcell.
Each interference component is explained below.
Co- and Adjacent Channel Interference:
v
I co m is the interference received at v on m on co-channel, given by:
v i
v i
I co m = p m n P rec n T i n
i INT v n MSAS i co
v
I adj m is the interference received at v on m on adjacent channels, given by:
i
v i P rec n
v
I adj m = p m n ----------------
- T i n
F adj
i INT v n MSAS i
i
Here, P rec n is the carrier power level received from i on n.
i i
T i n = L traffic n f act n
i
L traffic n is the traffic load defined for the MSA n or i. It can be set to 100% in the coverage prediction properties.
132
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
i
f act n is the activity factor defined for the MSA n of i. If the subcell (i,tt) supports DTX, the value specified in the
coverage prediction properties is used. Otherwise, the activity factor is 1.
BCCH TRXs are always on. Therefore, DTX and traffic loads do not impact the interference
i i
from BCCH. In other words, f act n = 1 and L traffic n = 1 for the BCCH TRXs of the
interferers.
v i
p m n is the probability of having a co- or adjacent channel collision between MSAs n and m, depending on the used
frequency hopping mode.
• Collision Probability for Non Hopping Mode:
v i
p m n = 1
The probability of collision is the ratio of the number of collisions to the number of occurences:
v i n collision
p m n = ----------------------
-
n occurence
The probibility of collision depends on the correlation between m and n. There can be two cases:
i. MSAs m and n are correlated
m and n must have identical HSN and synchronisation. The number of occurrences depends on the MAL
length, MAIO, and MAIO’.
Example:
Here, the number of occurrences is 3, the number of co-channel collisions is 1, and the number of adjacent
channel collisions is 1. Therefore,
v i v i
p m n co = 1
--- and p m n adj = 1
---
3 3
ii. MSAs m and n are not correlated
m and n do not have identical HSN and synchronisation. The probability of collision is the same for all the
channels.
Example:
Here, the number of occurrences is 9, the number of co-channel collisions is 1, and the number of adjacent
channel collisions is 3. Therefore,
133
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
v i v i
p m n co = 1
--- and p m n adj = 1
---
9 3
Diversity gain:
v
G Div is the diversity gain defined for the victim subcell.
Two types of diversity modes can be defined. In Tx Diversity, the signal is transmitted as many times that there are
antennas. In, the signal is successively transmitted on the various antennas.
For Tx Diversity mode, the diversity gain is defined as:
v Tx_Div
G Div = 3dB + Gclutter
Tx_Div
G clutter is the additional transmit diversity gain defined for the clutter class on which is located m.
Ant_Div
G clutter is the antenna hopping gain defined for the clutter class on which is located m.
th Tx
ic i is the i frequency used by the transmitter Tx within its list of frequencies, P Transmitted ic i is the total
Tx Tx
transmitted Tx power on ic i , L total are the total losses between the transmitter Tx and the terminal, and ICP ic f is
i
the inter-technology channel protection between the frequencies used by the transmitter Tx and the victim
transmitter v.
• In case of frequency hopping, the ICP value is weighted according to the fractional
load.
• In the ICP, the frequency gap is based on the defined base frequency for each
technology (e.g., 935 MHz in GSM 900)
• Neither DTX nor traffic load of TRXs are taken into account to evaluate interference
i i
levels. Therefore, we have T i n = L traffic n f act n = 1 .
• The C/I shadowing margin is applied on the carrier power level. The interference
levels are not changed.
134
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
, TRXj is the TRX (belonging to Txi) with the worst C/I or C/(I+N) at the pixel.
135
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
C/I Level
Each pixel of the transmitter coverage area is coloured if the calculated DL C/I (or C/(I+N)) level is greater than or equal to the
specified minimum thresholds (pixel colour depends on DL C/I (or C/(I+N)) level). Coverage consists of several independent
layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as transmitter coverage areas. Each layer
shows the different DL C/I levels available in the transmitter coverage area.
Atoll compares calculated DL C/I (or C/(I+N)) levels received from transmitters on each pixel of each transmitter coverage area
coverage areas overlap the studied one and chooses the highest value. A pixel of a coverage area is coloured if the DL C/I (or
C/(I+N)) level is greater than or equal to the specified thresholds (the pixel colour depends on the DL C/I (or C/(I+N)) level).
Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers
as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area the highest received DL C/I level exceeds a defined minimum
threshold.
Atoll compares DL C/I (or C/(I+N)) levels received from transmitters on each pixel of each transmitter coverage area the
coverage areas overlap the studied one and chooses the lowest value. A pixel of a coverage area is coloured if the DL C/I (or
C/(I+N)) level is greater than or equal to the specified thresholds (the pixel colour depends on the DL C/I (or C/(I+N)) level).
Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers
as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area the lowest received DL C/I level exceeds a defined minimum
threshold.
• C
---
I Threshold CS are the values of C/I thresholds for the coding schemes available in the GPRS/EDGE configuration,
• -----------
C
I + N Threshold CS are the values of C/(I+N) thresholds for the coding schemes available in the GPRS/EDGE
configuration,
• The priorities of the coding scheme lists are as follows: DBS > DAS > MCS > CS.
When the calculations are based on C/I and C/(I+N):
• Atoll calculates the carrier-to-interference ratio for all the GPRS/EDGE TBC transmitters but takes into account all the
TBC transmitters (GSM and GPRS/EDGE) to evaluate the interference.
• The reception thresholds given for signal level C are internally converted to C/N thresholds ( N is the thermal noise
defined in the document database at -121 dBm by default) in order to be indexed by C/(I+N) values. C/I thresholds are
also indexed by the C/(I+N) value.
136
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
The selection of coding schemes is mainly based on the radio conditions mentionned
above. Nevertheless, you can optionally define some specific coding scheme graphs
accoding to a specific hopping mode, mobility type, frequency band and MAL. As an
example, you can model the gain due to longer MALs in coding scheme selection.
For more information on interference (I) calculation, see "DL Carrier-to-Interference Ratio Calculation" on page 131.
Atoll selects a coding scheme, cs, from among the coding schemes available in the GPRS/EDGE configuration, such that:
The selected coding scheme, cs, is the coding scheme with the lowest coding scheme number from the lowest priority coding
scheme list.
Throughput Calculation
Once the coding scheme cs is selected, Atoll reads the corresponding throughput value for the received signal level from the
Throughput=f(C) graph associated with cs.
Atoll selects two coding schemes from among the coding schemes available in the GPRS/EDGE configuration, such that:
And, cs C I = Lowest CS Txi Txi
P
rec
TRX – P
Backoff
TRX
C
------------------------------------------------------------------------- --- Threshold
I I CS
csC is the coding scheme determined from the signal level, and csC/I is the coding scheme determined from the C/I level. Both
coding schemes are the coding schemes with the lowest coding scheme number from the lowest priority coding scheme list.
The selected coding scheme, cs, is the coding scheme with the lower coding scheme number among csC and csC/I:
cs = Min cs C cs C I .
For the coding scheme csC determined above, a throughput value, TPC, corresponding to the signal level is determined from
the TP = f(C) graph.
For the coding scheme csC/I determined above, a throughput value, TPC/I, corresponding to the C/I is determined from the TP
= f(C/I) graph.
The resulting throughput TP is the lower of the two values, TPC and TPC/I: TP = Min TP C TP C I .
Atoll selects two coding schemes from among the coding schemes available in the GPRS/EDGE configuration, such that:
137
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
For each TRX type, tt, cs C N = Lowest CS Txi Txi
P TRX – P TRX
------------------------------------------------------------------------- ----------- Threshold
rec Backoff C
N I + N CS
And, cs C I + N = Lowest CS Txi Txi
P rec TRX – P Backoff TRX
------------------------------------------------------------------------- ----------
C-
I+N I + N Threshold CS
csC/N is the coding scheme determined from the C/N, and csC/(I+N) is the coding scheme determined from the C/(I+N) level.
Both coding schemes are the coding schemes with the lowest coding scheme numbers from the lowest priority coding scheme
list.
The selected coding scheme, cs, is the coding scheme with the higher coding scheme number among csC/N and csC/(I+N):
cs = Max cs C N cs C I + N .
For the coding scheme csC/N determined above, the TP = f(C) graph is internally converted to TP = f(C/N) graph. A throughput
value, TPC/N, corresponding to the C/(I+N) is determined from the TP = f(C/N) graph.
For the coding scheme csC/(I+N) determined above, the TP = f(C/I) graph is internally converted to TP = f(C/(I+N)) graph. A
throughput value, TPC/(I+N), corresponding to the C/(I+N) is determined from the TP = f(C/(I+N)) graph.
The final throughput is computed by interpolating between the throughput values obtained from these two graphs. The
throughput interpolation method consists in interpolating TPC/N and TPC/(I+N) according to the respective weights of I and N
values.
The resulting throughput TP is given by: TP = TP C N + 1 – TP C I + N
pN - , pN is the thermal noise power (value in Watts), and p(I+N) is the interferences + thermal noise power (value
= -------------------
pI + N
in Watts).
For the received signal level, and coding schemes whose reception thresholds are lower than the received signal level, Atoll
determines the highest throughput from the TP=f C graphs available in the GPRS/EDGE configuration.
CS
Txi Txi
TP C = Highest TP=f C = P rec TRX – P Backoff TRX
Txi Txi
P rec TRX – P Backoff TRX Reception Threshold CS
The selected coding scheme, cs, is the one corresponding to the highest throughput calculated above.
If there are more than one coding schemes providing the highest throughput at the pixel, the selected coding scheme, cs, is
the one with the lowest coding scheme number from the lowest priority coding scheme list.
For the received signal level, and coding schemes whose reception thresholds are lower than the received signal level, Atoll
determines the highest throughput from the TP=f C graphs available in the GPRS/EDGE configuration.
138
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
CS
Txi Txi
TP C = Highest TP=f C = P rec TRX – P Backoff TRX
P
Txi
TRX – P
Txi
TRX Reception Threshold
rec Backoff CS
For the received C/I, and coding schemes whose C/I thresholds are lower than the received C/I, Atoll determines the highest
throughput from the TP=f C I graphs available in the GPRS/EDGE configuration.
Txi Txi
P rec TRX – P Backoff TRX
TP C I = Highest TP=f C I = ---------------------------------------------------------------- CS Txi Txi
I P rec TRX – P Backoff TRX
C
------------------------------------------------------------------------- --- Threshold
I I CS
The resulting throughput TP is the lower of the two values, TPC and TPC/I.
TP = Min TP C TP C I
The selected coding scheme, cs, is the one corresponding to the lower of the two highest throughputs calculated above.
If there are more than one coding schemes providing the highest throughputs at the pixel, the selected coding scheme, cs, is
the one with the lowest coding scheme number from the lowest priority coding scheme list.
Atoll internally converts the TP = f(C) graphs into TP = f(C/N) graphs. For the received C/(I+N), and coding schemes whose C/
(I+N) thresholds are lower than the received C/(I+N), Atoll determines the highest throughput from the TP = f(C/N) graphs
available in the GPRS/EDGE configuration.
Txi Txi
C P rec TRX – P Backoff TRX
TP C N = Highest TP=f --- = ---------------------------------------------------------------- CS
N I+N
Txi
P rec TRX – P Backoff TRX
Txi
------------------------------------------------------------------------- ----------- Threshold
C
I+N I + N CS
Atoll internally converts the TP = f(C/I) graphs into TP = f(C/(I+N)) graphs. For the received C/(I+N), and coding schemes whose
C/(I+N) thresholds are lower than the received C/(I+N), Atoll determines the highest throughput from the TP = f(C/(I+N))
graphs available in the GPRS/EDGE configuration.
Txi Txi
C P rec TRX – P Backoff TRX
TP C I + N = Highest TP=f ----------- = ---------------------------------------------------------------- CS
I+N I+N
Txi
P rec TRX – P Backoff TRX
Txi
------------------------------------------------------------------------- ----------- Threshold
C
I+N I + N CS
The final throughput is computed by interpolating between the throughput values obtained from these two graphs. The
throughput interpolation method consists in interpolating TPC/N and TPC/(I+N) according to the respective weights of I and N
values.
The resulting throughput TP is given by: TP = TP C N + 1 – TP C I + N
pN -
= ------------------- , pN is the thermal noise power (value in Watts), and p(I+N) is the interferences + thermal noise power (value
pI + N
in Watts).
The selected coding scheme, cs, is the one corresponding to the higher of the two highest throughputs calculated above.
If there are more than one coding schemes providing the highest throughputs at the pixel, the selected coding scheme, cs, is
the one with the highest coding scheme number from the highest priority coding scheme list.
139
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
TP RLC MAC is the effective RLC throughput, and TP Offset and SF are the throughput offset (kbps) and the throughput scaling
factor (%) defined for the selected service.
TP
--------------- If TP TP MAX
BLER = TP MAX
0 If TP TP MAX
TP is the throughput per timeslot calculated for a pixel and TPMAX is the maximum throughput per timeslot read from the
GPRS/EDGE configuration used for the calculations.
ji
M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is the highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is either the highest or within a 2 dB margin from
the highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 2nd best servers.
140
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
Txi nd Txj
And P rec tt 2 Best P rec tt – M
ji
M is the specified margin (dB). The 2nd Best function considers the second highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is the second highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is either the second highest or within a 2 dB margin
from the second highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 3rd best servers.
ji
M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is the highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is either the highest or within a 2 dB margin from
the highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 2nd best servers.
3.3.5.1.5 Second Best Signal Level per HCS Layer and a Margin
For each HCS layer, k, the service area of Txi corresponds to the pixels :
Txi
SubcellReceptionThreshold P rec tt
Txi nd Txj
And P rec BCCH 2 Best P rec BCCH – M
ji
M is the specified margin (dB). The 2nd Best function considers the second highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is the second highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is either the second highest or within a 2 dB margin
from the second highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 3rd best servers.
ji
Txi
And the received P rec tt exceeds the reception threshold defined per HCS layer.
M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is the highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is either the highest or within a 2 dB margin from
the highest.
141
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 2nd best servers.
ji
And Txi belongs to the HCS layer with the highest priority. The highest priority is defined by the priority field (0: lowest).
Txi
And the received P rec tt exceeds the reception threshold defined per HCS layer.
In the case two layers have the same priority, the traffic is served by the transmitter for
which the difference between the received signal strength and the HCS threshold is the
highest. The way the competition is managed between layers with the same priority can
be modified. For more information, see the Administrator Manual.
M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is the highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is either the highest or within a 2 dB margin from
the highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 2nd best servers.
142
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
Only the pixels with a coding scheme assigned are coloured. The pixel colour depends on the assigned coding scheme.
Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are as many layers
as transmitter coverage areas. Each layer shows the coding schemes available in the transmitter coverage area.
On each pixel, Atoll chooses the highest coding scheme available from the TRXs of different transmitters covering that pixel.
Only the pixels with a coding scheme assigned are coloured. The pixel colour depends on the assigned coding scheme.
Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are as many layers
as possible coding schemes. Each layer shows the areas a given coding scheme can be used.
A pixel of the coverage area is coloured if the calculated effective RLC throughput per timeslot from any transmitter covering
that pixel exceeds the defined minimum threshold. The pixel colour depends on the effective RLC throughput per timeslot.
Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are as many layers
as transmitter coverage areas and throughput display thresholds. Each layer shows the effective RLC throughput that a
transmitter can provide on one timeslot.
Packet Throughput and Quality Analysis: Max Effective RLC Throughput/Timeslot (kbps)
A pixel of the coverage area is coloured if the calculated highest effective RLC throughput per timeslot from any transmitter
covering that pixel exceeds the defined minimum threshold. The pixel colour depends on the highest effective RLC throughput
per timeslot. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are
as many layers as throughput display thresholds. Each layer shows the best effective RLC throughput that any transmitter can
provide on one timeslot.
Packet Throughput and Quality Analysis: Average Effective RLC Throughput/Timeslot (kbps)
A pixel of the coverage area is coloured if the calculated average effective RLC throughput per timeslot from all the
transmitters covering that pixel exceeds the defined minimum threshold. The pixel colour depends on the average effective
RLC throughput per timeslot. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be
managed. There are as many layers as throughput display thresholds. Each layer shows the average effective RLC throughput
that all the transmitters can provide on one timeslot.
A pixel of the coverage area is coloured if the calculated application throughput per timeslot from any transmitter covering
that pixel exceeds the defined minimum threshold. The pixel colour depends on the application throughput per timeslot.
Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are as many layers
as transmitter coverage areas and throughput display thresholds. Each layer shows the application throughput that a
transmitter can provide on one timeslot.
A pixel of the coverage area is coloured if the calculated highest application throughput per timeslot from any transmitter
covering that pixel exceeds the defined minimum threshold. The pixel colour depends on the highest application throughput
per timeslot. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are
as many layers as throughput display thresholds. Each layer shows the best application throughput that any transmitter can
provide on one timeslot.
A pixel of the coverage area is coloured if the calculated average application throughput per timeslot from all the transmitters
covering that pixel exceeds the defined minimum threshold. The pixel colour depends on the average application throughput
per timeslot. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are
as many layers as throughput display thresholds. Each layer shows the average application throughput that all the
transmitters can provide on one timeslot.
A pixel of the coverage area is coloured if the calculated effective RLC throughput from any transmitter covering that pixel
exceeds the defined minimum threshold. The pixel colour depends on the effective RLC for all the timeslots supported by the
143
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
selected terminal type (Number of Simultaneous Carriers x Number of DL Timeslots). The number of DL timeslots is the
minimum between the number of DL timeslots defined in the selected terminal and service. Coverage consists of several
independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are as many layers as transmitter coverage
areas and throughput display thresholds. Each layer shows the application throughput that a transmitter can provide on all
available timeslots in the terminal.
Packet Throughput and Quality Analysis: Max Effective RLC Throughput (kbps)
A pixel of the coverage area is coloured if the calculated highest effective RLC throughput from any transmitter covering that
pixel exceeds the defined minimum threshold. The pixel colour depends on the highest effective RLC throughput for all the
timeslots supported by the selected terminal type (Number of Simultaneous Carriers x Number of DL Timeslots). The number
of DL timeslots is the minimum between the number of DL timeslots defined in the selected terminal and service. Coverage
consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are as many layers as
throughput display thresholds. Each layer shows the highest effective RLC throughput that any transmitter can provide on all
available timeslots in the terminal.
Packet Throughput and Quality Analysis: Average Effective RLC Throughput (kbps)
A pixel of the coverage area is coloured if the calculated average effective RLC throughput from all the transmitters covering
that pixel exceeds the defined minimum threshold. The pixel colour depends on the average effective RLC throughput for all
the timeslots supported by the selected terminal type (Number of Simultaneous Carriers x Number of DL Timeslots). The
number of DL timeslots is the minimum between the number of DL timeslots defined in the selected terminal and service.
Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are as many layers
as throughput display thresholds. Each layer shows the average effective RLC throughput that all the transmitters can provide
on all available timeslots in the terminal.
A pixel of the coverage area is coloured if the calculated application throughput from any transmitter covering that pixel
exceeds the defined minimum threshold. The pixel colour depends on the application throughput for all the timeslots
supported by the selected terminal type (Number of Simultaneous Carriers x Number of DL Timeslots). The number of DL
timeslots is the minimum between the number of DL timeslots defined in the selected terminal and service. Coverage consists
of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are as many layers as transmitter
coverage areas and throughput display thresholds. Each layer shows the application throughput that a transmitter can provide
on all available timeslots in the terminal.
A pixel of the coverage area is coloured if the calculated highest application throughput from any transmitter covering that
pixel exceeds the defined minimum threshold. The pixel colour depends on the highest application throughput for all the
timeslots supported by the selected terminal type (Number of Simultaneous Carriers x Number of DL Timeslots). The number
of DL timeslots is the minimum between the number of DL timeslots defined in the selected terminal and service. Coverage
consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are as many layers as
throughput display thresholds. Each layer shows the highest application throughput that any transmitter can provide on all
available timeslots in the terminal.
A pixel of the coverage area is coloured if the calculated average application throughput from all the transmitters covering
that pixel exceeds the defined minimum threshold. The pixel colour depends on the average application throughput for all the
timeslots supported by the selected terminal type (Number of Simultaneous Carriers x Number of DL Timeslots). The number
of DL timeslots is the minimum between the number of DL timeslots defined in the selected terminal and service. Coverage
consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are as many layers as
throughput display thresholds. Each layer shows the average application throughput that all the transmitters can provide on
all available timeslots in the terminal.
A pixel of the coverage area is coloured if the calculated throughput per user from any transmitter covering that pixel exceeds
the defined minimum threshold. The pixel colour depends on the throughput per user for all the timeslots supported by the
selected terminal type (Number of Simultaneous Carriers x Number of DL Timeslots). The number of DL timeslots is the
minimum between the number of DL timeslots defined in the selected terminal and service. The throughput per user is
calculated by applying the throughput reduction factor, determined using the selected dimensioning model, to the application
throughput. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are
as many layers as transmitter coverage areas and throughput display thresholds. Each layer shows the throughput per user
that a transmitter can provide on all available timeslots in the terminal.
144
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
Packet Throughput and Quality Analysis: Max Throughput per User (kbps)
A pixel of the coverage area is coloured if the calculated highest throughput per user from any transmitter covering that pixel
exceeds the defined minimum threshold. The pixel colour depends on the highest throughput per user for all the timeslots
supported by the selected terminal type (Number of Simultaneous Carriers x Number of DL Timeslots). The number of DL
timeslots is the minimum between the number of DL timeslots defined in the selected terminal and service. The throughput
per user is calculated by applying the throughput reduction factor, determined using the selected dimensioning model, to the
application throughput. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed.
There are as many layers as throughput display thresholds. Each layer shows the highest throughput per user that any
transmitter can provide on all available timeslots in the terminal.
Packet Throughput and Quality Analysis: Average Throughput per User (kbps)
A pixel of the coverage area is coloured if the calculated average throughput per user from all the transmitters covering that
pixel exceeds the defined minimum threshold. The pixel colour depends on the average throughput per user for all the
timeslots supported by the selected terminal type (Number of Simultaneous Carriers x Number of DL Timeslots). The number
of DL timeslots is the minimum between the number of DL timeslots defined in the selected terminal and service. The
throughput per user is calculated by applying the throughput reduction factor, determined using the selected dimensioning
model, to the application throughput. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can
be managed. There are as many layers as throughput display thresholds. Each layer shows the average throughput per user
that all the transmitters can provide on all available timeslots in the terminal.
A pixel of the coverage area is coloured if the calculated BLER from any transmitter exceeds the defined minimum threshold.
The pixel colour depends on the BLER. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window
can be managed. There are as many layers as transmitter coverage areas and BLER display thresholds. Each layer shows the
BLERs that the covered pixels experience on one timeslot.
A pixel of the coverage area is coloured if the calculated highest BLER from all the transmitters exceeds the defined minimum
threshold. The pixel colour depends on the BLER. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map
window can be managed. There are as many layers as BLER display thresholds. Each layer shows the BLER that the covered
pixels experience on one timeslot.
145
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
146
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
The selection of codec modes is mainly based on the radio conditions mentionned above.
Nevertheless, you can optionally define some specific codec mode graphs accoding to a
specific hopping mode, mobility type, frequency band and MAL. As an example, you can
model the gain due to longer MALs in codec mode selection.
For more information on interference (I) calculation, see "DL Carrier-to-Interference Ratio Calculation" on page 131.
Ideal link adaptation for circuit quality indicator studies is defined at the codec configuration level. If the ideal link adaptation
option is checked, Atoll will select the codec mode, for the transmitter under study, according to the codec quality graphs (CQI
= f(C/N) and CQI = f(C/I)) related to the defined reference CQI, which may be different from the CQI being calculated.
Otherwise, Atoll will use the adaptation thresholds defined in the Adaptation Thresholds tab to determine the codec mode
to be used in the studies.
147
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
For each TRX type, tt, cm = Highest Priority CM Txi
P TRX
--------------------------- Adaptation Threshold
rec
N CM
Txi
P rec TRX
For ------------------------ , Atoll determines the CQI from the CQI=f(C/N) graph associated to the selected codec mode, cm.
N
For each TRX type, tt, cm = Highest Priority CM
Txi
P rec TRX
--------------------------- Adaptation Threshold
I+N CM
Txi
P rec TRX
For -----------------------
- , Atoll determines the CQI from the CQI=f(C/I) graph associated to the selected codec mode, cm.
I+N
For each TRX type, tt, cm = Highest Priority CM , for MOS
P
Txi
TRX
CQI Ref = Highest CQI=f ---= ---------------------------
C rec
N N tot
Or, cm = Highest Priority CM , for BER and FER
P
Txi
TRX
CQI Ref = Lowest CQI=f ---= ---------------------------
C rec
N N tot
, cm is the codec mode with the highest priority among the set of codec modes CM for which the reference CQI gives the
Txi
P rec TRX
highest or the lowest value at the received C/N level, -----------------------
- .
N tot
If more than one codec mode graphs give the same value for reference CQI, then Atoll selects the codec mode with the highest
priority.
From the CQI = f(C/N) graph associated to the selected codec mode cm, Atoll evaluates the CQI for which the study was
Txi
P rec TRX
performed corresponding to ------------------------ for the selected codec mode.
N tot
148
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
For each TRX type, tt, cm = Highest Priority CM , for MOS
P Txi TRX
= Highest CQI=f --- = ---------------------------
C rec
CQI
Ref I I+N
tot
Or, cm = Highest Priority CM , for BER and FER
P
Txi
TRX
CQI Ref = Lowest CQI=f --- = ---------------------------
C rec
I I+N
tot
, cm is the codec mode with the highest priority among the set of codec modes CM for which the reference CQI gives the
Txi
P rec TRX
highest or the lowest value at the received C/(I+N) level, -----------------------
-.
I + N tot
If more than one codec mode graphs give the same value for reference CQI, then Atoll selects the codec mode with the highest
priority.
From the CQI = f(C/I) graph associated to the selected codec mode cm (indexed with the C/(I+N) values), Atoll evaluates the
Txi
P rec TRX
CQI for which the study was performed corresponding to -----------------------
- for the selected codec mode.
I + N tot
ji
M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is the highest.
149
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is either the highest or within a 2 dB margin from
the highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 2nd best servers.
Txi nd Txj
And P rec BCCH 2 Best P rec BCCH – M
ji
M is the specified margin (dB). The 2nd Best function considers the second highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is the second highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is either the second highest or within a 2 dB margin
from the second highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 3rd best servers.
ji
M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is the highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is either the highest or within a 2 dB margin from
the highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 2nd best servers.
3.4.4.1.5 Second Best Signal Level per HCS Layer and a Margin
For each HCS layer, k, the service area of Txi corresponds to the pixels :
Txi
SubcellReceptionThreshold P rec BCCH
Txi nd Txj
And P rec BCCH 2 Best P rec BCCH – M
ji
M is the specified margin (dB). The 2nd Best function considers the second highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is the second highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is either the second highest or within a 2 dB margin
from the second highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 3rd best servers.
ji
Txi
And the received P rec BCCH exceeds the reception threshold defined per HCS layer.
150
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is the highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is either the highest or within a 2 dB margin from
the highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 2nd best servers.
ji
And Txi belongs to the HCS layer with the highest priority. The highest priority is defined by the priority field (0: lowest).
Txi
And the received P rec BCCH exceeds the reception threshold defined per HCS layer.
In the case two layers have the same priority, the traffic is served by the transmitter for
which the difference between the received signal strength and the HCS threshold is the
highest. The way the competition is managed between layers with the same priority can
be modified. For more information, see the Administrator Manual.
M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is the highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is either the highest or within a 2 dB margin from
the highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 2nd best servers.
BER
Only the pixels with a codec mode assigned are coloured. The pixel colour depends on the BER value. Coverage consists of
several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are as many layers as transmitter
coverage areas and BER display thresholds. Each layer shows the BER in the transmitter coverage area.
FER
Only the pixels with a codec mode assigned are coloured. The pixel colour depends on the FER value. Coverage consists of
several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are as many layers as transmitter
coverage areas and FER display thresholds. Each layer shows the FER in the transmitter coverage area.
MOS
Only the pixels with a codec mode assigned are coloured. The pixel colour depends on the MOS value. Coverage consists of
several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are as many layers as transmitter
coverage areas and MOS display thresholds. Each layer shows the MOS in the transmitter coverage area.
151
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
Max BER
Only the pixels with a codec mode assigned are coloured. The pixel colour depends on the highest BER value among the BER
values for all the transmitters covering the pixel. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map
window can be managed. There are as many layers as BER display thresholds. Each layer shows the BER value.
Max FER
Only the pixels with a codec mode assigned are coloured. The pixel colour depends on the highest FER value among the FER
values for all the transmitters covering the pixel. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map
window can be managed. There are as many layers as FER display thresholds. Each layer shows the FER value.
Max MOS
Only the pixels with a codec mode assigned are coloured. The pixel colour depends on the highest MOS value among the MOS
values for all the transmitters covering the pixel. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map
window can be managed. There are as many layers as MOS display thresholds. Each layer shows the MOS value.
Txi
For pure signal level-based calculations (not C/I or C/(I+N)), P rec tt can be replaced
Txi Txi
with L total – DL or L path .
Txi
For pure signal level-based calculations (not C/I or C/(I+N)), P rec tt can be replaced
Txi Txi
with L total – DL or L path .
152
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
ji
M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is the highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is either the highest or within a 2 dB margin from
the highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 2nd best servers.
Txi
For pure signal level-based calculations (not C/I or C/(I+N)), P rec tt can be replaced
Txi Txi
with L total – DL or L path .
Txi nd Txj
And P rec tt 2 Best P rec tt – M
ji
M is the specified margin (dB). The 2nd Best function considers the second highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is the second highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is either the second highest or within a 2 dB margin
from the second highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 3rd best servers.
Txi
For pure signal level-based calculations (not C/I or C/(I+N)), P rec tt can be replaced
Txi Txi
with L total – DL or L path .
ji
M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is the highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is either the highest or within a 2 dB margin from
the highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 2nd best servers.
3.5.1.5 Second Best Signal Level per HCS Layer and a Margin
For each HCS layer, k, the service area of Txi corresponds to the pixels :
Txi
MinimumThreshold P rec tt MaximumThreshold
153
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
Txi
For pure signal level-based calculations (not C/I or C/(I+N)), P rec tt can be replaced
Txi Txi
with L total – DL or L path .
Txi nd Txj
And P rec BCCH 2 Best P rec BCCH – M
ji
M is the specified margin (dB). The 2nd Best function considers the second highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is the second highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is either the second highest or within a 2 dB margin
from the second highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 3rd best servers.
Txi
For pure signal level-based calculations (not C/I or C/(I+N)), P rec tt can be replaced
Txi Txi
with L total – DL or L path .
ji
Txi
And the received P rec tt exceeds the reception threshold defined per HCS layer.
M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is the highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is either the highest or within a 2 dB margin from
the highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 2nd best servers.
Txi
For pure signal level-based calculations (not C/I or C/(I+N)), P rec tt can be replaced
Txi Txi
with L total – DL or L path .
ji
And Txi belongs to the HCS layer with the highest priority. The highest priority is defined by the priority field (0: lowest).
Txi
And the received P rec tt exceeds the reception threshold defined per HCS layer.
In the case two layers have the same priority, the traffic is served by the transmitter for
which the difference between the received signal strength and the HCS threshold is the
highest. The way the competition is managed between layers with the same priority can
be modified. For more information, see the Administrator Manual.
154
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is the highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is either the highest or within a 2 dB margin from
the highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 2nd best servers.
Txi
For pure signal level-based calculations (not C/I or C/(I+N)), P rec tt can be replaced
Txi Txi
with L total – DL or L path .
155
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
greater than or equal to the defined thresholds (the pixel colour depends on the signal level). Coverage consists of several
independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as transmitter service areas.
Each layer shows the different UL signal levels at the transmitter on its service area.
C MSA Term Tx
--- = P rec – N tot
I UL
,
Tx Tx MSA DL
• N tot = N thermal + NF + NR Intra – techno log y is the UL total noise at transmitter on the considered MSA
Term
• P rec is the received signal level at the transmitter,
• N thermal is the thermal noise (-121 dBm by default or user-defined)
Tx
• NF is the transmitter noise figure
MSA DL
• NRIntra – techno log y is the intra-technology UL noise rise at the considered MSA. Since UL noise rise are defined per
TRX, Atoll takes the TRX UL noise rise in case of non-hopping or extracts a mean noise rise from the several TRXs
composing the MSA in case of Base Band Hopping or Synthesized Frequency Hopping.
MSA
For a given transmitter having several MSAs, all possible C --- are displayed in case the detailed results box is selected. If
I UL
not, the worst results (the min C/I per transmitter) are retained.
156
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as transmitter service areas. Each layer shows the different UL
C/I levels available in the transmitter coverage area.
• -----------
C
Threshold
I + N CS are the values of C/(I+N) thresholds for the coding schemes available in the GPRS/EDGE
configuration,
• The priorities of the coding scheme lists are as follows: DBS > DAS > MCS > CS.
Since the calculations are based on C/I and C/(I+N):
• Atoll calculates the UL C/I to all the GPRS/EDGE TBC transmitters.
• The reception thresholds given for signal level C are internally converted to C/N thresholds (N is the thermal noise
defined in the document database at -121 dBm by default) in order to be indexed by C/(I+N) values. C/I thresholds are
also indexed by the C/(I+N) value.
For more information on UL C/I calculation, see "Coverage by UL C/I" on page 156.
ji
Txi
And the received P rec BCCH exceeds the reception threshold defined per HCS layer.
157
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
For each MSA , cs C N = Lowest CS Term
P rec
----------------- ----------
C-
N I + N
Threshold
CS
And, cs C I + N = Lowest CS Term
P rec
----------------- ----------- Threshold
C
I+N I + N CS
csC/N is the coding scheme determined from the C/N, and csC/(I+N) is the coding scheme determined from the C/(I+N) level.
Both coding schemes are the coding schemes with the lowest coding scheme numbers from the lowest priority coding scheme
list.
The selected coding scheme, cs, is the coding scheme with the higher coding scheme number among csC/N and csC/(I+N):
cs = Max cs C N cs C I + N .
pN -
= ------------------- , pN is the thermal noise power (value in Watts), and p(I+N) is the interferences + thermal noise power (value
pI + N
in Watts).
158
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
ji
Txi
And the received P rec BCCH exceeds the reception threshold defined per HCS layer.
For each MSA, cm = Highest Priority CM
Term
P rec
----------------- Adaptation Threshold
I+N CM
Term
P rec
For ------------
- , Atoll determines the CQI from the CQI=f(C/I) graph associated to the selected codec mode, cm.
I+N
• If no focus zone exists in the .atl document, Atoll takes into account the computation
zone.
• For details of the average timeslot capacity calculation, see the Network
Dimensioning section (calculation of minimum reduction factor).
159
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
Sup,m is the TCH service area containing the user profile up with the mobility m and D is the user profile density.
For each behaviour described in the user profile up, Atoll calculates the probability for the user to be connected with a given
service using a terminal t.
160
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
N call d
p up c t = -------------------
-
3600
Ncall is the number of calls per hour and d is the average call duration (in seconds).
Then, Atoll evaluates the traffic demand, D up c t m , in Erlangs for the subcell (Txi, TCH) service area.
N call V 8
p up p t = -----------------------------
-
3600
Ncall is the number of calls per hour and V is the transmitted data volume per call (in Kbytes).
Then, Atoll evaluates the traffic demand, D up p t m , in kbits/s for the subcell (Txi, TCH) service area.
N call d
p up p t = -------------------
-
3600
Ncall is the number of calls per hour and d is the average call duration (in seconds).
Then, Atoll evaluates the traffic demand, D up p t m , in kbits/s for the subcell (Txi, TCH) service area.
• Traffic overflowing from the TCH_INNER to the TCH is not uniformly spread over the
TCH service area. It is still located on the TCH_INNER service area.
Number of subscribers ( X up m ) for each TCH_INNER (Txi, TCH_INNER) and TCH (Txi, TCH) subcell, per user profile up with a
given mobility m, is inferred as:
X up m Txi,TCH_INNER = S up m Txi,TCH_INNER D
S up m Txi,TCH_INNER and S up m Txi,TCH respectively refer to the TCH_INNER and TCH subcell service areas containing
the user profile up with the mobility m. D is the user profile density.
161
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
For each user of the user profile up using a circuit switched service c with a terminal t, Atoll calculates the probability
( p up c t ) of the user being connected. Calculations are detailed in "Circuit Switched Services" on page 159.
Then, Atoll evaluates the traffic demand, D up c t m , in Erlangs in the (Txi, TCH_INNER) and (Txi, TCH) subcell service areas.
O max Txi,TCH_INNER is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (in %) specified for the TCH_INNER subcell.
For each user of the user profile up using a max rate packet switched service p with a terminal t, probability of the user being
connected ( p up p t ) is calculated as explained in "Packet Switched Services" on page 159.
Atoll evaluates the traffic demand, D up p t m , in kbits/s in the (Txi, TCH_INNER) and (Txi, TCH) subcell service areas.
O max Txi,TCH_INNER is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (in %) specified for the TCH_INNER subcell.
For each user of the user profile up using a constant bit packet switched service p with a terminal t, probability of the user
being connected ( p up p t ) is calculated as explained in "Packet Switched Services" on page 159.
Atoll evaluates the traffic demand, D up p t m , in kbits/s in the (Txi, TCH_INNER) and (Txi, TCH) subcell service areas.
O max Txi,TCH_INNER is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (in %) specified for the TCH_INNER subcell.
Normal Cells
Atoll distributes traffic on the TCH service areas. The traffic capture is calculated with the option “Best signal level per HCS
macro
layer” meaning that there is an overlap between HCS layers service areas. Let S overlapping Txj TCH denote this area (TCH
service area of the macro layer overlapped by the TCH service area of the micro layer). Traffic on the overlapping area is
distributed to the TCH subcell of the micro layer because it has a higher priority. On this area, traffic of the micro layer may
overflow to the macro layer. In this case, the traffic demand is the same on the TCH subcell of the micro layer but increases
on the TCH subcell of the macro layer.
Traffic overflowing to the macro layer is not uniformly spread over the TCH service area
of Txj. It is only located on the overlapping area.
162
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
Atoll evaluates the traffic demand on the micro layer (higher priority) as explained above. For further details, please refer to
formulas for normal cells. Then, it proceeds with the macro layer (lower priority).
macro
Number of subscribers ( X up m ) for each TCH subcell (Txj, TCH) of the macro layer, per user profile up with the mobility m, is
inferred as:
macro macro macro
X up m Txj TCH = S up m Txj TCH – S up m – overlapping Txj TCH D
macro
S up m Txj TCH is the TCH service area of Txj containing the user profile up with the mobility m and D is the profile density.
For each user described in the user profile up with the circuit switched service c and the terminal t, the probability for the user
being connected ( p up c t ) is calculated as explained in "Circuit Switched Services" on page 159.
macro
Then, Atoll evaluates the traffic demand, D up c t m , in Erlangs in the subcell (Txj, TCH) service area.
macro
macro macro micro S upm – overlapping Txj TCH
D up c t m Txj TCH = X up m Txj TCH p up c t + D up c t m Txi TCH ------------------------------------------------------------------
micro
Omax Txi TCH
S up m Txi TCH
For each user described in the user profile up with the packet switched service p and the terminal t, probability for the user
to be connected ( p up p t ) is calculated as explained in "Packet Switched Services" on page 159.
macro
Then, Atoll evaluates the traffic demand, D up p t m , in kbits/s in the subcell (Txj, TCH) service area.
macro
macro macro micro S upm – overlapping Txj TCH
D up p t m Txj TCH = X up m Txj TCH p up p t + D up p t m Txi TCH ------------------------------------------------------------------
micro
Omax Txi TCH
S up m Txi TCH
O max Txi TCH is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH subcell of Txi (micro
micro
layer) and S up m Txi TCH is the TCH service area of Txi containing the user profile up with the mobility m.
Concentric Cells
Atoll evaluates the traffic demand on the micro layer (higher priority HCS layer) as explained above. For further details, please
refer to formulas given in case of concentric cells. Then, it proceeds with the macro layer (lower priority HCS layer).
The traffic capture is calculated with the option “Best signal level per HCS layer”. It means that there are overlapping areas
between HCS layers traffic is spread according to the layer priority. On these areas, traffic of the higher priority layer may
overflow.
The TCH_INNER service area of the macro layer is overlapped by the micro layer. This area consists of two parts: an area
macro
overlapped by the TCH service area of the micro layer S overlapping – Txi TCH Txj,TCH_INNER and another overlapped by
macro
the TCH_INNER service area of the micro layer S overlapping – Txi,TCH_INNER Txj,TCH_INNER .
macro
S 2 = S up m – overlapping – Txi,TCH_INNER Txj,TCH_INNER
macro
S 3 = S up m – overlapping – Txi TCH Txj,TCH_INNER – S 2
163
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
macro
S up m Txj,TCH_INNER is the TCH_INNER subcell service area of Txj containing the user profile up with the mobility m. We
only consider the overlapping areas containing the user profile up with the mobility m.
macro
On S1, the number of subscribers per user profile up with a given mobility m ( X up m ) is inferred:
macro
X up m Txj,TCH_INNER = S 1 D
S2
R 2 = -------------------------------------------------------
-
micro
S up m Txi,TCH_INNER
The traffic spread over the ring served by the TCH subcell of the micro layer only may overflow on S3 proportional to R3.
S3
R 3 = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
micro micro
S up m Txi,TCH – S up m Txi,TCH_INNER
micro micro
S up m Txi,TCH and S up m Txi,TCH_INNER are the TCH and TCH_INNER service areas of Txi respectively containing the
user profile up with the mobility m.
For each user described in the user profile up with a circuit switched service c and a terminal t, the probability for the user
being connected ( p up c t ) is calculated as explained in "Circuit Switched Services" on page 159. Then, Atoll evaluates the
macro
traffic demand, D up c t m , in Erlangs in the subcell (Txj, TCH_INNER) service area.
macro
X up m Txj,TCH_INNER p up c t +
macro
D up c t m Txj,TCH_INNER = R D micro Txi,TCH_INNER O Txi,TCH_INNER O Txi,TCH +
2 up c t m max max
micro
R 3 X up m Txi TCH p up c t O max Txi TCH
For each user described in the user profile up with a packet switched service p and a terminal t, probability for the user to be
connected ( p up p t ) is calculated as explained in "Packet Switched Services" on page 159.
macro
Then, Atoll evaluates the traffic demand, D up p t m , stated in kbits/s in the subcell (Txj, TCH_INNER) service area.
macro
X up m Txj,TCH_INNER p up p t +
macro
D up p t m Txj,TCH_INNER = R D micro
2 up p t m Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi,TCH +
micro
R 3 X up m Txi TCH p up p t O max Txi TCH
164
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
O max Txi TCH and O max Txi,TCH_INNER are the maximum rates of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH
and TCH_INNER subcells of Txi respectively.
The area of the TCH ring of the macro layer is overlapped by the micro layer. There are two parts: an area overlapped by the
macro
TCH service area of the micro layer S overlapping – Txi TCH Txj,TCH -- TCH_INNER and another one by the TCH_INNER
macro
service area of the micro layer S overlapping – Txi,TCH_INNER Txj,TCH -- TCH_INNER .
macro
S' 2 = S up m – overlapping – Txi,TCH_INNER Txj,TCH -- TCH_INNER
macro
S' 3 = S up m – overlapping – Txi TCH Txj,TCH -- TCH_INNER – S' 2
macro macro
S up m Txj,TCH and S up m Txj,TCH_INNER are the TCH and TCH_INNER subcell service areas of Txj respectively. We only
consider the overlapping areas containing the user profile up with the mobility m.
macro
On S’1, the number of subscribers per user profile up with a given mobility m ( X up m ) is inferred:
macro
X up m Txj,TCH = S' 1 D
S' 2
R' 2 = -------------------------------------------------------
-
micro
S up m Txi,TCH_INNER
The traffic spread over the ring served by the TCH subcell of the micro layer only may overflow on S’3 proportional to R’3.
S' 3
R' 3 = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
micro micro
S up m Txi,TCH – S up m Txi,TCH_INNER
micro micro
S up m Txi,TCH and S up m Txi,TCH_INNER are the TCH and TCH_INNER service areas of Txi respectively containing the
user profile up with the mobility m.
For each user described in the user profile up with a circuit switched service c and a terminal t, the probability for the user
being connected ( p up c t ) is calculated as explained in "Circuit Switched Services" on page 159.
macro
Then, Atoll evaluates the traffic demand, D up c t m , in Erlangs in the subcell (Txj, TCH) service area.
macro
X up m Txj TCH p up c t +
macro
macro D up c t m Txj,TCH_INNER O max Txj,TCH_INNER +
D up c t m Txj TCH =
micro
R' 2 D up c t m Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi,TCH +
micro
R' 3 X up m Txi TCH p up c t m O max Txi TCH
For each user described in the user profile up with a packet switched service p and a terminal t, the probability for the user
being connected ( p up p t ) is calculated as explained in "Packet Switched Services" on page 159.
macro
Then, Atoll evaluates the traffic demand, D up p t m , in kbits/s in the subcell (Txj, TCH) service area.
macro
X up m Txj TCH p up p t +
macro
macro D up p t m Txj,TCH_INNER O max Txj,TCH_INNER +
D up p t m Txj TCH =
micro
R' 2 D up p t m Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi,TCH +
micro
R' 3 X up m Txi TCH p up p t m O max Txi TCH
165
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
O max Txi,TCH is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH subcell of Txi (micro layer),
O max Txi,TCH_INNER the maximum rate of traffic overflow indicated for the TCH_INNER subcell of Txi (macro layer),
O max Txj,TCH_INNER the maximum rate of traffic overflow indicated for the TCH_INNER subcell of Txj (macro layer) and
micro
X up m Txi TCH the number of subscribers with the user profile up and mobility m on the TCH service area of Txi (as
explained in "Concentric Cells" on page 160).
Let T p Txi TCH denote the throughput of the packet switched service (Max Bit Rate), p, on the TCH subcell of Txi.
Let E p Txi TCH denote the Erlangs for the packet switched service (Constant Bit Rate), p, on the TCH subcell of Txi.
We assume that 100% of users have the terminal, t, and the mobility type, m.
For each packet switched service (Max Bit Rate), p, Atoll evaluates the traffic demand, Dp,t,m, in kbits/s in the subcell (Txi, TCH)
service area.
D p t m Txi TCH = T p Txi TCH
For each packet switched service (Constant Bit Rate), p, Atoll evaluates the traffic demand, Dp,t,m, in kbits/s in the subcell (Txi,
TCH) service area.
D p t m Txi TCH = E p Txi TCH TP p GBR
TP p GBR is the guaranteed bit rate of the constant bit rate packet switched service p.
Traffic overflowing from the TCH_INNER to the TCH is not uniformly spread over the TCH
service area. It is only located on the TCH_INNER service area.
For each circuit switched service, c, Atoll evaluates the traffic demand, Dc,t,m, in Erlangs in the subcell, (Txi, TCH_INNER) and
(Txi, TCH), service areas.
S Txi,TCH_INNER
D c t m Txi,TCH_INNER = -------------------------------------------- E c Txi TCH
S Txi TCH
and
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
S Txi,TCH – S Txi,TCH_INNER -
E c Txi TCH +
D c t m Txi,TCH = S Txi TCH
D c t m Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi,TCH_INNER
For each packet switched service (Max Bit Rate), p, Atoll evaluates the traffic demand, Dp,t,m, in kbits/s in the subcell, (Txi,
TCH_INNER) and (Txi, TCH), service areas.
166
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
S Txi,TCH_INNER
D p t m Txi,TCH_INNER = -------------------------------------------- T p Txi TCH
S Txi TCH
and
S Txi,TCH – S Txi,TCH_INNER
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- T p Txi TCH +
D p t m Txi,TCH = S Txi TCH
D p t m Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi,TCH_INNER
O max Txi,TCH_INNER is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH_INNER subcell,
S Txi,TCH and S Txi,TCH_INNER are the TCH and TCH_INNER service areas of Txi respectively.
For each packet switched service (Constant Bit Rate), p, Atoll evaluates the traffic demand, Dp,t,m, in kbits/s in the subcell, (Txi,
TCH_INNER) and (Txi, TCH), service areas.
S Txi,TCH_INNER
D p t m Txi,TCH_INNER = -------------------------------------------- E p Txi TCH TP p GBR
S Txi TCH
and
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
S Txi,TCH – S Txi,TCH_INNER -
E p Txi TCH TP p GBR +
D p t m Txi,TCH = S Txi TCH
D p t m Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi,TCH_INNER
O max Txi,TCH_INNER is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH_INNER subcell,
S Txi,TCH and S Txi,TCH_INNER are the TCH and TCH_INNER service areas of Txi respectively.
Normal Cells
Atoll distributes traffic on the TCH service areas. The traffic capture is calculated with the option “HCS Servers”. It means that
macro
there is an overlapping area between HCS layers. Let S overlapping Txj TCH denote the TCH service area of the macro layer
overlapped by the TCH service area of the micro layer. Traffic on the overlapping area is distributed to the TCH subcell of the
micro layer (higher priority layer). On this area, traffic of the micro layer may overflow to the macro layer. In this case, the
traffic demand is the same on the TCH subcell of the micro layer but rises on the TCH subcell of the macro layer.
Traffic overflowing on the macro layer is not uniformly spread over the TCH service area
of Txj. It is only located on the overlapping area.
Atoll starts evaluating the traffic demand on the micro layer (highest priority HCS layer).
micro
For each circuit switched service, c, Atoll calculates the traffic demand, D c t m , in Erlangs in the subcell (Txi, TCH) service
area.
micro
D c t m Txi TCH = E c Txi TCH
micro
For each packet switched service (Max Bit Rate), p, Atoll calculates the traffic demand, D p t m , in kbits/s in the subcell (Txi,
TCH) service area.
micro
D p t m Txi TCH = T p Txi TCH
micro
For each packet switched service (Constant Bit Rate), p, Atoll calculates the traffic demand, D p t m , in kbits/s in the subcell
(Txi, TCH) service area.
micro
D p t m Txi TCH = E p Txi TCH TP p GBR
Then, Atoll proceeds with the macro layer (lower priority HCS layer).
macro
For each circuit switched service, c, Atoll calculates the traffic demand, D c t m , in Erlangs in the subcell (Txj, TCH) service area.
167
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
macro
macro micro S overlapping Txj TCH
D c t m Txj TCH = E c Txj TCH + D c t m Txi TCH ----------------------------------------------------
micro
- O max Txi TCH
S Txi TCH
macro
For each packet switched service (Max Bit Rate), p, Atoll calculates the traffic demand, D p t m , in kbits/s in the subcell (Txj,
TCH) service area.
macro
macro micro S overlapping Txj TCH
D p t m Txj TCH = T p Txj TCH + D p t m Txi TCH ----------------------------------------------------
micro
- O max Txi TCH
S Txi TCH
O max Txi TCH is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (in %) specified for the TCH subcell of Txi (micro cell) and
micro
S Txi TCH the TCH service area of Txi.
macro
For each packet switched service (Constant Bit Rate), p, Atoll calculates the traffic demand, D p t m , in kbits/s in the subcell
(Txj, TCH) service area.
macro
macro micro S overlapping Txj TCH
D p t m Txj TCH = E p Txi TCH TP p GBR + D p t m Txi TCH ----------------------------------------------------
micro
- O max Txi TCH
S Txi TCH
O max Txi TCH is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (in %) specified for the TCH subcell of Txi (micro cell) and
micro
S Txi TCH the TCH service area of Txi.
You can restrict the traffic assignement of each traffic map to a specific HCS layer in the
running options of the traffic capture. If you do so, no overflow occurs between HCS
layers and the only overflow which is considered occurs within concentric cells (See
"Concentric Cells" on page 160).
Concentric Cells
Atoll evaluates the traffic demand on the micro layer as explained above in case of concentric cells and then proceeds with
the macro layer (lower priority layer).
The traffic capture is calculated with the option “HCS Servers”. It means that there is overlapping areas between HCS layers
traffic is spread over according to the layer priority. On these areas, traffic of the higher priority layer may overflow.
The TCH_INNER service area of the macro layer is overlapped by the micro layer. This area consists of two parts: an area
macro
overlapped by the TCH service area of the micro layer S overlapping – Txi TCH Txj,TCH_INNER and another overlapped by
macro
the TCH_INNER service area of the micro layer S overlapping – Txi,TCH_INNER Txj,TCH_INNER .
168
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
macro macro
S1 = S Txj,TCH_INNER – S overlapping – Txi TCH Txj,TCH_INNER
macro
S 2 = S overlapping – Txi,TCH_INNER Txj,TCH_INNER
macro
S 3 = S overlapping – Txi TCH Txj,TCH_INNER – S 2
macro
S Txj,TCH_INNER is the TCH_INNER subcell service area of Txj.
The traffic specified for Txj in the map description ( E c Txj TCH ) is spread over S1 proportionally to R1.
S1
R 1 = -------------------------------------
map
S Txj TCH
map
S Txj TCH is the TCH service area of Txj in the traffic map with the option “Best signal level of the highest priority
layer”.
The traffic spread over the TCH_INNER service area of the micro layer may overflow to the TCH subcell. The traffic overflowing
to the TCH subcell is located on the TCH_INNER service area. On S2, the TCH subcell traffic coming from the TCH_INNER subcell
traffic overflow may overflow proportional to R2.
S2
R 2 = -------------------------------------------------------
-
micro
S Txi,TCH_INNER
The traffic spread over the ring only served by the TCH subcell of the micro layer may overflow on S3 proportional to R3.
S3
R 3 = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
micro micro
S Txi,TCH – S Txi,TCH_INNER
macro
For each circuit switched service, c, Atoll calculates the traffic demand, D c t m , in Erlangs in the subcell (Txj, TCH_INNER)
service area.
R 1 E c Txj TCH +
micro
macro R 2 D c t m Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi TCH +
D c t m Txj,TCH_INNER =
micro micro
S Txi TCH – S Txi,TCH_INNER
R 3 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
micro
- E c Txi TCH O max Txi TCH
S Txi TCH
macro
For each packet switched service (Max Bit Rate), p, Atoll calculates the traffic demand, D p t m , in kbits/s in the subcell (Txj,
TCH_INNER) service area.
R 1 T p Txj TCH +
micro
macro R 2 D p t m Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi TCH +
D p t m Txj,TCH_INNER =
micro micro
S Txi TCH – S Txi,TCH_INNER -
R 3 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
micro
T p Txi TCH O max Txi TCH
S Txi TCH
O max Txi TCH is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH subcell of Txi,
O max Txi,TCH_INNER is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH_INNER subcell of Txi and
micro
S Txi TCH is the TCH subcell service area of Txi.
macro
For each packet switched service (Constant Bit Rate), p, Atoll calculates the traffic demand, D p t m , in kbits/s in the subcell
(Txj, TCH_INNER) service area.
169
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
O max Txi TCH is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH subcell of Txi,
O max Txi,TCH_INNER is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH_INNER subcell of Txi and
micro
S Txi TCH is the TCH subcell service area of Txi.
The area of the TCH ring of the macro layer is overlapped by the micro layer. There are two parts: an area overlapped by the
macro
TCH service area of the micro layer S overlapping – Txi TCH Txj,TCH -- TCH_INNER and another overlapped by the
macro
TCH_INNER service area of the micro layer S overlapping – Txi,TCH_INNER Txj,TCH -- TCH_INNER .
macro
S' 2 = S overlapping – Txi,TCH_INNER Txj,TCH -- TCH_INNER
macro
S' 3 = S overlapping – Txi TCH Txj,TCH -- TCH_INNER – S' 2
macro macro
S Txj TCH and S Txj,TCH_INNER are the TCH and TCH_INNER subcell service areas of Txj respectively.
The traffic specified for Txj in the map description ( E c Txj TCH ) is spread over S’1 proportional to R’1.
S' 1
R' 1 = -------------------------------------
map
S Txj TCH
map
S Txj TCH is the TCH service area of Txj in the traffic map with the option “Best signal level of the highest priority
layer”.
The traffic spread over the TCH_INNER service area of the micro layer may overflow to the TCH subcell. The traffic overflowing
to the TCH subcell is located on the TCH_INNER service area. On S’2, the TCH subcell traffic coming from the TCH_INNER
subcell traffic overflow may overflow proportional to R’2.
S' 2
R' 2 = -------------------------------------------------------
-
micro
S Txi,TCH_INNER
The traffic spread over the ring only served by the TCH subcell of the micro layer may overflow on S’3 proportional to R’3.
S' 3
R' 3 = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
micro micro
S Txi,TCH – S Txi,TCH_INNER
macro
For each circuit switched service, c, Atoll calculates the traffic demand, D c t m , in Erlangs in the subcell (Txj, TCH) service area.
macro
For each packet switched service (Max Bit Rate), p,Atoll calculates the traffic demand, D p t m , in kbits/s in the subcell (Txj,
TCH) service area.
170
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
O max Txj,TCH_INNER is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH_INNER subcell of Txj,
O max Txi TCH is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH subcell of Txi,
O max Txi,TCH_INNER is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH_INNER subcell of Txi,
micro micro
S Txi,TCH is the TCH subcell service area of Txi and S Txi,TCH_INNER is the TCH_INNER subcell service area of
Txi.
macro
For each packet switched service (Constant Bit Rate), p,Atoll calculates the traffic demand, D p t m , in kbits/s in the subcell
(Txj, TCH) service area.
O max Txj,TCH_INNER is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH_INNER subcell of Txj,
O max Txi TCH is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH subcell of Txi,
O max Txi,TCH_INNER is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH_INNER subcell of Txi,
micro micro
S Txi,TCH is the TCH subcell service area of Txi and S Txi,TCH_INNER is the TCH_INNER subcell service area of
Txi.
171
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
3.7.1.2.1 Throughput
Throughput is defined as the amount of data delivered to the Logical Link Control Layer in a given unit of time. Each temporary
block flow (TBF), and hence each user, has an associated measured throughput sample in a given network. Each network will
have a different throughput probability distribution depending on the load and network configuration. Instead of using the
precise probability distributions, it is more practical to compute the average and percentile throughput values.
In GPRS, the resources are shared between the users being served, and consequently, the throughput is reduced as the
number of active users increases. This reduction in user perceived throughput is modelled through a reduction factor. The
throughput experienced by a user accessing a particular service can be calculated as:
User throughput = Number of allocated timeslots x Timeslot capacity x Reduction Factor
Or
User throughput per allocated timeslot = Timeslot capacity x Reduction Factor
Timeslot Capacity
The timeslot capacity is the average throughput per fully utilized timeslot. It represents the average throughput from the
network point of view. It mainly depends on the network’s propagation conditions and criteria in the coverage area of a
transmitter (carrier power, carrier-to-interference distribution, etc.). It is a measure of how much data the network is able to
transfer with 1 data Erlang, or in other words, how efficiently the hardware resources are being utilized by the network. It may
also depend on the RLC protocol efficiency.
Atoll computes the average timeslot capacity during the traffic analysis and is used to determine the minimum throughput
reduction factor. But since this information is displayed in the network dimensioning results (only due to relevance), this
information has been considered as a part of the network dimensioning process in this document.
Timeslot Utilisation
Timeslot utilization takes into account the average number of timeslots that are available for packet switched traffic. It is a
measure of how much the network is loaded with data services. Networks with timeslot utilisation close to 100% are close to
saturation and the end-user performance is likely to be very poor.
In Atoll this parameter is termed as the Load (Traffic load for circuit switched traffic and packet switched traffic load for packet
switched traffic). It is described in more detail in the Network dimensioning steps section.
Reduction Factor
Reduction factor takes into account the user throughput reduction due to timeslot sharing among many users. The figure
below shows how the peak throughput available per timeslot is reduced by interference and sharing.Reduction factor is a
function of the number of timeslots assigned to a user (Nu), number of timeslots available in the system (Ns) and the average
system packet switched traffic load (Lp) (utilization of resources in the system). Data Erlangs or data traffic is given by:
Data Erlangs = L P N S
172
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
More precisely, the reduction factor is a function of the ratio Ns/Nu (Np). Np models the equivalent timeslots that are available
for the packet switched traffic in the system. For example, a 24-timeslot system with each user assigned 3 timeslots per
connection can be modelled by a single timeslot connection system with 8 timeslots in total.
The formula for reduction factor can be derived following the same hypotheses followed by Erlang in the derivation of the
blocking probability formulas (Erlang B and Erlang C).
Let X be a random variable that measures the reduction factor in a certain system state:
0 if n = 0
1 if 0 < n NP
X
N
-----P- if n > NP
n
n is the instantaneous number of connections in the system. The throughput reduction factor is defined as:
P X= n
RF X --------------------
P X= 0
-
n=0
Or,
PX= n
RF = X ---------------------------
-
P X= i
n=0
i 0
Here, P(X=n) is the probability function of having n connections in the system. Under the same assumptions as those of the
Erlang formulas, the probability function can be written as:
n
LP NP
-----------------------
n!
P X = n = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
N
if 0 n N P
P
i i
LP NP LP NP
---------------------
i!
+ ------------------------------
i – NP
i=0 i=N + 1 N P! N P
P
n
LP NP
------------------------------
i – N
P
N P! N P
P X = n = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
N
if n > N P
P
i i
LP NP LP NP
---------------------
i!
+ ------------------------------
i – NP
i=0 i = NP + 1 N P! N P
173
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
NP
i i
LP NP LP NP N
--------------------- + ------------------------------ -----P-
i! i – N i
P
i=1 i = N + 1 N P! N P
RF = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
N
P -
P
i i
LP NP LP NP
--------------------- +
i! ------------------------------
i – N
P
i=1 i = NP + 1 N P! N P
This formula is not directly applicable in any software application due to the summations up to infinity. Atoll uses the following
version of this formula that is exactly the same formula without the summation overflow problem.
NP NP + 1 N
n P
n
LP NP NP L
----------------------- – ------------------- ln 1 – L P + ----P
n! N P! n
n = 1 n = 1
RF = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
N
-
P NP
n
LP NP LP NP LP
----------------------- + -------------------------- --------------
n! N P! 1 – LP
n=1
The default quality curves for the Reduction Factor have been derived using the above formula. Each curve is for a fixed
number of timeslots available for packet switched traffic (Np) describing the reduction factor at different values of packet
switched traffic load (Lp). The figure below contains all the reduction factor quality curves in Atoll. The Maximum reduction
factor can be 1, implying a maximum throughput, and the minimum can be 0, implying a saturated system with no data
throughput.
Figure 3.9: Reduction Factor for Different Packet Switched Traffic Loads (Lp, X-axis)
Each curve in the above figure represents an equivalent number of packet switched timeslots, NP.
3.7.1.2.2 Delay
Delay is the time required for an LLC PDU to be completely transferred from the SGSN to the MS, or vice versa. As the delay
is a function of the delays and the losses incurred at the packet level, the network parameters, such as the packet queue
length, and different protocol properties, such as the size of the LLC PDU, become important. It is also quite dependent upon
the radio access round trip time (RA RTT) and has a considerable impact on the application level performance viewed by the
user.
The delay parameter is a user level parameter rather than being a network level quantity, like throughput per cell, timeslot
capacity, TBF blocking and reduction factor, hence it is difficult to model and is currently under study. Hence, no default curve
is presently available for delay in Atoll.
174
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
P X= n for n = M N P + 1
n
LP NP
------------------------------
i – NP
N P! N P
P X = n = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
N
P
i i
LP NP LP NP
--------------------- +
i! ------------------------------
i – NP
i=0 i = NP + 1 N P! N P
Eliminating the summations to infinity, the blocking probability can be stated in a simpler form:
M NP
LP NP LP
- -------------
----------------------------------------- -
M NP – NP 1 – L
N P! N P P
BP = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
N
P NP
i
LP NP LP NP LP
--------------------- + -------------------------- -------------
i! N P! 1 – LP
-
i=0
The above formula has been used to generate the default quality curves for blocking probability in Atoll.
These graphs are generated for a user multiplexing factor of 8 users per timeslot. Each curve represents an equivalent number
of packet switched timeslots, NP.
The curves depict the blocking probabilities for different number of available connections (Np) at different packet switched
traffic loads (Lp) for a fixed user multiplexing factor of 8. The figure below contains all the blocking probability curves for
packet switched traffic dimensioning in Atoll. The blocking probability increases with the packet switched traffic load, which
implies that as the packet switched traffic increases for a given number of timeslots, the system starts to get more and more
loaded, hence there is higher probability of having a temporary block flow placed in a waiting queue.
175
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
Figure 3.10: Blocking Probability for Different Packet Switched Traffic Loads (Lp, X-axis)
176
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
On the whole, following are the inputs and outputs of the network dimensioning process:
3.7.2.1.1 Inputs
• Circuit switched traffic demand
• Packet switched traffic demand
• Timeslot configurations defined for each subcell
• Target traffic overflow rate and Half-rate traffic ratio for each subcell
• Service availability criteria: minimum required throughput per user, maximum permissible delay, maximum allowable
blocking probability etc.
• Dimensioning model parameters: Maximum number of TRXs per transmitter, dimensioning model for circuit switched
traffic, number of minimum dedicated packet switched timeslots per transmitter, maximum number of TRXs added
for packet switched services, KPIs to consider, and their quality curves.
3.7.2.1.2 Outputs
• Number of required TRXs per transmitter
• Number of required shared, circuit switched and packet switched timeslots
• Traffic load
• Served circuit switched traffic
• Served packet switched traffic
• Effective rate of traffic overflow
• Actual KPI values: throughput reduction factor, delay and blocking probability
Atoll considers the effect of half-rate circuit switched traffic by taking into account a user-defined percentage of half-rate
traffic. Atoll computes the effective equivalent number of full-rate timeslots that will be required to carry the total traffic with
the defined percentage of half-rate traffic.
If the number of timeslots required to accommodate the full-rate circuit switched traffic is TSreq. FR, and the percentage of
half-rate traffic within the subcell is defined by HR, then the effective number of equivalent full-rate circuit switched timeslots
TSeff. that can carry this traffic mix is calculated by:
TS eff = TS reqFR 1 – HR
-------
2
177
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
Atoll employs this simplified approach to integrating half-rate circuit switched traffic, which provides approximately the same
results as obtained by using the half-rate traffic charts.
3.7.2.2.3 Step 3: Effective CS Blocking, Effective CS Traffic Overflow and Served CS Traffic
In this step, the previously calculated number of required TRXs is used to compute the effective blocking rate for the circuit
switched traffic. This is performed by using the Erlang B or Erlang C formula with the circuit switched traffic demand and the
number of required TRXs as inputs and computing the Grade of Service (or blocking probability). It then calculates the
effective traffic overflow rate, Oeff..
In case of Erlang B formula, the effective rate of traffic overflow for the circuit switched traffic is the same as the circuit
switched blocking rate. While in case of the Erlang C model, the circuit switched traffic is supposed to be placed in an infinite-
length waiting queue. This implies that there is no overflow in this case.
From this data, it also computes the served circuit switched traffic. This is the difference of the circuit switched traffic demand
and the percentage of traffic that overflows from the subcell to other subcells calculated above. Hence, for an effective traffic
overflow rate of Oeff. and the circuit switched traffic demand of TDC, the served circuit switched traffic STC is computed as:
ST C = TD C 1 – O eff
TS C = TS S + TS C dedicated
ST C – TS C dedicated + TD P
Timeslots
L P = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
TS P
The second important parameter for the calculation of Reduction Factor, Delay and Blocking Probability is the equivalent
number of available timeslots for packet switched traffic, i.e. NP. This is computed by dividing the total number of timeslots
178
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
available for carrying packet switched traffic by the number of downlink timeslots defined in the mobile terminal properties.
So, NP is calculated at this stage as:
TS P
N P = -----------------------
-
TS Terminal
, TSTerminal is the number of timeslots that a terminal will use in packet switched calls.
The number timeslots that a terminal can use in packet switched calls is the product of the number of available DL timeslots
for packet-switched services (on a frame) and the number of simultaneous carriers (in case of EDGE evolution).
The number of timeslots that a terminal will use in packet switched calls is determined by taking the lower of the maximum
number of timeslots on a carrier for packet switched service defined in the service properties and the maximum number of
timeslots that a mobile terminal can use for packet switched services (see above) on acarrier.
Here, the min(X,Y) function yields the lower value among X and Y as result.
Now, knowing the packet switched traffic load, LP, and the equivalent number of available timeslots, NP, Atoll finds out the
KPIs that have been selected before launching the dimensioning process using the quality curves stored in the dimensioning
model.
This particular part of this step can be iterative if the KPIs to consider in dimensioning are not satisfied in the first try. If the
KPIs calculated above are within acceptable limits as defined by the user, it means that the dimensioning process has
acceptable results. If these KPIs are not satisfied, then Atoll increases the number of TRXs calculated for carrying packet
switched traffic by 1 (each increment adding 8 more timeslots for carrying packet switched traffic as the least unit that can be
physically added or removed is a TRX) and resumes the computations from Step 3. It then recalculates the packet switched
traffic load, LP, and the equivalent number of available timeslots, NP. Then it recomputes the KPIs with these new values of LP
and NP. If the KPIs are within satisfactory limits the results are considered to be acceptable. Otherwise, Atoll performs another
iteration to find the best possible results.
The calculated values of all the KPIs are compared with the ones defined in the service properties. The values for maximum
Delay and Blocking probability are defined directly in the properties but the minimum throughput reduction factor is
calculated by Atoll using the user’s inputs: minimum throughput per user and required availability. This calculation is in fact
performed during the traffic analysis process, but since it is relevant to the dimensioning procedure, it is displayed in a column
in the dimensioning results so that the user can easily compare the minimum requirement on the reduction factor KPI with
the resulting one. If dimensioning is not based on a traffic analysis, the minimum throughput reduction factor is a user-defined
parameter.
The minimum throughput reduction factor is computed using the input data: minimum required throughput per user defined
in the service properties, the average throughput per timeslot deduced from the throughput curves stored in the GPRS/EDGE
configuration properties for each coding scheme, the total number of downlink timeslots defined in the properties of the
mobile terminal (See TS Max TerminalType defintion above) and the required availability defined in the service properties.
It is at the stage of calculating the average timeslot capacity per transmitter that Atoll studies each covered pixel for carrier
power or carrier-to-interference ratio. According to the measured carrier power or carrier-to-interference ratio, Atoll deduces
the maximum throughput available on that pixel through the throughput vs. C or throughput vs. C/I curves of the GPRS/EDGE
configuration.
The throughput per timeslot per pixel TPTS, Pixel can be either a function of carrier power C, or carrier power C and the carrier-
to-interference ratio C/I, depending on the user-defined traffic analysis RF conditions criteria. Therefore,
TP TS Pixel = f C
Or
179
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
TP user min
RF min Pixel = ----------------------------------------------------
-
TP TS Pixel TS Terminal
Once the minimum reduction factor for each pixel is known, Atoll calculates the global minimum reduction factor that is
satisfied by the percentage of covered pixels defined in the required availability. The following example may help in
understanding the concept and calculation method.
Example: Let the total number of pixels, covered by a subcell S, be 1050. The reliability level set to 90%. This implies that the
required minimum throughput for the given service will be available at 90% of the pixels covered. This, in turn, implies that
there will be a certain limit on the reduction factor, i.e. if the actual reduction factor in that subcell becomes less than a
minimum required, the service will not be satisfactory.
Atoll computes the minimum reduction factor at each pixel using the formula mentioned above, and outputs the following
results:
RFmin Number of pixels
0.3 189
0.36 57
0.5 20
0.6 200
0.72 473
0.9 23
0.98 87
So for a reliability level of 90%, the corresponding RFmin will be the one provided at least 90% of the pixels covered, i.e. 945
pixels. The corresponding value of the resulting RFmin in this example hence turns out to be 0.9, since this value covers 962
pixels in total. Only 87 of the covered pixels imply an RFmin of 0.98. These will be the pixels that do not provide satisfactory
service.
This calculation is performed for each service type available in the subcell coverage area. The final minimum throughput
reduction factor is the highest one amongst all calculated for each service separately.
The minimum throughput reduction factor RFmin value is a minimum requirement that must be fulfilled by the network
dimensioning process when the Reduction Factor KPI is selected in the dimensioning model.
180
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
ST C + ST P
L = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
TS C dedicated + TS P dedicated + TS S
,
• STC is the served circuit switched traffic
• STP is the served packet switched traffic
• TSC, dedicated is the number of dedicated circuit switched timeslots
• TSP, dedicated is the number of dedicated packet switched timeslots
• TSS is the number of shared timeslots
TS C = TS S + TS C dedicated
And the number of timeslots available for the packet switched traffic, TSP, is given by:
TS P = TS S + TS P dedicated
3.8.1.1 Erlang B
Under the current conditions of circuit switched traffic demand, TDC, and the number of timeslots available for the circuit
switched traffic, TSC, the percentage of blocked circuit switched traffic can be computed through:
TS C
TD C
---------------------
TS C !
% of blocked traffic = --------------------------
TS
C
k
TD C
----------------
k!
k=0
In a network dimensioning based on Erlang B model, the circuit switched traffic overflow rate, OC, is the same as the
percentage of traffic blocked by the subcell calculated above.
3.8.1.2 Erlang C
Similarly, under the current conditions of circuit switched traffic demand, TDC, and the number of timeslots available for the
circuit switched traffic, TSC, the percentage of delayed circuit switched traffic can be computed through:
181
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
TS
C
TD C
% of traffic delayed = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TS – 1
-
C
k
TS TD TD C
+ TS C ! 1 – --------C-
C
TD C ---------------
-
TS C k!
k=0
If the circuit switched traffic demand, TDC, is higher than the number of timeslots available to accommodate circuit switched
traffic, the column for this result will be empty signifying that there is a percentage of circuit switched traffic actually being
rejected rather than just being delayed under the principle of Erlang C model.
The circuit switched traffic overflow rate, OC, will be 0 if the circuit switched traffic demand, TDC, is less than the number of
timeslots available for the circuit switched traffic, TSC.
If, on the other hand, the circuit switched traffic demand, TDC, is higher than the number of timeslots available to carry the
circuit switched traffic, TSC, then there will be a certain percentage of circuit switched traffic that will overflow from the
subcell. This circuit switched traffic overflow rate, OC, is calculated as:
TD C – TS C
O C = -----------------------
TD C
ST C = TD C 1 – O C
TD T = TD C + TD P
TS C dedicated + TS P dedicated + TS S – ST C
- 100
O P = 1 – -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TD P
3.8.2.1.4 Delay
Again for a 100% loaded or saturated subcell, the delay at the packet switched service user end will be infinite as there is no
data transfer (throughput = 0).
182
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
ST P = TD P 1 – O P
ST C – TS C dedicated + TD P
Timeslots
L P = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
TS P
The second parameter for computing the KPIs from the quality curves of the dimensioning model is the number of equivalent
timeslots available for the packet switched data traffic, NP, which is calculated in the same manner as in the dimensioning
process as well:
TS P
N P = -----------------------
-
TS Terminal
These parameters calculated, now Atoll can compute the required KPIs through their respective quality curves.
TD T
Traffic Load = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
TS C dedicated + TS P dedicated + TS S
3.8.2.2.4 Delay
The resulting delay the subcell is calculated through the delay quality curve for given packet switched traffic load, LP, and
number of equivalent timeslots, NP.
183
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
3.9 Simulations
Once you have modelled the network services and users and have created traffic maps, you can create simulations. The simu-
lation process consists of two steps:
1. Obtaining a realistic user distribution: Atoll generates a user distribution using a Monte Carlo algorithm; this user
distribution is based on the traffic database and traffic maps and is weighted by a Poisson distribution between simu-
lations of the same group.
Each user is assigned a service, a mobility type, and an activity status by random trial, according to a probability law
that uses the traffic database.
The user activity status is an important output of the random trial and has direct consequences on the next step of
the simulation and on the network interferences. A user can be either active or inactive. Both active and inactive users
consume radio resources and create interference.
Finally, another random trial determines user positions in their respective traffic zone (possibly according to the clut-
ter weighting and the indoor ratio per clutter class).
2. Modelling network regulation mechanisms: Atoll manages the GSM resources as described in "Radio Resource Man-
agement in GSM" on page 184
184
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
185
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
See detailed information in "Servers Selection" on page 187 and "Codec Mode Assignment and DL Power Control" on
page 187.
3. For each packet-switched mobile
a. Determines the server and the MSA to which the packet-switched mobile is attached.
b. Determines the downlink C/(I+N) for each of these mobiles as explained in "DL Carrier-to-Interference Ratio Cal-
culation" on page 131.
c. Determines the uplink C/(I+N) for each of these mobiles as explained "UL C/I Evaluation" on page 156
d. Determines MSA coding scheme in downlink as explained in "Calculations Based on C/(I+N)" on page 137 part of
"Coding Scheme Selection and Throughput Calculation Without Ideal Link Adaptation" on page 137.
e. Determines MSA coding scheme in uplink as explained in "Coding Scheme Selection" on page 158.
f. Evaluates the number of necessary timeslots to reach the minimum downlink and uplink throughput demands
(defined in the requested service) of the users randomly ranked.
g. Performs the corresponding target power controls. The number of timeslots in DL and UL are obviously not linked.
See detailed information in "Servers Selection" on page 187 and "Coding Scheme Assignment, Throughput Evaluation
and DL Power Control" on page 188.
4. It equally shares the remaining resources to packet-switched users who did not reach their maximum throughput
demands. Resources and throughputs are finally assigned to each packet-switched user.
See detailed information in "Codec Mode Assignment and DL Power Control" on page 187.
5. It updates the traffic loads, Half-Rate traffic ratios, DL power control gains and DTX gains of all the subcells according
to the resources in use and the total resources.
See detailed information in "Subcell Traffic Loads Management" on page 189, "Half-Rate Traffic Ratio Management"
on page 189, "DL Power Control Gain Management" on page 189 and "DTX DL Gain Management" on page 190.
6. It updates the UL traffic loads of all the subcells and the UL noise rises of all the TRXs according to the resources in use
and the total resources.
7. Performs the convergence test to see whether the differences between the current and the new loads are within the
convergence thresholds.
The convergence criteria are evaluated at the end of each iteration k, and can be written as follows:
No convergence: Simulation has not converged even after the last iteration, i.e., k = Max Number of Iterations defined
Subcell Subcell Subcell Subcell
i i i i
when creating the simulation, if: TL DL – GSM TL DL – GSM OR PCGDL – GSM PCG DL – GSM OR
k Req k Req
Subcell i Subcell i TRX i TRX i
TL UL – GSM TL UL – GSM OR NR UL – GSM NR UL – GSM .
k Req k Req
186
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
8. Repeats the above steps (from step 2.) for the iteration k+1 using the new calculated loads as the current loads until
convergence.
k i
If C I Max C I Target , no codec mode can be served and the mobile is rejected with the condition "No Service".
k i
If C I Max C I Target , the corresponding codec mode is assigned to the mobile. If the MSA is on the BCCH, no power
k
control is applied. For any other TRX type, Atoll evaluates the minimum required power P Min in order to reduce the quality
i
at the user’s terminal to C I Target for the assigned MSA k.
The maximum allowed power reduction is set at 30 dB by default. This means that the
power cannot be reduced by more than 30 dB from the initial to final C/(I+N), after power
control.
The power control is considered achieved when the final C/(I+N) is at less than 1 dB from
i
the C I Target .
187
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
To summarise, at this step, each circuit-switched user is assigned a MSA, a codec mode, a corresponding number of timeslots
i
(0.5 or 1) and a corresponding minimum required power to get the C I Target of the served MSA.
Then, if the user has been dropped as inactive at the beginning of the simulation, his corresponding number of timeslots is
consumed but no DL power is considered for this specific user. Inactive users only participate in the timeslot management but
do not affect DL power.
Finally, if the user has been dropped as active at the beginning of the simulation, both timeslots and powers have to be
considered to make him connected.
k j
If C I Max C I Target , no coding scheme can be served and the mobile is rejected with the condition "No Service".
188
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
k j
If C I Max C I Target , the corresponding coding scheme is assigned to the mobile. If the MSA is on the BCCH, no power
k
control is applied. For any other TRX type, Atoll evaluates the minimum required power P Min in order to reduce the quality
j
at the user’s terminal to C I Target for the assigned MSA k.
The maximum allowed power reduction is set at 30 dB by default. This means that the
power cannot be reduced by more than 30 dB from the initial to final C/(I+N), after power
control.
The power control is considered achieved when the final C/(I+N) is at less than 1 dB from
i
the C I Target .
To summarise, at this step, each packet-switched user is assigned a MSA, a coding scheme, a corresponding number of
j
timeslots (which might not be an integer value) and a corresponding minimum required power to get the C I Target of the
served MSA.
TS DL used
MSA TP
TL TP = -------------------------------------------------
i - where the number of DL TS available for a BCCH subcell is 7 and 8 for any other subcell.
i DL
TS DL available
MSA
TP i
The DL traffic load value is then assigned to all the subcells of a same traffic pool.
For the traffic pool TP i , the subcell UL traffic load is computed as follows:
TS UL used
MSA
TP
TL TP = -------------------------------------------------
i - where the number of UL TS available for a BCCH subcell is 7 and 8 for any other subcell.
i UL
TS UL available
MSA TP
i
The UL traffic load value is then assigned to all the subcells of a same traffic pool.
HR users
MSA TP
HR RATIO TP = ------------------------------------
i
i -.
users represents HR and FR circuit-switched service users.
users MSATP
i
MSA TP
i
The Half-Rate traffic ratio is then assigned to all the subcells of a same traffic pool.
189
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
S
i--------------------------------
- = P Moy where i are the mobiles connected to the subcell S, over its MSAs
S
TS i
i
P Max
The ratio PCG S
= ---------------S (in dB), where P Max is the max power of the considered subcell, represents the mean power
P Moy S
S
control gain, due to active and inactive users, which can be assigned to the subcell.
It is essential to note that there is no power control on the BCCH and, consequently, the mean power control gain on the BCCH
is 0.
active
P Min TS i
active
i active S
------------------------------------------------------------ = P Moy where i active are the circuit-switched active mobiles connected to the subcell S, over
S active
TS i
active
i active
its MSAs
P Moy
S
The ratio -------------------------- (in dB), where P Moy is average requested power defined in "DL Power Control Gain Management" on
P Moy S
S active
page 189 above, represents the DTX gain, due to circuit-switched active users, which can be assigned to the subcell.
190
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
If no focus zone exists in the .atl document, Atoll takes into account the computation
zone.
191
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
Adjacency criterion:
Geographically adjacent transmitters are determined on the basis of their Best Server
coverages in 2G (GSM GPRS EDGE) projects. More precisely, a transmitter TXi is
considered adjacent to another transmitter TXj if there exists at least one pixel of TXi Best
Server coverage area TXj is the 2nd Best Server. The ranking of the adjacent neighbour
transmitter increases with the number of these pixels. The figure below shows the above
concept.
• When the adjacency option is checked, adjacent cells are sorted and listed from the
most adjacent to the least, depending on the above criterion. Adjacency is relative
to the number of pixels satisfying the criterion.
• Force adjacent layers as neighbours: If selected, Atoll adds all the transmitters adjacent across network layers to
the reference transmitter to the candidate neighbour list. The weight of this constraint is always the average of
the Min and Max values defined for the adjacency factor. This weight is used to calculate the rank of each
neighbour and its importance. Transmitters are considered adjacent across layers if they belong to different layers
and have a coverage overlap of at least one pixel.
• Force symmetry: This option enables user to force the reciprocity of a neighbourhood link. Therefore, if the
reference transmitter is a candidate neighbour of another transmitter, the latter will be considered as candidate
neighbour of the reference transmitter.
If the neighbours list of a transmitter is full, the reference transmitter will not be added
as a neighbour of that transmitter and that transmitter will be removed from the
reference transmitter’s neighbours list. You can force Atoll to keep that transmitter in
the reference transmitter’s neighbours list by adding the following option in the Atoll.ini
file:
[Neighbours]
DoNotDeleteSymmetrics = 1
• Force exceptional pairs: This option enables you to force/forbid some neighbourhood relationships. Therefore,
you may force/forbid a transmitter to be candidate neighbour of the reference transmitter.
• Delete existing neighbours: When selecting the Delete existing neighbours option, Atoll deletes all the current
neighbours and carries out a new neighbour allocation. If not selected, the existing neighbours are kept.
• If the Use Coverage Conditions check box is selected, there must be an overlapping zone ( S A S B ) with a given cell
edge coverage probability. Otherwise, only the distance criterion is taken into account.
The overlapping zone ( S A S B ) is defined as follows:
• SA is the area where the received signal level from transmitter A is greater than a minimum signal level. SA is the
coverage area of reference transmitter A restricted between two boundaries; the first boundary represents the
start of the handover area (best server area of A plus handover margin named “handover start”) and the second
boundary shows the end of the handover area (best server area of A plus the margin called “handover end”).
• SB is the coverage area where the candidate transmitter B is the best server.
192
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
SA SB
- 100 ) if the option “Take into account Covered Area” is
Atoll calculates either the percentage of covered area ( -----------------
SA
selected, or the percentage of traffic covered on the overlapping area S A S B for the option “Take into account Covered
Traffic”. Then, it compares this value to the % minimum covered area (minimum percentage of covered area for the option
“Take into account Covered Area” or minimum percentage of covered traffic for the option “Take into account Covered
Traffic”). If this percentage is not exceeded, the candidate neighbour B is discarded.
The coverage condition can be weighted among the others and ranks the neighbours through the importance field (see
number 4 below).
Atoll uses traffic map(s) selected in the default traffic analysis in order to determine the
percentage of traffic covered in the overlapping area.
• The importance values are used by the allocation algorithm to rank the neighbours according to the allocation reason,
and to quantify the neighbour importance.
Atoll lists all neighbours and ranks them by importance value so as to eliminate some of them from the neighbour list if the
maximum number of neighbours to be allocated to each transmitter is exceeded. If we consider the case for which there are
15 candidate neighbours and the maximum number of neighbours to be allocated to the reference transmitter is 8. Among
these 15 candidate neighbours, only 8 (having the highest importances) will be allocated to the reference transmitter.
In the Results part, Atoll only displays the transmitters for which it finds new neighbours. For these transmitters, it provides
the list of neighbours, the number of neighbours and the maximum number of neighbours allowed for each transmitter. In
addition, it indicates the importance (in %) of each neighbour and the allocation reason. Therefore, a neighbour may be
marked as exceptional pair, co-site, intra-HCS and inter-HCS adjacent, coverage or symmetric. For neighbours accepted for
co-site, intra-HCS or inter-HCS adjacency and coverage reasons, Atoll displays the percentage of area meeting the coverage
conditions (or the percentage of covered traffic on this area) and the corresponding surface area (km2) (or the traffic covered
on the area in Erlangs), the percentage of area meeting the adjacency conditions and the corresponding surface area (km2).
Finally, if cells have previous allocations in the list, neighbours are marked as existing.
193
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
• By default, the automatic neighbour allocation compares the defined Max inter-
site distance with the effective inter-transmitter distance. As a consequence,
there can be cases where the real distance between assigned neighbours is
higher than the Max inter-site distance, because the effective distance is
smaller. You can force Atoll to compare the Max inter-site distance with the real
inter-site distance by adding the following lines in Atoll.ini:
[Neighbours]
RealInterSiteDistanceCondition=1
• By default, the neighbour importance calculated with respect to distance is based
on the global Max inter-site distance setting for all neighbour candidates. As a
consequence, there can be cases where the calculated importance is different
when the global Max inter-site distance is modified. To avoid that, you can force
Atoll to prioritise the individual distances between reference transmitters and
their respective neighbour candidates by adding the following lines in Atoll.ini:
[Neighbours]
CandidatesMaxDistanceInImportanceCalculation=1
Except the case of forced neighbours (importance = 100%), priority assigned to each neighbourhood cause is determined
using the Importance Function (IF). The IF considers the following factors for calculating the importance:
• The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d-
Di = 1 – ----------
d max
d is the effective distance (in m). It corresponds to the real inter-transmitter distance weighted by the azimuths of
antennas. For information on the effective distance calculation, see "Appendix: Calculation of the Inter-Transmitter
Distance" on page 195.
194
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
d max is the maximum distance between the reference transmitter and a possible neighbour.
Delta(X)=Max(X)-Min(X)
• Set Min(Di) and Max(Di) to 0% if you do not want to take into account the distance
factor in the importance calculation.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors do not overlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum and maximum importance fields, neighbours will be ranked in this order:
co-site neighbours, adjacent neighbours, and neighbours allocated based on coverage
overlapping.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
• The default value of Min(O) = 1% ensures that neighbours selected for symmetry will
have an importance greater than 0%. With a value of Min(O) = 0%, neighbours
selected for symmetry will have an importance field greater than 0% only if there is
some coverage overlapping.
d = D 1 + x cos – x cos
x = 0.3% so that the maximum D variation does not exceed 1%.
195
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
The formula above implies that two cells facing each other will have a smaller effective distance than the real physical
distance. It is this effective distance that will be taken into account rather than the real distance.
For example:
• When i is NH, A i g = 1 g is a single member group containing one of the frequencies assigned at TRGi.
A i g = Number of TRXs in TRGi g is the set of frequencies assigned to TRXs of TRGi. (|g| = number of TRXs in
TRGi).
When we talk about "TRXs of i using g", and in the case of BBH, then there are |g| such virtual TRXs, each using
the entire group g and having a virtual MAIO [0, |g| - 1].
• When i is SFH, A i g must be less than or equal to the umber of TRXs in TRGi. A i g = n g is the set of frequencies
assigned to n TRXs of TRGi.
We assume all the groups assigned to TRGi to have the same length.
196
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
,
mis represents the missing TRX cost component
comp represents the additional cost component (interference, cost of changing a TRX)
mis = MIS_TRX i TL i CF i TS i
i TRGs
corr = CORR_TRX i TL i CF i TS i
i TRGs
dom = DOM_TRX i TL i CF i TS i
i TRGs
sep =
' i i' g A TL i CF i TS i
i TRGs
ARFCN
g2
i' TRXs of i using g
comp =
'' i i' g A TL i CF i TS i
i TRGs
ARFCN
g2
i' TRXs of i using g
• is the cost value for a missing TRX. This value can vary between 0 and 10. The default cost value is set to 1 and can
be modified in the AFP module properties dialogue.
• CORR_TRX i is the number of corrupted TRXs for the subcell i.
• is the cost value of a corrupted TRX. This value can vary between 0 and 10. The default cost value is set to 10 and
can be modified in the AFP module properties dialogue.
• DOM_TRX i is the number of TRXs, for the subcell i, having out-of-domain frequencies assigned.
• is the cost value of a TRX with out-of-domain frequencies assigned. This value can vary between 0 and 1. The default
cost value is set to 0.5 and can be modified in the AFP module properties dialogue.
And, as mentioned earlier, a virtual TRX is considered in case of BBH.
If i’ is valid, the algorithm evaluates the cost of a valid TRX. This cost has two components, ' i i' g A and '' i i' g A .
197
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
• '' i i' g A is complementary probability penalty due to interference and the cost of modifying a TRX.
If the option “Take into account the cost of all the TRXs” available in the AFP module properties dialogue is selected,
then,
Or if the option “Do not include the cost of TRXs having reached their quality target” available in the AFP module
properties dialogue is selected, the algorithm compares P' i i' g A + P'' i i' g A with the quality target specified for
i, P MAX :
Then ' i i' g A = P' i i' g A and '' i i' g A = P'' i i' g A .
Otherwise,
P' i i' g A is the same as ' i i' g A (separation violation probability penalty) and P'' i i' g A the same as '' i i' g A
(complementary probability penalty due to interference and the cost of modifying a TRX) in most cases. These are explained
in detail in the next sections.
The AFP module properties dialogue takes probability percentages as inputs while this
document deals in probability values.
ii'kgg'k' is considered to be the effect of a separation violation on the i' th TRX of TRGi assigned the group g, caused by the
k' th TRX of TRGk assigned the group g' .
denotes the overall weight of the separation violation cost component. This value can be between 0 and 1, set to 1 by
default. It can be modified in the AFP module properties dialogue.
ik represents the weight of the specific separation constraint between i and k. This specific weight depends on the type of
separation violation and follows the following priority rule:
1. Exceptional pairs
2. Co-transmitters
3. Co-site
4. Neighbours
For example, if a pair of subcells are co-site and neighbours at the same time, they will be considered as co-site because higher
priority. Hence, ik of these subcells will be the weight of co-site relations. If only a neighbour relation exists between two
198
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
subcells, then ik will be further weighted by the neighbour relation importance. The value of ik remains between 0 and 1.
The default weights of each type of separation are available in the Separation cost tab.
If ATOM i ATOM k
SEP i k f – f'
fg
f' g'
Then ii'kgg'k' = ik ----------------------------------------- , which is same for all values of k.
g g'
If ATOM i = ATOM k
SEP i k g – g'
–
Then ii'kgg'k' = ik -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
f_n 0 1 ... F_N 1
F_N
In the above equations, F_N g is the number of frames in the MAL g. F_N g = g .
th
While = f_n + MAIO A modulo F_N and g is the frequency in g,
i g i'
th
And = f_n + MAIO A modulo F_N and g' is the frequency in g’.
k g' k'
In addition, frequencies belonging to a MAL with a low fractional load, and breaking a separation constraint, should not be
weighted equally as in a non-hopping separation breaking case. Therefore, the cost is weighted by an interferer diversity gain.
1
Ĝ i k g g' = -----------------------------------------------------------
-
0.1 SEP_GAIN i k g g'
10
The separation gain, denoted by SEP_GAIN i k g g' is basically a function of the MAL length (and, of course, of the
hopping mode). With frequency hopping, the effects of DTX and traffic load become more significant (due to the consideration
of the average case instead of the worst case). For this reason, it is possible to consider these effects in
SEP_GAIN i k g g' through the relevant option available in the Advanced tab of the AFP module properties dialogue.
Without this option, the SEP_GAIN i k g g' is:
I_DIV g is the user defined interferer diversity gain (dB) for a given MAL length. It is used in P i i' g A definition as well.
On the other hand, if this option is selected, the SEP_GAIN i k g g' becomes,
2 + ASYN_GAIN i k g'
SEP_GAIN i k g g' = I_DIV g +0.5 TSU_GAIN k min 10 4 + 2 + I_DIV g -----------------------------------------------------------------
4
More than one separation violations may exist for a TRX. Many “small” Ĝ i k g g' and ' ii'kgg' have to be combined to form
one cost element, the P' i i' g A . This is done through iterating over all violating assignments and by summing up an
equivalent to the probability of not being violated while considering each separation violation as an independent probability
event. This sum is naturally limited to 100% of the TRX traffic, and is given by,
199
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
1 –
1 – ii'kgg'k' Ĝ i k g g'
P' i i' g A =
k TRGs
g' 2
ARFCN
k' TRXs of k using g'
In the above formula, if k = i , then k' i' , so that interference with itself is not taken into account.
Interference histograms are described in User Manual (GSM GPRS EDGE project
management, GSM GPRS EDGE network optimisation, GSM GPRS EDGE generic AFP
management). Interference histograms can also be exported to files. For further
description, refer to "Interference" on page 205.
• The QMINi C/I quality indicator corresponds to the accumulated interference level of all interferers while the C/I
interference histograms correspond to pair-wise interferences.
• Both QMINi and the histograms correspond to a single frequency. In case of a MAL containing more than one
frequencies, interferences on several different frequencies of a MAL must be combined.
This estimation, presented below, is the simplest possible as it solves the first problem by linear summation and
truncation at the value of 1 and it solves the second problem by averaging and adding the two diversity gains:
Hereafter, denotes the global weight of interference cost component. This value can vary between 0 and 1 and is set to
0.35 by default, which can be modified in the AFP module properties dialogue.
Let F_N g be the number of frames in the MAL g. F_N g = g .
Let MAIO A be the j’th MAIO of A k g' , j is one of the 0 1 ... A k g' – 1 TRXs.
k g' j
As said earlier, in case of BBH, we consider g' virtual TRXs, the jth TRX has the MAIO j.
Similar to the definition of ii'kgg'k' , ' ii'kgg'k' is defined as an interference event. ' ii'kgg'k' is the effect interference on the i' th
TRX of TRGi assigned the group g, caused by the k' th TRX of TRGk assigned the group g' .
If ATOM i ATOM k
If ATOM i = ATOM k
200
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
Then,
Since F_N g = F_N g' , these are both represented by F_N .
f' = g' ,
Therefore, we have, P'' i i' g A = 1 – 1 – P' i i' g A
1 – ii'kgg'k' – P' i i' g A
k TRGs
ARFCN
g' 2
k' TRXs of k using g'
In the above formula, if i = k , then k' i' , so that interference with itself is not taken into account.
The sum is limited to 100% of the TRX traffic. INTERF_GAIN i k g g' is quite similar to SEP_GAIN i k g g' . The
only difference is the frequency diversity gain, F_DIV g , added to SEP_GAIN i k g g' .
201
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
Figure 3.16: The Advanced tab of the AFP module Properties dialogue
The Interference Diversity Gain table lists the values of I_DIV provided as a functions of MAL length. This gain is applied to the
interference cost component and to the separation constraint violation cost component. Therefore, it provides a means to
model the non-linear FER effects and interference diversity both. The default values in this table correspond to the curve
y = 2 log 10 x . This equation generates values somewhat lower than empirical best-found values (this is because we
prefer a slightly pessimistic cost function to be on the safe side).
The other table contains the F_DIV values, which are the same as the I_DIV values by default.
202
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
WE = d i ts i L i CF i
i=0
With the optimisation of the number of TRXs, the network’s weighted Erlangs are calculated as follows:
n
WE = nb i ts i BL nb + L nb CF i
i=0
BL nb and L nb represent the load estimation and the blocked load estimation of the AFP. They are calculated at traffic
pool level for the vector {nb(0), nb(1), nb(2), …, nb(n)} as follows:
HR
PS + CS 1 – -------------
2
BL nb + L nb = ---------------------------------------------------------------
n
Max 1 nb i ts i
i=0
n
HR = Max i = 0 HR i
BL nb is determined from the above equation once L nb is known. L nb is obtained from the Erlang B equation
applied to the traffic pool demand and the total number of timeslots (TTS):
n
nb i ts i -
TTS = Max 1
-----------------------------
HR
i = 0 1 – -------------
2
The above equations give the number of served circuit-switched timeslots (SCS):
SCS = 1 – -------------
HR CS 1 – P
Blocking
2
SCS + SPS
L nb = --------------------------------------------------------------
-
n
Max 1 nb i ts i
i=0
BL nb is given by:
PS + CS 1 – ------------- HR
2
BL nb = --------------------------------------------------------------- – L nb
n
nb i ts i
Max 1
i=0
203
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
Once L nb and BL nb are known, L nb replaces TLi in the cost function (See "The AFP Cost Function" on page 196),
and BL nb is used to generate a new cost component, the blocked Erlangs of the pool:
n
nb i ts i BL nb CF i
i=0
n
d i ts i
• TTS' : TTS' = Max 1
----------------------------
HR
i = 0 1 – -------------
2
• MB: Maximum blocking rate (between 0 and 1).
The ratio of packet-switched demand is given by:
PS
R = ----------------------------------------------------
-
PS + CS 1 – ------------- HR
2
Here, we assume that a traffic load of 1 is generated by a demand of (1+MB)*TTS’ which generates a blocking rate of MB. In
other words, the ratio is calculated so that the worst case blocking rate is BM, giving a load of 1.
The following equations are solved to find PS’, CS’, and R’, which are calculated for a traffic load of 1.
MB = ErlangB CS' TTS'
PS'
R' = -------------------------------------------------------
PS' + CS' 1 – ------------- HR
2
PS' - + CS'
1 + MB TTS' = ---------------------------
1 – -------------
HR
2
When the traffic load of a pool is not 1, PS is different from PS’ and CS is different from CS’. Here, however, we assume that
R’ = R. This assumption implies that R is more or less the same as MB for big traffic pools and considerably larger than MB for
smaller pools.
The following equations are solved to find PS, CS, and R, which are calculated for the actual traffic loads.
PS
R = ----------------------------------------------------
-
PS + CS 1 – ------------- HR
2
SCS = 1 – -------------
HR CS 1 – P
Blocking
2
n
SPS = Min PS Max 1 d i ts i – SCS
i=0
n
SCS + SPS = d i ts i L i
i=0
The above five equations are solved to get the values of the five variables PS, PC, P Blocking , SCS, SPS, and calculate the cost.
204
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
L nb
Effective Overflow rate = 1 – --------------------------------------
L nb + BL nb
Output: New values for CS and PS.
3.11.3 Interference
This appendix provides a high-level overview of interference taken into account by the AFP.
Figure 3.17: The cumulative density of C/I levels between [TX1, BCCH] and [TX2, BCCH]
In this case, we observe that the probability for C/I (BCCH of TX2 effecting the BCCH of TX1) being greater than 0 is
100% (which is normal because TX1 is the Best Server). The probability of having a C/I value at least equal to 31 dB is
31.1%. For a required C/I level of 12 dB on the BCCH of TX1, the interference probability is 6.5% (as this requirement
is fulfilled with a probability of 93.5%).
205
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
The subcell power offset does not enter the calculation results in the .clc file. It is added
later by the AFP interface. On the other hand, its influence on the subcell service zone is
taken into account in the .clc file.
206
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
207
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks ©Forsk 2015
208
Chapter 4
UMTS HSPA Networks
210
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Total losses ( L total ) in dBm L total = L path + L Tx + L term + L indoor + M Shadowing – model – G Tx + G term
where,
EIRP is the effective isotropic radiated power of the transmitter,
ic is a carrier rank,
L model is the loss on the transmitter-receiver path (path loss) calculated by the propagation model,
M Shadowing – model is the shadowing margin. This parameter is taken into account when the option “Shadowing taken into
account” is selected,
L Indoor are the indoor losses, taken into account when the option “Indoor coverage” is selected,
L Tx is the transmitter loss ( L Tx = L total – DL ). For information on calculating transmitter loss, see "UMTS, CDMA2000, TD-
SCDMA, WiMAX, and LTE Documents" on page 30.
211
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
For a selected transmitter, it is also possible to study the path loss, L path , or the total
losses, L total . Path loss and total losses are the same on any carrier.
• For a selected transmitter, it is also possible to study the path loss, L path , or the total
losses, L total . Path loss and total losses are the same on any carrier.
• You can use a value other than 30 dB for the margin from the best serving cell signal
level, for example a smaller value for improving the calculation speed. For more
information on defining a different value for this margin, see the Administrator
Manual.
And
ji
212
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
• If the margin equals 0 dB, Atoll will consider bins where the signal level received from
Txi is the highest.
• If the margin is set to 2 dB, Atoll will consider bins where the signal level received
from Txi is either the highest or 2dB lower than the highest.
• If the margin is set to -2 dB, Atoll will consider bins where the signal level received
from Txi is 2dB higher than the signal levels from transmitters, which are 2nd best
servers.
And
Txi nd Txj
P rec ic 2 Best P rec ic – M
ji
• If the margin equals 0 dB, Atoll will consider bins where the signal level received from
Txi is the second highest.
• If the margin is set to 2 dB, Atoll will consider bins where the signal level received
from Txi is either the second highest or 2dB lower than the second highest.
• If the margin is set to -2 dB, Atoll will consider bins where the signal level received
from Txi is 2dB higher than the signal levels from transmitters, which are 3rd best
servers.
Atoll calculates signal level received from the transmitter on each pixel of each transmitter service area. A pixel of a service
area is coloured if the signal level is greater than or equal to the defined minimum thresholds (pixel colour depends on signal
level). Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many
layers as transmitter service areas. Each layer shows the different signal levels available in the transmitter service area.
Atoll calculates signal levels received from transmitters on each pixel of each transmitter service area. Where other service
areas overlap the studied one, Atoll chooses the highest value. A pixel of a service area is coloured if the signal level is greater
than or equal to the defined thresholds (the pixel colour depends on the signal level). Coverage consists of several
independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as defined thresholds. Each
layer corresponds to an area where the signal level from the best server exceeds a defined minimum threshold.
Atoll calculates path loss from the transmitter on each pixel of each transmitter service area. A pixel of a service area is
coloured if path loss is greater than or equal to the defined minimum thresholds (pixel colour depends on path loss). Coverage
consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as service
areas. Each layer shows the different path loss levels in the transmitter service area.
213
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Atoll calculates total losses from the transmitter on each pixel of each transmitter service area. A pixel of a service area is
coloured if total losses is greater than or equal to the defined minimum thresholds (pixel colour depends on total losses).
Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers
as service areas. Each layer shows the different total losses levels in the transmitter service area.
Atoll calculates signal levels received from transmitters on each pixel of each transmitter service area. Where other service
areas overlap the studied one, Atoll determines the best transmitter and evaluates path loss from the best transmitter. A pixel
of a service area is coloured if the path loss is greater than or equal to the defined thresholds (pixel colour depends on path
loss). Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many
layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where the path loss from the best server exceeds a defined
minimum threshold.
Atoll calculates signal levels received from transmitters on each pixel of each transmitter service area. Where service areas
overlap the studied one, Atoll determines the best transmitter and evaluates total losses from the best transmitter. A pixel of
a service area is coloured if the total losses is greater than or equal to the defined thresholds (pixel colour depends on total
losses). Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many
layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where the total losses from the best server exceed a defined
minimum threshold.
Number of Servers
Atoll evaluates how many service areas cover a pixel in order to determine the number of servers. The pixel colour depends
on the number of servers. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed.
There are as many layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where the number of servers is greater than
or equal to a defined minimum threshold.
On each pixel of each transmitter service area, the coverage corresponds to the pixels where the signal level from this
transmitter fulfils signal conditions defined in Conditions tab with different Cell edge coverage probabilities. There is one
coverage area per transmitter in the explorer.
On each pixel of each transmitter service area, the coverage corresponds to the pixels where the best signal level received
fulfils signal conditions defined in Conditions tab. There is one coverage area per cell edge coverage probability in the explorer.
4.2 Definitions
This section details the terms that describe the users and the services, the input parameters as well as the formulas used in
simulations and predictions (coverage predictions and point analysis).
4.2.1 Glossary
In this chapter, we will use the following terms to describe the users and the services:
R99 users: The Circuit (R99) and Packet (R99) service users. They require an R99 bearer.
HSDPA users: The users that only support HSDPA. They have an HSDPA-capable terminal and one of these services:
• Packet (HSDPA - Best Effort),
• Packet (HSDPA - Variable Bit Rate).
HSDPA users require an R99 bearer (i.e. the A-DPCH radio bearer) and an HSDPA bearer.
HSPA users: The users that support both HSDPA and HSUPA. They have an HSPA-capable terminal and one of these services:
• Packet (HSPA - Best Effort),
• Packet (HSPA - Variable Bit Rate),
• Packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate).
HSPA users require an R99 bearer (i.e. the E-DPCCH/A-DPCH radio bearer), an HSDPA bearer and an HSUPA bearer.
DC-HSDPA users: The dual-cell HSDPA users. Users with dual-cell HSDPA-capable terminals that can simultaneously connect
to two HSDPA cells of the transmitter for data transfer. The R99 A-DPCH bearer is transmitted on one of the cells, which is
214
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
called the anchor cell. The user can be assigned an HSDPA bearer in each of the cells.
MC-HSDPA users: The multi-cell HSDPA users. Users with multi-cell HSDPA-capable terminals that can simultaneously connect
to several HSDPA cells of the transmitter for data transfer. The R99 A-DPCH bearer is transmitted on one of the cells, which is
called the anchor cell. The user can be assigned an HSDPA bearer in each of the cells.
DB-MC-HSDPA users: The dual-band multi-cell HSDPA users. Users with dual-band multi-cell HSDPA-capable terminals that
can simultaneously connect to several HSDPA cells on co-site transmitters using different frequency bands. The R99 A-DPCH
bearer is transmitted on one of the cells, which is called the anchor cell. The user can be assigned an HSDPA bearer in each of
the cells.
BE services: Best Effort services.
VBR services: Variable Bit Rate services.
CBR services: Constant Bit Rate services. CBR services do not support multi-cell HSDPA mode.
4.2.2 Inputs
This table lists simulation and prediction inputs (calculation options, quality targets, active set management conditions, etc.).
Term
F MUD Terminal parameter - HSDPA properties None MUD factor
215
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
DL E b
DL
----
Q req - (Reception equipment, R99 bearer, Mobility) parameter None Eb/Nt target on downlink
N t req
UL E b
UL
----
-
Q req N t req (Reception equipment, R99 bearer, Mobility) parameter None Eb/Nt target on uplink
216
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Cell parameter
Tx UL
NRinter – techno log y Only used in uplink interference-based calculations of the Monte- None Inter-technology uplink noise rise
Carlo simulation
Tx Tx UL
N0 NF Tx K T W NR inter – techno log y W Thermal noise at transmitter
Term Tx DL
N0 NF Term K T W NR inter – techno log y W Thermal noise at terminal
Rc –3
W 10 W bps Chip rate
UL
f rake efficiency Site equipment parameter None Uplink rake receiver efficiency factor
217
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
UL
f act Service parameter kbps Uplink activity factor for the service
W -
Gp
UL ----------------- None Service uplink processing gain
R99
TP P – UL
DL
TP P – RLC Peak RLC throughput supported by
HSDPA bearer parameter kbps
I HSDPABearer the HSDPA bearer
DL
Without MIMO: TP P – RLC I HSDPABearer
DL Peak RLC throughput provided to the
DL With MIMO (transmit diversity): TP P – RLC I HSDPABearer
TPP – RLC Tx ic kbps user in the cell (Txi,ic) in the
With MIMO (spatial multiplexing): downlink
DL Max
TP P – RLC I HSDPABearer 1 + f SM – Gain G SM – 1
218
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
DL
TP P – RLC Tx ic
ic Tx
UL
TP P – RLC Peak RLC throughput supported by
HSUPA bearer parameter kbps
I HSUPABearer the HSUPA bearer
219
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Cell parameter (user-defined or simulation result) (for HSDPA only) Available cell HSDPA power
P HSDPA Txi ic W HSDPA: High Speed Downlink Packet
P HS – PDSCH Txi ic + n HS – SCCH P HS – SCCH Txi ic
Access
Cell HS-PDSCH power
P HS – PDSCH Txi ic Simulation result (for HSDPA only) W HS-PDSCH: High Speed Physical
Downlink Shared Channel
Cell HS-SCCH power
P HS – SCCH Txi ic Cell parameter (for HSDPA only) W HS-SCCH: High Speed Shared Control
Channel
number of HS-SCCH channels
n HS – SCCH Cell parameter (for HSDPA only)
managed by the cell
P Headroom Txi ic Cell parameter (for HSDPA only) W Cell headroom power
min
P term Terminal parameter W Minimum terminal power allowed
max
P term Terminal parameter W Maximum terminal power allowed
220
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
UL
G Div R99 bearer parameter - Depends on the transmitter Rx diversity None Gain due to receive diversity
M Shadowing – Eb Nt Result calculated from cell edge coverage probability and DL Eb/Nt DL Eb/Nt Shadowing margin
DL
None
standard deviation Only used in prediction studies
M Shadowing – Eb Nt Result calculated from cell edge coverage probability and UL Eb/Nt UL Eb/Nt Shadowing margin
UL
None
standard deviation Only used in prediction studies
UL npaths
G macro – diversity = M Shadowing – Eb Nt – M Shadowing – Eb Nt
UL UL UL UL quality gain due to signal diversity
G macro – diversity None
n=2 or 3 in soft handoffc.
Global parameter (default value)
Random shadowing error drawn
E Shadowing Simulation result None during Monte-Carlo simulation
Only used in simulations
221
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
In prediction studiesd
P pilot Txi ic
P c Txi ic -------------------------------- W Chip power received at terminal
LT
a. L Tx = L total – UL on uplink and L Tx = L total – DL on downlink. For information on calculating transmitter losses on uplink and downlink,
see "UMTS, CDMA2000, TD-SCDMA, WiMAX, and LTE Documents" on page 30.
npaths
b. M Shadowing –Ec Io corresponds to the shadowing margin evaluated from the shadowing error probability density function (n paths) in case
of downlink Ec/I0 modelling.
npaths
c. M Shadowing – Eb Nt corresponds to the shadowing margin evaluated from the shadowing error probability density function (n paths) in
UL
case of uplink soft handoff modelling.
d. In uplink prediction studies, only carrier power level is downgraded by the shadowing margin ( M Shadowing – Eb Nt ). In downlink
UL
prediction studies, carrier power level and intra-cell interference are downgraded by the shadowing model ( M Shadowing – Eb Nt or
DL
M Shadowing – Ec Io ) while extra-cell interference level is not. Therefore, M Shadowing – Eb Nt or M Shadowing – Ec Io is set to 1 in downlink
DL
extra-cell interference calculation.
222
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Tx Downlink inter-technology
P Transmitted ic i
DL
I inter – techno log y ic --------------------------------------
Tx
L total ICP ic ic
Tx m W interference at terminal on carrier ic
ni i a
Without Pilot:
DL DL DL DL
I intra txi ic + I extra ic + I inter – carrier ic + I inter – techno log y ic
Term
DL + N0 – 1 – BTS P c txi ic Total received noise at terminal on
I 0 ic W
carrier ic
DL DL DL
P tot txi ic + I extra ic + I inter – carrier ic
Total noise:
DL Term
+ I inter – techno log y ic + N 0
a. In the case of an interfering GSM external network in frequency hopping, the ICP value is weighted according to the fractional load.
Tx Downlink inter-technology
P Transmitted ic i
DL
I inter – techno log y ic -------------------------------------
L
Tx
ICP
Tx m
- W interference at terminal on carrier ic
ni total ic i ic a
223
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
a. In the case of an interfering GSM external network in frequency hopping, the ICP value is weighted according to the fractional load.
b. Calculation option may be selected in the Global parameters tab. The chosen option will be taken into account only in simulations. In point
analysis and coverage studies, Atoll uses the option “Total noise” to evaluate DL and UL Eb/Nt.
Pb
UL
ic adj
UL Uplink inter-carrier interference at
I inter – carrier txi ic term W
txj j
terminal on carrier ic
-----------------------------------
-
RF ic ic adj
224
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
UL UL
Softer HO: f rake efficiency Q tch txk ic
tx k ActiveSet
samesite
UL
G macro – diversity
UL
Q ic
UL
G SHO --------------------------------------------------- None Soft handover gain on uplink
UL
Q tch BestServer ic
a. Calculation option may be selected in the Global parameters tab. The chosen option will be taken into account only in simulations. In point
analysis and coverage studies, Atoll uses the option “Total noise” to evaluate DL and UL Eb/Nt.
4.3 Simulations
The simulation process consists of two steps:
1. Obtaining a realistic user distribution
Atoll generates a user distribution using a Monte-Carlo algorithm, which requires traffic maps and data as input. The
resulting user distribution complies with the traffic database and maps provided to the algorithm.
Each user is assigned a service, a mobility type, and an activity status by random trial, according to a probability law
that uses the traffic database.
The user activity status is an important output of the random trial and has direct consequences on the next step of
the simulation and on the network interferences. A user may be either active or inactive. Both active and inactive
users consume radio resources and create interference.
Then, Atoll randomly assigns a shadowing error to each user using the probability distribution that describes the
shadowing effect.
Finally, another random trial determines user positions in their respective traffic zone and whether they are indoors
or outdoors (according to the clutter weighting and the indoor ratio per clutter class defined for the traffic maps).
2. Power control simulation
225
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
The determination of the number of users and the activity status allocation depend on the type of traffic cartography used.
Atoll determines the total number of users attempting connection in each simulation
based on the Poisson distribution. This may lead to slight variations in the total numbers
of users in different simulations. To have the same total number of users in each
simulation of a group, add the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[Simulation]
RandomTotalUsers=0
• When user profile traffic maps are composed of lines, the number of subscribers (X)
per user profile is calculated from the line length (L) and the user profile density (D)
(nb of subscribers per km) as follows: X = L D
• The number of subscribers (X) is an input when a user profile traffic map is composed
of points.
For each behaviour described in a user profile, according to the service, frequency use and exchange volume, Atoll calculates
the probability for the user being active in uplink and in downlink at an instant t.
N call d
p o = -------------------
-
3600
ni = X p0
Next, we can take into account activity periods during the connection in order to determine the activity status of each user.
• Calculation of activity probabilities:
UL DL
Probability of being inactive on UL and DL: p inactive = 1 – f act 1 – f act
UL DL
Probability of being active on UL only: p UL = f act 1 – f act
DL UL
Probability of being active on DL only: p DL = f act 1 – f act
UL DL
Probability of being active both on UL and DL: p UL + DL = f act f act
UL DL
Where, f act and f act are respectively the UL and DL activity factors defined for the circuit switched service i.
226
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
inactive
Number of inactive users on UL and DL: n i = n i p inactive
Therefore, a user when he is connected can have four different activity status: either active on both links, or inactive on both
links, or active on UL only, or active on DL only.
A packet session consists of several packet calls separated by a reading time. Each packet call is defined by its size and may be
divided in packets of fixed size (1500 Bytes) separated by an inter arrival time.
In Atoll, a packet session is described by following parameters:
UL
N packet –c all : Average number of packet calls on the uplink during a session,
DL
N packet –c all : Average number of packet calls on the downlink during a session,
UL
T packet – call : Average time (millisecond) between two packets calls on the uplink ,
DL
T packet – call : Average time (millisecond) between two packets calls on the downlink ,
UL
T packet : Average time (millisecond) between two packets on the uplink ,
DL
T packet : Average time (millisecond) between two packets on the downlink ,
UL
S packet : Packet size (Bytes) on uplink,
DL
S packet : Packet size (Bytes) on downlink.
The number of users and their distribution per activity status is determined as follows:
• Calculation of the average packet call size (kBytes):
UL V UL DL V DL
S packet –c all = ---------------------------------------- and S packet –c all = ----------------------------------------
UL UL DL DL
N packet –c all f eff N packet –c all f eff
UL DL
Where f eff and f eff are the UL and DL efficiency factors defined for the packet switched service j.
227
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
UL DL
For packet (HSDPA) and packet (HSPA) services, f eff and f eff are set to 1.
1kBytes = 1024Bytes.
UL DL
Where TP Av and TPAv are the uplink and downlink average requested throughputs defined for the service j.
UL N sess UL DL N sess DL
p Connection = ------------ D Connection and p Connection = ------------ D Connection
3600 3600
• Calculation of the probability of being connected:
UL DL
p Connected = 1 – 1 – p Connection 1 – p Connection
Therefore, the number of users who want to get the service j is:
n j = X p Connected
As you can see on the picture above, we have to consider three possible cases when a user is connected:
• 2nd case: At a given time, packet are uploaded (no packet is downloaded).
Here, the probability of being connected is:
UL DL
UL p Connection 1 – p Connection
p Connected = -----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
p Connected
• 3rd case: At a given time, packet are downloaded (no packet is uploaded).
In this case, the probability of being connected is:
DL UL
DL p Connection 1 – p Connection
p Connected = -----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
p Connected
228
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Now, we have to take into account activity periods during the connection in order to determine the activity status of each
user.
• Calculation of the probability of being active:
UL DL
UL D Activity session DL D Activity session
f = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- and f = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UL UL DL DL
D Inactivity session + D Activity session D Inactivity session + D Activity session
Therefore, we have:
The user can be active on DL and inactive on UL; this probability is:
1 DL UL UL + DL
p DL = f 1 – f p Connected
• 2nd case: At a given time, packet are uploaded (no packet is downloaded).
The user can be active on UL and inactive on DL; this probability is:
2 UL UL
p UL = f p Connected
• 3rd case: At a given time, packet are downloaded (no packet is uploaded).
The user can be active on DL and inactive on UL; this probability is:
3 DL DL
p DL = f p Connected
1 2
Number of users active on UL and inactive on DL: n j UL = n j p UL + p UL
1 3
Number of users active on DL and inactive on UL: n j DL = n j p DL + p DL
1
Number of users active on UL and DL: n j UL + DL = n j p UL + DL
Therefore, a user when he is connected can have four different activity status: either active on both links, or inactive on both
links, or active on UL only, or active on DL only.
The user distribution per service and the activity status distribution between the users
are average distributions. And the service and the activity status of each user are
randomly drawn in each simulation. Therefore, if you compute several simulations at
once, the average number of users per service and average numbers of inactive, active
on UL, active on DL and active on UL and DL users, respectively, will correspond to
calculated distributions. But if you check each simulation, the user distribution between
services as well as the activity status distribution between users is different in each of
them.
229
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
UL DL
Rt Rt
N UL = ----------
- and N DL = ----------
-
UL DL
TP Av TP Av
UL
Rt is the kbits per second transmitted in UL in the Txi cell to supply the service.
DL
Rt is the kbits per second transmitted in DL in the Txi cell to supply the service.
DL
TP Av is the downlink average requested throughput defined for the service,
UL
TP Av is the uplink average requested throughput defined for the service.
UL DL
Probability of being active in UL only: p UL = f act 1 – f act
DL UL
Probability of being active in DL only: p DL = f act 1 – f act
UL DL
Probability of being active both in UL and DL: p UL + DL = f act f act
UL DL
Where, f act and f act are respectively the UL and DL activity factors defined for the service i.
p DL + p UL + DL n j UL + n j DL + n j UL + DL = N DL
Therefore, we have:
N UL p UL + DL N DL p UL + DL
Number of users active in UL and DL both: n i UL + DL = min --------------------------------- --------------------------------
p UL + p UL + DL p DL + p UL + DL
inactive n j UL + n j DL + n j UL + DL
Number of inactive users in UL and DL: n i - p inactive
= ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 – p inactive
Therefore, a connected user can have four different activity status: either active in both links, or inactive in both links, or active
in UL only, or active in DL only.
230
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Atoll takes into account activity periods during the connection in order to determine the activity status of each user.
Activity probabilities are calculated as follows:
UL DL
Probability of being inactive in UL and DL: p inactive = 1 – f act 1 – f act
UL DL
Probability of being active in UL only: p UL = f act 1 – f act
DL UL
Probability of being active in DL only: p DL = f act 1 – f act
UL DL
Probability of being active both in UL and DL: p UL + DL = f act f act
UL DL
Where, f act and f act are respectively the UL and DL activity factors defined for the service i.
Therefore, a connected user can have four different activity status: either active in both links, or inactive in both links, or active
in UL only, or active in DL only.
The activity status distribution between users is an average distribution. In fact, in each
simulation, the activity status of each user is randomly drawn. Therefore, if you compute
several simulations at once, average numbers of inactive, active on UL, active on DL and
active on UL and DL users correspond to the calculated distribution. But if you check each
simulation, the activity status distribution between users is different in each of them.
231
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
As shown in Figure 4.2 on page 232, the simulation algorithm is divided in three parts. All users are evaluated by the R99 part
of the algorithm. HSDPA and HSPA users, unless they have been rejected during the R99 part of the algorithm, are then
evaluated by the HSDPA part of the algorithm. Finally, HSPA users, unless they have been rejected during the R99 or HSDPA
parts of the algorithm, are then evaluated by the HSUPA part of the algorithm.
The steps of this algorithm are detailed below.
UL intra UL extra
UL
Uplink powers received by the base station txi on carrier ic m , I tot txi ic m , I tot txi ic m and I inter – carrier txi ic m
are initialised to 0 W (i.e. no connected mobile).
232
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
UL
UL I tot txi ic m
Therefore, we have: X R99 txi ic m k = -------------------------------
- = 0
UL
N tot txi ic m
For each transmitter txi containing Mb in its calculation area and working on a frequency band supported by the Mb’s terminal
).
BTS P c txi M b ic
Calculation of Q pilot txi ic Mb = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
k DL DL DL DL Term
P tot txi ic + I extra ic + I inter – carrier ic + I inter – techno log y ic + N 0
For each carrier ic, selection of the transmitter with the highest Q pilot txi M b ic , tx BS ic M i .
k
UL
X corresponds to the load rise due to the mobile. For information on how this parameter is calculated, see "Admission
Control in the R99 Part" on page 276.
Rejection of bad candidate cells if the pilot is not received or if the uplink load factor is exceeded during the admission load
control (if simulation respects a loading factor constraint and Mb was not connected in previous iteration)
pilot
If Q pilot tx BS M b ic Q req Mobility M b then (txBS,ic) is rejected by Mb
k
UL UL
If X R99 tx BS ic k X max , then (txBS,ic) is rejected by Mb
Else
Keep (txBS,ic) as good candidate cell
If no good candidate cell has been selected, Mb has failed to be connected to the network and is rejected.
For each NodeB having candidate cells, determination of the best carrier, icBS, within the set of candidate cells of the
NodeB.
For MC-HSDPA and DB-MC-HSDPA users, this carrier is referred to as the "anchor" carrier.
If a given carrier is specified for the service requested by Mb
Else the carrier selection mode defined for the site equipment is considered.
233
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Endif
Determination of the best serving cell, (txBS,icBS)
max
(tx BS,ic BS) k M b is the best serving cell ( BestCell k M b ) and its pilot quality is Q pilot M b
k
In the following lines, we will consider ic as the carrier used by the best serving cell
Selection of the second serving cell for DC-HSDPA users
MC-HSDPA and DB-MC-HSDPA users are processed as DC-HSDPA users.
If txBS supports multi-cell HSDPA and if it has several carriers, selection of the second carrier, ic2, among the adjacent carriers.
For each carrier adjacent to the best serving carrier, icp, calculation of Q pilot tx BS ic p M b
k
pilot
If Q pilot tx BS ic 2 M b Q req Mobility M b then (txBS,ic2) is rejected by Mb
k
Else
Keep (txBS,ic2) as second serving cell
For each station txi containing Mb in its calculation area, using ic , and, if neighbours are used, neighbour of BestCell k M b
BTS P c txi M b ic
Calculation of Q pilot txi M b ic = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
DL DL DL DL Term
k
P tot txi ic + I extra ic + I inter – carrier ic + I inter – techno log y ic + N 0
Rejection of txi from the active set if difference with the best server is too high
max
If Q pilot M b – Q pilot txi M b ic AS_Th BestCell k M b then txi is rejected
k k
EndFor
R99 – req
Calculation of the terminal power required by Mb to obtain the R99 radio bearer: P term M b ic k
234
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Calculation of quality level on Mb traffic channel at (txi,ic), with the minimum power allowed on traffic channel for the Mb
service
req
UL P term – R99 M b ic k – 1
P b – R99 txi M b ic = ----------------------------------------------------
L T txi M b
UL UL UL
P b – DPDCH txi M b ic = P b – R99 txi M b ic 1 – r c
UL UL UL
P b – DPCCH txi M b ic = P b – R99 txi M b ic r c
UL UL UL
P b – R99 txi M b ic = P b – DPCCH txi M b ic + P b – DPDCH txi M b ic if the user is active,
UL UL
P b – R99 txi M b ic = P b – DPCCH txi M b ic if the user is inactive,
UL
UL term P b – DPDCH txi M b ic k
- G UL
Q tch txi M b ic k = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UL
p Service M b G div
UL Tx UL
N tot txi ic – 1 – F MUD term P b – R99 txi M b ic k – 1
End For
If (Mb is in not in handoff)
UL UL
Q k M b = Q tch txi M b ic k
UL UL UL
Q k M b = f rake efficiency Q tch txi M b ic k
txi ActiveSet
UL UL UL
Qk Mb = Max Q tch txi M b ic k G macro – diversity 2 links
txi ActiveSet
UL UL UL
Qk Mb = Max Q tch txi M b ic k G macro – diversity 3 links
txi ActiveSet
UL
UL UL UL UL
Qk Mb = Max f rake efficiency Q tch ic Q tch ic G macro – diversity 2 links
other site
txi ActiveSet
samesite
End If
UL
req Q req Service M b Mobility M b
- P req
P term – R99 M b ic k = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- term – R99 M b ic k – 1
UL
Qk Mb
235
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
UL UL
req Q req Service M b Mobility M b Q req Service M b Mobility M b
- P req
P term – R99 M b ic k = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ term – R99 M b ic k – 1
UL
Qk Mb
req max
If P term – R99 M b ic k P term M b then Mb cannot select any cell and its active set is cleared
R99
If TP P – UL M b TP Max – UL txi ic then Mb cannot be connected
Endif
If (mobile does not use a packet switched service that is inactive on the downlink)
For each cell (txi,ic) in Mb active set
Calculation of quality level on (txi,ic) traffic channel at Mb with the minimum power allowed on traffic channel for the Mb
service
min
DL P tch Service M b
P b txi M b ic = -----------------------------------------------
L T txi M b
DL
DL BTS P b txi M b ic k
- G DL
Q tch txi M b ic k = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DL
p Service M b G div
DL DL
N tot ic – 1 – F ortho BTS P b txi M b ic k – 1
End For
DL DL DL
Q k M b = f rake efficiency Q tch txi M b ic k
txi ActiveSet
Do
For each cell (txi,ic) in Mb active set
Calculation of the required power for DL traffic channel between (txi,ic) and Mb:
DL
req Q req Service M b Mobility M b
- P min
P tch txi M b ic k = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- tch Service M b
DL
Qk Mb
DL max
Recalculation of a decreased Q req (a part of the required quality is managed by the cells set to P tch )
req
DL P tch Service M b
P b txi M b ic = ----------------------------------------------
L T txi M b
236
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
DL
DL BTS P b txi M b ic
- G DL
Q tch txi M b ic k = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DL
p Service M b G div
DL DL
N tot ic – 1 – F ortho BTS P b txi M b ic
DL DL DL
If the user is inactive, then his contribution to interference in the calculation of N tot ic is P b txi M b ic r c .
EndFor
DL DL DL
Q k M b = f rake efficiency Q tch txi M b ic k
txi ActiveSet
DL DL
While Q k M b Q req Service M b Mobility M b and Mb active set is not empty
R99
If TP P – DL M b TP Max – DL txi ic then Mb cannot be connected
Endif
Update of interference on active mobiles only (old contributions of mobiles and stations are replaced by the new ones).
For each cell (txi,ic)
UL
Update of N tot txi ic
EndFor
For each mobile Mi
DL
Update of N tot ic
EndFor
EndFor
Control of Radio Resource Limits (OVSF Codes, Cell Power, Channel Elements, Iub Backhaul Throughput)
Rejection of the mobile with the lowest service priority starting from the last admitted
EndFor
For each cell (txi,ic)
Codes Codes
While N txi ic k N max txi ic
Rejection of the mobile with the lowest service priority starting from the last admitted
EndFor
For each NodeB, Ni
CE – DL CE – DL
While N N i k N max Ni
Rejection of the mobile with the lowest service priority starting from the last admitted
CE – UL CE – UL
While N N i k N max Ni
Rejection of the mobile with the lowest service priority starting from the last admitted
EndFor
For each NodeB, Ni
Max
While TP Iub – DL N I k TP Iub – DL N I
Rejection of the mobile with the lowest service priority starting from the last admitted
Max
While TP Iub – UL N I k TPIub – UL N I
Rejection of the mobile with the lowest service priority starting from the last admitted
237
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
EndFor
UL UL
For each cell (txi,ic) with X R99 txi ic X max
Rejection of the mobile with the lowest service priority starting from the last admitted
EndFor
UL UL
While at least one cell with X R99 txi ic X max exists.
• In case of a static HSDPA power allocation strategy, Atoll checks in the simulation that:
DL
P tx ic P max ic %Power max
where:
DL
%Power max is the maximum DL load allowed.
• In case of dynamic HSDPA power allocation strategy, Atoll checks in the simulation that:
DL
P tx – R99 ic + P HSUPA ic P max ic %Power max
4.3.2.3.2 Number of HS-SCCH Channels and Maximum Number of HSDPA Bearer Users
The number of HS-SCCH channels ( n HS – SCCH ) is the maximum number of HS-SCCH channels that the cell can manage. This
parameter is used to manage the number of BE and VBR service users simultaneously connected to an HSDPA bearer. This
parameter is not taken into account for CBR service users as HS-SCCH-less operation (i.e., HS-DSCH transmissions without any
accompanying HS-SCCH) is performed.
Each HSDPA BE, HSDPA VBR, HSPA BE and HSPA VBR service user consumes one HS-SCCH channel. Therefore, at a time (over
a transmission time interval), the number of these users connected to an HSDPA bearer cannot exceed the number of HS-
SCCH channels per cell.
The maximum number of HSDPA bearer users ( n max ) corresponds to the maximum number of HSDPA bearer users that the
cell can support. Here, all HSDPA bearer users, i.e., HSDPA BE, HSDPA VBR, HSPA BE and HSPA VBR and HSPA CBR service users,
are taken into consideration.
Let us assume there are 30 users in the cell:
• 10 HSPA CBR service users with any activity status.
• 2 HSDPA VBR service users active on DL.
• 18 HSDPA BE and HSPA BE service users active on DL.
All users are connected to the A-DCH R99 bearer. Finally, the number of HS-SCCH channels and the maximum number of
HSDPA bearer users respectively equal 4 and 25.
The scheduler manages the maximum number of users within each cell. CBR service users have the highest priority and are
processed first, in the order established during the generation of the user distribution. After processing the CBR service users,
Atoll processes the remaining HSDPA bearer users (i.e., HSDPA VBR, HSPA VBR, HSDPA BE and HSPA BE service users). VBR
238
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
service users have the highest priority and are managed before BE service users. For each type of service, the scheduler ranks
the users according to the selected scheduling technique. Users are treated as described in the figure below.
• All CBR service users may be served if there are enough HSDPA power, Iub backhaul throughput and OVSF codes
available in order for them to obtain the lowest HSDPA bearer that provides a peak RLC throughput higher or equal to
the minimum throughput demand defined for the service. In this case, they will be connected. Else, they will be
rejected.
• The two VBR service users may be simultaneously served if there are enough HSDPA power, Iub backhaul throughput
and OVSF codes available in order for them to obtain an HSDPA bearer that provides a peak RLC throughput higher or
equal to the minimum throughput demand defined for the service. In this case, they will be connected. Else, they will
be rejected.
• Then, among the BE service users:
• The first two users may be simultaneously served if there are enough HSDPA power, Iub backhaul throughput and
OVSF codes available in order for them to obtain an HSDPA bearer. In this case, they will be connected. Else, they
will be delayed.
• The next eleven ones will be delayed since there are no longer HS-SCCH channels available. Their connection
status will be "HS-SCCH Channels Saturation".
• Finally, the last five users will be rejected because the maximum number of HSDPA bearer users has been fixed to
25. Their connection status will be "HSDPA Scheduler Saturation".
Let us focus on the ten CBR service users mentioned in the example of the previous paragraph "Number of HS-SCCH Channels
and Maximum Number of HSDPA Bearer Users" on page 238. Fast link adaptation is carried out on these users in order to
determine if they can obtain an HSDPA bearer that provides a peak RLC throughput higher or equal to the service minimum
throughput demand. As HS-SCCH less operation is performed, only HSDPA bearers using the QPSK modulation and two HS-
PDSCH channels at the maximum can be selected and allocated to the users. The users are processed in the order established
during the generation of the user distribution and the cell’s available HSDPA power is shared between them as explained
below. Several CBR service users can share the same HSDPA bearer. Then, Atoll calculates the HSDPA bearer consumption ( C
in %) for each user and takes into account this parameter when it determines the resources consumed by the user (i.e., the
HSDPA power used, the number of OVSF codes and the Iub backhaul throughput).
In the bearer allocation process shown below, the 10 CBR service users are represented by Mj, with j = 1 to 10. And, the initial
values of their respective HSDPA powers is 0, i.e. PHSDPA(B(MX)) = 0, where X = 0 to 10. These power values are assigned one
by one by the scheduler, so that with their allocated values, looped back to the starting point, are used in successive steps.
239
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
j 1 Sufficient HS-SCCH No
PHSDPA (PHSDPA (M X )) served power to reach the Mj is rejected
X 0 minimum quality
threshold?
Yes
Enough
16-bit OVSF codes
No
available to support the Mj is rejected
lowest HSDPA bearer
allocated?
Yes
Sufficient Iub
backhaul throughput
No
to support the lowest Mj is rejected
HSDPA bearer
allocated?
Yes
Sufficient HSDPA
power to obtain No
Mj is rejected
the lowest HSDPA
bearer allocated?
Yes
No
Bearer Downgrading
B(Mj)
Yes
No Mj = M10?
Yes
Figure 4.4: HSDPA Bearer Allocation Process for CBR Service Users
After processing the CBR service users, the scheduler shares the cell’s remaining resources between HSDPA and HSPA VBR
service users. Let us focus on the two HSDPA - VBR service users mentioned in the example of the previous paragraph,
"Number of HS-SCCH Channels and Maximum Number of HSDPA Bearer Users" on page 238. A new fast link adaptation is
carried out on these users in order to determine if they can obtain an HSDPA bearer that provides a peak RLC throughput
higher or equal to the service minimum throughput demand. They are processed in the order defined by the scheduler and
the cell’s HSDPA power available after all CBR service users have been served is shared between them as explained below.
In the bearer allocation process shown below, the 2 VBR service users are represented by Mj, with j = 1 to 2. And, the initial
values of their respective HSDPA powers is 0, i.e. PHSDPA(B(MX)) = 0, where X = 0 to 2. These power values are assigned one
by one by the scheduler, so that with their allocated values, looped back to the starting point, are used in successive steps.
240
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
j 1 Sufficient HS-SCCH No
PHSDPA (PHSDPA (M X )) served power to reach the Mj is rejected
X 0 minimum quality
threshold?
Yes
Enough
16-bit OVSF codes
No
available to support the Mj is rejected
lowest HSDPA bearer
allocated?
Yes
Sufficient Iub
backhaul throughput
No
to support the lowest Mj is rejected
HSDPA bearer
allocated?
Yes
Sufficient HSDPA
power to obtain No
Mj is rejected
the lowest HSDPA
bearer allocated?
Yes
Yes
No Mj = M2?
Yes
BE Service Users
After processing the VBR service users, the scheduler shares the cell’s remaining resources between BE service users. Let us
focus on the HSDPA and HSPA BE service users, especially on the first four users mentioned in the example of the previous
paragraph, "Number of HS-SCCH Channels and Maximum Number of HSDPA Bearer Users" on page 238. A new fast link
adaptation is carried out on these users in order to determine if they can obtain an HSDPA bearer. They are processed in the
order defined by the scheduler and the cell’s HSDPA power available after all CBR and VBR service users have been served is
shared between them as explained below.
In the bearer allocation process shown below, the 4 BE service users are represented by Mj, with j = 1 to 4. And, the initial
values of their respective HSDPA powers is 0, i.e. PHSDPA(B(MX)) = 0, where X = 0 to 4. These power values are assigned one
by one by the scheduler, so that with their allocated values, looped back to the starting point, are used in successive steps.
241
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
242
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
When the option “CQI based on CPICH quality” is selected, Atoll proceeds as follows.
1. CPICH Quality Calculation
Two options, available in Global parameters, may be used to calculate Nt: option Without useful signal or option Total noise.
Therefore, we have:
BTS P c ic
-----
Ec-
ic i
= -----------------------------------------
- for the total noise option,
Nt pilot DL
N tot ic
And
BTS P c ic
-----
Ec-
ic i
= --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- for the without useful signal option.
Nt pilot DL
N tot ic – 1 – BTS P c ic
i
With
DL DL DL DL DL term
N tot ic = I intra ic + I extra ic + I inter – carrier ic + I inter – techno log y ic + N 0
DL DL
I extra ic = P tot ic
txj j i
Ptot icadj
DL
DL j
I inter – carrier ic = txj
------------------------------------
RF ic ic adj
RF ic ic adj is the interference reduction factor, defined between ic and icadj and set to a value different from 0.
DL
I inter – techno log y ic is the inter-technology interference at the receiver on ic.
Tx
P Transmitted ic i
DL
I inter – techno log y ic = --------------------------------------
Tx Tx m
ni
L total ICP ic ic
i
th
ic i is the i interfering carrier of an external transmitter
Tx m
ICPic ic is the inter-technology Channel Protection between the signal transmitted by Tx and received by m assuming the
i
P pilot ic
P c ic = ---------------------
-
i LT
i
term
BTS , and N 0 are defined in "Inputs" on page 215.
243
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Atoll performs intra-cell interference computations based on the total power. You can
instruct Atoll to use maximum power by adding the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[CDMA]
PmaxInIntraItf = 1
In this case, Atoll considers the following formula:
CQI pilot = f ------ ic . This table is defined for the terminal reception equipment and the selected mobility.
Ec
Nt pilot
P HS – SCCH ic is the HS-SCCH power on carrier ic. It is either fixed by the user (when the option “HS-SCCH Power Dynamic
Allocation”in the cell property dialogue is unchecked) or dynamically calculated (when the option “HS-SCCH Power Dynamic
Allocation” is selected).
req
In this case, the HS-SCCH power is controlled so as to reach the required HS-SCCH Ec/Nt (noted ------ ic
Ec
). It is
Nt HS – SCCH
specified in mobility properties.
We have:
BTS P c ic
-----
Ec-
ic i
= -------------------------------
- for the total noise option,
Nt HS – SCCH DL
N tot ic
And
BTS P c ic
-----
Ec-
ic = i
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- for the without useful signal option.
Nt HS – SCCH DL term
N tot ic – 1 – F ortho 1 – F MUD BTS P c ic
i
With
DL DL DL DL DL term
N tot ic = I intra ic + I extra ic + I inter – carrier ic + I inter – techno log y ic + N 0
DL DL
DL P SCH ic P SCH ic
I intra ic = P tot ic + BTS 1 – F MUD 1 – F ortho P tot ic – -------------------
- – BTS P tot ic – -------------------
DL term
-
LT LT
txi txi txi
DL DL
I extra ic = P tot ic
txj j i
Ptot icadj
DL
DL j
I inter – carrier ic = txj
------------------------------------
RF ic ic adj
RF ic ic adj is the interference reduction factor, defined between ic and icadj and set to a value different from 0.
DL
I inter – techno log y ic is the inter-technology interference at the receiver on ic.
244
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Tx
P Transmitted ic i
DL
I inter – techno log y ic = --------------------------------------
Tx Tx m
n
L total ICP ic ic
i i
th
ic i is the i interfering carrier of an external transmitter
Tx m
ICPic ic is the inter-technology Channel Protection between the signal transmitted by Tx and received by m assuming the
i
P HS – SCCH ic
P c ic = -------------------------------
-
i LT
i
and
L path L Tx L term L body L indoor E Shadowing 4
L T = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- ( )
G Tx G term
term term
BTS , F ortho , F MUD and N 0 are defined in "Inputs" on page 215.
Therefore,
req
-----
Ec-
ic N tot ic
DL
Nt HS – SCCH
P HS – SCCH ic = ------------------------------------------------------------------ L T for the total noise option,
BTS i
And
req
-----
Ec-
DL
HS – SCCH N tot ic
ic
Nt
P HS – SCCH ic = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
req
- L T for the without useful signal option.
1 + 1 – F 1 – F
term
-----
Ec-
ic i
BTS ortho MUD Nt HS – SCCH
P HSDPA ic is the power available for HSDPA on the carrier ic. This parameter is either a simulation output, or a user-defined
cell input.
P HSDPA ic = P HS – PDSCH ic + n HS – SCCH P HS – SCCH ic
Therefore, we have:
P HS – PDSCH ic = P HSDPA ic – n HS – SCCH P HS – SCCH ic
We have:
BTS P c ic
-----
Ec-
ic i
= -------------------------------
- for the total noise option,
Nt HS – PDSCH DL
N tot ic
And
BTS P c ic
-----
Ec-
Nt ic HS – PDSCH = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
i
- for the without useful signal option.
P c ic
DL term i
N tot ic – 1 – F ortho 1 – F MUD BTS ---------------
n
245
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Here, Atoll works on the assumption that five HS-PDSCH channels are used (n=5).
With
DL DL DL DL DL term
N tot ic = I intra ic + I extra ic + I inter – carrier ic + I inter – techno log y ic + N 0
DL DL
DL P SCH ic P SCH ic
I intra ic = P tot ic + BTS 1 – F MUD 1 – F ortho P tot ic – -------------------
- – BTS P tot ic – -------------------
DL term
-
LT LT
txi txi txi
DL DL
I extra ic = P tot ic
txj j i
Ptot icadj
DL
DL j
I inter – carrier ic = txj
------------------------------------
RF ic ic adj
RF ic ic adj is the interference reduction factor, defined between ic and icadj and set to a value different from 0.
DL
I inter – techno log y ic is the inter-technology interference at the receiver on ic.
Tx
P Transmitted ic i
DL
I inter – techno log y ic = --------------------------------------
Tx Tx m
ni
L total ICP ic ic
i
th
ic i is the i interfering carrier of an external transmitter
Tx m
ICP ic ic is the inter-technology Channel Protection between the signal transmitted by Tx and received by m assuming the
i
P HS – PDSCH ic
P c ic = ----------------------------------
-
i LT
i
And
L path L Tx L term L body L indoor E Shadowing 5
L T = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- ( )
G Tx G term
term term
BTS , F ortho , F MUD and N 0 are defined in "Inputs" on page 215.
Atoll performs intra-cell interference computations based on the total power. You can
instruct Atoll to use maximum power by adding the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[CDMA]
PmaxInIntraItf = 1
In this case, Atoll considers the following formula:
246
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
The cell to which the user is connected supports HSPA+ functionalities (i.e. 64QAM modulation in the DL and MIMO systems)
and the maximum number of HS-PDSCH channels is 15.
247
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
1st case: The CQI experienced by the user equals 26. Therefore, Atoll can choose between two HSDPA bearers, the bearer
indexes 26 and 31.
Characteristics of the bearer index 26 are:
• Transport block size: 17237 bits
• Number of HS-PDSCH channels used: 12
• 16QAM modulation is used
• Peak RLC Throughput: 8.32 Mb/s
Characteristics of the bearer index 31 are:
• Transport block size: 15776 bits
• Number of HS-PDSCH channels used: 10
• 64QAM modulation is used
• Peak RLC Throughput: 7.36 Mb/s
Both HSDPA bearers are compatible with the user equipment and cell capabilities. Atoll selects the HSDPA bearer that
provides the highest RLC peak throughput, i.e. the bearer index 26.
2nd case: The CQI experienced by the user equals 27. Therefore, Atoll can choose between two HSDPA bearers, the bearer
indexes 27 and 32.
Characteristics of the bearer index 27 are:
• Transport block size: 21754 bits
• Number of HS-PDSCH channels used: 15
• 16QAM modulation is used
• Peak RLC Throughput: 10.24 Mb/s
Characteristics of the bearer index 32 are:
• Transport block size: 21768 bits
• Number of HS-PDSCH channels used: 12
• 64QAM modulation is used
• Peak RLC Throughput: 10.24 Mb/s
Both HSDPA bearers are compatible with the user equipment and cell capabilities and the peak RLC throughput they provide
is the same. Atoll selects the HSDPA bearer using the highest modulation scheme, i.e. the bearer index 32.
Example 2: One HSDPA BE user experiencing a CQI of 26.
Therefore, Atoll can choose between two HSDPA bearers, the bearer indexes 26 and 31.
Characteristics of the bearer index 26 are:
• Transport block size: 17237 bits
• Number of HS-PDSCH channels used: 12
• 16QAM modulation is used
• Peak RLC Throughput: 8.32 Mb/s
248
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
1st case: The user equipment category is 9. The cell to which the user is connected supports HSPA+ functionalities (i.e. 64QAM
modulation in the DL and MIMO systems) and the maximum number of HS-PDSCH channels is 15.
The user equipment characteristics are the following:
• Maximum transport block size: 20251 bits
• Maximum number of HS-PDSCH channels: 15
• Highest modulation supported: 16QAM
• MIMO Support: No
The bearer index 31 cannot be selected because it requires a modulation scheme not supported by the terminal. Only the
bearer index 26 is compatible with the user equipment capabilities. Atoll selects it.
2nd case: The user equipment category is 8. The cell to which the user is connected supports HSPA+ functionalities (i.e. 64QAM
modulation in the DL and MIMO systems) and the maximum number of HS-PDSCH channels is 15.
The user equipment characteristics are the following:
• Maximum transport block size: 14411 bits
• Maximum number of HS-PDSCH channels: 10
• Highest modulation supported: 16QAM
• MIMO Support: No
Here, none of HSDPA bearers are compatible with the user equipment capabilities.
The bearer index 31 cannot be selected because it requires a modulation scheme not supported by the terminal. With the
bearer index 26, the number of HS-PDSCH channels (12) exceeds the maximum number of HS-PDSCH channels the terminal
can use (10), and the transport block size (17237 bits) exceeds the maximum transport block size (14411 bits) the terminal can
carried.
In the HSDPA Radio Bearer table, Atoll selects a lower HSDPA bearer compatible with cell and UE category capabilities. It
selects the bearer index 25.
• The number of HS-PDSCH channels (10) does not exceed the maximum number of HS-PDSCH channels the terminal
can use (10) and the maximum number of HS-PDSCH channels available at the cell level (15),
• The transport block size (14411 bits) does not exceed the maximum transport block size (14411 bits) the terminal can
carried.
• 16QAM modulation is supported by the terminal and the cell.
3rd case: The user equipment category is 13. The cell to which the user is connected supports HSPA functionalities and the
maximum number of HS-PDSCH channels is 15.
The user equipment capabilities are:
• Maximum transport block size: 35280 bits
• Maximum number of HS-PDSCH channels:15
• Highest modulation supported: 64QAM
• MIMO Support: No
The bearer index 31 cannot be selected because it requires a modulation scheme not supported by the cell. On the other hand,
the bearer index 26 is compatible with cell and UE category capabilities. Therefore, it is allocated.
6. HS-PDSCH Quality Update
Once the bearer selected, Atoll exactly knows the number of HS-PDSCH channels. Therefore, when the method “Without
useful signal” is used, it may recalculate the HS-PDSCH quality with the real number of HS-PDSCH channels (A default value
(5) was taken into account in the first HS-PDSCH quality calculation).
When the option “CQI based on HS-PDSCH quality” is selected, Atoll proceeds as follows.
1. HS-PDSCH Quality Calculation
Atoll proceeds as follows:
249
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
P HS – SCCH ic is the HS-SCCH power on carrier ic. It is either fixed by the user (when the option “HS-SCCH Power Dynamic
Allocation”in the cell property dialogue is unchecked) or dynamically calculated (when the option “HS-SCCH Power Dynamic
Allocation” is selected).
req
In this case, the HS-SCCH power is controlled so as to reach the required HS-SCCH Ec/Nt (noted ------ ic
Ec
). It is
Nt HS – SCCH
specified in mobility properties.
We have:
BTS P c ic
-----
Ec-
ic i
= -------------------------------
- for the total noise option,
Nt HS – SCCH DL
N tot ic
And
BTS P c ic
-----
Ec-
ic = i
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- for the without useful signal option.
Nt HS – SCCH DL term
N tot ic – 1 – F ortho 1 – F MUD BTS P c ic
i
With
DL DL DL DL DL term
N tot ic = I intra ic + I extra ic + I inter – carrier ic + I inter – techno log y ic + N 0
DL DL
DL P SCH ic P SCH ic
I intra ic = P tot ic + BTS 1 – F MUD 1 – F ortho P tot ic – -------------------
- – BTS P tot ic – -------------------
DL term
-
LT LT
txi txi txi
DL DL
I extra ic = P tot ic
txj j i
Ptot icadj
DL
DL j
I inter – carrier ic = txj
------------------------------------
RF ic ic adj
RF ic ic adj is the interference reduction factor, defined between ic and icadj and set to a value different from 0.
DL
I inter – techno log y ic is the inter-technology interference at the receiver on ic.
Tx
P Transmitted ic i
DL
I inter – techno log y ic = --------------------------------------
Tx Tx m
ni
L total ICP ic ic
i
th
ic i is the i interfering carrier of an external transmitter
Tx m
ICP ic ic is the inter-technology Channel Protection between the signal transmitted by Tx and received by m assuming the
i
P HS – SCCH ic
P c ic = -------------------------------
-
i LT
i
And
L path L Tx L term L body L indoor E Shadowing 6
L T = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- ( )
G Tx G term
term term
BTS , F ortho , F MUD and N 0 are defined in "Inputs" on page 215.
Therefore,
250
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
req
-----
Ec-
DL
HS – SCCH N tot ic
ic
Nt
P HS – SCCH ic = ------------------------------------------------------------------ L T for the total noise option,
BTS i
And
req
-----
Ec- DL
Nt ic HS – SCCH N tot ic
P HS – SCCH ic = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
req
- L T for the without useful signal option.
1 + 1 – F term Ec i
BTS ortho 1 – F MUD ------ ic
Nt HS – SCCH
P HSDPA ic is the power available for HSDPA on the carrier ic. This parameter is either a simulation output, or a user-defined
cell input.
P HSDPA ic = P HS – PDSCH ic + n HS – SCCH P HS – SCCH ic
Therefore, we have:
P HS – PDSCH ic = P HSDPA ic – n HS – SCCH P HS – SCCH ic
Two options, available in Global parameters, may be used to calculate Nt: option Without useful signal or option Total noise.
We have:
BTS P c ic
-----
Ec-
Nt ic HS – PDSCH = -------------------------------
i
- for the total noise option,
DL
N tot ic
And
BTS P c ic
-----
Ec-
ic i
= ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- for the without useful signal option.
Nt HS – PDSCH P c ic
DL term i
N tot ic – 1 – F ortho 1 – F MUD BTS ---------------
n
Here, Atoll works on the assumption that five HS-PDSCH channels are used (n=5). Then, it calculates the HS-PDSCH CQI and
the bearer to be used. Once the bearer selected, Atoll exactly knows the number of HS-PDSCH channels and recalculates the
HS-PDSCH quality with the real number of HS-PDSCH channels.
With
DL DL DL DL DL term
N tot ic = I intra ic + I extra ic + I inter – carrier ic + I inter – techno log y ic + N 0
DL DL
DL P SCH ic P SCH ic
I intra ic = P tot ic + BTS 1 – F MUD 1 – F ortho P tot ic – -------------------
- – BTS P tot ic – -------------------
DL term
-
LT LT
txi txi txi
DL DL
I extra ic = P tot ic
txj j i
Ptot icadj
DL
DL j
I inter – carrier ic = txj
------------------------------------
RF ic ic adj
RF ic ic adj is the interference reduction factor, defined between ic and icadj and set to a value different from 0.
DL
I inter – techno log y ic is the inter-technology interference at the receiver on ic.
251
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Tx
P Transmitted ic i
DL
I inter – techno log y ic = --------------------------------------
Tx Tx m
n
L total ICP ic ic
i i
th
ic i is the i interfering carrier of an external transmitter
Tx m
ICP ic ic is the inter-technology Channel Protection between the signal transmitted by Tx and received by m assuming the
i
P HS – PDSCH ic
P c ic = ----------------------------------
-
i LT
i
And
L path L Tx L term L body L indoor E Shadowing 7
L T = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- ( )
G Tx G term
term term
BTS , F ortho , F MUD and N 0 are defined in "Inputs" on page 215.
Atoll performs intra-cell interference computations based on the total power. You can
instruct Atoll to use maximum power by adding the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[CDMA]
PmaxInIntraItf = 1
In this case, Atoll considers the following formula:
CQI HS – PDSCH = f ------ ic . This table is defined for the terminal reception equipment and the specified
Ec
Nt HS – PDSCH
mobility.
3. HSDPA Bearer Selection
The bearer is selected as described in "HSDPA Bearer Selection" on page 246.
If the user is connected to a cell that supports HSPA+ with transmit diversity and if he has a MIMO-capable terminal (i.e., a
terminal with an HSDPA UE category supporting MIMO), he will benefit from downlink diversity gain on the HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt.
-----
Ec-
ic = ------ ic
Ec DL DL
+ G TD + G TD in dB
Nt HS – PDSCH Nt HS – PDSCH
Where
DL
G TD is the downlink transmit diversity gain (in dB) corresponding to the numbers of transmission and reception antenna ports
(respectively defined in the transmitter and terminal properties).
DL
G TD is the additional diversity gain in downlink (in dB). It is defined for the clutter class of the user.
252
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
If the user is connected to a cell that supports HSPA+ with spatial multiplexing and if he has a MIMO-capable terminal (i.e., a
terminal with an HSDPA UE category supporting MIMO), he will benefit from the spatial multiplexing gain in its peak RLC
throughput.
In this case, the peak RLC throughput obtained by the user is the following:
DL DL Max
TP P – R LC = TP P –R LC Index HSDPABearer 1 + f SM – Gain G SM – 1
Where
DL
TP P – R LC Index HSDPABearer is the peak RLC throughput that the selected HSDPA bearer ( Index HSDPABearer ) can provide in the
cell (Txi, ic). It is read in the HSDPA Radio Bearer table.
Max
G SM is the maximum spatial multiplexing gain (in dB) for a given number of transmission and reception antennas
(respectively defined in the transmitter and terminal properties).
f SM – Gain is the spatial multiplexing gain factor defined for the clutter
Max C/I
15 users (where 15 corresponds to the maximum number of HSDPA bearer users defined) enters the scheduler in the same
order as in the simulation. Then, they are sorted in descending order by the channel quality indicator (CQI), i.e. in a best bearer
descending order.
DL Obtained
Mobiles Simulation Rank Best Bearer (kbps) Connection Status
Throughput (kbps)
M1 2 2400 2400+3.4 Connected
M2 15 2400 1440+3.4 Connected
M3 8 2080 160+3.4 Connected
M4 9 2080 3.4 Delayed
M5 10 2080 3.4 Delayed
M6 12 2080 3.4 Delayed
M7 13 2080 3.4 Delayed
M8 14 2080 3.4 Delayed
M9 7 1920 3.4 Delayed
M10 1 1600 3.4 Delayed
M11 3 1600 3.4 Delayed
M12 4 1600 3.4 Delayed
M13 5 1600 3.4 Delayed
M14 6 1600 3.4 Delayed
M15 11 1440 3.4 Delayed
M16 16 2080 0 Scheduler Saturation
Round Robin
Users are taken into account in the same order than the one in the simulation (random order).
253
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
DL Obtained
Mobiles Simulation Rank Best Bearer (kbps) Connection Status
Throughput (kbps)
M1 1 1600 1600+3.4 Connected
M2 2 2400 960+3.4 Connected
M3 3 1600 3.4 Delayed
M4 4 1600 3.4 Delayed
M5 5 1600 3.4 Delayed
M6 6 1600 3.4 Delayed
M7 7 1920 3.4 Delayed
M8 8 2080 3.4 Delayed
M9 9 2080 3.4 Delayed
M10 10 2080 3.4 Delayed
M11 11 1440 3.4 Delayed
M12 12 2080 3.4 Delayed
M13 13 2080 3.4 Delayed
M14 14 2080 3.4 Delayed
M15 15 2400 3.4 Delayed
M16 16 2080 0 Scheduler Saturation
Proportional Fair
15 users (where 15 corresponds to the maximum number of HSDPA bearer users defined) enters the scheduler in the same
order as in the simulation. Then, they are sorted in an ascending order according to a new random parameter which
corresponds to a combination of the user rank in the simulation and the channel quality indicator (CQI).
For a user i, the random parameter RP i is calculated as follows:
Simu CQI
RP i = 50 R i + 50 R i
Where,
Simu
Ri is the user rank in the simulation.
CQI
Ri is the user rank according to the CQI.
You can change the default weights by editing the atoll.ini file. For more information, see
the Administrator Manual.
DL Obtained
Simulation Best Bearer Connection
Mobiles CQI Rank RP Throughput
Rank (kbps) Status
(kbps)
M1 2 1 150 2400 2400 Connected
M2 1 10 550 1600 960 Connected
M3 8 3 550 2080 160 Connected
M4 9 4 650 2080 3.4 Delayed
M5 3 11 700 1600 3.4 Delayed
M6 10 5 750 2080 3.4 Delayed
M7 4 12 800 1600 3.4 Delayed
M8 7 9 800 1920 3.4 Delayed
M9 15 2 850 2400 3.4 Delayed
M10 5 13 900 1600 3.4 Delayed
M11 12 6 900 2080 3.4 Delayed
M12 6 14 1000 1600 3.4 Delayed
M13 13 7 1000 2080 3.4 Delayed
254
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
DL Obtained
Simulation Best Bearer Connection
Mobiles CQI Rank RP Throughput
Rank (kbps) Status
(kbps)
M14 14 8 1100 2080 3.4 Delayed
M15 11 15 1300 1440 3.4 Delayed
Scheduler
M16 16 - - 2080 0
Saturation
In each cell, the number of HS-SCCH channels and the maximum number of HSDPA bearer users have been respectively set
to 4 and 7.
The scheduling algorithms defined for the two cells are the same as the one selected for the transmitter.
Each DC-HSDPA user is counted twice, once in each cell, as he may be assigned two different HSDPA bearers in the two cells.
Therefore, the scheduler manages the users ranked 1st to 11th (i.e. 4 single-carrier users connected to the first carrier, 4 single-
carrier users connected to the second carrier and 3 DC-HSDPA users). Users ranked 12th to 16th are rejected because the
maximum number of HSDPA bearer users that the scheduler can manage in a cell is exceeded.
Impact the scheduling algorithms have on the simulation results is described in the tables below.
255
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Max C/I
7 users from each cell (where 7 corresponds to the maximum number of HSDPA bearer users defined for each cell), i.e., a total
of 14 users enter the scheduler in the same order as in the simulation. Then, they are sorted in the order of decreasing channel
quality indicator (CQI), i.e. in a best bearer descending order.
DL Obtained
Simulation Best Bearer Connection
Mobiles Carrier CQI Throughput
Rank (kbps) Status
(kbps)
M1 1 5 21 3040 3040+3.4 Connected
M2
2 4 19 2400 2400+3.4 Connected
(DC-HSDPA)
M3 2 8 18 2080 1440+3.4 Connected
M2
1 4 17 1920 1920 Connected
(DC-HSDPA)
M4
1 9 17 1920 960+3.4 Connected
(DC-HSDPA)
M5 1 3 16 1600 3.4 Delayed
M4
2 9 16 1600 1120 Connected
(DC-HSDPA)
M6 2 2 15 1440 3.4 Delayed
M7 1 7 14 1120 3.4 Delayed
M8 1 10 14 1120 3.4 Delayed
M9
2 1 13 960 3.4 Delayed
(DC-HSDPA)
M10 2 6 13 960 3.4 Delayed
M9
1 1 12 800 0 Delayed
(DC-HSDPA)
M11 2 11 12 800 3.4 Delayed
M12 1 14 1120 Scheduler
12 0
(DC-HSDPA) 2 15 1440 Saturation
Scheduler
M13 2 13 17 1920 0
Saturation
M14 1 13 960 Scheduler
14 0
(DC-HSDPA) 2 15 1440 Saturation
Scheduler
M15 1 15 17 1920 0
Saturation
M16 1 12 800 Scheduler
16 0
(DC-HSDPA) 2 14 1120 Saturation
• The user ranked 4th (here M2) is connected to an HSDPA bearer in each cell. He obtains a total DL throughput of 4323.4
kbps (2403.4+1920).
• The user ranked 9th (here M4) is connected to an HSDPA bearer in each cell. He obtains a total DL throughput of 2083.4
kbps (963.4+1120).
• The first user (here M9) is delayed in the two cells. He obtains a total DL throughput of 3.4 kbps.
Round Robin
7 users from each cell (where 7 corresponds to the maximum number of HSDPA bearer users defined for each cell), i.e., a total
of 14 users enter the scheduler in the same order as in the simulation.
DL Obtained
Simulation Best Bearer Connection
Mobiles Carrier CQI Throughput
Rank (kbps) Status
(kbps)
M1
1 1 12 800 800 Connected
(DC-HSDPA)
256
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
DL Obtained
Simulation Best Bearer Connection
Mobiles Carrier CQI Throughput
Rank (kbps) Status
(kbps)
M1
2 1 13 960 960+3.4 Connected
(DC-HSDPA)
M2 2 2 15 1440 1440+3.4 Connected
M3 1 3 16 1600 1600+3.4 Connected
M4
2 4 19 2400 1600+3.4 Connected
(DC-HSDPA)
M4
1 4 17 1920 960 Connected
(DC-HSDPA)
M5 1 5 21 3040 480+3.4 Connected
M6 2 6 13 960 160+3.4 Connected
M7 1 7 14 1120 3.4 Delayed
M8 2 8 18 2080 3.4 Delayed
M9
2 9 16 1600 0 Delayed
(DC-HSDPA)
M9
1 9 17 1920 3.4 Delayed
(DC-HSDPA)
M10 1 10 14 1120 3.4 Delayed
M11 2 11 12 800 3.4 Delayed
M12 1 14 1120 Scheduler
12 0
(DC-HSDPA) 2 15 1440 Saturation
Scheduler
M13 2 13 17 1920 0
Saturation
M14 1 13 960 Scheduler
14 0
(DC-HSDPA) 2 15 1440 Saturation
Scheduler
M15 1 15 17 1920 0
Saturation
M16 1 12 800 Scheduler
16 0
(DC-HSDPA) 2 14 1120 Saturation
Proportional Fair
7 users from each cell (where 7 corresponds to the maximum number of HSDPA bearer users defined for each cell), i.e., a total
of 14 users enter the scheduler in the same order as in the simulation. Then, they are sorted in an ascending order according
to a new random parameter which corresponds to a combination of the user rank in the simulation and the channel quality
indicator (CQI).
For a user i, the random parameter RPi is calculated as follows:
Simu CQI
RPi = 50 R i + 50 R i
Where,
Simu
Ri is the user rank in the simulation.
CQI
Ri is the user rank according to the CQI.
257
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
You can change the default weights by editing the atoll.ini file. For more information, see
the Administrator Manual.
DL
Simulation Best Bearer Obtained Connection
Mobiles Carrier CQI CQI Rank RP
Rank (kbps) Throughput Status
(kbps)
M1
2 4 19 2 300 2400 2400+3.4 Connected
DC-HSDPA
M2 1 5 21 1 300 3040 3040+3.4 Connected
M1
1 4 17 4 400 1920 1440 Connected
DC-HSDPA
M3 1 3 16 6 450 1600 800+3.4 Connected
M4 2 2 15 8 500 1440 1120+3.4 Connected
M5 2 8 18 3 550 2080 800+3.4 Connected
M6
2 1 13 11 600 960 480+3.4 Connected
DC-HSDPA
M6
1 1 12 13 700 800 0 Delayed
DC-HSDPA
M7
1 9 17 5 700 1920 3.4 Delayed
DC-HSDPA
M8 1 7 14 9 800 1120 3.4 Delayed
M7
2 9 16 7 800 1600 0 Delayed
DC-HSDPA
M9 2 6 13 12 900 960 3.4 Delayed
M10 1 10 14 10 1000 1120 3.4 Delayed
M11 2 11 12 14 1250 800 3.4 Delayed
M12 1 14 1120 Scheduler Scheduler
12 0 0
(DC-HSDPA) 2 15 1440 Saturation Saturation
Scheduler Scheduler
M13 2 13 17 1920 0 0
Saturation Saturation
M14 1 13 960 Scheduler Scheduler
14 0 0
(DC-HSDPA) 2 15 1440 Saturation Saturation
Scheduler Scheduler
M15 1 15 17 1920 0 0
Saturation Saturation
M16 1 12 800 Scheduler Scheduler
16 0 0
(DC-HSDPA) 2 14 1120 Saturation Saturation
• The user ranked 4th (here M1) is connected to an HSDPA bearer in each cell. He obtains a total DL throughput of 3843.4
kbps (2403.4+1440).
• The first user (here M6) is connected to an HSDPA bearer in his anchor cell and delayed in the other cell. He obtains a
total DL throughput of 483.4 kbps (483.4+0).
• The user ranked 9th (here M7) is delayed in the two cells. He obtains a total DL throughput of 3.4 kbps.
258
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
• 3 CBR service users with any activity status. All of them have been connected to an HSDPA bearer.
• 2 packet VBR service users. They have been connected to an HSDPA bearer.
• 7 packet BE service users active on UL. The first two users have been connected to an HSDPA bearer, the last one has
been rejected and the remaining four have been delayed in the HSDPA part.
Finally, the maximum number of HSUPA bearer users equals 10.
In this case, Atoll will consider the first ten HSPA users only and will reject the last two users in order not to exceed the
maximum number of HSUPA bearer users allowed in the cell (their connection status is "HSUPA scheduler saturation").
Evaluation by the
HSDPA
Mobiles Service Simulation Rank HSUPA part of the
Connection Status
algorithm
M1 CBR 4 Connected Yes
M2 CBR 7 Connected Yes
M3 CBR 9 Connected Yes
M4 VBR 3 Connected Yes
M5 VBR 5 Connected Yes
M6 BE 1 Connected Yes
M7 BE 2 Connected Yes
M8 BE 6 Delayed Yes
M9 BE 8 Delayed Yes
M10 BE 10 Delayed Yes
M11 BE 11 Delayed No
M12 BE 12 Rejected No
HSUPA bearer characteristics are provided in the HSUPA Bearer table. An HSUPA bearer is described with following
characteristics:
• Radio Bearer Index: The bearer index number.
259
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
• TTI Duration (ms): The TTI duration in ms. The TTI can be 2 or 10 ms.
• Transport Block Size (Bits): The transport block size in bits.
• Number of E-DPDCH Codes: The number of E-DPDCH channels used.
• Minimum Spreading Factor: The smallest spreading factor used.
• Modulation: the modulation used (QPSK or 16QAM)
• Peak RLC Throughput (bps): The RLC peak throughput represents the peak throughput without coding (redundancy,
overhead, addressing, etc.).
HSUPA bearers can be classified into two categories:
• HSUPA bearers using QPSK modulation: They can be selected for users connected to HSPA and HSPA+ capable cells.
• HSUPA bearers using 16QAM modulation (improvement introduced by the release 7 of the 3GPP UTRA specifications,
referred to as HSPA+). These HSUPA bearers can be allocated to users connected to cells with HSPA+ capabilities only.
Atoll considers an HSUPA bearer as compatible with the category 3 user equipment if:
• The TTI duration used by the bearer is supported by the user equipment (10 ms).
• The transport block size does not exceed the maximum transport block size supported by the user equipment (14484
bits):
• The number of E-DPDCH channels required by the bearer does not exceed the maximum number of E-DPDCH channels
that the terminal can use (2).
• The minimum spreading factor used by the bearer is not less than the smallest spreading factor supported by the
terminal (4).
• The modulation required by the bearer is supported by the terminal.
The HSUPA bearers compatible with category 3 user equipment are framed in red:
Then, during admission control, Atoll checks that the lowest compatible bearer in terms of the required E-DPDCH Ec⁄Nt does
not require a terminal power higher than the maximum terminal power allowed.
Atoll uses the HSUPA Bearer Selection table. Among the compatible HSUPA bearers, Atoll chooses the one with the lowest
required Ec/Nt threshold.
Here, this is the index 1 HSUPA bearer; the required Ec/Nt threshold to obtain this bearer is -21.7dB.
Ec req
Then, from the required Ec/Nt threshold, ------
req
, Atoll calculates the required terminal power, P term – HSUPA .
Nt E – DPDCH
Ec req
P term – HSUPA = ------
req UL
L T N tot
Nt E – DPDCH
With
UL intra UL extra
UL tx UL tx
N tot ic = 1 – F MUD term I tot ic + I tot ic + I inter – carrier ic + N 0
260
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
UL UL
tx intra extra UL tx
term , F MUD , I tot , I tot , I inter – carrier and N 0 are defined in "Inputs" on page 215.
req
Atoll rejects the user if the terminal power required to obtain the lowest compatible HSUPA bearer ( P term – HSUPA ) exceeds
the maximum terminal power (his connection status is "HSUPA Admission Rejection").
At the end of this step, the number of non-rejected HSUPA bearer users is n HSUPA . All of them will be connected to an HSUPA
bearer at the end.
Let us focus on the three CBR service users mentioned in the example of the previous paragraph "HSUPA Part of the
Algorithm" on page 258. We assume that all of them have been admitted. Noise rise scheduling and radio resource control
are carried out on each user in order to determine the best HSUPA bearer that the user can obtain. Several CBR service users
can share the same HSUPA bearer. Then, Atoll calculates the HSUPA bearer consumption ( C in %) for each user and takes into
account this parameter when it determines the resources consumed by the user (i.e., the terminal power used, the number
of channel elements and the Iub backhaul throughput).
In the bearer allocation process shown below, the 3 CBR service users are represented by Mj, with j = 1 to 3.
261
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Sufficient Iub
backhaul throughput No Is there a lower HSUPA
to support the HSUPA bearer available?
bearer? Yes
No
Downgrading to lower
Yes Mj is rejected HSUPA bearer
Yes
Enough
channel elements No Is there a lower HSUPA
available to support the bearer available?
HSUPA bearer?
No
Yes
Mj is rejected
Pterm-HSUPA recalculation and interference update
No
Mj = M3?
Yes
Figure 4.12: HSUPA Bearer Allocation Process for CBR Service Users
Let us focus on the two VBR service users mentioned in the example of the previous paragraph "HSUPA Part of the Algorithm"
on page 258. We assume that all of them have been admitted. Noise rise scheduling and radio resource control are carried
out on each user in order to determine the best HSUPA bearer that the user can obtain.
In the bearer allocation process shown below, the 2 VBR service users are represented by Mj, with j = 1 to 2.
For the user, Mj, with j varying from 1 to 2:
Sufficient Iub
backhaul throughput No Is there a lower HSUPA
to support the HSUPA bearer available?
bearer? Yes
No
Downgrading to lower HSUPA
Yes Mj is rejected bearer
Yes
Enough
channel elements No Is there a lower HSUPA
available to support the bearer available?
HSUPA bearer?
No
Yes
Mj is rejected
Pterm-HSUPA recalculation and interference update
No
Mj = M2?
Yes
Figure 4.13: HSUPA Bearer Allocation Process for VBR Service Users
BE Service Users
Let us focus on the five BE service users mentioned in the example of the previous paragraph "HSUPA Part of the Algorithm"
on page 258. We assume that all of them have been admitted. Noise rise scheduling and radio resource control are carried
out on each user in order to determine the best HSUPA bearer that the user can obtain.
In the bearer allocation process shown below, the 5 BE service users are represented by Mj, with j = 1 to 5.
262
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Sufficient Iub
backhaul throughput No Is there a lower HSUPA
to support the HSUPA bearer available?
bearer? Yes
No
Downgrading to lower HSUPA
Yes Mj is rejected bearer
Yes
Enough
channel elements No Is there a lower HSUPA
available to support the bearer available?
HSUPA bearer?
No
Yes
Mj is rejected
Pterm-HSUPA recalculation and interference update
No
Mj = M5?
The obtained HSUPA radio bearer is the bearer that the user obtains after noise rise scheduling and radio resource control.
CBR service users have the highest priority and are processed first. Therefore, after the admission control, the noise rise
scheduling algorithm attempts to evenly share the remaining cell load between the CBR service users admitted in admission
control; in terms of HSUPA, each user is allocated a right to produce interference. The remaining cell load factor on uplink
UL
( X HSPA – CBR txi ic ) depends on the maximum load factor allowed on uplink and how much uplink load is produced by the
served R99 traffic. It can be expressed as follows:
UL UL UL
X HSPA – CBR txi ic = X max txi ic – X R99 txi ic
Then, Atoll evenly shares the remaining cell load factor between the CBR service users admitted during the previous step
( n HSPA – CBR ).
UL
UL X HSPA – CBR txi ic
X user txi ic = ------------------------------------------------
n HSPA – CBR
Ec max
From this value, Atoll calculates the maximum E-DPDCH Ec⁄Nt allowed ( ------ ) for each CBR service user. For further
Nt E – DPDCH
information on the calculation, see "Uplink Load Factor Due to One User" on page 281.
Ec- max
----- 1
Nt E – DPDCH = -------------------------------------------
UL
- for the Without useful signal option
F txi ic
---------------------------------- – 1
UL
X user txi ic
UL
Ec- max
----- X user
= --------------- for the Total noise option
Nt E – DPDCH UL
F
Then, it selects an HSUPA bearer. The allocation depends on the maximum E-DPDCH Ec⁄Nt allowed and on UE and cell capa-
bilities. Atoll selects the best HSUPA bearer from the HSUPA compatible bearers. This is the HSUPA bearer ( Index HSUPABearer )
UL
TP P – R LC Index HSUPABearer
with the highest potential throughput ( ----------------------------------------------------------------- ) where:
N Rtx Index HSUPABearer
Ec- req
----- Ec max
• ------
Nt E – DPDCH Nt E – DPDCH
req max
• And P term – HSUPA P term
req
When several HSUPA bearers are available, Atoll selects the one with the lowest ------
Ec
.
Nt E – DPDCH
263
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
After the noise rise scheduling, Atoll carries out radio resource control, verifying if enough channel elements and Iub backhaul
throughput are available for the HSUPA bearer assigned to the user. For information on radio resource control, see "Radio
Resource Control" on page 267.
After processing all CBR service users, Atoll carries out noise rise scheduling and radio resource control on VBR service users.
During the noise rise scheduling, Atoll distributes the remaining cell load factor available after all CBR service users have been
served. It can be expressed as follows:
UL UL UL UL
X HSPA – VBR txi ic = X max txi ic – X R99 txi ic – X HSPA – CBR txi ic
The remaining cell load factor is shared equally between the admitted VBR service users ( n HSPA – VBR ).
UL
UL X HSPA – VBR txi ic
X user txi ic = ------------------------------------------------
-
n HSPA – VBR
Ec max
From this value, Atoll calculates the maximum E-DPDCH Ec⁄Nt allowed ( ------ ) as explained above and selects an
Nt E – DPDCH
HSUPA bearer for each VBR service user. After the noise rise scheduling, Atoll carries out radio resource control on VBR service
users. For information on radio resource control, see "Radio Resource Control" on page 267.
After processing VBR service users, Atoll carries out noise rise scheduling and radio resource control on BE service users.
During the noise rise scheduling, Atoll distributes the remaining cell load factor available after all CBR and VBR service users
have been served. It can be expressed as follows:
UL UL UL UL UL
X HSPA txi ic = X max txi ic – X R99 txi ic – X HSPA – CBR txi ic – X HSPA – VBR txi ic
The remaining cell load factor is shared equally between the admitted BE service users ( n HSPA ).
UL
UL X HSPA txi ic
X user txi ic = ------------------------------------
n HSPA
Ec max
From this value, Atoll calculates the maximum E-DPDCH Ec⁄Nt allowed ( ------ ) as explained above and selects an
Nt E – DPDCH
HSUPA bearer for each BE service user. After the noise rise scheduling, Atoll carries out radio resource control on BE service
users. For information on radio resource control, see "Radio Resource Control" on page 267.
Example: We have a cell with six BE service users, and neither CBR user nor VBR user. All BE service users have been admitted.
The remaining cell load factor equal to 0.6 is shared between the BE service users. Therefore, the UL load factor allotted to
each user is 0.1. Let’s take the cell UL reuse factor equal to 1.5. Atoll calculates the maximum E-DPDCH Ec⁄Nt allowed (the
Without useful signal option is selected).
Ec max
We have: ------ = -11.5 dB
Nt E – DPDCH
Here, the obtained HSUPA bearer is the index 5 HSUPA bearer. It provides a potential throughput of 128 kbps and requires
E-DPDCH Ec⁄Nt of -13 dB (lower than -11.5 dB) and a terminal power lower than the maximum terminal power allowed.
. Required Ec/Nt Peak RLC Throughput Potential Throughput
HSUPA Bearers Index Nb of Retransmissions
Threshold (dB) (kbps) (kbps)
1 -21.7 2 32 16
2 -19 2 64 32
3 -16.1 2 128 64
4 -13.9 2 192 96
5 -13 2 256 128
6 -10.1 2 512 256
7 -8 2 768 384
8 -7 2 1024 512
With HSUPA, uplink soft handover impacts the scheduling operation. While HSDPA sends data from one cell only, with HSUPA
all cells in the active set receive the transmission from the terminal. Therefore, all the cells are impacted by the transmission
in terms of noise rise.
264
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
For each HSPA-capable cell of the active set tx k ic , Atoll calculates the maximum E-DPDCH Ec⁄Nt allowed
max
( ------
Ec
tx ic ) as explained in "HSUPA Bearer Allocation Process" on page 261.
Nt E – DPDCH k
For each cell of the active set tx k ic , Atoll calculates the maximum terminal power allowed to obtain an HSUPA radio bearer
max
( P term – HSUPA tx k ic ).
max
P term – HSUPA tx k ic = min ------ tx ic L T N tot P term
max Ec UL max
Nt E – DPDCH k
With
UL UL extra
UL tx intra UL tx
N tot ic = 1 – F MUD term I tot ic + I tot ic + I inter – carrier ic + N 0
UL intra UL extra
tx UL tx
term , F MUD , I tot , I tot , I inter – carrier and N 0 are defined in "Inputs" on page 215.
As HSUPA bearer users in soft handover use the lowest granted noise rise, Atoll chooses the lowest of maximum terminal
power allowed for each cell of the active set tx k ic .
max max
P term – HSUPA = min P term – HSUPA tx k ic
tx AS
k
max
Once Atoll knows the selected maximum terminal power ( P term – HSUPA ), it recalculates the maximum E-DPDCH Ec⁄Nt allowed
Ec max
( ------ tx ic ) for each HSUPA-capable cell of the active set.
Nt E – DPDCH k
max
Ec- max
----- P term – HSUPA
Nt E – DPDCH tx k ic = -----------------------------
-
UL
L T N tot
max
Then, Atoll calculates the maximum E-DPDCH Ec⁄Nt allowed ( ------
Ec
) after signal recombination of all HSUPA capable
Nt E – DPDCH
cells of the active set 10.
max max
-----
Ec- -----
Ec-
UL
= f rake efficiency tx ic
Nt E – DPDCH Nt E – DPDCH k
txk ActiveSet
samesite
For softer-soft handover (2/3), it depends on if the MRC option is selected (option available in Global parameters). If selected,
we have:
265
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Max
-----
Ec- max UL Ec- max Ec- max
Nt E – DPDCH = tx ,tx ActiveSet f rake efficiency
k l Nt
-----
E – DPDCH
tx k ic
-----
Nt E – DPDCH
tx l ic
tx samesite tx
k k
tx othersite
l
max
Ec- max
Else, we have: ------ Max ----- tx ic
Ec
=
Nt E – DPDCH Nt E – DPDCH k
txk ActiveSet
Then, Atoll selects an HSUPA bearer as previously explained in "HSUPA Bearer Allocation Process" on page 261. The allocation
depends on the maximum E-DPDCH Ec⁄Nt allowed and on UE and cell capabilities. Atoll selects the best HSUPA bearer from
the HSUPA compatible bearers. This is the HSUPA bearer ( Index HSUPABearer ) with the highest potential throughput
UL
TP P – R LC Index HSUPABearer
( ----------------------------------------------------------------- ) where:
N Rtx Index HSUPABearer
Ec- req
----- Ec- max
-----
• Nt E – DPDCH Nt E – DPDCH
Ec req
When several HSUPA bearers are available, Atoll selects the one with the lowest ------ .
Nt E – DPDCH
Ec max max
For softer (1/2) and softer-softer (1/3) handovers: ------ -----
Ec-
UL
= f rake efficiency Nt E – DPDCH tx k ic
Nt E – DPDCH
txk ActiveSet
samesite
For softer-soft handover (2/3), it depends on if the MRC option is selected (option available in Global parameters). If selected,
we have:
Max
-----
Ec- max UL Ec- max Ec- max
Nt E – DPDCH
= txk ,txl ActiveSet rake efficiency
f
-----
Nt E – DPDCH k
tx ic -----
Nt E – DPDCH l
tx ic
tx k samesite tx k
tx othersite
l
UL
G macro – diversity 2links
max
Ec- max
Else, we have: ------ Max -----
Ec UL
Nt E – DPDCH tx k ic G macro – diversity 2links
=
Nt E – DPDCH txk ActiveSet
266
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
The requested HSUPA radio bearer is selected from the HSUPA bearers compatible with the user equipment. Atoll determines
the HSUPA bearer the user would obtain by considering the entire remaining load of the cell. The user is treated as if he is the
only user in the cell. Therefore, if we go on with the previous example, the maximum E-DPDCH Ec⁄Nt allowed is equal to -1.8
dB and the requested HSUPA bearer is the index 7 HSUPA bearer. It requires E-DPDCH Ec⁄Nt of -8 dB (lower than -1.8 dB) and
a terminal power lower than the maximum terminal power allowed.
UL UL UL UL
max I tot ic k – I tot ic k – 1 max N user ic k – N user ic k – 1
UL = max int -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- 100 int ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- 100
Stations Stations
UL UL
I tot ic k N user ic k
1st case: Between two successive iterations, UL and DL are lower than their respective thresholds (defined when creating
a simulation).
The simulation has reached convergence.
Example: Let us assume that the maximum number of iterations is 100, UL and DL convergence thresholds are set to 5. If
UL 5 and DL 5 between the 4th and the 5th iteration, Atoll stops the algorithm after the 5th iteration. Convergence has
been reached.
2nd case: After 30 iterations, UL and/or DL are still higher than their respective thresholds and from the 30th iteration, UL
and/or DL do not decrease during the next 15 successive iterations.
1. After the 30th iteration, UL and/or DL equal 100 and do not decrease during the next 15 successive iterations: Atoll
stops the algorithm at the 46th iteration. Convergence has not been reached.
2. After the 30th iteration, UL and/or DL equal 80, they start decreasing slowly until the 40th iteration (without going
under the thresholds) and then, do not change during 15 successive iterations: Atoll stops the algorithm at the 56th
iteration without reaching convergence.
4.3.3 Results
4.3.3.1 R99 Related Results
This table contains some R99 specific simulation results provided in the Cells and Mobiles tabs of the simulation property
dialogue.
267
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
E1 T1 Ethernet
TPIub – DL N I TP
RoundUp Max
Number of E1/T1/Ethernet links
Nb E1 T1 Ethernet None
E1 T1 Ethernet required by the site
TP Iub – UL N I TP
DL
P txi ic – P SCH txi ic
P tot txi ic – F ortho BTS tot -----------------------------
-
DL Downlink intra-cell interference at
DL
I intra txi ic LT None
txi terminal on carrier ic
DL
– 1 – F ortho BTS P b txi ic
Tx Downlink inter-technology
P Transmitted ic i
DL
I inter – techno log y ic --------------------------------------
Tx
L total ICP n ic
Tx m W interference at terminal on carrier ic
ni i a
Pb
UL
ic adj
UL Uplink inter-carrier interference at
I inter – carrier txi ic term W
txj j
terminal on carrier ic
-----------------------------------
-
RF ic ic adj
UL
I tot txi ic
UL
F txi ic --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- None Cell uplink reuse factor on carrier ic
UL
intra Tx
I tot txi ic 1 – F MUD term
268
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
DL
I tot ic
DL
F txi ic -----------------------------
- None Downlink reuse factor on a carrier ic
DL
I intra txi ic
DL DL
NR txi ic – 10 log 1 – X txi ic dB Noise rise on downlink
UL UL
NR txi ic – 10 log 1 – X txi ic dB Noise rise on uplink
a. In the case of an interfering GSM external network in frequency hopping, the ICP value is weighted according to the fractional load.
269
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
R99 R99 R99 R99
TP P –D L = TP P – DL R99 Bearer and TP P – U L = TP P – UL R99 Bearer
Active Active
users users
R99 R99
TP P – DL R99 Bearer is the downlink peak throughput of the user R99 radio bearer and TP P – UL R99 Bearer is the uplink
peak throughput of the user R99 radio bearer.
• The number of connected users with an HSDPA bearer (result of the HSDPA part) and the downlink peak RLC
throughput they generate. HSDPA and HSPA service users are considered since they all request an HSDPA bearer. On
DL
the other hand, only active users are taken into consideration in the downlink throughput calculation ( TP HSDPA ).
DL DL
TP HSDPA = TP P – RLC
Active
users
DL
TP P – RLC is the peak RLC throughput provided in the downlink.
• The number of connected users with an HSUPA bearer (result of the HSUPA part). Only HSPA service users are
considered.
In addition, Atoll indicates the uplink peak RLC throughput generated by active users connected with an HSUPA bearer
UL
( TP HSUPA ):
UL UL
TP HSUPA = TP P – RLC
Active
users
UL
TP P – RLC is the peak RLC throughput provided in the uplink.
4.3.3.2.2Mobiles Tab
In the Mobiles tab, Atoll indicates for each user:
UL DL
• The uplink and downlink total requested throughputs in kbps (respectively, TP requested M b and TP requested M b )
For R99 users, the DL and UL total requested throughputs correspond to the DL and UL peak throughputs of the R99 bearer
associated to the service.
DL R99
TP requested M b = TP P – DL R99 Bearer
UL R99
TP requested M b = TP P – UL R99 Bearer
For HSDPA users, the uplink requested throughput corresponds to the peak throughput of ADPCH R99 radio bearer and the
downlink requested throughput is the sum of the ADPCH radio bearer peak throughput and the peak RLC throughput(s) that
the selected HSDPA radio bearer(s) can provide. Here, the user is treated as if he is the only user in the cell and then, Atoll
determines the HSDPA bearer the user would obtain by considering the entire HSDPA power available of the cell.
DL R99 DL
TP requested M b = TP P – DL ADPCH R99 Bearer + TP P – RLC for single-carrier users
DL R99 DL
TP requested M b = TP P – DL ADPCH R99 Bearer AnchorCell + TP P – RLC c for dual-carrier users
c Serving Cells
UL R99
TP requested M b = TP P – UL ADPCH R99 Bearer
For HSPA users, the uplink requested throughput is equal to the sum of the ADPCH-EDPCCH radio bearer peak throughput and
the peak RLC throughput of the requested HSUPA radio bearer. The requested HSUPA radio bearer is selected from the HSUPA
270
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
bearers compatible with the user equipment. Here, the user is treated as if he is the only user in the cell and then, Atoll
determines the HSUPA bearer the user would obtain by considering the entire remaining load of the cell. The downlink
requested throughput is the sum of the ADPCH-EDPCCH radio bearer peak throughput and the peak RLC throughput(s) that
the requested HSDPA radio bearer(s) can provide. The requested HSDPA radio bearer is determined as explained in the
previous paragraph.
DL R99 DL
TP requested M b = TP P – DL ADPCH – EDPCCH R99 Bearer + TP P – RLC for single-carrier users
DL R99 DL
TP requested M b = TP P – DL ADPCH – EDPCCH R99 Bearer AnchorCell + TP P – RLC c for dual-carrier users
c Serving cells
UL R99 UL
TP requested M b = TP P – UL ADPCH – EDPCCH R99 Bearer + TP P – RLC
UL DL
• The uplink and downlink total obtained throughputs in kbps (respectively, TP obtained M b and TP obtained M b )
For R99 service users, the obtained throughput is the same as the requested throughput if he is connected without being
downgraded. Otherwise, the obtained throughput is lower (it corresponds to the peak throughput of the selected R99 bearer).
If the user is rejected, the obtained throughput is zero.
In the downlink, HSDPA bearer users can be connected to a single cell or to two adjacent cells of the same transmitter when
the user has a DC-HSDPA-capable terminal and when the transmitter supports the multi-cell HSDPA mode.
For a single-carrier HSDPA service user connected to an HSDPA bearer, the downlink obtained throughput corresponds to the
instantaneous throughput; this is the sum of the A-DPCH radio bearer peak throughput and the peak RLC throughput provided
by the selected HSDPA radio bearer after scheduling and radio resource control. If the user is delayed (he is only connected
to an R99 radio bearer), downlink obtained throughput corresponds to the downlink peak throughput of the ADPCH radio
bearer. Finally, if the user is rejected either in the R99 part or in the HSDPA part (i.e., because the HSDPA scheduler is
saturated), the downlink obtained throughput is zero.
For a dual-carrier HSDPA service user connected to two HSDPA bearers, the downlink obtained throughput corresponds to
the instantaneous throughput; this is the sum of the peak throughput provided by the A-DPCH radio bearer in the anchor cell
and the peak RLC throughputs provided by the selected HSDPA radio bearers after scheduling and radio resource control. If
the user is connected to one cell and delayed in the other cell, the downlink obtained throughput is the sum of the peak
throughput provided by the A-DPCH radio bearer in the anchor cell and the peak RLC throughput provided by the selected
HSDPA radio bearer after scheduling and radio resource control. If the user is delayed in the two cells (he is only connected
to an R99 radio bearer in the anchor cell), the downlink obtained throughput corresponds to the downlink peak throughput
of the ADPCH radio bearer in the anchor cell. Finally, if the user is rejected either in the R99 part or in the HSDPA part (i.e.,
because the HSDPA scheduler is saturated), the downlink obtained throughput is zero.
In the uplink, HSDPA service users can only have a single-carrier connection. When the user is either connected or delayed,
the uplink obtained throughput corresponds to the uplink peak throughput of the ADPCH radio bearer. If the user is rejected
either in the R99 part or in the HSDPA part (i.e., because the HSDPA scheduler is saturated), the uplink obtained throughput
is zero.
For single-carrier HSPA VBR and BE service users, on downlink, if the user is connected to an HSDPA bearer, the downlink
obtained throughput corresponds to the instantaneous throughput. The instantaneous throughput is the sum of the ADPCH-
EDPCCH radio bearer peak throughput and the peak RLC throughput provided by the selected HSDPA radio bearer after
scheduling and radio resource control. If the user is delayed, the downlink obtained throughput corresponds to the downlink
peak throughput of ADPCH-EDPCCH radio bearer. If the user is rejected, the downlink obtained throughput is "0".
For dual-carrier HSPA VBR and BE service users connected to two HSDPA bearers, the downlink obtained throughput
corresponds to the instantaneous throughput; this is the sum of the peak throughput provided by the ADPCH-EDPCCH radio
bearer in the anchor cell and the peak RLC throughputs provided by the selected HSDPA radio bearers after scheduling and
radio resource control. If the user is connected to one cell and delayed in the other cell, the downlink obtained throughput is
the sum of the peak throughput provided by the ADPCH-EDPCCH radio bearer in the anchor cell and the peak RLC throughput
provided by the selected HSDPA radio bearer after scheduling and radio resource control. If the user is delayed in the two cells
(he is only connected to an R99 radio bearer in the anchor cell), the downlink obtained throughput corresponds to the
downlink peak throughput of the ADPCH-EDPCCH radio bearer in the anchor cell. Finally, if the user is rejected, the downlink
obtained throughput is zero.
In uplink, HSPA VBR and BE service users can only have a single-carrier connection. When the user is connected to an HSUPA
bearer, the uplink obtained throughput is the sum of the ADPCH-EDPCCH radio bearer peak throughput and the peak RLC
throughput provided by the selected HSUPA radio bearer after noise rise scheduling. If the user is rejected, the uplink obtained
throughput is zero.
For a connected HSPA CBR service user, the uplink and downlink total obtained throughputs are the sum of the ADPCH-
EDPCCH radio bearer peak throughput and the minimum throughput demand defined for the service. If the user is rejected,
the uplink and downlink total obtained throughputs are "0".
• The mobile total power ( P term )
271
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
UL
P term = P term – R99 f act –EDPCCH + P term – HSUPA for HSPA VBR and BE service users.
UL
P term = P term – R99 f act –EDPCCH + P term – HSUPA C HSDPABearer for HSPA CBR service users.
UL
For HSPA CBR service users, f act –EDPCCH = 0.1 .
And
P term = P term – R99 for R99 and HSDPA users.
DL
• The HSDPA application throughput in kbps ( TP A M b )
This is the net HSDPA throughput without coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.).
DL
TP P – RLC c 1 – BLER HSDPA
DL c Serving cells
TP A M b = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- f TP – Scaling – TP Offset
TTI
Where:
DL
TP P – RLC is the peak RLC throughput provided to the user by the selected HSDPA radio bearer after scheduling and radio
resource control.
BLER HSDPA is read in the quality graph defined for the triplet “reception equipment-selected bearer-mobility” (HSDPA Quality
Graphs tab in the Reception equipment properties). This graph describes the variation of BLER as a function of the measured
quality (HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt). Knowing the HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt, Atoll calculates the corresponding BLER.
TP Offset and f TP – Scaling represent the scaling factor between the application throughput and the RLC (Radio Link Control)
throughput and the throughput offset respectively. These two parameters model the header information and other
supplementary data that does not appear at the application level. They are defined in the service properties.
TTI is the minimum number of TTI (Transmission Time Interval) between two TTI used; it is defined in the terminal user
equipment category properties.
• The number of OVSF codes
This is the number of 512-bit length OVSF codes consumed by the user.
• The required HSDPA power in dBm ( P HSDPA required )
It corresponds to the HSDPA power required to provide the HSDPA bearer user with the downlink requested throughput. The
downlink requested throughput is the throughput the user would obtain if he was the only user in the cell. In this case, Atoll
determines the HSDPA bearer the user would obtain by considering the entire HSDPA power available of the cell.
P HS – PDSCH used is the HS-PDSCH power required to obtain the selected HSDPA bearer (in dBm). If the HSDPA bearer
allocated to the user is the best one, P HS – PDSCH used corresponds to the available HS-PDSCH power of the cell. On the other
hand, if the HSDPA bearer has been downgraded in order to be compliant with cell and UE capabilities or for another reason,
P HS – PDSCH used will be lower than the available HS-PDSCH power of the cell.
This is the HSDPA power required to provide the HSDPA bearer user with the downlink obtained throughput. The downlink
obtained rate is the throughput experienced by the user after scheduling and radio resource control.
P HSDPA served = P HS – PDSCH used + n HS – SCCH P HS – SCCH for HSDPA users, HSPA BE and VBR service users.
And
P HSDPA served = P HS – PDSCH used C HSDPABearer for HSPA CBR service users
Where
P HS – PDSCH used is the HS-PDSCH power required to obtain the selected HSDPA bearer.
272
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
The maximum number of retransmissions in order to have the requested HSUPA radio bearer with a given BLER.
• The No. of HSUPA Retransmissions (Obtained)
The maximum number of retransmissions in order to have the obtained HSUPA radio bearer with a given BLER.
UL
• The HSUPA application throughput in kbps ( TP A M b )
This is the net HSUPA throughput without coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.).
UL
UL TP P – RLC M b 1 – BLER HSUPA f TP – Scaling – TP Offset
TP A M b = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
N Rtx
Where:
UL
TP P – RLC is the peak RLC throughput provided by the selected HSUPA radio bearer after noise rise scheduling.
BLER HSUPA is the residual BLER after N Rtx retransmissions. It is read in the quality graph defined for the quartet “reception
equipment-selected bearer-number of retransmissions-mobility” (HSUPA Quality Graphs tab in the Reception equipment
properties). This graph describes the variation of BLER as a function of the measured quality (E-DPDCH Ec/Nt). Knowing the E-
DPDCH Ec/Nt, Atoll calculates the corresponding BLER.
TP Offset and f TP – Scaling respectively represent the scaling factor between the application throughput and the RLC (Radio Link
Control) throughput and the throughput offset. These two parameters model the header information and other
supplementary data that does not appear at the application level. They are defined in the service properties.
N Rtx is the maximum number of retransmissions for the obtained HSUPA bearer. This figure is read in the HSUPA Bearer
Selection table.
The following columns appear if, when creating the simulation, you select "Detailed information about mobiles":
• The uplink and downlink requested peak RLC throughputs (kbps)
Downlink and uplink requested peak RLC throughputs are not calculated for R99 users.
For HSDPA users, the uplink peak RLC throughput is not calculated and the downlink requested peak RLC throughput is the
throughput that the selected HSDPA radio bearer(s) can provide. Here, the user is treated as if he is the only user in the cell
and then, Atoll determines the HSDPA bearer he would obtain by considering the entire HSDPA power available of the cell.
For HSPA users, the requested uplink peak RLC throughput is the throughput of the requested HSUPA radio bearer. The
requested HSUPA radio bearer is selected from the HSUPA bearers compatible with the user equipment. Here, the user is
treated as if he is the only user in the cell and then, Atoll determines the HSUPA bearer the user would obtain by considering
the entire remaining load of the cell. If the user is connected to one or two HSDPA bearers in the downlink, the downlink
requested peak RLC throughput is the throughput that the requested HSDPA radio bearer(s) can provide. The requested
HSDPA radio bearer is determined as explained in the previous paragraph.
• The uplink and downlink obtained peak RLC throughput (kbps)
Downlink and uplink obtained peak RLC throughputs are not calculated for R99 users.
For HSDPA users connected to one or two HSDPA bearers, the uplink obtained peak RLC throughput is not calculated, and the
downlink obtained peak RLC throughput is the throughput provided by the selected HSDPA radio bearer(s) after scheduling
and radio resource control.
For connected HSPA BE and VBR service users, on uplink, if the user is connected to an HSUPA bearer, the obtained uplink
peak RLC throughput is the throughput provided by the selected HSUPA radio bearer after noise rise scheduling. On downlink,
if the user is connected to one or two HSDPA bearers, the downlink obtained peak RLC throughput is the throughput provided
by the selected HSDPA radio bearer(s) after scheduling and radio resource control.
For a connected HSPA CBR service user, the uplink and downlink obtained peak RLC throughputs are the uplink and downlink
minimum throughput demands defined for the service.
This is:
• Either a fixed value in case of a static HSDPA power allocation strategy,
• Or a simulation result when the option "HSDPA Power Dynamic Allocation" is selected. We have:
P HSDPA c = P max c – P Headroom c – P tx – R99 c – P HSUPA c
273
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
DL
with P tx – R99 c = P pilot c + P SCH c + P OtherCCH c + P tch c + P tch c f act –ADPCH
tch used for tch used for
R99 users HSPA users
It corresponds to the number of connected HSDPA bearer users that the cell supports at a time, i.e. within one transmission
time interval. All these users are connected to the cell at the end of the HSDPA part of the simulation; they have a connection
with the R99 bearer and an HSDPA bearer. DC-HSDPA users are accounted for once in each serving cell.
DL
• The instantaneous HSDPA throughput in the cell, c, in kbps ( TP Inst c )
This is the number of kilobits per second that the cell supports on downlink to provide simultaneous connected HSDPA bearer
users with an HSDPA bearer. We will differentiate single-carrier users (Ms) from DC-HSDPA users (Md-HSDPA stands for HSDPA
BE and VBR users, and Md-HSPA refers to HSPA BE and VBR service users).
DL R99 DL
TP requested M b = TP P – DL ADPCH R99 Bearer + TP P – RLC
DL R99 DL
TP obtained M s + TP P – DL R99 Bearer + TP P – RLC M d – HSDPA
Ms c
M d – HSDPA c
c is the anchor cell
DL
+ TP P – RLC M d – HSDPA +
M c
d – HSDPA
DL
TP Inst cell = c is the secondary cell
R99 DL
TP P – DL R99 Bearer + TP P – RLC M d – HSPA +
M d – HSPA c
c is the anchor cell
DL
TP P – RLC M d – HSPA
M d – HSPA c
c is the secondary cell
DL
TP P – RLC is the peak RLC throughput provided by the selected HSDPA radio bearer after scheduling and radio resource
control.
R99
TP P – DL R99 Bearer is the peak throughput of the ADPCH radio bearer if the user is an HSDPA user. For HSPA users, it
corresponds to the ADPCH-EDPCCH radio bearer.
DL
• The instantaneous HSDPA Effective MAC Throughput in the cell, c, in kbps ( TPE –M AC c )
S block M b
DL
TP E – M AC c = ---------------------------------------
-
T TTI TTI M b
Mb c
Where,
S block M b is the transport block size (in kbits) of the HSDPA bearer selected by the user; it is defined for each HSDPA bearer
in the HSDPA Radio Bearers table.
TTI M b is the minimum number of TTI (Transmission Time Interval) between two TTI used; it is defined in the terminal user
equipment category properties.
274
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
–3
T TTI is the TTI duration, i.e. 2 10 s (2000 TTI in one second). This value is specified by the 3GPP.
DL
• The average instantaneous HSDPA throughput in the cell, c, in kbps ( TP Av – Inst c )
DL
DL TP Inst c
TP Av – Inst c = --------------------
-
nM
b
DL
• The HSDPA application throughput in the cell, c, in kbps ( TP A c )
DL
TP P – RLC M b 1 – BLER HSDPA f TP – Scaling – TP Offset
DL
Either TP A c = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- if the scheduling algorithm is Round Robin or
TTI
M c
b
Proportional Fair,
DL
DL TP P – RLC M b maxC I 1 – BLER HSDPA f TP – Scaling – TP Offset
Or TPA c = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- if the scheduling algorithm is Max C/I.
TTI
DL
TP P – RLC is the peak RLC throughput provided by the selected HSDPA radio bearer after scheduling and radio resource
control.
BLER HSDPA is read in the quality graph defined for the triplet “reception equipment-selected bearer-mobility” (HSDPA Quality
Graphs tab in the Reception equipment properties). This graph describes the variation of BLER as a function of the measured
quality (HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt). Knowing the HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt, Atoll calculates the corresponding BLER.
f TP – Scaling and TP Offset respectively represent the scaling factor between the application throughput and the RLC (Radio Link
Control) throughput and the throughput offset. These two parameters model the header information and other
supplementary data that does not appear at the application level. They are defined in the service properties.
TTI is the minimum number of TTI (Transmission Time Interval) between two TTI used; it is defined in the terminal user
equipment category properties.
DL
• The minimum HSDPA RLC peak throughput in kbps ( min TP P – RLC M b )
M b cell
It corresponds to the lowest of RLC peak throughputs obtained by HSDPA bearer users connected to the cell.
DL
• The maximum HSDPA RLC peak throughput in kbps ( max TP P – RLC M b )
M b cell
It corresponds to the highest of RLC peak throughputs obtained by HSDPA bearer users connected to the cell.
• The number of HSUPA users in the cell ( n M ):
c
UL UL
TP A c = TP A M b
Mb c
UL
• The uplink cell load factor due to HSUPA traffic ( X HSUPA c ):
UL
UL I tot c HSUPA
X HSUPA c = ---------------------------------
UL
N tot c
Where
UL
I tot c HSUPA is the total interference at transmitter received from HSUPA bearer users.
275
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
DL DL
TP Inst site = TP Inst c
c site
DL
• The instantaneous HSDPA Effective MAC Throughput carried by the site in kbps ( T MAC site in kbps)
DL DL
TP E – M AC site = TP E –M AC c
c site
UL
• The HSUPA throughput carried by the site in kbps ( TP site )
UL UL
TP site = TP obtained M c
M c site
4.3.4 Appendices
4.3.4.1 Admission Control in the R99 Part
During admission control in the R99 part of the simulation, Atoll calculates the uplink load factor of a considered cell assuming
the mobile concerned is connected to it. Here, activity status assigned to users is not taken into account. So even if the mobile
is not active on UL, it can be rejected due to cell load saturation. To calculate the cell UL load factor, either Atoll takes into
account the mobile power determined during power control if mobile was connected in previous iteration, or it estimates a
UL
load rise due to the mobile and adds it to the current load. The load rise ( X ) is calculated as follows:
UL 1
X = ----------------------------------------------
W
1 + ------------------------------------
UL UL
Q req R nominal
Then, it allocates to the cell OVSF codes to support R99 bearers required by users:
• A 256 bit-length code per common channel (i.e. two 512 bit-length OVSF codes), for each cell. Therefore, Atoll will
Overhead
take 2 N Codes 512-bit-length codes,
• A code per cell-receiver link, for TCH (traffic channels). The length of code to be allocated, Code_Length, depends on
the user activity. We have:
276
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
DL
Either Code_Length = F spreading Active user when the user is active,
DL
Or Code_Length = F spreading Inactive user if the user is inactive.
TCH
The number of 512 bit-length OVSF codes needed N Codes is calculated from the length of the code to be allocated as follows:
TCH 512
N Codes = -------------------------------
Code_Length
Figure 4.15: OVSF Code Tree Indices (Not OVSF Code Numbers)
The OVSF code allocation follows the “Buddy” algorithm, which guarantees that:
• If a k-length OVSF code is used, all of its children with lengths 2k, 4k, …, cannot be used as they will not be orthogonal.
• If a k-length OVSF code is used, all of its ancestors with lengths k/2, k/4, …, cannot be used as they will not be
orthogonal.
Example: We consider a user with a service requiring the UDD64 R99 radio bearer. This user is active on DL while connected
to a cell (which does not support HSDPA). The spreading factor for active users has been set to 64 and site equipment requires
four overhead downlink channel elements per cell. Atoll will consume four 256 bit-length OVSF codes for common channels
(i.e. eight 512 bit-length OVSF codes) and a 64 bit-length OVSF code for traffic channels (i.e. eight additional 512 bit-length
OVSF codes).
• In the R99 part, the OVSF code allocation follows the mobile connection order (mobile
order in the Mobiles tab).
• In DC-HSDPA, A-DPCH is only transmitted in the anchor carrier. Therefore, a DC-
HSDPA user requires R99 resources in the best serving cell only and consumes the
same amount of R99 resources as a single-cell HSDPA user.
• The OVSF code and channel element management is differently dealt with in case of
“softer” handover. Atoll allocates OVSF codes for each cell-mobile link while it
globally assigns channel elements to a site.
In the HSDPA part, HSDPA and HSPA users are assigned an HSDPA bearer (Fast link adaptation).
Therefore, Atoll allocates to the cell:
• 16-bit length OVSF codes per cell-receiver, for HS-PDSCH. This figure depends on the HSDPA bearer assigned to the
user and on the type of service.
HS – PDSCH
For HSDPA users, HSPA VBR and BE service users, Atoll needs 32 N Codes 512-bit-length codes for each user
HS – PDSCH
connected to the cell. N Codes is the number of HS-PDSCH channels required by the HSDPA bearer.
HS – PDSCH
For HSPA CBR service users, Atoll needs 32 N Codes C HSDPABearer 512-bit-length codes for each user connected
HS – PDSCH
to the cell. N Codes is the number of HS-PDSCH channels required by the HSDPA bearer.
DC-HSDPA users have two HSDPA bearers, one for each serving cell. Therefore, one DC-HSDPA user consumes OVSF
codes in both cells.
277
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
When HSDPA bearer users (at least one) are connected to the cell, Atoll gives the cell
HS – PDSCH – Min
back the minimum number of OVSF codes reserved for HS-PDSCH ( N Codes ). On
the other hand, if no HSDPA bearer user is connected, Atoll still keeps these codes and
the codes for HS-SCCH too. This is the same with HSUPA bearer users. Even if no HSUPA
bearer user is connected to the cell, Atoll still keeps the codes for E-HICH, E-RGCH and E-
AGCH channels.
Therefore, the number of channel elements required in the uplink at the site level, N CE – UL N I , is:
N CE – UL N I = NCE – UL j
j NI
In the downlink, Atoll consumes N CE – DL j channel elements for each cell j on a site NI. This figure includes:
Therefore, the number of channel elements required in the downlink at the site level, N CE – DL N I , is:
N CE – DL N I = NCE – DL j
j NI
278
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Therefore, the Iub backhaul throughput required on uplink at the site level, TP Iub – UL N I , is:
TP Iub – UL N I = TPIub – UL j
j NI
In the downlink, the Iub backhaul throughput consumed by each cell j on a site NI, TP Iub – DL j , includes:
HSDPA DL HSDPA DL
With TP Iub = TP P – RLC + Overhead Iub TP P – RLC
Therefore, the Iub backhaul throughput required on downlink at the site level, TP Iub – DL N I , is:
TP Iub – DL N I = TPIub – DL j
j NI
DL DL
G p and Q req are the processing gain on downlink and the Eb/Nt target on downlink respectively.
In case of soft-handoff, required quality is limited to the effective contribution of the transmitter.
Ptch c
DL
P tx c = P pilot c + P SCH c + P otherCCH c +
tch
Ptch c
DL ortho nonOrtho
P tx c = P CCH c + P CCH c +
tch
where
279
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
ortho
P CCH c = P pilot c + P otherCCH c
nonOrtho
P CCH c = P SCH c
DL
With r = 1 when the user is active on the downlink and r = r c when the user is inactive. In case of an HSDPA bearer user,
DL
r = f act – ADPCH .
DL
I extra c + I inter – carrier c + I inter – techno log y c L T r + 1 – F ortho BTS P tx c r
+
nonOrtho term
F ortho BTS P CCH c r + N0 LT r
P tch ic = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1
-------------------- + 1 – F ortho BTS
CIreq r
I intra c is the total power received at the receiver from the cell with which it is connected.
I extra c is the total power received at the receiver from other cells.
I inter – techno log y c is the inter-technology interference received at the terminal from an external transmitter.
We have:
ortho nonOrtho
P CCH c + P CCH c
280
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
nonOrtho term
F ortho BTS P CCH c r + N0 LT r
ortho nonOrtho
P CCH c + P CCH c + -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 - 1 F
tch ------------------- + – ortho BTS
DL CIreq r
P tx c = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I extra c + I inter – carrier c + I inter – techno log y c L T r
- + 1 – F ortho BTS r
P
DL
c
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
tx
1–
1 - + 1 – F
tch ------------------- ortho BTS
CI req r
Therefore, the downlink load factor can be expressed as:
I extra c + I inter – carrier c + I inter – techno log y c L T r
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + 1 – F ortho BTS r
DL
P tx c
DL
X = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
1 - + 1 – F
tch -------------------
CI req r ortho BTS
The downlink load factor represents the signal degradation in relation to the reference interference (thermal noise plus
synchronisation channel power).
UL
In this calculation, we assume that the cell UL reuse factor ( F txi ic ) is constant.
The result depends on the option used to calculate Nt (Without useful signal or Total noise that you may select in Global
parameters).
UL
UL P b k req
W - ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Q req k = -------------------------
R99
UL
-
tx
TP P – UL k I intra – P b k req + I extra + I inter – carrier + N 0
UL
UL W P b k req
Q req k = -------------------------
R99
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------
UL UL
-
tx
TP P – UL k I intra F – P b k req + N 0
R99 R99
UL UL TP P – UL k TP P – UL k
- = Q UL
P b k req 1 + Qreq k ------------------------- req k -------------------------- I intra F
UL tx
+ N0
W W
R99 R99
UL TP P – UL k TP P – UL k
Q req k ------------------------- - I intra F UL Q UL req k -------------------------- N 0
tx
UL W W
P b k req = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + -----------------------------------------------------------------
R99 R99
UL TP P – UL k UL TP P – UL k
1 + Q req k -------------------------- 1 + Q req k --------------------------
W W
R99
req TP P – UL k
We note ------ k
Ec UL
= Q req k -------------------------
-
Nt E – DPDCH W
UL tx
UL I intra F N0
P b k req = ------------------------------------------------------
- + ------------------------------------------------------
-
1 1
---------------------------------------- + 1 --------------------------------------- - + 1
-----
Ec req
-----
Ec req
Nt- k Nt- k
E – DPDCH E – DPDCH
Pb
UL
As I intra = k req , we have:
K
281
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
1 1
------------------------------------------------------
- + N 0 -------------------------------------------------------
UL tx
I intra = I intra F
K 1 K 1
---------------------------------------
- + 1 ---------------------------------------
- + 1
-----
Ec- req -----
Ec- req
Nt k Nt k
E – DPDCH E – DPDCH
1
------------------------------------------------------
tx
N0 -
K 1
---------------------------------------- + 1
-----
Ec req
Nt- k
E – DPDCH
I intra = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1
UL
1–F -------------------------------------------------------
K 1
---------------------------------------- + 1
-----
Ec req
Nt- k
E – DPDCH
tx UL
N0 F
I intra = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
1
----------------------------------------------------------------------------- –1
1
UL
F -------------------------------------------------------
K 1
---------------------------------------- + 1
-----
Ec req
Nt- k
E – DPDCH
UL
UL I intra + I extra + I inter – carrier I intra F 1
X = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- = --------------------------------------- = ----------------------------------
-
tx UL tx tx
I intra + I extra + I inter – carrier + N 0 I intra F + N 0 N0
1 + -------------------------
UL
I intra F
Therefore, we have:
1
------------------------------------------------------
UL UL
X = F -
K 1
---------------------------------------
- + 1
-----
Ec req
Nt- k
E – DPDCH
So, we can conclude that the contribution of one user to the UL load is defined as:
UL UL 1
X k = F -------------------------------------------------------
1
---------------------------------------- + 1
-----
Ec req
Nt- k
E – DPDCH
UL
UL W P b k req
Q req k = -------------------------
R99
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
tx
TP P – UL k I intra + I extra + I inter – carrier + N 0
UL
UL P b k req
W - ---------------------------------------
Q req k = -------------------------
R99
UL tx
TP P – UL k I intra F + N 0
R99
UL UL TP P – UL k
- I intra F UL + N tx
P b k req = Q req k ------------------------- 0
W
R99
req TP P – UL k
We note ------ k
Ec UL
= Q req k -------------------------
-
Nt E – DPDCH W
req
P b k req = ------ k
UL Ec UL tx
I intra F + N 0
Nt E – DPDCH
282
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Pb
UL
As I intra = k req , we have:
K
req
-----
- k
UL tx Ec
I intra = I intra F + N0
Nt E – DPDCH
K
req
-----
- k
tx Ec
N0
Nt E – DPDCH
K
I intra = -------------------------------------------------------------
-
UL
1–F
UL
UL I intra + I extra + I inter – carrier I intra F 1
X = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- = --------------------------------------- = ----------------------------------
-
tx UL tx tx
I intra + I extra + I inter – carrier + N 0 I intra F + N 0 N0
1 + -------------------------
UL
I intra F
Therefore, we have:
req
-----
Ec-
UL UL
X = F k
Nt E – DPDCH
K
So, we can conclude that the contribution of one user to the UL load is defined as:
req
------ k
UL UL Ec
X k = F
Nt E – DPDCH
On c2, we have: P max Tx c 2 = 43dBm , P tx – R99 Tx c 2 = 36.1dBm and P Headroom Tx c 2 = 0dB .
Therefore, P HSDPA Tx c 2 = P max Tx c 2 – P tx – R99 Tx c 2 – P Headroom Tx c 2 = 42dBm
On c2, we have: P max Tx c 2 = 46dBm , P tx – R99 Tx c 2 = 36.1dBm and P Headroom Tx c 2 = 0dB .
Therefore, P HSDPA Tx c 2 = P max Tx – P tx – R99 Tx c 1 – P tx – R99 Tx c 2 – P Headroom Tx c 2 = 44.4dBm
4.3.4.6 Best Serving Cell Determination in Monte Carlo Simulations - Old Method
Before Atoll 2.8.0, best serving cell determination used to be performed by selecting the best carrier within transmitters
according to the selected method (site equipment) and then the best transmitter using the best carrier. To switch back to this
method, add the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[CDMA]
MultiBandSimu = 0
283
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
For each station txi containing Mb in its calculation area and using a frequency band supported by the Mb’s terminal.
If a given carrier is specified for the service requested by Mb and if it is used by txi
EndFor
UL
BestCarrier k txi M b is the carrier with the lowest X k txi ic
Calculation of
BTS P c txi M b BestCarrier
Q pilot txi BestCarrier = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
k
DL DL
P tot txi BestCarrier k txi M b + I extra BestCarrier k txi M b +
DL DL Term
inter – carrier
I BestCarrier k txi M b + I inter – techno log y BestCarrier k txi M b + N 0
max
If Q pilot txi M b BestCarrier Q pilot M b
k k
Admission control (If simulation respects a loading factor constraint and Mb was not connected in previous iteration).
UL UL
If X k txi BestCarrier txi M b X max , then txi is rejected by Mb
Else
max
Q pilot M b = Q pilot txi M b BestCarrier
k k
Tx BS M b = txi
Endif
EndFor
If no TxBS has been selected, Mb has failed to be connected to the network and is rejected.
284
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Then, Atollcalculates the best server indicator ( I BS ) for the best serving cell candidate and the other potential serving cells
( c OC ):
Atoll ranks the potential serving cells according to the best server indicator ( I BS ). The cell with the highest I BS is selected as
the best serving cell if its best server indicator ( I BS ) exceeds the Ec/I0 threshold defined in the properties of the mobility type.
Each other cell of the active set is selected among the other potential serving cells as follows:
• It must use the same carrier as the best serving cell.
• The pilot quality difference between the cell and the best serving cell must not exceed the AS-threshold set per cell.
• It must belong to the neighbour list of the best serving cell if it is located on a site where the equipment imposes this
restriction (the “restricted to neighbours” option selected in the equipment properties).
You can return to the old best serving cell selection mechanism as in Atoll 3.2.1, by setting
an option in the Atoll.ini file. For more information about setting options in the Atoll.ini file,
see the Administrator Manual.
285
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
2nd case: Analysis based on all carriers of all frequency bands/a specific frequency band
If you have selected "Best (All bands)", the potential serving cells are selected among all transmitters i that contain the
receiver in their calculation areas.
If the frequency band is fixed ("Best (Specific band)"), the potential serving cells are selected among all transmitters i that
contain the receiver in their calculation areas and that use a carrier of the selected frequency band.
Atoll calculates the pilot quality for all potential serving cells (i, ic).
ic is the studied carrier and icadj is another carrier adjacent to ic. The interference reduction factor, RF ic ic adj , is defined
between ic and icadj and set to a value different from 0.
Two ways may be used to calculate I0.
Option Total noise: Atoll considers the noise generated by all the transmitters and the thermal noise.
Option Without pilot: Atoll considers the total noise deducting the pilot signal.
Calculation option may be selected in Global parameters.
Therefore, we have:
BTS P c i ic
Q pilot i ic = ---------------------------------------------
DL
I 0 ic
With,
DL DL DL DL DL term
I 0 ic = P tot i ic + I extra ic + I inter – carrier ic + I inter – techno log y ic + N 0 for the total noise option,
And
DL DL DL DL DL term
I 0 ic = I intra ic + I extra ic + I inter – carrier ic + I inter – techno log y ic + N 0 – 1 – BTS P c i ic for the without
pilot option.
1st step: P c i ic calculation for each potential serving cell (i, ic)
P pilot i ic
P c i ic = -------------------------
-
LT
I
286
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
DL DL DL
2nd step: P tot j ic , P tot i ic and P tot j ic adj calculations
We have:
DL DL
I extra ic = P tot j ic
txj j i
P SCH ic
I intra ic = P tot i ic – BTS P tot i ic – -------------------
DL DL DL
-
LT
Ptot j icadj
DL
DL txj j
I inter – carrier ic = ----------------------------------------
-
RF ic ic adj
and
Tx
P Transmitted ic i
-------------------------------------
DL
I inter – techno log y ic = -
Tx Tx m
ni
L total ICP ic i ic
DL
For each transmitter of the network, P tot ic is the total power received at the receiver from the transmitter on the carrier ic.
DL P Tx ic
P tot ic = ----------------
-
LT
P Tx ic is the total power transmitted by the transmitter on the carrier ic.Total power transmitted by each cell is either a
simulation result (provided in Simulation properties (Cells tab)) or a value user-defined in Cell properties.
DL
For each transmitter of the network, P tot ic adj is the total power received at the receiver from the transmitter on the carrier
icadj.
DL P Tx ic adj
P tot ic adj = ----------------------
-
LT
P Tx ic adj is the total power transmitted by the transmitter on the carrier icadj. Total power transmitted by each cell is either
a simulation result (provided in Simulation properties (Cells tab)) or a value user-defined in Cell properties.
term
3rd step: N 0 calculation
term Tx DL
N0 = NF Term K T W NR inter – techno log y
DL
4th step: I 0 ic and Q pilot i ic evaluation using formulas described above
DL
5th step: G macro – diversity calculation
DL
The macro-diversity gain, G macro – diversity , models the decrease in shadowing margin due to the fact there are several
available pilot signals at the mobile.
DL npaths
G macro – diversity = M Shadowing – Ec Io – M Shadowing – Ec Io
npaths
M Shadowing – Ec Io is the shadowing margin when the mobile receives n pilot signals (not necessarily from transmitters
belonging to the mobile active set).
This parameter is determined from cell edge coverage probability and Ec/I0 standard
deviation. When the Ec/I0 standard deviation is set to 0, the macro-diversity gain equals
0.
287
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Among all potential serving cells, Atoll first selects the cells which belong to the highest priority layer and then, the one with
the highest RSCP. This cell is referred to as the best serving cell candidate ( c BC ).
Then, Atoll calculates the best server indicator ( I BS ) for the best serving cell candidate ( c BC ) and the other potential serving
cells ( c OC ):
Atoll takes the cell with the highest best server indicator ( c max I ) and calculates the best pilot quality received with a fixed
BS
Resulting Resulting DL
cell edge coverage probability, Q pilot . Q pilot = G macro – diversity Q pilot c max I
BS
We have:
BTS P c i ic
Q pilot i ic = ---------------------------------------------
DL
I 0 ic
With,
DL DL DL DL DL term
I 0 ic = P tot i ic + I extra ic + I inter – carrier ic + I inter – techno log y ic + N 0 for the total noise option,
And
DL DL DL DL DL term
I 0 ic = I intra ic + I extra ic + I inter – carrier ic + I inter – techno log y ic + N 0 – 1 – BTS P c i ic for the without
pilot option.
Other cells (i,icBS) in the active set must satisfy the following criteria:
This is a user-specified input in the Terminal properties. It corresponds to the active set size.
Thermal Noise
I0 (Best Server)
I0 (Best server) is the total noise received at the receiver on icBS. The notation “Best server” refers to the best serving cell of
active set. This is relevant when using the calculation option “Without pilot”. In this case, it informs that the pilot signal of the
best serving cell (BS) is deducted from the total noise.
288
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Eb/Nt Target
DL
Eb/Nt target ( Q req ) is defined for a given R99 bearer, a mobility type and a reception equipment. This parameter is available
in the R99 Bearer Selection table.
When compressed mode is activated, the downlink Eb/Nt target is increased by the value
DL
user-defined for the DL Eb/Nt target increase field (Global parameters), Q req .
req
The calculation of the required transmitter power on traffic channels ( P tch ) may be divided into three steps.
DL
1st step: Q max k ic BS evaluation for each cell
DL
Let us assume the following notation: Eb/Nt max corresponds to Q max
max
DL P tch
With P b – max k ic BS = ----------
-
LT
k
DL DL DL DL DL term
and N tot ic BS = I intra ic BS + I extra ic BS + I inter – carrier ic BS + I inter – techno log y ic BS + N 0
Where
max
P tch is the maximum power allowed on traffic channels. This parameter is user-defined in the R99 Radio Bearers table.
DL
N tot ic BS is the total noise at the receiver on the carrier of the best serving cell.
DL
I intra ic BS is the intra-cell interference at the receiver on the carrier of the best serving cell.
P SCH k ic BS
I intra ic BS = P DL k ic – BTS F ortho P DL k ic – ------------------------------
DL
tot BS tot BS L T
DL
I extra ic BS is the extra-cell interference at the receiver on the carrier of the best serving cell.
Ptot j icBS
DL DL
I extra ic BS =
j j k
DL
I inter – carrier ic BS is the inter-carrier interference at the receiver on the carrier of the best serving cell.
289
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Ptot j icadj
DL
DL txj j
I inter – carrier ic BS = ----------------------------------------
-
RF ic BS ic adj
RF ic BS ic adj is the interference reduction factor, defined between ic and icadj and set to a value different from 0.
DL
I inter – techno log y ic BS is the inter-technology interference at the receiver on the carrier of the best serving cell.
Tx
P Transmitted ic i
DL
I inter – techno log y ic BS = -----------------------------------------
Tx Tx m
ni
L total ICP ic ic
i BS
th
ic i is the i interfering carrier of an external transmitter
Tx m
ICP ic ic is the inter-technology Channel Protection between the signal transmitted by Tx and received by m assuming the
i BS
Qmax k icBS
DL DL DL
Q MAX ic BS = f rake efficiency
k
Where
DL
f rake efficiency is the downlink rake efficiency factor defined in Terminal properties.
req
3rd step: P tch calculation
DL
req Q req
- P max
P tch = -------------------------- tch
DL
Q MAX ic BS
When compressed mode is activated, the downlink Eb/Nt target is increased by the value
DL
user-defined for the DL Eb/Nt target increase field (Global parameters), Q req . In this
DL DL
req Q req Q req
- P max
case, we have: P tch = ------------------------------ tch
DL
Q MAX ic BS
290
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
max
DL P tch
With P b – max k ic BS = ----------
-
LT
k
DL DL DL DL DL term
N tot ic BS = I intra ic BS + I extra ic BS + I inter – carrier ic BS + I inter – techno log y ic BS + N 0
max req
P SCH k ic BS P tch – P tch
I intra ic BS = P DL k ic – BTS F ortho P DL k ic – ------------------------------
DL
– 1 – BTS max (--------------------------
-,0)
tot BS tot BS L T L Tk
Ptot j icBS
DL DL
I extra ic BS =
j j k
Ptot j icadj
DL
DL j
I inter – carrier ic BS = txj
----------------------------------------
-
RF ic BS ic adj
Tx
P Transmitted ic i
DL
I inter – techno log y ic BS = -----------------------------------------
Tx Tx m
ni
L total ICP ic ic
i BS
Where
req
P tch is the required transmitter power on traffic channels.
Max Eb/Nt
DL
Q MAX is the traffic channel quality at the receiver on icBS after signal combination of all the transmitters k of the active set.
Qmax k icBS
DL DL DL
Q MAX ic BS = f rake efficiency
k
Where
DL
f rake efficiency is the downlink rake efficiency factor defined in Terminal properties.
DL DL DL DL DL
Therefore, the service on the downlink traffic channel is available if Q MAX ic BS Q req (or Q MAX ic BS Q req Q req when
compressed mode is activated).
Effective Eb/Nt
DL
Q eff is the effective traffic channel quality at the receiver on icBS.
DL DL DL DL DL DL DL
Q eff = min Q MAX Q req (or Q eff = min Q MAX Q req Q req when compressed mode is activated).
DL
G SHO corresponds to the DL soft handover gain.
DL
DL Q MAX ic BS
G SHO = ------------------------------------------------
DL
max Qmax k ic BS
DL DL
max Qmax k ic BS corresponds to the highest Q max k ic BS value.
291
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
For each cell (k,icBS) in the receiver’s active set, Atoll calculates uplink traffic channel quality from receiver. No power control
is performed as in simulations. Here, Atoll determines the uplink traffic channel quality at the cell for the maximum terminal
power allowed. Then, the total uplink traffic channel quality is evaluated with respect to the receiver handover status. From
this value, Atoll calculates the terminal power required to obtain the R99 bearer and compares it to the maximum terminal
power allowed.
max
Max terminal power ( P term ) is an input user-defined for each terminal. It corresponds to the terminal’s maximum power.
req
The calculation of the terminal power required to obtain an R99 bearer ( P term – R99 ) may be divided into three steps.
UL
1st step: Q max k ic BS evaluation for each cell
max UL
UL P term 1 – r c
With P b – max k ic BS = ---------------------------------------
-
LT
k
UL
N tot k ic BS is the total noise at the transmitter on the carrier of the best serving cell. This value is calculated from the cell
UL
uplink load factor X k ic BS .
tx
UL N0
N tot k ic BS = ------------------------------------
-
UL
1 – X k ic BS
tx
N 0 is the transmitter thermal noise.
UL
G macro – diversity 2 links is the uplink macro-diversity gain. This parameter is determined from the fixed cell edge coverage
probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option “Shadowing taken into account” is not selected
(Prediction properties), Atoll considers the uplink macro-diversity gain defined by the user in Global parameters.
UL UL
max Q max k ic BS corresponds to the highest Q max k ic BS value.
UL
G macro – diversity 3 links is the uplink macro-diversity gain. This parameter is determined from the fixed cell edge coverage
probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option “Shadowing taken into account” is not selected
(Prediction properties), Atoll considers the uplink macro-diversity gain defined by the user in Global parameters.
For softer and softer-softer handoffs (1/2 and 1/3):
Qmax k icBS
UL UL UL
Q MAX ic BS = f rake efficiency
k
For softer-soft handoffs (2/3), there are two possibilities. If the MRC option is selected (option available in Global parameters),
we have:
292
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
UL
UL UL UL UL
Q MAX ic BS = G macro – diversity 2 links max f rake efficiency Q max k ic BS Q max k ic BS
k on the same site
k on the same site
Else,
UL UL UL
Q MAX ic BS = G macro – diversity 2 links max Q max k ic BS
req
3rd step: P term – R99 calculation
req
P term – R99 is the required terminal power.
UL
req Q req
- P max
P term – R99 = -------------------------- term
UL
Q MAX ic BS
UL
Q req is the uplink traffic quality target defined by the user for a given reception equipment, a given R99 bearer and a given
mobility type. This parameter is available in the R99 Bearer Selection table.
When compressed mode is activated, the uplink Eb/Nt target is increased by the value
UL
user-defined for the UL Eb/Nt target increase field (Global parameters), Q req . In this
UL UL
req Q req Q req
- P max
case, we have: P term – R99 = ------------------------------ term
UL
Q MAX ic BS
req max
Therefore, the service on the uplink traffic channel is available if P term – R99 P term .
Eb/Nt Max
max UL
UL P term 1 – r c
With P b – max k ic BS = ---------------------------------------
-
LT
k
UL
N tot k ic BS is the total noise at the transmitter on the carrier of the best serving cell. This value is calculated from the cell
UL
uplink load factor X k ic BS .
tx max req
UL N0 P term – P term – R99
- + 1 – term max (------------------------------------------
N tot k ic BS = ------------------------------------ ,0)
UL LT
1 – X k ic BS k
tx
N 0 is the transmitter thermal noise.
UL
Q MAX ic BS is the traffic channel quality at the transmitter on icBS after signal combination of all the transmitters k of the
active set.
UL UL
If there is no handoff (1/1): Q MAX ic BS = Q max k ic BS
293
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
UL
G macro – diversity 2 links is the uplink macro-diversity gain. This parameter is determined from the fixed cell edge coverage
probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option “Shadowing taken into account” is not selected
(Prediction properties), Atoll considers the uplink macro-diversity gain defined by the user in Global parameters.
UL UL
max Q max k ic BS corresponds to the highest Q max k ic BS value.
UL
G macro – diversity 3 links is the uplink macro-diversity gain. This parameter is determined from the fixed cell edge coverage
probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option “Shadowing taken into account” is not selected
(Prediction properties), Atoll considers the uplink macro-diversity gain defined by the user in Global parameters.
For softer and softer-softer handoffs (1/2 and 1/3):
Qmax k icBS
UL UL UL
Q MAX ic BS = f rake efficiency
k
For softer-soft handoffs (2/3), there are two possibilities. If the MRC option is selected (option available in Global parameters),
we have:
UL
UL UL UL UL
Q MAX ic BS = G macro – diversity 2 links max f rake efficiency Q max k ic BS Q max k ic BS
k on the same site
k on the same site
Else,
UL UL UL
Q MAX ic BS = G macro – diversity 2 links max Q max k ic BS
Effective Eb/Nt
UL
Q eff is the effective traffic channel quality at the transmitter on icBS.
UL UL UL UL UL UL UL
Q eff = min Q MAX Q req (or Q eff = min Q MAX Q req Q req when compressed mode is activated).
UL
G SHO corresponds to the uplink soft handover gain.
UL
UL Q MAX ic BS
G SHO = ------------------------------------------------
UL
max Q max k ic BS
UL UL
max Q max k ic BS corresponds to the highest Q max k ic BS value.
General Results
Atoll displays the name of the cell to which the user is connected, the frequency band used by the transmitter, the selected
294
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt
Atoll calculates the best HS-PDSCH quality (HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt). The way of calculating it depends on the selected option in the
transmitters global parameters (HSDPA part): CQI based on CPICH quality or CQI based on HS-PDSCH quality.
For further details on the HS-PDSCH quality calculation, see either "HS-PDSCH Quality Calculation" on page 244 if the selected
option is "CQI based on CPICH quality" or "HS-PDSCH Quality Calculation" on page 249 if the selected option is "CQI based on
HS-PDSCH quality".
HS-PDSCH Power
Atoll calculates the available HS-PDSCH power. For further details on the HS-PDSCH power calculation, see either "HS-PDSCH
Quality Calculation" on page 244 if the selected option is "CQI based on CPICH quality" or "HS-PDSCH Quality Calculation" on
page 249 if the selected option is "CQI based on HS-PDSCH quality".
Atoll displays the HS-SCCH Ec/Nt threshold set for the selected mobility type.
HS-SCCH Ec/Nt
And
BTS P c ic
-----
Ec-
Nt ic HS – SCCH
i
= ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- for the without useful signal option.
DL term
N tot ic – 1 – F ortho 1 – F MUD BTS P c ic
i
With
DL DL DL DL DL term
N tot ic = I intra ic + I extra ic + I inter – carrier ic + I inter – techno log y ic + N 0
DL DL
I extra ic = P tot ic
txj j i
Ptot icadj
DL
DL j
I inter – carrier ic = txj
------------------------------------
RF ic ic adj
RF ic ic adj is the interference reduction factor, defined between ic and icadj and set to a value different from 0.
DL
I inter – techno log y ic is the inter-technology interference at the receiver on ic.
Tx
P Transmitted ic i
DL
I inter – techno log y ic = --------------------------------------
Tx Tx m
n
L total ICP ic ic
i i
th
ic i is the i interfering carrier of an external transmitter
295
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Tx m
ICP ic ic is the inter-technology Channel Protection between the signal transmitted by Tx and received by m assuming the
i
P HS – SCCH ic
P c ic = -------------------------------
-
i LT
i
And
L path L Tx L term L body L indoor M Shadowing – Ec Io
L T = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
G Tx G term
term term
BTS , F ortho , F MUD and N 0 are defined in "Inputs" on page 215.
CQI
Knowing the HS-PDSCH CQI, Atoll calculates the best HSDPA bearer that can be used and selects a bearer compatible with cell
and terminal user equipment HSDPA capabilities. For further details on the HSDPA bearer selection, see "HSDPA Bearer
Selection" on page 246.
Atoll displays the parameters of the selected HSDPA bearer:
• The transport block size,
• The modulation scheme used,
• The number of HS-PDSCH channels used.
DL
Once the bearer selected, Atoll determines the peak RLC throughput that can be provided to the user TP P –R LC .
DL
Atoll displays the Effective RLC throughput ( TP E – RLC ) provided to the user. The Effective RLC throughput is calculated as
follows:
DL
DL TP P –RLC
TP E – RLC = -----------------
-
TTI
Where TTI is the minimum number of TTI (Transmission Time Interval) between two TTI used; it is defined in the terminal
user equipment category properties.
BLER
Atoll reads the BLER in the quality graph BLER = f(HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt) that is defined for the selected bearer and mobility type.
Knowing the HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt, it finds the corresponding BLER.
Bearer Consumption
Atoll provides this result for HSPA CBR service users only. The minimum throughput demand required by the service is
allocated to these users. Therefore, they partly consume the HSDPA bearer. The bearer consumption expressed in %,
C HSDPABearer , is calculated as follows:
TPD Min – DL
C HSDPABearer = ---------------------------------------------------
-
DL
TP P –R LC I HSDPABearer
296
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
MC-HSDPA Users
When multi-cell HSDPA is active, MC-HSDPA users can simultaneously connect to several HSDPA cells of the transmitter for
data transfer. The maximum number of cells to which the user can simultaneously connect depends on the DL multi-cell mode
set for the HSDPA UE category of the terminal.
Atoll determines the best serving cell using the best serving cell selection algorithm. For information on how the best serving
cell is selected, see "Best Serving Cell and Active Set Determination" on page 284. If the best carrier belongs to a transmitter
that supports the multi-cell HSDPA mode and if the transmitter has several HSDPA carriers, Atoll selects the other serving
cells, i.e., the secondary cells. The secondary cells belong to the same transmitter and are chosen among the adjacent carriers
according to the CQI. When two adjacent carriers are available, Atoll takes the one with the highest CQI value. Atoll selects
secondary cells as long as HSDPA carriers are available in the transmitter and the maximum number of cells to which the user
can simultaneously connect is not exceeded. In each serving cell (i.e., the best cell and the secondary cells), Atoll determines
the best HSDPA bearer obtained. In each cell, the user is processed as if he is the only user in the cell. The user is connected
to a cell if he obtains an HSDPA bearer.
DB-MC-HSDPA Users
When multi-cell HSDPA and dual-band HSDPA modes are active, DB-MC-HSDPA users can simultaneously connect to HSDPA
cells of two co-site transmitters using different frequency bands. If the two co-site transmitters work on the same frequency
band, then the users can only connect to the HSDPA cells of one transmitter. The maximum number of cells to which the user
can simultaneously connect depends on the DL multi-cell mode set for the HSDPA UE category of the terminal.
Let’s consider the following configuration:
• A site with transmitters working on two different frequency bands,
• The site equipment supports the dual-band HSDPA mode,
• Each transmitter has several HSDPA carriers,
• The multi-cell HSDPA mode is active for each transmitter.
Atoll determines the best serving cell using the best serving cell selection algorithm. For information on how the best serving
cell is selected, see "Best Serving Cell and Active Set Determination" on page 284. The secondary cells are taken in the same
band as the best carrier (i.e., they belong to the same transmitter), as long as carriers are available. Then, if additional carriers
are required and if there are no more carriers available in this transmitter, Atoll selects the carriers in a transmitter using the
second frequency band. Within one frequency band, the secondary cells are first selected according to an adjacency criterion
and then, according to the CQI value. When two adjacent carriers are available, Atoll takes the one with the highest CQI value.
In each serving cell (i.e., the best cell and the secondary cells), Atoll determines the best HSDPA bearer obtained. In each cell,
the user is processed as if he is the only user in the cell. The user is connected to a cell if he obtains an HSDPA bearer.
When the user is simultaneously connected to several HSDPA cells, Atoll details the results for each cell. In addition, it displays
the following results under Total:
• The Peak RLC Throughput
DL DL
TP P – RLC = TP P –RLC c
c Serving cell
Where TTI is the minimum number of TTI (Transmission Time Interval) between two TTI used; it is defined in the terminal
user equipment category properties.
• The Application Throughput
DL
TP P –RLC c 1 – BLER HSDPA
DL Serving cells - f TP – Scaling – TP Offset
TP A = c----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TTI
Where:
BLER HSDPA is read in the quality graph defined for the triplet “reception equipment-selected bearer-mobility” (HSDPA Quality
Graphs tab in the Reception equipment properties). This graph describes the variation of BLER as a function of the measured
quality (HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt). Knowing the HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt, Atoll finds the corresponding BLER.
TTI is the minimum number of TTI (Transmission Time Interval) between two TTI used; it is defined in the terminal user
equipment category properties.
297
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
f TP – Scaling and TP Offset respectively represent the scaling factor between the application throughput and the RLC (Radio Link
Control) throughput and the throughput offset. These two parameters model the header information and other
supplementary data that does not appear at the application level. They are defined in the service properties.
req
It corresponds to the E-DPDCH Ec/Nt required to obtain the HSUPA bearer ( ------
Ec
). This value is defined for an HSUPA
Nt E – DPDCH
bearer ( Index HSUPABearer ) and a number of retransmissions ( N Rtx ) in the HSUPA Bearer Selection table.
Ec req
From ------
req
, Atoll calculates the terminal power required to obtain the HSUPA bearer, P term – HSUPA .
Nt E – DPDCH
req
P term – HSUPA = ------
req Ec UL
L T N tot
Nt E – DPDCH
With
UL intra UL tx
UL tx extra UL
N tot ic = 1 – F MUD term I tot ic + I tot ic + I inter – carrier ic + N 0
UL UL
tx intra extra UL tx
term , F MUD , I tot , I tot , I inter – carrier and N 0 are defined in "Inputs" on page 215.
Ec max
Atoll calculates the maximum E-DPDCH Ec⁄Nt allowed ( ------ ). For further details on the calculation, see "Max E-
Nt E – DPDCH
DPDCH Ec/Nt" on page 298.
Atoll selects the best HSUPA bearer from the HSUPA compatible bearers. This is the HSUPA bearer with the highest potential
UL
TP P – RLC Index HSUPABearer
throughput ( ------------------------------------------------------------------
- ) where:
N Rtx Index HSUPABearer
Ec req
----- Ec max
• - ------
Nt E – DPDCH Nt E – DPDCH
req max
• And P term – HSUPA P term
With
max
P term : the maximum terminal power allowed.
298
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
UL
After selecting the HSUPA bearer, Atoll determines the corresponding RLC peak throughput, TP P – RLC .
UL
TPP – RLC Index HSUPABearer
Atoll displays the peak RLC throughput to number of retransmissions ratio ( ------------------------------------------------------------------- ). Atoll considers the
N Rtx Index HSUPABearer
ratio to select the HSUPA bearer when several HSUPA bearers meet the selection criteria.
UL
From the RLC peak throughput, Atoll calculates the minimum effective RLC throughput, TP Min – E – RLC .
UL
UL TP P – RLC 1 – BLER HSUPA
TP Min – E – RLC M b = ------------------------------------------------------------------
-
N Rtx
Where:
BLER HSUPA is the residual BLER after N Rtx retransmissions.
Application Throughput
UL
Atoll displays the provided application throughput ( TP A ). The application throughput represents the net throughput after
deduction of coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.). This one is calculated as follows:
UL
UL TP P – RLC 1 – BLER HSUPA f TP – Scaling – TP Offset
TP A M b = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
N Rtx
BLER
Knowing the E-DPDCH Ec/Nt, Atoll finds the corresponding BLER. It is read in the quality graph defined for the quartet
“reception equipment-selected bearer-number of retransmissions-mobility” (HSUPA Quality Graphs tab in the Reception
equipment properties). This graph describes the variation of BLER as a function of the measured quality (E-DPDCH Ec/Nt).
Bearer Consumption
Atoll provides this result for CBR service users only. The minimum bit rate required by the service is allocated to these users.
Therefore, they parly consume the HSUPA bearer. The bearer consumption expressed in %, C HSUPABearer , is calculated as
follows:
TPD min – UL
C HSUPABearer = -----------------------------------------------------
-
UL
TP P – RLC I HSUPABearer
Potential serving cells are filtered depending on the prediction definition (selected layers or carriers, layers supported by the
service and the terminal, mobility type) and the pilot signal level which must exceed the defined minimum RSCP threshold.
For further information on formulas, see "Definitions" on page 214. For information on the best serving cell selection and
pilot quality calculation, see "Bar Graph and Pilot Sub-Menu" on page 285.
299
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Single colour
Resulting req
Atoll displays a coverage if Q pilot BS Q pilot . Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and
hidden on the map. There is a layer per transmitter. Layer colour is the colour assigned to the transmitter of the best serving
cell (BS).
This display option is available only if analysis is based on all simulations in a group (i.e. if you select a group of simulations
and the “All” option in the Condition tab of prediction properties). Coverage consists of several independent layers that can
be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per user-defined probability level defined in the Display tab (Prediction
Resulting req
properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q pilot BS Q pilot in the required number of simulations.
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per user-
defined cell edge coverage probability, p, defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if
Resulting req
Q pilot BS p Q pilot .
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per user-
defined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if
Resulting
Q pilot BS Q pilot threshold .
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per user-
defined quality margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if
Resulting req
Q pilot BS – Q pilot Q pilot m arg in .
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per user-
defined pilot signal level defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if
Resulting
Q pilot BS Q pilot threshold .
300
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
DL
maximum allowed traffic channel power for transmitters. Then, the total downlink traffic channel quality ( Q MAX ic BS ) is
evaluated after recombination.
Atoll displays the total traffic channel quality in the downlink.
For information on best serving cell selection and active set determination, see "Best Serving Cell and Active Set
Determination" on page 284. For further details on calculations, see "Downlink R99 Sub-Menu" on page 288.
DL DL DL DL DL
Atoll displays a coverage with a unique colour if Q MAX ic BS Q req (or Q MAX ic BS Q req Q req if compressed mode is
activated).
DL
Q req is the downlink traffic quality target defined by the user for a given reception equipment, a given R99 bearer and a given
mobility type. This parameter is available in the R99 Bearer Selection table.
DL
Q req is the DL Eb/Nt target increase; this parameter is user-defined in the Global parameters.
DL DL DL DL DL
Atoll displays a coverage if Q MAX ic BS Q req (or Q MAX ic BS Q req Q req if compressed mode is activated). Coverage
consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per transmitter. Layer
colour is the colour assigned to best serving transmitter.
In this case, receiver is not completely defined and no mobility is assigned. Coverage consists of several independent layers
that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per user-defined mobility defined in Mobility sub-folder. For
DL DL DL DL DL
each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic BS Q req (or Q MAX ic BS Q req Q req if compressed mode is activated).
In this case, receiver is not completely defined and no service is assigned. Coverage consists of several independent layers that
can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per user-defined service defined in Services sub-folder. For each
DL DL DL DL DL
layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic BS Q req (or Q MAX ic BS Q req Q req if compressed mode is activated).
This display option is available only if analysis is based on all simulations in a group (i.e. if you select a group of simulations
and the “All” option in the Condition tab of prediction properties). Coverage consists of several independent layers that can
be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per user-defined probability level defined in the Display tab (Prediction
DL DL
properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic BS Q req in the required number of simulations.
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per user-
defined cell edge coverage probability, p, defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if
DL DL DL DL DL
Q MAX ic BS p Q req (or Q MAX ic BS Q req Q req if compressed mode is activated).
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per user-
defined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if
DL
Q MAX ic BS Threshold .
301
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per user-
defined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if
DL DL DL DL DL DL DL DL
Q eff ic BS Threshold . Q eff ic BS = min Q MAX ic BS Q req (or Q eff ic BS = min Q MAX ic BS Q req Q req
when compressed mode is activated).
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per user-
defined quality margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if
DL DL DL DL DL
Q MAX ic BS – Q req M arg in (or Q MAX ic BS – Q req Q req M arg in when compressed mode is activated).
req
Atoll calculates the downlink required power, P tch ic BS , as follows:
DL
req Q req
- P max
P tch ic BS = -------------------------- tch
DL
Q MAX ic BS
Where
DL
Q req is the Eb/Nt target on downlink. This parameter, available in the R99 Bearer Selection table, is user-defined for a given
R99 bearer, a given reception equipment and a mobility type.
max
P tch is a user-defined input for each bearer related to a service. It corresponds to the maximum allowable traffic channel
power for a transmitter.
DL DL
req Q req Q req
- P max
When compressed mode is activated, we have: P tch ic BS = ------------------------------ tch .
DL
Q MAX ic BS
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per user-
defined required power threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if
req
P tch ic BS Threshold .
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per user-
defined power margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if
req max
P tch ic BS – P tch M arg in .
302
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
UL UL UL UL UL
Atoll displays a coverage if Q MAX ic BS Q req (or Q MAX ic BS Q req Q req if compressed mode is activated). Coverage
colour is unique.
UL
Q req is defined for a reception equipment, a R99 bearer and a mobility type. This parameter is available in the R99 Bearer
Selection table.
UL
Q req is the UL Eb/Nt target increase; this parameter is user-defined in the Global parameters.
UL UL UL UL UL
Atoll displays a coverage if Q MAX ic BS Q req (or Q MAX ic BS Q req Q req if compressed mode is activated). Coverage
consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per transmitter. Layer
colour is the colour assigned to best server transmitter.
In this case, receiver is not completely defined and no mobility is assigned. Coverage consists of several independent layers
that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per user-defined mobility defined in Mobility sub-folder. For
UL UL UL UL UL
each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic BS Q req (or Q MAX ic BS Q req Q req if compressed mode is activated).
In this case, receiver is not completely defined and no service is assigned. Coverage consists of several independent layers that
can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per user-defined service defined in Services sub-folder. For each
UL UL UL UL UL
layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic BS Q req (or Q MAX ic BS Q req Q req if compressed mode is activated).
This display option is available only if analysis is based on all simulations in a group (i.e. if you select a group of simulations
and the “All” option in the Condition tab of prediction properties). Coverage consists of several independent layers that can
be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per user-defined probability level defined in the Display tab (Prediction
UL UL UL UL UL
properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic BS Q req (or Q MAX ic BS Q req Q req if compressed mode is
activated) in the required number of simulations.
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per user-
defined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if
UL
Q MAX ic BS Threshold .
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per user-
defined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if
UL
Q effective ic BS Threshold .
UL UL UL UL UL UL UL
Q eff ic BS = min Q MAX ic BS Q req (or Q eff ic BS = min Q MAX ic BS Q req Q req when compressed mode is
activated).
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per user-
defined quality margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if
UL UL UL UL UL
Q MAX ic BS – Q req M arg in (or Q MAX ic BS – Q req Q req M arg in if compressed mode is activated).
303
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per user-
defined power threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if
req
P term – R99 ic BS Threshold .
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per user-
defined power margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if
req max
P term – R99 ic BS – P term M arg in .
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per soft
UL
handover gain value defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if G SHO Threshold .
Ptot icadj
DL
Tx
P Transmitted ic i
DL DL txj j term
N tot ic = P tot ic + ------------------------------------ + -------------------------------------- + N 0
RF ic ic adj Tx
L total ICP ic ic
Tx m
txj j ni i
DL
Downlink noise rise, NR DL ic , is calculated from the downlink total noise, N tot , as follows:
term
N0
NR DL ic = – 10 log ------------
-
N DL tot
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per user-
defined noise level defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if
DL
minN tot ic Threshold .
ic
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per user-
defined noise level defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if
DL
maxN tot ic Threshold .
ic
304
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per user-
defined noise level defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if
DL
averageNtot ic Threshold .
ic
Atoll displays bins where minNR DL ic Threshold . Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed
ic
and hidden on the map. There is a layer per user-defined noise rise threshold defined in the Display tab.
Atoll displays bins where maxNR DL ic Threshold . Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed
ic
and hidden on the map. There is a layer per user-defined noise rise threshold defined in the Display tab.
Atoll displays bins where averageNR DL ic Threshold . Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be
ic
displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per user-defined noise rise threshold defined in the Display tab.
When only one carrier is analysed, Atoll determines DL total noise or DL noise rise on this
carrier. In this case, the displayed coverage is the same for any selected display option
(average, minimum, maximum).
305
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
map. There is a layer per threshold. For each layer, area is covered if ------ BS
Ec
HS – SCCH Threshold
.
Nt
When you calculate the study with the following display options, Atoll considers one user on each pixel and determines the
best HSDPA bearer that the user can obtain. For MC-HSDPA and DB-MC-HSDPA users, Atoll determines the best HSDPA
bearers that the user can obtain in each serving cell. On each pixel, the user is processed as if he is the only user in the cell i.e.
he uses the entire HSDPA power available in the cell.
For further information on the fast link adaptation modelling, see "Fast Link Adaptation Modelling" on page 242.
• Colour per HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt
Atoll displays on each pixel the HS-PDSCH quality. For MC-HSDPA and DB-MC-HSDPA users, it corresponds to the HS-PDSCH
Ec/Nt of the best serving cell. Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map.
There is a layer per threshold. For each layer, area is covered if ------ BS
Ec
HS – PDSCH Threshold
.
Nt
• Colour per CQI
306
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Atoll displays either the CPICH CQI (see the calculation detail in "CPICH CQI Determination" on page 244) when the selected
option in Global parameters (HSDPA part) is CQI based on CPICH quality, or the HS-PDSCH CQI (see the calculation detail in
the section 10.7.1.2.2) when considering the CQI based on HS-PDSCH quality option.
For MC-HSDPA and DB-MC-HSDPA users, it corresponds to the CQI of the best serving cell.
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per CQI
threshold ( CQI threshold ). For each layer, area is covered if CQI CQI threshold .
S block c
DL
TP P – M AC = ---------------------
T TTI
c Serving cells
Where,
S block c is the transport block size (in kbits) of the HSDPA bearer selected in the cell, c, for the user; it is defined for each
HSDPA bearer in the HSDPA Radio Bearers table.
–3
T TTI is the TTI duration, i.e. 2 10 s (2000 TTI in one second). This value is specified by the 3GPP.
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per possible
DL
Peak MAC throughput ( TPP –M AC ). For each layer, area is covered if the Peak MAC throughput exceeds the user-defined
thresholds.
• Colour per Effective MAC Throughput
DL
Atoll displays the Effective MAC throughput ( TP E – M AC ) provided on each pixel. The Effective MAC throughput is calculated as
follows:
S block c
DL
TP E – M AC = --------------------------
-
T TTI TTI
c Serving cells
Where,
S block c is the transport block size (in kbits) of the selected HSDPA bearer in the cell, c; it is defined for each HSDPA bearer
in the HSDPA Radio Bearers table.
TTI is the minimum number of TTI (Transmission Time Interval) between two TTI used; it is defined in the terminal user
equipment category properties.
–3
T TTI is the TTI duration, i.e. 2 10 s (2000 TTI in one second). This value is specified by the 3GPP.
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per possible
DL
Effective MAC throughput ( TP E – M AC ). For each layer, area is covered if the Effective MAC throughput exceeds the user-
defined thresholds.
• Colour per Peak RLC Throughput
After selecting the bearer, Atoll reads the corresponding RLC peak throughput ( TP DL I ). This is the highest
P – RLC HSDPABearer
throughput that the bearer can provide on each pixel. Then, it determines the peak RLC throughput provided by the serving
DL
cell, c, in the downlink, TP P – RLC c .
DL DL
For an HSDPA user, we have: TP P – RLC = TP P –RLC c
For MC-HSDPA and DB-MC-HSDPA users, the peak RLC throughput provided to the user is calculated as follows:
DL DL
TP P – RLC = TP P –RLC c
c Serving cell
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per possible
DL
RLC peak throughput ( TP P – RLC ). For each layer, area is covered if the peak RLC throughput can be provided.
307
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
DL
Atoll displays the Effective RLC throughput ( TP E – RLC ) provided on each pixel. The Effective RLC throughput is calculated as
follows:
DL
DL TP P –RLC
TP E – RLC = -----------------
-
TTI
Where TTI is the minimum number of TTI (Transmission Time Interval) between two TTI used; it is defined in the terminal
user equipment category properties.
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per possible
DL
Effective RLC throughput ( TP E – RLC ). For each layer, area is covered if the Effective RLC throughput exceeds the user-defined
thresholds.
• Colour per Average Effective RLC Throughput
DL
Atoll displays the average effective RLC throughput ( TP Av – E – RLC ) provided on each pixel.
DL
TP P –RLC c 1 – BLER HSDPA
DL Serving cells
TP Av –E –RLC = c----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
TTI
Where,
BLER HSDPA is read in the quality graph defined for the triplet “reception equipment-selected bearer-mobility” (HSDPA Quality
Graphs tab in the Reception equipment properties). This graph describes the variation of BLER as a function of the measured
quality (HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt). Knowing the HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt, Atoll finds the corresponding BLER.
TTI is the minimum number of TTI (Transmission Time Interval) between two TTI used; it is defined in the terminal user
equipment category properties.
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per possible
DL
average effective RLC throughput ( TP Av –E –RLC ). For each layer, area is covered if the average effective RLC throughput
exceeds the user-defined thresholds.
• Colour per Application Throughput
DL
Atoll displays the application throughput ( TP A ) provided on each pixel. The application throughput represents the net
throughput after deduction of coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.).
It is calculated as follows:
DL DL
TP A = TP Av –E – RLC f TP – Scaling – TP Offset
Where:
DL
TP Av –E –RLC is the average effective RLC throughput.
BLER HSDPA is read in the quality graph defined for the triplet “reception equipment-selected bearer-mobility” (HSDPA Quality
Graphs tab in the Reception equipment properties). This graph describes the variation of BLER as a function of the measured
quality (HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt). Knowing the HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt, Atoll finds the corresponding BLER.
f TP – Scaling and TP Offset respectively represent the scaling factor between the application throughput and the RLC (Radio Link
Control) throughput and the throughput offset. These two parameters model the header information and other
supplementary data that does not appear at the application level. They are defined in the service properties.
TTI is the minimum number of TTI (Transmission Time Interval) between two TTI used; it is defined in the terminal user
equipment category properties.
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per possible
DL
application throughput ( TPA ). For each layer, area is covered if the application throughput exceeds the user-defined
thresholds.
308
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
When you calculate the study with the following display options, Atoll considers several users per pixel and determines the
best HSDPA bearer that each user can obtain. In this case, the cell available HSDPA power is shared between HSDPA bearer
users. When the coverage prediction is not based on a simulation, the number of HSDPA bearer users is taken from the cell
properties. The displayed results of the coverage prediction will be an average result for one user.
For further information on the HSDPA bearer allocation process when there are several users, see "HSDPA Bearer Allocation
Process" on page 239 For further information on the fast link adaptation modelling, see "Fast Link Adaptation Modelling" on
page 242.
• Colour per Effective MAC Throughput per User
DL
Atoll displays the average Effective MAC throughput per user ( TP E –M AC Av ) provided on each pixel. The average Effective
MAC throughput per user is calculated as follows:
n HSDPA
DL
TP E –M AC x
DL
TP E –M AC Av = ----------------------------------------------
x=1 -
Max n HSDPA c
c Serving cells x
Where,
n HSDPA c is the number of HSDPA bearer users within the cell, c.
DL
TP E – M AC x is the Effective MAC throughput of each HSDPA bearer user. For further information on the calculation of the
Effective MAC throughput, see "Colour per Effective MAC Throughput" on page 306.
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per possible
DL
average Effective MAC throughput per user ( TP E –M AC Av ). For each layer, area is covered if the average Effective MAC
throughput per user exceeds the user-defined thresholds.
• Colour per RLC Throughput per User
DL
Atoll displays the average effective RLC throughput per user ( TP E –R LC Av ) provided on each pixel. The average effective RLC
throughput per user is calculated as follows:
n
HSDPA
DL
TP E –R LC x
DL
TP E –R LC Av = -----------------------------------------
x=1 -
n HSDPA
Where,
n HSDPA is the number of HSDPA bearer users within the cell.
DL
TP E – R LC x is the Effective RLC throughput of each HSDPA bearer user. For further information on the calculation of the
Effective RLC throughput, see "Colour per Effective RLC Throughput" on page 307.
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per possible
DL
average effective RLC throughput per user ( TP E –R LC Av ). For each layer, area is covered if the average effective RLC
throughput per user exceeds the user-defined thresholds.
• Colour per ApplicationThroughput per User
DL
Atoll displays the average application throughput per user ( TPA Av ) provided on each pixel. The average application
throughput per user is calculated as follows:
n HSDPA
DL
TP A x
DL
TP A Av = ----------------------------------
x=1 -
n HSDPA
Where,
n HSDPA is the number of HSDPA bearer users within the cell.
309
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
DL
TP A x is the application throughput of each HSDPA bearer user. For further information on the calculation of the
application throughput, see "Colour per Application Throughput" on page 308.
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per possible
DL
average application throughput per user ( TP A Av ). For each layer, area is covered if the average application throughput per
user exceeds the user-defined thresholds.
This result can be obtained only if you have selected an HSDPA radio bearer in the Condition tab.
• Colour per Cell Edge Coverage Probability
Atoll shows areas where the selected HSDPA radio bearer is available with different cell edge coverage probabilities. Coverage
consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per cell edge coverage
probability defined in the Display tab. For each layer, area is covered if the selected HSDPA radio bearer is available.
310
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Atoll displays on each pixel the E-DPDCH Ec/Nt required to obtain the selected HSUPA bearer. Coverage consists of several
independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per threshold. For each layer, area is covered
Ec req
if ------ Threshold .
Nt E – DPDCH
Atoll displays on each pixel the terminal power required to obtain the selected HSUPA bearer. The required terminal power
is calculated from the required E-DPDCH Ec/Nt. Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and
req
hidden on the map. There is a layer per threshold. For each layer, area is covered if P term Threshold .
UL
Atoll displays the Peak MAC throughput ( TPP –M AC ) provided on each pixel. The Peak MAC throughput is calculated as follows:
UL
UL S block
TP P – M AC = ------------
-
T TTI
Where,
UL
S block is the transport block size (in kbits) for the selected HSUPA bearer; it is defined for each HSUPA bearer in the HSUPA
Radio Bearers table.
T TTI is the duration of one TTI for the selected HSUPA bearer; it is defined for each HSUPA bearer in the HSUPA Radio Bearers
table.
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per possible
UL
Peak MAC throughput ( TPP –M AC ). For each layer, area is covered if the Peak MAC throughput exceeds the user-defined
thresholds.
After selecting the HSUPA bearer, Atoll reads the corresponding RLC peak throughput. This is the highest throughput that the
selected HSUPA bearer can provide on each pixel.
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per possible
UL
RLC peak throughput ( TP P – RLC ). For each layer, area is covered if the peak RLC throughput can be provided.
UL
Atoll displays the minimum effective RLC throughput ( TP Min – E – RLC ) provided on each pixel. The minimum effective RLC
throughput corresponds to the RLC throughput obtained for a given BLER and the maximum number of retransmissions. It is
calculated as follows:
UL
UL TP P – RLC 1 – BLER HSUPA
TP Min – E – RLC = ----------------------------------------------------------------
-
N Rtx
Where,
BLER HSUPA is the residual BLER for the selected uplink transmission format (HSUPA bearer with N Rtx retransmissions). It is
read in the quality graph defined for the quartet “reception equipment-selected bearer-number of retransmissions-mobility”
(HSUPA Quality Graphs tab in the Reception equipment properties). This graph describes the variation of BLER as a function
of the measured quality (E-DPDCH Ec/Nt). Knowing the E-DPDCH Ec/Nt, Atoll finds the corresponding BLER.
N Rtx is the maximum number of retransmissions for the selected HSUPA bearer. This figure is read in the HSUPA Bearer
Selection table.
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per possible
UL
minimum effective RLC throughput ( TP Min – E –RLC ). For each layer, area is covered if the minimum effective RLC throughput
exceeds the user-defined thresholds.
311
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
When HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request) is used, the required average number of retransmissions is smaller and the
UL
Effective RLC throughput is an average effective RLC throughput ( TP Av –E –RL C ). This is the RLC throughput obtained for a given
BLER and the average number of retransmissions. It is calculated as follows:
UL
UL TP P –RLC 1 – BLER HSUPA
TP Av –E –RL C = ----------------------------------------------------------------
-
N Rtx av
BLER HSUPA is the residual BLER for the selected uplink transmission format (HSUPA bearer with N Rtx retransmissions). It is
read in the quality graph defined for the quartet “reception equipment-selected bearer-number of retransmissions-mobility”
(HSUPA Quality Graphs tab in the Reception equipment properties). This graph describes the variation of BLER as a function
of the measured quality (E-DPDCH Ec/Nt). Knowing the E-DPDCH Ec/Nt, Atoll finds the corresponding BLER.
The average number of retransmissions ( N Rtx av ) is determined from early termination probabilities defined for the selected
HSUPA bearer (in the HSUPA Bearer Selection table). The Early Termination Probability graph shows the probability of early
termination ( p ) as a function of the number of retransmissions ( N Rtx ). Atoll calculates the average number of
retransmissions ( N Rtx av ) as follows:
N
Rtx max
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per possible
UL
average effective RLC throughput ( TP Av – E – RL C ). For each layer, area is covered if the minimum effective RLC throughput
exceeds the user-defined thresholds.
UL
Atoll displays the application throughput ( TP A ) provided on each pixel. The application throughput represents the net
throughput after deduction of coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.). This one is calculated as follows:
UL UL
TP A M b = TP Min – E –RLC f TP – Scaling – TP Offset
Where:
f TP – Scaling and TP Offset respectively represent the scaling factor between the application throughput and the minimum RLC
(Radio Link Control) throughput and the throughput offset. These two parameters model the header information and other
supplementary data that does not appear at the application level. They are defined in the service properties.
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per possible
UL
application throughput ( TP A ). For each layer, area is covered if the application throughput exceeds the user-defined
thresholds.
UL
Atoll displays the average application throughput ( TP Av – A ) provided on each pixel. It is calculated as follows:
UL UL
TP Av – A M b = TP Av –E –RL C f TP – Scaling – TP Offset
Where:
f TP – Scaling and TP Offset respectively represent the scaling factor between the average application throughput and the
average RLC (Radio Link Control) throughput and the throughput offset. These two parameters model the header information
and other supplementary data that does not appear at the application level. They are defined in the service properties.
Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map. There is a layer per possible
UL
average application throughput ( TP Av – A ). For each layer, area is covered if the average application throughput exceeds the
user-defined thresholds.
312
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
If no focus zone exists in the .atl document, Atoll takes into account the computation
zone.
313
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Adjacency criterion:
Let CellA be a candidate neighbour cell of CellB. CellA is considered adjacent to CellB if
there exists at least one pixel in the CellB Best Server coverage area where CellA is Best
Server (if several cells have the same best server value) or CellA is the second best server
that enters the Active Set (respecting the HO margin of the allocation).
When Force adjacent cells as neighbours is selected, adjacent cells are sorted and listed
from the most adjacent to the least adjacent, depending on the above criterion.
Adjacency is relative to the number of pixels satisfying the criterion.
• Force adjacent layers as neighbours: If selected, Atoll adds all the cells adjacent across network layers to the
reference cell to the candidate neighbour list. The weight of this constraint is always the average of the Min and
Max values defined for the adjacency factor. This weight is used to calculate the rank of each neighbour and its
importance. Cells are considered adjacent across layers if they belong to different layers and have a coverage
overlap of at least one pixel.
• Force symmetry: This option enables user to force the reciprocity of a neighbourhood link. Therefore, if the
reference cell is a candidate neighbour of another cell, this one will be considered as candidate neighbour of the
reference cell.
If the neighbours list of a cell is full, the reference cell will not be added as a neighbour
of that cell and that cell will be removed from the reference cell’s neighbours list. You can
force Atoll to keep that cell in the reference cell’s neighbours list by adding the following
option in the Atoll.ini file:
[Neighbours]
DoNotDeleteSymmetrics = 1
• Force exceptional pairs: This option enables you to force/forbid some neighbourhood relationships. Therefore,
you may force/forbid a cell to be candidate neighbour of the reference cell.
• Delete existing neighbours: When selecting the Delete existing neighbours option, Atoll deletes all the current
neighbours and carries out a new neighbour allocation. If not selected, the existing neighbours are kept.
• If the Use Coverage Conditions check box is selected, there must be an overlapping zone ( S A S B ) with a given cell
edge coverage probability. Otherwise, only the distance criterion is taken into account.
The overlapping zone ( S A S B ) is defined as follows:
For information on the best server indicator calculation, see "Best Serving Cell Determination in Monte Carlo
Simulations - Old Method" on page 283.
314
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
SB is the area where the cell B can enter the active set.
• The pilot signal received from the cell B is greater than the minimum pilot signal level (min RSCP).
• The pilot quality from B is greater than the pilot quality from A minus the Ec/I0 margin (AS Threshold).
• Inter-carrier neighbours: inter-frequency handover is a hard handover, triggered in multi-carrier W-CDMA networks
for coverage reasons (1st case) and to balance the load between carriers (2nd case).
The reference cell A is using the carrier c1 (c1 is the carrier selected in Source) and the candidate cell B is using the carrier c2
(c2 is the carrier selected in Destination).
SA is the area where the reference cell A is either the best serving cell among all cells using c1 (1st case) or a cell that can enter
the active set of a user connected to c1 (2nd case).
• 1st case: The cell A is the best serving cell among all cells using c1 but its pilot quality starts significantly decreasing.
• The pilot signal level received from A is greater than the minimum pilot signal level (min RSCP).
• The best server indicator of A ( I BS A ) is the highest one.
• I BS A is lower than the minimum pilot quality (min Ec/I0) plus the handover margin.
• 2nd case: The cell A is not the best serving cell among all cells using c1 but it can enter the active set of a user
connected to c1.
• The pilot signal level received from A is greater than the minimum pilot signal level (min RSCP).
• The best server indicator of A ( I BS A ) exceeds the minimum pilot quality (min Ec/I0).
• I BS A is not the highest one. It is strictly lower than the best server indicator of the best serving cell and
greater than the best server indicator of the best serving cell minus the handover margin.
SB is the area where the cell B is the best serving cell among all cells using c2.
• The pilot signal level received from B is greater than the minimum pilot signal level (min RSCP).
• The best server indicator of B ( I BS B ) exceeds the minimum pilot quality (min Ec/I0).
• I BS B is the highest one.
315
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
For information on the best server indicator calculation, see "Best Serving Cell Determination in Monte Carlo Simulations - Old
Method" on page 283.
SA SB
Atoll calculates the percentage of covered area ( ------------------ 100 ) and compares this value to the % minimum covered area. If
SA
this percentage is not exceeded, the candidate neighbour B is discarded.
• The importance of neighbours.
316
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
For information on the importance calculation, see "Importance Calculation" on page 316.
Importance values are used by the allocation algorithm to rank the neighbours according to the allocation reason. Atoll lists
all neighbours and sorts them by importance value so as to eliminate some of them from the neighbour list if the maximum
number of neighbours to be allocated to each transmitter is exceeded. If we consider the case for which there are 15
candidate neighbours and the maximum number of neighbours to be allocated to the reference cell is 8. Among these 15
candidate neighbours, only 8 (having the highest importance values) will be allocated to the reference cell. Note that specific
maximum numbers of neighbours (maximum number of intra-carrier neighbours, maximum number of inter-carrier
neighbours) can be defined at the cell level (property dialogue or cell table). If defined there, this value is taken into account
instead of the default one available in the Neighbour Allocation dialogue.
In the Results part, Atoll only displays the cells for which it finds new neighbours. For these cells, it provides the list of
neighbours, the number of neighbours and the maximum number of neighbours allowed for each cell. In addition, it indicates
the importance (in %) of each neighbour and the allocation reason. Therefore, a neighbour may be marked as exceptional pair,
co-site, adjacent, coverage or symmetric. For neighbours accepted for co-site, adjacency and coverage reasons, Atoll displays
the percentage of area meeting the coverage conditions and the corresponding surface area (km2), the percentage of area
meeting the adjacency conditions and the corresponding surface area (km2). Finally, if cells have previous allocations in the
list, neighbours are marked as existing.
• By default, the automatic neighbour allocation compares the defined Max inter-
site distance with the effective inter-cell distance. As a consequence, there can
be cases where the real distance between assigned neighbours is higher than the
Max inter-site distance, because the effective distance is smaller. You can force
Atoll to compare the Max inter-site distance with the real inter-site distance by
adding the following lines in Atoll.ini:
[Neighbours]
RealInterSiteDistanceCondition=1
• By default, the neighbour importance calculated with respect to distance is based
on the global Max inter-site distance setting for all neighbour candidates. As a
consequence, there can be cases where the calculated importance is different
when the global Max inter-site distance is modified. To avoid that, you can force
Atoll to prioritise the individual distances between reference cells and their
respective neighbour candidates by adding the following lines in Atoll.ini:
[Neighbours]
CandidatesMaxDistanceInImportanceCalculation=1
317
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Except the case of forced neighbours (importance = 100%), priority assigned to each neighbourhood cause is determined
using the Importance Function (IF). The IF considers fourfactors for calculating the importance:
• The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d-
Di = 1 – ----------
d max
d is the effective distance (in m). It corresponds to the real inter-transmitter distance weighted by the azimuths of
antennas. For information on the effective distance calculation, see "Calculation of the Inter-Transmitter Distance" on
page 319.
d max is the maximum distance between the reference transmitter and a possible neighbour.
Where:
Delta(X)=Max(X)-Min(X)
318
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
• Set Min(Di) and Max(Di) to 0% if you do not want to take into account the distance
factor in the importance calculation.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors do not overlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum and maximum importance fields, neighbours will be ranked in this order:
co-site neighbours, adjacent neighbours, and neighbours allocated based on coverage
overlapping.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
• The default value of Min(O) = 1% ensures that neighbours selected for symmetry will
have an importance greater than 0%. With a value of Min(O) = 0%, neighbours
selected for symmetry will have an importance field greater than 0% only if there is
some coverage overlapping.
Except the case of forced neighbours (importance = 100%), priority assigned to each neighbourhood cause is determined
using the Importance Function (IF). The IF considers threefactors for calculating the importance:
• The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d-
Di = 1 – ----------
d max
d is the effective distance (in m). It corresponds to the real inter-transmitter distance weighted by the azimuths of
antennas. For information on the effective distance calculation, see "Calculation of the Inter-Transmitter Distance" on
page 319.
d max is the maximum distance between the reference transmitter and a possible neighbour.
Where
Delta(X)=Max(X)-Min(X)
319
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
• Set Min(Di) and Max(Di) to 0% if you do not want to take into account the distance
factor in the importance calculation.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors do not overlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum and maximum importance fields, neighbours will be ranked in this order:
co-site neighbours and neighbours allocated based on coverage overlapping.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
• The default value of Min(O) = 1% ensures that neighbours selected for symmetry will
have an importance greater than 0%. With a value of Min(O) = 0%, neighbours
selected for symmetry will have an importance field greater than 0% only if there is
some coverage overlapping.
4.5.4 Appendices
4.5.4.1 Calculation of the Inter-Transmitter Distance
Atoll takes into account the real distance ( D in m) and azimuths of antennas in order to calculate the effective inter-
transmitter distance ( d in m).
d = D 1 + x cos – x cos
where x = 0.3% so that the maximum D variation does not exceed 1%.
The formula above implies that two cells facing each other will have a smaller effective distance than the real physical
distance. It is this effective distance that will be taken into account rather than the real distance.
If no focus zone exists in the .atl document, Atoll takes into account the computation
zone.
320
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
• In the context of the primary scrambling code allocation, the term "neighbours" refers
to intra-carrier neighbours.
• Atoll can take into account inter-technology neighbour relations as constraints to
allocate different scrambling codes to the UMTS neighbours of a GSM transmitter. In
order to consider inter-technology neighbour relations in the scrambling code
allocation, you must make the Transmitters folder of the GSM .atl document
accessible in the UMTS .atl document. For information on making links between GSM
and UMTS .atl documents, see the User Manual.
• Atoll considers symmetry relationship between a cell, its first order neighbours, its
second order neighbours and its third order neighbours.
• Atoll considers either a percentage of the cell maximum powers or the total downlink
power used by the cells in order to evaluate I0. In this case, I0 equals the sum of total
transmitted powers. When this parameter is not specified in the cell properties, Atoll
uses 50% of the maximum power.
• Reuse distance,
• Exceptional pairs,
• Domains of scrambling codes,
When no domain is assigned to cells, Atoll considers the 512 primary scrambling codes
available.
• The number of primary scrambling codes per cluster. In Atoll, we call "cluster", a group of scrambling codes as defined
in 3GPP specifications. 3GPP specifications define 64 clusters consisting of 8 scrambling codes (in this case, clusters
are numbererd from 0 to 63). However, you can define another value (e.g. if you set the number of codes per cluster
to 4, scrambling codes will be distributed in 128 clusters).
When the allocation is based on a Distributed strategy (Distributed per Cell or Distributed per Site), this parameter can
also be used to define the interval between the primary scrambling codes assigned to cells on a same site. The defined
interval is applied by adding the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[PSC]
321
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
ConstantStep = 1
For more information about setting options in the atoll.ini file, see the Administrator Manual.
• The carrier on which the allocation is run: It can be a given carrier or all of them. In this case, either Atoll independently
plans scrambling codes for the different carriers, or it allocates the same primary scrambling code to each carrier of a
transmitter if the option "Allocate carriers identically" is selected.
• The possibility to use a maximum of codes from the defined domains (option "Use a Maximum of Codes"): Atoll will
try to spread the scrambling code spectrum the most.
• The "Delete All Codes" option: When selecting this option, Atoll deletes all the current scrambling codes and carries
out a new scrambling code allocation. If not selected, the existing scrambling codes are kept.
In addition, it depends on the selected allocation strategy. Allocation strategies can be:
• Clustered allocation: The purpose of this strategy is to choose for a group of mutually constrained cells, scrambling
codes among a minimum number of clusters. In this case, Atoll will preferentially allocate all the codes within the
same cluster.
• Distributed per cell allocation: This strategy consists in using as many clusters as possible. Atoll will preferentially
allocate codes from different clusters.
• One cluster per site allocation: This strategy allocates one cluster to each site, then, one code from the cluster to each
cell of each site. When all the clusters have been allocated and there are still sites remaining to be allocated, Atoll
reuses the clusters as far as possible at another site.
• Distributed per site allocation: This strategy allocates a group of adjacent clusters to each site, then, one cluster to
each transmitter on the site according to its azimuth and finally, one code from the cluster to each cell of each
transmitter. The number of adjacent clusters per group depends on the number of transmitters per site you have in
your network; this information is required to start allocation based on this strategy. When all the groups of adjacent
clusters have been allocated and there are still sites remaining to be allocated, Atoll reuses the groups of adjacent
clusters as far as possible at another site.
In the Results table, Atoll only displays scrambling codes allocated to TBA cells.
Atoll processes TBA cells according to their priority. It allocates scrambling codes starting with the highest priority cell and its
near cells, and continuing with the lowest priority cells not allocated yet and their near cells. For information on calculating
cell priority, see "Cell Priority" on page 323.
322
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
All sites which have constraints with the studied site are referred to as near sites.
Atoll assigns a cluster to each site, starting with the highest priority site and its near sites, and continuing with the lowest
priority sites not allocated yet and their near sites. When all the clusters have been allocated and there are still sites remaining
to be allocated, Atoll reuses the clusters at another site. When the Reuse Distance option is selected, the algorithm reuses
the clusters as soon as the reuse distance is exceeded. Otherwise, when the option is not selected, the algorithm tries to assign
reused clusters as spaced out as possible.
Then, Atoll allocates a primary scrambling code from the cluster to each cell located on the sites (codes belong to the assigned
clusters). It starts with the highest priority cell and its near cells and goes on with the lowest priority cells not allocated yet
and their near cells.
For information on calculating site priority, see "Site Priority" on page 325. For information on calculating cell priority, see
"Cell Priority" on page 323.
All sites which have constraints with the studied site are referred to as near sites.
Atoll assigns a group of adjacent clusters to each site, starting with the highest priority site and its near sites, and continuing
with the lowest priority sites not allocated yet and their near sites. When all the groups of adjacent clusters have been
allocated and there are still sites remaining to be allocated, Atoll reuses the groups of adjacent clusters at another site. When
the Reuse Distance option is selected, the algorithm reuses the groups of adjacent clusters as soon as the reuse distance is
exceeded. Otherwise, when the option is not selected, the algorithm tries to assign reused groups of adjacent clusters as
spaced out as possible. Then, Atoll assigns each cluster of the group to each transmitter of the site according to the
transmitter azimuth and selected neighbourhood constraints (options "Neighbours in Other Clusters" and "Secondary
Neighbours in Other Clusters"). Then, Atoll allocates a primary scrambling code to each cell located on the transmitters (codes
belong to the assigned clusters). It starts with the highest priority cell and its near cells and goes on with the lowest priority
cells not allocated yet and their near cells.
For information on calculating site priority, see "Site Priority" on page 325. For information on calculating cell priority, see
"Cell Priority" on page 323.
In order to determine the groups of adjacent clusters to be used, Atoll proceeds as follows: It defines theoretical groups of
adjacent clusters, independently of the defined domain, considering the 512 primary scrambling codes available and the
specified number of codes per cluster (if this one is set to 8, 64 clusters are supposed to be available). It starts the division in
group from the cluster 0 (hard coded) and takes into account the maximum number of transmitters per site user-specified in
order to determine the number of clusters in each group and then, the number of possible groups.
Let us assume that the number of codes per cluster is set to 8 and the maximum number of transmitters per site in the
network is 3. In this case, we have the following theoretical groups:
Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 ... Group 21
Cluster 0 Cluster 3 Cluster 6 Cluster 9 Cluster 61
Cluster 1 Cluster 4 Cluster 7 Cluster 10 ... Cluster 62
Cluster 2 Cluster 5 Cluster 8 Cluster 11 Cluster 63
If no domain is assigned to cells, Atoll can use all these groups for the allocation. On the other hand, if a domain is used, the
tool compares adjacent clusters really available in the assigned domain to the theoretical groups and only keeps adjacent
clusters mapping the theoretical groups.
Let us assume that we have a domain consisted of 12 clusters: clusters 1 to 8 and clusters 12 to 15.
Therefore, Atoll will be able to use the following groups of adjacent clusters:
• Group 2 with cluster 3, 4 and 5,
• Group 3 with cluster 6, 7 and 8,
• Group 6 with cluster 12, 13 and 14.
• The clusters 1, 2 and 15 will not be used.
If a domain does not contain any adjacent clusters, the user is warned through the 'Event Viewer'.
323
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
When the option is not selected, algorithm works for each strategy, as explained above. On the other hand, when the option
is selected, allocation order changes. It is no longer based on the cell priority but depends on the transmitter priority. All
transmitters which have constraints with the studied transmitter will be referred to as near transmitters.
In case of a "Per cell" strategy (Clustered and Distributed per cell), Atoll starts scrambling code allocation with the highest
priority transmitter and its near transmitters and continues with the lowest priority transmitters not allocated yet and their
near transmitters. The same scrambling code is assigned to each cell of the transmitter.
In case of the "One cluster per site" strategy, Atoll assigns a cluster to each site and then, allocates a scrambling code to each
transmitter. It starts with the highest priority transmitter and its near transmitters and continues with the lowest priority
transmitters not allocated yet and their near transmitters. The same scrambling code is assigned to each cell of the
transmitter.
In case of the "Distributed per site" strategy, Atoll assigns a group of adjacent clusters to each site, then a cluster to each
transmitter and finally, allocates a scrambling code to each transmitter. It starts with the highest priority transmitter and its
near transmitters and continues with the lowest priority transmitters not allocated yet and their near transmitters. The same
scrambling code is assigned to each cell of the transmitter.
For information on calculating transmitter priority, see "Transmitter Priority" on page 325.
When cells, transmitters or sites have the same priority, processing is based on an
alphanumeric order.
When domains of scrambling codes are assigned to cells, each unavailable scrambling code generates a cost. The higher the
number of codes available in the domain, the less will be the cost due to this criterion. The cost is given as:
C i Dom = 512 – Number of scrambling codes in the domain
• Distance Criterion
The constraint level of any cell i depends on the number of cells (j) present within a radius of "reuse distance" from its centre.
The total cost due to the distance constraint is given as:
C i Dist = Cj Dist i
j
Each cell j within the reuse distance generates a cost given as:
C j Dist i = w d ij c dis tan ce
Where
w d ij is a weight depending on the distance between i and j. This weight is inversely proportional to the inter-cell distance.
For a reuse distance of 2000m, the weight for an inter-cell distance of 1500m is 0.25, the weight for co-site cells is 1 and the
weight for two cells spaced out 2100m apart is 0.
c dis tan ce is the cost of the distance constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
324
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
C i EP = cEP i – j
j
Where
c EP is the cost of the exceptional pair constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
• Neighbourhood Criterion
The constraint level of any cell i depends on the number of its neighbour cells j, the number of second order neighbours k and
the number of third order neighbours l.
Let’s consider the following neighbour schema:
Where
I j is the importance of the neighbour cell j.
c N1 is the cost of the first order neighbour constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
Because two first order neighbours must not have the same scrambling code, Atoll considers the cost created by two first
order neighbours to be each other.
C j N1 i + C j N1 i
C j – j N1 i = -----------------------------------------------------
-
2
Each second order neighbour cell k generates a cost given as:
C k N2 i = Max ( C j N1 i C k N1 j , C j N1 i C k N1 j ) c N2
Where
c N2 is the cost of the second order neighbour constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
Because two second order neighbours must not have the same scrambling code, Atoll considers the cost created by two
second order neighbours to be each other.
C k N2 i + C k N2 i
C k – k N2 i = -------------------------------------------------------
-
2
Each third order neighbour cell l generates a cost given as:
C N1 i C k N1 j C l N1 k C j N1 i C k N1 j C l N1 k
C l N3 i = Max j c N3
C j N1 i C k N1 j C l N1 k C j N1 i C k N1 j C l N1 k
Where
c N3 is the cost of the third order neighbour constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
Because two third order neighbours must not have the same scrambling code, Atoll considers the cost created by two third
order neighbours to be each other.
C l N3 i + C l N3 i
C l – l N3 i = -----------------------------------------------------
-
2
325
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Atoll considers the highest cost of both links when a neighbour relation is symmetric and
the importance value is different.
And
C k N2 i = Max (C j N1 i C k N1 j ,C j N1 k C i N1 j ) c N2
C i N 2G = cN2G j – Tx2G
j
Where
cN is the cost of the GSM neighbour constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
2G
• Cluster Criterion
When the "Distributed per Site" allocation strategy is used, you can consider additional constraints on allocated clusters (one
cell, its first order neighbours and its second order neighbours must be assigned scrambling codes from different clusters). In
this case, the constraint level of any cell i depends on the number of first and second order neighbours, j and k. The total cost
due to the cluster constraint is given as:
Where
c Cluster is the cost of the cluster constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
Therefore, the total cost due to constraints on any cell i is defined as:
C i = C i Dom + C i U
With
C i U = C i Dist + C i EP + C i N + C i N 2G + C i Cluster
With C Tx U = Max C U and C Dom = 512 – Number of scrambling codes in the domain
i Tx i Tx
Here, the domain available for the transmitter is the intersection of domains assigned to cells of the transmitter. The domain
constraint is mandatory and cannot be broken.
326
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Let us consider a site S with three transmitters; each of them has two cells using carriers 0 and 1. The cost due to constraints
on the site is given as:
C S = C S U + C S Dom
With C S U = Max C U and C Dom = 512 – Number of scrambling codes in the domain
Tx S Tx S
Here, the domain considered for the site is the intersection of domains available for transmitters of the site. The domain
constraint is mandatory and cannot be broken.
Let Site0, Site1, Site2 and Site3 be four sites with 3 cells using carrier 0 whom scrambling codes have to be allocated out of
three clusters consisted of 8 primary scrambling codes. This implies that the domain of scrambling codes for the four sites is
from 0 to 23 (cluster 0 to cluster 2). The reuse distance is supposed to be less than the inter-site distance. Only co-site
neighbours exist.
The following section lists the results of each combination of options with explanation where necessary.
327
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Atoll starts allocating the codes from the start of cluster 0 at As it is possible to use a maximum of codes, Atoll starts
each site. allocation at the start of a different cluster at each site. When
a cluster is reused, and there are non allocated codes left in
the cluster, Atoll first allocates those codes before reusing
the already used ones.
Atoll allocates codes from different clusters to each cell of Atoll allocates codes from different clusters to each site’s
the same site. Under given constraints of neighbourhood and cells. As it is possible to use a maximum of codes, Atoll
reuse distance, same codes can be allocated to each site’s allocates the codes so that there is least repetition of codes.
cells.
328
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
In this strategy, a cluster of codes is limited to be used at just When it is possible to use a maximum of codes, Atoll can
one site at a time unless all codes and clusters have been allocate different codes from a reused cluster at another site.
allocated and there are still sites remaining to be allocated. In
this case Atoll reuses the clusters as far as possible at another
site.
In this strategy, a group of adjacent clusters is limited to be When it is possible to use a maximum of codes, Atoll can
used at just one site at a time unless all codes and groups of allocate different codes from a reused group of adjacent
adjacent clusters have been allocated and there are still sites cluster at another site.
remaining to be allocated. In this case (here only one group
of adjacent clusters (clusters 0, 1 and 2) is available), Atoll
reuses the group at another site.
329
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Atoll allocates one cluster at each site as detailed in the In this case, Atoll allocates one cluster at each site and then,
previous section. Then, it allocates a code from the cluster to one code to each transmitter so as to use a maximum of
each cell of the site so as to use a maximum of codes. codes. Then, the same code is given to each cell of the
transmitter.
In both cases (with and without ’Allocate Carriers Identically’), every site has the same priority. Then, cluster allocation to sites
is performed in an alphanumeric order.
330
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Where d is the effective distance between the UMTS reference cell and the GSM neighbour and d max is the maximum inter-
site distance.
In the Results part, Atoll provides the list of neighbours, the number of neighbours and the maximum number of neighbours
allowed for each cell. In addition, it indicates the importance (in %) of each neighbour and the allocation reason. Therefore, a
neighbour may be marked as exceptional pair, co-site, or distance. For neighbours accepted for distance reasons, Atoll
displays the distance from the reference cell (m). Finally, if cells have previous allocations in the list, neighbours are marked
as existing.
331
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
• 1st case: SA is the area where the cell A is the best serving cell of the UMTS network.
• The pilot signal received from A is greater than the minimum pilot signal level,
• The pilot quality from A exceeds a user-definable minimum value (minimum Ec/I0) and is the highest one.
In this case, the Ec/I0 margin must be equal to 0dB and the max Ec/I0 option disabled.
• 2nd case: SA represents the area where the pilot quality from the cell A strats decreasing but the cell A is still the
best serving cell of the UMTS network.
The Ec/I0 margin must be equal to 0dB, the max Ec/I0 option selected and a maximum Ec/I0 user-defined.
• The pilot signal received from A is greater than the minimum pilot signal level,
• The pilot quality from A exceeds the minimum Ec/I0 but is lower than the maximum Ec/I0.
• The pilot quality from A is the highest one.
• 3rd case: SA represents the area where the cell A is not the best serving cell but can enter the active set.
Here, the Ec/I0 margin has to be different from 0dB and the max Ec/I0 option disabled.
• The pilot signal received from A is greater than the minimum pilot signal level,
• The pilot quality from A is within a margin from the best Ec/I0, where the best Ec/I0 exceeds the minimum Ec/
I0.
• 4th case: SA represents the area where:
• The pilot signal received from A is greater than the minimum pilot signal level,
• The pilot quality from A is within a margin from the best Ec/I0 (where the best Ec/I0 exceeds the minimum Ec/
I0) and lower than the maximum Ec/I0.
In this case, the margin must be different from 0dB, the max Ec/I0 option selected and a maximum Ec/I0 user-
defined.
Two different cases may be considered for SB:
• 1st case: SB is the area where the cell B is the best serving cell of the GSM network.
In this case, the margin must be set to 0dB.
• The signal level received from B on the BCCH TRX type exceeds the user-defined minimum threshold and is the
highest one.
• 2nd case: The margin is different from 0dB and SB is the area where:
• The signal level received from B on the BCCH TRX type exceeds the user-defined minimum threshold and is
within a margin from the best BCCH signal level.
SA SB
- 100 ) and compares this value to the % minimum covered area. If
Atoll calculates the percentage of covered area ( -----------------
SA
this percentage is not exceeded, the candidate neighbour B is discarded.
332
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Candidate neighbours fulfilling coverage conditions are sorted in descending order with respect to % of covered area.
Except the case of forced neighbours (importance = 100%), priority assigned to each neighbourhood cause is determined
using the Importance Function (IF). The IF considers threefactors for calculating the importance:
• The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d
Di = 1 – -----------
d max
d is the effective distance (in m). It corresponds to the real inter-transmitter distance weighted by the azimuths of
antennas. For information on the effective distance calculation, see "Calculation of the Inter-Transmitter Distance" on
page 319.
d max is the maximum distance between the reference transmitter and a possible neighbour.
Where
Delta(X)=Max(X)-Min(X)
333
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks ©Forsk 2015
• Set Min(Di) and Max(Di) to 0% if you do not want to take into account the distance
factor in the importance calculation.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors do not overlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum and maximum importance fields, neighbours will be ranked in this order:
co-site neighbours and neighbours allocated based on coverage overlapping.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
In the Results part, Atoll provides the list of neighbours, the number of neighbours and the maximum number of neighbours
allowed for each cell. In addition, it indicates the importance (in %) of each neighbour and the allocation reason. Therefore, a
neighbour may be marked as exceptional pair, co-site or coverage. For neighbours accepted for co-site and coverage reasons,
Atoll displays the percentage of area meeting the coverage conditions and the corresponding surface area (km2). Finally, if
cells have previous allocations in the list, neighbours are marked as existing.
4.7.2.3 Appendices
4.7.2.3.1 Delete Existing Neighbours Option
As explained above, Atoll keeps the existing inter-technology neighbours when the Delete existing neighbours option is not
checked. We assume that we have an existing allocation of inter-technology neighbours.
A new TBA cell i is created in UMTS.atl. Therefore, if you start a new allocation without selecting the Delete existing
neighbours option, Atoll determines the neighbour list of the cell i.
If you change some allocation criteria (e.g. increase the maximum number of neighbours or create a new GSM TBC
transmitter) and start a new allocation without selecting the Delete existing neighbours option, it examines the neighbour list
of TBA cells and checks allocation criteria if there is space in their neighbour lists. A new GSM TBC transmitter can enter the
TBA cell neighbour list if allocation criteria are satisfied. It will be the first one in the neighbour list.
334
Chapter 5
CDMA2000 Networks
336
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
5 CDMA2000 Networks
This chapter describes all the calculations performed in Atoll CDMA2000 documents.
All the calculations are performed on TBC (to be calculated) transmitters. For the definition of TBC transmitters please refer
to "Path Loss Matrices" on page 103.
Total losses ( L total ) in dBm L total = L path + L Tx + L term + L indoor + M Shadowing – model – G Tx + G term
where,
EIRP is the effective isotropic radiated power of the transmitter,
ic is a carrier rank,
L model is the loss on the transmitter-receiver path (path loss) calculated by the propagation model,
M Shadowing – model is the shadowing margin. This parameter is taken into account when the option “Shadowing taken into
account” is selected,
L Indoor are the indoor losses, taken into account when the option “Indoor coverage” is selected,
L Tx is the transmitter loss ( L Tx = L total – DL ). For information on calculating transmitter loss, "UMTS, CDMA2000, TD-SCDMA,
WiMAX, and LTE Documents" on page 30.
337
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
• For a selected transmitter, it is also possible to study the path loss, L path , or the total
losses, L total . Path loss and total losses are the same on any carrier.
• For a selected transmitter, it is also possible to study the path loss, L path , or the total
losses, L total . Path loss and total losses are the same on any carrier.
• You can use a value other than 30 dB for the margin from the best server signal level,
for example a smaller value for improving the calculation speed. For more
information on defining a different value for this margin, see the Administrator
Manual.
And
Txi Txj
P rec ic Best P rec ic – M
ji
338
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
• If the margin equals 0 dB, Atoll will consider bins where the signal level received from
Txi is the highest.
• If the margin is set to 2 dB, Atoll will consider bins where the signal level received
from Txi is either the highest or 2dB lower than the highest.
• If the margin is set to -2 dB, Atoll will consider bins where the signal level received
from Txi is 2dB higher than the signal levels from transmitters, which are 2nd best
servers.
And
Txi nd Txj
P rec ic 2 Best P rec ic – M
ji
• If the margin equals 0 dB, Atoll will consider bins where the signal level received from
Txi is the second highest.
• If the margin is set to 2 dB, Atoll will consider bins where the signal level received
from Txi is either the second highest or 2dB lower than the second highest.
• If the margin is set to -2 dB, Atoll will consider bins where the signal level received
from Txi is 2dB higher than the signal levels from transmitters, which are 3rd best
servers.
Atoll calculates signal level received from the transmitter on each bin of each transmitter service area. A bin of a service area
is coloured if the signal level is greater than or equal to the defined minimum thresholds (bin colour depends on signal level).
Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers
as transmitter service areas. Each layer shows the different signal levels available in the transmitter service area.
Atoll calculates signal levels received from transmitters on each bin of each transmitter service area. Where other service
areas overlap the studied one, Atoll chooses the highest value. A bin of a service area is coloured if the signal level is greater
than or equal to the defined thresholds (the bin colour depends on the signal level). Coverage consists of several independent
layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as defined thresholds. Each layer
corresponds to an area where the signal level from the best server exceeds a defined minimum threshold.
Atoll calculates path loss from the transmitter on each bin of each transmitter service area. A bin of a service area is coloured
if path loss is greater than or equal to the defined minimum thresholds (bin colour depends on path loss). Coverage consists
of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as service areas.
Each layer shows the different path loss levels in the transmitter service area.
339
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
Atoll calculates total losses from the transmitter on each bin of each transmitter service area. A bin of a service area is
coloured if total losses is greater than or equal to the defined minimum thresholds (bin colour depends on total losses).
Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers
as service areas. Each layer shows the different total losses levels in the transmitter service area.
Atoll calculates signal levels received from transmitters on each bin of each transmitter service area. Where other service
areas overlap the studied one, Atoll determines the best transmitter and evaluates path loss from the best transmitter. A bin
of a service area is coloured if the path loss is greater than or equal to the defined thresholds (bin colour depends on path
loss). Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many
layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where the path loss from the best server exceeds a defined
minimum threshold.
Atoll calculates signal levels received from transmitters on each bin of each transmitter service area. Where service areas
overlap the studied one, Atoll determines the best transmitter and evaluates total losses from the best transmitter. A bin of
a service area is coloured if the total losses is greater than or equal to the defined thresholds (bin colour depends on total
losses). Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many
layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where the total losses from the best server exceed a defined
minimum threshold.
Number of Servers
Atoll evaluates how many service areas cover a bin in order to determine the number of servers. The bin colour depends on
the number of servers. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed.
There are as many layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where the number of servers is greater than
or equal to a defined minimum threshold.
On each bin of each transmitter service area, the coverage corresponds to the pixels where the signal level from this
transmitter fulfils signal conditions defined in Conditions tab with different Cell edge coverage probabilities. There is one
coverage area per transmitter in the explorer.
On each bin of each transmitter service area, the coverage corresponds to the pixels where the best signal level received fulfils
signal conditions defined in Conditions tab. There is one coverage area per cell edge coverage probability in the explorer.
340
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
E bSCH – DL
----
- Eb/Nt target for SCH channel on
DL
Q req SCH N t req None
downlink
(Service, Terminal, Mobility, SCH throughput multiple) parameter
E bFCH – UL
UL
Q req FCH ----
- (Service, Terminal, Mobility) parameter None
Eb/Nt target for FCH channel on
N t req uplink
E bSCH – UL
----
- Eb/Nt target for SCH channel on
UL
Q req SCH N t req None
uplink
(Service, Terminal, Mobility, SCH throughput multiple) parameter
Max Number of channel elements
N CE –U L N I Site parameter None
available for a site on uplink
Max Number of channel elements
N CE –D L N I Site parameter None
available for a site on downlink
Number of channel elements of a
N CE –U L N I Simulation result None
site consumed by users on uplink
Number of channel elements of a
N CE –D L N I Simulation result None
site consumed by users on downlink
Number of channel elements used by
Overhead
N CE –U L Site equipment parameter None the cell for common channels on
uplink
Number of channel elements used by
Overhead
N CE –D L Site equipment parameter None the cell for common channels on
downlink
341
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
Tx UL
NR inter – techno log y Cell parameter None Inter-technology uplink noise rise
DL
%Powermax Simulation constraint (global parameter or cell parameter) % Maximum percentage of used power
Tx Tx UL
N0 NF Tx K T W NR inter – techno log y W Thermal noise at transmitter
Term Tx DL
N0 NF Term K T W NR inter – techno log y W Thermal noise at terminal
342
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
DL
AF FCH Service parameter None Downlink activity factor on FCH
UL
AF FCH Service parameter None Uplink activity factor on FCH
max
P FCH Service parameter W Maximum power allowed for FCH
min
P SCH Service parameter W Minimum power allowed for SCH
max
P SCH Service parameter W Maximum power allowed for SCH
P FCH txi ic P FCH txi ic tch W Total FCH power on carrier ic
tch FCH ic
P pilot txi ic + P Sync txi ic + P paging txi ic + P SCH txi ic Transmitter total transmitted power
P tx txi ic W
+ P FCH txi ic on carrier ic
min
P term Terminal parameter W Minimum terminal power allowed
max
P term Terminal parameter W Maximum terminal power allowed
343
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
M Shadowing – Eb Nt Result calculated from cell edge coverage probability and DL Eb/Nt DL Eb/Nt Shadowing margin
DL
None
standard deviation Only used in prediction studies
M Shadowing – Eb Nt Result calculated from cell edge coverage probability and UL Eb/Nt UL Eb/Nt Shadowing margin
UL
None
standard deviation Only used in prediction studies
UL npaths
G macro – diversity = M Shadowing – Eb Nt – M Shadowing – Eb Nt
UL UL UL UL quality gain due to signal diversity
G macro – diversity None
n=2 or 3 in soft handoffc.
Global parameter (default value)
Random shadowing error drawn
E Shadowing Simulation result None during Monte-Carlo simulation
Only used in simulations
In prediction studiesd
P pilot txi ic
P c txi ic ------------------------------- W Chip power received at terminal
LT
FCH – DL P FCH txi ic tch Bit received power at terminal for
Pb txi ic tch ----------------------------------------- W
LT FCH on carrier ic
344
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
SCH – DL P SCH txi ic tch Bit received power at terminal for
Pb txi ic tch ----------------------------------------- W
LT SCH on carrier ic
SCH
SCH – UL P term Bit received power at transmitter for
Pb ic ------------ W
LT SCH on carrier ic
UL UL
P c ic p Ptot ic W Chip received power at transmitter
a. L Tx = L total – UL on uplink and L Tx = L total – DL on downlink. For information on calculating transmitter losses on uplink and downlink,
see "UMTS, CDMA2000, TD-SCDMA, WiMAX, and LTE Documents" on page 30.
npaths
b. M Shadowing –Ec Io corresponds to the shadowing margin evaluated from the shadowing error probability density function (n paths) in case
of downlink Ec/I0 modelling.
npaths
c. M Shadowing – Eb Nt corresponds to the shadowing margin evaluated from the shadowing error probability density function (n paths) in
UL
case of uplink soft handoff modelling.
d. In uplink prediction studies, only carrier power level is downgraded by the shadowing margin ( M Shadowing – Eb Nt ). In downlink
UL
prediction studies, carrier power level and intra-cell interference are downgraded by the shadowing model ( M Shadowing – Eb Nt or
DL
M Shadowing – Ec Io ) while extra-cell interference level is not. Therefore, M Shadowing – Eb Nt or M Shadowing – Ec Io is set to 1 in downlink
DL
extra-cell interference calculation.
DL Downlink extra-cell interference at
DL
I extra ic P tot txj ic W
terminal on carrier ic
txj j i
Tx Downlink inter-technology
P Transmitted ic i
DL
I inter – techno log y ic --------------------------------------
Tx
L total ICP ic ic
Tx m W interference at terminal on carrier ic
ni i a
345
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
E BTS P c txi ic
Q pilot txi ic ----c --------------------------------------------------
- Quality level at terminal on pilot for
I0 DL None
I 0 ic carrier ic
a. In the case of an interfering GSM external network in frequency hopping, the ICP value is weighted according to the fractional load.
Term
b. In an active set, N 0 is calculated for all its members with Inter-technology downlink noise rise of the best server.
DL Downlink extra-cell interference at
DL
I extra ic P tot txj ic W
terminal on carrier ic
txj j i
Tx Downlink inter-technology
P Transmitted ic i
DL
I inter – techno log y ic --------------------------------------
Tx
L total ICP ic ic
Tx m W interference at terminal on carrier ic
ni i a
DL
DL Q SCH ic Downlink soft handover gain for SCH
G SHO SCH ----------------------------------------------------
- None
DL
Q SCH BestServer ic channel on carrier ic
346
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
a. In the case of an interfering GSM external network in frequency hopping, the ICP value is weighted according to the fractional load.
b. Calculation option may be selected in the Global parameters tab. The chosen option will be taken into account only in simulations. In point
analysis and coverage studies, Atoll uses the option “Total noise” to evaluate DL and UL Eb/Nt.
c. Calculation option may be selected in the Global parameters tab. The chosen option will be taken into account only in simulations. In point
analysis and coverage studies, Atoll uses the option “Total noise” to evaluate DL and UL Eb/Nt.
Pb
UL UL
ic + P c ic Total power received at transmitter
UL
intra W from intra-cell terminals using carrier
I tot txi ic term
txi
ic
UL
P b ic + P c ic
UL Total power received at transmitter
UL
extra W from extra-cell terminals using
I tot txi ic term
txj j i
carrier ic
Pb
UL UL
ic adj + P c ic adj
UL Uplink inter-carrier interference at
I inter – carrier txi ic term W
txj j
terminal on carrier ic
----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
RF ic ic adj
347
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
UL UL
Softer HO: f rake efficiency Q tch txk ic
tx k ActiveSet
samesite
UL
G macro – diversity
UL
UL Q FCH ic Uplink soft handover gain for FCH
G SHO FCH ----------------------------------------------------
- None
UL
Q FCH BestServer ic channel on carrier ic
UL
UL Q SCH ic Uplink soft handover gain for SCH
G SHO SCH ----------------------------------------------------
- None
UL
Q SCH BestServer ic channel on carrier ic
UL
Q req FCH Required terminal power to achieve
FCH – req
P term ic - P FCH
---------------------- term ic W Eb/Nt target at transmitter for FCH
UL
Q FCH ic on carrier ic
UL
Q req SCH Required terminal power to achieve
SCH – req
P term ic ----------------------- P SCH
term ic W Eb/Nt target at transmitter for SCH
UL
Q SCH ic on carrier ic
req FCH – req SCH – req Required terminal power on carrier
P term ic P term ic + P term ic W
ic
tx
a. In an active set, N 0 is calculated for all its members with Inter-technology uplink noise rise of the best server.
b. Calculation option may be selected in the Global parameters tab. The chosen option will be taken into account only in simulations. In point
analysis and coverage studies, Atoll uses the option “Total noise” to evaluate DL and UL Eb/Nt.
c. Calculation option may be selected in the Global parameters tab. The chosen option will be taken into account only in simulations. In point
analysis and coverage studies, Atoll uses the option “Total noise” to evaluate DL and UL Eb/Nt.
DL Downlink extra-cell interference at
DL
I extra ic P tot txj ic W
terminal on carrier ic
txj j i
348
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
Pb
UL UL
ic + P c ic Total power received at transmitter
UL intra
I tot txi ic W from intra-cell terminals using carrier
term
txi
ic
UL
P b ic + P c ic
UL Total power received at transmitter
UL extra
I tot txi ic W from extra-cell terminals using
term
txj j i
carrier ic
Pb
UL UL
ic adj + P c ic adj
UL Uplink inter-carrier interference at
I inter – carrier txi ic term W
txj j
terminal on carrier ic
----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
RF ic ic adj
UL
I tot txi ic
UL
F txi ic --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- None Cell uplink reuse factor on carrier ic
UL intra
Tx
I tot txi ic 1 – F MUD term
UL
1
--------------------------
- Cell uplink reuse efficiency factor on
E txi ic UL None
F txi ic carrier ic
P tx txi ic
----------------------------- Percentage of max transmitter
DL
%Power txi ic - 100 None
P max txi ic power used.
DL
I tot ic
DL
F txi ic -----------------------------
- None Downlink reuse factor on a carrier ic
DL
I intra txi ic
349
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
a. In the case of an interfering GSM external network in frequency hopping, the ICP value is weighted according to the fractional load.
350
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
Ec UL Parameter read in the 1xEV-DO Radio Bearer Selection (Uplink) table Minimum pilot quality level required
----
- None
N t min for 1xEV-DO Rev. A and Rev. B users to obtain a radio bearer in the uplink
Tx UL
NRinter – techno log y Cell parameter None Inter-technology uplink noise rise
351
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
Term Tx DL
N0 NF Term K T W NR inter – techno log y W Thermal noise at terminal
DL
TP avg Simulation result bps Downlink average cell throughput
352
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
max
P term Terminal parameter W Maximum terminal power allowed
G RRI Terminal parameter (for 1xEV-DO Rev A terminals only) None Reverse Rate Indicator Channel gain
G Auxiliary – pilot Terminal parameter (for 1xEV-DO Rev A terminals only) None Auxiliary Pilot Channel gain
M Shadowing – Eb Nt Result calculated from cell edge coverage probability and UL Eb/Nt UL Eb/Nt Shadowing margin
UL
None
standard deviation Only used in prediction studies
UL npaths
G macro – diversity = M Shadowing – Eb Nt – M Shadowing – Eb Nt
UL UL UL UL quality gain due to signal diversity
G macro – diversity None
n=2 or 3 in soft handoffc.
Global parameter (default value)
Random shadowing error drawn
E Shadowing Simulation result None during Monte-Carlo simulation
Only used in simulations
353
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
In prediction studiesd
For Ec/I0 and Ec/Nt calculations
L path L Tx L term L body L indoor M Shadowing – Ec Io
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
G Tx G term
For UL Eb/Nt calculation
LT L path L Tx L term L body L indoor M Shadowing – Eb Nt None Transmitter-terminal total loss
UL
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
G Tx G term
In simulations
L path L Tx L term L body L indoor E Shadowing
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
G Tx G term
UL
NRthreshold txi ic Cell parameter dB Cell uplink noise rise threshold
prediction studies, carrier power level and intra-cell interference are downgraded by the shadowing model ( M Shadowing – Ec Io ) while
extra-cell interference level is not. Therefore, M Shadowing – Ec Io is set to 1 in downlink extra-cell interference calculation.
354
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
DL DL DL
DL P tot txi ic b pilot + I extra ic b pilot + I inter – carrier ic b pilot Total noise based on pilot received at
I 0 ic b pilot W
DL term terminal on carrier ic
+ I inter – techno log y ic + N0
DL DL DL
DL P tot txi ic b traffic + I extra ic b traffic + I inter – carrier ic b traffic Total noise based on traffic received
I 0 ic b traffic W
DL term at terminal on carrier ic
+ I inter – techno log y ic + N0
Q pilot txi ic DL
BTS P tot txi ic b pilot Pilot quality level at terminal on
Ec ---------------------------------------------------------------------- None
---- txi ic b pilot
DL
I 0 ic b pilot carrier ic
I0
DL
E BTS P tot txi ic b pilot Pilot quality level at terminal on
----c- txi ic b pilot ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- None
Nt DL
N tot ic b pilot + 1 – BTS P tot txi ic b pilot
DL carrier ic
DL
E BTS P tot txi ic b traffic Traffic quality level at terminal on
----c- txi ic b traffic -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- None
Nt DL
N tot ic b traffic + 1 – BTS P tot txi ic b traffic
DL carrier ic
a. In the case of an interfering GSM external network in frequency hopping, the ICP value is weighted according to the fractional load.
Pb
UL
ic Total power received at transmitter
UL
intra W from intra-cell terminals using carrier
I tot txi ic term
txi
ic
UL
P b ic Total power received at transmitter
UL
extra W from extra-cell terminals using
I tot txi ic term
txj j i
carrier ic
Pb
UL
ic adj
UL Uplink inter-carrier interference at
I inter – carrier txi ic term W
txj j
terminal on carrier ic
-----------------------------------
-
RF ic ic adj
355
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
UL
No HO: Q txi ic
UL UL
Softer HO: f rake efficiency Q tch txk ic
tx k ActiveSet
samesite
UL
G macro – diversity
UL
UL Q total ic Uplink soft handover gain on carrier
G SHO -------------------------------------------------
- None
UL
Q BestServer ic ic
Q req
UL Required terminal power to achieve
req
P term ic - P term
---------------------- W Eb/Nt target at transmitter on carrier
UL
Q total ic ic
a. Calculation option may be selected in the Global parameters tab. The chosen option will be taken into account only in simulations. In point
analysis and coverage studies, Atoll uses the option “Total noise” to evaluate DL and UL Eb/Nt.
b. In simulations, the uplink Eb/Nt target is calculated without considering the acknowledgement signal.
356
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
Tx Downlink inter-technology
P Transmitted ic i
DL
I inter – techno log y ic -------------------------------------
L
Tx
ICP
Tx m
- W interference at terminal on carrier ic
ni total n i ic a
Pb
UL
ic Total power received at transmitter
UL
intra W from intra-cell terminals using carrier
I tot txi ic term
txi
ic
UL
P b ic Total power received at transmitter
UL extra
I tot txi ic W from extra-cell terminals using
term
txj j i
carrier ic
Pb
UL
ic adj
UL Uplink inter-carrier interference at
I inter – carrier txi ic term W
txj j
terminal on carrier ic
-----------------------------------
-
RF ic ic adj
UL
I tot txi ic
UL
F txi ic --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- None Cell uplink reuse factor on carrier ic
UL intra
Tx
I tot txi ic 1 – F MUD term
357
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
a. In the case of an interfering GSM external network in frequency hopping, the ICP value is weighted according to the fractional load.
5.4 Simulations
The simulation process is divided into two steps:
1. Obtaining a realistic user distribution
Atoll generates a user distribution using a Monte-Carlo algorithm, which requires traffic maps and data as input. The
resulting user distribution complies with the traffic database and maps provided to the algorithm.
Each user is assigned a service, a mobility type, and an activity status by random trial, according to a probability law
that uses the traffic database.
358
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
The user activity status is an important output of the random trial and has direct consequences on the next step of
the simulation and on the network interferences. A user may be either active or inactive. Both active and inactive
users consume radio resources and create interference.
Additionally, each 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 user is assigned a transition flag ("True" or "False") for each possible throughput
transition (from 9.6 to 19.2 kbps, 19.2 to 38.4 kbps, 38.4 to 76.8 kbps, and 76.8 to 153.6 kbps for throughput upgrading
and from 153.6 to 76.8 kbps, 76.8 to 38.4 kbps, 38.4 to 19.2 kbps, and 19.2 to 9.6 kbps for throughput downgrading).
These transition flags are based on the throughput downgrading and upgrading probabilities. If a transition flag is
"True," the user throughput can be downgraded or upgraded if necessary.
Then, Atoll randomly assigns a shadowing error to each user using the probability distribution that describes the
shadowing effect.
Finally, another random trial determines user positions in their respective traffic zone and whether they are indoors
or outdoors (according to the clutter weighting and the indoor ratio per clutter class defined for the traffic maps).
2. Modelling the network regulation mechanism
This algorithm depends on the network. Atoll uses a power control algorithm in case of CDMA2000 1xRTT networks
and a different algorithm, which mixes throughput control on downlink and power control on uplink, for CDMA2000
1xEV-DO networks.
Atoll determines the total number of users attempting connection in each simulation
based on the Poisson distribution. This may lead to slight variations in the total numbers
of users in different simulations. To have the same total number of users in each
simulation of a group, add the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[Simulation]
RandomTotalUsers=0
• In case of user profile traffic maps composed of lines, the number of subscribers (X)
per user profile is calculated from the line length (L) and the user profile density (D)
(nb of subscribers per km) as follows: X = L D
• The number of subscribers (X) is an input when a user profile traffic map is composed
of points.
For each behaviour described in a user profile, according to the service, frequency use and exchange volume, Atoll calculates
the probability for the user being connected in uplink and in downlink at an instant t.
• Calculation of the service usage duration per hour ( p 0 : probability of a connection):
N call d
p 0 = -------------------
-
3600
where N call is the number of calls per hour and d is the average call duration (in second).
359
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
Then, Atoll calculates the total number of users trying to access a certain service.
• Calculation of the number of users trying to access the service j ( n j ):
nj = X p0
n j = n j UL + n j DL + n j UL + DL + n j inactive = n j UL + DL
• Voice Users
Voice users are active on uplink and downlink. However, the FCH can have inactivity periods on both links. This is modelled by
UL DL
the FCH activity factor, AF FCH and AF FCH . Therefore, all voice service users try to access the service with the following FCH
FCH UL FCH DL
throughputs, TP P – UL AF FCH on uplink and TP P – DL AF FCH on downlink.
FCH FCH
TP P – UL and TP P – DL are respectively the uplink and downlink FCH peak throughputs.
• Data Users
Data service users are active on uplink and downlink. FCH is always allocated but can have inactivity periods on both links; this
UL DL
is modelled by the FCH activity factor, AF FCH and AF FCH . SCH may be allocated with four possible throughputs (2x, 4x, 8x and
16xFCH peak throughput).
Therefore, data service users can access the service with different throughputs. Possible throughputs are detailed in the table
below:
SCH throughput factor Allocated throughputs
rk On UL On DL
FCH UL FCH DL
Only FCH is used - TP P – UL AF FCH TP P – DL AF FCH
FCH UL FCH DL
2x TP P – UL AF FCH + 2 TPP – DL AF FCH + 2
FCH UL FCH DL
4x TP P – UL AF FCH + 4 TPP – DL AF FCH + 4
Both FCH and SCH are used
FCH UL FCH DL
8x TP P – UL AF FCH + 8 TPP – DL AF FCH + 8
FCH UL FCH DL
16x TP P – UL AF FCH + 16 TP P – DL AF FCH + 16
FCH FCH
TP P – UL and TP P – DL are respectively the uplink and downlink FCH peak throughputs.
Then, Atoll determines the distribution of users between the different possible throughputs.
360
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
UL DL
In case of a data service, j, several data throughput probabilities, P k and P k , can be assigned to different throughput
factors, r k , for SCH channel.
For data service users, a random trial compliant with throughput probabilities is performed for each link in order to determine
the throughput for each user.
On uplink, we have:
rk
FCH UL
For each SCH throughput factor, r k , the number of users n j with the throughput TP P – UL AF FCH + r k is calculated as
follows,
rk
UL
nj = Pr nj
k
FCH FCH UL
Therefore, the number of users n j with the throughput, TP P – UL AF FCH , is:
rk
nj
FCH
nj = nj –
r
k
On downlink, we have:
rk
FCH DL
For each SCH throughput factor, r k , the number of users, n j with the throughput, TP P – DL AF FCH + r k , is calculated as
follows,
rk
DL
nj = Pr nj
k
FCH FCH DL
Therefore, the number of users n j with the throughput, TP P – DL AF FCH , is:
r
nj
FCH k
nj = nj –
rk
Pk
UL UL
Probability of being active on UL: p UL = TP k
UL
Rk
Pk
UL UL
Probability of being inactive: p inactive = 1 – TP k
UL
Rk
Therefore, we have:
Number of users active on UL: n j UL = n j p UL
361
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
n j = n j UL + n j DL + n j UL + DL + n j inactive = n j UL + n j inactive
UL
Then, Atoll determines the distribution of users between the different possible throughputs, TP k . The number of users with
UL UL
the throughput TP k , n j TP k , is calculated as follows:
UL UL
n j TP k = P k n j
• The user distribution per service is an average distribution and the service of each
user is randomly drawn in each simulation. Therefore, if you compute several
simulations at once, the average number of users per service will correspond to the
calculated distribution. But if you check each simulation, the user distribution
between services is different in each of them.
• It is the same for the SCH throughput distribution between 1xRTT data service users
and the traffic throughput distribution between 1xEV-DO data service users.
• In calculations detailed above, we assume that the sum of throughput probabilities is
less than or equal to 1. If the sum of throughput probabilities exceeds 1, Atoll
considers normalised throughput probabilities values, P r P r , instead of
k k
rk
Where,
UL
TPD is the number of kbits per second transmitted in UL in the Txi cell to provide the service j to the users (user-
defined value in the traffic map properties)
DL
TPD is the number of kbits per second transmitted in DL in the Txi cell to provide the service j to the users (user-
defined value in the traffic map properties).
UL DL
TP j and TP j correspond to the UL and DL throughputs of a user. FCH is always allocated to active users but
UL FCH UL FCH
can have inactivity periods on both links. Therefore, we have TP j = TP P – UL AF FCH (where TP P – UL is the
UL
service FCH peak throughput on UL and AF FCH corresponds to the FCH activity factor on UL) and
DL FCH DL FCH DL
TP j = TPP – DL AF FCH (where TP P – DL is the service FCH peak throughput on DL and AF FCH corresponds to the
FCH activity factor on DL).
Users are always active on FCH for both links. Therefore, we have following activity probabilities.
362
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
inactive
Number of inactive users in UL and DL: n j = 0
• When selecting Total Number of Users (All Activity Statuses), you can input the number of connected users for
each sector ( n j ).
Users are always active on FCH for both links. Therefore, we have following activity probabilities.
• When selecting Number of Users per Activity Status, you can directly input the number of users active in the
uplink and downlink ( n j UL + DL ), for each sector.
FCH UL FCH DL
Voice service users try to access the service with the FCH throughputs, TPP – UL AF FCH on uplink and TP P – DL AF FCH on
downlink.
All user characteristics determined, a second random trial is performed to obtain their geographical positions.
• Data Service Users (j)
FCH is always allocated to active users but can have inactivity periods on both links. This is modelled by the FCH activity factors,
UL DL
AF FCH and AF FCH . SCH may be allocated with four possible throughputs (2x, 4x, 8x, 16xFCH peak throughput). Several
UL DL
throughput probabilities, P k and P k , can be assigned to different throughputs factor, r k , for SCH channel.
363
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
UL DL
N UL = TPD
--------------- and N DL = TPD
---------------
UL DL
TP j TP j
Where,
UL
TPD is the number of kbits per second transmitted in UL in the Txi cell to provide the service j to the users (user-
defined value in the traffic map properties)
DL
TPD is the number of kbits per second transmitted in DL in the Txi cell to provide the service j to the users (user-
defined value in the traffic map properties).
UL DL
TP j and TP j correspond to uplink and downlink throughputs of a user.
r k + AF FCH R FCH P r + 1 – P r TP P – UL AF FC
UL UL UL UL UL FCH UL
Pj =
k k
rk rk
rk + AFFCH RFCH Prk + 1 – Prk TPP – DL AFFC
DL DL DL DL DL FCH DL
Pj =
rk rk
FCH FCH
TP P – UL and TP P – DL are the uplink and downlink FCH peak throughputs respectively.
Users are always active on FCH for both links. Therefore, we have following activity probabilities.
Then, Atoll calculates the number of users per activity status and the total number of users:
inactive
Number of inactive users in UL and DL: n j = 0
• When selecting Total Number of Users (All Activity Statuses), you can input the number of connected users for
each sector ( n j ).
Users are always active on FCH for both links. Therefore, we have following activity probabilities.
364
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
• When selecting Number of Users per Activity Status, you can directly input the number of users active in the
uplink and downlink ( n i UL + DL ), for each sector.
As explained above, data service users can access the service with different throughputs. Possible throughputs are detailed in
the table below:
FCH UL FCH DL
2x TPP – UL AF FCH + 2 TP P – DL AF FCH + 2
FCH UL FCH DL
4x TPP – UL AF FCH + 4 TP P – DL AF FCH + 4
Both FCH and SCH are used
FCH UL FCH DL
8x TPP – UL AF FCH + 8 TP P – DL AF FCH + 8
FCH UL FCH DL
16x TPP – UL AF FCH + 16 TP P – DL AF FCH + 16
Atoll determines the distribution of users with the different possible throughputs. A random trial compliant with throughput
probabilities is performed for each link in order to determine the throughput of each user.
On uplink, we have,
rk
FCH UL
For each SCH throughput factor, r k , the number of users n j with the throughput TP P – UL AF FCH + r k is calculated as
follows,
rk
UL
nj = Pr nj
k
FCH FCH UL
Therefore, the number of users n j with the throughput, TP P – UL AF FCH , is,
rk
nj
FCH
nj = nj –
rk
On downlink, we have,
r
k FCH DL
For each SCH throughput factor, r k , the number of users, n j with the throughput, TP P – DL AF FCH + r k , is calculated as
follows,
k DL
nj = Pk nj
FCH FCH DL
Therefore, the number of users n j with the throughput, TP P – DL AF FCH , is,
rk
nj
FCH
nj = nj –
rk
As power control is performed in the uplink only, 1xEV-DO data service users will be considered either active in the uplink or
inactive. 1xEV-DO data Rev. 0 service users can access the service with uplink throughputs of 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 76.8 and 153.6
kbps. 1xEV-DO data Rev. A and Rev. B service users can access the service with uplink throughputs of 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 76.8,
115.2, 153.6, 230.4, 307.2, 460.8, 614.4, 921.6, 1,228.8 and 1,848.2 kbps.
365
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
UL UL
For each service, j, several throughput probabilities, P k , can be assigned to different uplink throughputs TP k . The number
of users active in uplink ( n j UL ) and the number of inactive users ( n j inactive ) are calculated into several steps. First of
all, Atoll determines the number of users active in UL using the service j in the Txi cell.
For each transmitter, Txi, and each service j:
UL
• When selecting Throughputs in Uplink and Downlink, you can input the throughput demands in UL ( TPD ) for
each sector.
Atoll calculates the number of users active in UL using the service j in the Txi cell as follows:
UL
N UL = TPD
---------------
UL
TP j
UL
Where TPD is the number of kbits per second transmitted on UL in the Txi cell to provide the service j (user-
defined value in the traffic map properties).
UL
TP j corresponds to the uplink throughput for a user.
Pk
UL UL UL
TP j = TP k
k
In the above calculations, we assume that the sum of throughput probabilities is less than
or equal to 1. If the sum of throughput probabilities exceeds 1, Atoll considers
normalised throughput probabilities values, P r P r , instead of specified
k k
rk
throughput probabilities P r .
k
Pk
UL UL
Probability of being active in UL: p UL = TP k
UL
Rk
Pk
UL UL
Probability of being inactive: p inactive = 1 – TP k
UL
R
k
Therefore, we have:
• When selecting Total Number of Users (All Activity Statuses), you can input the number of connected users for
each sector ( n j ).
Pk
UL UL
Probability of being active in UL: p UL = TP k
UL
Rk
366
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
Pk
UL UL
Probability of being inactive: p inactive = 1 – TP k
UL
R
k
Therefore, we have:
• When selecting Number of Users per Activity Status, you can directly input the number of inactive users
( n j inactive ) and the number of users active in the uplink ( n j UL ), for each sector.
n j = n j UL + n j inactive
Then, Atoll determines the distribution of users with the different possible throughputs. The number of users with the
UL UL
throughput TP k , n j TP k , is calculated as follows:
UL UL
n j TPk = P k n j
The user distribution per service is an average distribution and the service of each user is
randomly drawn In each simulation. Therefore, if you compute several simulations at
once, the average number of users per service will correspond to the calculated
distribution. But if you check each simulation, the user distribution between services is
different in each of them.
It is the same for the SCH throughput distribution between 1xRTT data service users and
the traffic throughput distribution between 1xEV-DO data service users.
During the generation of the user distribution, each 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 user is assigned a random number between 1 and 255 for
each possible throughput transition. When this number is lower or equal to the value of the probability, the transition flag for
this throughput transition is set to "True" meaning that this throughput transition can be performed if necessary.
367
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
UL
The number of 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 users with a certain throughput that can be downgraded ( n j TP k Downg ) and upgraded
UL
( n j TP k Upg ) are calculated as follows:
UL UL UL
UL P Upg – k TP k n j TP k
n j TP k Upg = ------------------------------------------------------------
-
255
And
UL UL UL
UL P Downg – k TP k n j TP k
n j TP k Downg = ------------------------------------------------------------------
-
255
The number of users with a certain throughput that can be downgraded or upgraded is
an average. Therefore, if you compute several simulations at once, the average number
of users with a certain throughput that can be downgraded or upgraded will correspond
to the calculated value. But if you check each simulation, this number is different in each
of them.
368
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
UL UL
intra extra UL
Uplink received powers on carrier ic, I tot ic , I tot ic and I inter – carrier ic , at base station Sj are initialised to 0 W
(no connected mobile).
UL
UL I tot S j ic
X k S j ic = -------------------------
- = 0
UL
N tot S j ic
For each transmitter Sj containing Mi in its calculation area and working on the main frequency band supported by the Mi’s
terminal (i.e. either f1 for a single frequency band network, or f1, f2 or f3 for a multi-band terminal with the configuration 1,
or f1 for a multi-band terminal with the configuration 2).
BTS P c Sj M i ic
Calculation of Q pilot Sj ic M i = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
k DL DL DL DL Term
P tot Sj ic + I extra ic + I inter – carrier ic + I inter – techno log y ic + N 0
For each carrier ic, selection of the transmitter with the highest Q pilot Sj M i ic , S BS ic M i .
k
Rejection of bad candidate cells if the pilot is not received or if the uplink load factor is exceeded during the admission load
control (if simulation respects a loading factor constraint and Mb was not connected in previous iteration)
pilot
If Q pilot S BS M i ic Q req then (SBS,ic) is rejected by Mi
k
UL UL
If X k S BS ic X max , then (SBS,ic) is rejected by Mi
Else
Keep (SBS,ic) as good candidate cell
For multi-band terminals with the configuration 1 or terminals working on one frequency band only, if no good candidate cell
has been selected, Mi has failed to be connected to the network and is rejected.
For multi-band terminals with the configuration 2, if no good candidate cell has been selected, try to connect Mi to
transmitters txi containing Mi in their calculation area and working on the secondary frequency band supported by the Mi’s
terminal (i.e. f2). If no good candidate cell has been selected, try to connect Mi to transmitters txi containing Mi in their
369
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
calculation area and working on the third frequency band supported by the Mi’s terminal (i.e. f3). If no good candidate cell
has been selected, Mi has failed to be connected to the network and is rejected.
Determination of the best carrier, icBS.
If a given carrier is specified for the service requested by Mi
Else the carrier selection mode defined for the site equipment is considered.
If carrier selection mode is “Min. UL Load Factor”
UL
ic BS M i is the cell with the lowest X k S BS ic
Endif
Determination of the best serving cell, (SBS,icBS).
max
(S BS,ic BS) k M i is the best serving cell ( BestCell k M i ) and its pilot quality is Q pilot M i .
k
In the following lines, we will consider ic as the carrier used by the best serving cell.
For each station Sj containing Mi in its calculation area, using ic, and if neighbours are used, neighbour of BestCell k M i
BTS P c M i S j
Calculation of Q pilot M i S j ic = -------------------------------------------------
-
DL
k
I 0 ic
EndFor
req
Calculation of the required power for Mi, P term M i ic k
FCH – U L
UL term P b M i S j ic – UL
- G FCH
Q FCH M i S j ic k = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- p Service
UL FCH – U L SCH – U L
N tot ic – 1 – F MUD term P b M i S j ic + P b M i S j ic
370
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
SCH – U L
UL term P b M i S j ic – UL
- G SCH
Q SCH M i S j ic k = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- p Service
UL FCH – U L SCH – U L
N tot ic – 1 – F MUD term P b M i S j ic + P b M i S j ic
SCH –U L
UL term P b M i S j ic – UL
- G SCH
Q SCH M i S j ic k = -------------------------------------------------------------- p Service
UL
N tot ic
End For
If (Mi is not in handoff)
UL UL UL UL
Q FCH M i = Q FCH M i S j ic k and Q SCH M i = Q SCH M i S j ic k
k k
UL UL UL
Q FCH M i = f rake efficiency Q FCH M i S j ic k
k
S j ActiveSet
UL UL UL
Q SCH M i = f rake efficiency Q SCH M i S j ic k
k
S ActiveSet
j
UL UL UL
Q SCH M i = G macro – diversity 2 links Max Q SCH M i S j ic k
k S j ActiveSet
UL UL UL
Q SCH M i = G macro – diversity 3 links Max Q SCH M i S j ic k
k S j ActiveSet
Q FCH M i = Max f rake efficiency ic G macro – diversity 2 links
UL UL UL UL UL
Q FCH ic Q FCH
k
i AS ActiveSet other site
(same site)
Q SCH M i = Max f rake efficiency ic G macro – diversity 2 links
UL UL UL UL UL
Q SCH ic Q SCH
k
i ActiveSet other site
AS
(same site)
EndIf
UL
FCH – r eq Q req Service M i Term M i Mobility M i FCH – r eq
P term - P FCH
M i ic k = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- term M i ic k – 1
UL
Q FCH M i
k
UL
SCH – r eq Q req Service Mi Term M i Mobility M i SCH_rate_multiple SCH – r eq
P term - P SCH
M i ic k = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- term M i ic k – 1
UL
Q SCH M i
k
371
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
req min
If P term M i ic k P term M i then
min
FCH – r eq P term M i S j – r eq
P term - P FCH
M i ic k = ------------------------------ term M i ic k
req
P term M i k
min
SCH – r eq P term M i S j – r eq
P term - P SCH
M i ic k = ------------------------------ term M i ic k
req
P term M i k
EndIf
FCH – r eq max
If P term M i ic k P term M i then Mi cannot select any station and its active set is cleared
req max
If P term M i ic k P term M i and Mi uses SCH then:
SCH
SCH TP P – UL Service M i
TP P – UL Service M i -----------------------------------------------------
-
2
SCH – r eq
SCH – r eq P term M i ic UL
Q req Service M i Term M i Mobility M i TP P – UL Service Mi SCH
SCH
P term M i ic k = -----------------------------------------k ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
2 UL
Q Service M Term M Mobility M TP
SCH
Service M 2
req i i i P – UL i SCH
EndWhile
req max
If P term M i ic k P term M i then Mi will not use SCH
Endif
Endif
If the required number of channel elements exceeds the available quantity in the site of Sj (Best server of Mi) and Mi uses SCH
then:
Downgrading the service SCH throughput:
Max SCH FCH
While N CE –U L M i N CE –U L S j and TP P – UL Service M i TP P – UL Service M i 2
SCH
SCH TP P – UL Service M i
TP P – UL Service M i -----------------------------------------------------
-
2
SCH
SCH N CE –U L M i k
N CE –U L M i k = -----------------------------
-
2
SCH – r eq SCH – UL
SCH – r eq P term M i ic Q req Service M i Term M i Mobility M i TP P – UL Service Mi
SCH
P term M i ic k = -----------------------------------------k --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SCH – UL
2 Q Service M Term M Mobility M TP
SCH
Service M 2
req i i i P – UL i
SCH FCH
N CE –U L M i k = N CE –U L M i k + N CE –U L M i k
EndWhile
Endif
372
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
min
FCH – D L P FCH Service M i
Pb M i S j ic = ----------------------------------------------
L T M i S j
FCH – D L
DL BTS P b M i S j – DL
Q FCH M i - G FCH
S j ic k = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- p Service M i
DL DL
N tot ic – 1 – F ortho BTS P b M i S j ic
SCH – D L
DL BTS P b M i S j – DL
- G SCH
Q SCH M i S j ic k = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- p Service Mi
DL DL
N tot ic – 1 – F ortho BTS P b M i S j ic
EndIf
End For
Recombination of the first f active set links (f is the number of fingers of the Mi terminal): only quality levels from the first f
cells (Sf,ic) of active set are recombined.
DL DL DL
Q FCH M i = f rake efficiency Q FCH M i S j ic k
k
S f ActiveSet FCH
DL DL DL
Q SCH M i = f rake efficiency Q SCH M i S j ic k
k
S f ActiveSet SCH
Do
For each cell (Sj,ic) in Mi FCH active set
Calculation of the required power for DL traffic channel between (Sj,ic) and Mi:
DL FCH
req Q req Service M i Term M i Mobility M i TP P – DL Service M i FCH
- P min
P FCH M i S j ic k = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ FCH Service M i
DL
Q FCH M i
k
req max
If P FCH M i S j ic k P FCH Service M i then S j ic is excluded from Mi active set
DL
Recalculation of a decreased Q req
Downgrading the service SCH throughput (only for (Sj,ic) best server cell of Mi):
req max SCH
While P SCH M i S j ic k P SCH Service M i TP P – DL Service M i
373
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
SCH
SCH TP P – DL Service M i
TP P – DL Service M i = -----------------------------------------------------
2
req DL SCH
req P SCH M i S j ic k Q req Service M i Term M i Mobility M i TPP – DL Service M i SCH
P SCH M i S j ic k = -------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
2 DL
Q Service M Term M Mobility M TP
SCH
Service M 2
req i i i P – DL i SCH
EndWhile
req max req
If P SCH M i S j ic k P SCH Service M i or P tx S j ic k + P tch M i S j ic k P max S j ic then Mi will not use SCH
Endif
Max SCH FCH
While N CE –D L M i N CE –D L S j and TP P – DL Service M i TP P – DL Service Mi 2
SCH
SCH TP P – DL Service M i
TP P – DL Service M i = -----------------------------------------------------
2
SCH
SCH N CE –D L M i k
N CE –D L M i k = -----------------------------
-
2
req DL SCH
req P SCH M i S j ic k Q req Service M i Term M i Mobility M i TPP – DL Service M i SCH
P SCH M i S j ic k = -------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
2 DL
Q Service M Term M Mobility M TP
SCH
Service M 2
req i i i P – DL i SCH
FCH SCH
N CE –D L M i k = N CE –D L M i k + N CE –D L M i k
EndWhile
Max
If N CE –D L M i N CE –D L S j then Mi will not use SCH
Endif
Max SCH FCH
While N Codes M i N Codes S j ic and TP P – DL Service M i TP P – DL Service Mi 2
SCH
SCH TP P – DL Service M i
TP P – DL Service M i = -----------------------------------------------------
2
SCH
SCH N Codes M i k
N Codes M i k = ----------------------------
-
2
req DL SCH
req P SCH M i S j ic k Q req Service M i Term M i Mobility M i TPP – DL Service M i SCH
P SCH M i S j ic k = -------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
2 DL
Q Service M Term M Mobility M TP
SCH
Service M 2
req i i i P – DL i SCH
FCH SCH
N Codes M i k = N Codes M i k + N Codes M i k
EndWhile
Max
If N Codes M i N Codes S j ic then Mi will not use SCH
Endif
Endif
EndFor
Recombination of the first f active set links (f is the number of fingers of the Mi terminal): only quality levels from the first f
cells (Sf,ic) of active set are recombined.
DL DL DL
Q FCH M i = f rake efficiency Q FCH M i S f ic k
k
S f ActiveSet FCH
374
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
DL DL DL
Q SCH M i = f rake efficiency Q SCH M i S f ic k
k
S ActiveSet SCH
f
DL DL
While Q k M i Q req Service M i Mobility M i and Mi FCH active set is not empty
DL DL
And Q k M i Q req Service M i Mobility M i (if SCH active set is not empty)
Endif
Update of interference on active mobiles only (old contributions of mobiles and stations are replaced by the new ones)
For each cell (Sj,ic)
UL
Update of N tot S j ic
EndFor
For each mobile Mi
DL
Update of N tot ic
EndFor
Control of Radio Resource Limits (Walsh Codes, Cell Power and Site Channel Elements)
P tx S j ic DL
While -------------------------k %Power max
P max
req
Rejection of mobile with highest P tch S j M b ic k for the lowest service priority
EndWhile
EndFor
For each site Nl
DL
If %Power max P max – P tx S i ic k 0
S i ic
Si Nl
Then, the power unused by the cells (Si,ic) of the site can be allocated to cells (Sj,ic)
Sort of all the rejected mobiles by priority in a descending order and by simulation rank in a descending order
For the first mobile Mb of the list ( M b L rejected N l )
req DL
If P tx S j ic k + P tch S j M b ic k %Power max P max + M Pooling S j ic
Mb is reconnected
EndIf
EndFor
EndIf
EndFor
For each cell (Sj,ic)
Max
While N Codes S j ic k N Codes S j ic
375
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
req
Rejection of mobile with highest P tch M i S j k for the lowest service priority
Max
While N CE – UL N I k N CE – UL N I
req
Rejection of mobile with highest P term M i ic k for the lowest service priority
EndFor
UL UL
For each cell (Sj,ic) with X S j ic X max
P tx ic k – P tx ic k – 1 DL DL
N user ic k – N user ic k – 1
DL = max int ma x ------------------------------------------------- 100 int ma x ------------------------------------------------------------ 100
Stations P tx ic k Stations
N
DL
ic
user k
UL UL
I tot ic k – I tot ic k – 1 UL UL
N user ic k – N user ic k – 1
UL = max int ma x -------------------------------------------------- 100 int ma x ------------------------------------------------------------ 100
Stations UL
I ic Stations N
UL
ic
tot k user k
1st case: Between two successive iterations, UL and DL are lower ( ) than their respective thresholds (defined when
creating a simulation).
The simulation has reached convergence.
Example: Let us assume that the maximum number of iterations is 100, UL and DL convergence thresholds are set to 5. If
UL 5 and DL 5 between the 4th and the 5th iteration, Atoll stops the algorithm after the 5th iteration. Convergence has
been achieved.
2nd case: After 30 iterations, UL or/and DL are still higher than their respective thresholds and from the 30th iteration, UL
or/and DL do not decrease during the next 15 successive iterations.
1. After the 30th iteration, UL and/or DL equal 100 and do not decrease during the next 15 successive iterations: Atoll stops
the algorithm at the 46th iteration. Convergence has not been achieved.
2. After the 30th iteration, UL and/or DL equal 80, they start decreasing slowly until the 40th iteration (without going under
the thresholds) and then do not change during the next 15 successive iterations: Atoll stops the algorithm at the 56th iteration
without achieving convergence.
376
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
In a CDMA2000 1xEV-DO system, power control is performed in the uplink only. In the downlink, the transmitter transmits at
the full power (Pmax) when a connection is established. Instead of power control, there is a data rate control based on the C/
I ratio calculated at the mobile. For each distribution of users, Atoll simulates the power control mechanism for the UL and
the data rate control for the DL.
The simulation uses an iterative algorithm, where in each iteration, all the 1xEV-DO data service users selected during the user
distribution generation (1st step) try to connect to network active transmitters with a calculation area. Atoll considers the
guaranteed bit rate service users first, in the order established during the generation of the user distribution, and then, it
processes the variable bit rate service users, in the order established during the generation of the user distribution.
The process is repeated from iteration to iteration until convergence is achieved. The algorithm steps are detailed below.
Ec UL
In the algorithm, ----- is the minimum pilot quality level required in the uplink to operate 1xEV-DO Rev. 0. This
N t min – Rev0
threshold depends on the user mobility type and is defined in the Mobility parameters table.
Ec
----
UL
-
N t min – RevB is the minimum pilot quality level required in the uplink to operate EV-DO multi-carrier. This threshold is
defined in the Transmitter properties dialogue.
E UL
For 1xEV-DO Rev. A and Rev. B users, the value of ----c- depends on the user requested throughput. This throughput can
N t min
be obtained by using a certain uplink 1xEV-DO radio bearer ( Index UL – Bearer ) in a certain number of subframes ( n SF ).
Ec
----
UL
- is the value defined in the 1xEV-DO Radio Bearer Selection (Uplink) table for the combination (radio bearer Index,
N t min
377
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
mobility and number of subframe) providing the user requested throughput. Two values are available for this parameter, one
when the service uplink mode is "Low Latency" and another one for high capacity services.
All variables are described in Definitions and formulas part (see "Definitions and Formulas" on page 340).
The algorithm applies to single frequency band networks and to multi-band networks (dual-band and tri-band networks).
Multi-band terminals can have the following configurations:
• Configuration 1: The terminal can work on f1, f2 and f3 without any priority (select "All" as main frequency band
in the terminal property dialogue).
• Configuration 2: The terminal can work on f1, f2 and f3 but f1 has a higher priority (select "f1" as main frequency
band, "f2" as secondary frequency band and "f3" as third frequency band in the terminal property dialogue).
For each mobile (Mi), Atoll only considers the cells (Sj,ic) for which the pilot RSCP exceeds the minimum pilot RSCP:
P c Sj M i ic b pilot RSCP min Sj ic .
For each transmitter Sj containing Mi in its calculation area and working on the main frequency band supported by the Mi’s
terminal (i.e. either f1 for a single frequency band network, or f1, f2 or f3 for a multi-band terminal with the configuration 1,
or f1 for a multi-band terminal with the configuration 2).
BTS P c Sj M i ic ,b pilot
Calculation of Q pilot Sj ic M i = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
k DL DL DL Term
P tot Sj ic ,b pilot + I extra ic ,b pilot + I inter – carrier ic ,b pilot + N 0
For each carrier ic, selection of the transmitter with the highest Q pilot Sj M i ic , S BS ic M i .
k
Rejection of bad candidate cells if the pilot is not received or if the uplink load factor is exceeded during the admission load
control (if simulation respects a loading factor constraint and Mb was not connected in previous iteration)
pilot
If Q pilot S BS M i ic Q req then (SBS,ic) is rejected by Mi
k
UL UL
If X k S BS ic X max , then (SBS,ic) is rejected by Mi
Else
Keep (SBS,ic) as good candidate cell
For multi-band terminals with the configuration 1 or terminals working on one frequency band only, if no good candidate cell
has been selected, Mi has failed to be connected to the network and is rejected.
For multi-band terminals with the configuration 2, if no good candidate cell has been selected, try to connect Mi to
transmitters txi containing Mi in their calculation area and working on the secondary frequency band supported by the Mi’s
terminal (i.e. f2). If no good candidate cell has been selected, try to connect Mi to transmitters txi containing Mi in their
calculation area and working on the third frequency band supported by the Mi’s terminal (i.e. f3). If no good candidate cell
has been selected, Mi has failed to be connected to the network and is rejected.
Determination of the best carrier, icBS.
If a given carrier is specified for the service requested by Mi
Else the carrier selection mode defined for the site equipment is considered.
If carrier selection mode is “Min. UL Load Factor”
UL
ic BS M i is the cell with the lowest X k S BS ic
378
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
Endif
Determination of the best serving cell, (SBS,icBS).
max
(S BS,ic BS) k M i is the best serving cell ( BestCell k M i ) and its pilot quality is Q pilot M i .
k
In the following lines, we will consider ic as the carrier used by the best serving cell.
For each station Sj containing Mi in its calculation area, using ic, and if neighbours are used, neighbour of SBS(Mi)
DL
BTS P tot M i S j ic b pilot
Calculation of Q pilot M i S j ic = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
DL
k
I 0 ic b pilot
EndFor
Determination of the Sub-active Sets of a EVDO Multi-carrier User
For multi-carrier EV-DO Rev.B service users with a 1xEV-DO Rev. B capable terminal, calculation of the quality level received
by the best serving cell (SBS,ic)
max
Ec
----
UL term P term M i
-
N t S BS ic = ------------------------------------------
-
UL
L T N tot S BS ic
E c UL E c UL
If ----- S BS ic ----- S BS then EV-DO multi-carrier is not activated.
Nt N t min
For each transmitter Sj containing Mi in its calculation area and using other EV-DO carriers, icn (either icn belongs to f1 for a
single frequency band network, or it belongs to f1, f2 or f3 for a multi-band terminal)
Calculation of Q pilot Sj ic n M i
k
Ranking of carriers, icn,according to Q pilot Sj ic n M i , from the highest to the lowest value.
k
Determination of the best transmitter of the sub-active set, based on the received pilot quality, Q pilot Sj ic n M i .
k
Determination of the other transmitters of the sub-active set, based on the received pilot quality, Q pilot Sj ic n M i .
k
Calculation of the quality level received by the best serving cell (SBS,icn)
max
Ec
----
UL term P term M i
- S BS ic n = ------------------------------------------
-
N t UL
L T N tot S BS ic n
379
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
E UL E UL
If ----c- S BS ic n ----c- S BS , then no sub-active set is associated with icn
N t N t min
If the user terminal supports the ’Locked’ mode, analysis of the sub-active set
If a transmitter of the studied sub-active set does not belong to the sub-active set associated with the best carrier, then it is
removed.
If the studied sub-active set does not contain the same transmitters as the sub-active set associated with the best carrier, then
the studied sub-active set is removed.
EndIf
Endwhile
EndFor
req
Calculation of the required power for Mi, P term M i ic k
For each cell (Sj,ic) present in the Mi active set or sub-active set
Calculation of quality level on Mi traffic channel at (Sj,ic), with the minimum power allowed on traffic channel for the Mi
service
req
UL P term M i ic k – 1
P b M i S j ic = ---------------------------------------
-
L T M i S j
UL
UL term P b M i S j ic
- G UL
Q M i S j ic k = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- p Service
UL Tx UL
N tot ic – 1 – F MUD term P b M i S j ic
End For
If (Mi is not in handoff)
UL UL
Q total M i = Q M i S j ic
k
UL UL UL
Q total M i = f rake efficiency Q M i S j ic k
k
S j ActiveSet
Q total M i = Max f rake efficiency G UL
UL UL UL UL
Q M i S j ic k Q M i S j ic k macro – diversity 2 links
k
i AS ActiveSet othersite
(same site)
EndIf
UL
req Q req Service M i Term M i Mobility M i
- P req
P term M i ic k = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- term M i ic k – 1
UL
Q total M i
k
380
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
If Mi is a 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 service user, determination of the peak throughput from the graph (Peak throughput=f(C/I)) specified
for the mobility type of Mi
E
TP max – DL M i S k = f ----c- M i S k ic b pilot
Nt
If Mi is a 1xEV-DO Rev. A service user, selection of the downlink 1xEV-DO radio bearer ( Index DL – Bearer ): Index DL – Bearer
Ec Ec DL
where ----- M i S k ic b pilot ----- Index DL – Bearer
Nt Nt min
If Mi is a 1xEV-DO Rev. B service user, selection of the downlink 1xEV-DO radio bearer ( Index DL – Bearer ): Index DL – Bearer
E E DL
where ----c- M i S k ic b pilot ----c- Index DL – Bearer and the modulation scheme is supported by the terminal.
Nt Nt min
DL
TP P – R LC Index DL – Bearer
Determination of the peak throughput: TP max – DL M i S k = ------------------------------------------------------------
-
n TS Index DL – Bearer
DL
TP A M i S k = TP max – DL M i S k f TP – Scaling Service Mi – TP Offset Service Mi
UL
Determination of the uplink throughput due to TCP acknowledgements, TP TCP – ACK M i S k from the graph (UL Thr due to
TCP=f(DL Thr) specified for the service of Mi
UL DL
TP TCP – ACK M i S k = f TP A M i S k
UL UL UL
Determination of the nearest lower and higher supported throughputs ( TP low and TPhigh ) for TP TCP – ACK M i S k
UL UL UL UL UL UL
For TPlow and TP high , calculation of CI req TP low and CI req TP high
E UL
CI req = ----c-
UL
1 + G DRC + G TCH for DO Rev.0 terminals
N t min
And
E UL
CI req = ----c-
UL
1 + G DRC + G TCH + G RRI + G Auxiliary – pilot for DO Rev.A and DO Rev.B terminals
N t min
EndFor
UL UL UL UL UL UL
Linear interpolation of CI req TP TCP – ACK between CI req TP low and CI req TP high
UL UL UL UL UL
CI req = CI req TP + CI req TP TCP – ACK
UL UL W
Q req = CI req -----------------------------------------------
UL UL
-
TP + TPTCP – ACK
EndIf
381
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
And
UL
TP Service M i 9.6kbps for 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 users,
UL
TP Service M i 4.8kbps for (1xEV-DO Rev. A - Variable bit rate) service users,
UL
TP Service M i 4.8kbps for single-carrier 1xEV-DO Rev. B service users,
UL
TP Service M i TPD min – UL Service M i for (1xEV-DO Rev. A - Guaranteed bit rate) service users,
req
req P term M i ic k
- TP UL
P term M i ic k = ---------------------------------------------- low Service M i
UL
( TP low Service M i is the nearest lower supported
UL
TP Service M i
throughput)
For 1xEV-DO Rev. 0, (1xEV-DO Rev. A - Variable bit rate) and single-carrier 1xEV-DO Rev. B service users,
UL UL
TP Service M i = TP low Service M i
UL
For (1xEV-DO Rev. A - Guaranteed bit rate) service users, TP Service M i = TPD min – UL Service M i
EndWhile
req max
If P term M i ic k P term M i then Mi is rejected
For 1xEV-DO Rev. 0, (1xEV-DO Rev. A - Variable bit rate) and single-carrier 1xEV-DO Rev. B service users,
req
P term M i ic = P term M i ic k
req
For (1xEV-DO Rev. A - Guaranteed bit rate) service users, P term M i ic = P term M i ic k C UL – Bearer
Endif
Endif
For multi-carrier 1xEV-DO Rev. B service users, load balancing between carriers is performed. The available terminal power is
shared between each carrier as follows:
The maximum terminal power is allocated to the best carrier ( ic 1 ).
UL
Calculation of the traffic channel throughput ( TP Service M i ic 1 )
UL
Downgrading the traffic channel throughput ( TP Service M i ic 1 )
req max UL
While P term M i ic 1 k P term M i and TP Service M i ic 1 153 6kbps
req
req P term M i ic 1 k
- TP UL
P term M i ic 1 k = -------------------------------------------------------------
UL
low Service M i ( TP low Service M i is the nearest lower supported
UL
TP Service M i ic 1
throughput)
UL UL
TP Service M i ic 1 = TP low Service M i
EndWhile
req max
If P term M i ic 1 k P term M i , then Mi is not connected to cells of the sub-active set associated with ic 1 .
382
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
Else the remaining terminal power is allocated to the second best carrier ( ic 2 ) and the traffic channel throughput
UL
TP Service M i ic 2 is calculated.
The same process is repeated for the other carriers in Mi ’s active set as long as the remaining terminal power is sufficient to
obtain the lowest bearer allowed.
If no sub-active set can be used, then Mi is rejected.
Endif
UL
Calculation of TP Service M i for each combination of carriers
TP
UL UL
TP Service M i = Service M i ic where n corresponds to the number of carriers in the combination.
ic = 1
UL
Selection of the configuration providing the highest throughput, Max TP Service M i .
UL UL UL
If Max TP Service M i TP high Service M i ( TP high Service M i is the nearest supported throughput higher than
the requested throughput)
Downgrading the traffic channel throughput
UL UL UL
While Max TP Service M i TP high Service M i and TP Service M i ic 153 6kbps
EndWhile
EndIf
Endfor
Update of interference on active mobiles only (old contributions of mobiles and stations are replaced by the new ones)
For each cell (Sj,ic)
UL
Update of N tot S j ic
EndFor
Control of Radio Resource Limits (Number of EVDO users, MAC Indices and Site Channel Elements)
UL UL UL
For each cell (Sj,ic) with NR S j ic NR threshold S j ic + NRthreshold S j ic
UL UL UL
While NR S j ic NR threshold S j ic + NRthreshold S j ic and there is at least one mobile that can be downgraded
383
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
Downgrading the traffic channel throughput for all 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 mobiles for which the throughput transition flag is set to
"True".
UL
Update of N tot S j ic
Endwhile
UL UL UL
For each cell (Sj,ic) with NR S j ic NR threshold S j ic – NRthreshold S j ic
UL UL UL
While NR S j ic NR threshold S j ic – NRthreshold S j ic and there is at least one mobile that can be upgraded
Upgrading the traffic channel throughput for all 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 mobiles for which the throughput transition flag is set to
"True". (only 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 mobiles which have not been downgraded can be upgraded. In addition, the upgraded
throughput cannot exceed the initial user throughput drawn by the Monte-Carlo algorithm. This means that only mobiles
downgraded during the uplink power control step can be upgraded).
UL
Update of N tot S j ic
Endwhile
UL UL
For each cell (Sj,ic) with X S j ic X max
EndFor
EndFor
Calculation of the maximum throughput supplied to Mi, TP max – DL
For the Mi’s best server cell (Sk,ic) (in the active set or each sub-active set)
Calculation of pilot quality level at Mi
DL
E P tot M i S k ic b pilot
----c- M i S k ic b pilot = --------------------------------------------------
-
Nt DL
N tot ic b pilot
If Mi is a 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 service user, determination of the peak throughput from the graph (Peak throughput=f(C/I)) specified
for the mobility type of Mi
E
TP max – DL M i S k = f ----c- M i S k ic b pilot
Nt
If Mi is a 1xEV-DO Rev. A service user, selection of the downlink 1xEV-DO radio bearer ( Index DL – Bearer ) for which
E E DL
----c- M i S k ic b pilot ----c- Index DL – Bearer
Nt Nt min
384
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
If Mi is a 1xEV-DO Rev. B service user, selection of the downlink 1xEV-DO radio bearer ( Index DL – Bearer ) for which
E E DL
----c- M i S k ic b pilot ----c- Index DL – Bearer and the modulation is supported by Mi’s terminal.
Nt Nt min
DL
If Mi is a (1xEV-DO Rev. A - Guaranteed bit rate) service user and TP P – R LC Index DL – Bearer TPD min – DL Service M i , Mi is
rejected.
DL
TP P –R LC Index DL – Bearer
Determination of the peak throughput: TP max – DL M i S k ic = ------------------------------------------------------------
-
n TS
For 1xEV-DO Rev. 0, (1xEV-DO Rev. A - Variable bit rate) and single-carrier 1xEV-DO Rev. B service users,
TP max – DL M i = TP max – DL M i S k ic
For (1xEV-DO Rev. A - Guaranteed bit rate) service users, TP max – DL M i = TPD min – DL Service M i
DL
For multi-carrier 1xEV-DO Rev. B service users, TP max – DL M i = TP max – DL max M i S k ic
S k ic
For (1xEV-DO Rev. A - Guaranteed bit rate) service users, calculation of C DL – Bearer
EndFor
DL
Calculation of the average cell throughput, TP av
G MU N mobiles S j ic
TP max – DL M i S j ic
Mi NVBR –m obiles Sj ic
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- 1 – C DL – Bearer M k S j ic
N VBR –m obiles S j ic
M k N GBR – m obiles Sj ic
DL
TP av S j ic =
TPD min – DL M k
Mk NGBR – m obiles Sj ic
+ ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
N GBR – m obiles j S ic C DL – Bearer M k S j ic
M N S ic
k GBR – m obiles j
N mobiles
1 – ER S ic 1 – TS
DRC j BCMCS S j ic – TS EVDO – CCH S j ic + TP BCMCS S j ic TS BCMCS S j ic
If N mobiles S j ic = 1 , then G MU = 1
Else if N mobiles S j ic 1 , G MU is determined from the graph (MUG table=f(nb users)) specified for (Sj,ic). If the transmitter
supports the multi-carrier EV-DO mode, G MU is determined from the graph (MUG table=f(nb users)) specified for Sj.
EndIf
EndFor
UL UL
I tot ic k – I tot ic k – 1 UL UL
N user ic k – N user ic k – 1
UL = max int ma x -------------------------------------------------- 100 int ma x ------------------------------------------------------------ 100
Stations UL
I ic Stations
N
UL
ic
tot k user k
1st case: Between two successive iterations, UL is lower ( ) than the threshold (defined when creating a simulation).
385
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
2nd case: After 30 iterations, UL is still higher than the threshold and from the 30th iteration, UL does not decrease during
the next 15 successive iterations.
The simulation has not reached convergence (specific divergence symbol).
Examples: Let us assume that the maximum number of iterations is 100, UL convergence threshold is set to 5.
1. After the 30th iteration, UL equals 100 and do not decrease during the next 15 successive iterations: Atoll stops the
algorithm at the 46th iteration. Convergence has not been achieved.
2. After the 30th iteration, UL equals 80, it starts decreasing slowly until the 40th iteration (without going under the
threshold) and then does not change during the next 15 successive iterations: Atoll stops the algorithm at the 56th iteration
without achieving convergence.
5.4.3 Appendices
5.4.3.1 Admission Control
During admission control, Atoll calculates the uplink load factor of a considered cell assuming the mobile concerned is
connected with it. Here, activity status assigned to users is not taken into account. So even if the mobile is not active on UL,
it can be rejected due to cell load saturation. To calculate the cell UL load factor, either Atoll takes into account the mobile
power determined during power control if mobile was connected in previous iteration, or it estimates a load rise due to the
UL
mobile and adds it to the current load. The load rise ( X ) is calculated as follows:
UL 1
X = -------------------------------------
-
W
1 + --------------------------- -
UL UL
Q req TP
Figure 5.3: Walsh Code Tree Indices (Not Walsh Code Numbers)
128 128-bit-length Walsh codes per cell are available in CDMA2000 documents.
386
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
During the resource control, Atoll determines the number of 128-bit-length Walsh codes that will be consumed by each cell.
Therefore, it allocates :
• A code with the longest length (i.e. a 128 bit-length code) per common channel for each cell. The number of common
channels per cell corresponds to the value defined for the DL overhead resources for common channels per cell
parameter available in the site equipment properties.
• Two 128 bit-length codes per cell-receiver link for FCH in RC1, RC2, RC3 or RC5 and only one for FCH in RC4.
• The number of 128 bit-length codes to be allocated per cell-receiver link for SCH (in case SCH is supported by the user
Walsh codes
radio configuration), N 128 bits , is determined as follows:
And
Walsh codes SCH
N 128 bits = TPF DL for RC4.
Where
SCH
TPF DL is the SCH throughput factor.
The Walsh code allocation follows the “Buddy” algorithm, which guarantees that:
• If a k-length Walsh code is used, all of its children with lengths 2k, 4k, …, cannot be used as they are not orthogonal.
• If a k-length Walsh code is used, all of its ancestors with lengths k/2, k/4, …, cannot be used as they are not orthogonal.
• The Walsh code allocation follows the mobile connection order (mobile order in the
Mobiles tab).
• The Walsh code and channel element management is dealt with differently in case of
“softer” handoff. Atoll allocates Walsh codes for each transmitter-receiver link while
it assigns channel elements globally to a site.
Overhead
• N CE – UL channel elements for control channels (Pilot channel),
FCH SCH
• N CE – UL 1 + TPF UL per cell-receiver link, for TCH (TCH correspond to Traffic channels i.e. FCH and SCH).
Therefore, the number of channel elements required on uplink at the site level, N CE – UL N I , is:
N CE – UL N I = NCE – UL j
j NI
In the downlink, Atoll consumes N CE – DL j channel elements for each cell j on a site NI. This figure includes:
Overhead
• N CE – DL channel elements for control channels (Pilot channel, Synchronisation channel, Paging channel),
FCH SCH
• N CE – DL 1 + TPF DL per cell-receiver link, for TCH (TCH correspond to Traffic channels i.e. FCH and SCH).
Therefore, the number of channel elements required on downlink at the site level, N CE – DL N I , is:
N CE – DL N I = NCE – DL j
j NI
In case of “softer” handover (the mobile has several links with co-site cells), Atoll
allocates channel elements for the best serving cell-mobile link only.
387
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
In the uplink, Atoll consumes N CE – UL j channel elements for each cell j on a site NI. This figure includes:
• 2 channel elements for control channels (Pilot channel, Data Rate Control channel, etc ). This value is fixed and hard-
coded.
TCH
• N CE – UL per cell-receiver link, for (EV-DO - Variable bit rate) service users.
TCH
• N CE – UL C UL – Bearer per cell-receiver link, for (EV-DO - Guaranteed bit rate) service users.
Therefore, the number of channel elements required on uplink at the site level, N CE – UL N I , is:
N CE – UL N I = NCE – UL j
j NI
In the downlink, only one user can be served by a cell at a time, so this resource is not limited.
FCH SCH
So, we have CI req = CI req + CI req
In case of soft handoff, required quality is limited to the effective contribution of the transmitter.
Ptch ic
DL ortho
P tx ic = P pilot ic + P sync ic + P paging ic + P SCH ic + P FCH ic = P CCH ic +
tch
where
ortho
P CCH ic = P pilot ic + P sync ic + P paging ic
DL term
I extra ic + I inter – carrier ic + I inter – techno log y ic L T + 1 – F ortho BTS P tx ic + N 0 L T
P tch ic = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
1
----------- + 1 – F ortho BTS
CIreq
where
DL
I intra ic is the total power received at receiver from the cell to which it is connected.
DL
I extra ic is the total power received at receiver from other cells.
388
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
I
extra ic + I inter – carrier ic + I inter – techno log y ic L T
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DL
P tx ic
DL term
+ 1 – F ortho BTS P tx ic + N 0 L T
DL ortho
P tx ic = P CCH ic + -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
1 - + 1 – F
----------
tch ortho BTS
CI req
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I extra ic + I inter – carrier ic + I inter – techno log y ic L T
+ 1 – F ortho BTS
DL
P tx ic
DL tch DL
P tx ic – --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- P tx ic
1
----------- + 1 – F ortho BTS
CI req
term
ortho N0 LT
= P CCH ic +
---------------------------------------------------------------
1
tch ----------- + 1 – F ortho BTS
CI req
term
ortho N0 LT
P CCH ic +
-
--------------------------------------------------------------
1
tch ----------- + 1 – F ortho BTS
DL
CI req
P tx ic = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I extra ic + I inter – carrier ic + I inter – techno log y ic L T
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + 1 – F ortho BTS
DL
P tx ic
1 – -
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1
----------- + 1 – F ortho BTS
tch
CI req
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I extra ic + I inter – carrier ic + I inter – techno log y ic L T
+ 1 – F ortho BTS
P
DL
ic
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DL tx
X =
1 - + 1 – F
tch ---------- ortho BTS
CI req
The downlink load factor represents the signal degradation in relative to the reference interference (thermal noise).
389
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
MultiBandSimu = 0
EndFor
UL
BestCarrier k S j M i is the carrier with the lowest X k S j ic
BTS P c M i S j BestCarrier
Calculation of Q pilot M i S j BestCarrier = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
DL
k
I 0 BestCarrier k S j M i
max
If Q pilot M i S j BestCarrier Q pilot M i
k k
Admission control (If simulation respects a load factor constraint and Mi was not connected in previous iteration).
UL UL
If X k S j BestCarrier k S j M i X max , then Sj is rejected by Mi
Else
max
Q pilot M i = Q pilot M i S j BestCarrier
k k
S BS M i = S j
Endif
EndFor
If no SBS has been selected and Mi’s terminal can work on one frequency band only, Mi has failed to be connected to the
network and is rejected.
If no SBS has been selected and Mi’s terminal can work on another frequency band.
Determination of BestCarrier k Sj M i for each station txj containing Mi in its calculation area and using another frequency
band supported by the Mi’s terminal (i.e. f1, f2 or f3 for a multi-band terminal without any priority on frequency bands, or f2
for a multi-band terminal with f2 as secondary frequency band)
If a given carrier is specified for the service requested by Mi and if it is used by Sj
390
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
EndFor
UL
BestCarrier k S j M i is the carrier with the lowest X k S j ic
BTS P c M i S j BestCarrier
Calculation of Q pilot M i S j BestCarrier = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
DL
k
I 0 BestCarrier k S j M i
max
If Q pilot M i S j BestCarrier Q pilot M i
k k
Admission control (If simulation respects a load factor constraint and Mi was not connected in previous iteration).
UL UL
If X k S j BestCarrier k S j M i X max , then Sj is rejected by Mi
Else
max
Q pilot M i = Q pilot M i S j BestCarrier
k k
S BS M i = S j
Endif
EndFor
If no SBS has been selected and Mi’s terminal can work on two frequency bands only, Mi has failed to be connected to the
network and is rejected.
If no SBS has been selected and Mi’s terminal can work on another frequency band.
Determination of BestCarrier k Sj M i for each station txj containing Mi in its calculation area and using another frequency
band supported by the Mi’s terminal (i.e. f1, f2 or f3 for a multi-band terminal without any priority on frequency bands, or f3
for a multi-band terminal with f3 as third frequency band)
If a given carrier is specified for the service requested by Mi and if it is used by Sj
391
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
EndFor
UL
BestCarrier k S j M i is the carrier with the lowest X k S j ic
BTS P c M i S j BestCarrier
Calculation of Q pilot M i S j BestCarrier = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
DL
k
I 0 BestCarrier k S j M i
max
If Q pilot M i S j BestCarrier Q pilot M i
k k
Admission control (If simulation respects a load factor constraint and Mi was not connected in previous iteration).
UL UL
If X k S j BestCarrier k S j M i X max , then Sj is rejected by Mi
Else
max
Q pilot M i = Q pilot M i S j BestCarrier
k k
S BS M i = S j
Endif
EndFor
If no SBS has been selected, Mi has failed to be connected to the network and is rejected.
5.4.3.5 Radio Bearer Allocation Algorithm for Multi-carrier EVDO Rev.B - Old
Method
Before Atoll 3.2.1, radio bearer allocation for multi-carrier EVDO Rev.B used to be performed by equally sharing the available
terminal power between the carriers.
To switch back to this method, add the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[CDMA]
SharingEquallyPower = 1
UsingPreviousIterationPowerWeight = 1
392
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
2nd case: Analysis based on the best carrier of all frequency bands
Atoll determines the best carrier for each transmitter i which contains the receiver in its calculation area and uses a frequency
band supported by the receiver’s terminal. The best carrier selection depends on the option selected for the site equipment
(UL minimum noise, DL minimum power, random, sequential). Then, Atoll calculates the pilot quality at the receiver from
these transmitters on their best carriers (ic) and defines the best server (on its best carrier).
3rd case: Analysis based on the best carrier of any frequency band (for multi-band terminals with priority defined on frequency
bands only)
The frequency band that can be used is fixed. Atoll determines the best carrier for each transmitter i containing the receiver
in its calculation area and using the selected frequency band. The best carrier selection depends on the option selected for
the site equipment (UL minimum noise, DL minimum power, random, sequential). Then, Atoll calculates the pilot quality at
the receiver from these transmitters on their best carriers (ic) and defines the best server (on its best carrier).
Atoll provides the same outputs in the bar graph and pilot sub-menu whichever the studied network, CDMA2000 1xRTT or
1xEV-DO.
• Ec/I0 (or Q pilot ic ) evaluation
We assume that ic is the best carrier of a transmitter i containing the receiver in its calculation radius.
For CDMA2000 1xRTT users we have,
BTS P c i ic
Q pilot i ic = ---------------------------------------------
DL
I 0 ic
DL DL DL DL DL term
with I 0 ic = P tot i ic + I extra ic + I inter – carrier ic + I inter – techno log y ic + N 0
DL DL DL DL DL term
With I 0 ic b pilot = P tot i ic b pilot + I extra ic b pilot + I inter – carrier ic b pilot + I inter – techno log y ic + N 0
The calculation of Q pilot i ic can be divided into 6 steps explained in the table below.
DL
P pilot i ic P tot i ic b pilot = -----------------------------------
-
P c i ic = -------------------------
- LT
I
LT
I and
P tx i ic b pilot = P max i ic
393
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
We have,
Ptot j ic
DL DL
I extra ic = DL DL
I extra ic b pilot and I inter – carrier ic b pilot calculation
j j i
DL
For each transmitter of the network, P tot j ic is the total power We have,
received at the receiver from the transmitter j on the best carrier ic
of the transmitter i.
Ptot j ic bpilot
DL DL
I extra ic b pilot =
DL P tx j ic
P tot j ic = -------------------- j j i
2nd step
LT
N0 calculation
Tx DL
NF Term K T W NR inter – techno log y
4th step
DL
I 0 ic and Q pilot i ic evaluation based on formulas defined above
DL
G macro – diversity calculation
DL
The macro-diversity gain, G macro – diversity , models the decrease in shadowing margin due to the fact there are several pilot signals at the
mobile.
5th step
DL npaths
G macro – diversity = M Shadowing – Ec Io – M Shadowing –Ec Io
npaths
M Shadowing – Ec Io is the shadowing margin for the mobile receiving n pilot signals (not necessarily from transmitters belonging to the
mobile active set).
Note: This parameter is determined from the fixed cell edge coverage probability and the model standard deviation. When the model
standard deviation is set to 0, the macro-diversity gain equals 0.
394
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
BS will be the one used by other transmitters of active set (when active set size is greater than 1). Pilot is available.
Resulting req
If Q pilot ic Q pilot , no cell (i,ic) can enter the active set. Pilot is unavailable.
Then, pilot qualities at the receiver from transmitters i (other than the best server) on the best carrier of the best server, icBS, are
recalculated to determine the entire receiver active set (when active set is greater than 1). Same formulas and calculation method are
used to update
DL
I 0 ic BS and determine Q pilot i ic BS .
Other cells (i,icBS) in active set must fulfill the following criteria:
pilot
Q pilot i ic BS Q min
i ic BS neighbour list BS ic BS (optional)
For multi-carrier 1xEV-DO Rev.B service users, these results are detailed for each sub-active set. For each carrier, Atoll displays
the thermal noise, I0 (Best server), the pilot quality from the best server and from the other servers of the sub-active set, and
the downlink macro-diversity gain. They are calculated as described above.
• Number of cells in active set
This is a user-defined input in the terminal properties. It corresponds to the active set size.
• Number of fingers
The number of fingers, f, of the rake receiver. This parameter is defined in the terminal properties. It is relevant in CDMA2000
1xRTT only11. This is the maximum number of active set links that the terminal (rake) can combine.
• Thermal noise
395
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
Atoll calculates the traffic channel quality on SCH from each cell (k,icBS). No power control is performed as in simulations.
Here, Atoll determines the downlink traffic channel quality on SCH at the receiver for the maximum traffic channel power per
transmitter allowed on SCH. This value depends on the downlink throughput specified in the analysis. Then, after
combination, the total downlink traffic channel quality on SCH is evaluated and compared with the specified target quality.
• Eb/Nt target on FCH and Eb/Nt target on SCH
DL
Eb/Nt target on FCH ( Q req FCH ) is the downlink traffic data quality target on the fundamental channel (FCH). This value is
user-defined for a given service and terminal.
DL
Eb/Nt target on SCH ( Q req SCH ) is the downlink traffic data quality target on the supplemental channel (SCH). This value is
specified for a given service, terminal and SCH throughput.
• Required transmitter powers on FCH and SCH
req req
The calculation of the required transmitter powers on FCH and SCH ( P FCH and P SCH ) may be divided into three steps.
1st step: Eb/Nt max for the first f (number of fingers) cells of active set
DL DL
Let us assume the following notations: Eb/Nt max on FCH and SCH respectively correspond to Q max FCH and Q max SCH .
And
DL – SCH
DL BTS P b –max k ic BS – SCH
- G DL
Q max k ic BS SCH = -------------------------------------------------------- p
DL
N tot ic BS
max max
DL – FCH P FCH DL – SCH P SCH
With P b k ic BS = ----------
- , P b –max k ic BS = ----------
-
LT LT
k k
DL DL DL DL DL term
And N tot ic BS = I intra ic BS + I extra ic BS + I inter – carrier ic BS + I inter – techno log y ic BS + N 0
Where
max
P FCH is the maximum power allowed on FCH. This parameter is user-defined in the Services table for a certain terminal.
max
P SCH is the maximum power allowed on SCH for the specified downlink throughput. This parameter is user-defined in the
Services table for a certain terminal and SCH throughput.
L T is the total loss between the transmitter i and the receiver.
k
DL
N tot ic BS is the total noise at the receiver on the best carrier of the best server.
With
DL
I intra ic BS = 1 – BTS F ortho P DL k ic
tot BS
And
Ptot j icBS
DL DL
I extra ic BS =
j j k
DL
For each transmitter in the network, P tot ic BS is the total power received at the receiver from this transmitter on icBS.
DL
I inter – carrier ic BS is the inter-carrier interference at the receiver on the best carrier of the best server.
396
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
Ptot j icadj
DL
DL j
I inter – carrier ic BS = txj
----------------------------------------
-
RF ic BS ic adj
RF ic BS ic adj is the interference reduction factor, defined between ic and icadj and set to a value different from 0.
DL
I inter – techno log y ic BS is the inter-technology interference at the receiver on the best carrier of the best server.
Tx
P Transmitted ic i
DL
I inter – techno log y ic BS = -----------------------------------------
Tx Tx m
ni
L total ICP ic ic
i BS
th
ic i is the i interfering carrier of an external transmitter
Tx m
ICPic ic is the inter-technology Channel Protection between the signal transmitted by Tx and received by m assuming the
i BS
2nd step: Calculation of the total traffic channel quality on FCH and SCH
DL
Q MAX FCH is the traffic channel quality on FCH at the receiver on icBS after combining the signal from each cell (k,icBS).
Where
DL
f rake efficiency is the downlink rake efficiency factor defined in Terminal properties.
DL
Q MAX SCH is the traffic channel quality on SCH at the receiver on icBS after combining the signal from each cell (k,icBS).
req req
3rd step: P FCH and P SCH calculation
DL
req Q req FCH
- P max
P FCH = --------------------------------------- FCH
DL
Q MAX ic BS FCH
DL
req Q req SCH
- P max
P SCH = --------------------------------------- SCH
DL
Q MAX ic BS SCH
• Eb/Nt max on FCH for the first f (number of fingers) cells of active set
DL
Let us assume the following notation: Eb/Nt max on FCH corresponds to Q max FCH .
397
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
max
DL – FCH P FCH DL DL DL DL term
With P b –max k ic BS = ----------
- and N tot ic BS = I intra ic BS + I extra ic BS + I inter – carrier ic BS + N 0
LT
k
Where
max
P FCH is the maximum power allowed on FCH. This parameter is user-defined in the Services table for a certain terminal.
DL
N tot ic BS is the total noise at the receiver on the best carrier of the best server.
With
max req
DL
I intra ic BS = 1 – BTS F ortho P DL P FCH – P FCH
tot k ic BS – 1 – BTS max (----------------------------,0)
LT
k
And
Ptot j icBS
DL DL
I extra ic BS =
j j k
DL
For each transmitter in the network, P tot ic BS is the total power received at the receiver from the transmitter on icBS.
DL
I inter – carrier ic BS is the inter-carrier interference at the receiver on the best carrier of the best server.
Ptot j icadj
DL
DL txj j
I inter – carrier ic BS = ----------------------------------------
-
RF ic BS ic adj
RF ic BS ic adj is the interference reduction factor, defined between ic and icadj and set to a value different from 0.
DL
I inter – techno log y ic BS is the inter-technology interference at the receiver on the best carrier of the best server.
Tx
P Transmitted ic i
DL
I inter – techno log y ic BS = -----------------------------------------
Tx Tx m
ni
L total ICP ic ic
i BS
th
ic i is the i interfering carrier of an external transmitter
Tx m
ICP ic ic is the inter-technology Channel Protection between the signal transmitted by Tx and received by m assuming the
i BS
• Eb/Nt max on SCH for the first f (number of fingers) cells of active set
DL
Let us assume the following notation: Eb/Nt max on SCH corresponds to Q max SCH .
max
DL – SCH P SCH
With P b –max k ic BS = ----------
-
LT
k
DL DL DL DL DL term
and N tot ic BS = I intra ic BS + I extra ic BS + I inter – carrier ic BS + I inter – techno log y ic BS + N 0
Where
398
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
max
P SCH is the maximum power allowed on SCH for the specified downlink throughput. This parameter is user-defined in the
Services table for a certain terminal and SCH throughput.
L T is the total loss between the transmitter i and the receiver.
k
DL
N tot ic BS is the total noise at the receiver on the best carrier of the best server.
With
max req
DL
I intra ic BS = 1 – BTS F ortho P DL P SCH – P SCH
tot k ic BS – 1 – BTS max (----------------------------,0)
LT
k
And
Ptot j icBS
DL DL
I extra ic BS =
j j k
DL
For each transmitter in the network, P tot ic BS is the total power received at the receiver from the transmitter on icBS.
DL
I inter – carrier ic BS is the inter-carrier interference at the receiver on the best carrier of the best server.
Ptot j icadj
DL
DL j
I inter – carrier ic BS = txj
----------------------------------------
-
RF ic BS ic adj
RF ic BS ic adj is the interference reduction factor, defined between ic and icadj and set to a value different from 0.
DL
I inter – techno log y ic BS is the inter-technology interference at the receiver on the best carrier of the best server.
Tx
P Transmitted ic i
DL
I inter – techno log y ic BS = -----------------------------------------
Tx Tx m
ni
L total ICP ic ic
i BS
th
ic i is the i interfering carrier of an external transmitter
Tx m
ICPic ic is the inter-technology Channel Protection between the signal transmitted by Tx and received by m assuming the
i BS
Where
DL
f rake efficiency is the downlink rake efficiency factor defined in Terminal properties.
DL
Q MAX SCH is the traffic channel quality on SCH at the receiver on icBS after combining the signal from each cell (k,icBS).
399
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
DL DL
Q MAX ic BS SCH = Q max k ic BS SCH
DL DL
Therefore, the service on the downlink traffic channel is available if Q MAX ic BS FCH Q req FCH and
DL DL
Q MAX ic BS SCH Q req SCH .
DL DL DL
Q eff FCH = min Q MAX FCH Q req FCH
And
DL DL DL
Q eff SCH = min Q MAX SCH Q req SCH
• Downlink soft handover gain on FCH and downlink soft handover gain on SCH
DL DL
G SHO FCH and G SHO SCH respectively correspond to DL soft handover gains on FCH and SCH.
DL
DL Q MAX ic BS FCH
G SHO FCH = --------------------------------------------------------------
-
DL
max Q max k ic BS FCH
k
And
DL
DL Q MAX ic BS SCH
G SHO SCH = --------------------------------------------------------------
-
DL
max Q max k ic BS SCH
k
DL DL
max Q max k ic BS corresponds to the highest Q max k ic BS value.
k
For 1xEV-DO Rev.0 and 1xEV-DO Rev. A users, Atoll displays the following results:
• Required throughput
DL
The required throughput, TP req , is the downlink throughput selected for the analysis.
• Required C/I
For 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 users, the required C/I ( --- ) is determined from the graph “Peak throughput=f(C/I)” defined for the
C
I req
mobility type selected in the analysis. It corresponds to the value read in the graph “Peak throughput=f(C/I) (Rev0)” for the
DL
specified required throughput, TP req .
DL
For 1xEV-DO Rev. A users, the required throughput ( TP req ) is obtained by using a certain downlink transmission format (i.e.
a 1xEV-DO radio bearer ( Index DL – Bearer ) with a certain number of timeslots ( n TS )). It is calculated as follows:
DL
DL TP P – R LC Index DL – Bearer
TP req = ------------------------------------------------------------
-
n TS
400
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
C
--- is the value defined in the 1xEV-DO Radio Bearer Selection (Downlink) table for this downlink transmission format
I req
(radio bearer Index, mobility and number of timeslots). It corresponds to the C/I required to obtain the defined required
DL
throughput, TP req .
• Effective C/I
Ec
Let ----- ic BS b pilot be the effective C/I at the receiver on icBS.
Nt
For the best cell (BS,icBS) of the receiver active set, we have:
E 1
----c- ic BS b pilo t = ------------------------------
-
Nt 1
---------------------- – 1
Q pilot
resulting
Where
pilot DL
Q resulting ic BS = G macro – diversity Q pilot ic BS
BS
• Obtained throughput
DL
For 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 users, the obtained throughput, TP , is determined from the graph “Peak throughput=f(C/I) (Rev0)”
DL
defined for the mobility type selected in the analysis. TP is the value read in the graph “Peak throughput=f(C/I) (Rev0)” for
E
the calculated effective C/I, ----c- ic BS b pilot .
Nt
DL
For 1xEV-DO Rev. A users, the obtained throughput ( TP ) on downlink depends on the downlink transmission format, i.e the
radio bearer index ( Index DL – Bearer ) with the number of timeslots ( n TS ). For the defined mobility type, Atoll selects the
E
downlink transmission format where ----c- ic BS b pilot --- . Then, it determines the downlink obtained throughput as
C
Nt I req
follows:
DL
DL TP P –R LC Index DL – Bearer
TP = ------------------------------------------------------------
-
n TS
DL DL
The traffic data channel in downlink is available if TP TP req .
• Bearer Consumption
For (1xEV-DO Rev. A - Guaranteed bit rate) service users, Atoll calculates the 1xEV-DO bearer consumption.
TPD min – DL
C DL – Bearer = ------------------------------------------------------------
-
DL
TPP –R LC Index DL – Bearer
Where TPD min – DL corresponds to the minimum bit rate required by the service in the downlink.
For single-carrier and multi-carrier 1xEV-DO Rev. B users, Atoll displays the following results:
• Required throughput
DL
The required throughput, TP req , is the downlink throughput selected for the analysis.
• Obtained throughput
The obtained throughput corresponds to the sum of the obtained throughputs on each carrier.
TP
DL DL
TP = ic
ic
DL DL
The traffic data channel on downlink is available if TP TP req .
• For each sub-active set, Atoll indicates the effective C/I and the obtained throughput:
401
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
E
Let ----c- ic b pilot be the effective C/I at the receiver on ic, the carrier associated with the sub-active set.
Nt
For the best cell (BS,ic) of the receiver sub-active set, we have:
pilot
E Q resulting ic
----c- ic b pilot = -----------------------------------------
Nt pilot
– Q resulting ic
Where
pilot DL
Q resulting ic = G macro – diversity Q pilot ic
BS
DL
The obtained throughput ( TP ic ) on downlink depends on the downlink transmission format, i.e the radio bearer index
( Index DL – Bearer ) with the number of timeslots ( n TS ). For the defined mobility type, Atoll selects the downlink transmission
Ec
format where ----- ic b pilot ---
C
and whose modulation scheme is supported by the terminal.
Nt I req
C
---
I req is the value defined in the 1xEV-DO Radio Bearer Selection (Downlink) table for this downlink transmission format
(radio bearer Index, mobility and number of timeslots). It corresponds to the C/I required to obtain the defined required
DL
throughput, R req .
We have:
max max
P term pilot = p P term
Where p is the percentage of the terminal power dedicated to pilot. This parameter is user-defined in the terminal properties.
And
max UL FCH UL
P term FCH Q req FCH TP P – UL AF FCH
- --------------------------------------
------------------------- = ----------------------
max UL SCH
P term SCH Q req SCH TP P – UL
Therefore,
max
max 1 – p P term
P term FCH = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
UL SCH
Q req SCH TP P – UL
1 + --------------------------------------------------------------------
UL FCH UL
Q req FCH TP P – UL AF FCH
And
402
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
max
max 1 – p P term
P term SCH = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
UL FCH UL
Q req FCH TP P – UL AF FCH
1 + --------------------------------------------------------------------
UL SCH
Q req SCH TP P – UL
UL UL
1st step: Evaluation of uplink traffic channel qualities on FCH and SCH, Q max ic BS and Q max ic BS , for each cell
i FCH i SCH
of active set.
For each cell (i,icBS), we have:
UL – FCH
UL term P b –max i ic BS – FCH
- G UL
Q max i ic BS FCH = --------------------------------------------------------- p
UL
N tot i ic BS
And
UL – SCH
UL term P b –max i ic BS – SCH
Q max i ic BS SCH - G UL
= --------------------------------------------------------- p
UL
N tot i ic BS
max max
UL – FCH P term FCH UL – SCH P term SCH
With P b –max i ic BS = ------------------------
- and P b –max i ic BS = ------------------------
-
LT LT
i i
UL
N tot i ic BS is the total noise at the transmitter on the best carrier of the best server. This value is deduced from the cell
UL
uplink load factor X i ic BS .
tx
UL N0
N tot i ic BS = -----------------------------------
-
UL
1 – X i ic BS
tx
N 0 is the transmitter thermal noise.
UL UL
2nd step: Calculation of FCH and SCH total traffic channel qualities at the transmitter on icBS, Q MAX FCH and Q max SCH ,
based on the receiver handover status.
If there is no handoff, we have:
UL UL UL UL
Q MAX ic BS FCH = Q max i ic BS FCH and Q MAX ic BS SCH = Q max i ic BS SCH
And
UL UL UL
Q MAX ic BS SCH = G macro – diversity 2 links max Q max i ic BS SCH
i
UL
G macro – diversity 2 links is the uplink macro-diversity gain. This parameter is determined from the fixed cell edge coverage
probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option “Shadowing taken into account” is not selected
(Prediction properties), Atoll considers the uplink macro-diversity gain defined by the user in Global parameters.
UL UL
max Q max i ic BS corresponds to the highest Q max i ic BS value.
i
403
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
And
UL UL UL
Q MAX ic BS SCH = G macro – diversity 3 links max Q max i ic BS SCH
i
UL
G macro – diversity 3 links is the uplink macro-diversity gain.This parameter is determined from the fixed cell edge coverage
probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option “Shadowing taken into account” is not selected
(Prediction properties), Atoll considers the uplink macro-diversity gain defined by the user in Global parameters.
For softer and softer-softer handovers, we have:
For softer-soft handover, there are two possibilities. If the MRC option is selected (option available in Global parameters), we
have:
UL
UL UL UL UL
Q MAX ic BS FCH = G macro – diversity 2 links max f rake efficiency Q max i ic BS FCH Q max i ic BS
i on the other site FCH
i on the same site
And
UL
UL UL UL UL
Q MAX ic BS SCH = G macro – diversity 2 links max f rake efficiency Q max i ic BS SCH Q max i ic BS
i on the other site SCH
i on the same site
otherwise,
UL UL UL
Q MAX ic BS FCH = G macro – diversity 2 links max Q max i ic BS FCH
i
And
UL UL UL
Q MAX ic BS SCH = G macro – diversity 2 links max Q max i ic BS SCH
i
req req
3rd step: Calculation of P term FCH and P term SCH
UL UL
req Q req FCH Q req SCH
- P max
P term FCH = ---------------------------------------
req
- P max
term FCH and P term SCH = --------------------------------------- term SCH
UL UL
Q MAX ic BS FCH Q MAX ic BS SCH
Where
UL
Q req FCH is the user-defined uplink data traffic quality target on FCH for a given service and a terminal. This parameter is
available in the Services table.
UL
Q req SCH is the user-defined uplink data traffic quality target on SCH for a given service, terminal and SCH throughput. This
parameter is available in the Services table.
req
Then, from the required terminal power on FCH and SCH, Atoll determines the total terminal power required ( P term ).
req req
As P term pilot = p P term , we have:
req req
req P term FCH + P term SCH
P term = --------------------------------------------------------
-
1–p
req max
Therefore, the service on the uplink data traffic channel is available if P term P term .
404
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
max
UL – FCH P term FCH
With P b –max i ic BS = ------------------------
-
LT
i
UL
N tot i ic BS is the total noise at the transmitter on the best carrier of the best server. This value is deduced from the cell
UL
uplink load factor X i ic BS .
tx max req
UL N0 P FCH – P FCH
- + 1 – term max (---------------------------
N tot i ic BS = ----------------------------------- -,0)
UL LT
1 – X i ic BS i
tx
N 0 is the transmitter thermal noise.
max
UL – SCH P term SCH
With P b –max i ic BS = ------------------------
-
LT
i
UL
N tot i ic BS is the total noise at the transmitter on the best carrier of the best server. This value is deduced from the cell
UL
uplink load factor X i ic BS .
tx max req
UL N0 P SCH – P SCH
N tot i ic BS = -----------------------------------
- + 1 – term max (---------------------------
-,0)
UL
1 – X i ic BS LT
i
tx
N 0 is the transmitter thermal noise.
And
UL UL UL
Q MAX ic BS SCH = G macro – diversity 2 links max Q max i ic BS SCH
i
UL
G macro – diversity 2 links is the uplink macro-diversity gain. This parameter is determined from the fixed cell edge coverage
probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option “Shadowing taken into account” is not selected
(Prediction properties), Atoll considers the uplink macro-diversity gain defined by the user in Global parameters.
UL UL
max Q max i ic BS corresponds to the highest Q max i ic BS value.
i
405
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
And
UL UL UL
Q MAX ic BS SCH = G macro – diversity 3 links max Q max i ic BS SCH
i
UL
G macro – diversity 3 links is the uplink macro-diversity gain. This parameter is determined from the fixed cell edge coverage
probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option “Shadowing taken into account” is not selected
(Prediction properties), Atoll considers the uplink macro-diversity gain defined by the user in Global parameters.
For softer and softer-softer handovers, we have:
For softer-soft handover, there are two possibilities. If the MRC option is selected (option available in Global parameters), we
have:
UL
UL UL UL UL
Q MAX ic BS FCH = G macro – diversity 2 links max f rake efficiency Q max i ic BS FCH Q max i ic BS
i on the other site FCH
i on the same site
And
UL
UL UL UL UL
Q MAX ic BS SCH = G macro – diversity 2 links max f rake efficiency Q max i ic BS SCH Q max i ic BS
i on the other site SCH
i on the same site
otherwise,
UL UL UL
Q MAX ic BS FCH = G macro – diversity 2 links max Q max i ic BS FCH
i
And
UL UL UL
Q MAX ic BS SCH = G macro – diversity 2 links max Q max i ic BS SCH
i
UL
Q eff SCH is the uplink effective traffic channel quality on SCH at the receiver on icBS.
UL UL UL UL UL UL
Q eff FCH = min Q MAX FCH Q req FCH and Q eff SCH = min Q MAX SCH Q req SCH
UL
G SHO SCH corresponds to the UL soft handover gain on SCH.
UL UL
UL Q MAX ic BS FCH UL Q MAX ic BS SCH
G SHO FCH = ------------------------------------------------------------
- and G SHO SCH = ------------------------------------------------------------
-
UL UL
max Q max i ic BS FCH max Q max i ic BS SCH
I I
UL UL
max Q max i ic BS corresponds to the highest Q max i ic BS value.
I
For each cell (l,icBS) in the receiver active set, Atoll calculates the uplink quality level from the receiver. No power control is
performed as in simulations. Here, Atoll determines the uplink quality level at the cell for the maximum terminal power
406
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
allowed. Then, the total uplink quality level is evaluated with respect to the receiver handover status. From this value, Atoll
calculates the required terminal power and compares it with the maximum terminal power allowed.
• Max terminal power
max
The Max terminal power parameter ( P term ) is user-defined for each terminal. It corresponds to the maximum terminal power
allowed.
• Required terminal power with ACK
req
The required terminal power ( P term ) calculation may be divided into four steps:
UL
1st step: Evaluation of the uplink quality, Q max i ic BS , for each cell of active set
max
UL P term
With P b –max i ic BS = ------------
LT
i
UL
N tot i ic BS is the total noise at the transmitter on the best carrier of the best server. This value is deduced from the cell
UL
uplink load factor X i ic BS .
tx max req
UL N0 P term – P term
- + 1 – term max (------------------------------
N tot i ic BS = ----------------------------------- -,0)
UL LT
1 – X i ic BS i
tx
N 0 is the transmitter thermal noise.
UL
2nd step: Calculation of the total quality at the transmitter on icBS ( Q MAX ) based on the receiver handover status.
UL
G macro – diversity 2 links is the uplink macro-diversity gain.This parameter is determined from the fixed cell edge coverage
probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option “Shadowing taken into account” is not selected
(Prediction properties), Atoll considers the uplink macro-diversity gain defined by the user in Global parameters.
UL UL
max Q max i ic BS corresponds to the highest Q max i ic BS value.
i
UL
G macro – diversity 3 links is the uplink macro-diversity gain. This parameter is determined from the fixed cell edge coverage
probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option “Shadowing taken into account” is not selected
(Prediction properties), Atoll considers the uplink macro-diversity gain defined by the user in Global parameters.
For softer and softer-softer handovers, we have:
Qmax i icBS
UL UL UL
Q MAX ic BS = f rake efficiency
i
407
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
For softer-soft handover, there are two possibilities. If the MRC option is selected (option available in Global parameters), we
have:
UL
Qmax i icBS Qmaxi on the other site i icBS
UL UL UL UL
Q MAX ic BS = G macro – diversity 2 links max f rake efficiency
i on the same site
otherwise,
UL UL UL
Q MAX ic BS = G macro – diversity 2 links max Q max i ic BS
i
UL
3rd step: Evaluation of the required quality level on uplink, Q req
Where
Ec
----
UL
- is the minimum pilot quality level on uplink. This parameter is available in the Mobility types table.
N t min
G ACK , G DRC and G TCH are respectively acknowledgement, data rate control and traffic data gains relative to the pilot. They
are defined in the terminal properties (1xEV-DO Rev. 0 tab).
In case of a 1xEV-DO Rev. A capable terminal, we have:
E UL
Q req = ----c-
UL UL
G p 1 + G ACK + G DRC + G TCH + G RRI + G Auxiliary – pilot
N t min
Where
Ec
----
UL
UL
- is the minimum pilot quality level required on uplink to obtain the defined throughput, TP req . The required
N t min
UL
throughput, TPreq (i.e. the uplink throughput selected for the analysis) is obtained by using a certain uplink transmission
format (i.e. 1xEV-DO radio bearer ( Index UL – Bearer ) with a certain number of subframes ( n SF )) and calculated as follows:
UL
UL TP P – R LC Index UL – Bearer
TP req = ------------------------------------------------------------
-
n SF
Ec
----
UL
-
N t min is the value defined in the 1xEV-DO Radio Bearer Selection (Uplink) table for this uplink transmission format (radio
bearer Index, mobility and number of subframe). Two values are available for this parameter, one when the service uplink
mode is "Low Latency" and another one for high capacity services.
G ACK , G DRC , G TCH , G RRI and G Auxiliary – pilot are respectively acknowledgement, data rate control, traffic data channel,
reverse rate indicator and auxiliary pilot channel gains relative to the pilot. They are defined in the terminal properties (1xEV-
DO Rev. A tab). Two values of G TCH are available, one when the service uplink mode is "Low Latency" and another one for
high capacity services.
req
4th step: Calculation of P term
UL
req Q req
- P max
P term = -------------------------- term
UL
Q MAX ic BS
req max
Therefore, the service on the uplink traffic data channel is available if P term P term .
408
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
And
E UL
Q req withoutACK = ----c-
UL UL
G p 1 + G DRC + G TCH + G RRI + G Auxiliary – pilot for 1xEV-DO Rev. A capable terminals
N t min
And then,
UL
req Q req withoutACK
- P max
P term withoutACK = -------------------------------------- term
UL
Q MAX ic BS
• UL SHO gain
UL
1st step: Evaluation of the uplink quality, Q max i ic BS , for each cell of active set.
max
UL P term
With P b –max i ic BS = ------------
LT
i
UL
N tot i ic BS is the total noise at the transmitter on the best carrier of the best server. This value is deduced from the cell
UL
uplink load factor X i ic BS .
tx max req
UL N0 P term – P term
N tot i ic BS = -----------------------------------
- + 1 – term max (------------------------------
-,0)
UL
1 – X i ic BS LT
i
tx
N 0 is the transmitter thermal noise.
UL
2nd step: Calculation of the total quality at the transmitter on icBS ( Q MAX ) based on the receiver handover status.
UL
Q MAX ic BS is the traffic channel quality at the transmitter on icBS after signal combination of all the transmitters of the active
set.
If there is no handoff, we have:
UL UL
Q MAX ic BS = Q max i ic BS
UL
G macro – diversity 2 links is the uplink macro-diversity gain. This parameter is determined from the fixed cell edge coverage
probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option “Shadowing taken into account” is not selected
(Prediction properties), Atoll considers the uplink macro-diversity gain defined by the user in Global parameters.
UL UL
max Q max i ic BS corresponds to the highest Q max i ic BS value.
i
UL
G macro – diversity 3 links is the uplink macro-diversity gain. This parameter is determined from the fixed cell edge coverage
probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option “Shadowing taken into account” is not selected
(Prediction properties), Atoll considers the uplink macro-diversity gain defined by the user in Global parameters.
For softer and softer-softer handovers, we have:
409
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
Qmax i icBS
UL UL UL
Q MAX ic BS = f rake efficiency
i
For softer-soft handover, there are two possibilities. If the MRC option is selected (option available in Global parameters), we
have:
UL
Qmax i icBS Qmaxi on the other site i icBS
UL UL UL UL
Q MAX ic BS = G macro – diversity 2 links max f rake efficiency
i on the same site
otherwise,
UL UL UL
Q MAX ic BS = G macro – diversity 2 links max Q max i ic BS
i
UL
UL Q MAX ic BS
G SHO = -----------------------------------------------
-
UL
max Q max i ic BS
i
• Bearer Consumption
For (1xEV-DO Rev. A - Guaranteed bit rate) service users, Atoll calculates the 1xEV-DO bearer consumption.
TPD min – UL
C UL – Bearer = --------------------------------------------------------------
UL
TP P – RLC Index UL – Bearer
Where TPD min – UL corresponds to the minimum bit rate required by the service in the uplink.
For multi-carrier 1xEV-DO Rev. B users, Atoll models load balancing between carriers. Atoll shares the available terminal
power between the carriers and determines the uplink 1xEV-DO radio bearer obtained on each carrier. It starts allocating the
maximum terminal power to the best carrier and selects the highest 1xEV-DO radio bearer. If it remains terminal power after
serving the first carrier, then Atoll continues allocating the available terminal power to the second carrier, and so on for the
other carriers of the active set as long as the remaining terminal power is sufficient to obtain the lowest bearer.
The following results are displayed:
• For each carrier used in the selected configuration, Atoll indicates the UL SHO Gain, the obtained throughput and the
required power.
The calculations can be divided into four steps:
UL
1st step: Evaluation of the uplink quality, Q max i ic , for each cell of the sub-active set
max
UL P term ic
With P b –max i ic = ---------------------
-
LT
i
max
P term ic is the terminal power available for the carrier (ic).
UL UL
N tot i ic is the total noise at the transmitter on the carrier ic. This value is deduced from the cell uplink load factor X i ic .
tx max req
UL N0 P term ic – P term
- + 1 – term max (----------------------------------------
N tot i ic = ------------------------------ ,0)
UL LT
1 – X i ic i
410
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
tx
N 0 is the transmitter thermal noise.
UL
2nd step: Calculation of the total quality at the transmitter on ic ( Q MAX ) based on the receiver handover status.
UL
G macro – diversity 2 links is the uplink macro-diversity gain.This parameter is determined from the fixed cell edge coverage
probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option “Shadowing taken into account” is not selected
(Prediction properties), Atoll considers the uplink macro-diversity gain defined by the user in Global parameters.
UL UL
max Q max i ic corresponds to the highest Q max i ic value.
i
UL
G macro – diversity 3 links is the uplink macro-diversity gain. This parameter is determined from the fixed cell edge coverage
probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option “Shadowing taken into account” is not selected
(Prediction properties), Atoll considers the uplink macro-diversity gain defined by the user in Global parameters.
For softer and softer-softer handovers, we have:
Qmax i ic
UL UL UL
Q MAX ic = f rake efficiency
i
For softer-soft handover, there are two possibilities. If the MRC option is selected (option available in Global parameters), we
have:
UL
Qmax i ic Qmaxi on the other site i ic
UL UL UL UL
Q MAX ic = G macro – diversity 2 links max f rake efficiency
i on the same site
otherwise,
UL UL UL
Q MAX ic = G macro – diversity 2 links max Q max i ic
i
UL
3rd step: Calculation of the UL SHO gain ( G SHO )
UL
UL Q MAX ic
G SHO = -------------------------------------------
UL
max Q max i ic
i
Where
Ec
----
UL
- is the minimum pilot quality level required in the uplink to obtain the 1xEV-DO radio bearer. The values are defined
N t min
in the 1xEV-DO Radio Bearer Selection (Uplink) table for each uplink transmission format (radio bearer Index, mobility and
number of subframe). Two values are available, one when the service uplink mode is "Low Latency" and another one for high
capacity services.
G ACK , G DRC , G TCH , G RRI and G Auxiliary – pilot are respectively acknowledgement, data rate control, traffic data channel,
reverse rate indicator and auxiliary pilot channel gains relative to the pilot. They are defined in the terminal properties (1xEV-
411
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
DO Rev. A tab). Two values of G TCH are available, one when the service uplink mode is "Low Latency" and another one for
high capacity services.
And
UL
req Q req
- P max
P term ic = --------------------- term ic
UL
Q MAX ic
Then, Atoll selects the best 1xEV-DO radio bearer. This is the 1xEV-DO radio bearer ( Index UL – Bearer ) with the highest
UL
UL TPP – RLC Index UL – Bearer
obtained throughput ( TP ic = -------------------------------------------------------------- ) where:
n SF Index UL – Bearer
req max
• P term ic P term ic ,
• And the required modulation scheme is supported by the terminal.
n SF is the number of subframes associated with the 1xEV-DO radio bearer ( Index UL – Bearer ).
• Obtained throughput
Atoll calculates the throughput for all combinations of carriers.
m
TP
UL UL
TP total = ic where m corresponds to the number of carriers in the combination.
ic = 1
UL
The obtained throughput ( TP ) corresponds to the best configuration among all combinations of carriers, i.e., the
UL
combination which provides the highest throughput, Max TP total .
UL UL
The traffic data channel is available in uplink if TP TP req .
Pterm ic
req req
P term =
ic = 1
412
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
Atoll displays the best pilot quality received with a fixed cell edge coverage probability.
2nd case: Analysis based on the best carrier of all frequency bands
Atoll proceeds as in point analysis. It determines the best carrier of each transmitter i containing the receiver in its calculation
area and using a frequency band supported by the receiver’s terminal. The best carrier selection depends on the option
selected for the site equipment (UL minimum noise, DL minimum power, random, sequential) and is based on the UL load
percentage and the downlink total power of cells (simulation results or cell properties). Atoll calculates the pilot quality at the
receiver from these transmitters on their best carrier and determines the best serving transmitter BS on its best carrier icBS
Resulting
( Q pilot ic BS ). Then, it deduces the best pilot quality received with a fixed cell edge coverage probability, Q pilot ic BS .
BS
Atoll displays the best pilot quality received with a fixed cell edge coverage probability.
3rd case: Analysis based on the best carrier of any frequency band (for multi-band terminals with priority defined on frequency
bands only)
The frequency band that can be used is fixed. Atoll determines the best carrier of each transmitter i containing the receiver
in its calculation area and using the selected frequency band. The best carrier selection depends on the option selected for
the site equipment (UL minimum noise, DL minimum power, random, sequential) and is based on the UL load percentage and
the downlink total power of cells (simulation results or cell properties). Then, Atoll calculates the pilot quality at the receiver
from these transmitters on their best carrier and determines the best serving transmitter BS on its best carrier icBS
Resulting
( Q pilot ic BS ). Then, it calculates the best pilot quality received with a fixed cell edge coverage probability, Q pilot ic BS .
BS
Atoll displays the best pilot quality received with a fixed cell edge coverage probability.
• Single colour
Resulting req
Atoll displays a coverage if Q pilot ic Q pilot . Coverage consists of a single layer with a unique colour.
ic = ic BS or ic given
413
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined pilot signal level defined in the Display tab (Prediction
Resulting
properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q pilot ic Q pilot threshold ( ic = ic BS or ic given ). Each layer is assigned a
colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
Atoll displays total traffic channel quality at the receiver on the carrier ic ( ic BS or ic given ).
For further details on formulas, see "Definitions and Formulas" on page 340. For further details on calculation, see "Downlink
Sub-Menu" on page 395.
You may choose following display options:
• Single colour
DL DL DL
Atoll displays a coverage with a unique colour if Q MAX ic FCH Q req FCH . Q req FCH is the downlink traffic data quality
target on the fundamental channel (FCH). This parameter is user-defined for a given service and a terminal in the Services sub-
folder.
• Colour per transmitter
DL DL
Atoll displays a coverage if Q MAX ic FCH Q req FCH . Coverage consists of several layers with associated colours. There is
a layer per transmitter with no intersection between layers. Layer colour is the colour assigned to best serving transmitter.
• Colour per mobility
In this case, receiver is not completely defined and no mobility is assigned. Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per
DL DL
user-defined mobility defined in Mobility sub-folder. For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic FCH Q req FCH . Each layer
is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
• Colour per service
In this case, receiver is not completely defined and no service is assigned. Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per
DL DL
user-defined service defined in Services sub-folder. For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic FCH Q req FCH . Each layer
is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
• Colour per probability
This display option is available only if analysis is based on all simulations in a group (i.e. if you select a group of simulations
and the “All” option in the Condition tab of prediction properties).
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined probability level defined in the Display tab (Prediction
DL DL
properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic FCH Q req FCH in the required number of simulations. Each layer is
assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
• Colour per cell edge coverage probability
414
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined cell edge coverage probability, p, defined in the Display tab
DL DL
(Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic p FCH Q req FCH . Each layer is assigned a colour and
displayed with intersections between layers.
• Colour per maximum quality level (max Eb/Nt)
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
DL
properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic FCH Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersections between layers.
• Colour per effective quality level (Effective Eb/Nt)
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
DL
properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q eff ic FCH Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersections between layers.
• Colour per quality margin (Eb/Nt margin)
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined quality margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction
DL DL
properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic FCH – Q req FCH M arg in . Each layer is assigned a colour and
displayed with intersections between layers.
• Colour per required power
req
Atoll calculates the downlink power required on FCH, P FCH ic , as follows:
DL
req Q req FCH
- P max
P FCH ic = ---------------------- FCH
DL
Q MAX ic
max
Where P FCH is a user-defined input for a given service and terminal. It corresponds to the maximum traffic data power
allowed on FCH for a transmitter.
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined required power threshold defined in the Display tab
req
(Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if P FCH ic Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed
with intersections between layers.
• Colour per required power margin
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined power margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction
max req
properties). For each layer, area is covered if P FCH – P FCH ic M arg in . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersections between layers.
• Colour per throughput
DL FCH DL
This display option is relevant for CDMA2000 1xRTT data services only. For each possible throughput, TP ( TP P – DL AF FCH ,
FCH DL FCH DL FCH DL FCH DL
TP P – DL AF FCH + 2 , TP P – DL AF FCH + 4 , TPP – DL AF FCH + 8 , TP P – DL AF FCH + 16 ), Atoll calculates traffic
channel quality at the receiver for each cell (k,ic) (with ic=icBS or icgiven). Downlink traffic channel quality at the receiver is
evaluated from a maximum traffic channel power per transmitter allowed for the corresponding throughput. Then, the total
DL DL
downlink traffic channel quality ( Q MAX ic TP ) is calculated after recombination.
DL
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per possible throughput, TP . For each layer, area is covered if
DL DL DL DL
Q MAX ic TP Q req TP . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
DL DL DL
Q req TP is the downlink traffic data quality target for the throughput, TP . This parameter is user-defined for a given
service, terminal and throughput in the Services sub-folder.
415
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
For 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 users (users with EV-DO Rev. 0-capable terminals and EV-DO Rev. 0 services), the obtained throughput
DL
( TP ) on downlink is determined from the graph “Peak throughput=f(C/I) (Rev0)” defined for the mobility type selected in
DL
the Condition tab (Prediction properties). TP is the value read in the graph “Peak throughput=f(C/I) (Rev0)” for the
E
calculated effective pilot quality level, ----c- ic BS b pilot .
Nt
For 1xEV-DO Rev. A users (users with EV-DO Rev. A-capable terminals and EV-DO Rev. A services), the obtained throughput
DL
( TP ) on downlink depends on the downlink transmission format, i.e the radio bearer index ( Index DL – Bearer ) with the
Ec
number of timeslots ( n TS ). Atoll selects the downlink transmission format where ----- ic BS b pilot --- . Then, it
C
Nt I req
determines the downlink obtained throughput as follows:
DL
DL TP P – RLC Index DL – Bearer
TP = -------------------------------------------------------------- .
n TS
The obtained throughput corresponds to the guaranteed throughput after a certain number of retransmissions (i.e. the
number of timeslots, n TS ).
When HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request) is used, the required average number of retransmissions is smaller and the
DL
throughput is an average throughput ( TP av ) calculated as follows:
DL
DL TP P – RLC Index DL – Bearer
TP av = ---------------------------------------------------------------------
-
DL
n Rtx (Index DL – Bearer,n TS) av
DL
The average number of retransmissions ( n Rtx av ) is determined from early termination probabilities defined for the selected
downlink transmission format. The Early Termination Probability graph shows the probability of early termination ( p ) as a
DL DL
function of the number of retransmissions ( n Rtx ). Atoll calculates the average number of retransmissions ( n Rtx av ) as
follows:
n DL
Rtx max
DL DL DL
p n Rtx – p n Rtx – 1 n Rtx
DL
DL n =1
n Rtx av = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rtx -
DL
p n Rtx max
Single-carrier EV-DO Rev. B service users are managed as 1xEV-DO Rev. A service users.
DL
For multi-carrier EV-DO Rev. B service users, the obtained throughput ( TP ) in the downlink corresponds to the sum of the
obtained throughputs on each carrier.
DL
The obtained throughput ( TP ic ) on a carrier depends on the downlink transmission format, i.e the radio bearer index
( Index DL – Bearer ) with the number of timeslots ( n TS ). Atoll selects the downlink transmission format where
E
----c- ic b pilot C
---
Nt I req and whose modulation scheme is supported by the terminal.
The downlink obtained throughput corresponds to the guaranteed throughput after a certain number of retransmissions (i.e.
the number of timeslots, n TS ). It is determined as follows:
DL
DL TP P – RLC Index DL – Bearer
TP ic = --------------------------------------------------------------
n TS
When HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request) is used, the required average number of retransmissions is smaller and the
DL
throughput on a carrier is an average throughput ( TP av ic ) calculated as follows:
416
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
DL
DL TP P – RLC Index DL – Bearer
TP av ic = ---------------------------------------------------------------------
-
DL
n Rtx (Index DL – Bearer,n TS) av
DL
The average number of retransmissions ( n Rtx av ) is determined from early termination probabilities defined for the selected
downlink transmission format. The Early Termination Probability graph shows the probability of early termination ( p ) as a
DL DL
function of the number of retransmissions ( n Rtx ). Atoll calculates the average number of retransmissions ( n Rtx av ) as
follows:
n DL
Rtx max
DL DL DL
p n Rtx – p n Rtx – 1 n Rtx
DL
DL n =1
n Rtx av = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rtx -
DL
p n Rtx max
DL
The average throughput ( TP av ) provided on downlink corresponds to the sum of the average throughputs obtained on each
carrier.
Display Options
Best server and active set determination is performed as in point prediction (AS analysis).
Atoll displays uplink quality on FCH at transmitters in active set on the carrier ic ( ic BS or ic given ) received from the receiver.
For further details on formulas, see "Definitions and Formulas" on page 340. For further details on calculations, see "Uplink
Sub-Menu" on page 402.
• Single colour
417
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
UL UL UL
Atoll displays a coverage if Q MAX ic FCH Q req FCH . Coverage colour is unique. Q req FCH is the uplink data traffic quality
target on the fundamental channel (FCH). This parameter is user-defined for a given service and a terminal in the Services sub-
folder.
• Colour per transmitter
UL UL
Atoll displays a coverage if Q MAX ic FCH Q req FCH . Coverage consists of several layers with associated colours. There is
a layer per transmitter with no intersection between layers. Layer colour is the colour assigned to best server transmitter.
• Colour per mobility
In this case, receiver is not completely defined and no mobility is assigned. Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per
UL UL
user-defined mobility defined in Mobility sub-folder. For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic FCH Q req FCH . Each layer
is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
• Colour per service
In this case, receiver is not completely defined and no service is assigned. Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per
UL UL
user-defined service defined in Services sub-folder. For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic FCH Q req FCH . Each layer
is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
• Colour per probability
This display option is available only if analysis is based on all simulations in a group (i.e. if you select a group of simulations
and the “All” option in the Condition tab of prediction properties). Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-
defined probability level defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if
UL UL
Q MAX ic FCH Q req FCH in the required number of simulations. Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersections between layers.
• Colour per cell edge coverage probability
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined cell edge coverage probability, p, defined in the Display tab
UL UL
(Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic p FCH Q req FCH . Each layer is assigned a colour and
displayed with intersections between layers.
• Colour per maximum quality level (Max Eb/Nt)
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
UL
properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic FCH Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersections between layers.
• Colour per effective quality level (Effective Eb/Nt)
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
UL
properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q effective ic FCH Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed
with intersections between layers.
• Colour per quality margin (Eb/Nt margin)
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined quality margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction
UL UL
properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic FCH – Q req FCH M arg in . Each layer is assigned a colour and
displayed with intersections between layers.
• Colour per required power
FCH – re q
The required terminal power, P term , is calculated as described in the Point analysis – AS analysis tab – Uplink sub-menu
part. Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined power threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
FCH –re q
properties). For each layer, area is covered if P term ic Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersections between layers.
• Colour per required power margin
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined power margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction
max FCH –re q
properties). For each layer, area is covered if P term – P term ic M arg in . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed
with intersections between layers.
• Colour per throughput
418
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
UL FCH UL
This display option is relevant for CDMA2000 1xRTT data services only. For each possible throughput, TP ( TP P – UL AF FCH ,
FCH UL FCH UL FCH UL FCH UL
TP P – UL AF FCH + 2 , TP P – UL AF FCH + 4 , TP P – UL AF FCH + 8 , TP P – UL AF FCH + 16 ), Atoll calculates the total
UL UL
uplink traffic channel quality ( Q MAX ic TP ). Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per possible throughput,
UL UL UL UL UL
TP . For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic TP Q req TP . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
UL UL UL
intersections between layers. Q req TP is the uplink traffic data quality target for the throughput, TP . This parameter is
user-defined for the service, a given terminal and throughput in the service properties.
Best server and active set determination is performed as in point prediction (AS analysis).
Atoll displays the uplink quality at transmitters in active set on the carrier ic ( ic BS or ic given ) received from the receiver. For
multi-carrier EV-DO users, Atoll considers the best sub-active set.
For further details on formulas, see "Definitions and Formulas" on page 340. For further details on calculations, see "Uplink
Sub-Menu" on page 402.
• Single colour
UL UL UL
Atoll displays a coverage if Q MAX ic Q req . Coverage colour is unique. For 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 users, Q req is the quality required
UL
on uplink for a 9.6 kbps channel throughput. For 1xEV-DO Rev. A and 1xEV-DO Rev. B users, Q req is the quality required on
uplink for a 4.8 kbps channel throughput. This parameter is calculated from the minimum uplink pilot quality and gains on the
different uplink channels.
We have:
E UL
Q req = ----c-
UL UL
G p 1 + G ACK + G DRC + G TCH for 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 terminals,
N t min
And
E UL
Q req = ----c-
UL UL
G p 1 + G ACK + G RRI + G DRC + G TCH + G Auxiliary – Pilot for 1xEV-DO Rev. A and 1xEV-DO Rev. B terminals.
N t min
419
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
UL UL
defined probability level defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic Q req
in the required number of simulations. Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
• Colour per cell edge coverage probability
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined cell edge coverage probability, p, defined in the Display tab
UL UL
(Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic p Q req . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed
with intersections between layers.
• Colour per maximum quality level (Max Eb/Nt)
UL
Here, Atoll calculates the total uplink traffic channel quality ( Q MAX ic TCH ).
UL
UL Q req TCH
- P max
Q MAX ic TCH = ---------------------- term
req
P term
With
E UL
Q req TCH = ----c-
UL UL
G p G TCH
N t min
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
UL
properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic TCH Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersections between layers.
• Colour per effective quality level (Effective Eb/Nt)
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
UL
properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q effective ic TCH Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed
with intersections between layers.
UL UL UL
Q effective ic TCH = min Q MAX ic TCH Q req TCH
And
req
TCH – re q P term
P term - G TCH for 1xEV-DO Rev. A terminals.
= -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 + G ACK + G RRI + G DRC + G TCH + G Auxiliary – Pilot
420
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined power margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction
max req
properties). For each layer, area is covered if P term – P term ic M arg in . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersections between layers.
• Colour per throughput
1xEV-DO Rev. 0 service users
UL UL UL
For each possible throughput, TP , Atoll calculates the total uplink quality ( Q MAX ic TP ). Coverage consists of several
UL UL UL UL
layers with a layer per possible throughput. For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic TP Q req TP . Each layer is
assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
UL UL UL
Q req TP is the uplink quality required to obtain the throughput, TP .
UL
The possible throughputs on uplink, TP , are: 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 76.8 and 153.6 kbps
E UL
Q req = ----c-
UL UL
G p 1 + G ACK + G DRC + G TCH
N t min
Where
Ec
----
UL
-
N t min is the minimum pilot quality level on uplink. This parameter is available in the Mobility types table.
G ACK , G DRC and G TCH are respectively acknowledgement, data rate control and traffic data gains relative to the pilot. They
are defined in the terminal properties (1xEV-DO Rev. 0 tab).
1xEV-DO Rev. A and single-carrier 1xEV-DO Rev. B service users
UL UL UL
For each possible throughput, TP , Atoll calculates the total uplink quality ( Q MAX ic TP ). Coverage consists of several
UL UL UL UL
layers with a layer per possible throughput. For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic TP Q req R v . Each layer is
assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
UL UL UL
Q req TP is the uplink quality required to obtain the throughput, TP .
UL
The throughput, TP is obtained when a certain uplink transmission format (i.e. 1xEV-DO radio bearer ( Index UL – Bearer )
with a certain number of subframes ( n SF )) is used. It is calculated as follows:
UL
UL TP P – RLC Index UL – Bearer
TP req = --------------------------------------------------------------
n SF
E UL
Q req = ----c-
UL UL
G p 1 + G ACK + G DRC + G TCH + G RRI + G Auxiliary – pilot
N t min
Where
Ec
----
UL
UL
-
N t min is the minimum pilot quality level required on uplink to obtain the throughput, TP . The value is defined in the
1xEV-DO Radio Bearer Selection (Uplink) table for the uplink transmission format (radio bearer Index, mobility and number of
subframe). Two values are available for this parameter, one when the service uplink mode is "Low Latency" and another one
for high capacity services.
G ACK , G DRC , G TCH , G RRI and G Auxiliary – pilot are respectively acknowledgement, data rate control, traffic data channel,
reverse rate indicator and auxiliary pilot channel gains relative to the pilot. They are defined in the terminal properties (1xEV-
DO Rev. A tab). Two values of G TCH are available, one when the service uplink mode is "Low Latency" and another one for
high capacity services.
Multi-carrier 1xEV-DO Rev. B service users
For multi-carrier 1xEV-DO Rev. B users, Atoll models load balancing between carriers. Atoll allocates the available terminal
power to carriers sequentially and determines the uplink 1xEV-DO radio bearer obtained on each carrier. Then, it selects the
best configuration among all combinations of carriers, i.e., the combination which provides the highest throughput.
UL UL
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per possible throughput. For each layer, area is covered if TP TP req . Each
layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
421
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
UL
TP req is the uplink throughput associated with the layer.
UL
TP corresponds to the throughput of the best configuration, i.e., the combination which provides the highest throughput.
• Colour per average throughput
This display option is available for 1xEV-DO Rev. A and 1xEV-DO Rev. B users only. When HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat
Request) is used, the required average number of retransmissions is smaller and the throughput is an average throughput
UL
( TP av ) calculated as follows:
UL
UL TP P – RLC Index UL – Bearer
TP av = -----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
UL
n Rtx Index UL – Bearer n SF av
UL
The average number of retransmissions ( n Rtx av ) is determined from early termination probabilities defined for the selected
uplink transmission format (i.e. the radio bearer index ( Index UL – Bearer ) with the number of subframes ( n SF )). The Early
Termination Probability graph shows the probability of early termination ( p ) as a function of the number of retransmissions
UL UL
( n Rtx ). Atoll calculates the average number of retransmissions ( n Rtx av ) as follows:
n UL
Rtx max
UL UL UL
p n Rtx – p n Rtx – 1 n Rtx
UL
UL n =1
n Rtx av = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rtx -
UL
p n Rtx max
UL
TP req is the uplink throughput associated with the layer.
UL
For the selected configuration (i.e., the combination of carriers which provides the highest throughput), TP av corresponds to
the sum of the average throughputs obtained on each carrier of the configuration.
Ptot icadj
DL
Ptot ic + ------------------------------------
DL DL txj j term
N tot ic = + N0
RF ic ic adj
txj j
term
DL N0
Downlink noise rise, NR DL ic , is calculated from the downlink total noise, N tot , as: NR DL ic = – 10 log ------------
-
N DL tot
422
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
423
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
• They belong to the folder on which allocation has been executed. This folder can be either the Transmitters folder or
a group of transmitters or a single transmitter.
Only TBA cells may be assigned neighbours.
If no focus zone exists in the ATL document, Atoll takes into account the computation
zone.
If the neighbours list of a cell is full, the reference cell will not be added as a neighbour
of that cell and that cell will be removed from the reference cell’s neighbours list. You can
force Atoll to keep that cell in the reference cell’s neighbours list by adding the following
option in the Atoll.ini file:
[Neighbours]
DoNotDeleteSymmetrics = 1
• Force exceptional pairs: This option enables you to force/forbid some neighbourhood relationships. Therefore,
you may force/forbid a cell to be candidate neighbour of the reference cell.
• Delete existing neighbours: When selecting the Delete existing neighbours option, Atoll deletes all the current
neighbours and carries out a new neighbour allocation. If not selected, the existing neighbours are kept.
Adjacency criterion:
Let CellB be a candidate neighbour cell of CellA. CellB is considered adjacent to CellA if
there exists at least one pixel in the CellA Best Server coverage area where CellB is Best
Server (if several cells have the same best server value) or CellB is the second best server
that enters the Active Set (respecting the T_Drop of the allocation).
When the Force adjacent cells as neighbours check box is selected, adjacent cells are
sorted and listed from the most adjacent to the least, depending on the above criterion.
Adjacence is relative to the number of pixels satisfying the criterion.
• If the Use Coverage Conditions check box is selected, there must be an overlapping zone ( S A S B ) with a given cell
edge coverage probability. Otherwise, only the distance criterion is taken into account.
424
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
• Inter-carrier neighbours: inter-frequency handover is a hard handover. It is needed in a multi-carrier (1xRTT and 1xEV-
DO carriers) CDMA network:
• To balance loading between carriers and layers (1st case),
• To make a coverage reason handover from micro cell frequency to macro cells (2nd case).
1st case: the reference cell A is located inside a continuous layer of cells with carrier c1 (c1 is the selected carrier on which you
run the allocation) and the candidate cell B belongs to a layer of cells with carrier c2.
SA is the area where:
• The pilot signal received from the cell A is greater than the minimum pilot signal level.
• The pilot signal from A is not the highest one. It is strictly lower than the best pilot signal received and higher than
the best pilot signal minus the margin.
SB is the area where:
• The pilot signal received from the cell B is greater than the minimum pilot signal level.
• The pilot signal from B is the highest one.
2nd case: the reference cell A is located on the border of a layer with carrier c1 (c1 is the selected carrier on which you run the
allocation) and the candidate cell B belongs to a layer of cells with carrier c2.
SA is the area where:
• The pilot signal received from the cell A is greater than the minimum pilot signal level.
• The pilot signal from A is the highest one
• The pilot signal from A is lower than the minimum pilot signal level plus the margin.
SB is the area where:
• The pilot signal received from the cell B is greater than the minimum pilot signal level.
• The pilot signal from B is the highest one.
425
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
SA SB
- 100 ) and compares this value to the % minimum covered area. If
Atoll calculates the percentage of covered area ( -----------------
SA
this percentage is not exceeded, the candidate neighbour B is discarded.
The coverage condition can be weighted among the others and ranks the neighbours through the importance field (see after).
• The importance of neighbours.
For information on the importance calculation, see "Importance Calculation" on page 428.
Importance values are used by the allocation algorithm to rank the neighbours. Atoll lists all neighbours and sorts them by
importance value so as to eliminate some of them from the neighbour list if the maximum number of neighbours to be
allocated to each transmitter is exceeded. If we consider the case for which there are 15 candidate neighbours and the
maximum number of neighbours to be allocated to the reference cell is 8. Among these 15 candidate neighbours, only 8
(having the highest importance values) will be allocated to the reference cell. Note that specific maximum numbers of
neighbours (maximum number of intra-carrier neighbours, maximum number of inter-carrier neighbours) can be defined at
the cell level (property dialogue or cell table). If defined there, this value is taken into account instead of the default one
available in the Neighbour Allocation dialogue.
In the Results part, Atoll provides the list of neighbours, the number of neighbours and the maximum number of neighbours
allowed for each cell. In addition, it indicates the importance (in %) of each neighbour and the allocation reason. Therefore, a
neighbour may be marked as exceptional pair, co-site, adjacent, coverage or symmetric. For neighbours accepted for co-site,
adjacency and coverage reasons, Atoll displays the percentage of area meeting the coverage conditions and the
corresponding surface area (km2), the percentage of area meeting the adjacency conditions and the corresponding surface
area (km2). Finally, if cells have previous allocations in the list, neighbours are marked as existing.
426
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
• By default, the automatic neighbour allocation compares the defined Max inter-
site distance with the effective inter-cell distance. As a consequence, there can
be cases where the real distance between assigned neighbours is higher than the
Max inter-site distance, because the effective distance is smaller. You can force
Atoll to compare the Max inter-site distance with the real inter-site distance by
adding the following lines in Atoll.ini:
[Neighbours]
RealInterSiteDistanceCondition=1
• By default, the neighbour importance calculated with respect to distance is based
on the global Max inter-site distance setting for all neighbour candidates. As a
consequence, there can be cases where the calculated importance is different
when the global Max inter-site distance is modified. To avoid that, you can force
Atoll to prioritise the individual distances between reference cells and their
respective neighbour candidates by adding the following lines in Atoll.ini:
[Neighbours]
CandidatesMaxDistanceInImportanceCalculation=1
427
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
Except the case of forced neighbours (importance = 100%), priority assigned to each neighbourhood cause is determined
using the Importance Function (IF). The IF considers the following factors for calculating the importance:
• The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d-
Di = 1 – ----------
d max
d is the effective distance (in m). It corresponds to the real inter-transmitter distance weighted by the azimuths of
antennas. For information on the effective distance calculation, see "Calculation of the Inter-Transmitter Distance" on
page 430.
d max is the maximum distance between the reference transmitter and a possible neighbour.
Where:
Delta(X)=Max(X)-Min(X)
428
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
• Set Min(Di) and Max(Di) to 0% if you do not want to take into account the distance
factor in the importance calculation.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors do not overlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum and maximum importance fields, neighbours will be ranked in this order:
co-site neighbours, adjacent neighbours, and neighbours allocated based on coverage
overlapping.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
• The default value of Min(O) = 1% ensures that neighbours selected for symmetry will
have an importance greater than 0%. With a value of Min(O) = 0%, neighbours
selected for symmetry will have an importance field greater than 0% only if there is
some coverage overlapping.
Except the case of forced neighbours (importance = 100%), priority assigned to each neighbourhood cause is determined
using the Importance Function (IF). The IF considers the following factors for calculating the importance:
• The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d-
Di = 1 – ----------
d max
d is the effective distance (in m). It corresponds to the real inter-transmitter distance weighted by the azimuths of
antennas. For information on the effective distance calculation, see "Calculation of the Inter-Transmitter Distance" on
page 430.
d max is the maximum distance between the reference transmitter and a possible neighbour.
Where
Delta(X)=Max(X)-Min(X)
429
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
• Set Min(Di) and Max(Di) to 0% if you do not want to take into account the distance
factor in the importance calculation.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors do not overlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum and maximum importance fields, neighbours will be ranked in this order:
co-site neighbours and neighbours allocated based on coverage overlapping.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
• The default value of Min(O) = 1% ensures that neighbours selected for symmetry will
have an importance greater than 0%. With a value of Min(O) = 0%, neighbours
selected for symmetry will have an importance field greater than 0% only if there is
some coverage overlapping.
5.6.4 Appendices
5.6.4.1 Calculation of the Inter-Transmitter Distance
Atoll takes into account the real distance ( D in m) and azimuths of antennas in order to calculate the effective inter-
transmitter distance ( d in m).
d = D 1 + x cos – x cos
where x = 0.3% so that the maximum D variation does not exceed 1%.
The formula above implies that two cells facing each other will have a smaller effective distance than the real physical
distance. It is this effective distance that will be taken into account rather than the real distance.
If no focus zone exists in the .atl document, Atoll takes into account the computation
zone.
430
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
• In the context of the PN offset allocation, the term "neighbours" refers to intra-carrier
neighbours.
• Atoll considers symmetry relationship between a cell, its first order neighbours, its
second order neighbours and its third order neighbours.
• In 3GPP2 multi-RAT documents, Atoll also tries to allocate different PN offsets to
CDMA cells that are neighbours of a common LTE cell.
Atoll considers either a percentage of the cell maximum powers or the total downlink
power used by the cells in order to evaluate I0. In this case, I0 equals the sum of total
transmitted powers. When this parameter is not specified in the cell properties, Atoll
uses 50% of the maximum power.
PN offset reuse distance can be defined at cell level. If this value is not defined, then Atoll
will use the default reuse distance defined in the PN offset Automatic Allocation
dialogue.
• PN-cluster size. Within the context of PN offset allocation, the term "PN-cluster" refers to a sub-group of PN offsets.
• Exceptional pairs,
• Domains of PN offsets,
When no domain is assigned to cells, Atoll considers the PILOT_INC parameter only to
determine available PN offsets (e.g., If PILOT_INC is set to 4, all PN offsets from 4 to 508
with a separation interval of 4 can be allocated).
• The carrier on which the allocation is run: It can be a given carrier or all of them. In this case, either Atoll independently
plans PN offsets for the different carriers, or it allocates the same PN offset to each carrier of a transmitter if the option
"Allocate carriers identically" is selected.
• The possibility to use a maximum of PN offsets (option "Use a Maximum of PN Offsets"): Atoll will try to spread the
PN offset spectrum the most.
• The "Delete All Codes" option: When selecting this option, Atoll deletes all the current PN offsets and carries out a
new PN offset allocation. If not selected, the existing PN offsets are kept.
431
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
In addition, it depends on the selected allocation strategy. Allocation strategies can be:
• PN offset per cell: The purpose of this strategy is to reduce the spectrum of allocated PN offsets the maximum
possible. Atoll will allocate the first possible PN offsets in the domain.
• Adjacent PN-Clusters per site: This strategy consists of allocating one cluster of adjacent PN offsets to each site, then,
one PN offset of the cluster to each cell of each transmitter according to its azimuth. When all the clusters have been
allocated and there are still sites remaining to be allocated, Atoll reuses the clusters at another site.
• Distributed PN-clusters per site: This strategy consists of allocating one cluster of PN offsets to each site in the
network, then, one PN offset of the cluster to each cell of each transmitter according to its azimuth. With this strategy,
the cluster is made of PN offsets separated as much as possible. When all the clusters have been allocated and there
are still sites remaining to be allocated, Atoll reuses the clusters at another site.
In the Results table, Atoll only displays PN offsets allocated to TBA cells.
Atoll processes TBA cells according to their priority. It allocates PN offsets starting with the highest priority cell and its near
cells, and continuing with the lowest priority cells not allocated yet and their near cells. For information on calculating cell
priority, see "Cell Priority" on page 433.
All sites which have constraints with the studied site are referred to as near sites.
Atoll assigns a PN-cluster of adjacent PN offsets to each site, starting with the highest priority site and its near sites, and
continuing with the lowest priority sites not allocated yet and their near sites. When all the clusters have been allocated and
there are still sites remaining to be allocated, Atoll reuses the clusters at another site. When the Co-PN Reuse Distance option
is selected, the algorithm reuses the clusters as soon as the Co-PN reuse distance is exceeded. Otherwise, when the option is
not selected, the algorithm tries to assign reused clusters as spaced out as possible.
Then, Atoll allocates a PN offset from the cluster to each cell of each transmitter located on the sites according to the
transmitter azimuth. It starts with the highest priority cell and its near cells and goes on with the lowest priority cells not
allocated yet and their near cells.
For information on calculating site priority, see "Site Priority" on page 436. For information on calculating cell priority, see
"Cell Priority" on page 433.
All sites which have constraints with the studied site are referred to as near sites.
Atoll assigns one cluster to each site, starting with the highest priority site and its near sites, and continuing with the lowest
priority sites not allocated yet and their near sites. When all the clusters have been allocated and there are still sites remaining
to be allocated, Atoll reuses the clusters at another site. When the Co-PN Reuse Distance option is selected, the algorithm
reuses the clusters as soon as the Co-PN reuse distance is exceeded. Otherwise, when the option is not selected, the algorithm
tries to assign reused clusters as spaced out as possible.
432
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
Then, Atoll assigns a PN offset from the cluster to each cell of each transmitter located on the sites according to the
transmitter azimuth. It starts with the highest priority cell and its near cells and goes on with the lowest priority cells not
allocated yet and their near cells.
For information on calculating site priority, see "Site Priority" on page 436. For information on calculating cell priority, see
"Cell Priority" on page 433.
When cells, transmitters or sites have the same priority, processing is based on an
alphanumeric order.
The cost due to the domain constraint, C i Dom , depends on the number of PN offsets available for the allocation. The
domain constraint is mandatory and cannot be broken.
When no domain is assigned to cells, 512 PN offsets are available and we have:
C i Dom = 0
When domains of PN offsets are assigned to cells, each unavailable PN offset generates a cost. The higher the number of codes
available in the domain, the less will be the cost due to this criterion. The cost is given as:
C i Dom = 512 – Number of PN Offsets in the domain
433
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
Distance Criterion
The constraint level of any cell i depends on the number of cells (j) present within a radius of "reuse distance" from its centre.
The total cost due to the distance constraint is given as:
C i Dist = Cj Dist i
j
Each cell j within the reuse distance generates a cost given as:
C j Dist i = w d ij c dis tan ce
Where
w d ij is a weight depending on the distance between i and j. This weight is inversely proportional to the inter-cell distance.
For a reuse distance of 2000m, the weight for an inter-cell distance of 1500m is 0.25, the weight for co-site cells is 1 and the
weight for two cells spaced out 2100m apart is 0.
c dis tan ce is the cost of the distance constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
C i EP = cEP i – j
j
Where
c EP is the cost of the exceptional pair constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
Neighbourhood Criterion
The constraint level of any cell i depends on the number of its neighbour cells j, the number of second order neighbours k and
the number of third order neighbours l.
Let’s consider the following neighbour schema:
Where
I j is the importance of the neighbour cell j.
c N1 is the cost of the first order neighbour constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
Because two first order neighbours must not have the same PN offset, Atoll considers the cost created by two first order
neighbours to be each other.
C j N1 i + C j N1 i
C j – j N1 i = -----------------------------------------------------
-
2
Each second order neighbour cell k generates a cost given as:
434
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
C k N2 i = Max ( C j N1 i C k N1 j , C j N1 i C k N1 j ) c N2
Where
c N2 is the cost of the second order neighbour constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
Because two second order neighbours must not have the same PN offset, Atoll considers the cost created by two second order
neighbours to be each other.
C k N2 i + C k N2 i
C k – k N2 i = -------------------------------------------------------
-
2
Each third order neighbour cell l generates a cost given as:
C N1 i C k N1 j C l N1 k C j N1 i C k N1 j C l N1 k
C l N3 i = Max j c N3
C j N1 i C k N1 j C l N1 k C j N1 i C k N1 j C l N1 k
Where
c N3 is the cost of the third order neighbour constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
Because two third order neighbours must not have the same PN offset, Atoll considers the cost created by two third order
neighbours to be each other.
C l N3 i + C l N3 i
C l – l N3 i = -----------------------------------------------------
-
2
Atoll considers the highest cost of both links when a neighbour relation is symmetric and
the importance value is different.
.
In this case, we have:
C j N1 i = Max I i – j I j – i c N1
And
C k N2 i = Max (C j N1 i C k N1 j ,C j N1 k C i N1 j ) c N2
This criterion is considered in 3GPP2 multi-RAT documents. If the cell i is neighbour of an LTE cell, the cell constraint level
depends on how many cells j are neighbours of the same LTE cell. The total cost due to LTE neighbour constraint is given as:
Where
cN is the cost of the LTE neighbour constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
LTE
Therefore, the total cost due to constraints on any cell i is defined as:
C i = C i Dom + C i U
With
C i U = C i Dist + C i EP + C i N + C i N 2G
435
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
Here, the domain available for the transmitter is the intersection of domains assigned to cells of the transmitter. The domain
constraint is mandatory and cannot be broken.
Here, the domain considered for the site is the intersection of domains available for transmitters of the site.
Let Site0, Site1, Site2 and Site3 be four sites with 3 cells using carrier 0 whom PN offsets have to be allocated. The PILOT_INC
parameter has been set to 4 and the PN Cluster Size is 3. Therefore, all PN offsets from 4 to 508 with a separation interval of
4 can be allocated. The reuse distance is supposed to be lower than the inter-site distance. Only co-site neighbours exist and
all of them have the same importance.
The following section lists the results of each combination of options with explanation where necessary.
436
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
Atoll allocates the first three PN offsets in the domain (4, 8 Atoll allocates the first three PN offsets in the domain (4, 8
and 12) to the Site0’s cells. Under given constraints of and 12) to the Site0’s cells. As it is allowed to use a maximum
neighbourhood and reuse distance, same PN offsets can be of PN offsets, Atoll allocates different PN offsets to each
allocated to each site’s cells. site’s cells so that there is least repetition.
Atoll allocates a PN cluster of adjacent PN offsets to Site0 and As it is possible to use a maximum of PN offsets, Atoll
then, one PN offset of the PN cluster to each cell. Under given allocates different PN clusters of adjacent PN offsets to sites
constraints of neighbourhood and reuse distance, the same so that there is least repetition of PN offsets.
PN cluster can be allocated to each site and same PN offsets
to each site’s cells.
437
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
Atoll allocates a PN cluster of distributed PN offsets to Site0 As it is possible to use a maximum of PN offsets, Atoll
and then, one PN offset of the PN cluster to each cell. Under allocates different PN clusters of distributed PN offsets to
given constraints of neighbourhood and reuse distance, the sites so that there is least repetition of PN offsets.
same PN cluster can be allocated to each site and same PN
offsets to each site’s cells.
438
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
Where d is the effective distance between the CDMA reference cell and the GSM neighbour and d max is the maximum inter-
site distance.
In the Results part, Atoll provides the list of neighbours, the number of neighbours and the maximum number of neighbours
allowed for each cell. In addition, it indicates the importance (in %) of each neighbour and the allocation reason. Therefore, a
neighbour may be marked as exceptional pair, co-site, or distance. For neighbours accepted for distance reasons, Atoll
displays the distance from the reference cell (m). Finally, if cells have previous allocations in the list, neighbours are marked
as existing.
439
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
Force co-site cells as neighbours: It enables you to automatically include GSM transmitters located on the same site as the
reference CDMA cell in the candidate neighbour list. This option is automatically selected.
Force exceptional pairs: This option enables you to force/forbid some neighbourhood relationships. Therefore, you may
force/forbid a GSM transmitter to be candidate neighbour of the reference CDMA cell.
Delete existing neighbours: When selecting the Delete existing neighbours option, Atoll deletes all the current neighbours and
carries out a new neighbour allocation. If not selected, existing neighbours are kept.
• There must be an overlapping zone ( S A S B ) with a given cell edge coverage probability where:
• 1st case: SA is the area where the cell A is the best serving cell of the CDMA network.
• The pilot signal received from A is greater than the minimum pilot signal level,
• The pilot quality from A exceeds a user-definable minimum value (minimum Ec/I0) and is the highest one.
In this case, the Ec/I0 margin must be equal to 0dB and the max Ec/I0 option disabled.
• 2nd case: SA represents the area where the pilot quality from the cell A strats decreasing but the cell A is still the
best serving cell of the CDMA network.
The Ec/I0 margin must be equal to 0dB, the max Ec/I0 option selected and a maximum Ec/I0 user-defined.
• The pilot signal received from A is greater than the minimum pilot signal level,
• The pilot quality from A exceeds the minimum Ec/I0 but is lower than the maximum Ec/I0.
• The pilot quality from A is the highest one.
• 3rd case: SA represents the area where the cell A is not the best serving cell but can enter the active set.
Here, the Ec/I0 margin has to be different from 0dB and the max Ec/I0 option disabled.
• The pilot signal received from A is greater than the minimum pilot signal level,
• The pilot quality from A is within a margin from the best Ec/I0, where the best Ec/I0 exceeds the minimum Ec/
I0.
• 4th case: SA represents the area where:
• The pilot signal received from A is greater than the minimum pilot signal level,
• The pilot quality from A is within a margin from the best Ec/I0 (where the best Ec/I0 exceeds the minimum Ec/
I0) and lower than the maximum Ec/I0.
In this case, the margin must be different from 0dB, the max Ec/I0 option selected and a maximum Ec/I0 user-
defined.
Two different cases may be considered for SB:
• 1st case: SB is the area where the cell B is the best serving cell of the GSM network.
In this case, the margin must be set to 0dB.
• The signal level received from B on the BCCH TRX type exceeds the user-defined minimum threshold and is the
highest one.
• 2nd case: The margin is different from 0dB and SB is the area where:
• The signal level received from B on the BCCH TRX type exceeds the user-defined minimum threshold and is
within a margin from the best BCCH signal level.
SA SB
Atoll calculates the percentage of covered area ( ------------------ 100 ) and compares this value to the % minimum covered area. If
SA
this percentage is not exceeded, the candidate neighbour B is discarded.
Candidate neighbours fulfilling coverage conditions are sorted in descending order with respect to percentage of covered
area.
440
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks
Importance values are used by the allocation algorithm to rank the neighbours according to the distance and the allocation
reason. Atoll lists all neighbours and sorts them by importance value so as to eliminate some of them from the neighbour list
if the maximum number of neighbours to be allocated to each cell is exceeded. If we consider the case for which there are 15
candidate neighbours and the maximum number of neighbours to be allocated to the reference cell is 8. Among these 15
candidate neighbours, only 8 (having the highest importance values) will be allocated to the reference cell. Note that the
maximum number of inter-technology neighbours can be defined at the cell level (property dialogue or cell table). If defined
there, this value is taken into account instead of the default one available in the Neighbour Allocation dialogue.
As indicated in the table below, the neighbour importance depends on the neighbourhood cause; this value varies between
0 to 100%.
Neighbourhood reason When Importance value
Existing neighbour If the Delete existing neighbours option is not selected Existing importance
Exceptional pair If the Force exceptional pairs option is selected 100 %
Co-site transmitter If the Force co-site cells as neighbours option is selected IF
Neighbourhood relationship that
If the % minimum covered area is exceeded IF
fulfils coverage conditions
Except the case of forced neighbours (importance = 100%), priority assigned to each neighbourhood cause is determined
using the Importance Function (IF). The IF considers the following factors for calculating the importance:
• The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d-
Di = 1 – ----------
d max
d is the effective distance (in m). It corresponds to the real inter-transmitter distance weighted by the azimuths of
antennas. For information on the effective distance calculation, see "Calculation of the Inter-Transmitter Distance" on
page 430.
d max is the maximum distance between the reference transmitter and a possible neighbour.
Where
Delta(X)=Max(X)-Min(X)
• Set Min(Di) and Max(Di) to 0% if you do not want to take into account the distance
factor in the importance calculation.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors do not overlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum and maximum importance fields, neighbours will be ranked in this order:
co-site neighbours and neighbours allocated based on coverage overlapping.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
441
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 5: CDMA2000 Networks ©Forsk 2015
In the Results part, Atoll provides the list of neighbours, the number of neighbours and the maximum number of neighbours
allowed for each cell. In addition, it indicates the importance (in %) of each neighbour and the allocation reason. Therefore, a
neighbour may be marked as exceptional pair, co-site or coverage. For neighbours accepted for co-site and coverage reasons,
Atoll displays the percentage of area meeting the coverage conditions and the corresponding surface area (km2). Finally, if
cells have previous allocations in the list, neighbours are marked as existing.
442
Chapter 6
LTE Networks
444
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
6 LTE Networks
This chapter describes all the calculations performed in Atoll LTE documents. The first part of this chapter lists all the input
parameters in the LTE documents, their significance, location in the Atoll GUI, and their usage. It also contains the lists of the
formulas used for the calculations.
The second part describes all the calculation processes, i.e., signal level coverage predictions, point analysis calculations,
signal quality coverage predictions, calculations on subscriber lists, and Monte Carlo simulations. The calculation algorithms
used by these calculation processes are available in the next part.
The third part describes all the calculation algorithms used in all the calculations. These algorithms include the calculation of
signal levels, noise, and interference for downlink and uplink considering power control, MIMO, smart antennas, and the radio
resource management algorithms used by the different available schedulers.
If you are new to LTE, you can also see the Glossary of LTE Terms in the User Manual for information on LTE terms and
concepts, especially in the context of their user in Atoll.
• All the calculations are performed on TBC (to be calculated) transmitters. For the
definition of TBC transmitters please refer to "Path Loss Matrices" on page 103.
• A cell refers to a transmitter-carrier (TX-c) pair. The cell being studied during a
calculation is referred to as TXi(ic) in this chapter.
• All the calculation algorithms in this section are described for two types of cells:
• A studied cell (represented by the subscript "i") comprising the studied transmitter
TXi and its carrier ic. It is the cell which is currently the focus of the calculation. For
example, a victim cell when calculating the interference it is receiving from other
cells.
• Other cells (represented by the subscript "j") comprising the other transmitter TXj
and its carrier jc. The other cells in the network can be interfering cells (downlink)
or the serving cells of interfering mobiles (uplink).
• All the calculation algorithms in this section are described for two types of receivers:
• Mi: A pixel (coverage predictions), subscriber (calculations on subscriber lists), or
mobile (Monte Carlo simulations) covered/served by the studied cell TXi(ic).
• Mj: A mobile (Monte Carlo simulations) covered/served by any other cell TXj(jc).
• Logarithms used in this chapter (Log function) are base-10 unless stated otherwise.
6.1 Definitions
This table lists the input to calculations, coverage predictions, and simulations.
W FB 3GPP parameter (Fixed to 180 kHz in Atoll) kHz Width of a resource/frequency block
N Slots SF 3GPP parameter (Fixed to 2 in Atoll) None Number of slots per subframe
445
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
F Sampling
N SCa – Total Calculation result ( N SCa – Total = --------------------
-) None Total number of subcarriers
F
N FB W FB
N SCa – Used Calculation result ( N SCa – Used = ------------------------
-) None Number of used subcarriers
F
446
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
Array
G SA Smart antenna parameter dB Array gain offset
Combining
G SA Smart antenna parameter dB Power combining gain offset
Div
G SA Smart antenna parameter dB Diversity gain (cross-polarisation)
TX ic
i Cell parameter dB Cell individual offset
O Individual
TX i ic
M HO Cell parameter dB Handover margin
447
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
N Users – Max Cell parameter None Maximum number of users per cell
Number of users connected to the
N Users – DL Cell parameter None
cell in downlink
Number of users connected to the
N Users – UL Cell parameter None
cell in uplink
L Path Cell parameter dB Delta path loss threshold
Number of downlink subframes per
N SF – DL Cell parameter None
frame
Number of uplink subframes per
N SF – UL Cell parameter None
frame
TX i ic Number of TDD special subframes
N TDD – SSF Cell parameter None
per frame
Channel and physical cell ID reuse
D Reuse Cell parameter m
distance
Average number of co-scheduled
G MU – MIMO – DL Cell parameter None
MU-MIMO users in downlink
Average number of co-scheduled
G MU – MIMO – UL Cell parameter None
MU-MIMO users in uplink
FPC Cell parameter None Fractional power control factor
Inter – Tech
NR UL Cell parameter dB Inter-technology uplink noise rise
448
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
DL
f Act Service parameter % Downlink activity factor
449
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
UL
G Div Clutter parameter dB Additional uplink diversity gain
DL
G Div Clutter parameter dB Additional downlink diversity gain
a. Any interfering cell whose signal to thermal noise ratio is less than CNR Min will be discarded.
450
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
TX ic
if N Ant – TX = 1
i
8
Number of symbols reserved for
TX ic TX ic
16 if N Ant – TX = 2
i i None downlink reference signals in one
N Res SRB
scheduler resource block
TX ic
if N Ant – TX = 4 or 8
i
24
TX ic
if N Ant – TX = 1
i
8
Number of symbols for downlink
TX i ic TX ic
8 if N Ant – TX = 2 None reference signals in one scheduler
i
N DLRS SRB
resource block
TX ic
if N Ant – TX = 4 or 8
i
6
TX ic TX ic TX i ic
N i i
SD – PDCCH N SCa – FB – 4 N FB N SF – DL
TX ic
i None Number of symbols for the PDCCH
N Sym – PDCCH TX ic TX ic TX i ic
+ NSD – PDCCH N SCa – FB – 4 N FB
i i
N TDD – SSF
Otherwise:
TX ic TX ic TX ic TX i ic
N i N SCa – FB – 2 Min 4 N Ant – TX N FB
i i
N SF – DL
SD – PDCCH
TX ic TX ic TX ic TX i ic
+ Min 2 N SD – PDCCH N SCa – FB – 2 Min 4 N Ant – TX N FB
i i i
N TDD – SSF
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
N Sym – PDSCH N Sym – DL – N Sym – Res – N Sym – SS – N Sym – PBCH – N Sym – PDCCH None Number of symbols for the PDSCH
451
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX ic
P i
--------------------
Max
- TX ic TX ic
10 Log 10 N SD Slot N Slot SF N SF – DL + N TDD – SSF N SD SSF –
10 i i DwPTS
Energy per resource element for 1
modulation symbol (dBm/Sym) of
TX ic TX ic
EPRE SS
i
EPRE PBCH
i the downlink reference signals
TX ic TX ic ----------------------------------- -----------------------------------
10 L og N Sym – DLRS + N Sym – SS 10
i i 10 10
EPRE DLRS + N Sym – PBCH 10 dBm/Sym
With reference signal EPRE
calculation method is set to
Calculated (equal distribution of
TX i ic TX i ic unused EPRE)
EPRE EPRE
------------------------------------
PDCCH PDSCH
------------------------------------
+ N Sym – PDCCH 10
10
+ N Sym – PDSCH 10
10
TX ic
P i
--------------------
Max
- TX i ic TX i ic
10 Log 10 N SD Slot N Slot SF N SF – DL + N TDD – SSF N SD SSF –
10 DwPTS
Energy per resource element for 1
modulation symbol (dBm/Sym) of
TX ic TX ic
EPRE
i
EPRE
i the downlink reference signals
TX ic TX ic SS
----------------------------------
- PBCH -
----------------------------------
10 L og N Sym – Res + N Sym – SS 10
i i 10 10
EPRE DLRS + N Sym – PBCH 10 dBm/Sym
With reference signal EPRE
calculation method is set to
Calculated (with boost) or
TX i ic TX i ic Calculated (without boost)
EPRE EPRE
------------------------------------
PDCCH PDSCH
------------------------------------
+ N Sym – PDCCH 10
10
+ N Sym – PDSCH 10
10
Energy per resource element for 1
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
EPRE SS EPRE DLRS + EPRE SS dBm/Sym modulation symbol (dBm/Sym) of
the SS
Energy per resource element for 1
TX ic TX ic TX ic
i i i dBm/Sym modulation symbol (dBm/Sym) of
EPRE PBCH EPRE DLRS + EPRE PBCH
the PBCH
Energy per resource element for 1
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
EPRE PDCCH EPRE DLRS + EPRE PDCCH dBm/Sym modulation symbol (dBm/Sym) of
the PDCCH
Energy per resource element for 1
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
EPRE PDSCH EPRE DLRS + EPRE PDSCH dBm/Sym modulation symbol (dBm/Sym) of
the PDSCH
"Boosted" energy per resource
TX i ic element for 1 modulation symbol
TX i ic N
EPRE DLRS + 10 Log -------------------------
TX ic Sym – Res (dBm/Sym) of downlink reference
i - dbm/Sym
EPRE DLRS TXi ic signals when the reference signal
N Sym – DLRS EPRE calculation method is set to
Calculated (with boost)
TX i ic TX ic TX ic Instantaneous transmission power
EPRE DLRS + 10 Log 2 N FB
i i dBm
P DLRS of the downlink reference signals
TX i ic TX i ic Instantaneous transmission power
P SS EPRE SS + 10 Log N SCa – FB N FB – SS PBCH dBm
of the SS
TX ic TX ic Instantaneous transmission power
i i dBm
P PBCH EPRE PBCH + 10 Log N SCa – FB N FB – SS PBCH of the PBCH
452
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
TX ic
i
TX ic
TX ic
i N Sym–PDCCH Average transmission power of the
i EPRE PDCCH + 10 Log --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-dBm
P PDCCH TXi ic TX ic TX ic TX ic PDCCH
N SD – PDCCH N SF – DL + Min 2 N SD – PDCCH N TDD – SSF
i i i
TX i ic
TX ic N
EPRE PDSCH + 10 Log -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
TX i ic i Sym–PDSCH Average transmission power of the
P PDSCH TX i ic TX ic
dBm
PDSCH
N N – N N i
SD Slot Slot SF SD – PDCCH SF – DL
DwPTS
TX i ic
TX i ic
SD SSF
+ N – Min 2 N N TDD – SSF
SD – PDCCH
TX i ic – TX j jc TX ic – TX jc TX ic – TX jc
i j i j
r ACO r ACO + r ACO None Adjacent channel overlap ratio
L H
TX i ic
TX i ic – TX j jc – f ACS
rO TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc ----------------------- None Total overlap ratio
10
r CCO + r ACO 10
453
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX i ic Mi
TX i ic EIRP1 SS – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G
C SS Mi Mi Mi
dBm Received SS signal level
–L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX i ic TX i TX i
Without smart antennas: P SS + G Ant – L
TX i ic With smart antennas:
EIRP1 SS dBm SS EIRP
TX i ic TX i TX i TX i
+ 10 Log E SA +
Combining Div
P SS + G Ant – L G SA + G SA
TX i ic Mi
TX i ic EIRP1 PBCH – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G
C PBCH Mi Mi Mi
dBm Received PBCH signal level
–L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX i ic TX i TX i
Without smart antennas: P PBCH + G Ant – L
TX i ic With smart antennas:
EIRP1 PBCH dBm PBCH EIRP
TX i ic TX i TX i TX i
+ 10 Log E SA +
Combining Div
P PBCH + G Ant – L G SA + G SA
TX ic M
i i
TX i ic EIRP1 PDCCH – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G
C PDCCH Mi Mi Mi
dBm Received PDCCH signal level
–L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX i ic TX i TX i
Without smart antennas: P PDCCH + G Ant – L
TX ic With smart antennas:
i dBm PDCCH EIRP
EIRP1 PDCCH
TX i ic TX i TX i TX i
+ 10 Log E SA +
Combining Div
P PDCCH + G Ant – L G SA + G SA
TX i ic Mi
TX i ic EIRP1 PDSCH – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G
C PDSCH Mi Mi Mi
dBm Received PDSCH signal level
–L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX i ic TX i TX i
Without smart antennas: P PDSCH + G Ant – L
TX i ic
EIRP1 PDSCH With smart antennas: dBm PDSCH EIRP
TX i ic TX i TX i
Array Combining Div
P PDSCH + G SA + G SA + G SA + G SA – L
454
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
TX ic
i
TX i ic EIRP2 PBCH – L Path – M Shadowing – Model Received PBCH energy per resource
E PBCH Mi Mi Mi Mi
dBm/Sym
element
– L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX i ic TX i TX i
Without smart antennas: EPRE PBCH + G Ant – L
TX ic With smart antennas:
i dBm/Sym PBCH EIRP
EIRP2 PBCH
TX i ic TX i TX i TX i
+ 10 Log E SA + G SA
Combining Div
EPRE PBCH + G Ant – L + G SA
TX i ic
TX i ic EIRP2 PDCCH – L Path – M Shadowing – Model Received PDCCH energy per resource
E PDCCH Mi Mi Mi Mi
dBm/Sym
element
– L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX i ic TX i TX i
Without smart antennas: EPRE PDCCH + G Ant – L
TX i ic With smart antennas:
EIRP2 PDCCH dBm/Sym PDCCH EIRP
TX i ic TX i TX i TX i
+ 10 Log E SA + G SA
Combining Div
EPRE PDCCH + G Ant – L + G SA
TX ic
i
TX i ic EIRP2 PDSCH – L Path – M Shadowing – Model Received PDSCH energy per resource
E PDSCH Mi Mi Mi Mi
dBm/Sym
element
– L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX ic TX TX
i i i
Without smart antennas: EPRE PDSCH + G Ant – L
TX i ic
EIRP2 PDSCH With smart antennas: dBm/Sym PDSCH EIRP
TX i ic TX i TX i
Array Combining Div
EPRE PDSCH + G SA + G SA + G SA + G SA – L
TX i
L Path L Model + L Ant dB Path loss
TX i TX i
L Path + L + L Indoor + M Shadowing – Model – G
L Total Mi Mi Mi Mi
dB Total losses
+L –G + L Ant + L Body
TX i ic
10 Log 7 7.5 If D CP = Normal Cyclic prefix factor, i.e., the ratio of
f CP TX i ic dB the useful symbol energy to the total
10 Log 6 7.5 If D CP = Extended symbol energy
0 If TX i ic is an interferer
455
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
456
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
TX jc
TX jc E DLRS
j
j
N Sym – DLRS in PDCCH -
-------------------- TX ic – TX j jc Interfering energy per resource
10 Log ------------------- - 10 10 + f O i
1
----------------------------------------- element (dBm/Sym) received
TX
j
jc TX
i
ic
N Ant – TX N Sym – PDCCH over the PDCCH
TX j jc (Method 1: synchronised
PDCCH dBm/Sym
TX jc TX ic – TX jc transmission and reception)
TX ic TX jc E
j
+f
i j Case: PDCCH of the interfered cell
N i – N
j -----------------------------------------------------------------------
PDCCH PDCCH
+ 10 L og ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- collides with PDCCH and all the RS
Sym – PDCCH Sym – DLRS in PDCCH 10
- 10
TX ic
i of the interfering cell
N Sym – PDCCH
TX jc
TX ic TX jc TX ic E DLRS
j
N i N
j
– N
i --------------------- Interfering energy per resource
10 Log ------------------- - 10 10
Ant – TX Sym – DLRS in PDCCH Sym – DLRS in PDCCH
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ element (dBm/Sym) received
TXj jc TX ic
i
N Ant – TX N Sym – PDCCH over the PDCCH
TX j jc (Method 1: synchronised
PDCCH dBm/Sym
TX jc TX ic – TX jc transmission and reception)
TX jc E
j
+f
i j Case: PDCCH of the interfered cell
N j PDCCH PDCCH
----------------------------------------------------------------------- TX ic – TX j jc
+ 10 L og ----------------------------- +f i collides with PDCCH and some RS
Sym – PDCCH 10
10
TX
i
ic O
of the interfering cell
N Sym – PDCCH
Interfering energy per resource
element (dBm/Sym) received
over the PDCCH
TX j jc TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc (Method 1: synchronised
PDCCH E PDCCH + f PDCCH + fO dBm/Sym
transmission and reception)
Case: PDCCH of the interfered cell
collides only with PDCCH of the
interfering cell
457
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX jc
TX jc E
j
N
j DLRS
--------------------
- TX ic – TX jc Interfering energy per resource
10 Log ------------------- +f i
1 Sym – DLRS in PDSCH 10 j
-----------------------------------------
- 10 element (dBm/Sym) received
TX jc
j
TX ic
i O
N Ant – TX N Sym – PDSCH over the PDSCH
TX j jc (Method 1: synchronised
PDSCH dBm/Sym
TX jc TX ic – TX jc transmission and reception)
TX ic TX jc
j
E PDSCH + f PDSCH
i j Case: PDSCH of the interfered cell
N i – N
j -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ 10 L og ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- collides with PDSCH and all the RS
Sym – PDSCH Sym – DLRS in PDSCH 10
10
TX ic
i of the interfering cell
N Sym – PDSCH
TX jc
TX ic TX jc TX ic E DLRS
j
N i N
j
– N
i --------------------- Interfering energy per resource
10 Log ------------------- - 10 10
Ant – TX Sym – DLRS in PDSCH Sym – DLRS in PDSCH
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- element (dBm/Sym) received
TXj jc TX ic
i
N Ant – TX N Sym – PDSCH over the PDSCH
TX j jc (Method 1: synchronised
PDSCH dBm/Sym
TX jc TX ic – TX jc transmission and reception)
TX jc E
j
+f
i j Case: PDSCH of the interfered cell
N j -----------------------------------------------------------------------
PDSCH PDSCH
TX ic – TX j jc
+ 10 L og ---------------------------- +f i collides with PDSCH and some RS
Sym – PDSCH 10
- 10
TX
i
ic O
of the interfering cell
N Sym – PDSCH
Interfering energy per resource
element (dBm/Sym) received
over the PDSCH
TX j jc TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc (Method 1: synchronised
PDSCH E PDSCH + f PDSCH + fO dBm/Sym
transmission and reception)
Case: PDSCH of the interfered cell
collides only with PDSCH of the
interfering cell
TX jc TX jc TX ic – TX jc
E j TX j jc
j
E PDCCH + f PDCCH
i j
TX j jc
--------------------
DLRS -
N ----------------------------------------------------------------------- N Sym – PDCCH
10 Log 10
10 Sym – DLRS
-------------------------
- + 10 10
-----------------------------
TX j jc TX j jc Interfering energy per resource
N Sym – DL N Sym – DL element (dBm/Sym) received
TX jc
j dBm/Sym over downlink reference signals
DLRS
TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
E PDSCH + f PDSCH TX j jc
(Method 2: non-synchronised
----------------------------------------------------------------------- N TX ic – TX j jc transmission and reception)
10 Sym – PDSCH
+ 10 - + fO i
----------------------------
TX j jc
N Sym – DL
TX jc TX jc TX jc TX jc
j j j j
ESS +f
MIMO- E PBCH + f MIMO Interfering energy per resource
----------------------------------------------
10
-----------------------------------------------
10
TX jc
j element (dBm/Sym) received
TX jc
j 10 N Sym – SS + 10 N Sym – PBCH TX i ic – TX j jc
SS PBCH 10 Log ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX j jc
- + fO over the SS and the PBCH
N Sym – SS + N Sym – PBCH (Method 2: non-synchronised
dBm/Sym
transmission and reception)
TX jc TX jc TX ic – TX jc
E j TX j jc
j
E PDCCH + f PDCCH
i j
TX j jc
--------------------
DLRS -
N Sym – DLRS ----------------------------------------------------------------------- N Sym – PDCCH
10 Log 10
10 10
-------------------------- + 10 -----------------------------
TX j jc TX j jc Interfering energy per resource
N Sym – DL N Sym – DL element (dBm/Sym) received
TX jc
j dBm/Sym over the PDCCH
PDCCH
TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
E PDSCH + f PDSCH TX j jc
(Method 2: non-synchronised
----------------------------------------------------------------------- N TX ic – TX j jc transmission and reception)
10 Sym – PDSCH
+ 10 - + fO i
----------------------------
TX j jc
N Sym – DL
458
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
TX jc TX jc TX ic – TX jc
E j TX jc E
j
+f
i j
TX jc
--------------------
DLRS
- j
N Sym – DLRS
PDCCH PDCCH
----------------------------------------------------------------------- j
N Sym – PDCCH
10 Log 10
10 10
-------------------------
TX jc
- + 10 -----------------------------
TX jc
j j Interfering energy per resource
N Sym – DL N Sym – DL element (dBm/Sym) received
TX j jc
PDSCH dBm/Sym over the PDSCH
TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
E PDSCH + f PDSCH TX jc
(Method 2: non-synchronised
----------------------------------------------------------------------- N j TX ic – TX j jc transmission and reception)
10 Sym – PDSCH
+ 10 - + fO i
----------------------------
TX jc
j
N Sym – DL
TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
EPDSCH + fPDSCH
----------------------------------------------------------------------
10
- TX j jc
10 N Sym – PDSCH
10 Log ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX j jc TX j jc
10 Interfering energy per frequency
N + N block (dBm/RB) received over 1
Sym – PDSCH Sym – PDCCH
frequency block during an OFDM
TX j jc
RSSI dBm/RB symbol carrying reference signals
TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
E PDCCH + f PDCCH TX j jc
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
10
TX j jc E DLRS For number of antenna ports > 1,
10 N Sym – PDCCH --------------------
10
-
TX j jc
TX i ic – TX j jc
- 10 + 10
+ --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 Min 2 N Ant – TX + f O 8 is used instead of encircled 10
TX j jc TX j jc
N Sym – PDSCH + N Sym – PDCCH
TX jc TX jc TX ic – TX jc TX ic – TX jc
j
f MIMO + f TL
j
+ f ICIC – DL
i j
+ f ABS – DL
i j
TX jc -
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 – AU j 10 10
TX i ic – TX j jc DL PDCCH interference weighting
f PDCCH dB
factor
TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
f
TL
+ f
ICIC – DL
+ f
ABS – DL
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX
j
jc
10
+ AU DL 10
TX jc TX jc TX ic – TX jc TX ic – TX jc
j
f MIMO + f TL
j
+ f ICIC – DL
i j
+ f ABS – DL
i j
TX j jc -
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 – AU DL 10
TX i ic – TX j jc 10 PDSCH interference weighting
f PDSCH dB
factor
TX TX TX ic – TX jc TX ic – TX jc
j j i j i j
G SA – G SA + f ICIC – DL + f ABS – DL
TX jc --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
+ AU DLj 10 10
459
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX ic TX ic
i i
TX ic E PBCH – n Sym
i dB PBCH C/N
CNR PBCH TX i ic TX i ic Mi
DL
With MIMO: CNR PBCH = CNR PBCH + G Div – PBCH + G Div
TX i ic TX i ic
TX i ic E PDCCH – n Sym
CNR PDCCH dB PDCCH C/N
TX i ic TX i ic Mi
DL
With MIMO: CNR PDCCH = CNR PDCCH + G Div – PDCCH + G Div
TX i ic TX i ic
TX ic E PDSCH – n Sym
i dB PDSCH C/N
CNR PDSCH TX i ic TX i ic Mi
DL
With MIMO: CNR PDSCH = CNR PDSCH + G Div – DL + G Div
TX jc TX ic
j n Sym
i
TX i ic -------------------
DLRS
TX i ic - ---------------------
CINR DLRS E DLRS – 10 Log 10 10 + I Inter – Tech + 10 10 + NR Inter – Tech
dB Downlink reference signals C/(I+N)
DL DL
All TXj jc
TX jc TX ic
j n Sym
i
TX i ic -------------------------
SS PBCH
TX ic - ---------------------
– 10 Log 10 +I + NR dB
i 10 Inter – Tech 10 Inter – Tech
CINR SS E SS + 10 SS C/(I+N)
DL DL
All TXj jc
TX jc TX ic
j n Sym
i
TX i ic -------------------------
SS PBCH
- ---------------------
E PBCH – 10 Log 10
+I + NR
10 Inter – Tech 10 Inter – Tech
+ 10
TX i ic DL DL
CINR PBCH All TXj jc dB PBCH C/(I+N)
TX ic TX ic M
i i i DL
With MIMO: CINR PBCH = CINR PBCH + G Div – PBCH + G Div
TX jc TX ic
j n Sym
i
TX i ic --------------------
PDCCH-
---------------------
E PDCCH – 10 Log 10 +I + NR
10 Inter – Tech 10 Inter – Tech
+ 10
TX i ic DL DL
CINR PDCCH All TXj jc dB PDCCH C/(I+N)
TX i ic TX i ic Mi
DL
With MIMO: CINR PDCCH = CINR PDCCH + G Div – PDCCH + G Div
TX jc TX ic
j n Sym
i
TX i ic --------------------
PDSCH-
---------------------
E PDSCH – 10 Log 10 10 + I Inter – Tech + 10 10 + NR Inter – Tech
TX i ic DL DL
CINR PDSCH All TXj jc dB PDSCH C/(I+N)
TX i ic TX i ic Mi
DL
With MIMO: CINR PDSCH = CINR PDSCH + G Div – DL + G Div
460
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
TX jc TX ic
j n
i
TX ic -------------------
RSSI
-
Sym
---------------------
10 Log RSSI + 10 +I 12 +
i 10 Inter – Tech 10
+ 10
DL
All TX j jc
TX i ic dBm
Received signal strength indicator
RSSI (RSSI)
TX ic
+ 10 Log N FB
Inter – Tech i
NR DL
TX jc TX ic
j n Sym
i
-------------------
DLRS -
---------------------
10 Log 10 10 + I Inter – Tech + 10 10
DL
All TXj jc
TX i ic dBm
Downlink reference signals total
I + N DLRS noise (I+N)
TX ic
+ 10 Log 2 N FB
Inter – Tech i
+ NR DL
TX jc TX ic
j n
i
-------------------------
SS PBCH
- ---------------------
Sym
10 Log 10 +I
10 Inter – Tech 10
+ 10
DL
All TXj jc
TX i ic dBm SS and PBCH total noise (I+N)
I + N SS PBCH
Inter – Tech
+ NR DL + 10 Log N SCa – FB N FB – SS PBCH
TX jc TX ic
j n Sym
i
--------------------
PDCCH-
---------------------
10 Log 10 10 + I Inter – Tech + 10 10
DL PDCCH total noise (I+N)
TX i ic All TXj jc
I + N PDCCH dBm (Method 1: synchronised
TX i ic transmission and reception)
N Sym – PDCCH
+ 10 Log TX ic - + NR Inter
---------------------------------------------- – Tech
TX i ic DL
i
N SF – DL + N TDD – SSF
TX jc TX ic
j n Sym
i
--------------------
PDCCH
- ---------------------
10 Log 10 10 + I Inter – Tech + 10 10
DL PDCCH total noise (I+N)
TX ic All TXj jc
I +
i
N PDCCH dBm (Method 2: non-synchronised
transmission and reception)
N TXi ic TX ic
i
Sym – PDSCH + N Sym – PDCCH – Tech
- + NR Inter
+ 10 Log -------------------------------------------------------------------
TX ic
i
DL
N SD Slot N Slot SF N SF – DL
TX jc TX ic
j n
i
--------------------
PDSCH
- ---------------------
Sym
10 Log 10 +I
10 Inter – Tech 10
+ 10
DL PDSCH total noise (I+N)
TX i ic All TXj jc
I + N PDSCH dBm (Method 1: synchronised
TX i ic transmission and reception)
N Sym – PDSCH
+ 10 Log TX ic - + NR Inter
---------------------------------------------- – Tech
i
TX i ic DL
N SF – DL + N TDD – SSF
461
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX jc TX ic
j n
i
--------------------
PDSCH
- ---------------------
Sym
10 Log 10 +I
10 Inter – Tech 10
+ 10
DL PDSCH total noise (I+N)
TX ic All TXj jc
I +
i
N PDSCH dBm (Method 2: non-synchronised
transmission and reception)
N TXi ic TX ic
i
Sym – PDSCH + N Sym – PDCCH – Tech
+ 10 Log - + NR Inter
-------------------------------------------------------------------
TX ic
i
DL
N SD Slot N Slot SF N SF – DL
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
P O_PUSCH CINR PUSCH – Max + NR UL + n PUSCH PUCCH – 10 Log N FB dBm Nominal PUSCH power
TX i ic
10 Log 7 7.5 If D CP = Normal Cyclic prefix factor, i.e., the ratio of
f CP TX i ic dB the useful symbol energy to the total
10 Log 6 7.5 If D CP = Extended symbol energy
0 If M i is an interferer
TX i ic TX i ic
n 0 – PUSCH PUCCH n 0 + 10 Log N FB W FB 1000 dBm PUSCH and PUCCH thermal noise
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
n PUSCH PUCCH n 0 – PUSCH PUCCH + nf dBm PUSCH and PUCCH noise
462
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
M
j
IPUSCH PUCCH TX i ic
non-ICIC M i n PUSCH PUCCH
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
- -------------------------------------------
10 Log
10 10
10 + 10
Uplink noise rise for any mobile Mi in
TX ic
i All M j
NR UL
dB cell centre of the interfered cell
All TX jc TXi(ic)
j
TX i ic
Inter – Tech
+ NR UL – n PUSCH PUCCH
M
j
IPUSCH PUCCH TX i ic
ICIC M n
i
------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
PUSCH PUCCH
10 Log
10 10
10 + 10
All Mj
TX i ic Uplink noise rise for any mobile Mi in
dB
All TXj jc
NR UL – ICIC
cell-edge of the interfered cell TXi(ic)
TX i ic
Inter – Tech
+ NR UL – n PUSCH PUCCH
463
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
Mi M
i TXi ic Mi Effective transmission power of a
M
i Max PAllowed – CINR PUSCH PUCCH – T M + M PC P Min dBm user equipment after power control
P Eff B i
UL adjustment
TX ic
if N Ant – TX = 1
i
8
Number of symbols reserved for
TX i ic TX ic
16 if N Ant – TX = 2 None downlink reference signals in one
i
N DLRS SRB
scheduler resource block
TX ic
if N Ant – TX = 4 or 8
i
24
464
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
TX ic
if N SD – PDCCH = 0 : 0
i
TX ic TX ic
if N SD – PDCCH = 1 AND N Ant – TX 2 :
i i
TX i ic
O PDCCH DwPTS TX ic TX ic TX i ic PDCCH overhead in the DwPTS
N i N SCa – FB – 4 N FB
i
N TDD – SSF
SD – PDCCH
Otherwise:
TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic
Min 2 N i i i i
SD – PDCCH N SCa – FB – 2 Min 4 N Ant – TX N FB N TDD – SSF
TX ic TX ic
Max
N i + N TDD – SSF
i
Maximum downlink throughput
TP UE – DL Max – DL SF – DL bps
N TBB TTI ---------------------------------------------------- capacity of a UE category
D Frame
465
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
Mi Mi TX i ic
Cap P – DL CTP P – DL TL DL – Max kbps Downlink peak RLC cell capacity
M M M
Cap P – DL 1 – BLER BDL
i i i kbps Downlink effective RLC cell capacity
Cap E – DL
Mi
Mi Mi f TP – Scaling Mi
Cap A – DL Cap E – DL ------------------------
- – TP Offset kbps Downlink application cell capacity
100
Mi
M Cap P – DL Downlink peak RLC throughput per
PUTP P – DL
i -----------------------
- kbps
TX i ic user
N Users – DL
Mi
Mi Cap E – DL Downlink effective RLC throughput
PUTP E – DL -----------------------
- kbps
TX i ic per user
N Users – DL
M
Mi i Downlink application throughput per
Mif TP – Scaling Mi
kbps
PUTP A – DL PUTP E – DL ------------------------
- – TPOffset user
100
TX ic
i
R UL M
i
B UL
---------------------------------
D Frame
TX ic
i
R UL Mi
B TX ic
UL i
Mi For proportional fair schedulers: --------------------------------- G MUG – UL
D Frame kbps Uplink peak RLC channel throughput
CTP P – UL
With SU-MIMO:
Max – TX ic
1 + f SU – MIMO G SU – MIMO – UL – 1
i
Mi = Mi
B UL B UL
466
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
M M M
Cap P – UL 1 – BLER B UL
i i i kbps Uplink effective RLC cell capacity
Cap E – UL
Mi
Mi Mi f TP – Scaling Mi
Cap A – UL Cap E – UL ------------------------
- – TP Offset kbps Uplink application cell capacity
100
Mi
M Mi N FB – UL Uplink peak RLC allocated bandwidth
i
ABTP P – UL CTP P – UL -----------------
TX i ic
- kbps
throughput
N FB
Cap Mi M
Min -----------------------
- ABTP P –i UL
Mi P – UL
PUTP P – UL TX i ic kbps Uplink peak RLC throughput per user
N Users – UL
Cap Mi M
Min -----------------------
- ABTP E –i UL
Mi E – UL Uplink effective RLC throughput per
PUTP E – UL TXi ic kbps
user
N Users – UL
Mi
Mi M f TP – Scaling M Uplink application throughput per
PUTP A – UL i
PUTP E – UL ------------------------
i
- – TP Offset kbps
100 user
Sel
TX ic M Remaining uplink cell resources after
TX i ic i i
TL UL – Max – R Min – UL None allocation for minimum throughput
R Rem – UL
Sel
Mi demands
Sel Sel
Sel
M Mi Mi
Max Remaining throughput demand for a
i
TPD Rem – DL Min TPD Max – DL – TPD Min – DL TP UE – DL kbps
mobile in downlink
467
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
Sel Sel
Sel
M M
i
M
i Max Remaining throughput demand for a
i
TPD Rem – UL Min TPD Max – UL – TPD Min – UL TP UE – UL kbps
mobile in uplink
Sel TX i ic
Mi R Rem – DL
Proportional Fair: Min RD Rem – DL ---------------------
N
Sel TX i ic
Mi R Rem – DL
Round Robin: Min RD Rem – DL --------------------
-
N
Sel
Sel
Mi Resources allocated to a mobile to
Mi TX i ic
RD Rem – DL
Proportional Demand: R Eff – Rem – DL ----------------------------------
- None satisfy its maximum throughput
R Max – DL Sel
Mi demand in downlink
RDRem – DL
Sel
Mi
Sel
M
i
TPD Rem – DL
Max C/I: ----------------------------
Sel
M
i
CTP P – DL
Sel TX i ic
Mi R Rem – UL
Proportional Fair: Min RD Rem – UL --------------------
-
N
Sel TX ic
i
Mi R Rem – DL
Round Robin: Min RD Rem – DL --------------------
-
N
Sel
Sel
Mi Resources allocated to a mobile to
Mi TX i ic
RD Rem – UL
Proportional Demand: R Eff – Rem – UL ----------------------------------
- None satisfy its maximum throughput
R Max – UL Sel
Mi demand in uplink
RDRem – UL
Sel
Mi
Sel
Mi
TPD Rem – UL
Max C/I: ---------------------------
Sel
-
Mi
CTP P – UL
Sel
TXi ic Mi Effective remaining downlink
TX i ic
R Eff – Rem – DL
Min R Rem – DL
RD Rem – DL
None resources in a cell
M
Sel (Proportional Demand)
i
468
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
Sel
TXi ic M Effective remaining uplink resources
TX ic
i
i Min R Rem – UL RD Rem – UL None in a cell
R Eff – Rem – UL
M
Sel (Proportional Demand)
i
Mi
Sel
Mi
Sel
R Max – DL CTP E – DL
Sel
Site
Max 1 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
Site M
i Site backhaul overflow ratio in
BHOF DL None
Sel Sel downlink
Mi Mi
Site
TP S1 – DL – R Min – DL CTP E – DL
M
Sel
i
Site
Mi
Sel
Mi
Sel
R Max – UL CTP E – UL
Sel
M i Site
BHOF UL
Site
Max 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ None Site backhaul overflow ratio in uplink
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
Site
TPS1 – UL – R Min – UL CTP E – UL
Sel
M i Site
Sel Sel
M M
Mi
Sel
Mi
Sel R i i
Max – DL CTP P – DL
Sel Sel R Min – DL CTP P – DL + ------------------------------------------------ Site
Total resources assigned to a mobile
Mi Mi BHOF DL None in downlink
TL DL = R DL ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sel (Downlink traffic load of the mobile)
Mi
CTP P – DL
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
Mi
Sel
Mi
Sel R
Max – UL CTP P – UL
Sel Sel R Min – UL CTP P – UL + ------------------------------------------------ Site
-
Total resources assigned to a mobile
M
i
M
i BHOF UL None in uplink
TL UL = R UL ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sel (Uplink traffic load of the mobile)
Mi
CTP P – UL
Sel Sel
Sel
Mi Mi Mi Downlink effective RLC user
UTP E – DL UTP P – DL 1 – BLER B DL kbps
throughput
Sel
Sel Mi
Mi Sel Sel Downlink application user
Mif TP – Scaling Mi kbps
UTP A – DL UTP E – DL ------------------------
- – TP Offset throughput
100
Sel Sel Sel
Mi Mi Mi
kbps Uplink peak RLC user throughput
UTP P – UL R UL CTP P – UL
Sel Sel
Sel
Mi M
i Mi
UTP E – UL UTP P – UL 1 – BLER B UL kbps Uplink effective RLC user throughput
Sel
Sel Sel Mi Sel
M Mif TP – Scaling Mi
i kbps Uplink application user throughput
UTP A – UL UTP E – UL ------------------------- – TP Offset
100
469
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
M M M M
i i i i
L ,G , L Ant , L Body , and f CP are not used in the calculations performed for the profile view.
470
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
Atoll uses parameters entered in the Condition tab of the coverage prediction properties dialogue to determine coverage
areas to display. There are three possibilities.
• All Servers
The coverage area of each cell TXi(ic) corresponds to the pixels where.
TX ic TX ic TX ic
MinimumThreshold C DLRS or L Total or L Path MaximumThreshold
i i i
TX ic TX ic TX ic
MinimumThreshold C DLRS or L Total or L Path MaximumThreshold
i i i
AND
TX i ic TX j jc
C DLRS Best C DLRS – M
ji
Where M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received downlink reference signal level from TXi(ic) is the highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received downlink reference signal level from TXi(ic) is either the
highest or within a 2 dB margin from the highest
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received downlink reference signal level from TXi(ic) is 2 dB higher
than the received downlink reference signal levels from the cells which are 2nd best servers
• Second Best Signal Level and a Margin
The coverage area of each cell TXi(ic) corresponds to the pixels where.
TX ic TX ic TX ic
MinimumThreshold C DLRS or L Total or L Path MaximumThreshold
i i i
AND
471
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX ic
nd TX jc
C DLRS 2 Best C DLRS – M
i j
ji
Where M is the specified margin (dB). The 2nd Best function considers the second highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received downlink reference signal level from TXi(ic) is the second
highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received downlink reference signal level from TXi(ic) is either the
second highest or within a 2 dB margin from the second highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received downlink reference signal level from TXi(ic) is 2 dB higher
than the received downlink reference signal levels from the cells which are 3rd best servers.
A pixel of a coverage area is coloured if the calculated value of the selected display parameter is greater than or equal to the
defined thresholds values. Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map.
It is possible to display the coverage predictions with colours depending on any transmitter or cell attribute, and other criteria
such as:
• Signal Level (dBm, dBµV, dBµV/m)
• Best Signal Level (dBm, dBµV, dBµV/m): Where cell coverage areas overlap, Atoll keeps the highest value of the signal
level.
• Path Loss (dB)
• Total Losses (dB)
• Best Server Path Loss (dB): Where cell coverage areas overlap, Atoll determines the best cell (i.e., the cell with the
highest downlink reference signal level) and evaluates the path loss from this cell.
• Best Server Total Losses (dB): Where cell coverage areas overlap, Atoll determines the best cell (i.e., the cell with the
highest downlink reference signal level) and evaluates the total losses from this cell.
• Number of Servers: Atoll evaluates the number of cells that cover a pixel (i.e., the pixel falls within the coverage areas
of these cells).
472
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
These coverage predictions are best server coverage predictions, i.e., the coverage area of each cell comprises the pixels
where the cell is the best server. Best server for each pixel is calculated as explained in "Best Server Determination" on
page 535.
A pixel of a coverage area is coloured if the calculated value of the selected display type parameter is greater than or equal to
the defined thresholds values. Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map.
It is possible to display the Effective Signal Analysis (DL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following display
options:
• RSRP (RS EPRE) Level (DL) (dBm)
• RS Signal Level (DL) (dBm)
• SS Signal Level (DL) (dBm)
• PBCH Signal Level (DL) (dBm)
• PDCCH Signal Level (DL) (dBm)
• PDSCH Signal Level (DL) (dBm)
• RS C/N Level (DL) (dB)
• SS C/N Level (DL) (dB)
• PBCH C/N Level (DL) (dB)
• PDCCH C/N Level (DL) (dB)
• PDSCH C/N Level (DL) (dB)
TX jc
j
• Delta Path Loss (dB): Atoll calculates the difference of the total losses from the second best serving cells ( L Total ) and
TX i ic TX j jc TX i ic
the total losses from the best serving cells ( L Total ) on each pixel of their coverage areas ( L Total – L Total ). Pixels are
coloured according to the thresholds defined in the coverage prediction. Total losses are calculated as explained in
"Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 453.
• ICIC Cell-edge Areas: Based on the delta path loss calculation as above. Pixels are coloured according to the colours of
the transmitter symbols on the map. The prediction is based on the delta path loss thresholds defined per cell.
It is possible to display the Effective Signal Analysis (UL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following display
options:
• PUSCH & PUCCH Signal Level (UL) (dBm)
• PUSCH & PUCCH C/N Level (UL) (dB)
473
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
These coverage predictions are all best server coverage predictions, i.e., the coverage area of each cell comprises the pixels
where the cell is the best server. Best server for each pixel is calculated as explained in "Best Server Determination" on
page 535.
A pixel of a coverage area is coloured if the calculated value of the selected display type parameter is greater than or equal to
the defined thresholds values. Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map.
It is possible to display the Coverage by C/(I+N) Level (DL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following display
options:
• RSRQ Level (DL) (dB)
• RSSI Level (DL) (dBm)
• RS C/(I+N) Level (DL) (dB)
• SS C/(I+N) Level (DL) (dB)
• PBCH C/(I+N) Level (DL) (dB)
• PDCCH C/(I+N) Level (DL) (dB)
• SS & PBCH Total Noise (I+N) (DL) (dBm)
• PDSCH C/(I+N) Level (DL) (dB)
• PDSCH & PDCCH Total Noise (I+N) (DL) (dBm)
It is possible to display the Service Area Analysis (DL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following display
options:
• Bearer (DL)
• Modulation (DL): Modulation used by the bearer
• Service
It is possible to display the Coverage by Throughput (DL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following display
options:
• Peak RLC Channel Throughput (DL) (kbps)
• Effective RLC Channel Throughput (DL) (kbps)
• Application Channel Throughput (DL) (kbps)
• Peak RLC Cell Capacity (DL) (kbps)
• Effective RLC Cell Capacity (DL) (kbps)
• Application Cell Capacity (DL) (kbps)
• Peak RLC Throughput per User (DL) (kbps)
• Effective RLC Throughput per User (DL) (kbps)
• Application Throughput per User (DL) (kbps)
It is possible to display the Coverage by Quality Indicator (DL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following
display options:
• Quality indicators available in the document (Quality Indicators table): Atoll calculates the PDSCH C/(I+N) levels
received from the best serving cells at each pixel of their coverage areas. From the C/(I+N), Atoll determines the best
bearer available on each pixel. Then, for the calculated C/(I+N) and bearer, it determines the value of the selected
quality indicator from the quality graphs defined in the reception equipment of the selected terminal.
It is possible to display the Coverage by C/(I+N) Level (UL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following display
options:
• PUSCH & PUCCH C/(I+N) Level (UL) (dB)
• PUSCH & PUCCH Total Noise (I+N) (UL) (dBm)
• Allocated Bandwidth (UL) (No. of Frequency Blocks)
M
i
• PUSCH & PUCCH C/(I+N) Level for 1 Frequency Block (UL) (dB): PUSCH & PUCCH C/(I+N) level with N FB – UL = 1
• Transmission Power (UL) (dBm)
474
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
It is possible to display the Service Area Analysis (UL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following display
options:
• Bearer (UL)
• Modulation (UL): Modulation used by the bearer
• Service
It is possible to display the Coverage by Throughput (UL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following display
options:
• Peak RLC Channel Throughput (UL) (kbps)
• Effective RLC Channel Throughput (UL) (kbps)
• Application Channel Throughput (UL) (kbps)
• Peak RLC Cell Capacity (UL) (kbps)
• Effective RLC Cell Capacity (UL) (kbps)
• Application Cell Capacity (UL) (kbps)
• Peak RLC Allocated Bandwidth Throughput (UL) (kbps)
• Effective RLC Allocated Bandwidth Throughput (UL) (kbps)
• Application Allocated Bandwidth Throughput (UL) (kbps)
• Peak RLC Throughput per User (UL) (kbps)
• Effective RLC Throughput per User (UL) (kbps)
• Application Throughput per User (UL) (kbps)
It is possible to display the Coverage by Quality Indicator (UL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following
display options:
• Quality indicators available in the document (Quality Indicators table): Atoll calculates the PUSCH and PUCCH C/(I+N)
levels received at the best serving cells from each pixel of their coverage areas. From the C/(I+N), Atoll determines the
best bearer available on each pixel. Then, for the calculated C/(I+N) and bearer, it determines the value of the selected
quality indicator from the quality graphs defined in the reception equipment of the best serving cell.
The resolution of the coverage prediction does not depend on the resolutions of the path loss matrices or the geographic data
and can be defined separately for each coverage prediction. Coverage predictions are generated using a bilinear interpolation
method from multi-resolution path loss matrices (similar to the one used to calculate site altitudes, see "Path Loss Calculation
Prerequisites" on page 57 for more information).
For more information on downlink reference signal level calculations, see "Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 501.
For more information on coverage area determination and available display options, see:
• "Coverage Area Determination" on page 475.
• "Coverage Display Types" on page 476.
Atoll uses parameters entered in the Condition tab of the coverage prediction properties dialogue to determine coverage
areas to display. It is possible to determine the coverage area based on the best signal level. The coverage area of each cell
TXi(ic) corresponds to the pixels where:
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX j jc
MinimumThreshold C DLRS or L Total or L Path MaximumThreshold AND C DLRS Best C DLRS – M
ji
Where M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received downlink reference signal level from TXi(ic) is the highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received downlink reference signal level from TXi(ic) is either the highest
or within a 2 dB margin from the highest
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received downlink reference signal level from TXi(ic) is 2 dB higher than
the received downlink reference signal levels from the cells which are 2nd best servers
475
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
A pixel of a coverage area is coloured if the calculated value of the selected display parameter is greater than or equal to the
defined thresholds values. Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map.
It is possible to display the coverage predictions with colours per cell or:
• Number of interferers
• Number of interferers per cell
Atoll determines the total number of users attempting connection in each simulation
based on the Poisson distribution. This may lead to slight variations in the total numbers
of users in different simulations. To have the same total number of users in each
simulation of a group, add the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[Simulation]
RandomTotalUsers=0
6.3.4.1.1 Simulations Based on User Profile Traffic Maps and Subscriber Lists
User profile environment based traffic maps: Each pixel of the map is assigned an environment class which contains a list of
user profiles with an associated mobility type and a given density, i.e., number of users of a user profile per km².
476
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
User profile traffic maps: Each polygon or line of the map is assigned a density of users with a given user profile and mobility
type. If the map is composed of points, each point is assigned a number of users with given user profile and mobility type.
Fixed subscribers listed in subscriber lists have a user profile assigned to each of them.
User profiles model the behaviour of the different user categories. Each user profile contains a list of services and parameters
describing how these services are accessed by the user.
The number of users of each user profile is calculated from the surface area (SEnv) of each environment class map (or each
polygon) and the user profile density (DUP).
N Users = S Env D UP
• In case of user profile traffic maps composed of lines, the number of users of each
user profile is calculated from the line length (L) and the user profile density (DUP)
(users per km): N Users = L D UP
• The number of users is a direct input when a user profile traffic map is composed of
points.
Atoll calculates the probability for a user being active at a given instant in the uplink and in the downlink according to the
service usage characteristics described in the user profiles, i.e., the number of voice calls or data sessions, the average
duration of each voice call, or the volume of the data transfer in the uplink and the downlink in each data session.
N Call D Call
Calculation of the service usage duration per hour ( p 0 : probability of an active call): p 0 = ----------------------------
-
3600
The activity status of each user depends on the activity periods during the call, i.e., the uplink and downlink activity
UL DL
factors defined for the voice type service v, f Act and f Act .
UL UL DL
Probability of being active in the uplink: p Active = f Act 1 – f Act
DL DL UL
Probability of being active in the downlink: p Active = f Act 1 – f Act
UL + DL UL DL
Probability of being active in the uplink and downlink both: p Active = f Act f Act
UL UL
Number of users active in the uplink: n v – Active = n v p Active
DL DL
Number of users active in the downlink: n v – Active = n v p Active
UL + DL UL + DL
Number of users active in the uplink and downlink both: n v – Active = n v p Active
Therefore, a connected user can be either active on both links, inactive on both links, active on UL only, or active on
DL only.
477
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
UL DL
Probability of being inactive: p Inactive = 1 – f 1 – f
UL UL DL
Probability of being active in the uplink: p Active = f 1 – f
DL DL UL
Probability of being active in the downlink: p Active = f 1 – f
UL + DL UL DL
Probability of being active in the uplink and downlink both: p Active = f f
UL UL
Number of users active in the uplink: n d – Active = N Users p Active
DL DL
Number of users active in the downlink: n d – Active = N Users p Active
UL + DL UL + DL
Number of users active in the uplink and downlink both: n d – Active = N Users p Active
Calculation of the number of active users trying to access the service d (nd):
UL DL UL + DL
n d = n d – Active + n d – Active + n d – Active
The user distribution per service and the activity status distribution between the users
are average distributions. The service and the activity status of each user are randomly
drawn in each simulation. Therefore, if you calculate several simulations at once, the
average number of users per service and average numbers of inactive, active on UL,
active on DL and active on UL and DL users, respectively, will correspond to calculated
distributions. But if you check each simulation, the user distribution between services as
well as the activity status distribution between users can be different in each of them.
UL DL
UL TP Cell DL TP Cell
N = ----------------------
- and N = ----------------------
-
UL DL
TP Average TP Average
UL
Where TP Cell is the total uplink throughput demand defined in the map for any service s for the coverage area of the
DL
transmitter, TP Cell is the total downlink throughput demand defined in the map for any service s for the coverage
UL DL
area of the transmitter, TP Average is the average uplink requested throughput of the service s, and TP Average is the
average downlink requested throughput of the service s.
• Sector Traffic Maps (# Active Users)
UL DL
Atoll directly uses the defined N and N values, i.e., the number of active users on UL and DL in the transmitter
coverage area using the service s.
478
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
At any given instant, Atoll calculates the probability for a user being active in the uplink and in the downlink as follows:
UL DL
Users active in the uplink and downlink both are included in the N and N values. Therefore, it is necessary to
UL DL UL + DL
accurately determine the number of active users in the uplink ( n Active ), in the downlink ( n Active ), and both ( n Active ).
As for the other types of traffic maps, Atoll considers both active and inactive users.
The activity status of each user depends on the activity periods during the call, i.e., the uplink and downlink activity
UL DL
factors defined for the service, f Act and f Act .
UL UL DL
Probability of being active in the uplink: p Active = f Act 1 – f Act
DL DL UL
Probability of being active in the downlink: p Active = f Act 1 – f Act
UL + DL UL DL
Probability of being active in the uplink and downlink both: p Active = f Act f Act
Where, n is the total number of active users in the transmitter coverage area using the service.
Calculation of number of users per activity status:
UL UL + DL DL UL + DL
UL + DL N p Active N p Active
Number of users active in the uplink and downlink both: n Active = Min ---------------------------------------
UL + DL
---------------------------------------
+ DL
or
p Active + p Active p Active + p UL
UL DL
Active
UL + DL UL DL DL UL
simply, n Active = Min N f Act N f Act
UL UL UL + DL
Number of users active in the uplink: n Active = N – n Active
DL DL UL + DL
Number of users active in the downlink: n Active = N – n Active
UL DL UL + DL
And, n = n Active + n Active + n Active
nv
- p Inactive
Number of inactive users: n Inactive = ---------------------------
1 – p Inactive
The activity status distribution between users is an average distribution. In fact, in each
simulation, the activity status of each user is randomly drawn. Therefore, if you calculate
several simulations at once, average numbers of inactive, active on UL, active on DL and
active on UL and DL users correspond to the calculated distribution. But if you check each
simulation, the activity status distribution between users can be different in each of
them.
479
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
M
i
• Mobile transmission power is set to the maximum mobile power ( P Max ).
TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic
i i i i i i
• Cell loads ( TL DL , TL UL , NR UL , NRUL – ICIC , r DL – CE , and AU DL ) are set to their current values in the
Cells table.
3. Determines the best servers for all the mobiles generated for the simulation, and determines whether they are in the
cell centre or cell-edge, as explained in "Best Server Determination" on page 535.
4. Sets the maximum PUSCH C/(I+N) of each cell to a value high enough to ensure that it will not cause any power
constraints for cell-edge mobiles.
TX i ic
For all the mobiles Mi served by any cell TXi(ic) in the uplink, Atoll calculates CINR PUSCH – Max as follows to ensure
access to the highest bearer using all the frequency blocks.
From fractional power control (see "Signal Level Calculation (UL)" on page 523), we know that:
Mi
P Allowed = CINR PUSCH – Max + NRUL + n PUSCH PUCCH + FPC L Total (1)
Where CINR PUSCH – Max is the maximum PUSCH C/(I+N), NRUL is the noise rise, n PUSCH PUCCH is the uplink thermal
noise, FPC is the fractional power control factor, and L Total are the total losses.
Mi
Transmitting P Allowed , a mobile Mi can access the highest bearer if:
Mi Mi
P Allowed – NR UL – n PUSCH PUCCH – L Total = T B (2)
Mi
Where T B is the bearer selection thresholds of the highest bearer defined in the reception equipment used by the
cell TXi(ic).
Mi
Combining equations (1) and (2), we get the CINR PUSCH – Max for each mobile Mi that ensures access to the highest
bearer:
M M TX ic
CINR PUSCH – Max = T B + 1 – FPC L Total
i i i
TX ic M
CINR PUSCH – Max = Max CINR PUSCH – Max
i i
All M
i
480
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
9. Updates the traffic loads, and noise rise values of all the cells according to the resources in use and the total resources
as follows:
Calculation of Traffic Loads:
Atoll calculates the traffic loads for all the cells TXi(ic).
TX ic M TX ic M
RDL and TLUL RUL
i i i i
TL DL = =
Mi Mi
MU – MIMO – DL MU – MIMO – UL
TX i ic Mi TX i ic Mi
For MU-MIMO, TL DL = RC DL and TL UL = RC UL
MU – MIMO – DL MU – MIMO – UL
M M
i i
481
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
CE
M
i
Where R DL is the sum of the percentages of the downlink cell resources allocated to mobiles in the cell-edge.
CE
M
i
M
i
Where R DL is the sum of the percentages of the downlink cell resources allocated to mobiles served by the
AAS
Mi
AAS
smart antennas.
10. Performs uplink noise rise control as follows:
For each cell TXi(ic), Atoll calculates the difference between the current and the maximum noise rise values (in terms
of IoT, i.e., the ratio of interference over thermal noise I/N which can be calculated from the noise rise:
IoT = I/N = (I+N)/N - 1):
TX ic TX ic
NR i NR i
TX i ic ------------------------
UL
- -------------------------------
UL – Max
-
= 10 Log 10 – 1 – 10 Log 10 – 1
10 10
NR UL
TX ic
i
Here NRUL is the uplink noise rise of the cell TXi(ic) calculated in step 9.
The default method of uplink noise rise control is the best effort method. This means that uplink noise rise control is
not part of the simulation convergence criteria. In other words, a simulation will converge once the downlink and
uplink traffic loads and the uplink noise rise values are stable, irrespective of whether or not the noise rise control has
been successful. The resulting noise rise values may be higher than the maximum allowed values defined per cell. If
the resulting noise rise values are higher than the maximum allowed, this means that the noise rise control requires
more iterations for stabilising the overall network’s noise rise than those needed by the simulation to converge. If you
wish to achieve optimum noise rise control, you should decrease the uplink noise rise convergence threshold defined
for the simulation so that the simulation takes more iterations to converge and allows noise rise control to reach its
goal. The best effort noise rise control works as follows:
TX i ic
• If NR UL 0 , the cell TXi(ic) requests its neighbouring cells to decrease the uplink transmission powers of the
mobiles they serve (mobiles interfering TXi(ic)).
TX i ic
• If 0 NR UL M NRC , the cell TXi(ic) does not request any change.
TX i ic
• If NR UL M NRC , the cell TXi(ic) requests its neighbouring cells to increase the uplink transmission powers of
the mobiles they serve (mobiles interfering TXi(ic)).
Here M NRC is a noise rise control margin set to -1 dB by default. This value can be changed through Atoll.ini file by
adding the following lines and setting it to a value other than "1" (positive values are considered as negative margins):
[LTE]
NR_CONTROL_MARGIN_MIN = 1
The uplink transmission powers of the mobiles in neighbouring cells of the cell TXi(ic) are adjusted according to the
request in the next iteration by updating the maximum PUSCH C/(I+N) for the neighbouring cells TXj(jc):
TX j jc TX j jc TX i ic TX jc
= Min CINR PUSCH – Max CINR PUSCH – Max CINR PUSCH – Limit
j
CINR PUSCH – Max – NRUL
k k–1
482
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
TX jc
j
Here CINR PUSCH – Max is the maximum PUSCH C/(I+N) for the neighbouring cell TXj(jc) in the current iteration k,
k
TX jc
j
CINR PUSCH – Max is the maximum PUSCH C/(I+N) for the neighbouring cell TXj(jc) in the previous iteration k-1,
k–1
TX jc
j
CINR PUSCH – Limit is an upper limit fixed at 50 dB, and CINR PUSCH – Max is the maximum PUSCH C/(I+N) for the
neighbouring cell TXj(jc) as calculated in step 4.
If you wish to include the uplink noise rise control in the simulation convergence criteria, you can change the uplink
noise rise control method from best effort to strict by setting the following option in the Atoll.ini file:
[LTE]
ULNRControlMethod = 1
The strict uplink noise rise control method makes the uplink noise rise control a part of the simulation convergence
criteria. In other words, a simulation will converge once the downlink and uplink traffic loads and the uplink noise rise
values are stable, and the uplink noise rise values of all the cells are less than or equal to the defined maximum uplink
noise rise. The strict noise rise control works as follows:
TX i ic
• If NR UL 0 , the cell TXi(ic) requests its neighbouring cells to decrease the uplink transmission powers of the
mobiles they serve (mobiles interfering TXi(ic)).
TX i ic
• If NR UL m NRC , the cell TXi(ic) requests its neighbouring cells to increase the uplink transmission powers of
the mobiles they serve (mobiles interfering TXi(ic)).
Here m NRC is a noise rise control precision level set to 0.5 dB by default. This value can be changed through Atoll.ini
file by adding the following lines:
[LTE]
ULNRControlPrecision = 5
Setting this option to X means that the precision will be taken as 0.X dB. The default value is 5 (= 0.5 dB).
The uplink transmission powers of the mobiles in neighbouring cells of the cell TXi(ic) are adjusted according to the
request in the next iteration by updating the maximum PUSCH C/(I+N) for the neighbouring cells TXj(jc):
TX j jc TX jc TX i ic TX jc
= Min CINR PUSCH – Max CINR PUSCH – Max CINR PUSCH – Limit
j j
CINR PUSCH – Max – NR UL
k k–1
TX jc
j
Here CINR PUSCH – Max is the maximum PUSCH C/(I+N) for the neighbouring cell TXj(jc) in the current iteration k,
k
TX j jc
CINR PUSCH – Max is the maximum PUSCH C/(I+N) for the neighbouring cell TXj(jc) in the previous iteration k-1, and
k–1
TX j jc
CINR PUSCH – Max is the maximum PUSCH C/(I+N) for the neighbouring cell TXj(jc) as calculated in step 4.
At most six neighbouring cells are considered in uplink noise rise control. These six
neighbouring cells are those whose served mobiles generate the highest interference for
the studied cell.
11. Performs the convergence test to see whether the differences between the previous and current values are within the
convergence thresholds.
The convergence criteria are evaluated at the end of each iteration k, and can be written as follows:
TX i ic TX ic TX i ic
Max TL DL
i
TL DL = – TL DL
k All TX ic
k k – 1
i
TX i ic TX ic TX i ic
Max TL UL
i
TL UL = – TL UL
k All TX ic k k – 1
i
TX ic TX ic TX ic
Max NR UL
i i i
NR UL = – NR UL
k All TX ic k k – 1
i
483
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX ic TX ic TX ic
i i i
If TL DL , TL UL , and NR UL are the simulation convergence thresholds defined when creating
Req Req Req
the simulation, Atoll stops the simulation in the following cases.
Convergence: Simulation has converged between iteration k - 1 and k, with the best effort uplink noise rise control, if:
TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic
i i i i i i
TL DL TL DL AND TL UL TL UL AND NR UL NR UL
k Req k Req k Req
Simulation has converged between iteration k - 1 and k, with the strict uplink noise rise control, if:
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
TL DL TL DL AND TL UL TL UL AND NR UL NR UL AND
k Req k Req k Req
TX ic TX ic
i i
NRUL NR UL – Max
k
No convergence: Simulation has not converged even after the defined maximum number of iterations, with the best
effort uplink noise rise control, if:
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
TL DL TL DL OR TL UL TL UL OR NR UL NR UL
k Req k Req k Req
Simulation has not converged even after the defined maximum number of iterations, with the strict uplink noise rise
control, if:
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
TL DL TL DL OR TL UL TL UL OR NR UL NR UL OR
k Req k Req k Req
TX i ic TX i ic
NRUL NR UL – Max
k
12. Repeats the above steps (from step 3.) for the iteration k+1 using the new calculated loads as the current loads.
Simulation Results
At the end of the simulation process, the main results obtained are:
• Downlink traffic loads
• Uplink traffic loads
• Uplink noise rise
• Downlink ICIC ratio
• Uplink ICIC noise rise
• Downlink AAS usage
• Number of co-scheduled MU-MIMO users (DL)
• Number of co-scheduled MU-MIMO users (UL)
• Maximum PUSCH C/(I+N)
• Number of connected users in downlink
• Number of connected users in uplink
These results can be used as input for C/(I+N)-based coverage predictions.
In addition to the above parameters, the simulations also list the connection status of each mobile. Mobiles can be rejected
due to:
• No Coverage: If an LTE mobile does not have any best serving cell with cell type "LTE" and if an LTE-A mobile does not
have any best serving primary cell with cell type "LTE-A PCell" (step 3.)
• No Service: If the mobile is not able to access a bearer in the direction of its activity (step 5.), i.e., UL, DL, or DL+UL, or
if the mobile’s minimum throughput demand is higher than the UE throughput capacity.
• Scheduler Saturation: If the mobile is not in the list of mobiles selected for scheduling (step 7.). For LTE-A mobiles,
this applies to the mobiles selected for scheduling by their primary cells.
• Resource Saturation: If all the cell resources are used up before allocation to the mobile or if, for a user active in
uplink, the minimum uplink throughput demand is higher than the uplink allocated bandwidth throughput (step 7.).
For LTE-A mobiles, this applies to their primary cells.
• Backhaul Saturation: If allocating resources to a mobile makes the effective RLC aggregate site throughputs exceed
the maximum S1 interface throughputs defined for the site. This condition is only verified if the simulation was created
with the Backhaul capacity check box selected (step 7.)
Connected mobiles (step 7.) can be:
• Connected UL: If a mobile active in UL is allocated resources in UL.
• Connected DL: If a mobile active in DL is allocated resources in DL.
• Connected DL+UL: If a mobile active in DL+UL is allocated resources in DL+UL.
484
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
Input
TX i ic TX i ic
Configuration N SF – DL N TDD – SSF
FDD 10 0
DSUUU-DSUUU 2 2
DSUUD-DSUUD 4 2
DSUDD-DSUDD 6 2
DSUUU-DSUUD 3 2
485
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX ic TX ic
Configuration i i
N SF – DL N TDD – SSF
DSUUU-DDDDD 6 1
DSUUD-DDDDD 7 1
DSUDD-DDDDD 8 1
TX i ic
• N Ant – TX : Number of transmission (downlink) antenna ports defined for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• P Max : Maximum transmission power of the cell TXi(ic).
TX ic
i
• EPRE DLRS : Downlink reference signal EPRE of the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic TX i ic
You can either set the P Max or EPRE DLRS for a cell.
TX ic
i
• EPRE SS : Energy per resource element offset for the SS with respect to the downlink reference signals EPRE.
TX i ic
• EPRE PBCH : Energy per resource element offset for the PBCH with respect to the downlink reference signals EPRE.
TX i ic
• EPRE PDCCH : Energy per resource element offset for the PDCCH with respect to the downlink reference signals EPRE.
TX i ic
• EPRE PDSCH : Energy per resource element offset for the PDSCH with respect to the downlink reference signals EPRE.
Calculations
If you have directly entered the downlink reference signal EPRE for the cell, you can skip the section "Calculation of Downlink
Reference Signal EPRE" on page 486 and go directly to the section "Calculation of Other EPREs and Per-channel Powers" on
page 491.
Calculation of Downlink Reference Signal EPRE
In LTE, a resource block (RB) is defined as 1 frequency block by 1 slot. However, schedulers are able to perform resource
allocation every subframe (2 slots). 1 frequency block by 1 subframe (2 slots) is called a scheduler resource block (SRB) in the
calculations below.
The number of modulation symbols (resource elements) per scheduler resource block is calculated as follows:
N Sym SRB = N SCa – FB N SD Slot N Slot SF
Where N SCa – FB is the number of subcarriers per frequency block calculated as follows:
W FB
N SCa – FB = ---------
-
F
The number of modulation symbols (resource elements) corresponding to the DwPTS per scheduler resource block in the TDD
special subframes is calculated as follows:
DwPTS DwPTS
N Sym SSF = N SCa – FB N SD SSF
DwPTS
Where N SD SSF is the number of DwPTS symbol durations (OFDM symbols) per special subframe, determined from the TDD
special subframe configuration according to the 3GPP specifications as follows:
486
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
0 3 10 3 8
1 9 4 8 3
1
2 10 3 1 9 2
3 11 2 10 1
4 12 1 3 7
5 3 9 8 2 2
6 9 3 9 1
2
7 10 2
8 11 1
The total number of modulation symbols (resource elements) in downlink is calculated as follows:
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
DwPTS
N Sym – DL = N FB N Sym SRB N SF – DL + N FB N TDD – SSF N Sym SSF
Out of the total number of modulation symbols, Atoll then determines the numbers of modulation symbols corresponding to
each control channel as follows:
The number of modulation symbols for the downlink reference signals
The number of modulation symbols reserved for downlink reference signal transmission in one scheduler resource
block depends on the number of transmission antenna ports:
TX ic
if N Ant – TX = 1
i
8
TX i ic TX ic
For all subframes except the TDD special subframes: N Res SRB = 16 if N Ant – TX = 2
i
TX ic
if N Ant – TX = 4 or 8
i
24
1 2 1 2
2 4 2 4
0 3 3
4 8 4 8
8 8 8 8
1 6 1 6
2 12 2 12
1 9 8
4 20 4 20
8 20 8 20
1 6 1 6
2 12 2 12
2 10 9
4 20 4 20
8 20 8 20
1 6 1 8
2 12 2 16
3 11 10
4 20 4 24
8 20 8 24
487
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
1 8 1 2
2 16 2 4
4 12 3
4 24 4 8
8 24 8 8
1 2 1 6
2 4 2 12
5 3 8
4 8 4 20
8 8 8 20
1 6 1 6
2 12 2 12
6 9 9
4 20 4 20
8 20 8 20
1 6
2 12
7 10
4 20
8 20
1 6
2 12
8 11
4 20
8 20
The number of modulation symbols used for downlink reference signal transmission in one scheduler resource block
is:
TX ic
if N Ant – TX = 1
i
8
TX i ic TX ic
For all subframes except the TDD special subframes: N DLRS SRB = 8 if N Ant – TX = 2
i
TX ic
if N Ant – TX = 4 or 8
i
6
1 2 1 2
2 2 2 2
0 3 3
4 2 4 2
8 2 8 2
1 6 1 6
2 6 2 6
1 9 8
4 5 4 5
8 5 8 5
488
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
1 6 1 6
2 6 2 6
2 10 9
4 5 4 5
8 5 8 5
1 6 1 8
2 6 2 8
3 11 10
4 5 4 6
8 5 8 6
1 8 1 2
2 8 2 2
4 12 3
4 6 4 2
8 6 8 2
1 2 1 6
2 2 2 6
5 3 8
4 2 4 5
8 2 8 5
1 6 1 6
2 6 2 6
6 9 9
4 5 4 5
8 5 8 5
1 6
2 6
7 10
4 5
8 5
1 6
2 6
8 11
4 5
8 5
This gives a number of downlink reference signal modulation symbols per frame:
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
N Sym – DLRS = N SF – DL N FB N DLRS SRB + N TDD – SSF N FB N DLRS DwPTS
489
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
The physical downlink control channel can be transmitted over up to 4 symbol durations in each subframe. The
number of symbol durations for the PDCCH is defined in the global network settings. The physical downlink control
channel overlaps with the downlink reference signals, therefore, some modulation symbols reserved for downlink
reference signals are subtracted:
TX ic
if N SD – PDCCH = 0 :
i
TX i ic
N Sym – PDCCH = 0
TX ic TX ic
if N SD – PDCCH = 1 AND N Ant – TX 2 :
i i
TX ic TX ic TX ic
N i i i
SD – PDCCH N SCa – FB – 4 N FB
TX i ic N SF – DL
N Sym – PDCCH =
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
+ N SD – PDCCH N SCa – FB – 4 N FB N TDD – SSF
Otherwise:
TX ic TX ic TX ic TX i ic
N i i i
SD – PDCCH N SCa – FB – 2 Min 4 N Ant – TX N FB
TX i ic N SF – DL
N Sym – PDCCH =
TX ic TX ic TX ic TX i ic
+ Min 2 N SD – PDCCH N SCa – FB – 2 Min 4 N Ant – TX N FB
i i i
N TDD – SSF
The energy per resource element for 1 modulation symbol (dBm/Sym) of the downlink reference signals is calculated as
follows:
• If the reference signal EPRE calculation method is set to Calculated (equal distribution of unused EPRE):
TX ic
P i
TX i ic --------------------
Max
- TX i ic TX i ic
EPRE DLRS
= 10 Log 10
10 DwPTS
N SD Slot N Slot SF N SF – DL + N TDD – SSF N SD SSF –
TX ic TX ic
EPRE SS
i
EPRE PBCH
i
TX ic ----------------------------------- -----------------------------------
10 L og N Sym – DLRS + N Sym – SS 10
i 10 10
+ N Sym – PBCH 10
TX i ic TX i ic
EPRE PDCCH EPRE PDSCH
------------------------------------ ------------------------------------
+ N Sym – PDCCH 10
10
+ N Sym – PDSCH 10
10
• If the reference signal EPRE calculation method is set to Calculated (with boost) or Calculated (without boost):
490
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
TX ic
P i
TX ic --------------------
Max
- TX ic TX ic
= 10 Log 10 N SD Slot N Slot SF N SF – DL + N TDD – SSF N SD SSF –
i 10 i i DwPTS
EPRE DLRS
TX ic TX ic
EPRE SS
i
EPRE PBCH
i
TX ic ----------------------------------- -----------------------------------
10 L og N Sym – Res + N Sym – SS 10
i 10 10
+ N Sym – PBCH 10
TX ic TX ic
EPRE PDSCH
i i
EPRE PDCCH
------------------------------------ ------------------------------------
+ N Sym – PDCCH 10
10
+ N Sym – PDSCH 10
10
The energy per resource element for 1 modulation symbol (dBm/Sym) of the PBCH is calculated as follows:
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
EPRE PBCH = EPRE DLRS + EPRE PBCH
The energy per resource element for 1 modulation symbol (dBm/Sym) of the PDCCH is calculated as follows:
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
EPRE PDCCH = EPRE DLRS + EPRE PDCCH
The energy per resource element for 1 modulation symbol (dBm/Sym) of the PDSCH is calculated as follows:
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
EPRE PDSCH = EPRE DLRS + EPRE PDSCH
If the reference signal EPRE calculation method is set to Calculated (with boost), the "boosted" RS energy per resource
element is calculated as follows:
TX i ic TX i ic N TXi ic
+ 10 Log -------------------------
Sym – Res
EPRE DLRS = EPRE DLRS -
TXi ic
N Sym – DLRS
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
P DLRS = EPRE DLRS + 10 Log 2 N FB
TX ic
i
Where 2 NFB implies that at the instant when downlink reference signals are transmitted, they are transmitted using 2
subcarriers in each frequency block.
The instantaneous SS transmission power is calculated as follows:
TX i ic TX i ic
P SS = EPRE SS + 10 Log N SCa – FB N FB – SS PBCH
Where N SCa – FB N FB – SS PBCH implies that at the instant when the SS and the PBCH are transmitted, they are transmitted
using all the subcarriers in the centre 6 consecutive frequency blocks.
The average PDCCH transmission power is calculated as follows:
TX i ic
TX i ic
TX i ic N Sym–PDCCH
P PDCCH = EPRE PDCCH + 10 Log ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic
N SD – PDCCH N SF – DL + Min 2 N SD – PDCCH N TDD – SSF
i i i i
491
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX ic
TX ic TX ic i
N Sym–PDSCH
= EPRE PDSCH + 10 Log --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
i i
P PDSCH
TX ic TX ic
N N – N
i N i
SD Slot Slot SF SD – PDCCH SF – DL
DwPTS
TX i ic
TX i ic
+ N SD SSF – Min 2 N SD – PDCCH N TDD – SSF
As the number of subcarriers used for the PDCCH and PDSCH transmission varies over time, i.e., from one symbol duration to
the next, the instantaneous powers of the PDCCH and the PDSCH also vary over time. This is why average transmission powers
are calculated and used in Atoll.
EPRE and Transmission Power adjustment for ICIC
The following applies to RS, PDCCH, and PDSCH EPREs for cells using downlink static ICIC.
1. No ICIC, time-switched FFR, and hard FFR
Cell-edge and cell-centre frequency blocks are not transmitted at the same time. Therefore,
TX i ic TX i ic
TX i ic TX i ic N FB TX i ic TX i ic N FB
EPRE DLRS CC = EPRE DLRS -----------------
TX i ic
and EPRE DLRS CE = EPRE DLRS -----------------
TX i ic
N FB – CC N FB – CE
TX i ic TX i ic
TX i ic TX i ic
N FB TX i ic TX i ic N FB
EPRE PDCCH CC = EPRE PDCCH -----------------
TX i ic
and EPRE PDCCH CE = EPRE PDCCH -----------------
TX i ic
N FB – CC N FB – CE
TX ic TX ic
i i
TX i ic TX i ic
N FB TX i ic TX i ic N FB
EPRE PDSCH CC = EPRE PDSCH -----------------
TX ic
and EPRE PDSCH CE = EPRE PDSCH -----------------
TX ic
i i
N FB – CC N FB – CE
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
P DLRS CC = P DLRS CE = P DLRS
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
P PDCCH CC = P PDCCH CE = P PDCCH
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
P PDSCH CC = P PDSCH CE = P PDSCH
TX i ic
TX i ic TX i ic N FB TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
EPRE PDCCH CC = EPRE PDCCH ---------------------------------------------------------------------
- and EPRE PDCCH CE = EPRE PDCCH CC CE
TX ic TX ic TX i ic
i N i
CE FB – CE + N FB – CC
TX i ic
TX i ic TX i ic N FB TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
EPRE PDSCH CC = EPRE PDSCH ---------------------------------------------------------------------- and EPRE PDSCH CE = EPRE PDSCH CC CE
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
N FB – CE + N FB – CC
CE
TX i ic TX i ic
TX i ic TX i ic EPRE DLRS CC TX i ic TX i ic EPRE
DLRS CE
P DLRS CC = P DLRS -----------------------------
TX i ic
- and P DLRS CE = P DLRS -----------------------------
TX i ic
-
EPRE DLRS EPRE DLRS
TX i ic TX i ic
TX i ic TX i ic
EPRE PDCCH CC TX i ic TX i ic EPRE PDCCH CE
P PDCCH CC = P PDCCH ---------------------------------
TX i ic
- and P PDCCH CE = P PDCCH ---------------------------------
TX i ic
EPRE PDCCH EPRE PDCCH
492
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
TX ic TX ic
i i
TX ic TX ic EPRE PDSCH CC TX ic TX ic EPRE PDSCH CE
i i i i
P PDSCH CC = P PDSCH --------------------------------
TX ic
- and P PDSCH CE = P PDSCH --------------------------------
TX ic
-
i i
EPRE PDSCH EPRE PDSCH
TX ic EPRE CE
i
In the above, CE is the cell-edge power boost for cell TXi(ic)’s frame configuration. By definition: CE = -----------------
-
EPRE CC
TX i ic
TX i ic TX i ic N FB – CC
If CE is left empty, it is automatically calculated as follows: CE = -----------------
TX i ic
N FB – CE
TX i ic TX i ic
N FB – CC and N FB – CE are respectively the numbers of frequency blocks in cell centre and cell-edge of TXi(ic).
TX i ic TX i ic
Time-switched FFR N FB N FB – CEx
TX i ic TX i ic
Hard FFR N FB – CEx N FB – CEx
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
Soft FFR N FB – N FB – CEx N FB – CEx
TX i ic TX ic TX ic TX ic TX i ic
– N FB – CE0 + N FB – CE1 + N FB – CE2
Partial soft FFR i i i
N FB N FB – CEx
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
Where N FB – CEx can be N FB – CE0 , N FB – CE1 , or N FB – CE2 depending on the PSS ID of TXi(ic).
Output
TX ic
i
• EPRE DLRS : Energy per resource element of the downlink reference signals for cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• EPRE SS : Energy per resource element of the SS for cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• EPRE PBCH : Energy per resource element of the PBCH for cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• EPRE PDCCH : Energy per resource element of the PDCCH for cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• EPRE PDSCH : Energy per resource element of the PDSCH for cell TXi(ic).
TX ic
i
• P DLRS : Instantaneous transmission power of the downlink reference signals for cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• P SS : Instantaneous transmission power of the SS for cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• P PBCH : Instantaneous transmission power of the PBCH for cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• P PDCCH : Average transmission power of the PDCCH for cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• P PDSCH : Average transmission power of the PDSCH for cell TXi(ic).
493
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
The following sections describe how the co- and adjacent channel overlaps are calculated between the channels used by any
studied cell TXi(ic) and any other cell TXj(jc) of the network. In terms of interference calculation, the studied cell can be
considered a victim of interference received from the other cells that might be interfering the studied cell.
TX ic
i
If the studied cell is assigned a channel number N Channel , it receives co-channel interference on the channel bandwidth of
TX i ic TX i ic
N Channel , and adjacent channel interference on the adjacent channel bandwidths, i.e., corresponding to N Channel – 1 and
TX i ic
N Channel + 1 .
In order to calculate the co- and adjacent channel overlaps between two channels, it is necessary to calculate the start and
end frequencies of both channels (explained in "Conversion From Channel Numbers to Start and End Frequencies" on
page 494). Once the start and end frequencies are known for the studied and other cells, the co- and adjacent overlaps and
the total overlap ratio are calculated as respectively explained in:
• "Co-Channel Overlap Calculation" on page 495.
• "Adjacent Channel Overlap Calculation" on page 496.
• "Total Overlap Ratio Calculation" on page 496.
TX i ic TX j jc
• F Start – Band and F Start – Band : Start frequencies of the frequency bands assigned to the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
F Start – Band can be the start frequency of a TDD frequency band ( F Start – TDD ), or the uplink or the downlink start
frequency of an FDD frequency band ( F Start – FDD – UL or F Start – FDD – DL ).
First – TX i ic First – TX j jc
• N Channel and N Channel : First channel numbers the frequency band assigned to the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
TX i ic TX j jc
• N Channel and N Channel : Channel numbers assigned to cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
For FDD networks, Atoll considers that the same channel number is assigned to a cell in the downlink and uplink, i.e.,
the channel number you assign to a cell is considered for uplink and downlink both.
TX i ic TX j jc
• W Channel and W Channel : Bandwidths of the channels assigned to cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
TX i ic TX j jc
• ICS Band and ICS Band : Inter-channel spacing of the frequency bands assigned to cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
TX i ic TX j jc
• CN Band and CN Band : Channel number step of the frequency bands assigned to cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
494
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
Calculations
Channel numbers are converted into start and end frequencies as follows:
For cell TXi(ic):
TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic N TXi ic – N First – TX i ic
+ W Channel + ICS Band -------------------------------------------------------
-
i i i i Channel Channel
F Start = F Start – Band TX i ic
CN Band
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
F End = F Start + W Channel
TX j jc TX j jc TX j jc TX j jc N TXj jc – N First – TX j jc
= F Start – Band + W Channel + ICS Band -------------------------------------------------------
-
Channel Channel
F Start TX jc
j
CN Band
TX j jc TX j jc TX j jc
F End = F Start + W Channel
Output
TX ic TX jc
i j
• F Start and F Start : Start frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
TX i ic TX j jc
• F End and F End : End frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
TX i ic TX j jc
• F Start and F Start : Start frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Conversion From Channel
Numbers to Start and End Frequencies" on page 494.
TX i ic TX j jc
• F End and F End : End frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Conversion From Channel
Numbers to Start and End Frequencies" on page 494.
TX ic
i
• W Channel : Bandwidth of the channel assigned to the studied cell TXi(ic).
Calculations
Atoll first verifies that co-channel overlap exists between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
Co-channel overlap exists if:
TX i ic TX j jc TX i ic TX j jc
F Start F End AND F End F Start
TX i ic – TX j jc TX jc TX ic TX jc TX ic
= Min FEnd F End – Max F Start F Start
j i j i
W CCO
The co-channel overlap ratio is given by:
TX ic – TX jc
TX i ic – TX j jc i j
W CCO
r CCO = ----------------------------------
-
TX j jc
W Channel
Output
TX i ic – TX j jc
• r CCO : Co-channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
495
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX ic TX jc
i j
• F Start and F Start : Start frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Conversion From Channel
Numbers to Start and End Frequencies" on page 494.
TX i ic TX j jc
• F End and F End : End frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Conversion From Channel
Numbers to Start and End Frequencies" on page 494.
TX i ic
• W Channel : Bandwidth of the channel assigned to the studied cell TXi(ic).
Calculations
Atoll first verifies that adjacent channel overlaps exist between (the lower-frequency and the higher-frequency adjacent
channels of) the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
Adjacent channel overlap exists on the lower-frequency adjacent channel if:
TX i ic TX i ic TX j jc TX i ic TX j jc
F Start – W Channel F End AND F Start F Start
TX i ic – TX j jc TX jc TX ic TX jc TX ic TX ic
= Min F End F Start – Max F Start F Start – W Channel
j i j i i
W ACO
L
TX i ic – TX j jc TX j jc TX i ic TX ic TX jc TX ic
= Min F End F End + W Channel – Max F Start F End
i j i
W ACO
H
Output
TX ic – TX jc
i j
• r ACO : Adjacent channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
TX i ic – TX j jc
• r CCO : Co-channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Co-Channel Overlap
Calculation" on page 495.
496
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
TX ic – TX jc
i j
• r ACO : Adjacent channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Adjacent Channel
Overlap Calculation" on page 496.
TX ic
i
• f ACS : Adjacent channel suppression factor defined for the frequency band of the cell TXi(ic).
Calculations
Output
TX i ic – TX j jc
• rO : Total co- and adjacent channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
497
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
• If the ABS pattern is empty, it means that there are no almost blank subframes defined and all the subframes can
carry traffic.
FDD example: NULL = “0” = “0*” = “0000000000000000000000000000000000000000”
3. The ABS pattern determined in step 2. is resized to 80 bits. More precisely, the ABS pattern is concatenated with itself.
Examples:
• FDD:
“0100010000010001000001000100000100010000” =
01000100000100010000010001000001000100000100010000010001000001000100000100010000
• TDD frame configuration 0:
“0100010000010001000001000100000100010000010001000001000100000100010000” =
01000100000100010000010001000001000100000100010000010001000001000100000100010000
• TDD frame configurations 1 through 5:
“01000100000100010000” =
01000100000100010000010001000001000100000100010000010001000001000100000100010000
• TDD frame configuration 6:
“010001000001000100000100010000010001000001000100000100010000” =
01000100000100010000010001000001000100000100010000010001000001000100000100010000
Once the ABS pattern SFP ABS has been normalised, it is inverted to determine the used subframe pattern SFP Used that is
used in further calculations:
SFP Used = !SFP ABS
SFM DL , SFM UL , and SFM SSF are, respectively, the downlink, uplink and special subframe masks listed below:
FDD
SFM DL
SFM UL 11111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111
SFM SSF
SFM UL 00111001110011100111001110011100111001110011100111001110011100111001110011100111
SFM UL 00110001100011000110001100011000110001100011000110001100011000110001100011000110
SFM UL 00100001000010000100001000010000100001000010000100001000010000100001000010000100
498
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
SFM UL 00111000000011100000001110000000111000000011100000001110000000111000000011100000
SFM UL 00110000000011000000001100000000110000000011000000001100000000110000000011000000
SFM UL 00100000000010000000001000000000100000000010000000001000000000100000000010000000
SFM UL 00111001100011100110001110011000111001100011100110001110011000111001100011100110
• In the following equations, the operator X implies the sum of 1’s in a given
1
series of bits, X.
• In the following equations, AND and OR are logical bit-by-bit operators.
Different collision probabilities are calculated depending on the location of the served pixel, subscriber, or mobile in cell
TXi(ic):
• Subframe collision between cell centre of TXi(ic) and cell centre of TXj(jc):
TX ic TX ic TX jc TX jc
SFMDL OR SFMSSF
i i j j
OR SFM SSF AND SFM DL
TX i ic – TX j jc
p ABS – DL – CC = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 -
TX ic TX i ic
SFM i
DL OR SFM SSF
1
TX i ic TX i ic TX jc TX jc
SFMUL AND SFM j OR SFMSSF
j
OR SFM SSF
UL
TX i ic – TX j jc
p ABS – UL – CC = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 -
TX i ic TX i ic
SFM
UL OR SFM SSF
1
499
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
• Subframe collision between cell edge of TXi(ic) and cell centre of TXj(jc):
TX ic TX ic TX jc TX jc
SFPDL AND SFM DL OR SFM SSF
i i j j
OR SFPSSF
TX ic – TX jc
i j
p ABS – DL – CC = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 -
TX ic TX ic
SFP i
i
OR SFPSSF
DL
1
TX ic TX ic TX jc TX jc
SFPUL OR SFM SSF
i i j j
OR SFPSSF AND SFM UL
TX i ic – TX j jc
p ABS – UL – CC = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 -
TX ic TX i ic
SFP i
UL OR SFPSSF
1
• Subframe collision between cell centre of TXi(ic) and cell edge of TXj(jc):
TX ic TX ic TX jc TX jc
SFMDL OR SFP SSF
i i j j
OR SFM SSF AND SFP DL
TX i ic – TX j jc
p ABS – DL – CE = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 -
TX i ic TX i ic
SFM
DL OR SFMSSF
1
TX i ic TX i ic TX jc TX jc
SFMUL AND SFP j OR SFP SSF
j
OR SFM SSF
UL
TX i ic – TX j jc
p ABS – UL – CE = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 -
TX ic TX ic
SFM i
i
OR SFMSSF
UL
1
• Subframe collision between cell edge of TXi(ic) and cell edge of TXj(jc):
TX i ic TX i ic TX j jc TX j jc
SFP DL OR SFPSSF AND SFP DL OR SFP SSF
TX i ic – TX j jc
p ABS – DL – CE = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 -
TX i ic TX i ic
SFP
DL OR SFP SSF
1
TX i ic TX i ic TX jc TX jc
SFPUL AND SFP j OR SFP SSF
j
OR SFPSSF UL
TX i ic – TX j jc
p ABS – UL – CE = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 -
TX ic TX i ic
SFP i
UL OR SFP SSF
1
This method enables you to include the cell-edge traffic ratio in the calculation of interference. The downlink interference
reduction factor due to subframe collisions for any served pixel, subscriber, or mobile in cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows:
TX i ic – TX j jc TX jc TX ic – TX jc TX jc TX ic – TX jc
= 10 Log r DL – CE p ABS – DL – CE + 1 – r DL – CE p ABS – DL – CC
j i j j i j
f ABS – DL
The uplink interference reduction factor due to subframe collisions for any served pixel, subscriber, or mobile in cell TXi(ic) is
calculated as follows:
TX i ic – TX j jc TX ic – TX jc TX ic – TX j jc TX ic – TX jc
= 10 Log p ABS – UL – CE or f ABS – UL = 10 Log p ABS – UL – CC
i j i i j
f ABS – UL
Method 2: ABS Patterns Used Throughout the Cell
If you wish to apply the ABS patterns throughout the cell, irrespective of the cell-edge area and the cell-edge traffic ratio, you
can do so by adding the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[LTE]
UseABSonCellEdgeOnly = 0
The following collision probabilities are calculated between cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc):
500
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
TX ic TX ic TX jc TX jc
SFPDL OR SFPSSF
i i j j
OR SFP SSF AND SFP DL
TX ic – TX jc
i j
p ABS – DL = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 -
TX ic TX ic
SFP i
i
OR SFP SSF
DL
1
TX i ic TX i ic TX jc TX jc
SFPUL AND SFP j OR SFPSSF
j
OR SFP SSF UL
TX i ic – TX j jc
p ABS – UL = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 -
TX i ic TX i ic
SFP
UL OR SFP SSF
1
The downlink interference reduction factor due to subframe collisions for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile is calculated as
follows:
TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
f ABS – DL = 10 Log p ABS – DL
The uplink interference reduction factor due to subframe collisions for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile is calculated as follows:
TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
f ABS – UL = 10 Log p ABS – UL
TX i ic
• P Max : Max power of the cell TXi(ic).
TX ic
i
• P DLRS : Transmission power of the downlink reference signals for cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Downlink Transmission
Power Calculation" on page 485.
TX ic
i
• P SS : Transmission power of the SS for cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Power Calculation" on
page 485.
TX ic
i
• P PBCH : Transmission power of the PBCH for cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Power Calculation"
on page 485.
TX i ic
• P PDCCH : Transmission power of the PDCCH for cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Power Calculation"
on page 485.
TX i ic
• P PDSCH : Transmission power of the PDSCH for cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Power Calculation"
on page 485.
TX i ic
• EPRE DLRS : Energy per resource element of the downlink reference signals for cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Downlink
Transmission Power Calculation" on page 485.
501
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX ic
i
• EPRE SS : Energy per resource element of the SS for cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Power
Calculation" on page 485.
TX ic
i
• EPRE PBCH : Energy per resource element of the PBCH for cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Power
Calculation" on page 485.
TX i ic
• EPRE PDCCH : Energy per resource element of the PDCCH for cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Power
Calculation" on page 485.
TX i ic
• EPRE PDSCH : Energy per resource element of the PDSCH for cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Power
Calculation" on page 485.
TX i
• E SA : Number of antenna elements defined for the smart antenna equipment used by the transmitter TXi.
Array
• G SA : Smart antenna array gain offset defined per clutter class.
Combining
• G SA : Smart power combining gain offset defined per clutter class.
Div
• G SA : Smart antenna diversity gain (for cross-polarised smart antennas) defined per clutter class.
TX i
• G Ant : Transmitter antenna gain for the antenna used by the transmitter TXi.
TX i
• G SA : Smart antenna gain in the direction of the served pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi. For more information on
TX i
the calculation of G SA , see "Beamforming Smart Antenna Models" on page 43.
TX i
Array
The smart antenna gain ( G SA ) and the smart antenna array gain offset ( G SA ) are
applied only if the AAS criterion (RS C/N, RS C/(I+N), or PDSCH C/(I+N)) is less than the
DL
AAS threshold ( T AAS ) defined in the properties of the reception equipment used by the
pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i TX i
• L : Total transmitter losses for the transmitter TXi ( L = L Total – DL ).
• L Model : Loss on the transmitter-receiver path (path loss) calculated using a propagation model.
TX i
• L Ant : Antenna attenuation (from antenna patterns) calculated for the antenna used by the transmitter TXi.
• M Shadowing – Model : Shadowing margin based on the model standard deviation.
In coverage predictions, shadowing margins are taken into account when the option "Shadowing taken into account"
is selected.
• L Indoor : Indoor losses taken into account when the option "Indoor coverage" is selected.
M
i
• L : Receiver terminal losses for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
M
i
• G : Receiver terminal’s antenna gain for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
M
i
• L Ant : Receiver terminal’s antenna attenuation calculated for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
For calculating the useful signal level from the best serving cell, L Ant is determined in the direction (H,V) = (0,0) from
Mi
the antenna patterns of the antenna used by Mi. For calculating the interfering signal level from any interferer, L Ant
is determined in the direction of the interfering cell from the antenna patterns of the antenna used by Mi, while the
antenna is pointed towards Mi’s best serving cell.
Mi
• L Body : Body loss defined for the service used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi Mi Mi Mi
L , G , L Ant , and L Body are not used in the calculations performed for the point
analysis tool’s profile tab, delta path loss calculation, and the downlink reference signal
level based coverage predictions.
502
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
TX ic
i
• D CP : Cyclic prefix duration defined in the TXi(ic) frame configuration or, otherwise, in the global network settings.
Calculations
The received signal levels (dBm) from any cell TXi(ic) are calculated for a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as follows:
TX i ic TX i ic Mi Mi Mi Mi
C Max = EIRP Max – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX i ic TX i ic TX i TX i
Without smart antennas: EIRP Max = P Max + G Ant – L
TX i ic TX i ic TX i TX i TX
+ 10 Log E SA + G SA
i Combining Div
With smart antennas: EIRP Max = P Max + G Ant – L + G SA
TX i ic TX i ic Mi Mi Mi Mi
C DLRS = EIRP1 DLRS – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX i ic TX i ic TX i TX i
Without smart antennas: EIRP1 DLRS = P DLRS + G Ant – L
TX i ic TX i ic TX i TX i TX i
+ 10 Log E SA + G SA
Combining
With smart antennas: EIRP1 DLRS = P DLRS + G Ant – L
TX ic TX ic M M M M
i i i i i i
C SS = EIRP1 SS – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX i ic TX i ic TX i TX i
Without smart antennas: EIRP1 SS = P SS + G Ant – L
TX i ic TX i ic TX i TX i TX i
+ 10 Log E SA + G SA
Combining Div
With smart antennas: EIRP1 SS = P SS + G Ant – L + G SA
TX i ic TX i ic Mi Mi Mi Mi
C PBCH = EIRP1 PBCH – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX i ic TX i ic TX i TX i
Without smart antennas: EIRP1 PBCH = P PBCH + G Ant – L
TX ic TX ic TX TX TX
+ 10 Log E SA + G SA
i i i i i Combining Div
With smart antennas: EIRP1 PBCH = P PBCH + G Ant – L + G SA
TX i ic TX i ic Mi Mi Mi Mi
C PDCCH = EIRP1 PDCCH – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX i ic TX i ic TX i TX i
Without smart antennas: EIRP1 PDCCH = P PDCCH + G Ant – L
TX i ic TX i ic TX i TX i TX i
+ 10 Log E SA + G SA
Combining Div
With smart antennas: EIRP1 PDCCH = P PDCCH + G Ant – L + G SA
TX i ic TX i ic Mi Mi Mi Mi
C PDSCH = EIRP1 PDSCH – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX i ic TX i ic TX i TX i
Without smart antennas: EIRP1 PDSCH = P PDSCH + G Ant – L
TX i ic TX i ic TX i TX i
Array Combining Div
With smart antennas: EIRP1 PDSCH = P PDSCH + G SA + G SA + G SA + G SA – L
The energy per resource element (dBm/Sym) received from any cell TXi(ic) are calculated for a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi
as follows:
TX i ic TX i ic Mi Mi Mi Mi
RSRP: E DLRS = EIRP2 DLRS – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX i ic TX i ic TX i TX i
Without smart antennas: EIRP2 DLRS = EPRE DLRS + G Ant – L
TX ic TX ic TX TX TX
+ 10 Log E SA + G SA
i i i i i Combining
With smart antennas: EIRP2 DLRS = EPRE DLRS + G Ant – L
503
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX ic TX ic M M M M
i i i i i i
E SS = EIRP2 SS – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX ic TX ic TX TX
i i i i
Without smart antennas: EIRP2 SS = EPRE SS + G Ant – L
TX ic TX ic TX TX TX
+ 10 Log E SA + G SA
i i i i i Combining Div
With smart antennas: EIRP2 SS = EPRE SS + G Ant – L + G SA
TX i ic TX i ic Mi Mi Mi Mi
E PBCH = EIRP2 PBCH – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX i ic TX i ic TX i TX i
Without smart antennas: EIRP2 PBCH = EPRE PBCH + G Ant – L
TX ic TX ic TX TX TX
+ 10 Log E SA + G SA
i i i i i Combining Div
With smart antennas: EIRP2 PBCH = EPRE PBCH + G Ant – L + G SA
TX i ic TX i ic Mi Mi Mi Mi
E PDCCH = EIRP2 PDCCH – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX ic TX ic TX TX
i i i i
Without smart antennas: EIRP2 PDCCH = EPRE PDCCH + G Ant – L
TX i ic TX i ic TX i TX i TX i
+ 10 Log E SA + G SA
Combining Div
With smart antennas: EIRP2 PDCCH = EPRE PDCCH + G Ant – L + G SA
TX i ic TX i ic Mi Mi Mi Mi
E PDSCH = EIRP2 PDSCH – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX i ic TX i ic TX i TX i
Without smart antennas: EIRP2 PDSCH = EPRE PDSCH + G Ant – L
TX i ic TX i ic TX i TX i
Array Combining Div
With smart antennas: EIRP2 PDSCH = EPRE PDSCH + G SA + G SA + G SA + G SA – L
TX i
L Path = L Model + L Ant
Furthermore, the total losses between the cell and the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi can be calculated as follows:
TX TX M M M M
i i i i i i
L Total = L Path + L + L Indoor + M Shadowing – Model – G +L –G + L Ant + L Body
f CP is the cyclic prefix factor, i.e., the ratio of the useful symbol energy to the total symbol energy.
The total symbol duration of a modulation symbol comprises the useful symbol duration, carrying the actual data bits, and a
cyclic prefix, added to the useful data bits as padding against multi-path to avoid inter-symbol interference. Hence, the total
energy within a modulation symbol belongs in part to the useful data bits and in part to the cyclic prefix. Once a modulation
symbol is received, only the energy of the useful data bits can be used for extracting the data. The energy belonging to the
cyclic prefix is lost once it has served its purpose of combatting inter-symbol interference. Therefore, f CP implies that the
energy belonging to the cyclic prefix is excluded from the useful signal level.
TX ic
10 Log 7 7.5 If D CPi = Normal
f CP = TX i ic
10 Log 6 7.5 If D CP = Extended
0 If TX i ic is an interferer
The cyclic prefix energy and the useful data bits energy are both taken into account when calculating interfering signal levels.
Output
TX i ic
• C Max : Received max signal level from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ic
• C DLRS : Received downlink reference signal level from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ic
• C SS : Received SS signal level from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
504
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
TX ic
i
• C PBCH : Received PBCH signal level from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX ic
i
• C PDCCH : Received PDCCH signal level from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX ic
i
• C PDSCH : Received PDSCH signal level from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ic
• E DLRS : Received downlink reference signal energy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
TX i ic
• E SS : Received SS energy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ic
• E PBCH : Received PBCH energy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ic
• E PDCCH : Received PDCCH energy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX ic
i
• E PDSCH : Received PDSCH eneregy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
• L Path : Path loss between the cell TXi(ic) and the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
• L Total : Total losses between the cell TXi(ic) and the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Input
• K: Boltzmann’s constant.
• T: Temperature in Kelvin.
• F : Subcarrier width (15 kHz).
Mi
• nf : Noise figure of the terminal used for calculations by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Calculations
The thermal noise for one resource element, i.e., over one subcarrier, is calculated as follows:
TX i ic
n 0 – Sym = n 0 + 10 Log F
The downlink noise is the sum of the thermal noise and the noise figure of the terminal used for the calculations by the pixel,
subscriber, or mobile Mi. The downlink noise for one resource element, i.e., over one subcarrier, is calculated as follows:
TX i ic TX i ic Mi
n Sym = n 0 – Sym + nf
Output
TX i ic
• n Sym : Downlink noise for one subcarrier.
Input
TX jc
j
• E DLRS : Received downlink reference energy per resource element received from any interfering cell TXj(jc) as
calculated in "Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 501 at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the cell
TXi(ic).
505
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX jc
j
• E SS : Received SS energy per resource element received from any interfering cell TXj(jc) as calculated in "Signal
Level Calculation (DL)" on page 501 at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the cell TXi(ic).
TX jc
j
• E PBCH : Received PBCH energy per resource element received from any interfering cell TXj(jc) as calculated in "Signal
Level Calculation (DL)" on page 501 at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the cell TXi(ic).
TX j jc
• E PDCCH : Received PDCCH energy per resource element received from any interfering cell TXj(jc) as calculated in "Signal
Level Calculation (DL)" on page 501 at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the cell TXi(ic).
TX j jc
• E PDSCH : Received PDSCH energy per resource element received from any interfering cell TXj(jc) as calculated in "Signal
Level Calculation (DL)" on page 501 at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the cell TXi(ic).
TX j
• G SA : Smart antenna gain in the direction . For more information, see "Beamforming Smart Antenna Models" on
page 43.
TX j
• G SA : Smart antenna gain in the direction calculated from the average array correlation matrix:
H
G SA = g n S R Avg S . For more information, see "Beamforming Smart Antenna Models" on page 43.
• M Shadowing – Model : Shadowing margin based on the model standard deviation.
• M Shadowing – C I : Shadowing margin based on the C/I standard deviation.
In Monte Carlo simulations, the received energies per resource element from interferers already include
M Shadowing – Model , as explained in "Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 501.
In coverage predictions, the ratio M Shadowing – Model – M Shadowing – C I is applied to the interfering signals (for more
information, see "Shadow Fading Model" on page 90). As the received energies per resource element from interferers
already include M Shadowing – Model , M Shadowing – C I is added to the received energies per resource element from
interferers in order to achieve the ratio M Shadowing – Model – M Shadowing – C I :
TX jc TX jc
j j
E = E + M Shadowing – C I
In coverage predictions, shadowing margins are taken into account when the option "Shadowing taken into account"
is selected.
TX j jc
• N Sym – DLRS : Number of downlink reference signal resource elements as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Power
Calculation" on page 485.
• N Sym – SS : Number of SS resource elements as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Power Calculation" on page 485.
TX j jc
• N Sym – PBCH : Number of PBCH resource elements as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Power Calculation" on
page 485.
TX j jc
• N Sym – PDCCH : Number of PDCCH resource elements as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Power Calculation" on
page 485.
TX j jc
• N Sym – PDSCH : Number of PDSCH resource elements as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Power Calculation" on
page 485.
TX j jc
• N Sym – DL : Total number of downlink resource elements as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Power Calculation"
on page 485.
TX i ic – TX j jc
• rO : Total channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Co- and Adjacent
Channel Overlaps Calculation" on page 493.
TX j jc
• TL DL : Downlink traffic load of the interfering cell TXj(jc).
Traffic loads can either be calculated using Monte Carlo simulations, or entered manually for each cell. Calculation of
traffic loads is explained in "Simulation Process" on page 479.
TX j jc
• AU DL : Downlink AAS usage of the interfering cell TXj(jc).
• W FB : Width of a frequency block in the frequency domain (180 kHz).
• N FB – SS PBCH : Number of frequency blocks that carry the SS and the PBCH (6).
506
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
TX ic TX jc
i j
• N FB and N FB : Total number of frequency blocks defined in the frequency bands table for the channel
bandwidth used by the cell.
TX ic TX jc
i j
• N FB – CE0 and N FB – CE0 : Number of cell-edge frequency blocks defined in the frame configurations table for the
channel bandwidth used by the cell and PSS ID 0.
TX i ic TX j jc
• N FB – CE1 and N FB – CE1 : Number of cell-edge frequency blocks defined in the frame configurations table for the
channel bandwidth used by the cell and PSS ID 1.
TX i ic TX j jc
• N FB – CE2 and N FB – CE2 : Number of cell-edge frequency blocks defined in the frame configurations table for the
channel bandwidth used by the cell and PSS ID 2.
TX i ic TX j jc
• F Start and F Start : Start frequencies of the channels assigned to the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) calculated as explained
in "Conversion From Channel Numbers to Start and End Frequencies" on page 494.
TX i ic TX j jc
• W Channel and W Channel : Bandwidths of the channels assigned to cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
TX i ic TX j jc
• ID and ID : Physical cell IDs of the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
TX i ic TX j jc
• r DL – CE and r DL – CE : Downlink cell-edge traffic ratios of the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
TX i ic
• N Ant – TX : Number of transmission (downlink) antenna ports defined for the cell TXi(ic).
TX jc
j
• N Ant – TX : Number of transmission (downlink) antenna ports defined for the cell TXj(jc).
Calculations
TX j jc TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
• Calculations of f MIMO , f TL , f ICIC – DL , f PDCCH , and f PDSCH are
explained at the end of this section.
TX j jc
• In the calculations below, E DLRS is weighted by the downlink subframe collision
TX i ic – TX j jc
probability f ABS – DL when the relevant option is set in the Atoll.ini file:
[LTE]
eICIConRS = 1
Synchronised transmission and reception means that the OFDM symbols of the interfered and interfering frames overlap and
match each other in time.
The interfering energy per resource element (dBm/Sym) received over downlink reference signals from any cell TXj(jc) at a
pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is calculated as follows:
• RS of the interfered cell TXi(ic) collide only with RS of the interfering cell TXj(jc)
TX i ic TX j jc TX j jc TX i ic
This occurs when ID PSS = ID PSS and N Ant – TX N Ant – TX
For the calculation of the probability of collision, here N Ant – TX = Min 4 NAnt – TX .
507
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX jc
TX ic E
j
TX jc N i ---------------------
DLRS
TX ic – TX jc
= 10 Log ------------------- +f i
j Ant – TX 10 j
DLRS 10
TX jc
j O
N Ant – TX
• RS of the interfered cell TXi(ic) collide with RS, PDCCH, and PDSCH of the interfering cell TXj(jc)
TX i ic TX j jc TX j jc TX i ic
This occurs when ID PSS = ID PSS and N Ant – TX N Ant – TX
For the calculation of the probability of collision, here N Ant – TX = Min 4 N Ant – TX .
TX jc
TX jc E DLRS
j
TX j jc N j --------------------- TX i ic – TX j jc
= 10 Log -------------------
Ant – TX 10
DLRS 10
TX i ic + fO
N Ant – TX
TX jc TX ic – TX jc TX jc TX ic – TX jc
j
E PDCCH + f PDCCH
i j j
E PDSCH + f PDSCH
i j
TXi ic TX j jc ----------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------------------------------------
N Ant – TX – N Ant – TX 10 10
+ 3 10
10
+ 10 L og ---------------------------------------------
TX i ic
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4
N Ant – TX
TX ic
i
With 4 or 8 antenna ports and N SD – PDCCH = 1 :
TX jc
TX jc E
j
TX j jc N j ---------------------
DLRS
TX i ic – TX j jc
= 10 Log -------------------
Ant – TX 10
DLRS 10 + fO
TXi ic
N Ant – TX
TX jc TX ic – TX jc TX jc TX ic – TX jc
j
E PDCCH + f PDCCH
i j j
E PDSCH + f PDSCH
i j
TXi ic TX j jc ----------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------------------------------------
N Ant – TX – N Ant – TX 10 10
+ 5 10
10
+ 10 L og ---------------------------------------------
TX i ic
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6
N Ant – TX
TX i ic
With 4 or 8 antenna ports and N SD – PDCCH 1 :
TX jc
TX jc E DLRS
j
TX j jc N j --------------------- TX i ic – TX j jc
= 10 Log -------------------
Ant – TX 10
DLRS 10
TX i ic + fO
N Ant – TX
TX jc TX ic – TX jc TX jc TX ic – TX jc
j
E PDCCH + f PDCCH
i j j
E PDSCH + f PDSCH
i j
TXi ic TX j jc ----------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------------------------------------
N Ant – TX – N Ant – TX 10 10
+ 2 10
10
+ 10 L og ---------------------------------------------
TX i ic
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3
N Ant – TX
• RS of the interfered cell TXi(ic) collide only with PDCCH and PDSCH of the interfering cell TXj(jc)
TX i ic TX j jc TX i ic TX j jc TX i ic TX j jc
This occurs when ( ID PSS = ID PSS and Shift = Shift 3 and N Ant – TX = N Ant – TX = 1 ) OR
TX i ic TX j jc
ID PSS ID PSS
508
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
TX jc TX ic – TX jc TX jc TX ic – TX jc
EPDCCH j
+f
i j
E
j
+f
i j
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
PDCCH
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
PDSCH PDSCH
TX jc
j 10 10
+ 3 10
10 TX ic – TX jc
i j
DLRS = 10 Log ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + f O
4
TX i ic
With 4 or 8 antenna ports and N SD – PDCCH = 1 :
TX jc TX ic – TX jc TX jc TX ic – TX jc
EPDCCH j
+ f PDCCH
i j j
E PDSCH + f PDSCH
i j
----------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------------------------------------
TX j jc 10 10
+ 5 10
10 TX i ic – TX j jc
DLRS = 10 Log ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + f O
6
TX i ic
With 4 or 8 antenna ports and N SD – PDCCH 1 :
TX jc TX ic – TX jc TX jc TX ic – TX jc
EPDCCH j
+ f PDCCH
i j j
E PDSCH + f PDSCH
i j
----------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------------------------------------
TX j jc 10 10
+ 2 10
10 TX i ic – TX j jc
DLRS = 10 Log ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + f O
3
The interfering energy per resource element (dBm/Sym) received over the SS and the PBCH from any cell TXj(jc) at a pixel,
subscriber, or mobile Mi is calculated as follows:
TX jc TX jc
j j
ESS E PBCH
--------------------
10
- ---------------------
10
TX j jc
TX j jc 10 N Sym – SS + 10 N Sym – PBCH TX ic – TX j jc TX j jc
SS PBCH - + f O i
= 10 Log ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + f MIMO
TX j jc
N Sym – SS + N Sym – PBCH
The interfering energy per resource element (dBm/Sym) received over the PDCCH from any cell TXj(jc) at a pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi is calculated as follows:
• PDCCH of the interfered cell TXi(ic) collides with PDCCH and all the RS of the interfering cell TXj(jc)
TX ic TX jc TX ic TX jc TX ic TX jc
i j i j i j
This occurs when ( ID PSS = ID PSS and Shift = Shift 3 and N Ant – TX = N Ant – TX = 1 ) OR
TX ic TX jc
i j
ID PSS ID PSS
For the calculation of the probability of collision, here N Ant – TX = Min 4 NAnt – TX .
TX jc
TX j jc E
j
TX j jc N
DLRS
--------------------
- TX ic – TX j jc
= 10 Log ------------------- +f i
1 Sym – DLRS in PDCCH 10
PDCCH - 10
-----------------------------------------
TX j jc TX i ic O
N Ant – TX N Sym – PDCCH
TX jc TX ic – TX jc
TX ic TX j jc
j
E PDCCH + f PDCCH
i j
N i – N -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ 10 L og -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sym – PDCCH Sym – DLRS in PDCCH 10
- 10
TX i ic
N Sym – PDCCH
Here, N Sym – DLRS in PDCCH is the number of downlink reference signal resource elements that fall within the PDCCH, and
N Sym – PDCCH is the number of PDCCH resource elements per frame.
• PDCCH of the interfered cell TXi(ic) collides with PDCCH and some RS of the interfering cell TXj(jc)
TX i ic TX j jc TX j jc TX i ic
This occurs when ID PSS = ID PSS and N Ant – TX N Ant – TX
509
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
For the calculation of the probability of collision, here N Ant – TX = Min 4 N Ant – TX .
TX jc
TX ic TX j jc TX i ic E DLRS
j
TX j jc N i N Sym – DLRS in PDCCH – N Sym – DLRS in PDCCH -
-------------------- TX ic – TX j jc
= 10 Log ------------------- - 10 10 + f O i
Ant – TX
PDCCH ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX
j
jc TX
i
ic
N Ant – TX N Sym – PDCCH
TX jc TX ic – TX jc
TX jc j
E PDCCH + f PDCCH
i j
N j -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ 10 L og -----------------------------
Sym – PDCCH 10
10
TXi ic
N Sym – PDCCH
Here, N Sym – DLRS in PDCCH is the number of downlink reference signal resource elements that fall within the PDCCH, and
N Sym – PDCCH is the number of PDCCH resource elements per frame.
• PDCCH of the interfered cell TXi(ic) collides only with PDCCH of the interfering cell TXj(jc)
TX i ic TX j jc TX j jc TX i ic
This occurs when ID PSS = ID PSS and N Ant – TX N Ant – TX
TX j jc TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
PDCCH = E PDCCH + f PDCCH + fO
The interfering energy per resource element (dBm/Sym) received over the PDSCH from any cell TXj(jc) at a pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi is calculated as follows:
• PDSCH of the interfered cell TXi(ic) collides with PDSCH and all the RS of the interfering cell TXj(jc)
TX ic TX jc TX ic TX jc TX ic TX jc
i j i j i j
This occurs when ( ID PSS = ID PSS and Shift = Shift 3 and N Ant – TX = N Ant – TX = 1 ) OR
TX i ic TX j jc
ID PSS ID PSS
For the calculation of the probability of collision, here N Ant – TX = Min 4 N Ant – TX .
TX jc
TX jc E
j
TX j jc N
j DLRS -
-------------------- TX i ic – TX j jc
PDSCH 1
= 10 Log ------------------- Sym – DLRS in PDSCH
- 10
-----------------------------------------
10
+ fO
TXj jc TX i ic
N Ant – TX N Sym – PDSCH
TX jc TX ic – TX jc
TX ic TX j jc E
j
+f
i j
N i – N -----------------------------------------------------------------------
PDSCH PDSCH
+ 10 L og -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sym – PDSCH Sym – DLRS in PDSCH 10
10
TX i ic
N Sym – PDSCH
Here, N Sym – DLRS in PDSCH is the number of downlink reference signal resource elements that fall within the PDSCH, and
N Sym – PDSCH is the number of PDSCH resource elements per frame.
• PDSCH of the interfered cell TXi(ic) collides with PDSCH and some RS of the interfering cell TXj(jc)
TX i ic TX j jc TX j jc TX i ic
This occurs when ID PSS = ID PSS and N Ant – TX N Ant – TX
For the calculation of the probability of collision, here N Ant – TX = Min 4 N Ant – TX .
510
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
TX jc
TX ic TX jc TX ic E
j
TX jc N i N
j
– N
i ---------------------
DLRS
TX ic – TX jc
= 10 Log ------------------- +f i
j Ant – TX Sym – DLRS in PDSCH Sym – DLRS in PDSCH 10 j
PDSCH -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- 10
TX jc
j
TX ic
i O
N Ant – TX N Sym – PDSCH
TX jc TX ic – TX jc
TX jc j
E PDSCH + f PDSCH
i j
N j -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ 10 L og ----------------------------
Sym – PDSCH 10
- 10
TX i ic
N Sym – PDSCH
Here, N Sym – DLRS in PDSCH is the number of downlink reference signal resource elements that fall within the PDSCH, and
N Sym – PDSCH is the number of PDSCH resource elements per frame.
• PDSCH of the interfered cell TXi(ic) collides only with PDSCH of the interfering cell TXj(jc)
TX i ic TX j jc TX j jc TX i ic
This occurs when ID PSS = ID PSS and N Ant – TX N Ant – TX
TX j jc TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
PDSCH = E PDSCH + f PDSCH + fO
This method is also used for calculating the interference received from LTE cells of an external network in co-planning mode,
i.e., inter-technology interference received from LTE cells calculated using the inter-technology IRFs.
The interfering energy per resource element (dBm/Sym) received over downlink reference signals from any cell TXj(jc) at a
pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is calculated as follows:
TX jc TX jc TX ic – TX jc
E j TX j jc
j
E PDCCH + f PDCCH
i j
TX jc
TX j jc --------------------
DLRS -
N ----------------------------------------------------------------------- N j
DLRS
= 10 Log 10
10 Sym – DLRS
-------------------------
- + 10 10 Sym – PDCCH
-----------------------------
TX j jc TX j jc
N Sym – DL N Sym – DL
TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
E PDSCH + f PDSCH TX j jc
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
10 N Sym – PDSCH TX ic – TX j jc
+ 10 - + fO i
----------------------------
TX j jc
N Sym – DL
The interfering energy per resource element (dBm/Sym) received over the SS and the PBCH from any cell TXj(jc) at a pixel,
subscriber, or mobile Mi is calculated as follows:
TX j jc TX j jc TX j jc TX j jc
ESS + f MIMO E PBCH + f MIMO
----------------------------------------------
10
- -----------------------------------------------
10
TX j jc
TX j jc 10 N Sym – SS + 10 N Sym – PBCH TX ic – TX j jc
SS PBCH - + f O i
= 10 Log ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX j jc
N Sym – SS + N Sym – PBCH
The interfering energy per resource element (dBm/Sym) received over the PDSCH and the PDCCH from any cell TXj(jc) at a
pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is calculated as follows:
511
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX jc TX jc TX ic – TX jc
E j TX jc E
j
+f
i j
TX jc
TX jc --------------------
DLRS
- N
j PDCCH PDCCH
----------------------------------------------------------------------- j
N Sym – PDCCH
j
PDSCH
= 10 Log 10
10 Sym – DLRS
-------------------------
- + 10 10
-----------------------------
TX jc TX jc
j j
N Sym – DL N Sym – DL
TX jc TX ic – TX jc
j
E PDSCH + f PDSCH
i j
TX j jc
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
10 N Sym – PDSCH TX ic – TX j jc
+ 10 - + fO i
----------------------------
TX j jc
N Sym – DL
TX jc TX jc TX ic – TX jc
E j TX j jc
j
E PDCCH + f PDCCH
i j
TX j jc
TX j jc --------------------
DLRS -
N Sym – DLRS ----------------------------------------------------------------------- N Sym – PDCCH
PDCCH
= 10 Log 10
10
TX jc + 10
-------------------------
- 10
-----------------------------
j
TX j jc
N Sym – DL N Sym – DL
TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
E PDSCH + f PDSCH TX j jc
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
10 N Sym – PDSCH TX ic – TX j jc
+ 10 - + fO i
----------------------------
TX j jc
N Sym – DL
E-UTRA carrier RSSI is measured on the OFDM symbols that contain reference signals. Therefore, the interfering energy per
frequency block (dBm/RB) received from any cell TXj(jc) at a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi over 1 frequency block during an
OFDM symbol carrying reference signals, is given as follows:
For cells using more than 1 antenna port, the encircled 10 in the formulas below is
replaced with 8.
TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
EPDSCH + fPDSCH
----------------------------------------------------------------------
10
- TX j jc
TX j jc 10 N Sym – PDSCH
RSSI = 10 Log ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX j jc TX j jc
10
N + N
Sym – PDSCH Sym – PDCCH
TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
E
PDCCH
+f
PDCCH
TX j jc
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
10
TX j jc E DLRS
10 N Sym – PDCCH ---------------------
10
TX j jc
TX i ic – TX j jc
- 10 + 10
+ --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 Min 2 N Ant – TX + f O
TX j jc TX j jc
N Sym – PDSCH + N Sym – PDCCH
TX j jc TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
f MIMO + f TL + f ICIC – DL + f ABS – DL
TX j jc -
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 – AU 10 10
TX i ic – TX j jc DL
f PDCCH =
TX jc TX ic – TX jc TX ic – TX jc
j i j i j
f TL + f ICIC – DL + f ABS – DL
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
TX j jc 10
+ AU DL 10
TX jc TX jc TX ic – TX jc TX ic – TX jc
j
f MIMO + f TL
j
+ f ICIC – DL
i j
+ f ABS – DL
i j
TX j jc --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 – AU DL 10
TX i ic – TX j jc 10
f PDSCH =
TX j TX j TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
SA – + +
G G
SA
f
ICIC – DL
f
ABS – DL
TX j jc ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10
+ AU DL 10
512
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
TX jc TX jc TX jc
f MIMO is the interference increment due to more than one transmission antenna port: f MIMO = 10 Log N Ant – TX
j j j
TX jc
j
If you do not wish to apply f MIMO , add the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[LTE]
MultiAntennaInterference = 0
TX j jc TX j jc
f TL = 10 Log TL DL
Interference reduction due to the co- and adjacent channel overlap between the studied and the interfering cells:
Interference reduction due to the co- and adjacent channel overlap between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) is calculated
as follows:
TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
fO = 10 Log r O
Interference reduction due to static downlink ICIC using fractional frequency reuse:
The interference reduction factor due to static downlink ICIC using fractional frequency reuse for any pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi is calculated as follows:
TX i ic – TX j jc TX ic – TX j jc
= 10 Log p Collision
i
f ICIC – DL
Whether a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is in cell centre or cell-edge is determined as explained in "Best Server
Determination" on page 535.
TX i ic – TX j jc
Depending on the ICIC mode defined for the frame configuration of the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc), f ICIC – DL is
calculated as follows:
• If both TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) use time-switched FFR
The cell-edge and cell-centre resources are time-divided. Therefore, an interfered user may receive interference
from the cell-edge and cell-centre parts of the frame depending on time-domain switching points between the
cell-edge and cell-centre parts of the frames.
Atoll determines the switching point between the ICIC and the non-ICIC parts of the frame using the ICIC ratios.
The switching points between the ICIC and non-ICIC parts of the frame of the victim and interfering cells, TXi(ic)
and TXj(jc) respectively, are calculated as follows:
TX i ic TX j jc
TX ic r DL – CE TX jc r DL – CE
i j
SP = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
- and SP = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
TX i ic TX j jc
TX i ic TX i ic N TX j jc TX j jc N
r DL – CE + 1 – r DL – CE ----------------- r DL – CE + 1 – r DL – CE -----------------
FB – CE FB – CE
TX i ic TX j jc
N FB N FB
Where, SP is the switching point between the ICIC and the non-ICIC parts of the frame, and r DL – CE is the downlink
cell-edge traffic ratios of the cells.
513
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
The ICIC ratio is used to partition the total downlink traffic load into ICIC and non-ICIC
parts of the frame. Therefore, the switching point formula is derived from the equation:
r DL – CE TL DL 1 – r DL – CE TL DL
---------------------------------------------------------- = -----------------------------------------------
-
N FB – CE 1 – SP W Channel
SP WChannel -----------------
N FB
With cells using static downlink ICIC, there can be four different interference scenarios.
i. Between the ICIC part of the victim and the ICIC part of the interferer.
ii. Between the ICIC part of the victim and the non-ICIC part of the interferer.
iii. Between the non-ICIC part of the victim and the ICIC part of the interferer.
iv. Between the non-ICIC part of the victim and the non-ICIC part of the interferer.
Therefore, Atoll calculates the probabilities of collision for each scenario and weights the total interference
according to the total collision probability. The probability of collision p Coll for each scenario is:
Common
N FB – CE
i ICIC ICIC ---------------------
TX i ic
N FB – CE
TX i ic
Common
Where, N FB – CE is the number of cell-edge frequency blocks common in TXi(ic) and TXj(jc), and N FB – CE is the
number of cell-edge frequency blocks in the cell TXi(ic).
For a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the cell-edge of TXi(ic), the total collision probability for the pixel,
subscriber, or mobile Mi is calculated as follows:
TX j jc TX i ic
i
p Coll If SP SP
TX i ic – TX j jc TX jc TX ic TX jc
p Collision = i
+ p Coll SP
j ii i j
p Coll SP – SP TX j jc TX i ic
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX i ic
If SP SP
SP
For a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the cell centre of TXi(ic), the total collision probability for the pixel,
subscriber, or mobile Mi is calculated as follows:
iv
TX j jc TX i ic
p Coll If SP SP
TX i ic – TX j jc TX j jc TX jc TX ic
= p iv + p iii SP j – SP i
Coll 1 – SP
p Collision
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- If SP j SP i
Coll TX jc TX ic
TX ic
1 – SP i
TX i ic – TX j jc Common
N FB – CC
Cell centre: p Collision = --------------------
-
TX i ic
N FB – CC
514
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
TX ic – TX jc Common
i j N FB – CE
Cell-edge: p Collision = --------------------
-
TX ic
i
N FB – CE
Common Common
Where, N FB – CC is the number of common frequency blocks in TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) in cell centre, N FB – CE is the
TX i ic TX i ic
number of common frequency blocks in TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) on cell-edge, N FB – CC and N FB – CE are respectively the
numbers of frequency blocks in cell centre and cell-edge of TXi(ic).
TX i ic TX i ic
Time-switched FFR N FB N FB – CEx
TX i ic TX i ic
Hard FFR N FB – CEx N FB – CEx
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
Soft FFR N FB – N FB – CEx N FB – CEx
TX i ic TX ic TX ic TX ic TX i ic
– N FB – CE0 + N FB – CE1 + N FB – CE2
Partial soft FFR i i i
N FB N FB – CEx
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
Where N FB – CEx can be N FB – CE0 , N FB – CE1 , or N FB – CE2 depending on the PSS ID of TXi(ic).
TX
k
Here P DL – Rec is the received downlink power from an interfering cell TXk belonging to another technology, and
F TX i ic TX k
ICPDL is the inter-technology downlink channel protection ratio for a frequency offset F between the interfered
and interfering frequency channels of TXi(ic) and TXk.
TX k
P DL – Rec is calculated based on the EIRP from GSM cells, total power from UMTS, CDMA2000, and TD-SCDMA cells, maximum
power from LTE cells, preamble power from WiMAX cells, and downlink cell power from Wi-Fi cells.
Output
TX j jc
• DLRS : Interfering energy per resource element (dBm/Sym) received over downlink reference signals from any cell
TXj(jc) at a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by a cell TXi(ic).
TX jc
j
• SS PBCH : Interfering energy per resource element (dBm/Sym) received over the SS and the PBCH from any cell TXj(jc)
at a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by a cell TXi(ic).
TX j jc
• PDSCH : Interfering energy per resource element (dBm/Sym) received over the PDSCH from any cell TXj(jc) at a pixel,
subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by a cell TXi(ic).
TX j jc
• PDCCH : Interfering energy per resource element (dBm/Sym) received over the PDCCH from any cell TXj(jc) at a pixel,
subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by a cell TXi(ic).
515
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX jc
j
• RSSI : Interfering energy per frequency block (dBm/RB) received from any cell TXj(jc) at a pixel, subscriber, or mobile
Mi over 1 frequency block during an OFDM symbol carrying reference signals.
Inter – Tech
• I DL : Downlink inter-technology interference.
TX i ic
• E DLRS : Received downlink reference signal energy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi as calculated in "Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 501.
TX i ic
• E SS : Received SS energy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as
calculated in "Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 501.
TX i ic
• E PBCH : Received PBCH energy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as
calculated in "Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 501.
TX i ic
• E PDCCH : Received PDCCH energy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as
calculated in "Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 501.
TX i ic
• E PDSCH : Received PDSCH energy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as
calculated in "Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 501.
TX ic
i
• n Sym : Downlink noise for one subcarrier for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Noise Calculation (DL)" on page 505.
TX i ic
• CINR DLRS : Downlink reference signal C/(I+N) from cell TXi(ic) at pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated in "C/
(I+N) and Bearer Calculation (DL)" on page 518.
Mi
• T SU – MIMO – DL : SU-MIMO threshold defined in the reception equipment used by Mi’s terminal.
Mi
• T B : Bearer selection thresholds of the bearers defined in the reception equipment used by Mi’s terminal.
Mi
• B DL – Highest Service : Highest downlink bearer defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
Mi
• B DL – Lowest Service : Lowest downlink bearer defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
TX i ic
• N Ant – TX : Number of transmission (downlink) antenna ports defined for the cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• N Ant – RX : Number of reception (downlink) antenna ports defined for the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi.
• Mobility M i : Mobility used for the calculations.
M
BLER BDL : Downlink block error rate read from the graphs available in the reception equipment assigned to the
i
•
terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• G Div – PBCH : PBCH diversity gain defined in the reception equipment of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi.
Mi
• G Div – PDCCH : PDCCH diversity gain defined in the reception equipment of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
DL
• G Div : Additional downlink diversity gain defined for the clutter class where the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is
located.
Calculations
The C/N for cell TXi(ic) are calculated as follows for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi:
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
CNR DLRS = E DLRS – n Sym
516
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
TX ic TX ic TX ic
i i i
CNR SS = E SS – n Sym
TX ic TX ic TX ic
i i i
CNR PBCH = E PBCH – n Sym
TX ic TX ic TX ic
i i i
CNR PDCCH = E PDCCH – n Sym
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
CNR PDSCH = E PDSCH – n Sym
Bearer Determination:
The bearers available for selection in the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi’s reception equipment are the ones:
• Which are common between Mi’s and TXi(ic)’s equipment (bearer indexes for which selection thresholds are
defined in both equipment), if the corresponding option has been set in the Atoll.ini file. For more information,
see the Administrator Manual.
• Whose indexes are within the range defined by the lowest and the highest bearer indexes defined for the service
being accessed by Mi.
Mi TX i ic
• Whose selection thresholds are less than the PDSCH C/N at Mi: T B CNR PDSCH
If the cell supports MIMO, and according to the Mi diversity mode depending on the SU-MIMO and MU-MIMO
Mi
thresholds and criteria, transmit diversity, SU-MIMO diversity, or MU-MIMO diversity gain, G Div – DL ,
corresponding to the bearer is applied to its selection threshold. The gain is read from the properties of the
TX i ic Mi
reception equipment assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi for N Ant – TX , N Ant – RX , Mobility M i ,
M
BLER B DL .
i
DL
The additional downlink diversity gain defined for the clutter class of the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi G Div is
also applied. Therefore, the bearers available for selection are all the bearers defined in the reception equipment
for which the following is true:
M M TX ic
i i DL i
T B – G Div – DL – G Div CNR PDSCH
The bearer selected for data transfer depends on the bearer selection criterion of the scheduler used by the cell TXi(ic).
• Bearer Index
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest index.
• Peak RLC Throughput
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest downlink peak RLC
channel throughput as calculated in "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, Allocated Bandwidth Throughput, and
Per-user Throughput Calculation" on page 547.
• Effective RLC Throughput
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest downlink effective
RLC channel throughput as calculated in "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, Allocated Bandwidth Throughput,
and Per-user Throughput Calculation" on page 547.
MIMO Diversity Gain:
With MIMO, the PBCH and PDCCH C/N become:
TX i ic TX i ic Mi
DL
CNR PBCH = CNR PBCH + G Div – PBCH + G Div
TX i ic TX i ic Mi DL
CNR PDCCH = CNR PDCCH + G Div – PDCCH + G Div
The PBCH and PDCCH diversity gains are applied to the C/N when the cell and the terminal both support any form of
MIMO in downlink. The additional downlink diversity gain defined per clutter is also applied.
Once the bearer is known, the PDSCH C/N calculated above becomes:
TX i ic TX i ic Mi
DL
CNR PDSCH = CNR PDSCH + G Div – DL + G Div
517
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
M
i
Where G Div – DL is the transmit diversity, SU-MIMO diversity, or MU-MIMO diversity gain applied if the cell supports
MIMO and depending on the Mi diversity mode, the SU-MIMO and MU-MIMO thresholds and criteria.
Output
TX i ic
• CNR DLRS : Downlink reference signal C/N from cell TXi(ic) at pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX ic
i
• CNR SS : SS C/N from cell TXi(ic) at pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ic
• CNR PBCH : PBCH C/N from cell TXi(ic) at pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ic
• CNR PDCCH : PDCCH C/N from cell TXi(ic) at pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ic
• CNR PDSCH : PDSCH C/N from cell TXi(ic) at pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Input
TX i ic TX i ic
Configuration N SF – DL N TDD – SSF
FDD 10 0
DSUUU-DSUUU 2 2
DSUUD-DSUUD 4 2
DSUDD-DSUDD 6 2
DSUUU-DSUUD 3 2
DSUUU-DDDDD 6 1
518
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
TX ic TX ic
Configuration i i
N SF – DL N TDD – SSF
DSUUD-DDDDD 7 1
DSUDD-DDDDD 8 1
TX i ic
• E DLRS : Received downlink reference signal energy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi as calculated in "Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 501.
TX i ic
• E SS : Received SS energy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as
calculated in "Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 501.
TX i ic
• E PBCH : Received PBCH energy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as
calculated in "Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 501.
TX i ic
• E PDCCH : Received PDCCH energy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as
calculated in "Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 501.
TX i ic
• E PDSCH : Received PDSCH energy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as
calculated in "Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 501.
TX ic
i
• N Sym – PDCCH : Number of PDCCH resource elements as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Power Calculation" on
page 485.
TX ic
i
• N Sym – PDSCH : Number of PDSCH resource elements as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Power Calculation" on
page 485.
TX ic
i
• n Sym : Downlink noise for one subcarrier for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Noise Calculation (DL)" on page 505.
TX j jc
• DLRS : Interfering energy per resource element (dBm/Sym) received over downlink reference signals from any cell
TXj(jc) at a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by a cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Interference Calculation (DL)" on
page 505.
TX j jc
• SS PBCH : Interfering energy per resource element (dBm/Sym) received over the SS and the PBCH from any cell TXj(jc)
at a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by a cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Interference Calculation (DL)" on page 505.
TX j jc
• PDSCH : Interfering energy per resource element (dBm/Sym) received over the PDSCH from any cell TXj(jc) at a pixel,
subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by a cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Interference Calculation (DL)" on page 505.
TX j jc
• PDCCH : Interfering energy per resource element (dBm/Sym) received over the PDCCH from any cell TXj(jc) at a pixel,
subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by a cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Interference Calculation (DL)" on page 505.
TX j jc
• RSSI : Interfering energy per frequency block (dBm/RB) received over 1 frequency block during an OFDM symbol
carrying reference signals from any cell TXj(jc) at a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated in "Interference
Calculation (DL)" on page 505.
Inter – Tech
• NR DL : Inter-technology downlink noise rise.
TX i ic
• CNR DLRS : Downlink reference signal C/N from cell TXi(ic) at pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated in "C/N
Calculation (DL)" on page 516.
Mi
• T SU – MIMO – DL : SU-MIMO threshold defined in the reception equipment used by Mi’s terminal.
Mi
• T B : Bearer selection thresholds of the bearers defined in the reception equipment used by Mi’s terminal.
M
i
• B DL – Highest Service : Highest downlink bearer defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
Mi
• B DL – Lowest Service : Lowest downlink bearer defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
TX ic
i
• N Ant – TX : Number of transmission (downlink) antenna ports defined for the cell TXi(ic).
519
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
M
i
• N Ant – RX : Number of reception (downlink) antenna ports defined for the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi.
• Mobility M i : Mobility used for the calculations.
M
BLER BDL : Downlink block error rate read from the graphs available in the reception equipment assigned to the
i
•
terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• G Div – PBCH : PBCH diversity gain defined in the reception equipment of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi.
Mi
• G Div – PDCCH : PDCCH diversity gain defined in the reception equipment of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
DL
• G Div : Additional downlink diversity gain defined for the clutter class where the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is
located.
Inter – Tech
• I DL : Downlink inter-technology interference as calculated in "Interference Calculation (DL)" on page 505.
Calculations
The downlink reference signal C/(I+N) for cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi:
TX jc TX ic
j n Sym
i
TX i ic -------------------
DLRS -
TX i ic ---------------------
CINR DLRS = E DLRS – 10 Log 10 10 + I Inter – Tech + 10 10 + NR Inter – Tech
DL DL
All TXj jc
The SS C/(I+N) for cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi:
TX jc TX ic
j n Sym
i
TX ic TX ic -------------------------
SS PBCH-
---------------------
– 10 Log 10 +I + NR
i i 10 Inter – Tech 10 Inter – Tech
CINR SS = E SS + 10
DL DL
All TXj jc
The PBCH C/(I+N) for cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi:
TX jc TX ic
j n Sym
i
TX i ic -------------------------
SS PBCH
TX i ic - ---------------------
CINR PBCH = E PBCH – 10 Log 10 10 + I Inter – Tech + 10 10 + NR Inter – Tech
DL DL
All TXj jc
The PDCCH C/(I+N) for cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi:
TX jc TX ic
j n
i
TX i ic TX i ic --------------------
PDCCH
- ---------------------
Sym
10 10 Inter – Tech
Inter – Tech
CINR PDCCH = E PDCCH – 10 Log 10 +I +10 + NR DL
DL
All TXj jc
The PDSCH C/(I+N) for cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi:
TX jc TX ic
j n
i
TX i ic --------------------
PDSCH
---------------------
Sym
TX i ic -
= E PDSCH – 10 Log 10
+I + NR
10 Inter – Tech 10 Inter – Tech
CINR PDSCH +10
DL DL
All TXj jc
The downlink reference signal received quality (RSRQ) for cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile
Mi:
TX i ic TX i ic TX ic TX i ic
RSRQ = 10 Log N FB + E i – RSSI
DLRS
520
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
TX ic TX ic
i i
Where E DLRS is the cell’s RSRP and RSSI is the received signal strength indicator, i.e., the received signals from the
server (TXi(ic)), and all the interfering cells (TXj(jc)), calculated as follows:
For cells using more than 1 antenna port, the encircled 10 in the formulas below is
replaced with 8.
TX jc TX ic
j n Sym
i
TX ic TX ic -------------------
RSSI -
--------------------- TX ic
10
12 + NR DL + 10 Log N FB
i i Inter – Tech 10 Inter – Tech i
RSSI = 10 Log RSSI + 10 + + 10
I DL
All TX j jc
The downlink reference signal total noise (I+N) for cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi:
TX jc TX ic
j n Sym
i
TX i ic -------------------
DLRS
- --------------------- TX ic
= 10 Log 10 +I + NR Inter – Tech + 10 Log 2 N i
10 Inter – Tech 10
I + N DLRS + 10
DL DL FB
All TXj jc
The SS and PBCH total noise (I+N) for cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi:
TX jc TX ic
j n Sym
i
TX i ic -------------------------
SS PBCH
- ---------------------
I + N SS PBCH = 10 Log 10 10 + I Inter – Tech + 10 10 + NRInter – Tech + 10 Log N
SCa – FB N FB – SS PBCH
DL DL
All TX j jc
The PDSCH and PDCCH total noise (I+N) for cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi:
Method 1: Synchronised Transmission and Reception
For details, see "Interference Calculation (DL)" on page 456.
TX jc TX ic
j n Sym
i
TX i ic
TX i ic --------------------
PDCCH
- --------------------- N Sym – PDCCH
10 10
Inter – Tech – Tech
I + N PDCCH = 10 Log 10 +I + 10 - + NR Inter
+ 10 Log ----------------------------------------------
DL TX i ic TX i ic DL
All TXj jc N SF – DL + N TDD – SSF
TX jc TX ic
j n
i TX ic
TX i ic --------------------
PDSCH- Sym -
-------------------- N Sym – PDSCH
i
10 10
Inter – Tech – Tech
I + N PDSCH = 10 Log 10 + I DL + 10 - + NR Inter
+ 10 Log ----------------------------------------------
TXi ic TX ic
i
DL
All TXj jc N SF – DL + N TDD – SSF
TX jc TX ic
j n Sym
i
--------------------
PDCCH
- --------------------- N TXi ic TX ic
i
Sym – PDSCH + N Sym – PDCCH
TX i ic
10 10
Inter – Tech –
I + N PDCCH = 10 Log 10 + I DL + 10 - + NR Inter
+ 10 Log -------------------------------------------------------------------
TX ic
i
DL
All TXj jc N SD Slot N Slot SF N SF – DL
TX jc TX ic
j n Sym
i
--------------------
PDSCH-
--------------------- N TXi ic TX i ic
Sym – PDSCH + N Sym – PDCCH
TX i ic
10 10
Inter – Tech –
I + N PDSCH = 10 Log -------------------------------------------------------------------- + NR Inter
+ I DL + 10 Log
+ 10
10 TX i ic DL
All TXj jc N SD Slot N Slot SF N SF – DL
W FB
N SCa – FB = ---------
-
F
Bearer Determination:
521
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
The bearers available for selection in the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi’s reception equipment are the ones:
• Which are common between Mi’s and TXi(ic)’s equipment (bearer indexes for which selection thresholds are
defined in both equipment), if the corresponding option has been set in the Atoll.ini file. For more information,
see the Administrator Manual.
• Whose indexes are within the range defined by the lowest and the highest bearer indexes defined for the service
being accessed by Mi.
Mi TX i ic
• Whose selection thresholds are less than the PDSCH C/(I+N) at Mi: T B CINR PDSCH
If the cell supports MIMO, and according to the Mi diversity mode depending on the SU-MIMO and MU-MIMO
Mi
thresholds and criteria, transmit diversity, SU-MIMO diversity, or MU-MIMO diversity gain, G Div – DL ,
corresponding to the bearer is applied to its selection threshold. The gain is read from the properties of the
TX i ic Mi
reception equipment assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi for N Ant – TX , N Ant – RX , Mobility M i ,
M
BLER B DL .
i
DL
The additional downlink diversity gain defined for the clutter class of the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi G Div is
also applied. Therefore, the bearers available for selection are all the bearers defined in the reception equipment
for which the following is true:
M M TX ic
i i DL i
T B – G Div – DL – G Div CINR PDSCH
The bearer selected for data transfer depends on the bearer selection criterion of the scheduler used by the cell TXi(ic).
• Bearer Index
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest index.
• Peak RLC Throughput
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest downlink peak RLC
channel throughput as calculated in "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, Allocated Bandwidth Throughput, and
Per-user Throughput Calculation" on page 547.
• Effective RLC Throughput
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest downlink effective
RLC channel throughput as calculated in "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, Allocated Bandwidth Throughput,
and Per-user Throughput Calculation" on page 547.
MIMO Diversity Gain:
With MIMO, the PBCH and PDCCH C/(I+N) become:
TX i ic TX i ic Mi
DL
CINR PBCH = CINR PBCH + G Div – PBCH + G Div
TX i ic TX i ic Mi DL
CINR PDCCH = CINR PDCCH + G Div – PDCCH + G Div
The PBCH and PDCCH diversity gains are applied to the C/(I+N) when the cell and the terminal both support any form
of MIMO in downlink. The additional downlink diversity gain defined per clutter is also applied.
Once the bearer is known, the PDSCH C/(I+N) calculated above becomes:
TX i ic TX i ic Mi DL
CINR PDSCH = CINR PDSCH + G Div – DL + G Div
Mi
Where G Div – DL is the transmit diversity, SU-MIMO diversity, or MU-MIMO diversity gain applied if the cell supports
MIMO and depending on the Mi diversity mode, the SU-MIMO and MU-MIMO thresholds and criteria.
Output
TX i ic
• CINR DLRS : Downlink reference signal C/(I+N) from cell TXi(ic) at pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ic
• CINR SS : SS C/(I+N) from cell TXi(ic) at pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX ic
i
• CINR PBCH : PBCH C/(I+N) from cell TXi(ic) at pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
522
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
TX ic
i
• CINR PDCCH : PDCCH C/(I+N) from cell TXi(ic) at pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX ic
i
• CINR PDSCH : PDSCH C/(I+N) from cell TXi(ic) at pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX ic
i
• RSRQ : Downlink reference signal received quality from cell TXi(ic) at pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ic
• RSSI : Received signal strength indicator, i.e., the received signals from the server (TXi(ic)), and all the interfering
cells (TXj(jc)), at pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX ic
i
• I + N DLRS : Downlink reference signals total noise from the interfering cells TXj(jc) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile
Mi covered by a cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• I + N SS PBCH : SS and PBCH total noise from the interfering cells TXj(jc) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered
by a cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• I + N PDCCH : PDCCH total noise from the interfering cells TXj(jc) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by a
cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• I + N PDSCH : PDSCH total noise from the interfering cells TXj(jc) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by a
cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• B DL : Bearer assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the downlink.
TX i ic
• CINR PUSCH – Max : Maximum PUSCH C/(I+N) defined for the cell TXi(ic).
TX ic
i
• NR UL : Uplink noise rise of the cell TXi(ic). This value can be user-defined or calculated as explained in "Interference
Calculation (UL)" on page 525.
TX ic
i
• NR UL – ICIC : ICIC uplink noise rise of the cell TXi(ic). This value can be user-defined or calculated as explained in
"Interference Calculation (UL)" on page 525.
TX i ic
• n PUSCH PUCCH : Uplink noise for the PUSCH and the PUCCH for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• N FB : Number of frequency blocks, defined in the frequency bands table, for the channel bandwidth used by the
cell TXi(ic).
TX ic
i
• FPC : Fractional uplink power control factor defined for the cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• P Max : Maximum transmission power of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• P Eff : Effective transmission power of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi after power control
adjustment as calculated in "C/(I+N) and Bearer Calculation (UL)" on page 532.
TX i
• G Ant : Transmitter antenna gain for the antenna used by the transmitter TXi.
TX i TX i
• L : Total transmitter losses for the transmitter TXi ( L = L Total – UL ).
TX i
• L Path : Path loss ( L Path = L Model + L Ant ).
• L Total : Total loss calculated as explained in "Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 501.
• L Model : Loss on the transmitter-receiver path (path loss) calculated using a propagation model.
TX
i
• L Ant : Antenna attenuation (from antenna patterns) calculated for the antenna used by the transmitter TXi.
• M Shadowing – Model : Shadowing margin based on the model standard deviation.
In coverage predictions, shadowing margins are taken into account when the option "Shadowing taken into account"
is selected.
• L Indoor : Indoor losses taken into account when the option "Indoor coverage" is selected.
523
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
M
i
• L : Receiver terminal losses for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
M
i
• G : Receiver terminal’s antenna gain for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
M
i
• L Ant : Receiver terminal’s antenna attenuation calculated for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
For calculating the useful signal level from the best serving cell, L Ant is determined in the direction (H,V) = (0,0) from
Mi
the antenna patterns of the antenna used by Mi. For calculating the interfering signal level from any interferer, L Ant
is determined in the direction of the interfering cell from the antenna patterns of the antenna used by Mi, while the
antenna is pointed towards Mi’s best serving cell.
Mi
• L Body : Body loss defined for the service used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ic
• D CP : Cyclic prefix duration defined in TXi(ic) frame configuration or, otherwise, in the global network settings.
Calculations
Atoll first calculates the allowed maximum transmission power for the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
This power is calculated by performing fractional power control.
Fractional Power Control:
Fractional power control imposes a limitation on the maximum transmission power of the terminal. A nominal PUSCH
power is indicated by the cell to all the pixels, subscribers, or mobiles. This nominal PUSCH power is calculated as
follows:
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX ic TX ic
+ n PUSCH PUCCH – 10 Log N FB for cell centre.
i i
P O_PUSCH = CINR PUSCH – Max + NRUL
TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic
P O_PUSCH = CINR PUSCH – Max + NRUL – ICIC + n PUSCH PUCCH – 10 Log NFB for cell-edge.
i i i i i
TX i ic TX i ic
Where n PUSCH PUCCH – 10 Log N FB corresponds to the uplink noise over 1 frequency block.
Next, the maximum allowed transmission power for the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is
calculated as follows:
Mi Mi TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
P Allowed = Min P Max 10 Log NFB + P O_PUSCH + FPC L Total
Once the maximum allowed power has been calculated, it is used as an upper limit for transmission power in all the remaining
calculations.
The received PUSCH and PUCCH signal level (dBm) from a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi at its serving cell TXi(ic) is calculated
as follows:
Mi Mi TX i TX i Mi Mi
C PUSCH PUCCH = EIRP PUSCH PUCCH – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G Ant – L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
Where EIRP is the effective isotropic radiated power of the terminal calculated as follows:
Mi Mi Mi Mi
EIRP PUSCH PUCCH = P +G –L
Mi Mi Mi Mi
With P = P Allowed without power control adjustment at the start of the calculations, and is P = P Eff after power control
adjustment.
f CP is the cyclic prefix factor, i.e., the ratio of the useful symbol energy to the total symbol energy.
The total symbol duration of a modulation symbol comprises the useful symbol duration, carrying the actual data bits, and a
cyclic prefix, added to the useful data bits as padding against multi-path to avoid inter-symbol interference. Hence, the total
energy within a modulation symbol belongs in part to the useful data bits and in part to the cyclic prefix. Once a modulation
524
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
symbol is received, only the energy of the useful data bits can be used for extracting the data. The energy belonging to the
cyclic prefix is lost once it has served its purpose of combatting inter-symbol interference. Therefore, f CP implies that the
energy belonging to the cyclic prefix is excluded from the useful signal level.
TX ic
10 Log 7 7.5 If D CPi = Normal
f CP = TX i ic
10 Log 6 7.5 If D CP = Extended
0 If M i is an interferer
The cyclic prefix energy and the useful data bits energy are both taken into account when calculating interfering signal levels.
Output
Mi
• C PUSCH PUCCH : Received PUSCH and PUCCH signal level from the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi at a cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• P Allowed : Maximum allowed transmission power for the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Input
• K: Boltzmann’s constant.
• T: Temperature in Kelvin.
• W FB : Width of a frequency block in the frequency domain (180 kHz).
TX i ic
• N FB : Number of frequency blocks, defined in the frequency bands table, for the channel bandwidth used by the
cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• nf : Noise figure of the cell TXi(ic).
Calculations
The thermal noise for the PUSCH and the PUCCH is calculated as:
TX i ic TX i ic
n 0 – PUSCH PUCCH = n 0 + 10 Log N FB W FB 1000
The uplink noise is the sum of the thermal noise and the noise figure of the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
n PUSCH PUCCH = n 0 – PUSCH PUCCH + nf
Output
TX i ic
• n PUSCH PUCCH : Uplink noise for the PUSCH and the PUCCH for the cell TXi(ic).
525
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX ic TX jc
i j
• N FB and N FB : Total number of frequency blocks defined in the frequency bands table for the channel
bandwidth used by the cell.
TX i ic TX j jc
• N FB – CE0 and N FB – CE0 : Number of cell-edge frequency blocks defined in the frame configurations table for the
channel bandwidth used by the cell and PSS ID 0.
TX i ic TX j jc
• N FB – CE1 and N FB – CE1 : Number of cell-edge frequency blocks defined in the frame configurations table for the
channel bandwidth used by the cell and PSS ID 1.
TX i ic TX j jc
• N FB – CE2 and N FB – CE2 : Number of cell-edge frequency blocks defined in the frame configurations table for the
channel bandwidth used by the cell and PSS ID 2.
Mj
• C PUSCH PUCCH : PUSCH and PUCCH signal level received at a cell TXi(ic) from an interfering mobile Mj covered by a cell
TXj(jc) as calculated in "Signal Level Calculation (UL)" on page 523.
• M Shadowing – Model : Shadowing margin based on the model standard deviation.
• M Shadowing – C I : Shadowing margin based on the C/I standard deviation.
In Monte Carlo simulations, interfering signal levels already include M Shadowing – Model , as explained in "Signal Level
Calculation (UL)" on page 523.
In coverage predictions, the ratio M Shadowing – Model – M Shadowing – C I is applied to the interfering signals (for more
information, see "Shadow Fading Model" on page 90). As the interfering signal levels already include
M Shadowing – Model , M Shadowing – C I is added to the received interfering signal levels in order to achieve the ratio
M Shadowing – Model – M Shadowing – C I :
M M
j j
C PUSCH PUCCH = C PUSCH PUCCH + M Shadowing – C I
In coverage predictions, shadowing margins are taken into account when the option "Shadowing taken into account"
is selected.
TX i ic – TX j jc
• rO : Total channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Co- and Adjacent
Channel Overlaps Calculation" on page 493.
Mj
• TL UL : Uplink traffic load of the interfering mobile Mj.
Traffic loads are calculated during Monte Carlo simulations as explained in "Scheduling and Radio Resource
Allocation" on page 552.
Calculations
The uplink interference received at a cell TXi(ic) from an interfering mobile Mj covered by a cell TXj(jc) is calculated as follows:
Mj Mj TX i ic – TX j jc Mj TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
I PUSCH PUCCH = C PUSCH PUCCH + f O + f TL – UL + f ICIC – UL + f ABS – UL
Mj
Where f TL – UL is an interference reduction factor due to the uplink traffic load of the interfering mobile Mj, calculated as
follows:
M M
f TL – UL = 10 Log TL UL
j j
526
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
TX ic – TX jc
i j
Calculations for the interference reduction factors due to channel overlapping ( f O ) and static uplink ICIC using
TX ic – TX jc
i j
fractional frequency reuse ( f ICIC – UL ) are explained below:
Interference reduction due to the co- and adjacent channel overlap between the studied and the interfering cells:
Interference reduction due to the co- and adjacent channel overlap between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) is calculated
as follows:
TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
fO = 10 Log r O
Interference reduction due to static uplink ICIC using fractional frequency reuse:
If the cell supports static ICIC in uplink, it means that a part of the LTE frame may use a fraction of the channel
bandwidth. The interference reduction factor due to static uplink ICIC using fractional frequency reuse is calculated as
follows:
TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
f ICIC – UL = 10 Log p Collision
TX i ic – TX j jc
Where p Collision is the collision probability between the subcarriers used by the interfered and interfering cells.
It is determined during Monte Carlo simulations as follows:
TX i ic – TX j jc Common
N FB – CC
Cell centre: p Collision = --------------------
-
TX i ic
N FB – CC
TX i ic – TX j jc Common
N FB – CE
Cell-edge: p Collision = --------------------
-
TX ic
i
N FB – CE
Common Common
Where, N FB – CC is the number of common frequency blocks in TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) in cell centre, N FB – CE is the
TX i ic TX i ic
number of common frequency blocks in TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) on cell-edge, N FB – CC and N FB – CE are respectively the
numbers of frequency blocks in cell centre and cell-edge of TXi(ic).
TX i ic TX i ic
Time-switched FFR N FB N FB – CEx
TX i ic TX i ic
Hard FFR N FB – CEx N FB – CEx
TX ic TX ic TX ic
Soft FFR i i i
N FB – N FB – CEx N FB – CEx
TX i ic TX ic TX ic TX ic TX i ic
– N FB – CE0 + N FB – CE1 + N FB – CE2
Partial soft FFR i i i
N FB N FB – CEx
TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic
i i i i
Where N FB – CEx can be N FB – CE0 , N FB – CE1 , or N FB – CE2 depending on the PSS ID of TXi(ic).
Whether a pixel, subscriber, or mobile is located in the cell-edge is determined as explained in "Best Server
Determination" on page 535.
Interference reduction due to subframe collision probabilities:
TX i ic – TX j jc
The interference reduction factor due to uplink subframe collision probabilities f ABS – UL is calculated as
explained in "Subframe Pattern Collision Calculation" on page 497.
In Monte Carlo simulations, Atoll calculates two separate noise rise values; for the mobiles located in the cell-edge of the
interfered cell Atoll calculates the ICIC UL Noise Rise, and for the mobiles located in the cell centre of the interfered cell Atoll
calculates the UL Noise Rise.
527
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
In coverage predictions, point analysis, and calculations on subscriber lists, according to the zone, cell centre or cell-edge,
where the pixel, receiver, or subscriber is located, Atoll uses either the ICIC UL Noise Rise or the UL Noise Rise to calculate the
PUSCH and PUCCH C/(I+N). For more information on the calculation of the uplink noise rise, see "Noise Rise Calculation (UL)"
on page 528.
Output
Mj
• I PUSCH PUCCH : PUSCH and PUCCH interference signal level received at a cell TXi(ic) from an interfering mobile Mj
covered by a cell TXj(jc).
Input
Mj
• I PUSCH PUCCH : PUSCH and PUCCH interference signal levels received at a cell TXi(ic) from interfering mobiles Mj
covered by other cells TXj(jc) as calculated in "Interfering Signal Level Calculation (UL)" on page 526.
TX i ic
• n PUSCH PUCCH : Uplink noise for the PUSCH and the PUCCH for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Noise Calculation (UL)"
on page 525.
Inter – Tech
• NRUL : Inter-technology uplink noise rise.
Calculations
For any mobile Mi in the cell centre of the interfered cell TXi(ic), Atoll calculates the UL Noise Rise as follows:
M
j
I PUSCH PUCCH TX ic
non-ICIC M i n PUSCH PUCCH
i
TX i ic -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
- ------------------------------------------- TX ic
= 10 Log + NR Inter – Tech – n i
10 10
NR UL 10 + 10 UL PUSCH PUCCH
All M j
All TXj jc
For any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the cell centre of the interfered cell TXi(ic), Atoll calculates the PUSCH and PUCCH
total noise (I+N) as follows:
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
I + N PUSCH PUCCH = NR UL + n PUSCH PUCCH
For any mobile Mi in the cell-edge of the interfered cell TXi(ic), Atoll calculates the ICIC UL Noise Rise as follows:
M
j
IPUSCH PUCCH TX i ic
ICIC M i n PUSCH PUCCH
TX i ic ------------------------------------------------------------------
- ------------------------------------------- TX ic
= 10 Log + NR Inter – Tech – n i
10 10
NR UL – ICIC
10 + 10
UL PUSCH PUCCH
All Mj
All TXj jc
For any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in cell-edge of the interfered cell TXi(ic), Atoll calculates the PUSCH and PUCCH total
noise (I+N) as follows:
TX ic TX ic TX ic
i i i
I + N PUSCH PUCCH = NR UL – ICIC + n PUSCH PUCCH
Output
TX i ic
• NRUL : Uplink noise rise for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• NRUL – ICIC : ICIC uplink noise rise for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• I + N PUSCH PUCCH : PUSCH and PUCCH total noise for a cell TXi(ic) calculated for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
528
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
M
i
• C PUSCH PUCCH : Received PUSCH and PUCCH signal level from the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi at its serving cell TXi(ic)
as calculated in "Signal Level Calculation (UL)" on page 523.
TX i ic
• n PUSCH PUCCH : PUSCH and PUCCH noise for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Noise Calculation (UL)" on page 525.
TX i ic
• T SU – MIMO – UL : SU-MIMO threshold defined in the reception equipment of the cell TXi(ic).
TX ic
i
• N FB : Total number of frequency blocks defined in the frequency bands table for the channel bandwidth used by
the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• N FB – CE0 : Number of cell-edge frequency blocks defined in the frame configurations table for the channel bandwidth
used by the cell TXi(ic) and PSS ID 0.
TX ic
i
• N FB – CE1 : Number of cell-edge frequency blocks defined in the frame configurations table for the channel bandwidth
used by the cell TXi(ic) and PSS ID 1.
TX i ic
• N FB – CE2 : Number of cell-edge frequency blocks defined in the frame configurations table for the channel bandwidth
used by the cell TXi(ic) and PSS ID 2.
TX i ic
• T B – Lowest : Bearer selection threshold of the lowest bearer in the reception equipment assigned to the cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• P Allowed : Maximum allowed transmission power of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as
calculated in "Signal Level Calculation (UL)" on page 523.
Mi
• P Min : Minimum transmission power of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
• M PC : Power control adjustment margin defined in the global network settings.
Mi
• T B : Bearer selection thresholds of the bearers defined in the reception equipment used bythe cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• B UL – Highest Service : Highest downlink bearer defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
Mi
• B UL – Lowest Service : Lowest downlink bearer defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
M
i
• N Ant – TX : Number of transmission (uplink) antenna ports defined for the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi.
TX i ic
• N Ant – RX : Number of reception (uplink) antenna ports defined for the cell TXi(ic).
• Mobility M i : Mobility used for the calculations.
M
BLER B UL : Uplink block error rate read from the graphs available in the reception equipment assigned to the cell
i
•
TXi(ic).
Calculations
The PUSCH and PUCCH C/N from a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi at its serving cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows:
Mi Mi TX i ic
CNR PUSCH PUCCH = C PUSCH PUCCH – n PUSCH PUCCH
Bearer Determination:
The bearers available for selection in the cell TXi(ic)’s reception equipment are the ones:
• Which are common between Mi’s and TXi(ic)’s equipment (bearer indexes for which selection thresholds are
defined in both equipment), if the corresponding option has been set in the Atoll.ini file. For more information,
see the Administrator Manual.
• Whose indexes are within the range defined by the lowest and the highest bearer indexes defined for the service
being accessed by Mi.
529
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
M M
i i
• Whose selection thresholds are less than the PUSCH and PUCCH C/N at Mi: T B CNR PUSCH PUCCH
If the cell supports MIMO, and according to the Mi diversity mode depending on the SU-MIMO and MU-MIMO
TX ic
i
thresholds and criteria, receive diversity, SU-MIMO diversity, or MU-MIMO diversity gain, G Div – UL ,
corresponding to the bearer is applied to its selection threshold. The gain is read from the properties of the
M TX ic M
reception equipment assigned to the cell TXi(ic) for N Ant – TX , N Ant – RX , Mobility M i , BLER B UL .
i i i
UL
The additional uplink diversity gain defined for the clutter class of the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi G Div is also
applied. Therefore, the bearers available for selection are all the bearers defined in the reception equipment for
which the following is true:
Mi TX i ic Mi
UL
T B – G Div – UL – G Div CNR PUSCH PUCCH
The bearer selected for data transfer depends on the bearer selection criterion of the scheduler used by the cell TXi(ic).
• Bearer Index
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest index.
• Peak RLC Throughput
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest uplink peak RLC
channel throughput as calculated in "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, Allocated Bandwidth Throughput, and
Per-user Throughput Calculation" on page 547.
• Effective RLC Throughput
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest uplink effective
RLC channel throughput as calculated in "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, Allocated Bandwidth Throughput,
and Per-user Throughput Calculation" on page 547.
MIMO Diversity Gain:
Once the bearer is known, the PUSCH and PUCCH C/N calculated above become:
Mi Mi TX i ic
UL
CNR PUSCH PUCCH = CNR PUSCH PUCCH + G Div – UL + G Div
TX i ic
Where G Div – UL is the receive diversity, SU-MIMO diversity, or MU-MIMO diversity gain applied if the cell supports
MIMO and depending on the Mi diversity mode, the SU-MIMO and MU-MIMO threshold and criteria.
530
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
The definition of the best bearer depends on the bearer selection criterion of the scheduler used by the cell TXi(ic),
i.e., bearer with the highest index, with the highest peak RLC throughput, or with the highest effective RLC
throughput.
The uplink bandwidth allocation may result in the use of a number of frequency blocks which is less than the number
of frequency blocks associated with the channel bandwidth of the cell. The gain related to this bandwidth reduction
is applied to the PUSCH and PUCCH C/N:
Mi Mi N TX i ic
= CNR PUSCH PUCCH + 10 Log -----------------
-
FB
CNR PUSCH PUCCH
Mi
Final All FB
N FB – UL
Mi TX i ic
Min
Where N FB – UL Service N FB – UL N FB – CC for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the cell centre of the interfered
Mi TX i ic
Min
cell TXi(ic), and N FB – UL Service N FB – UL N FB – CE for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the cell-edge of the
interfered cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic TX i ic
Time-switched FFR N FB N FB – CEx
TX i ic TX i ic
Hard FFR N FB – CEx N FB – CEx
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
Soft FFR N FB – N FB – CEx N FB – CEx
TX i ic TX ic TX ic TX ic TX i ic
– N FB – CE0 + N FB – CE1 + N FB – CE2
Partial soft FFR i i i
N FB N FB – CEx
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
Where N FB – CEx can be N FB – CE0 , N FB – CE1 , or N FB – CE2 depending on the PSS ID of TXi(ic).
The pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi reduces its transmission power so that the PUSCH and PUCCH C/N from it at its cell
is just enough to get the selected bearer.
Mi Mi Mi TX i ic TX i ic
If with P = P Allowed AND CNR PUSCH PUCCH T Mi + M PC , where T Mi is the bearer selection threshold, from
B UL B UL
the reception equipment assigned to the cell TXi(ic), for the bearer selected for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
The transmission power of Mi is reduced to determine the effective transmission power from the pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi as follows:
Mi Mi Mi TXi ic Mi
P Eff = Max P Allowed – CNR PUSCH PUCCH – T M + M PC P Min
B i
UL
Mi Mi
CNR PUSCH PUCCH is calculated again using P Eff .
Output
Mi
• CNR PUSCH PUCCH : PUSCH and PUCCH C/N from a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi at it serving cell TXi(ic).
531
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
Input
Mi
• CNR PUSCH PUCCH : PUSCH and PUCCH C/N from a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi at it serving cell TXi(ic) as calculated
in "C/N Calculation (UL)" on page 529.
TX i ic
• NRUL : Uplink noise rise for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Noise Rise Calculation (UL)" on page 528.
TX i ic
• NRUL – ICIC : ICIC uplink noise rise for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Noise Rise Calculation (UL)" on page 528.
TX i ic
• T SU – MIMO – UL : SU-MIMO threshold defined in the reception equipment of the cell TXi(c).
TX i ic
• N FB : Total number of frequency blocks defined in the frequency bands table for the channel bandwidth used by
the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• N FB – CE0 : Number of cell-edge frequency blocks defined in the frame configurations table for the channel bandwidth
used by the cell TXi(ic) and PSS ID 0.
TX ic
i
• N FB – CE1 : Number of cell-edge frequency blocks defined in the frame configurations table for the channel bandwidth
used by the cell TXi(ic) and PSS ID 1.
TX i ic
• N FB – CE2 : Number of cell-edge frequency blocks defined in the frame configurations table for the channel bandwidth
used by the cell TXi(ic) and PSS ID 2.
TX i ic
• T B – Lowest : Bearer selection threshold of the lowest bearer in the reception equipment assigned to the cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• P Allowed : Maximum allowed transmission power of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as
calculated in "Signal Level Calculation (UL)" on page 523.
Mi
• P Min : Minimum transmission power of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
• M PC : Power control adjustment margin defined in the global network settings.
Mi
• T B : Bearer selection thresholds of the bearers defined in the reception equipment used bythe cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• B UL – Highest Service : Highest downlink bearer defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
Mi
• B UL – Lowest Service : Lowest downlink bearer defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
Mi
• N Ant – TX : Number of transmission (uplink) antenna ports defined for the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi.
TX i ic
• N Ant – RX : Number of reception (uplink) antenna ports defined for the cell TXi(ic).
• Mobility M i : Mobility used for the calculations.
M
BLER BUL : Uplink block error rate read from the graphs available in the reception equipment assigned to the cell
i
•
TXi(ic).
532
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
Calculations
For any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the cell centre of the interfered cell TXi(ic), Atoll calculates the PUSCH and PUCCH C/
(I+N) as follows:
M M TX ic
i i i
CINR PUSCH PUCCH = CNR PUSCH PUCCH – NR UL
For any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the cell-edge of the interfered cell TXi(ic), Atoll calculates the PUSCH and PUCCH C/
(I+N) as follows:
Mi Mi TX i ic
CINR PUSCH PUCCH = CNR PUSCH PUCCH – NR UL – ICIC
Bearer Determination:
The bearers available for selection in the cell TXi(ic)’s reception equipment are the ones:
• Which are common between Mi’s and TXi(ic)’s equipment (bearer indexes for which selection thresholds are
defined in both equipment), if the corresponding option has been set in the Atoll.ini file. For more information,
see the Administrator Manual.
• Whose indexes are within the range defined by the lowest and the highest bearer indexes defined for the service
being accessed by Mi.
Mi Mi
• Whose selection thresholds are less than the PUSCH and PUCCH C/(I+N) at Mi: T B CINR PUSCH PUCCH
If the cell supports MIMO, and according to the Mi diversity mode depending on the SU-MIMO and MU-MIMO
TX i ic
thresholds and criteria, receive diversity, SU-MIMO diversity, or MU-MIMO diversity gain, G Div – UL ,
corresponding to the bearer is applied to its selection threshold. The gain is read from the properties of the
M TX ic M
reception equipment assigned to the cell TXi(ic) for N Ant – TX , N Ant – RX , Mobility M i , BLER BUL .
i i i
UL
The additional uplink diversity gain defined for the clutter class of the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi G Div is also
applied. Therefore, the bearers available for selection are all the bearers defined in the reception equipment for
which the following is true:
M TX ic M
i i UL i
T B – G Div – UL – G Div CINR PUSCH PUCCH
The bearer selected for data transfer depends on the bearer selection criterion of the scheduler used by the cell TXi(ic).
• Bearer Index
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest index.
• Peak RLC Throughput
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest uplink peak RLC
channel throughput as calculated in "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, Allocated Bandwidth Throughput, and
Per-user Throughput Calculation" on page 547.
• Effective RLC Throughput
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest uplink effective
RLC channel throughput as calculated in "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, Allocated Bandwidth Throughput,
and Per-user Throughput Calculation" on page 547.
MIMO Diversity Gain:
Once the bearer is known, the PUSCH and PUCCH C/(I+N) calculated above become:
Mi Mi TX i ic
UL
CINR PUSCH PUCCH = CINR PUSCH PUCCH + G Div – UL + G Div
TX i ic
Where G Div – UL is the receive diversity, SU-MIMO diversity, or MU-MIMO diversity gain applied if the cell supports
MIMO and depending on the Mi diversity mode, the SU-MIMO and MU-MIMO threshold and criteria.
533
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX ic
i
bandwidth of the cell, i.e., N FB . Bandwidth allocation is performed for all the pixels, subscribers, or mobiles in the
uplink, and may reduce the number of used frequency blocks in order to satisfy the selected target.
• Full Bandwidth
Full channel width is used by each mobile in the uplink. As there is no reduction in the bandwidth used for
transmission, there is no gain in the PUSCH and PUCCH C/(I+N).
• Maintain Connection
The bandwidth used for transmission by a mobile is reduced only if the PUSCH and PUCCH C/(I+N) is not enough
to even access the lowest bearer. For example, as a mobile moves from good to bad radio conditions, the number
of frequency blocks used by it for transmission in uplink are reduced one by one in order to improve the PUSCH
and PUCCH C/(I+N). The calculation of the gain introduced by the bandwidth reduction is explained below.
• Best Bearer
The bandwidth used for transmission by a mobile is reduced in order to improve the PUSCH and PUCCH C/(I+N)
enough to access the best bearer. For example, if using 5 frequency blocks, a mobile is able to access the best
bearer, and using 6 it would only get access to the second best, it will be assigned 5 frequency blocks as the used
uplink bandwidth. Although using 4 frequency blocks, its PUSCH and PUCCH C/(I+N) will be better than when using
5, the uplink bandwidth is not reduced to 4 because it does not provide any gain in terms of the bearer, i.e., the
mobile already has the best bearer using 5 frequency blocks. The calculation of the gain introduced by the
bandwidth reduction is explained below.
The definition of the best bearer depends on the bearer selection criterion of the scheduler used by the cell TXi(ic),
i.e., bearer with the highest index, with the highest peak RLC throughput, or with the highest effective RLC
throughput.
The uplink bandwidth allocation may result in the use of a number of frequency blocks which is less than the number
of frequency blocks associated with the channel bandwidth of the cell. The gain related to this bandwidth reduction
is applied to the PUSCH and PUCCH C/(I+N):
Mi Mi N TX i ic
CINR PUSCH PUCCH = CINR PUSCH PUCCH + 10 Log -----------------
-
FB
Mi
Final All FB
N FB – UL
Mi TX i ic
Min
Where N FB – UL Service N FB – UL N FB – CC for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the cell centre of the interfered
Mi TX i ic
Min
cell TXi(ic), and N FB – UL Service N FB – UL N FB – CE for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the cell-edge of the
interfered cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic TX i ic
Time-switched FFR N FB N FB – CEx
TX ic TX ic
Hard FFR i i
N FB – CEx N FB – CEx
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
Soft FFR N FB – N FB – CEx N FB – CEx
TX i ic TX ic TX ic TX ic TX i ic
– N FB – CE0 + N FB – CE1 + N FB – CE2
Partial soft FFR i i i
N FB N FB – CEx
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
Where N FB – CEx can be N FB – CE0 , N FB – CE1 , or N FB – CE2 depending on the PSS ID of TXi(ic).
The pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi reduces its transmission power so that the PUSCH and PUCCH C/(I+N) from it at its
cell is just enough to get the selected bearer.
534
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
M
i M
i
M
i TX ic TX ic
i i
If with P = P Allowed AND CINR PUSCH PUCCH T M + M PC , where T M is the bearer selection threshold, from
i i
B B
UL UL
the reception equipment assigned to the cell TXi(ic), for the bearer selected for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
The transmission power of Mi is reduced to determine the effective transmission power from the pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi as follows:
Mi Mi Mi TX i ic Mi
P Eff = Max P Allowed – CINR PUSCH PUCCH – T M + M PC P Min
B i
UL
M M
i i
CINR PUSCH PUCCH is calculated again using P Eff .
Output
Mi
• CINR PUSCH PUCCH : PUSCH and PUCCH C/(I+N) from a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi at it serving cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• N FB – UL : Number of frequency blocks used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi after uplink bandwidth allocation.
Mi
• P Eff : Effective transmission power of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• B UL : Bearer assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the uplink.
Input
TX i ic
• C DLRS : Downlink reference signal level received from any cell TXi(ic) at a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated
Mi Mi Mi Mi
in "Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 501 using the terminal and service parameters ( L ,G , L Ant , and L Body )
of Mi.
TX ic
i
• E DLRS : Received downlink reference signal energy per resource element (RSRP) from any cell TXi(ic) at a pixel,
subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated in "Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 501.
TX i ic
• T RSRP : Minimum RSRP defined for the cell TXi(ic).
TX ic
i
• T Selection : Cell selection threshold defined for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• O Individual : Cell individual offset defined for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• M HO : Handover margin defined for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• p Layer : Priority defined for the layer assigned to for any cell TXi(ic).
Max – DL
• N SCell : Maximum number of downlink secondary cells defined for the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi.
Max – UL
• N SCell : Maximum number of uplink secondary cells defined for the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi.
Calculations
The serving cell selected for coverage predictions is based on the Standard serving cell selection method. The serving cell
selected for Monte Carlo simulations can also be based on the Random method instead of the Standard method. If no serving
cell is found for a mobile Mi, it is rejected for “No Coverage”.
535
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
The best server selection for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi BSM is performed as follows:
i
• Standard cell selection based on 3GPP specifications for connected mode mobility:
a. Qualification:
To qualify as potential servers, cells must fulfill the following requirements:
• The cells’ layers must be supported by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi’s service and terminal.
• The speed defined in the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi’s mobility type must be less than or equal to the
maximum speed supported by the cells’ layers.
• The pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi must be located within the round-trip time distances corresponding to the
cells’ PRACH preamble format.
Cyclic
PRACH prefix + Window Guard
Cyclic prefix Preamble sequence RTT distance
preamble preamble size period
format sequence
Tsa Sec. Ts Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec. Metres
• For potential serving cells that belong to layers of higher priorities, the RSRP received at the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi must be higher than or equal to the cells’ Min RSRP plus the cell selection threshold:
TX ic TX ic TX ic
E DLRS T RSRP + Max 0 T Selection .
i i i
• For the potential serving cells that belong to the layer of the lowest priority, the RSRP received at the pixel,
TX i ic TX i ic
subscriber, or mobile Mi must be higher than or equal to the cells’ Min RSRP: E DLRS T RSRP .
b. Preselection:
From the list of cells that qualify as potential servers in step a., the cell that fulfills the following conditions is
preselected as the serving cell ( S 0 ):
c. Final selection:
Among the cells that qualify as potential servers, other than the preselected server ( S 0 ), and fulfill the following
condition:
TX i ic TX i ic S0 S0 S0
E DLRS + O Individual E DLRS + O Individual + M HO
Atoll selects as the best server the cell from which the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi receives the highest
TX i ic S0 TX i ic S0
reference signal level or RSRP plus the cell individual offset ( C DLRS + O Individual or E DLRS + O Individual ),
according to the defined best server selection criterion.
If no cell fulfills the above condition, then the preselcted server ( S 0 ) is selected as the best server.
536
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
• The cells’ frequency band must be supported by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi’s terminal.
• The speed defined in the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi’s mobility type must be less than or equal to the
maximum speed supported by the cells’ layers.
• The pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi must be located within the round-trip time distances corresponding to the
cells’ PRACH preamble format (see table above).
• The RSRP received at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi must be higher than or equal to the cells’ Min RSRP:
TX ic TX ic
i i
E DLRS T RSRP .
b. Final selection:
From the list of cells that qualify as potential servers in step a., Atoll keeps only one potential server per layer, i.e.,
per layer the cell from which the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi receives the highest reference signal level or RSRP,
and then selects among these cells one cell as the best server at random.
For carrier aggregation, Atoll selects multiple servers by processing lists of potential servers according to the Standard or
Random cell selection method:
LTE users:
a. A list of potential serving cells whose cell type includes “LTE”
LTE-A users:
b. A list of potential primary serving cells whose cell type includes “LTE” and “LTE-A PCell”
c. A list of potential secondary serving cells whose may include “LTE-A SCell DL” and “LTE-A SCell UL”
Atoll selects the serving cell for LTE users from the list a. and a primary serving cell for LTE-A users from the remaining
list b.
Once a primary serving cell has been selected, Atoll eliminates the selected cell as well as any other co-channel cell
from list c. Here, co-channel cells are cells whose channels overlap the channel being used the primary serving cell.
In intra-eNode-B carrier aggregation, at this stage Atoll also eliminates cells belonging to
other eNode-Bs than that of the selected primary cell.
In group-based carrier aggregation, at this stage Atoll also eliminates cells not belonging
to the carrier aggregation groups to which the selected primary cell belongs.
You can switch between carrier aggregation modes, using the Atoll.ini file. For more
information, see the Administrator Manual.
For LTE-A users with a primary serving cell of type “LTE-A PCell” selected from list b., Atoll selects secondary serving
cells from list c.
This step is carried out until either list c. is empty, or the numbers of downlink or uplink secondary serving cells
Max – DL
assigned to the user become equal to the maximum numbers defined in the terminal properties ( N SCell and
Max – UL
N SCell ). Secondary cells are selected based on the reference signal level or RSRP, according to the defined best
server selection criterion. Only secondary cells whose PDSCH C/(I+N) is higher than or equal to the secondary cell
DL
activation threshold defined in the terminal reception equipment properties ( T SCell ) are activated for aggregation in
downlink. Similarly, only secondary cells whose PDSCH C/(I+N) and PUSCH C/(I+N) are both higher than or equal to the
DL
secondary cell activation threshold defined in the terminal and cell reception equipment properties ( T SCell and
UL
T SCell ), respectively, are activated for aggregation in uplink.
The primary and secondary serving cells once assigned to a mobile do not change during a Monte Carlo simulation.
Atoll determines whether the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is in the cell-edge or cell centre of TXi(ic) by calculating the
difference between the path loss from the second best server and the best server, and comparing it with the delta path loss
threshold defined for the best server of the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Therefore, a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is considered to be a cell edge if
2ndBS M BS M – 2ndBS M BS M BS M BS M
Log r O
i i i i i i
L Total + 10 – L Total L Path , and it is considered to be in cell centre otherwise. Here, L Total is the
2ndBS
Mi
total loss from Mi’s best server and L Total is the total loss from Mi’s second best server calculated as explained in "Signal
Level Calculation (DL)" on page 453. The second best server for a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is calculated as follows:
537
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
2ndBS M = TX i ic
i TX ic TX i ic
i
C = 2ndBest C
DLRS All TX ic DLRS
i
BS – 2ndBS
M M
i i
rO is the total channel overlap ratio between the best server and the second best server as calculated in "Co- and
BS
Mi
Adjacent Channel Overlaps Calculation" on page 493. L Path is the delta path loss threshold defined for the best server of
the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Output
538
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
TX ic
i
• N TDD – SSF : Number of TDD special subframes (containing DwPTS, GP, and UpPTS) in the frame for the cell TXi(ic). It is
equal to 0 for FDD frequency bands, and is determined from the cell’s TDD frame configuration for TDD frequency
bands.
TX ic TX ic
i i
N SF – DL and N TDD – SSF are determined as follows:
TX i ic TX i ic
Configuration N SF – DL N TDD – SSF
FDD 10 0
DSUUU-DSUUU 2 2
DSUUD-DSUUD 4 2
DSUDD-DSUDD 6 2
DSUUU-DSUUD 3 2
DSUUU-DDDDD 6 1
DSUUD-DDDDD 7 1
DSUDD-DDDDD 8 1
TX i ic
• N Ant – TX : Number of transmission (downlink) antenna ports defined for the cell TXi(ic).
Calculations
In LTE, a resource block (RB) is defined as 1 frequency block by 1 slot. However, schedulers are able to perform resource
allocation every subframe (2 slots). 1 frequency block by 1 subframe (2 slots) is called a scheduler resource block (SRB) in the
calculations below.
The number of modulation symbols (resource elements) per scheduler resource block is calculated as follows:
N Sym SRB = N SCa – FB N SD Slot N Slot SF
Where N SCa – FB is the number of subcarriers per frequency block calculated as follows:
W FB
N SCa – FB = ---------
-
F
The number of modulation symbols (resource elements) corresponding to the DwPTS per scheduler resource block in the TDD
special subframes is calculated as follows:
DwPTS DwPTS
N Sym SSF = N SCa – FB N SD SSF
DwPTS
Where N SD SSF is the number of DwPTS symbol durations (OFDM symbols) per special subframe, determined from the TDD
special subframe configuration according to the 3GPP specifications as follows:
Cyclic Prefix = Normal Cyclic Prefix = Extended
Special
Subframe DwPTS GP UpPTS DwPTS GP UpPTS
Configuration DwPTS
N SD SSF
GP
N SD SSF
UpPTS
N SD SSF
DwPTS
N SD SSF
GP
N SD SSF
UpPTS
N SD SSF
0 3 10 3 8
1 9 4 8 3
1
2 10 3 1 9 2
3 11 2 10 1
4 12 1 3 7
5 3 9 8 2 2
6 9 3 9 1
2
7 10 2
8 11 1
The total number of modulation symbols (resource elements) in downlink is calculated as follows:
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
N Sym – DL = N FB N Sym SRB N SF – DL + N Sym – DwPTS
539
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX ic TX ic TX ic
i i i DwPTS
Where N Sym – DwPTS = N FB N TDD – SSF N Sym SSF
TX ic
i
The total downlink cell resources, i.e., R DL , are calculated as follows:
TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic
i i i i i i
R DL = N Sym – DL – O DLRS – O PSS – O SSS – O PBCH – O PDCCH – O DMRS
TX i ic
The downlink DwPTS resources, i.e., R DwPTS , are calculated as follows:
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
R DwPTS = N Sym – DwPTS – O DLRS DwPTS – O PDCCH DwPTS
TX i ic
Where O DLRS is the overhead corresponding to the downlink reference signals, O PSS is the overhead corresponding to the
TX i ic
primary synchronisation signals, O SSS is the overhead corresponding to the secondary synchronisation signals, O PBCH is the
TX i ic
overhead corresponding to the physical broadcast channel, and O PDCCH is the overhead corresponding to the physical
TX i ic
downlink control channel. O DMRS is the overhead corresponding to the UE-specific reference signals transmitted on the
logical antenna port 5 or the demodulation reference signals transmitted using antenna ports 7 and 8 or 7 through 14.
These overheads are calculated as follows:
Downlink reference signal overhead
The downlink reference signal overhead depends on the number of transmission antenna ports:
TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic
i i i i i
O DLRS = N FB N DLRS SRB N SF – DL + O DLRS DwPTS
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
Where O DLRS DwPTS = N FB N DLRS DwPTS N TDD – SSF ,
TX ic
if N Ant – TX = 1
i
8
TX ic
i TX ic
N DLRS SRB = 16 if N Ant – TX = 2 ,
i
TX ic
if N Ant – TX = 4 or 8
i
24
TX ic
i
And N DLRS DwPTS is determined from the table below:
1 2 1 2
2 4 2 4
0 3 3
4 8 4 8
8 8 8 8
1 6 1 6
2 12 2 12
1 9 8
4 20 4 20
8 20 8 20
1 6 1 6
2 12 2 12
2 10 9
4 20 4 20
8 20 8 20
540
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
1 6 1 8
2 12 2 16
3 11 10
4 20 4 24
8 20 8 24
1 8 1 2
2 16 2 4
4 12 3
4 24 4 8
8 24 8 8
1 2 1 6
2 4 2 12
5 3 8
4 8 4 20
8 8 8 20
1 6 1 6
2 12 2 12
6 9 9
4 20 4 20
8 20 8 20
1 6
2 12
7 10
4 20
8 20
1 6
2 12
8 11
4 20
8 20
PBCH overhead
The physical broadcast channel is transmitted on four symbol durations in the 1st downlink subframe over the center
6 frequency blocks. The physical broadcast channel overlaps with the downlink reference signals, therefore, some
downlink reference signal modulation symbols are subtracted:
216 for extended cyclic prefix
240 for normal cyclic prefix
PDCCH overhead
The physical downlink control channel can be transmitted over up to 4 symbol durations in each subframe. The
number of symbol durations for the PDCCH is defined in the global network settings. The PDCCH overlaps some
downlink reference signal symbols. These downlink reference signal symbols are subtracted from the PDCCH
overhead:
TX ic
if N SD – PDCCH = 0 :
i
TX i ic
O PDCCH = 0
541
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX ic TX ic
if N SD – PDCCH = 1 AND N Ant – TX 2 :
i i
TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic
O PDCCH = N SD – PDCCH N SCa – FB – 4 N FB
i i i i i
N SF – DL + O PDCCH DwPTS
TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic
i N i i i
SD – PDCCH N SCa – FB – 4 N FB
Where O PDCCH DwPTS = N TDD – SSF
Otherwise:
TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic TX i ic TX i ic
O PDCCH = N SD – PDCCH N SCa – FB – 2 Min 4 N Ant – TX N FB
i i i i
N SF – DL + O PDCCH DwPTS
TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic TX i ic
Where O PDCCH DwPTS = Min 2 N SD – PDCCH N SCa – FB – 2 Min 4 N Ant – TX N FB
i i i i
N TDD – SSF
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
With smart antennas and without MIMO: O DMRS = 12 N FB N SF – DL
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
With smart antennas and with MIMO: O DMRS = 24 N FB N SF – DL
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
Without smart antennas and with SU-MIMO or MU-MIMO and N Ant – TX 4 : O DMRS = 24 N FB N SF – DL
TX ic
i
Once R DL is known, it is scaled down according to the ICIC mode used by the cell TXi(ic) depending on whether the
downlink cell resources are being calculated for a cell-centre or cell-edge pixel, subscriber, or mobile.
TX i ic TX i ic
ICIC ABS
R DL = R DL f Scaling f Scaling
ICIC
f Scaling is calculated as follows for the different ICIC modes:
ICIC
ICIC cell resource scaling factor f Scaling for
ICIC mode
Cell centre Cell edge
No FFR 1 1
TX i ic
N FB – CEx
Time-switched FFR 1 --------------------
TX i ic
N FB
TX i ic TX i ic
N FB – CEx N FB – CEx
Hard FFR -------------------- --------------------
TX i ic TX i ic
N FB N FB
TX ic TX ic TX ic
i i i
N FB – N FB – CEx N FB – CEx
Soft FFR ------------------------------------------ --------------------
TX ic TX ic
i i
N FB N FB
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
N FB – N FB – CE0 + N FB – CE1 + N FB – CE2 N FB – CEx
Partial soft FFR ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ --------------------
TX i ic TX i ic
N FB N FB
TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic
i i i i
Where N FB – CEx can be N FB – CE0 , N FB – CE1 , or N FB – CE2 depending on the PSS ID of TXi(ic).
542
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
ABS
f Scaling is calculated as follows:
1 Cell centre
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
R DL – R DwPTS + SFP SSF R DwPTS
ABS
f Scaling =
SFP DL
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 1 - Cell edge
TX i ic
80 R DL
ABS
f Scaling = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 1 -
TX i ic
80 R DL
TX i ic TX i ic
For more information on SFP DL and SFP SSF , see "Subframe Pattern Collision Calculation" on page 497.
Output
TX ic
i
• R DL : Amount of downlink resources in the cell TXi(ic).
543
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX ic TX ic
Configuration i i
N SF – UL N TDD – SSF
FDD 10 0
DSUUU-DSUUU 6 2
DSUUD-DSUUD 4 2
DSUDD-DSUDD 2 2
DSUUU-DSUUD 5 2
DSUUU-DDDDD 3 1
DSUUD-DDDDD 2 1
DSUDD-DDDDD 1 1
UpPTS is used for SRS (sounding reference signals) if the UpPTS duration is 1 OFDM
symbol, and for SRS and PRACH if the UpPTS duration is 2 OFDM symbols. Therefore, the
uplink cell capacity can be determined without considering the UpPTS symbols.
Calculations
In LTE, a resource block (RB) is defined as 1 frequency block by 1 slot. However, schedulers are able to perform resource
allocation every subframe (2 slots). 1 frequency block by 1 subframe (2 slots) is called a scheduler resource block (SRB) in the
calculations below.
The number of modulation symbols (resource elements) per resource block is calculated as follows:
N Sym SRB = N SCa – FB N SD Slot N Slot SF
Where N SCa – FB is the number of subcarriers per frequency block calculated as follows:
W FB
N SCa – FB = ---------
-
F
The total number of modulation symbols (resource elements) in uplink is calculated as follows:
TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic
N Sym – UL = N FB – N FB – PUCCH N Sym SRB N SF – UL
i i i i
TX i ic
The total uplink cell resources, i.e., R UL , are calculated as follows:
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
R UL = N Sym – UL – O ULSRS – O ULDRS
TX i ic TX i ic
Where O ULSRS is the overhead corresponding to the uplink sounding reference signals, and O ULDRS is the overhead
corresponding to the uplink demodulation reference signals. These control channel overheads are calculated as follows:
Calculations of uplink control channel overheads
The uplink sounding reference signals are transmitted on 1 symbol duration in each uplink subframe. Therefore,
TX i ic N SCa – FB TX i ic
- N Sym
O ULSRS = --------------------- – UL
N Sym SRB
The uplink demodulation reference signals are transmitted on two symbol durations in each uplink subframe.
Therefore,
TX i ic N SCa – FB TX i ic
O ULDRS = 2 ---------------------
- N Sym – UL
N Sym SRB
TX i ic
Once R UL is known, it is scaled down according to the ICIC mode used by the cell TXi(ic) depending on whether the uplink
cell resources are being calculated for a cell-centre or cell-edge pixel, subscriber, or mobile.
TX i ic TX i ic
ICIC ABS
R UL = R UL f Scaling f Scaling
ICIC
f Scaling is calculated as follows for the different ICIC modes:
544
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
ICIC
ICIC cell resource scaling factor f Scaling for
ICIC mode
Cell centre Cell edge
No FFR 1 1
TX ic
i
N FB – CEx
Time-switched FFR 1 --------------------
TX i ic
N FB
TX i ic TX i ic
N FB – CEx N FB – CEx
Hard FFR -------------------- --------------------
TX i ic TX i ic
N FB N FB
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
N FB – N FB – CEx N FB – CEx
Soft FFR ------------------------------------------ --------------------
TX i ic TX i ic
N FB N FB
TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic TX i ic
– N FB – CE0 + N FB – CE1 + N FB – CE2
i i i i
N FB N FB – CEx
Partial soft FFR ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ --------------------
TX i ic TX i ic
N FB N FB
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
Where N FB – CEx can be N FB – CE0 , N FB – CE1 , or N FB – CE2 depending on the PSS ID of TXi(ic).
ABS
f Scaling is calculated as follows:
1 Cell centre
TX i ic
ABS
f Scaling = SFP UL
1
------------------------------ Cell edge
80
ABS
f Scaling = -----------------------------
1 -
80
TX i ic
For more information on SFP UL , see "Subframe Pattern Collision Calculation" on page 497.
Output
TX i ic
• R UL : Amount of uplink resources in the cell TXi(ic).
545
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX ic
i
• N TDD – SSF : Number of TDD special subframes (containing DwPTS, GP, and UpPTS) in the frame for the cell TXi(ic). It is
equal to 0 for FDD frequency bands, and is determined from the cell’s TDD frame configuration for TDD frequency
bands.
TX ic TX ic
i i
N SF – DL and N TDD – SSF are determined as follows:
TX i ic TX i ic
Configuration N SF – DL N TDD – SSF
FDD 10 0
DSUUU-DSUUU 2 2
DSUUD-DSUUD 4 2
DSUDD-DSUDD 6 2
DSUUU-DSUUD 3 2
DSUUU-DDDDD 6 1
DSUUD-DDDDD 7 1
DSUDD-DDDDD 8 1
Calculations
In LTE, the maximum throughput that can be supported by a user equipment is defined through its UE category parameter
Transport Block Size. This is the maximum number of transport block bits that the UE can carry per subframe.
The downlink UE capacity in terms of the maximum throughput supported by a UE in downlink is calculated as follows:
TX ic TX ic
N i i
Max Max – DL SF – DL + N TDD – SSF
TP UE – DL = N TBB TTI ---------------------------------------------------
-
D Frame
The maximum transport block sizes defined by the 3GPP for different UE categories correspond to the following maximum
throughput capacities in FDD:
UE Category 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Max – DL
N TBB TTI (bits/TTI) 10296 51024 102048 150752 299552 301504 301504 2998560
Max
TP UE – DL (Mbps) 10.296 51.024 102.048 150.752 299.552 301.504 301.504 2998.560
Output
Max
• TP UE – DL : Maximum downlink throughput capacity of a UE category.
TX i ic TX i ic
Configuration N SF – UL N TDD – SSF
FDD 10 0
DSUUU-DSUUU 6 2
546
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
TX ic TX ic
Configuration i i
N SF – UL N TDD – SSF
DSUUD-DSUUD 4 2
DSUDD-DSUDD 2 2
DSUUU-DSUUD 5 2
DSUUU-DDDDD 3 1
DSUUD-DDDDD 2 1
DSUDD-DDDDD 1 1
Calculations
In LTE, the maximum throughput that can be supported by a user equipment is defined through its UE category parameter
Transport Block Size. This is the maximum number of transport block bits that the UE can carry per subframe.
The uplink UE capacity in terms of the maximum throughput supported by a UE in uplink is calculated as follows:
TX ic
i
Max Max – UL N SF – UL
TP UE – UL = N TBB TTI -----------------
D Frame
The maximum transport block sizes defined by the 3GPP for different UE categories correspond to the following maximum
throughput capacities in FDD:
UE Category 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Max – UL
N TBB TTI (bits/TTI) 5160 25456 51024 51024 75376 51024 102048 1497760
Max
TP UE – UL (Mbps) 5.16 25.456 51.024 51.024 75.376 51.024 102.048 1497.760
Output
Max
• TP UE – UL : Maximum uplink throughput capacity of a UE category.
Input
TX i ic
• TL DL – Max : Maximum downlink traffic load for the cell TXi(ic).
TX ic
i
• TL UL – Max : Maximum uplink traffic load for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• R DL : Amount of downlink resources in the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Calculation of Total Cell Resources" on
page 538.
TX i ic
• R UL : Amount of uplink resources in the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Calculation of Total Cell Resources" on
page 538.
• M : Bearer efficiency (bits/symbol) of the bearer assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the downlink in
i
B DL
547
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
M
i
• T SU – MIMO – DL : SU-MIMO threshold defined in the reception equipment of the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX ic
i
• T MU – MIMO – UL : MU-MIMO threshold defined in the reception equipment of the cell TXi(ic).
TX ic
i
• T MU – MIMO – DL : MU-MIMO threshold defined in the reception equipment of the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ic
• G MU – MIMO – UL : Average number of co-scheduled MU-MIMO users in uplink for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• G MU – MIMO – DL : Average number of co-scheduled MU-MIMO users in downlink for the cell TXi(ic).
M TX ic
BLER BDL : Downlink block error rate read from the BLER vs. CINR PDSCH graph available in the reception equipment
i i
•
assigned to the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
M M
BLER BUL : Uplink block error rate read from the BLER vs. CINR PUSCH PUCCH graph available in the reception
i i
•
equipment assigned to the cell TXi(ic).
DL
• T SCell : Secondary cell activation threshold of the reception equipment assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
UL
• T SCell : Secondary cell activation threshold of the reception equipment assigned to the cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• f TP – Scaling : Throughput scaling factor defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile
Mi.
M
i
• TP Offset : Throughput offset defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ic
• N FB : Number of frequency blocks, defined in the frequency bands table, for the channel bandwidth used by the
cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• N FB – UL : Number of frequency blocks used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi after uplink bandwidth allocation as
calculated in "C/(I+N) and Bearer Calculation (UL)" on page 532.
TX ic
i
• N Users – DL : Number of users connected to the cell TXi(ic) in downlink.
TX i ic
• N Users – UL : Number of users connected to the cell TXi(ic) in uplink.
Calculations
Downlink:
TX ic
i
R DL Mi
Mi B DL
• Peak RLC Channel Throughput: CTP P – DL = ---------------------------------
D Frame
In the above formula, the actual value of D Frame is used to calculate the channel throughput for coverage predictions,
while D Frame = 1 sec for Monte Carlo simulations.
TX i ic
For proportional fair schedulers, the channel throughput is increased by the multi-user diversity gain G MUG – DL read
Mi
from the scheduler properties for the bearer B DL , Mobility M i , and the number of users connected to the cell in
downlink.
TX i ic
R DL Mi
Mi B TX ic
DL i
CTP P – DL = --------------------------------- G MUG – DL
D Frame
TX i ic Mi
Max
G MUG – DL = 1 if CINR PDSCH CINR MUG
If the multi-user diversity gain for the exact value of the number of connected users is not available in the graph, it is
interpolated from the gain values available for the numbers of users just less than and just greater than the actual
number of users.
MIMO – SU-MIMO Gain:
548
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
If the cell supports MIMO, and according to the Mi diversity mode depending on the SU-MIMO threshold and criterion,
Max – M
i
the SU-MIMO gain, G SU – MIMO – DL , corresponding to the bearer is applied to its efficiency. The gain is read from the
TX ic M
i i
properties of the reception equipment assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi for N Ant – TX , N Ant – RX ,
M
Mobility M i , BLER B DL .
i
Atoll also takes into account the SU-MIMO Gain Factor f SU – MIMO defined for the clutter class where the pixel,
subscriber, or mobile Mi is located.
Max – M i
= 1 + f SU – MIMO G SU – MIMO – DL – 1
Mi Mi
B DL B DL
If the Max SU-MIMO Gain for the exact value of the C/(I+N) is not available in the table, it is interpolated from the gain
values available for the C/(I+N) just less than and just greater than the actual C/(I+N).
MIMO – MU-MIMO Gain (for throughput coverage predictions):
If the cell supports MU-MIMO, and according to the Mi diversity mode depending on the MU-MIMO threshold and
TX i ic
criterion, the MU-MIMO gain, G MU – MIMO – DL , which is the average number of co-scheduled users, is applied to the
channel throughput.
Mi Mi TX i ic
CTP P – DL = CTP P – DL G MU – MIMO – DL
M M M
Effective RLC Channel Throughput: CTP E – DL = CTP P – DL 1 – BLER B DL
i i i
•
Mi
Mi Mi f TP – Scaling Mi
• Application Channel Throughput: CTP A – DL = CTP E – DL ------------------------
- – TP Offset
100
Mi Mi TX i ic
• Peak RLC Cell Capacity: Cap P – DL = CTP P – DL TL DL – Max
M M M
Effective RLC Cell Capacity: Cap E – DL = Cap P – DL 1 – BLER B DL
i i i
•
Mi
Mi f TP – Scaling
Mi Mi
• Application RLC Capacity: Cap A – DL = Cap E – DL ------------------------
- – TP Offset
100
Mi
Mi Cap P – DL
• Peak RLC Throughput per User: PUTP P – DL = -----------------------
-
TX i ic
N Users – DL
Mi
i
M Cap E – DL
• Effective RLC Throughput per User: PUTP E – DL = -----------------------
-
TX i ic
N Users – DL
Mi
i
M
i
M f TP – Scaling M
i
• Application Throughput per User: PUTP A – DL = PUTP E – DL ------------------------
- – TP Offset
100
549
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
Carrier Aggregation:
Aggregated throughputs are calculated by summing the throughputs from each serving
cell taking part in carrier aggregation for any LTE-A pixel, subscriber, or mobile. If the sum
of the throughputs exceeds the maximum throughput supported by the UE category, the
aggregated throughput is scaled down by the following ratio:
Mi
Min TP UE – DL CTP P – DL
Max
TX i ic
r = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Mi
CTP P – DL
TX i ic
Only secondary cells whose PDSCH C/(I+N) is higher than or equal to the secondary cell
DL
activation threshold ( T SCell ) defined in the terminal reception equipment properties are
activated for aggregation.
Uplink:
TX i ic
R UL Mi
M B UL
i
• Peak RLC Channel Throughput: CTP P – UL = ---------------------------------
D Frame
In the above formula, the actual value of D Frame is used to calculate the channel throughput for coverage predictions,
while D Frame = 1 sec for Monte Carlo simulations.
TX i ic
For proportional fair schedulers, the channel throughput is increased by the multi-user diversity gain G MUG – UL read
Mi
from the scheduler properties for the bearer B UL , Mobility M i , and the number of users connected to the cell in
uplink.
TX i ic
R UL Mi
Mi B TX ic
UL i
CTP P – UL = --------------------------------- G MUG – UL
D Frame
TX i ic Mi
Max
G MUG – UL = 1 if CINR PUSCH PUCCH CINR MUG
If the multi-user diversity gain for the exact value of the number of connected users is not available in the graph, it is
interpolated from the gain values available for the numbers of users just less than and just greater than the actual
number of users.
MIMO – SU-MIMO Gain:
If the cell supports MIMO, and according to the Mi diversity mode depending on the SU-MIMO threshold and criterion,
Max – TX i ic
the SU-MIMO gain, G SU – MIMO – UL , corresponding to the bearer is applied to its efficiency. The gain is read from the
M TX ic M
properties of the reception equipment assigned to the TXi(ic) for N Ant – RX , N Ant – TX , Mobility M i , BLER B UL .
i i i
Atoll also takes into account the SU-MIMO Gain Factor f SU – MIMO defined for the clutter class where the pixel,
subscriber, or mobile Mi is located.
Max – TX i ic
= 1 + f SU – MIMO G SU – MIMO – UL – 1
Mi Mi
B UL B UL
If the Max SU-MIMO Gain for the exact value of the C/(I+N) is not available in the table, it is interpolated from the gain
values available for the C/(I+N) just less than and just greater than the actual C/(I+N).
550
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
M M M
Effective RLC Channel Throughput: CTP E – UL = CTP P – UL 1 – BLER B UL
i i i
•
Mi
Mi f TP – Scaling
Mi Mi
• Application Channel Throughput: CTP A – UL = CTP E – UL ------------------------
- – TP Offset
100
M M TX ic
i i i
• Peak RLC Cell Capacity: Cap P – UL = CTP P – UL TL UL – Max
M M M
Effective RLC Cell Capacity: Cap E – UL = Cap P – UL 1 – BLER B UL
i i i
•
Mi
Mi f TP – Scaling
Mi Mi
• Application Cell Capacity: Cap A – UL = Cap E – UL ------------------------
- – TP Offset
100
M
i
Mi Mi N FB – UL
• Peak RLC Allocated Bandwidth Throughput: ABTP P – UL = CTP P – UL -----------------
TX ic
-
i
N FB
M M M
Effective RLC Allocated Bandwidth Throughput: ABTP E – UL = ABTP P – UL 1 – BLER B UL
i i i
•
Mi
Mi Mi f TP – Scaling Mi
• Application Allocated Bandwidth Throughput: ABTPA – UL = ABTP E – UL ------------------------
- – TPOffset
100
M Cap M i M
Peak RLC Throughput per User: PUTP P – UL = Min -----------------------
P – UL
- ABTPP –i UL
i
•
TX
i
ic
N Users – UL
Mi Cap Mi M
• Effective RLC Throughput per User: PUTP E – UL = Min -----------------------
E – UL
- ABTP E –i UL
TX
i
ic
N Users – UL
Mi
Mi f TP – Scaling
Mi Mi
• Application Throughput per User: PUTP A – UL = PUTP E – UL ------------------------
- – TP Offset
100
Carrier Aggregation:
Aggregated throughputs are calculated by summing the throughputs from each serving
cell taking part in carrier aggregation for any LTE-A pixel, subscriber, or mobile. If the sum
of the throughputs exceeds the maximum throughput supported by the UE category, the
aggregated throughput is scaled down by the following ratio:
Mi
Min TP UE – UL CTP P – UL
Max
TX i ic
r = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Mi
CTP P – UL
TX i ic
Only secondary cells whose PDSCH C/(I+N) is higher than or equal to the secondary cell
DL
activation threshold ( T SCell ) defined in the terminal reception equipment properties and
UL
PUSCH C/(I+N) is higher than or equal to the secondary cell activation threshold ( T SCell )
defined in the cell reception equipment properties are activated for aggregation.
551
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
Output
M
i
• CTP P – DL : Downlink peak RLC channel throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
M
i
• CTP E – DL : Downlink effective RLC channel throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• CTP A – DL : Downlink application channel throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
M
i
• Cap P – DL : Downlink peak RLC cell capacity at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• Cap E – DL : Downlink effective RLC cell capacity at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• Cap A – DL : Downlink application cell capacity at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• PUTP P – DL : Downlink peak RLC throughput per user at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• PUTP E – DL : Downlink effective RLC throughput per user at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
M
i
• PUTP A – DL : Downlink application throughput per user at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• CTP P – UL : Uplink peak RLC channel throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• CTP E – UL : Uplink effective RLC channel throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• CTP A – UL : Uplink application channel throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• Cap P – UL : Uplink peak RLC cell capacity at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
M
i
• Cap E – UL : Uplink effective RLC cell capacity at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• Cap A – UL : Uplink application cell capacity at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• ABTP P – UL : Uplink peak RLC allocated bandwidth throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• ABTP E – UL : Uplink effective RLC allocated bandwidth throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• ABTP A – UL : Uplink application allocated bandwidth throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• PUTP P – UL : Uplink peak RLC throughput per user at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• PUTP E – UL : Uplink effective RLC throughput per user at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• PUTP A – UL : Uplink application throughput per user at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX ic
i
• TL DL – Max : Maximum downlink traffic load for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• TL UL – Max : Maximum uplink traffic load for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• N Users – Max : Maximum number of users defined for the cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• p QCI : QCI priority of the service accessed by a mobile Mi.
Mi
• p Service : User-defined priority of the service accessed by a mobile Mi.
552
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
M
i
• TPD Min – DL : Downlink minimum throughput demand for the service accessed by a mobile Mi.
M
i
• TPD Min – UL : Uplink minimum throughput demand for the service accessed by a mobile Mi.
M
i
• TPD Max – DL : Downlink maximum throughput demand for the service accessed by a mobile Mi.
Mi
• TPD Max – UL : Uplink maximum throughput demand for the service accessed by a mobile Mi.
TX i ic
• G MU – MIMO – UL : Average number of co-scheduled MU-MIMO users in uplink for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• G MU – MIMO – DL : Average number of co-scheduled MU-MIMO users in downlink for the cell TXi(ic).
• Mi : Bearer efficiency (bits/symbol) of the bearer assigned to the mobile Mi in the downlink in "C/(I+N) and Bearer
B DL
downlink.
• M : Bearer efficiency (bits/symbol) of the highest bearer of the service being used by the mobile Mi in the
i
B UL – Highest
uplink.
M TX ic
BLER B DL : Downlink block error rate read from the BLER vs. CINR PDSCH graph available in the reception equipment
i i
•
assigned to the terminal used by the mobile Mi.
M M
BLER B UL : Uplink block error rate read from the BLER vs. CINR PUSCH PUCCH graph available in the reception
i i
•
equipment assigned to the cell TXi(ic).
DL
• T SCell : Secondary cell activation threshold of the reception equipment assigned to the mobile Mi.
UL
• T SCell : Secondary cell activation threshold of the reception equipment assigned to the cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• f TP – Scaling : Throughput scaling factor defined in the properties of the service used by the mobile Mi.
M
i
• TP Offset : Throughput offset defined in the properties of the service used by the mobile Mi.
Mi
• CTP P – DL : Downlink peak RLC channel throughput at the mobile Mi as calculated in "Throughput Calculation" on
page 538.
Mi
• CTP E – DL : Downlink effective RLC channel throughput at the mobile Mi as calculated in "Throughput Calculation" on
page 538.
Mi
• CTP P – UL : Uplink peak RLC channel throughput at the mobile Mi as calculated in "Throughput Calculation" on
page 538.
Mi
• CTP E – UL : Uplink effective RLC channel throughput at the mobile Mi as calculated in "Throughput Calculation" on
page 538.
Mi
• ABTP P – UL : Uplink peak RLC allocated bandwidth throughput at the mobile Mi as calculated in "Throughput
Calculation" on page 538.
Mi
• ABTP E – UL : Uplink effective RLC allocated bandwidth throughput at the mobile Mi as calculated in "Throughput
Calculation" on page 538.
Max
• TP UE – DL : Maximum downlink throughput capacity of the UE category of the mobile Mi as calculated in "Calculation
of Downlink UE Capacity" on page 545.
Max
• TP UE – UL : Maximum uplink throughput capacity of the UE category of the mobile Mi as calculated in "Calculation of
Uplink UE Capacity" on page 546.
553
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
Calculations
The following calculations are described for any cell TXi(ic) containing the users Mi for which it is the best server.
Mobile Selection:
TX ic
i
The scheduler selects N Users mobiles for the scheduling and RRM process. If the Monte Carlo user distribution has generated
TX i ic
a number of users which is less than N Users – Max , the scheduler keeps all the mobiles generated for the cell TXi(ic).
TX ic TX ic TX ic
N Users = Min N Users – Max N Users – Generated
i i i
TX ic
Sel i
For a cell, mobiles M i N Users are selected for RRM by the scheduler.
Sel
Mi
Sel
Mi Sel
Mi
Sel
Mi B DL
Downlink: TPD Max – DL = Max TPD Min – DL TPD Max – DL ------------------------------
Sel
Mi
B DL – Highest
Sel
Mi
Sel
Mi Sel
Mi
Sel
Mi B UL
Uplink: TPD Max – UL = Max TPD Min – UL TPD Max – UL -------------------------------
Sel
Mi
B UL – Highest
Then, depending on the selected target throughput of the scheduler assigned to the cell TXi(ic), the actual minimum and
maximum throughput demands can be considered as the peak RLC, effective RLC, or application throughput. Therefore:
• Target Throughput = Peak RLC Throughput
Sel Sel
M M
i i
Downlink: TPD Min – DL , TPD Max – DL
Sel Sel
Mi Mi Mi
Uplink: TPD Min – UL , Min TPD Max – UL ABTP P – UL
Sel
Sel Mi Mi
Sel i
M Sel Min TPD Max – UL ABTP P – UL
Mi TPD Min – UL Mi
Uplink: TPD Min – UL = ---------------------------------------------- , TPD Max – UL = -------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
1 – BLER B UL 1 – BLER B UL
554
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
Sel
Sel M M
i i
TPD Min – UL + TP Offset
M
i
Uplink: TPD Min – UL = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ ,
Sel
Mi Mi
1 – BLER BUL f TP – Scaling
Sel
Mi Mi Mi
Sel Min TPD Max – UL ABTP P – UL + TP Offset
Mi
TPD Max–UL = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sel
Mi Mi
1 – BLER B UL f TP – Scaling
The Min() function selects the lower of the two values. This calculation is performed in order to limit the maximum uplink
throughput demand to the maximum throughput that a user can get in uplink using the allocated bandwidth (number of
frequency blocks) calculated for it in "C/(I+N) and Bearer Calculation (UL)" on page 532.
Resource Allocation for Minimum Throughput Demands:
• For their minimum throughput demands, LTE-A users are only scheduled on their
primary serving cells.
Sel Sel
TX i ic Mi Mi
Sel
1. Atoll sorts the M i N Users in order of decreasing effective service priority (combination of p QCI and p Service ).
The mobiles are sorted first in the order of decreasing QCI priority (as listed in the table below) and then in the order
of decreasing user-defined service priority within a QCI. For example:
QCI priority 2 4 3 5 1 6 7 8 9
Sel Sel
Sel Mi Mi
Mi p QCI p Service
1 1 i
2 :
3 0
: 2 i
: :
: 0
: 3 i
: :
: 0
: 4 i
: :
: 0
: 5 i
: :
: 0
: 6 i
: :
: 0
: 7 i
: :
: 0
: 8 i
555
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
Sel Sel
Sel M M
Mi p QCI
i i
p Service
: :
: 0
: 9 i
: :
: 0
: NULL i
: :
N 0
TX ic
Sel Sel i
2. Starting with M i = 1 up to M i = N Users , Atoll allocates the downlink and uplink resources required to satisfy
each user’s minimum throughput demands in downlink and uplink as follows:
Sel Sel
Sel Mi Sel Mi
Mi TPD Min – DL Mi TPD Min – UL
R Min – DL = --------------------------
- and R Min – UL = --------------------------
-
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
CTP P – DL CTP P – UL
6. Mobiles which are active UL and whose minimum throughput demand in UL is higher than the uplink allocated
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
bandwidth throughput ( TPD Min – UL ABTP P – UL ) are rejected due to Resource Saturation.
Sel Sel
Mi TX i ic Mi TX i ic
7. If R Min – DL TL DL – Max or R Min – UL TL UL – Max , and all the minimum throughput resources demanded by
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
the mobiles have been allocated, Atoll goes to the next step for allocating resources to satisfy the maximum
throughput demands.
Backhaul Saturation:
If at this stage, a site’s downlink or uplink effective RLC aggregate throughput exceeds its maximum downlink or uplink S1
interface throughput, respectively, mobiles are rejected one by one due to Backhaul Saturation, starting from the mobile with
the lowest priority service, among all the cells of the site in order to reach a downlink or uplink effective RLC aggregate site
throughput ≤ the site’s maximum downlink or uplink S1 interface throughput.
Resource Allocation for Maximum Throughput Demands:
For each cell, the remaining cell resources available are:
556
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
Sel
TX ic TX ic M
i i i
Downlink: R Rem – DL = TL DL – Max – R Min – DL
Sel
M
i
Sel
TX ic TX ic M
i i i
Uplink: R Rem – UL = TL UL – Max – R Min – UL
Sel
M
i
For each mobile, the remaining throughput demands are either the maximum UE capacities or the difference between the
maximum and the minimum throughput demands, whichever is smaller:
For their maximum throughput demands, LTE-A users are scheduled separately on each of their serving cells, primary and
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
secondary. Each user’s remaining throughput demand ( TPD Rem – DL and TPD Rem – UL ) is distributed over each of its serving
cells proportionally to the resources available on each serving cell and to the user’s downlink effective RLC channel throughput
or uplink effective RLC allocated bandwidth throughput on each of its serving cell:
TX i ic Mi
Sel
M
Sel
M R Rem – DL CTP E – DL
i i Server n Server n
Downlink: TPD Rem – DL = TPD Rem – DL --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5
-
Server n
TX i ic Mi
RRem – DL Server n
CTP E – DL
Server n
n=1
TX i ic Mi
Sel
Mi
Sel
Mi R Rem – UL ABTP E – UL
Server n Server n
Uplink: TPD Rem – UL = TPD Rem – UL ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5
-
Server n
TX i ic Mi
RRem – UL Server n
ABTP E – UL
Server n
n=1
You can add an option in the Atoll.ini file to have each user’s remaining throughput demand distributed over each of its serving
cells proportionally only to the resources available on each serving cell:
TX i ic
Sel Sel R Rem – DL
Mi Mi
Server n
Downlink: TPD Rem – DL = TPD Rem – DL -----------------------------------------------------
5
-
Server n
TX i ic
RRem – DL Server n
n=1
TX i ic
Sel Sel R Rem – UL
Mi Mi
Server n
Uplink: TPD Rem – UL = TPD Rem – UL -----------------------------------------------------
5
-
Server n
TX ic
RRem – UL
i
Server n
n=1
Within each serving cell, resource allocation for the maximum throughput demands is carried out according to the scheduler
used by that particular cell. For the remaining throughput demands of the mobiles, the following resource allocation methods
are available:
• Proportional Fair:
The goal of this scheduling method is to distribute resources among users fairly in such a way that, on the average,
each user gets the highest possible throughput that it can get under the radio conditions at its location.
557
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
Sel
Let the total number of users be N M i .
TX ic TX ic
i i
a. Each user’s channel throughput is increased by the multi-user diversity gain G MUG – DL or G MUG – UL read from the
Sel Sel
M M
i i Sel
scheduler properties for the downlink or uplink bearer ( B DL or B UL ), Mobility M i assigned to mobile
Sel
Mi , and the number of connected users, DL or UL, in the cell TXi(ic) in the iteration k-1.
Sel Sel
TX i ic Mi TX i ic Mi
Max Max
G MUG – DL = 1 if CINR PDSCH CINR MUG and G MUG – UL = 1 if CINR PUSCH PUCCH CINR MUG .
If the multi-user diversity gain for the exact value of the number of connected users is not available in the graph,
it is interpolated from the gain values available for the numbers of users just less than and just greater than the
actual number of users.
b. Atoll divides the remaining resources in the cell into equal parts for each user:
TX i ic TX i ic
R Rem – DL R Rem – UL
--------------------- and --------------------
-
N N
c. Atoll converts the remaining throughput demands of all the users to their respective remaining resource
demands:
Sel Sel
Sel Mi Sel Mi
Mi TPD Rem – DL Mi TPD Rem – UL
RD Rem – DL = ---------------------------
- and RD Rem – UL = ---------------------------
-
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
CTP P – DL CTP P – UL
Remaining resource demands of a user are given by the ratio between its remaining throughput demands and the
peak channel throughputs at the user’s location.
d. The resources allocated to each user by the Proportional Fair scheduling method for satisfying its maximum
throughput demands are:
Each user gets either the resources it needs to achieve its maximum throughput demands or an equal share from
the remaining resources of the cell, whichever is smaller.
e. Atoll stops the resource allocation in downlink or uplink,
Sel
Mi TX i ic
• When/If in downlink R Max – DL = R Rem – DL , i.e., the resources available in downlink have been used up
Sel
Mi
Sel Sel
TX i ic TX i ic Mi Mi
R Rem – UL = TL UL – Max – R Min – UL – R Max – UL
Sel Sel
M M
i i
558
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
h. Atoll repeats the all the above steps for the users whose maximum throughput demands have not been satisfied
TX ic TX ic
i i
until either R Rem – DL = 0 and R Rem – UL = 0 , or all the maximum throughput demands are satisfied.
• Round Robin:
The goal of this scheduling method is to allocate equal resources to users fairly.
Sel
Let the total number of users be N M i .
a. Atoll divides the remaining resources in the cell into equal parts for each user:
TX i ic TX i ic
R Rem – DL R Rem – UL
--------------------- and --------------------
-
N N
b. Atoll converts the remaining throughput demands of all the users to their respective remaining resource
demands:
Sel Sel
Sel M Sel M
i i
Mi TPD Rem – DL Mi TPD Rem – UL
RD Rem – DL = ---------------------------
- and RD Rem – UL = ---------------------------
-
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
CTP P – DL CTP P – UL
Remaining resource demands of a user are given by the ratio between its remaining throughput demands and the
peak channel throughputs at the user’s location.
c. The resources allocated to each user by the Round Robin scheduling method for satisfying its maximum
throughput demands are:
Each user gets either the resources it needs to achieve its maximum throughput demands or an equal share from
the remaining resources of the cell, whichever is smaller.
d. Atoll stops the resource allocation in downlink or uplink,
Sel
Mi TX i ic
• When/If in downlink R Max – DL = R Rem – DL , i.e., the resources available in downlink have been used up
Sel
M
i
for satisfying the maximum throughput demands of the mobiles.
Sel
Mi TX i ic
• When/If in uplink R Max – UL = R Rem – UL , i.e., the resources available in uplink have been used up for
Sel
Mi
Sel Sel
TX i ic TX i ic Mi Mi
R Rem – UL = TL UL – Max – R Min – UL – R Max – UL
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
g. Atoll repeats the all the above steps for the users whose maximum throughput demands have not been satisfied
TX i ic TX i ic
until either R Rem – DL = 0 and R Rem – UL = 0 , or all the maximum throughput demands are satisfied.
• Proportional Demand:
The goal of this scheduling method is to allocate resources to users weighted according to their remaining throughput
demands. Therefore, the user throughputs for users with high throughput demands will be higher than those with low
559
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
throughput demands. In other words, this scheduler distributes channel throughput between users proportionally to
their demands.
a. Atoll converts the remaining throughput demands of all the users to their respective remaining resource
demands:
Sel Sel
Sel M Sel M
i i
i
M TPD Rem – DL M
i TPD Rem – UL
RD Rem – DL = ---------------------------
- and RD Rem – UL = ---------------------------
-
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
CTP P – DL CTP P – UL
Remaining resource demands of a user are given by the ratio between its remaining throughput demands and the
peak channel throughputs at the user’s location.
b. Atoll calculates the amount of effective remaining resources of the cell to distribute among the users as follows:
Sel Sel
TX i ic TXi ic Mi TX i ic TX i ic Mi
R Eff – Rem – DL = Min R Rem – DL
RD Rem – DL and R Eff – Rem – UL = Min R Rem – UL
RD Rem – UL
Sel
Mi Sel
Mi
c. The resources allocated to each user by the Proportional Demand scheduling method for satisfying its maximum
throughput demands are:
Sel Sel
Sel Mi Sel Mi
Mi TX i ic RD Rem – DL Mi TX i ic RD Rem – UL
R Max – DL = R Eff – Rem – DL ----------------------------------
Sel
- and R Max – UL = R Eff – Rem – UL ----------------------------------
Sel
-
Mi Mi
RDRem – DL RDRem – UL
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
• Max C/I:
The goal of this scheduling method is to achieve the maximum aggregate throughput for the cells. This is done by
allocating as much resources as needed to mobiles with high C/(I+N) conditions. As mobiles with high C/(I+N) can get
higher bearers, and therefore require less amount of resources, more mobiles can therefore be allocated resources
in the same frame, and the end-throughput for each cell will be the highest compared to other types of schedulers.
TX i ic
Sel
a. Atoll sorts the M i N Users in order of decreasing PDSCH, or PUSCH and PUCCH C/(I+N), depending on whether
the allocation is being performed for the downlink or for the uplink.
b. Starting with the mobile with the highest rank, Atoll allocates the downlink and uplink resources required to
satisfy each user’s remaining throughput demands in downlink and uplink as follows:
Sel Sel
Sel M Sel M
i i
i
M TPD Rem – DL M
i TPD Rem – UL
R Max – DL = ---------------------------
- and R Max – UL = ---------------------------
-
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
CTP P – DL CTP P – UL
MU – MIMO
MU – MIMO Mi
In both downlink and uplink, each mobile Mi has a corresponding traffic load TL . However, the actual
MU – MIMO
resource consumptions of a mobile Mi are given by:
560
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
MU – MIMO MU – MIMO
MU – MIMO M MU – MIMO M
i i
i
M TL DL M
i TL UL
RC DL = -----------------------------------
- and RC UL = ------------------------------------
TX ic TX ic
i i
G MU – MIMO – DL G MU – MIMO – UL
MU – MIMO – UL MU – MIMO – DL
M TX ic M TX ic
i i i i
Saturation occurs when RC UL = TL UL – Max or RC DL = TL DL – Max .
Mi
Sel
Mi
Sel
R Max – DL CTP E – DL
Sel
M i Site
= Max 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ and
Site
BHOFDL
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
Site
TP S1 – DL – R Min – DL CTP E – DL
Sel
M i Site
Mi
Sel
Mi
Sel
R Max – UL CTP E – UL
Sel
Site
= Max 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Site M
i
BHOFUL
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
Site
TP S1 – UL – R Min – UL CTP E – UL
Sel
M i Site
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
Mi
Sel
Mi
Sel R
Max – UL CTP P – UL
R Min – UL CTP P – UL + ------------------------------------------------ Site
-
Sel
Mi
Sel
Mi BHOF UL
Uplink: TL UL = R UL = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sel
M
i
CTP P – UL
Output
Sel Sel
Mi Mi Sel
• TL DL = R DL : Downlink traffic load or the amount of downlink resources allocated to the mobile M i .
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
Sel
• TL UL = R UL : Uplink traffic load or the amount of uplink resources allocated to the mobile M i .
Carrier Aggregation:
Aggregated throughputs are calculated by summing the throughputs from each serving
cell taking part in carrier aggregation for any LTE-A mobile, limited by the maximum
throughput supported by the UE category.
561
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
Input
Sel
M
i Sel
• R DL : Amount of downlink resources allocated to the mobile M i as calculated in "Scheduling and Radio Resource
Allocation" on page 552.
Sel
M
i Sel
• R UL : Amount of uplink resources allocated to the mobile M i as calculated in "Scheduling and Radio Resource
Allocation" on page 552.
Sel
Mi
Sel
• CTP P – DL : Downlink peak RLC channel throughput at the mobile M i as calculated in "Throughput Calculation" on
page 538.
Sel
Mi
Sel
• CTP P – UL : Uplink peak RLC channel throughput at the mobile M i as calculated in "Throughput Calculation" on
page 538.
Sel
Mi TX i ic
• BLER BDL : Downlink block error rate read from the BLER vs. CINR PDSCH graph available in the reception
Sel
equipment assigned to the terminal used by the mobile M i .
Sel
Mi Mi
• BLER BUL : Uplink block error rate read from the BLER vs. CINR PUSCH PUCCH graph available in the reception
equipment assigned to the cell TXi(ic).
Sel
Mi
Sel
• f TP – Scaling : Throughput scaling factor defined in the properties of the service used by the mobile M i .
Sel
Mi
Sel
• TP Offset : Throughput offset defined in the properties of the service used by the mobile M i .
Calculations
Downlink:
Sel Sel Sel
Mi Mi Mi
• Peak RLC User Throughput: UTP P – DL = R DL CTP P – DL
Sel Sel Sel
Mi Mi Mi
• Effective RLC User Throughput: UTP E – DL = UTP P – DL 1 – BLER B DL
Sel
Sel Sel Mi Sel
Mi Mi f TP – Scaling Mi
• Application User Throughput: UTP A – DL = UTP E – DL ------------------------
- – TP Offset
100
Uplink:
Sel Sel Sel
Mi Mi Mi
• Peak RLC User Throughput: UTP P – UL = R UL CTP P – UL
Sel Sel Sel
Mi Mi Mi
• Effective RLC User Throughput: UTP E – UL = UTP P – UL 1 – BLER B UL
Sel
Sel Sel Mi Sel
Mi Mi f TP – Scaling Mi
• Application User Throughput: UTP A – UL = UTP E – UL ------------------------
- – TP Offset
100
Output
Sel
Mi Sel
• UTP P – DL : Downlink peak RLC user throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile M i .
Sel
Mi
Sel
• UTP E – DL : Downlink effective RLC user throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile M i .
Sel
Mi
Sel
• UTP A – DL : Downlink application user throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile M i .
Sel
Mi
Sel
• UTP P – UL : Uplink peak RLC user throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile M i .
562
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
Sel
M
i Sel
• UTP E – UL : Uplink effective RLC user throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile M i .
Sel
M
i Sel
• UTP A – UL : Uplink application user throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile M i .
If no focus zone exists in the ATL document, Atoll takes into account the computation
zone.
We assume a reference cell TXi(ic) and a candidate neighbour cell TXj(jc). When automatic allocation starts, Atoll checks the
following conditions:
1. The distance between both cells must be less than the user-definable maximum inter-site distance. If the distance
between the reference cell and the candidate neighbour is greater than this value, then the candidate neighbour is
discarded.
Atoll calculates the effective distance between the reference cell and its candidate neighbour from the real distance
between them and the azimuths of their antennas:
Where x = 0.3% so that the maximum variation in D does not to exceed 1%. D is stated in m.
The formula above implies that two cells facing each other have a smaller effective distance than the actual distance.
Candidate neighbours are ranked in the order of increasing effective distance from the reference cell.
2. The calculation options,
563
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
• Force Co-site Cells as Neighbours: If selected, Atoll adds all the cells located on the same site as the reference cell
to the candidate neighbour list. The weight of this constraint can be defined. It is used to calculate the rank of each
neighbour, and its importance.
• Force Adjacent Cells as Neighbours: If selected, Atoll adds all the cells geographically adjacent to the reference
cell to the candidate neighbour list. The weight of this constraint can be defined. It is used to calculate the rank of
each neighbour, and its importance.
Determination of Adjacent Cells: Geographically adjacent cells are determined on the basis of their best server
coverage areas. A candidate neighbour cell TXi(ic) is considered adjacent to the reference cell TXi(ic) if there exists
at least one pixel of TXj(jc)’s best server coverage area where TXi(ic) is the second best server. The ranking of
adjacent neighbour cells increases with the number of such pixels. Adjacent cells are sorted in the order of
decreasing rank.
• Force Adjacent Layers as Neighbours: If selected, Atoll adds all the cells adjacent across network layers to the
reference cell to the candidate neighbour list. The weight of this constraint is always the average of the Min and
Max values defined for the adjacency factor. This weight is used to calculate the rank of each neighbour and its
importance. Cells are considered adjacent across layers if they belong to different layers and have a coverage
overlap of at least one pixel.
• Force Symmetry: If selected, Atoll adds the reference cell to the candidate neighbour list of the its candidate
neighbour.
A symmetric neighbour relation is allowed only if the neighbour list of the reference cell is not already full. If TXj(jc)
is a neighbour of TXi(ic) but TXi(ic) is not a neighbour of TXj(jc), there can be two possibilities:
i. The neighbour list of TXj(jc) is not full, Atoll will add TXi(ic) to the end of the list.
ii. The neighbour list of TXj(jc) is full, Atoll will not be able to add TXi(ic) to the list, so it will also remove TXj(jc)
from the neighbour list of TXi(ic).
If the neighbours list of a cell is full, the reference cell will not be added as a neighbour
of that cell and that cell will be removed from the reference cell’s neighbours list. You can
force Atoll to keep that cell in the reference cell’s neighbours list by adding the following
option in the Atoll.ini file:
[Neighbours]
DoNotDeleteSymmetrics = 1
• Force Exceptional Pairs: This option enables you to force/forbid some neighbour relations. Exceptional pairs are
pairs of cells which will always or never be neighbours of each other.
If you select "Force exceptional pairs" and "Force symmetry", Atoll considers the constraints between exceptional
pairs in both directions so as to respect symmetry condition. On the other hand, if neighbourhood relationship is
forced in one direction and forbidden in the other, symmetry cannot be respected. In this case, Atoll displays a
warning in the Event viewer.
• Delete Existing Neighbours: If selected, Atoll deletes all the current neighbours and carries out a new neighbour
allocation. If not selected, the existing neighbours are kept in the list.
3. If the Use Coverage Conditions check box is selected, the coverage areas of TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) must have an overlap.
Otherwise, only the distance criterion is taken into account.
The overlapping zone ( S TX ic S TX jc ) is defined as follows
i j
• Here S TX ic is the surface area covered by the cell TXi(ic) that comprises all the pixels where:
i
564
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
• The distance to the cell TXi(ic) is less than or equal to the round-trip time distance corresponding to the cell’s
PRACH preamble format.
TX ic TX ic
i i
• The received RSRP is greater than or equal to the cell’s Min RSRP: E DLRS T RSRP .
TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic
i i i i i i
• The received RSRP is within E DLRS + O Individual + M HO and E DLRS + O Individual + M HO + M End .
TX i ic
M HO is the handover margin defined for the cell TXi(ic). When a global handover start value is used,
TX i ic
M HO = M Start . M Start and M End are global handover start and handover end values.
• S TX jc is the surface area covered by the cell TXj(jc) that comprises all the pixels where:
j
• The distance to the cell TXj(jc) is less than or equal to the round-trip time distance corresponding to the cell’s
PRACH preamble format.
TX jc TX jc
j j
• The received RSRP is greater than or equal to the cell’s Min RSRP: E DLRS T RSRP .
TX j jc TX j jc
• The received RSRP with offset ( E DLRS + O Individual ) is the highest.
TX i ic
• If a global value of the minimum RSRP threshold ( T RSRP ) is set in the coverage
conditions dialogue, for each cell, Atoll uses the higher of the two values, i.e., global
value and the value defined for that cell.
• For calculating the overlapping coverage areas, Atoll uses the service with the lowest
body loss, the terminal that has the highest difference between gain and losses, and
the shadowing margin calculated using the defined cell edge coverage probability, if
the option is selected. The service and terminal are selected such that the selection
gives the largest possible coverage areas for the cells.
S TX ic S TX jc
i j
When the above conditions are met, Atoll calculates the percentage of the coverage area overlap ( --------------------------------------- 100 ),
S TX ic
i
and compares this value with the % Min Covered Area. TXj(jc) is considered a neighbour of TXi(ic) if
S TX ic S TX jc
i j
- 100 % Min Coverage Area .
--------------------------------------
S TX ic
i
Next, Atoll calculates the importance of the automatically allocated neighbours. Atoll sorts the neighbours by decreasing
importance in order to keep the ones with high importance. If the maximum number of neighbours to be allocated to each
cell is exceeded, Atoll keeps the ones with high importance.
The neighbour importance depends on the distance from the reference transmitter and on the neighbourhood cause (cf. table
below); this value varies between 0 and 100%.
565
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
The importance is evaluated using an Importance Function (IF), which takes into account the following factors:
• The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d-
Di = 1 – ----------
d max
d is the effective distance (in m). It corresponds to the real inter-transmitter distance ( D in m) weighted by the
azimuths of antennas.
d max is the maximum distance between the reference transmitter and a possible neighbour.
Where:
Delta(X)=Max(X)-Min(X)
566
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
• Set Min(Di) and Max(Di) to 0% if you do not want to take into account the distance
factor in the importance calculation.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors do not overlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum and maximum importance fields, neighbours will be ranked in this order:
co-site neighbours, adjacent layers, adjacent cells, and neighbours allocated based on
coverage overlapping.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
• The default value of Min(O) = 1% ensures that neighbours selected for symmetry will
have an importance greater than 0%. With a value of Min(O) = 0%, neighbours
selected for symmetry will have an importance field greater than 0% only if there is
some coverage overlapping.
In the results, Atoll lists only the cells for which it finds new neighbours. Cells whose channels have the same centre frequency
are listed as intra-carrier neighbours. Otherwise, neighbour cells are listed as inter-carrier neighbours.
• By default, the automatic neighbour allocation compares the defined Max inter-
site distance with the effective inter-cell distance. As a consequence, there can
be cases where the real distance between assigned neighbours is higher than the
Max inter-site distance, because the effective distance is smaller. You can force
Atoll to compare the Max inter-site distance with the real inter-site distance by
adding the following lines in Atoll.ini:
[Neighbours]
RealInterSiteDistanceCondition=1
• By default, the neighbour importance calculated with respect to distance is based
on the global Max inter-site distance setting for all neighbour candidates. As a
consequence, there can be cases where the calculated importance is different
when the global Max inter-site distance is modified. To avoid that, you can force
Atoll to prioritise the individual distances between reference cells and their
respective neighbour candidates by adding the following lines in Atoll.ini:
[Neighbours]
CandidatesMaxDistanceInImportanceCalculation=1
If no focus zone exists in the ATL document, Atoll takes into account the computation
zone.
We assume a reference cell A and a candidate neighbour B. When automatic allocation starts, Atoll checks following
conditions:
1. The distance between reference cell and the candidate neighbour must be less than the user-definable maximum
inter-site distance. If the distance is greater than this value, the candidate neighbour is discarded.
Atoll calculates the effective distance between the reference cell and its candidate neighbour from the real distance
between them and the azimuths of their antennas:
567
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
Where x = 0.3% so that the maximum variation in D does not to exceed 1%. D is stated in m.
The formula above implies that two cells facing each other have a smaller effective distance than the actual distance.
Candidate neighbours are ranked in the order of increasing effective distance from the reference cell.
2. The calculation options:
• CDMA carriers: This option is available when an LTE network is being co-planned with a UMTS, CDMA, or TD-
SCDMA network. This option enables you to select the CDMA carrier(s) that you want Atoll to consider as potential
neighbours of LTE cells. You may choose one or more carriers. Atoll will allocate only the cells using the selected
carriers as neighbours.
• Force co-site cells as neighbours: If selected, Atoll adds all the transmitters/cells located on the same site as the
reference cell in its candidate neighbour list. The weight of this constraint can be defined. It is used to calculate
the rank of each neighbour and its importance.
• Force exceptional pairs: This option enables you to force/forbid some neighbour relations. Exceptional pairs are
pairs of cells which will always or never be neighbours of each other.
• Delete existing neighbours: If selected, Atoll deletes all the current neighbours and carries out a new neighbour
allocation. If not selected, the existing neighbours are kept in the list.
3. Neighbour relation criterion:
• Allocation based on distance:
The allocation algorithm is based on the effective distance between the reference cell and its candidate
neighbour.
• Algorithm based on coverage overlapping:
The coverage areas of the reference cell A and the candidate neighbour B must overlap ( S A S B ).
• 1st case: SA is the area where the cell A is the best serving cell, with a 0 dB margin.
This means that the reference signal energy per resource element received from A is greater than the
minimum required (Min RSRP), and is the highest one. .
• 2nd case: The margin is other than 0 dB. SA is the area where:
The reference signal energy per resource element received from A exceeds the minimum required (Min RSRP)
and is within a margin from the highest signal level.
Two cases may exist for SB:
• 1st case: SB is the area where the candidate neighbour is the best server. In this case, the margin must be set
to 0dB.
The signal level received from B exceeds the minimum required, and is the highest one.
• 2nd case: The margin is other than 0dB. SB is the area where:
The signal level received from B exceeds the minimum required and is within a margin from the best signal
level.
SA SB
- 100 ) and compares this value with the %
Atoll calculates the percentage of the coverage area overlap ( -----------------
SA
SA SB
- 100 % Min Covered Area .
Min Covered Area. B is considered a neighbour of A if -----------------
SA
Candidate neighbours are ranked in the order of decreasing coverage area overlap percentages.
568
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
Next, Atoll calculates the importance of the automatically allocated neighbours. Atoll sorts the neighbours by decreasing
importance in order to keep the ones with high importance. If the maximum number of neighbours to be allocated to each
cell is exceeded, Atoll keeps the ones with high importance.
The importance (%) of neighbours depends on the distance and on the reason of allocation:
• For allocation based on distance:
d is the effective distance between the reference cell and the neighbour and d max is the maximum inter-site
distance.
• For allocation based on coverage overlapping:
The importance is evaluated using an Importance Function (IF), which takes into account the following factors:
• The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d-
Di = 1 – ----------
d max
d is the effective distance (in m). It corresponds to the real inter-transmitter distance weighted by the azimuths of
antennas.
d max is the maximum distance between the reference transmitter and a possible neighbour.
Where
Delta(X)=Max(X)-Min(X)
569
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
• Set Min(Di) and Max(Di) to 0% if you do not want to take into account the distance
factor in the importance calculation.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors do not overlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum and maximum importance fields, neighbours will be ranked in this order:
co-site neighbours and neighbours allocated based on coverage overlapping.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
In the results, Atoll displays only the cells for which it finds new neighbours.
If no focus zone exists in the ATL document, Atoll takes into account the computation
zone.
• Cells that are listed in the interference matrix of the TBA cell,
Default weight IM = 0.3
• Cells within the cell’s (or the default) minimum reuse distance, if the check box "Reuse distance" is selected,
Default weight Dis tan ce = 0.2
You can modify these weights in your LTE document. The absolute values of the constraint weights are calculated from the
relative weights (%) defined in the Constraint Weights dialogue as follows:
570
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
% Neighbour
Neighbour = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
% Neighbour + % IM + % Dis tan ce
% IM
IM = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
% Neighbour + % IM + % Dis tan ce
% Dis tan ce
Dis tan ce = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
% Neighbour + % IM + % Dis tan ce
TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc TX ic – TX j jc
$ = rO Neighbour Neighbour + Dis tan ce Dis tan ce + i
IM IM
TX i ic – TX j jc
Where r O is the channel overlap ratio as calculated in "Co- and Adjacent Channel Overlaps Calculation" on
page 493.
TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
Neighbour is the importance of the relationship between the TBA cell and its related neighbour cell. Neighbour is
calculated during automatic neighbour planning by Atoll as explained in "Automatic Neighbour Planning" on page 563. For
manual neighbour planning, this value is equal to 1.
TX i ic – TX j jc
IM is the importance of the relationship between the TBA cell and its related interfering cell calculated as follows:
TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
IM = r CCO IM – CC + r ACO IM – AC
TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
IM – CC and IM – CC are respectively the co- and adjacent channel interference probabilities calculated as
TX ic – TX jc TX ic – TX jc
i j i j
explained in "Interference Matrix Calculation" on page 578. r CCO and r ACO are the co- and adjacent channel
overlap ratios as calculated in "Co- and Adjacent Channel Overlaps Calculation" on page 493.
TX i ic – TX j jc
Dis tan ce is the importance of the relationship between the TBA and its related cell with respect to the distance between
TX i ic – TX j jc
them. Dis tan ce is calculated as explained in "Distance Importance Calculation" on page 579.
Atoll calculates the quality reduction factor for the TBA cell and its related cell from the cost calculated above as follows:
TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
QRF = 1–$
The quality reduction factor is a measure of the cost of an individual relation.
The total cost of the current frequency plan for any TBA cell is given as follows, considering all the cells with which the TBA
cell has relations:
TX i ic TX i ic – TX j jc
$ Total = 1 – QRF
TX j jc
And, the total cost of the current frequency plan for the entire network is simply the sum of the total TBA cell costs calculated
above, i.e.,
TX i ic
$ Total = $ Total
TX ic
i
571
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
If no focus zone exists in the ATL document, Atoll takes into account the computation
zone.
2. PSS ID,
Assigned weight PSS = 0.02
3. SSS ID,
Assigned weight SSS = 0.23
6. PCI Mod (number of frequency blocks / 2), for PCFICH resource element groups,
Assigned weight PCFICH = 0
572
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
You can modify these weights in your LTE document. The absolute values of the constraint weights are calculated from the
relative weights (%) defined in the Constraint Weights dialogue as follows:
% ID
ID = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
% ID + % PSS + % SSS + % CRS + % ULDMRS + % PCFICH
% PSS
PSS = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
% ID + % PSS + % SSS + % CRS + % ULDMRS + % PCFICH
% SSS
SSS = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
% ID + % PSS + % SSS + % CRS + % ULDMRS + % PCFICH
% CRS
CRS = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
% ID + % PSS + % SSS + % CRS + % ULDMRS + % PCFICH
% ULDMRS
ULDMRS = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
% ID + % PSS + % SSS + % CRS + % ULDMRS + % PCFICH
% PCFICH
PCFICH = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
% ID + % PSS + % SSS + % CRS + % ULDMRS + % PCFICH
The above constraints are studied between each TBA cell and its related cells. Atoll calculates the cost between each
individual TBA and related cell, and then the overall cost for the TBA cell.
Related cells of a TBA cell are:
• Its neighbours, if the check box "Existing neighbours" is selected,
Assigned weight Neighbour = 0.35
TBA cells which are first-order neighbours of a common cell are also related to each other through that cell. This
relation is also taken into account,
You can choose to not take into account the physical cell ID collision between neighbours of a common cell by adding
an option in the Atoll.ini file (see the Administrator Manual). If the collision between neighbours of a common cell is
not taken into account, the weight assigned to the direct first-order neighbour relation alone is Neighbour = 0.5 and
that of the collision between neighbours of a common cell is of course Inter – Neighbour = 0 .
By adding an option in the Atoll.ini file (see the Administrator Manual), second-order neighbours can also be taken
into account. In this case, the assigned weights are: Neighbour = 0.25 , 2nd – Neighbour = 0.10 , and
Inter – Neighbour = 0.15 .
Inter – Neighbour applies to the relation between neighbours of a common cell, which can be an LTE cell, a UMTS cell
or a GSM transmitter in 3GPP multi-RAT documents or an LTE or CDMA cell in 3GPP2 multi-RAT documents.
Figure 6.7 on page 573 depicts the different neighbour relations that may exist in LTE.
• Cells that are listed in the interference matrix of the TBA cell,
573
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
• Cells within the cell’s (or the default) reuse distance, if the check box "Reuse distance" is selected,
Assigned weight Dis tan ce = 0.2
You can modify these weights in your LTE document. The absolute values of the constraint weights are calculated from the
relative weights (%) defined in the Constraint Weights dialogue as follows:
% Neighbour
Neighbour = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
% Neighbour + % Inter – Neighbour + % 2nd – Neighbour + % IM + % Dis tan ce
% Inter – Neighbour
Inter – Neighbour = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
% Neighbour + % Inter – Neighbour + % 2nd – Neighbour + % IM + % Dis tan ce
% 2nd – Neighbour
2nd – Neighbour = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
% Neighbour + % Inter – Neighbour + % 2nd – Neighbour + % IM + % Dis tan ce
% IM
IM = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
% Neighbour + % Inter – Neighbour + % 2nd – Neighbour + % IM + % Dis tan ce
% Dis tan ce
Dis tan ce = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
% Neighbour + % Inter – Neighbour + % 2nd – Neighbour + % IM + % Dis tan ce
TX ic – TX jc
i j PSS
VL 2 = PSS p Coll
Where ID , PSS , and SSS are the weights assigned to the physical cell ID, PSS ID, and SSS ID constraints.
TX ic
i
TX jc
j
ID ID 1 if ID = ID
p Coll is the physical cell ID collision probability given by p Coll = .
TX i ic TX j jc
0 if ID ID
TX i ic TX j jc
PSS PSS 1 if ID PSS = ID PSS
p Coll is the PSS ID collision probability given by p Coll = .
TX i ic TX j jc
0 if ID PSS ID PSS
TX i ic TX i ic TX j jc
1 if R Co-site 3 AND ID SSS ID SSS
SSS SSS
p Penalty is the SSS ID penalty given by p Penalty = TX ic
i
TX ic
i
TX jc
j
TX ic
i
if the SSS ID
1 if R Co-site 3 AND ID – ID R Co-site
0 Otherwise
SSS
planning strategy is set to "Same per site", and by p Penalty = 0 if the SSS ID planning strategy is set to "Free". The SSS penalty
models the SSS ID allocation constraint.
CRS
p Coll is the single antenna downlink cell-specific reference signal collision probability given by
TX i ic TX j jc
CRS 1 if ID Mod6 = ID Mod6
p Coll = .
TX i ic TX j jc
0 if ID Mod6 ID Mod6
574
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
TX ic
i
TX jc
j
ULDRMS ULDMRS 1 if ID Mod30 = ID Mod30
p Coll is the UL DMRS collision probability given by p Coll = .
TX ic TX jc
i j
0 if ID Mod30 ID Mod30
PCFICH
p Coll is the collision probability of the physical control format indicator channel resource element groups given by
TX i ic TX j jc
TX i ic N FB TX j jc N FB
1 if ID Mod ---------------- = ID Mod -----------------
PCFICH 2 2
p Coll = .
TX i ic TX j jc
TX i ic N FB TX j jc N FB
0 if ID Mod ---------------- ID Mod ----------------
-
2 2
Next, Atoll calculates the importance of the neighbour relations between the TBA cell and its related cell.
TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
Neighbours = Neighbour Neighbour + Inter – Neighbour Inter – Neighbour + 2nd – Neighbour 2nd – Neighbour
TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
Where Neighbour is the importance of the relationship between the TBA cell and its related neighbour cell. Neighbour
is calculated during automatic neighbour planning by Atoll as explained in "Automatic Neighbour Planning" on page 563. For
manual neighbour planning, this value is equal to 1.
Inter – Neighbour is calculated from the neighbour relationship importance values calculated during automatic neighbour
planning. If two cells are neighbours of a common cell and have the same physical cell ID assigned, the importance of the
physical cell ID collision is the average of their neighbour importance values with the common neighbour cell. If more than
one pair of neighbours of the TBA cell has the same physical cell ID assigned, then the importance is the highest value among
all the averages:
TX i ic – TX j1 j1c TX i ic – TX j2 j2c
Neighbour + Neighbour
Inter – Neighbour = Max ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
All Neighbour Pairs 2
with ID Collisions
Where TX j1 j1c and TX j2 j2c are two neighbours of the TBA cell TX i ic that have the same physical cell ID assigned. The
above applies to intra-technology as well as inter-technology neighbours in 3GPP multi-RAT and 3GPP2 multi-RAT documents.
2nd – Neighbour is calculated from the neighbour relationship importance values calculated during automatic neighbour
planning. If the TBA cell has the same physical cell ID assigned as one of its second-order neighbours, the importance of the
physical cell ID collision is the multiple of the importance values of the first order neighbour relations between the TBA cell
and its second order neighbour. If the TBA cell is related to its second order neighbour through more than one first order
neighbour, the importance is the highest value among all the multiples:
TX ic – TX jc TX j jc – TX k kc
2nd – Neighbour = Max i j
Neighbour
All Neighbour Pairs
Neighbour
with ID Collisions
Next, Atoll calculates the importance of the interference relations between the TBA cell and its related cell.
TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
Interference = IM IM + Dis tan ce Dis tan ce f Overlap
TX i ic – TX j jc
IM is the importance of the relationship between the TBA cell and its related interfering cell calculated as follows:
TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
IM = r CCO IM – CC + r ACO IM – AC if the frequency plan is taken into account
TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
and IM = IM – CC otherwise.
TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
IM – CC and IM – CC are respectively the co- and adjacent channel interference probabilities calculated as
TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
explained in "Interference Matrix Calculation" on page 578. r O , r CCO , and r ACO are the total,
co-channel, and adjacent channel overlap ratios as calculated in "Co- and Adjacent Channel Overlaps Calculation" on
page 493.
575
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX ic – TX jc
i j
Dis tan ce is the importance of the relationship between the TBA and its related cell with respect to the distance between
TX ic – TX jc
i j
them. Dis tan ce is calculated as explained in "Distance Importance Calculation" on page 579.
TX ic – TX jc TX ic – TX jc TX ic – TX jc
i j i j i j
f Overlap = rO if the frequency plan is taken into account and f Overlap = 1 otherwise.
From the constraint violation levels and the importance values of the relations between the TBA and its related cell, Atoll
calculates the quality reduction factor for the pair as follows:
TX ic – TX jc TX ic – TX jc TX ic – TX jc TX ic – TX jc TX ic – TX jc TX ic – TX jc TX ic – TX jc
= 1 – VL 1 i
i j i j i j j i j i j i j
QRF + VL 2 + VL f
Interference 1 Neighbours Overlap
The quality reduction factor is a measure of the cost of an individual relation.
The total cost of the current physical cell ID plan for any TBA cell is given as follows, considering all the cells with which the
TBA cell has relations:
TX i ic TX i ic – TX j jc
$ Total = 1 – QRF
TX j jc
And, the total cost of the current physical cell ID plan for the entire network is simply the sum of the total TBA cell costs
calculated above, i.e.,
TX i ic
$ Total = $ Total
TX i ic
If no focus zone exists in the ATL document, Atoll takes into account the computation
zone.
By adding an option in the Atoll.ini file (see the Administrator Manual), second-order neighbours can also be taken
into account. In this case, the assigned weights are: Neighbour = 0.25 and 2nd – Neighbour = 0.10 .
576
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
• Cells that are listed in the interference matrix of the TBA cell,
Assigned weight IM = 0.3
• Cells within the cell’s (or the default) reuse distance, if the check box "Reuse distance" is selected,
Assigned weight Dis tan ce = 0.2
You can modify these weights in your LTE document. The absolute values of the constraint weights are calculated from the
relative weights (%) defined in the Weights dialogue as follows:
% Neighbour
Neighbour = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
% Neighbour + % 2nd – Neighbour + % IM + % Dis tan ce
% 2nd – Neighbour
2nd – Neighbour = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
% Neighbour + % 2nd – Neighbour + % IM + % Dis tan ce
% IM
IM = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
% Neighbour + % 2nd – Neighbour + % IM + % Dis tan ce
% Dis tan ce
Dis tan ce = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
% Neighbour + % 2nd – Neighbour + % IM + % Dis tan ce
TX i ic – TX j jc
PRACH ID N Common PRACH RSIs
p Coll is the PRACH RSI collision probability given by p Coll = ----------------------------------------- .
TX i ic
N Req PRACH RSIs
TX ic – TX jc TX ic
i j i
Where N Common PRACH RSIs is the number of PRACH RSIs common between cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc), and N Req PRACH RSIs is the
number of PRACH RSIs required by the cell TXi(ic).
Next, Atoll calculates the importance of the neighbour relations between the TBA cell and its related cell.
TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
Neighbours = Neighbour Neighbour + 2nd – Neighbour 2nd – Neighbour
TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
Where Neighbour is the importance of the relationship between the TBA cell and its related neighbour cell. Neighbour
is calculated during automatic neighbour planning by Atoll as explained in the Technical Reference Guide. For manual
neighbour planning, this value is equal to 1.
2nd – Neighbour is calculated from the neighbour relationship importance values calculated during automatic neighbour
planning. If the TBA cell has the same PRACH RSI assigned as one of its second-order neighbours, the importance of the PRACH
RSI collision is the multiple of the importance values of the first order neighbour relations between the TBA cell and its second
order neighbour. If the TBA cell is related to its second order neighbour through more than one first order neighbour, the
importance is the highest value among all the multiples:
TX ic – TX jc TX j jc – TX k kc
2nd – Neighbour = Max i j
Neighbour
All Neighbour Pairs
Neighbour
with Collisions
Next, Atoll calculates the importance of the interference relations between the TBA cell and its related cell.
TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
Interference = IM IM + Dis tan ce Dis tan ce f Overlap
577
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX ic – TX jc
i j
IM is the importance of the relationship between the TBA cell and its related interfering cell calculated as follows:
TX ic – TX jc TX ic – TX jc TX ic – TX jc TX ic – TX jc TX ic – TX jc
i j i j i j i j i j
IM = r CCO IM – CC + r ACO IM – AC if the frequency plan is taken into account
TX ic – TX jc TX ic – TX jc
i j i j
and IM = IM – CC otherwise.
TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
IM – CC and IM – CC are respectively the co- and adjacent channel interference probabilities calculated as
TX ic – TX jc TX ic – TX jc TX ic – TX jc
i j i j i j
explained in "Interference Matrix Calculation" on page 578. r O , r CCO , and r ACO are the total,
co-channel, and adjacent channel overlap ratios calculated as calculated in "Co- and Adjacent Channel Overlaps Calculation"
on page 493.
TX i ic – TX j jc
Dis tan ce is the importance of the relationship between the TBA and its related cell with respect to the distance between
TX i ic – TX j jc
them. Dis tan ce is calculated as explained in "Distance Importance Calculation" on page 579.
TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
f Overlap = rO if the frequency plan is taken into account and f Overlap = 1 otherwise.
From the constraint violation levels and the importance values of the relations between the TBA and its related cell, Atoll
calculates the quality reduction factor for the pair as follows:
TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
QRF = 1 – VL Interference + Neighbours f Overlap
The quality reduction factor is a measure of the cost of an individual relation.
The total cost of the current PRACH RSI plan for any TBA cell is given as follows, considering all the cells with which the TBA
cell has relations:
TX i ic TX i ic – TX j jc
$ Total = 1 – QRF
TX j jc
And, the total cost of the current PRACH RSI plan for the entire network is simply the sum of the total TBA cell costs calculated
above, i.e.,
TX i ic
$ Total = $ Total
TX ic
i
6.5.6 Appendices
6.5.6.1 Interference Matrix Calculation
The co-channel interference probability is calculated as follows:
S TX ic
i
TX j jc TX i ic
C Max + M Quality n
Sym
TX i ic ----------------------------------------------------- --------------------- TX ic TX ic TX i ic
10 10 i T i
– 10 Log 10 2N
Sym
C + 10 –n
DLRS FB RSRP
TX i ic – TX j jc
IM – CC = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
S TX ic
i
578
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 6: LTE Networks
S TX ic
i
TX jc TX ic TX ic
j i i
C Max + M Quality + f ACS n
Sym
TX ic ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- --------------------
- TX ic TX ic TX ic
i 10 10 i T i i
10 Log 10 2N
DLRS – RSRP – n Sym
C + 10
FB
TX ic – TX jc
i j
IM – AC = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
S TX ic
i
For frequencies farther than the adjacent channel, the interference probability is 0.
TX i ic TX i ic
Here S TX ic is the best server coverage area of the cell TXi(ic), that comprises all the pixels where E DLRS T RSRP as
i
calculated in "Best Server Determination" on page 535. S TX ic is the best server coverage area of the cell TXi(ic)
i Condition
TX i ic TX j jc
where the given condition is true. C DLRS is the received downlink reference signal level from the cell TXi(ic). C Max is the
TX i ic
received maximum signal level from the cell TXj(jc) calculated using the Max Power defined for this cell. n Sym is the per-
TX ic
i
subcarrier noise for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Noise Calculation (DL)" on page 505 and N FB is the total number of
frequency blocks defined in the frequency bands table for the channel bandwidth used by the cell. M Quality is the quality
TX i ic
margin used for the interference matrices calculation. And, f ACS is the adjacent channel suppression factor defined for the
frequency band of the cell TXi(ic).
TX ic – TX jc
1 if D
i j
1
TX i ic – TX j jc D Reuse 2
Dis tan ce = Log ---------------------------------
TX i ic – TX j jc
D
--------------------------------------------------------- Otherwise
Log D Reuse
2
Where D Reuse is the minimum reuse distance, either defined for each TBA cell individually or set for all the TBA cells in the
TX i ic – TX j jc
AFP dialogue, and D is the weighted distance between the TBA cell TXi(ic) and its related cell TXj(jc) calculated as
follows:
TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
D = d 1 + x cos – cos – 2
TX i ic – TX j jc
D is weighted according to the azimuths of the TBA cell and its related cell with respect to the straight line joining
TX i ic – TX j jc
them. d is the distance between the two cells considering any offsets with respect to the site locations. x is set
TX i ic – TX j jc
to 10 % so that the maximum variation in D due to the azimuths does not exceed 40 %. and are calculated
from the azimuths of the two cells as shown in Figure 6.8 on page 579.
The above formula implies that two cells facing each other will have a shorter effective distance between them than the real
distance, and two cells pointing in opposite directions will have a greater effective distance.
579
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 6: LTE Networks ©Forsk 2015
The importance of the distance relation is explained in Figure 6.9 on page 580. This figure shows that cells that are located
near (based on the effective distance which is weighted by the orientations of the cells) have high importance, which is
interpreted as a high cost, and cells that are located far have low importance. Cells that are further than the reuse distance
do not have any cost related to the distance relation.
580
Chapter 7
3GPP Multi-RAT
Networks
This chapter covers the following topics:
• "Definitions" on page 583
• "Multi-RAT Monte Carlo Simulations" on page 583
• "Multi-RAT Coverage Predictions" on page 585
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guidefor Radio Networks
© Forsk 2015
582
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 7: 3GPP Multi-RAT Networks
7.1 Definitions
This table lists the input to coverage prediction and simulation calculations.
DL
f act Service parameter None Downlink activity factor
Atoll determines the total number of users attempting connection in each simulation
based on the Poisson distribution. This may lead to slight variations in the total numbers
of users in different simulations. To have the same total number of users in each
simulation of a group, add the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[Simulation]
RandomTotalUsers=0
In 3GPP multi-RAT documents, services can be classified under constant bit rate and variable bit rate services, which can be
provided by one or more technology. These service categories comprise the following service types in different technologies:
Constant Bit Rate Services Variable Bit Rate Services
Circuit
GSM GPRS EDGE Packet (Max Bit Rate)
Packet (Constant Bit Rate)
Packet R99
Circuit R99
UMTS HSPA Packet HSDPA (Best Effort)
Packet HSPA (Constant Bit Rate)
Packet HSPA (Best Effort)
LTE Voice Data
583
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 7: 3GPP Multi-RAT Networks ©Forsk 2015
User profile environment based traffic maps: Each pixel of the map is assigned an environment class which contains a list of
user profiles with an associated mobility type and a given density, i.e., number of users of a user profile per km².
User profile traffic maps: Each polygon or line of the map is assigned a density of users with a given user profile and mobility
type. If the map is composed of points, each point is assigned a number of users with given user profile and mobility type.
User profiles model the behaviour of the different user categories. Each user profile contains a list of services and parameters
describing how these services are accessed by the user.
The number of users of each user profile is calculated from the surface area (SEnv) of each environment class map (or each
polygon) and the user profile density (DUP).
N Users = S Env D UP
• In case of user profile traffic maps composed of lines, the number of users of each
user profile is calculated from the line length (L) and the user profile density (DUP)
(users per km): N Users = L D UP
• The number of users is a direct input when a user profile traffic map is composed of
points.
Atoll calculates the probability for a user being active at a given instant in the uplink and in the downlink according to the
service usage characteristics described in the user profiles, i.e., the number of service sessions, the average duration of each
constant bit rate service session, or the volume of the data transfer in the uplink and the downlink in each variable bit rate
service session as explained in:
• GSM and LTE: "Simulations Based on User Profile Traffic Maps and Subscriber Lists" on page 476
• UMTS: "Simulations Based on User Profile Traffic Maps" on page 225.
For any variable bit rate service (j), once several numbers of users with different activity statuses have been calculated
for different technologies, the final numbers of users are obtains as follows:
Sector traffic maps are also referred to as live traffic maps. Live traffic data from the O&M is spread over the best server
coverage areas of the transmitters included in the traffic map. Either throughput demands per service or the number of active
users per service are assigned to the coverage areas of each transmitter.
Atoll calculates the number of active users of each service UL and DL as follows:
• GSM and LTE: "Simulations Based on Sector Traffic Maps" on page 478
• UMTS: "Simulations Based on Sector Traffic Maps" on page 229.
Distribution of Terminals
Terminals assigned to users depend on the percentages defined per traffic map and the technologies supported by each
terminal. For example, if the percentages of terminals are defined as follows:
Terminal A (GSM): 30 %
Terminal B (GSM+UMTS): 50 %
Terminal C (GSM+UMTS+LTE): 20 %
For users of services that can be provided by GSM, UMTS, or LTE:
Terminal A: 30 %
Terminal B: 50 %
584
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 7: 3GPP Multi-RAT Networks
Terminal C: 20 %
For users of services that can be provided by UMTS or LTE:
Terminal B: 50/70 = 71.4 %
Terminal C: 20/70 = 28.6 %
For users of services that can be provided by LTE only, Terminal C will be assigned.
The 3GPP multi-RAT effective service area is the combination of single-RAT effective service areas:
• GSM Service Area Analysis (DL) is based on a coverage by coding scheme, as explained in "GPRS/EDGE Coverage Pre-
dictions" on page 140 or on a coverage by codec modes, as explained in "Circuit Quality Indicators Coverage Predic-
tions" on page 149, depending on the type of service.
Radio conditions are evaluated over the HCS server area with a margin of 4 dB, on all the interfered subcells. Codec
modes and coding schemes are obtained from these radio conditions based on C/I+N without ideal link adaptation (as
explained in "Throughput Calculation Based on Interpolation Between C/N and C/(I+N)" on page 138). This implies
that a frequency plan has to be defined in order to obtain this GSM/GPRS/EDGE coverage.
• UMTS Effective Service Area Analysis (Eb⁄Nt) (DL+UL) is based on a combination of downlink and uplink service area
predictions, as explained in "Downlink Service Area Analysis" on page 300 and "Uplink Service Area Analysis" on
page 302. In the case of HSPA services, the coverage is based on a combination of HSDPA et HSUPA service areas as
explained in "HSDPA Prediction Study" on page 304 and "HSUPA Prediction Study" on page 309.
• LTE Effective Service Area Analysis (DL+UL) is based on a combination of downlink and uplink service area predictions,
as explained in "Effective Signal Analysis Coverage Predictions" on page 472.
Two display options are available for this prediction:
585
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 7: 3GPP Multi-RAT Networks ©Forsk 2015
• Technologies: Each pixel displays the colour representing the visible technology having the highest priority defined in
the selected service.
• Available Technologies: Pixels display the colour representing the combined areas over which a multi-technology ter-
minal can be served. For instance, the GSM+UMTS area shows the union between the GSM and the UMTS service
areas as explained above.
The 3GPP multi-RAT throughput prediction is the combination of single-RAT throughput predictions:
• GSM Packet Throughput Analysis (DL) explained in "Application Throughput Calculation" on page 139
The 3GPP multi-RAT effective RLC throughput is obtained from the maximum effective RLC throughput of the GSM
layer. The 3GPP multi-RAT application throughput from the maximum application throughput of the GSM layer.
• R99 Service Area Analysis (Eb⁄Nt) (DL) explained in "Downlink Service Area Analysis" on page 300 and HSDPA
Throughput Analysis (DL) explained in "HSDPA Prediction Study" on page 304
R99: The 3GPP multi-RAT effective RLC and application throughputs are respectively obtained from the effective RLC
and application throughputs of the R99 layer (see "Downlink Service Area Analysis" on page 300 for more
information).
HSDPA: The 3GPP multi-RAT effective RLC and application throughputs are respectively obtained from the effective
RLC and application throughputs of the HSDPA layer (see "HSDPA Prediction Study" on page 304 for more
information).
• LTE Coverage by Throughput (DL) explained in "C/(I+N)-based Coverage Predictions" on page 473
The 3GPP multi-RAT effective RLC and application throughputs are respectively obtained from the Effective RLC
Channel Throughput (DL) and the Application Channel Throughput (DL) (see "C/(I+N)-based Coverage Predictions" on
page 473 for more information).
Four display options are available for this prediction:
• Effective RLC Throughput: The throughput on the RLC layer that a cell can provide to the selected terminal per pixel
taking into account possible transmission errors (BLER) for the highest priority technology.
• Max Effective RLC Throughput: The maximum throughput on the RLC layer that a cell can provide to the selected
terminal per pixel taking into account possible transmission errors (BLER), considering all available technologies.
• Application Throughput: The throughput on the application layer that a cell can provide to the selected terminal per
pixel taking into account possible transmission errors (BLER) for the highest priority technology.
• Max Application Throughput: the maximum throughput on the application layer that a cell can provide to the selected
terminal per pixel taking into account possible transmission errors (BLER), considering all available technologies.
586
Chapter 8
3GPP2 Multi-RAT
Networks
This chapter covers the following topics:
• "Definitions" on page 589
• "Multi-RAT Monte Carlo Simulations" on page 589
• "Multi-RAT Coverage Predictions" on page 591
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guidefor Radio Networks
© Forsk 2015
588
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 8: 3GPP2 Multi-RAT Networks
8.1 Definitions
This table lists the input to coverage prediction and simulation calculations.
DL
f act Service parameter None Downlink activity factor
Atoll determines the total number of users attempting connection in each simulation
based on the Poisson distribution. This may lead to slight variations in the total numbers
of users in different simulations. To have the same total number of users in each
simulation of a group, add the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[Simulation]
RandomTotalUsers=0
In 3GPP2 multi-RAT documents, services can be classified under constant bit rate and variable bit rate services, which can be
provided by one or more technology. These service categories comprise the following service types in different technologies:
User profile environment based traffic maps: Each pixel of the map is assigned an environment class which contains a list of
user profiles with an associated mobility type and a given density, i.e., number of users of a user profile per km².
589
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 8: 3GPP2 Multi-RAT Networks ©Forsk 2015
User profile traffic maps: Each polygon or line of the map is assigned a density of users with a given user profile and mobility
type. If the map is composed of points, each point is assigned a number of users with given user profile and mobility type.
User profiles model the behaviour of the different user categories. Each user profile contains a list of services and parameters
describing how these services are accessed by the user.
The number of users of each user profile is calculated from the surface area (SEnv) of each environment class map (or each
polygon) and the user profile density (DUP).
N Users = S Env D UP
• In case of user profile traffic maps composed of lines, the number of users of each
user profile is calculated from the line length (L) and the user profile density (DUP)
(users per km): N Users = L D UP
• The number of users is a direct input when a user profile traffic map is composed of
points.
Atoll calculates the probability for a user being active at a given instant in the uplink and in the downlink according to the
service usage characteristics described in the user profiles, i.e., the number of service sessions, the average duration of each
constant bit rate service session, or the volume of the data transfer in the uplink and the downlink in each variable bit rate
service session as explained in:
• LTE: "Simulations Based on User Profile Traffic Maps and Subscriber Lists" on page 476
• CDMA: "Simulations Based on User Profile Traffic Maps" on page 359.
For any variable bit rate service (j), once several numbers of users with different activity statuses have been calculated
for different technologies, the final numbers of users are obtains as follows:
inactive inactive inactive
Number of inactive users: n j = Average n j nj
CDMA LTE
Sector traffic maps are also referred to as live traffic maps. Live traffic data from the O&M is spread over the best server
coverage areas of the transmitters included in the traffic map. Either throughput demands per service or the number of active
users per service are assigned to the coverage areas of each transmitter.
Atoll calculates the number of active users of each service UL and DL as follows:
• LTE: "Simulations Based on Sector Traffic Maps" on page 478
• CDMA: "Simulations Based on Sector Traffic Maps" on page 362.
590
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 8: 3GPP2 Multi-RAT Networks
The 3GPP2 multi-RAT effective service area is the combination of single-RAT effective service areas:
• CDMA Effective Service Area Analysis (Eb⁄Nt) (DL+UL) is based on a combination of downlink and uplink service area
predictions, as explained in "Downlink Service Area Analysis" on page 413 and "Uplink Service Area Analysis" on
page 417.
• LTE Effective Service Area Analysis (DL+UL) is based on a combination of downlink and uplink service area predictions,
as explained in "Effective Signal Analysis Coverage Predictions" on page 472.
Two display options are available for this prediction:
• Technologies: Each pixel displays the colour representing the visible technology having the highest priority defined in
the selected service.
• Available Technologies: Pixels display the colour representing the combined areas over which a multi-technology ter-
minal can be served. For instance, the CDMA+LTE area shows the union between the CDMA and the LTE service areas
as explained above.
The 3GPP2 multi-RAT throughput prediction is the combination of single-RAT throughput predictions:
• Service Area Analysis (Eb⁄Nt) (DL) explained in "Downlink Service Area Analysis" on page 413
The 3GPP2 multi-RAT effective RLC and application throughputs are respectively obtained from the effective RLC and
application throughputs (see "Downlink Service Area Analysis" on page 300 for more information).
• LTE Coverage by Throughput (DL) explained in "C/(I+N)-based Coverage Predictions" on page 473
The 3GPP multi-RAT effective RLC and application throughputs are respectively obtained from the Effective RLC
Channel Throughput (DL) and the Application Channel Throughput (DL) (see "C/(I+N)-based Coverage Predictions" on
page 473 for more information).
Four display options are available for this prediction:
• Effective RLC Throughput: The throughput on the RLC layer that a cell can provide to the selected terminal per pixel
taking into account possible transmission errors (BLER) for the highest priority technology.
• Max Effective RLC Throughput: The maximum throughput on the RLC layer that a cell can provide to the selected
terminal per pixel taking into account possible transmission errors (BLER), considering all available technologies.
• Application Throughput: The throughput on the application layer that a cell can provide to the selected terminal per
pixel taking into account possible transmission errors (BLER) for the highest priority technology.
• Max Application Throughput: the maximum throughput on the application layer that a cell can provide to the selected
terminal per pixel taking into account possible transmission errors (BLER), considering all available technologies.
591
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 8: 3GPP2 Multi-RAT Networks ©Forsk 2015
592
Chapter 9
TD-SCDMA Networks
594
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
9 TD-SCDMA Networks
This chapter describes in detail the algorithms, calculation parameters, and processes of the coverage predictions and the
simulations available in TD-SCDMA documents. The first part of this chapter lists all the input and output parameters in the
TD-SCDMA documents, their significance, location in the Atoll GUI, and their usage. Detailed explanation of the basic coverage
predictions, which do not require simulation results, is provided in the second part. The third part describes the traffic
scenario generation and Montel Carlo simulation algorithms including smart antenna modelling and dynamic channel
allocation. The next sections are dedicated to TD-SCDMA coverage predictions which can be based on results obtained from
simulations. The last three sections describe in detail the allocation of frequencies, i.e., master and slave carriers, the
allocation of neigbours, and the allocation of scrambling codes.
9.1.1 Inputs
This table lists the inputs to computations, coverage predictions, and simulations.
Spread
F Max Global parameter None Maximum spreading factor (16)
Proc
G P – CCPCH Global parameter None P-CCPCH processing gain (13.8 dB)
595
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX
F MCJD Site equipment parameter None Multi-Cell Joint Detection factor
Transmitter parameter
TX (user-defined or calculated from transmitter equipment None BTS Noise Figure
NF
characteristics)
Transmitter loss
Transmitter parameter
TX (user-defined or calculated from transmitter equipment None L Tx = L Total – UL on uplink
L
characteristics) L Tx = L Total – DL on downlink
Req
RU DL Cell parameter None Required resource units in downlink
596
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
597
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
DL
S Packet Service parameter (packet session modelling) Bytes Packet size on downlink
Nom
R DL R99 bearer parameter kbps Downlink peak throughput
Nom
R UL R99 bearer parameter kbps Uplink peak throughput
W-
G DL
Proc R99 bearer parameter (Can be calculated as -----------
Nom
) None Downlink processing gain
R DL
W-
G UL
Proc R99 bearer parameter (Can be calculated as -----------
Nom
) None Uplink processing gain
R UL
TS
N UL R99 bearer parameter None Number of uplink timelots
E Req C Req
Req
Q TCH – UL R99 bearer parameter per mobility ( ----b- or --- ) None Eb/Nt or C/I target on uplink
N t TCH – UL I TCH – UL
E Req C Req
Req
Q TCH – DL R99 bearer parameter per mobility ( ----b- or --- ) None Eb/Nt or C/I target on downlink
N t TCH – DL I TCH – DL
Req
RSCP TCH – UL R99 bearer parameter per mobility W Target RSCP on uplink TCH
Req
RSCP TCH – DL R99 bearer parameter per mobility W Target RSCP on downlink TCH
Div
G DL R99 bearer parameter per mobility None Downlink diversity gain
Div
G UL R99 bearer parameter per mobility None Uplink diversity gain
Term
P Max Terminal parameter W Maximum terminal power
Term
P Min Terminal parameter W Minimum terminal power
Req
RSCP UpPCH Mobility parameter W Required RSCP threshold for UpPCH
E Req C Req
Mobility parameter ( ----b- or ---
Req Required quality threshold for P-
Q P – CCPCH ) None
N t P – CCPCH I P – CCPCH CCPCH
598
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
E Req
Mobility parameter ( ----c-
Req Required quality threshold for HS-
Q HS – SCCH ) None
N t HS – SCCH SCCH
E P – CCPCH
Mobility parameter ( ----c-
Req Required quality threshold for P-
Q HS – SICH ) None
N t HS – SICH CCPCH
C Req
Mobility parameter ( ---
Req Required quality threshold for
Q DwPCH ) None
I DwPCH DwPCH
Model
Clutter class parameter None Model standard deviation
Eb/Nt
P – CCPCH or P-CCPCH Eb/Nt or C/I standard
Clutter class parameter None
CI deviation
P – CCPCH
Ortho
F UL Clutter class parameter None Uplink orthogonality factor
N0
TX
NFTX K T BW W Thermal noise at transmitter
N0
Term
NF Term K T BW W Thermal noise at terminal
Model Result calculated from cell edge coverage probability and model Model shadowing margin used in
M Shadowing None
standard deviation coverage predictions
P – CCPCH Result calculated from cell edge coverage probability and P-CCPCH P-CCPCH Eb/Nt shadowing margin
M Shadowing None
Eb/Nt standard deviation used in coverage predictions
Eb Nt DL Result calculated from cell edge coverage probability and DL Eb/Nt DL Eb/Nt shadowing margin used in
M Shadowing None
standard deviation coverage predictions
Eb Nt UL Result calculated from cell edge coverage probability and UL Eb/Nt UL Eb/Nt shadowing margin used in
M Shadowing None
standard deviation coverage predictions
599
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX i TX i ic
TX i ic RSCP P – CCPCH
C
--- ------------------------------------------------ None P-CCPCH C/I for the cell TX i ic
I P – CCPCH TX i ic
N Tot – DL
TX ic TX TX ic TX
i i i i
RSCP P – CCPCH + RSCP OCCH – TS0
TX i TX i
TX i ic With = 1 – F DL
Ortho
1 – F JD
Term
and Downlink intra-cell interference for
W
I Intra – DL the cell TX i ic
= 0 Without Useful Signal
1 Total Noise
TX j jc TX j jc
600
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
TX j jc
TX i TX i ic
TX i ic RSCP TCH – DL
C
--- ---------------------------------------------- G Div None Downlink TCH C/I for the cell TX i ic
I TCH – DL TX i ic DL
N Tot – DL
TX j jc TX j jc
Term TX i ic
TX i ic RSCP TCH – UL
E b
----
- - G Proc
------------------------------------------------- Div
UL G UL None Uplink TCH Eb/Nt for the cell TX i ic
N t TCH – UL TX i ic
N Tot – UL
Term TX i ic
TX ic RSCP TCH – UL
i
C
--- - G Div
------------------------------------------------- None Uplink TCH C/I for the cell TX i ic
I TCH – UL TX i ic UL
N Tot – UL
Req Req
Term Q TCH – UL Q TCH – UL
Term - or P Term
P Max --------------------------- Max -------------------------
- Uplink required power for the
P Req TX i ic TX i ic W
E
-----
b ---
C terminal
N t TCH – UL I TCH – UL
601
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX i ic
TX i ic
TX i X TS1 – UL
N0 ---------------------------------- W UpPCH interference
I TS1 – UL TX ic
1 – X i
TS1 – UL
TX i
Path loss ( L Path ) in dB L Path = L Model + L Ant
TX i TX i
Total losses ( L T ) in dB L T = L Path + L
Model
+ L Indoor + M Shadowing – G
Where,
RSCP is the received signal code power for the P-CCPCH.
TX i ic TX i ic TX i TX i
EIRP is the effective isotropic radiated power of the transmitter. EIRP = P P – CCPCH + G –L .
ic is a carrier number
L Model is the loss on the transmitter-receiver path (path loss) calculated by the propagation model
602
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
TX
i
L Ant is the transmitter antenna attenuation (from antenna patterns)
Model
M Shadowing is the shadowing margin. This parameter is taken into account when the option “Shadowing taken into account”
is selected
L Indoor are the indoor losses, taken into account when the option "Indoor coverage" is selected
TX i
G is the transmitter antenna gain
TX i TX i
L is the transmitter loss ( L = L Total – DL )
It is possible to analyse the best carrier. In this case, Atoll takes the highest P-CCPCH
power of cells to calculate the signal level received from a transmitter.
For a selected transmitter, it is also possible to study the path loss, L Path , or the total
losses, L T . Path loss and total losses are the same on any carrier.
You can use a value other than 30 dB for the margin from the best server signal level, for
example a smaller value for improving the calculation speed. For more information on
defining a different value for this margin, see the Administrator Manual.
Where,
603
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
RSCP is the received signal code power. RSCP can be calculated for P-CCPCH, DwPCH, or the downlink TCH.
TX ic TX ic TX TX
i i i i
EIRP is the effective isotropic radiated power of the transmitter. EIRP P – CCPCH = P P – CCPCH + G –L ,
TX ic TX ic TX TX TX ic TX ic TX TX
i i i i i i i i
EIRP DwPCH = P DwPCH +G –L , or EIRP DL – TCH = P DL – TCH +G –L .
ic is a carrier number
TX i
L Path = L Model + L Ant
L Model is the loss on the transmitter-receiver path (path loss) calculated by the propagation model
TX i
L Ant is the transmitter antenna attenuation (from antenna patterns)
Model
M Shadowing is the shadowing margin. This parameter is taken into account when the option “Shadowing taken into account”
is selected
L Indoor are the indoor losses, taken into account when the option "Indoor coverage" is selected
Term
L is the terminal loss
Term
G is the receiver total gain
TX i
G is the transmitter antenna gain
TX i TX i
L is the transmitter loss ( L = L Total – DL )
604
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
TX i ic TX j jc
RSCP P – CCPCH Best RSCP P – CCPCH – M
ji
605
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX ic
i Min
The pixels in the TX i ic coverage area where RSCP P – CCPCH Max (TAdd P – CCPCH,RSCP P – CCPCH) and where
TX ic
i Req
RSCP DwPCH RSCP DwPCH Mobility are covered and coloured according to the selected display parameter.
606
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined RSCP margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction
Term Req RSCP
properties). For each layer, area is covered if RSCP UpPCH – RSCP UpPCH Mobility M UpPCH . Each layer is assigned a
colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
• Cell Edge Coverage Probability (%)
Term
On each pixel of each transmitter service area, the coverage corresponds to the pixels from which the RSCP UpPCH at
Term
the transmitter exceeds RSCP UpPCH defined in the mobility selected in the Conditions tab, with different cell edge
coverage probabilities. There is one coverage area per transmitter in the explorer.
TX i ic TX j jc
RSCP P – CCPCH Best RSCP P – CCPCH – M
ji
607
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as
scrambling codes. Each layer corresponds to the area where the corresponding scrambling code has interference. A layer
corresponding to areas where more than one scrambling code interferes is also available.
Atoll determines the total number of users attempting connection in each simulation
based on the Poisson distribution. This may lead to slight variations in the total numbers
of users in different simulations. To have the same total number of users in each
simulation of a group, add the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[Simulation]
RandomTotalUsers=0
Each user is randomly assigned a service, a terminal, and a mobility type. The activity status is determined based on the
calculations of activity probabilities using the traffic inputs.
The user activity status influences the next step of the simulation, i.e., the interference in the network. Both active and
inactive users use radio resources and generate interference.
Once all the user characteristics have been determined, a second random trial is performed to obtain their geographical
locations weighted according to the clutter classes, and whether they are indoor or outdoor according to the percentage of
indoor users per clutter class defined for the traffic maps.
Atoll also calculates the shadowing margin for each user based on the standard deviations defined for the clutter class of each
user.
In TD-SCDMA networks users accessing packet-switched services can transmit either on uplink or on downlink, but never on
both simultaneously. Users accessing circuit-switched services transmit on both uplink and downlink simultaneously. Circuit-
switched service users, mobiles connected in uplink and downlink both, are modelled in Atoll by two mobiles generated at
the same location with one connected on the uplink and the other on the downlink. If one of these two mobiles is rejected
for some reason, the other is also rejected due to the same reason.
N Users = S Env D UP
608
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
• In case of user profile traffic maps composed of lines, the number of users per user
profile is calculated from the line length (L) and the user profile density (DUP) (users
per km): N Users = L D UP
• The number of users is an input when a user profile traffic map is composed of points.
At any given instant, Atoll calculates the probability for a user being active in the uplink and in the downlink according to the
service usage characteristics described in the user profiles, i.e., the number of voice calls or data sessions, the average
duration of each voice call, or the volumes of the data exchanged in the uplink and the downlink in each data session.
The number of users and their distribution per activity status is determined as follows:
• Calculation of the service usage duration per hour ( p 0 : probability of a connection):
N call d
p o = -------------------
-
3600
n i = N Users p 0
The activity status of each user depends on the activity periods during the connection, i.e., the uplink and downlink activity
UL DL
factors defined for the circuit switched service i, f Act and f Act .
UL UL DL
Probability of being active on UL: p Active = f Act 1 – f Act
DL DL UL
Probability of being active on DL: p Active = f Act 1 – f Act
UL + DL UL DL
Probability of being active both on UL and DL: p Active = f Act f Act
UL UL
Number of users active in the uplink: n i – Active = n i p Active
DL DL
Number of users active in the downlink: n i – Active = n i p Active
UL + DL UL + DL
Number of users active in the uplink and downlink both: n i – Active = n i p Active
Therefore, a connected user can be either active on both links, inactive on both links, active on UL only, or active on DL only.
609
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
UL DL
In case of HSDPA services, f Eff and f Eff are the uplink and downlink A-DPCH activity factors, respectively.
DL DL DL
D Inactivity Session = N PacketCall D Inactivity PacketCall
DL DL
DL DL N Packet S Packet 8
D Activity Session = N PacketCall ------------------------------------------------
DL
-
R Nom 1000
UL N Sess UL DL N Sess DL
p Connection = ------------ D Connection and p Connection = ------------ D Connection
3600 3600
610
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
UL DL
p Connected = 1 – 1 – p Connection 1 – p Connection
n j = N Users p Connected
As Figure 9.1 on page 610 shows, there can be three possible cases when a user is connected:
Therefore, we have:
DL DL UL UL + DL
The probability of the user being active on DL and inactive on UL: p1 Active = f 1 – f p Connected
UL + DL UL DL UL + DL
The probability of the user being active on both UL and DL: p1 Active = f f p Connected
UL DL UL + DL
The probability of the user being inactive on both UL and DL: p1 Inactive = 1 – f 1 – f p Connected
UL UL
The probability of the user being inactive on both UL and DL: p2 Inactive = 1 – f p Connected
DL DL
The probability of the user being inactive on both UL and DL: p3 Inactive = 1 – f p Connected
UL UL UL
Number of users active on UL and inactive on DL: n j – Active = n j p1 Active + p2 Active
DL DL DL
Number of users active on DL and inactive on UL: n j – Active = n j p1 Active + p3 Active
UL + DL UL + DL
Number of users active on UL and DL: n j – Active = n j p1 Active
Therefore, a connected user can be active on both links, inactive on both links, active on UL only, or active on DL only.
611
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
The user distribution per service, and the activity status distribution between the users
are average distributions. The service and the activity status of each user are random in
each simulation. Therefore, if you compute several simulations at once, the average
number of users per service and average numbers of inactive, active on UL, active on DL,
and active on UL and DL users, will correspond to calculated distributions. But, if you
compare each simulation, you will observe that the user distribution between services as
well as the activity status distribution between users is different in each simulation.
DL
DL RS
N = ---------- for HSDPA service
DL
R Avg
UL DL
R S and R S are the uplink and downlink throughputs for service S in the TXi cell from the traffic map.
Atoll takes into account activity periods during the connection in order to determine the activity status of each user.
Activity probabilities are calculated as follows:
UL DL
Probability of being inactive in UL and DL: p Inactive = 1 – f Act 1 – f Act
UL UL DL
Probability of being active in UL only: p Active = f Act 1 – f Act
DL DL UL
Probability of being active in DL only: p Active = f Act 1 – f Act
UL + DL UL DL
Probability of being active both in UL and DL: p Active = f Act f Act
UL DL
Where, f Act and f Act are respectively the UL and DL activity factors defined for the service i.
DL UL + DL UL DL UL + DL
p Active + p Active n i – Active + n i – Active + n i – Active = N DL
Therefore, we have:
UL + DL UL + DL
UL + DL N UL p Active N DL p Active
Number of users active in UL and DL both: n i – Active = min ---------------------------------------
UL + DL
---------------------------------------
+ DL
p Active + p Active p Active + p UL
UL DL
Active
UL UL + DL
Number of users active in UL and inactive in DL: n i – Active = N UL – n i – Active
612
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
DL UL + DL
Number of users active in DL and inactive in UL: n i – Active = N DL – n i – Active
UL DL UL + DL
n i – Active + n i – Active + n i – Active
Number of inactive users in UL and DL: n i – Inactive = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- p inactive
1 – p inactive
Therefore, a connected user can have four different activity status: either active in both links, or inactive in both links, or active
in UL only, or active in DL only.
Atoll takes into account activity periods during the connection in order to determine the activity status of each user.
Activity probabilities are calculated as follows:
UL DL
Probability of being inactive in UL and DL: p Inactive = 1 – f Act 1 – f Act
UL UL DL
Probability of being active in UL only: p Active = f Act 1 – f Act
DL DL UL
Probability of being active in DL only: p Active = f Act 1 – f Act
UL + DL UL DL
Probability of being active both in UL and DL: p Active = f Act f Act
UL DL
Where, f Act and f Act are respectively the UL and DL activity factors defined for the service i.
UL UL
Number of users active in UL and inactive in DL: n i – Active = n i p Active
DL DL
Number of users active in DL and inactive in UL: n i – Active = n i p Active
UL + DL UL + DL
Number of users active in UL and DL both: n i – Active = n i p Active
Therefore, a connected user can have four different activity status: either active in both links, or inactive in both links, or active
in UL only, or active in DL only.
The activity status of users is based on an average distribution. The activity status of each
user is random in each simulation. Therefore, if you compute several simulations at once,
the average numbers of inactive, active on UL, active on DL, and active on UL and DL
users, will correspond to calculated distributions. But, if you compare each simulation,
you will observe that the activity status distribution between users is different in each
simulation.
613
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
decrease the required powers and the loads of all the surrounding cells. Interference on the downlink and the uplink is
calculated on a per user. Power control is simulated over a sub-frame, i.e., 7 timeslots.
For HSDPA users, uplink and downlink power control is performed on the associated A-DCH bearer before fast link adaptation
on downlink. The steps of this algorithm are detailed below.
614
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
• the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, if no preferred carrier is defined for the service, or
• the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters.
The RSCP from a transmitter TXi and a selected carrier ic is given by:
TX ic TX ic TX TX M M M
i i i i Model i i i
RSCP P – CCPCH = P P – CCPCH + G –L – L Path – M Shadowing – L Body – L Indoor + G –L in dBm
Where,
TX i
L Path = L Model + L Ant
L Model is the loss on the transmitter-receiver path (path loss) calculated by the propagation model
TX i
L Ant is the transmitter antenna attenuation (from antenna patterns)
Model
M Shadowing is the shadowing margin. This parameter is taken into account when the option “Shadowing taken into account”
is selected
L Indoor are the indoor losses, taken into account when the option "Indoor coverage" is selected
Mi
L is the los of the terminal used by Mi
Mi
L Body is the body loss defined in the service used by Mi
Mi
G is the receiver gain of the terminal user by Mi
TX i
G is the transmitter antenna gain
TX i TX i
L is the transmitter loss ( L = L Total – DL )
A cell TX i ic is considered the best server of a mobile Mi if it satisfies the following conditions:
TX i ic
Min
RSCP P – CCPCH RSCP P – CCPCH ,
TX i ic
RSCP P – CCPCH TAdd P – CCPCH Mobility ,
TX i ic
And RSCP P – CCPCH = Best RSCP TXj jc .
j = All
P – CCPCH
The best server is determined once for the whole simulation during the first iteration, i.e., k = 0, because the best server does
not change during the simulation and smart antennas do not influence this step.
Mi is considered unable to connect to the network if no best server has been selected. In this case, Mi is rejected for the reason
P-CCPCH RSCP < Min P-CCPCH RSCP. If Mi has no best server, it is not taken into account in the next steps.
615
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
There are four strategies for the DCA available in Atoll. These strategies are described below one by one.
1. Load
Carrier Selection by Load: The DCA determines the least loaded carrier with enough timeslots to accomodate the
service being used by each mobile Mi. The best carrier for a mobile is the one that is least loaded:
DCA TX i ic TS M i
DCA
Where, X = X DL = N Tot – DL if the mobile is connected in the downlink.
TX i ic TS M i
DCA DCA N Tot – UL
And, X = X UL - X DCA if the mobile is connected in the uplink.
= -----------------------------------------------
TX i ic TS M i TX i
N Tot – UL + N0
DCA
X is the load increment given by:
Mi TX i
1 – f UL 1 – f JD
Ortho
DCA
X = ----------------------------------------------------------------------
1
1 + -----------
Req
Q UL
E b
----
Req
-
Req N t UL
Where Q UL = ---
Req C Proc
= ------------------ is the uplink required signal quality. The uplink processing gain G UL calculated
I UL Proc
G UL
from the service parameters, if no smart antenna is used by the transmitter in the uplink.
If a smart antenna is used by the transmitter in the uplink, the smart antenna gain is taken into account in calculating
Req
Q UL .
TX i ic TS M i
• N Tot – UL is described in "Uplink Power Control" on page 617.
TX i ic TS M i
• N Tot – DL is described in "Downlink Power Control" on page 619.
• The carrier is the same in the uplink and in the downlink for mobiles accessing circuit-
switched services.
Timeslot selection by Load: From the selected carrier, Atoll selects the timeslots which are the least loaded and have
enough resource units for the service being accessed by Mi.
2. Available RUs
Carrier selection by Available RUs: The DCA determines the carrier which has the highest number of available
resource units with enough timeslots to accomodate the service being used by each mobile Mi. The best carrier for a
mobile is the one that has the highest number of resource units:
Timeslot selection by Available RUs: From the selected carrier, Atoll selects the timeslots which have the highest
numbers of available resource units.
3. Direction of Arrival
Carrier selection by Direction of Arrival: The DCA determines the direction of arrival of the signal from the served user
Mi and checks whether there is an interfering mobile in the same direction as Mi. Atoll searches for interfering mobiles
within the angle defined by the Angular Step. For example, if you enter an angular step of 15 degrees, Atoll searches
for interfering mobiles within 15 degrees to the right and to the left of the served user, and allocates a different carrier
than the ones used by any interfering mobiles found. The best carrier for a mobile is the one which is not interfered
by another mobile in the direction of the mobile Mi.
In other words, the direction of arrival for the served user Mi should not be the direction of arrival of an interfering
mobile.
616
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
Timeslot selection by Direction of Arrival: From the selected carrier, Atoll selects the timeslots which are not being
used by any other mobile Mj located in the same direction as the served user Mi.
4. Sequential
Sequential carrier selection: The DCA allocates carriers to served users Mi in a sequential order.
Sequential timeslot selection: From the selected carrier, Atoll allocates timeslots to served users Mi in a sequential
order.
At the end of the DCA, each admitted mobile has an associated carrier and timeslots. In case of N-frequency mode compatible
transmitters, an admitted mobile can have associated timeslots over more than one slave carrier.
If the mobile Mi is connected (active or inactive) in the uplink and has a best server TX i ic assigned to it, Atoll calculates the
signal quality on the uplink timeslots allocated to Mi by the DCA:
Mi TX i ic TS M i Mi TX i ic TS M i
TX i ic TS M i TX i ic TS M i
E b
---- RSCP TCH – UL C RSCP TCH – UL
- - G Proc
= -------------------------------------------------------
Div
UL G UL or --- - G Div
= -------------------------------------------------------
N t TCH – UL TX i ic TS M i I TCH – UL TX i ic TS M i UL
N Tot – UL N Tot – UL
The uplink total noise is calculated for the uplink connection between each mobile Mi and its best server TX i ic .
TX i ic TS M i TX i ic TS M i TX i
N Tot – UL = I Tot – UL + N0
Where
Mi Mi
TX i ic TS M i RSCP TCH – UL TX i ic TS M i +
I Tot – UL = Mj Mi
RSCP TCH – UL TX i ic TS M i +
M j TX i ic TS M i
Mj Mi
M M
1 – j RSCP j
TCH – UL TX i ic TS M i +
M j TX i ic TS M i
Mj Mi
M TX
RSCP TCH – UL TX i ic TS M i 1 – F MCJD
j i
M TX ic TS M
j i i
M M TX
1 – F JD and = 0 Without Useful Signal
i i Ortho i
= 1 – F UL
1 Total Noise
The above formula gives the value of I Tot – UL for the uplink connection between Mi and TX i ic , taking into account the
interference received from other mobiles, Mj, which are located in the Mi best server coverage area, as well as located in the
coverage areas of other cells. The mobile Mi is the focus, i.e., the mobile that is listened to by the transmitter TX i ic .
617
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
• The useful signal for which the received mobile is the focus (Mi).
• The intra-cell interference for which the best-server is the same for the received mobile Mj and the focus Mi, TX i ic .
Mi
P Req TX i ic TS M i
Mi
k–1
The uplink received signal code power is: RSCP TCH – UL TX i ic TS M i = ---------------------------------------------------------------
-
Model
LT
TX i Mi Mi
Model
Model L Path L L L Body L Indoor M Shadowing Mi
LT - and P Req TX i ic TS M i is the uplink required mobile power
= ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX i Mi
G G
Mi Mi
calculated for the timeslot allocated to Mi. If Mi is an HSDPA user, P Req TX i ic TS M i = 0.1 PReq TX i ic TS M i
TX i TX i
Model SA SA
In L T , G = G UL and L = L UL are calculated according to the smart antenna modelling method used, for
Mi TX i TX i
P Req TX i ic TS M i , if a smart antenna is available in the uplink. Otherwise, G and L are read from the main antenna
model.
Interference is updated only for active mobiles on the uplink for circuit- and packet-
switched services. However, if these mobiles are rejected, they are considered in the
number of rejected mobiles.
Mi
Calculation of Uplink Required Power ( P Req ):
Req
C---
Mi Mi I TCH – UL
or P Req TX i ic TS M i = P Req TX i ic TS M i ------------------------------------
TX i ic TS M i
-
k k–1
---
C
I TCH – UL
M M M M
i i i i
And if P Req TX i ic TS M i P Min then P Req TX i ic TS M i = P Min
M M
i i
If P Req TX i ic TS M i P Max then the mobile Mi is rejected for the reason "Pmob > PmobMax", and
Mi
P Req TX i ic TS M i is set to 0.
Mi Mi
P Min and P Max are set in the properties of the terminal used by the mobile Mi.
Mi
TX i ic TS M i P Req TX i ic TS M i
k–1
Where RSCP TCH – UL = ---------------------------------------------------------------
-
Model
LT
TX i Mi Mi
Model
Model L Path L L L Body L Indoor M Shadowing Mi
LT - and P Req TX i ic TS M i
= ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ is the uplink required mobile
TX i Mi k–1
G G
power for iteration k - 1 transmitted on the timeslot allocated to Mi.
618
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
TX TX
Model i SA i SA
In L T , G = G UL and L = L UL are calculated according to the smart antenna modelling method used, for
M TX TX
i i i
P Req TX i ic TS M i , if a smart antenna is available in the uplink. Otherwise, G and L are read from the main antenna
model.
The uplink required powers for mobiles inactive in the uplink accessing circuit- or packet-
switched services are calculated for information only. However, if these mobiles are
rejected, they are considered in the number of rejected mobiles.
If the mobile Mi is connected (active or inactive) in the downlink and has a best server TX i ic assigned to it, Atoll calculates
the signal quality on the uplink timeslots allocated to Mi by the DCA:
TX i TX i ic TS M i TX i TX i ic TS M i
TX i ic TS M i TX i ic TS M i
E b
---- RSCP TCH – DL C RSCP TCH – DL
- - G Proc
= -------------------------------------------------------- G
Div
or --
- - G Div
= --------------------------------------------------------
N t TCH – DL TX i ic TS M i DL DL I TCH – DL TX i ic TS M i DL
N Tot – DL N Tot – DL
The downlink total noise is calculated for the downlink connection between each mobile Mi and its best server TX i ic .
TX i ic TS M i TX i ic TS M i Mi
N Tot – DL = I Tot – DL + I IC – DL ic jc + I MM M i M j + N 0
Where
TX i ic TS M i TX i
TX i ic TS M i RSCP Tot – DL Mi +
I Tot – DL =
TX i ic TS M i TX i
RSCP Tot – DL Mj +
M TX ic TS M
j i i
Mj Mi
TX TX ic TS M i
1 – i RSCP i
Tot – DL Mj +
M j TX i ic TS M i
Mj Mi
TX j ic TS M i
RSCP Tot – DL Mj
M j TX i ic TS M i
• The useful signal for which the received mobile is the focus (Mi).
• The intra-cell interference for which the best-server is the same for the received mobile Mj and the focus Mi, TX i ic .
TX j jc TS M i
RSCPTot – DL Mi
All TX
I IC – DL ic jc = ----------------------------------------------------------------
j
F IRF ic jc
619
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX TX M
1 – F JD and = 0 Without Useful Signal
i i Ortho i
= 1 – F DL
1 Total Noise
I IC – DL ic jc is the inter-carrier interference from a carrier jc to another carrier ic on the downlink, which is reduced by the
interference reduction factor F IRF ic jc defined for the pair (ic, jc).
TX i ic TS M i TX ic TS M
TX i ic TS M i P TCH – DL TX i ic TS M i P OCCH
i i
k–1
With RSCP TCH – DL = -----------------------------------------
- and RSCP OCCH = ------------------------------
-
Model Model
LT LT
TX i Mi Mi
Model
Model L Path L L L Body L Indoor M Shadowing TX i ic TS M i
LT = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- and P TCH – DL is the downlink traffic power transmitted
TX i Mi k–1
G G
TX ic TS M TX ic TS M
i i i i
on the timeslot allocated to Mi during the iteration k - 1. If Mi is an HSDPA user, P TCH – DL = 0.1 P TCH – DL
TX i TX i
Model SA SA
In L T , G = G DL and L = L DL are calculated according to the smart antenna modelling method used, for
TX i ic TS M i TX i ic TS M i TX i TX i
P TCH – DL only and not for P OCCH , if a smart antenna is available in the downlink. Otherwise, G and L are
read from the main antenna model.
Mj
RSCPTCH – UL Mi
M
I MM M i M j = -------------------------------------------------
j is the interference from each mobile Mj transmitting in the uplink on the same
F IRF ic jc
timeslots as those on which the mobile Mi is receiving in the downlink. Mj can interfere Mi directly if and only if:
Mi – Mj
• The distance between Mi and Mj ( d ) is less than the Max Distance between interfering mobiles defined by the
user when starting the simulation, and
• The downlink timeslot of Mi (TSMi) is the same as the uplink timeslot of Mj, (TSMj).
The interference received from the mobile Mj at the mobile Mi is calculated using either the free-space propagation model or
the Xia model.
Mj
Mj P TCH – UL
RSCP TCH – UL M i = -------------------
-
L MM
Mi – Mj
32.4 + 20 Log F Avg + 20 Log d If d 3m
L MM = with F Avg being the average frequency in MHz of the
Mi – Mj
49 + 30 Log F Avg + 40 Log d If d 3m
frequency band used by the best server of the mobile Mi, and d is the distance between the mobiles Mi and Mj in km.
TX i ic TS M i
Calculation of Downlink Required Power ( P Req ):
Req
C---
TX i ic TS M i TX i ic TS M i I TCH – DL
or P Req = P Req ------------------------------------
TX i ic TS M i
-
k k–1
C ---
I TCH – DL
TX i ic TS M i TX i ic TS M i
Min Min
And if P Req P TCH – DL Service then P Req = P TCH – DL Service
620
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
TX ic TS M TX ic TS M
i i Max i i
If P Req P TCH – DL Service then the mobile Mi is rejected for the reason "Ptch > PtchMax", and P Req is set
to 0.
Min Max
P TCH – DL Service and P TCH – DL Service are set in the properties of the R99 bearer associated with the service used by the
mobile Mi.
TX i ic TS M i TX i ic TS M i TX i ic TS M i
Otherwise, the downlink traffic power is incremented P TCH – DL = P TCH – DL + P Req
For each mobile, Atoll also calculates the downlink traffic power for the different values of the Angular Step Step .
SA
TX i ic TS M i TX i ic TS M i G DL
RSCP TCH – DL = RSCP TCH – DL ------------------------
Step SA
L DL Step
TX i ic TS M i
TX i ic TS M i P Req
k–1
Where RSCP TCH – DL = -----------------------------------------
-
Model
LT
TX i Mi Mi
Model
Model L Path L L L Body L Indoor M Shadowing TX i ic TS M i
LT = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- and P Req is the downlink traffic power for iteration k
TX i Mi k–1
G G
- 1 transmitted on the timeslot allocated to Mi.
TX i TX i
Model SA SA
In L T , G = G DL and L = L DL are calculated according to the smart antenna modelling method used, for
TX i ic TS M i TX i TX i
P Req , if a smart antenna is available in the downlink. Otherwise, G and L are read from the main antenna
model.
The downlink power for mobiles inactive in the downlink accessing circuit- or packet-
switched services are calculated for information only.
TX i ic TS M i
For each mobile Mi interfered by Mj in the uplink by the connection between Mj and TX j ic , Atoll updates RSCP TCH – UL .
TX i ic TS M i
For each mobile interfered by Mi, Atoll updates RSCP TCH – DL
621
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Where TX i ic is the transmitter considered and Mi is the focus, i.e., the mobile that is the target for TX i ic .
9.3.2.2.7 Control of Radio Resource Limits (Downlink Traffic Power and Uplink Load)
This step checks whether the downlink traffic powers of the downlink timeslots and the uplink loads of the uplink timeslots
of all the cells satisfy the conditions defined globally or per cell and timeslot.
Atoll verifies that the total R99 power transmitted by any cell on any timeslot does not exceed the effective maximum cell
power per timeslot. The effective maximum cell traffic power per timeslot is calculated as:
TX i ic TS M i TX i ic TS M i
P Max – DL – Eff = P Max – DL %P Max – DL
TX i ic TS M i
Where P Max – DL is the maximum cell power per timeslot defined per cell, and %P Max – DL is the maximum allowed
downlink load either taken from the properties of each cell or from the simulation properties if a global value is defined.
For each transmitter TXi, carrier ic, and downlink timeslot TS M ,
i
TX i ic TS M i TX i ic TS M i
If P R99 – DL P Max – DL – Eff the mobile with the lowest service priority is rejected for the reason "DL Load Saturation".
Atoll verifies that the uplink load of any cell on any timeslot does not exceed the maximum uplink cell load allowed per
timeslot.
TX i ic TS M i
The maximum allowed uplink cell load, X Max – UL , is either taken from the properties of each cell or from the simulation
properties if a global value is defined.
For each transmitter TXi, carrier ic, and uplink timeslot TS M ,
i
TX i ic TS M i TX i ic TS M i
If X UL X Max – UL the mobile with the lowest service priority is rejected for the reason "UL Load Saturation".
If a smart antenna is used by the transmitter in the uplink, the smart antenna gain is taken into account in the calculation of
uplink load.
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
P Tot – DL = P R99 – DL + P HR + P HS – SCCH + P HS – PDSCH
The HSDPA powers, i.e., the HS-SCCH and HS-PDSCH powers are calculated as follows:
• HS-SCCH Power:
HS-SCCH channels are transmitted on DL traffic timeslots. The maximum number of supported HS-SCCH channels is
defined per cell. Power can be allocated to HS-SCCH statically or dynamically:
• Static Allocation
The static HS-SCCH power is defined in the properties of the HSDPA cell.
• Dynamic Allocation
622
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
E TXi ic TX ic TX ic
HS-SCCH power is calculated for ----c-
Req i i
= Q HS – SCCH Mobility so that P HS – SCCH P Available – HS – SCCH .
N t HS – SCCH
TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic
i i i i
Where P Available – HS – SCCH = P Max – DL – Eff – P R99 – DL – P HR is the power available for HS-SCCH in the cell
TX ic TX ic TX ic
i i i
TX i ic , and P R99 – DL = P TCH – DL + P OCCH .
TX i ic TX i ic
The effective maximum cell traffic power per timeslot is calculated as: P Max – DL – Eff = P Max – DL %P Max – DL .
TX ic
i
P Max – DL is the maximum power defined per cell, and %P Max – DL is the maximum allowed downlink load either
taken from the properties of each cell or from the simulation properties if a global value is defined.
TX ic TX ic TX ic
Ec
----
i TX
N – RSCP HS – SCCH
i i i
-
TX i ic N t HS – SCCH Tot – DL Model
P HS – SCCH = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX i
LT
TX i ic
Where N Tot – DL is the downlink total noise calculated in "Downlink Power Control" on page 619,
TX i TX i Mi
1 – F JD and = 0 Without Useful Signal
Ortho
= 1 – F DL
1 Total Noise
TX i Mi Mi
Model
Model L Path L L L Body L Indoor M Shadowing TX i ic
LT = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- and P HS – SCCH is the HS-SCCH power calculated for the
TX i Mi
G G
timeslots allocated to Mi.
TX TX
Model i SA i SA
In L T ,G = G DL and L = L DL are calculated according to the smart antenna modelling method used, for
TX i ic TX i TX i
P HS – SCCH , if a smart antenna is available in the downlink. Otherwise, G and L are read from the main
antenna model.
• HS-PDSCH Power:
HS-PDSCH channels are transmitted on DL traffic timeslots. Power can be allocated to HS-PDSCH statically or
dynamically:
• Static Allocation
The static HS-PDSCH power is defined in the properties of the HSDPA cell.
• Dynamic Allocation
HS-PDSCH power is calculated as follows:
TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic
i i i i i
P HS – PDSCH = P Max – DL – Eff – P R99 – DL – P HR – P HS – SCCH
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
Where P R99 – DL = P TCH – DL + P OCCH . The effective maximum cell traffic power per timeslot is calculated as:
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
P Max – DL – Eff = P Max – DL %P Max – DL . P Max – DL is the maximum power defined per cell, and %P Max – DL is the
maximum allowed downlink load either taken from the properties of each cell or from the simulation properties
if a global value is defined.
The HS-SICH power is calculated as follows:
• HS-SICH Power:
HS-SICH channels can be transmitted on any UL traffic timeslot. The maximum number of supported HS-SICH channels
is defined per cell. Power can be allocated to HS-SICH statically or dynamically:
• Static Allocation
The static HS-SICH power is defined in the properties of the terminal used by the HSDPA mobile Mi.
• Dynamic Allocation
623
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
E TXi ic M TX ic
HS-SICH power is calculated for ----c-
Req i i
= Q HS – SICH Mobility so that P HS – SICH P Max – HS – SICH and
N t HS – SICH
M M
i i
P HS – SICH P Max – HS – SICH .
TX ic TX ic
Ec
----
i M M
N – RSCP HS – SICH
i i i
-
Mi N t HS – SICH Tot – UL
P HS – SICH - L Model
= ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- T
Mi
TX ic
i
Where N Tot – UL is the uplink total noise calculated in "Uplink Power Control" on page 617,
M M TX
1 – F JD and = 0 Without Useful Signal
i i Ortho i
= 1 – F UL
1 Total Noise
TX i Mi Mi
Model
Model L Path L L L Body L Indoor M Shadowing M
i
LT = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- and P HS – SICH is the HS-SICH power calculated for the
TX i Mi
G G
timeslots allocated to Mi.
TX i TX i
Model SA SA
In L T ,G = G UL and L = L UL are calculated according to the smart antenna modelling method used,
Mi TX i TX i
for P HS – SICH , if a smart antenna is available in the uplink. Otherwise, G and L are read from the main
antenna model.
TX i ic
The total transmitted power of the cell ( P Tot – DL ) is the sum of the R99 transmitted power and the HSDPA powers.
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
P Tot – DL = P R99 – DL + P HR + P HS – SCCH + P HS – PDSCH
HS-SCCH admission control is performed for active HSDPA users connected to A-DCH bearers on the downlink and having an
HS-SCCH sub-connection status. Each cell is able to manage a maximum number of HS-SCCH channels, n HS – SCCH . During the
R99 part, the DCA provides a DL timeslot with one SF16 resource unit that has the downlink Ec/Nt higher than the required
quality. If no cell with such a resource unit is available, the user is rejected.
HS-SICH
HS-SICH admission control is performed for active HSDPA users connected to A-DCH bearers on the uplink and having an HS-
SICH sub-connection status. Each cell is able to manage a maximum number of HS-SICH channels, n HS – SICH . During the R99
part, the DCA provides an UL timeslot with one SF16 resource unit that has the uplink Ec/Nt higher than the required quality.
If no cell with such a resource unit is available, the user is rejected.
624
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
HS-PDSCH
Scheduling is performed for active HSDPA users connected to A-DCH bearers on the downlink and having an HS-PDSCH sub-
connection status. The scheduling is performed as follows:
1. Each HS-PDSCH user is considered as the only served user. The scheduler allocates the best available HSDPA bearer to
each user. The best available HSDPA bearer is selected depending on the user’s Ec/Nt. If no bearer can be allocated
due to low Ec/Nt, the user is rejected for the reason "HSDPA Scheduler Saturation".
The required HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt value is read from receiver equipment properties. For each bearer, Atoll checks that the
Ec/Nt reaches the quality target. HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt is calculated by taking into account all intra and extra cells
interferences.
2. The scheduler sorts the HS-PDSCH users to whom bearers have been assigned in the order of decreasing RLC peak
throughputs. If two users have the same bearer, the user with the higher Ec/Nt has the higher rank.
3. The scheduler considers the group of HS-PDSCH users to whom bearers, HS-SCCH, and HS-SICH have been assigned.
The number of HS-PDSCH users cannot exceed the maximum number of HSDPA users ( n Max ) supported by the cell. If
there are enough HSDPA power and resource units available in order to obtain a HSDPA bearer, the users will be
connected. Otherwise, they will be delayed and their connection status will be “HSDPA Delayed”.
4. Other HS-PDSCH users will be rejected for the reason "HSDPA Scheduler Saturation".
For N-frequency mode compatible transmitters, the resource units available in the master and slave carriers can be shared,
i.e., a mobile can be connected to timeslots belonging more than one carrier.
TX i ic TS M i TX i ic TS M i
Max N Tot – UL – N Tot – UL
UL = Int ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 100
k k – 1
All TX i TX i ic TS M i
N Tot – UL
k
TX ic TS M
i i
Where, P Err is given by:
625
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX ic TS M TX ic TS M
i i i i
TX ic TS M P Rec – P Rec
i i Max k k–1
P Err = Step Step
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- with smart antennas.
0 Step 360 TX ic TS M
i i
P Rec
k
Step
TX ic TS M TX ic TS M
i i i i
TX ic TS M
i i
P Rec – P Rec
k – 1 without smart antennas.
= ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
k
P Err -
TX i ic TS M i
P Rec
k
• Divergence: After 30 iterations, DL and/or UL are still higher than their respective thresholds and from the 30th
iteration, DL and/or UL do not decrease during the next 15 successive iterations.
Examples: Let us assume that the maximum number of iterations is 100, and the UL and DL convergence thresholds
are set to 5 %.
a. After the 30th iteration, DL and/or DL equal 100 and do not decrease during the next 15 successive iterations.
Atoll stops the algorithm at the 46th iteration. The simulation has not converged.
b. After the 30th iteration, DL and/or UL equal 80, they start decreasing slowly until the 40th iteration (without
going under the thresholds) and then, do not change during 15 successive iterations. Atoll stops the algorithm at
the 56th iteration without converging.
• Last Iteration: If DL and/or UL are still much higher than their respective thresholds after the last iteration, the
simulation has not converged. If DL and UL are lower than their respective thresholds, the simulation has reached
convergence.
626
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
TX ic
i Min
The pixels in the TX i ic coverage area where RSCP P – CCPCH Max (TAdd P – CCPCH,RSCP P – CCPCH) , and
TX ic TX ic
E b
----
i
C
i
Req
--- Req
N t P – CCPCH Q P – CCPCH or I P – CCPCH Q P – CCPCH are covered and coloured according to the selected display option.
-
TX TX ic TX TX ic
E TX i ic TX i ic
i i i i
RSCP P – CCPCH RSCP P – CCPCH
Where ----b- C
---
Proc
= ------------------------------------------------
TX i ic
G P – CCPCH and I P – CCPCH = ------------------------------------------------
N t P – CCPCH TX i ic
N Tot – DL N Tot – DL
TX i ic
TX i ic P P – CCPCH
RSCP P – CCPCH = ----------------------
LT
Where
TX i ic TX i ic TX i TX i ic TX i
I Intra – DL = RSCP P – CCPCH + RSCP OCCH – TS0
TX i TX i
and = 0 Without Useful Signal
Ortho Term
With = 1 – F DL 1 – F JD
1 Total Noise
TX ic TX ic TX ic
RSCPP – CCPCH + RSCPOCCH – TS0
i j j
I Extra – DL =
ji
TX j jc TX j jc
RSCPP – CCPCH + RSCPOCCH – TS0
TX
I IC – DL ic jc = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
j -
F IRF ic jc
I IC – DL ic jc is the inter-carrier interference from a carrier jc to another carrier ic on the downlink, which is reduced by the
interference reduction factor F IRF ic jc defined for the pair (ic, jc).
TX i ic
TX i ic P OCCH – TS0
RSCP OCCH – TS0 = ------------------------
-
LT
TX i Term Eb Nt
L Path L L L Body L Indoor M Shadowing
L T = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
TX i
Term
G G
TX i
Term
and N 0 are defined in "Definitions and Formulas" on page 595.
Coverage Display
It is possible to colour the transmitter service areas using a unique colour per transmitter, or colour the pixels in the coverage
areas by any transmitter attribute or other criteria such as:
• Eb/Nt or C/I (dB)
Atoll calculates the Eb/Nt or C/I on each pixel of the TX i ic best server coverage area. The pixel colour depends on
the Eb/Nt or C/I level. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be
managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, a
TX ic TX ic
Eb i C i
pixel is covered if ----- Threshold or --- Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and
N t P – CCPCH I P – CCPCH
displayed with intersections between layers.
• Eb/Nt Margin or C/I Margin (dB)
Atoll calculates the Eb/Nt or C/I margin on each pixel of the TX i ic best server coverage area. The pixel colour
depends on the Eb/Nt or C/I margin value. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the
workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties).
627
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
E TXi ic C i
TX ic
For each layer, a pixel is covered if ----b- – Q P – CCPCH M P – CCPCH or ---
Req Eb Nt Req CI
– Q P – CCPCH M P – CCPCH .
N t P – CCPCH I P – CCPCH
Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
• Cell Edge Coverage Probability (%)
Atoll calculates the cell edge coverage probability on each pixel of the TX i ic best server coverage area. The pixel
colour depends on the cell edge coverage probability value. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose
visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab
TX i ic
E b
---- Req
(Prediction properties). For each layer, a pixel is covered if - Q P – CCPCH or
N t P – CCPCH
CECP
TX i ic
C
--- Req
Q P – CCPCH . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
I P – CCPCH
CECP
TX ic TX i ic
The pixels in the TX i ic coverage area where RSCP P – CCPCH Max (TAdd P – CCPCH,RSCP P – CCPCH) and ---
i Min C Req
Q DwPCH
I DwPCH
are covered and coloured according to the selected display option.
TX TX ic
TX ic i i
C i RSCP DwPCH
Where --- = ------------------------------------------
-
I DwPCH TX ic
i
N Tot – DL
TX ic
TX i ic i
P DwPCH
RSCP DwPCH = ----------------
-
LT
Where
TX i ic TX i ic TX i
I Intra – DL = RSCP DwPCH
TX i TX i
and = 0 Without Useful Signal
Ortho Term
With = 1 – F DL 1 – F JD
1 Total Noise
TX i ic TX j ic
I Extra – DL = RSCPDwPCH
ji
TX jc
RSCPDwPCH
j
TX
I IC – DL ic jc = ----------------------------------------
j -
F IRF ic jc
I IC – DL ic jc is the inter-carrier interference from a carrier jc to another carrier ic on the downlink, which is reduced by the
interference reduction factor F IRF ic jc defined for the pair (ic, jc).
628
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
TX
i Term Eb Nt
L Path L L L Body L Indoor M Shadowing
L T = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
TX
i Term
G G
TX
i Term
and N 0 are defined in "Definitions and Formulas" on page 595.
Coverage Display
It is possible to colour the transmitter service areas using a unique colour per transmitter, or colour the pixels in the coverage
areas by any transmitter attribute or other criteria such as:
• C/I (dB)
Atoll calculates the C/I on each pixel of the TX i ic best server coverage area. The pixel colour depends on the C/I
level. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as
many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, a pixel is covered if
TX i ic
C
--- Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
I DwPCH
TX ic
i
Where RSCP TCH – DL is given by:
Max
TX ic
i P TCH – DL Service
RSCP TCH – DL = -------------------------------------------
-
Model
LT
629
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX
i Term Model
Model L Path L L L Body L Indoor M Shadowing Max
LT - and P TCH – DL Service is the maximum downlink traffic power
= -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX
i Term
G G
defined for the selected service.
TX TX
Model i SA i SA
In L T , G = G DL and L = L DL are calculated according to the smart antenna modelling method used, for
TX i TX i
Max
P TCH – DL Service , if a smart antenna is available in the downlink. Otherwise, G and L are read from the main antenna
model.
Coverage Display
It is possible to colour the transmitter service areas using a unique colour per transmitter, or colour the pixels in the coverage
areas by any transmitter attribute or other criteria such as:
• DL TCH RSCP (dBm)
Atoll calculates the DL TCH RSCP on each pixel of the TX i ic best server coverage area. The pixel colour depends on
the RSCP level. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed.
There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, a pixel is
TX i ic
covered if RSCP TCH – DL Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
TX i ic
Where RSCP TCH – UL is given by:
TX i ic Term
P Max
RSCP TCH – UL = --------------
-
Model
LT
630
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
TX
i Term Model
Model L Path L L L Body L Indoor M Shadowing Term
LT = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- and P Max is the maximum uplink traffic power defined for the
TX
i Term
G G
selected terminal.
TX TX
Model i SA i SA Term
In L T ,G = G UL and L = L UL are calculated according to the smart antenna modelling method used, for P Max , if
TX i TX i
a smart antenna is available in the uplink. Otherwise, G and L are read from the main antenna model.
Coverage Display
It is possible to colour the transmitter service areas using a unique colour per transmitter, or colour the pixels in the coverage
areas by any transmitter attribute or other criteria such as:
• UL TCH RSCP (dBm)
Atoll calculates the UL TCH RSCP on each pixel of the TX i ic best server coverage area. The pixel colour depends on
the RSCP level. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed.
There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, a pixel is
TX i ic
covered if RSCP TCH – UL Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
Term
Total downlink noise is given by: N Tot – DL = RSCP TCH – DL + RSCP OCCH + N 0
All TX, c, and TS
P TCH – DL P OCCH
With RSCP TCH – DL = -------------------
- and RSCP OCCH = --------------
-
Model Model
LT LT
TX
i Term Model
Model L Path L L L Body L Indoor M Shadowing
LT = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- and P TCH – DL and P TCH – DL are respectively the downlink traffic
TX
i Term
G G
power and the other common control channel power for the selected timeslot.
631
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX TX
Model i SA i SA
In L T , G = G DL and L = L DL are calculated according to the smart antenna modelling method used, for
TX TX
Max i i
P TCH – DL Service , if a smart antenna is available in the downlink. Otherwise, G and L are read from the main antenna
model.
Max
TX i ic P TCH – DL Service
With RSCP TCH – DL = -------------------------------------------
-
Eb Nt DL
LT
TX Eb Nt
i Term DL
L Path L L
Eb Nt DL L Body L Indoor M Shadowing Max
LT - and P TCH – DL Service is the maximum downlink traffic
= -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX
i Term
G G
power defined for the selected service.
Eb Nt TX TX
DL i SA i SA
In L T , G = G DL and L = L DL are calculated according to the smart antenna modelling method used, for
Max TX i TX i
P TCH – DL Service , if a smart antenna is available in the downlink. Otherwise, G and L are read from the main antenna
model.
TX ic TX ic TX ic
i i i Term
N Tot – DL = I Intra – DL + I Extra – DL + I IC – DL ic jc + N 0
Where
TX i ic TXi TX i TX i ic TX i ic
I Intra – DL = 1 – F DL 1 – F JD + 1 – RSCP TCH – DL + RSCP OCCH
Ortho Term
TX ic
TX i ic i
P OCCH
With RSCP OCCH = ----------------------
-
Eb Nt
DL
LT
TX i ic TX j ic TX j ic
I Extra – DL = RSCPTCH – DL + RSCPOCCH
ji
TX j jc TX j jc
RSCPTCH – DL + RSCPOCCH
TX
I IC – DL ic jc = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
j -
F IRF ic jc
632
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
I IC – DL ic jc is the inter-carrier interference from a carrier jc to another carrier ic on the downlink, which is reduced by the
interference reduction factor F IRF ic jc defined for the pair (ic, jc).
Coverage Display
It is possible to colour the transmitter service areas using a unique colour per transmitter, or colour the pixels in the coverage
areas by any transmitter attribute or other criteria such as:
• Max Eb/Nt or Max C/I (dB)
Atoll calculates the Eb/Nt or C/I on each pixel of the TX i ic best server coverage area. The pixel colour depends on
the Eb/Nt or C/I level. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be
managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, a
E b TXi ic C i
TX ic
pixel is covered if ----- Threshold or --- Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed
N t TCH – DL I TCH – DL
with intersections between layers.
• Effective Eb/Nt or Effective C/I (dB)
Atoll calculates the effective Eb/Nt or C/I on each pixel of the TX i ic best server coverage area. The pixel colour
depends on the effective Eb/Nt or C/I level. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the
workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties).
E TXi ic
Min ----b-
Req
For each layer, a pixel is covered if Q TCH – DL Threshold or
N t TCH – DL
C TXi ic
Min ---
Req
Q TCH – DL Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between
I TCH – DL
layers.
• Eb/Nt Margin or C/I Margin (dB)
Atoll calculates the Eb/Nt or C/I margin on each pixel of the TX i ic best server coverage area. The pixel colour
depends on the Eb/Nt or C/I margin value. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the
workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties).
E b TX i ic C i
TX ic
For each layer, a pixel is covered if ----- – Q TCH – DL M TCH – DL or ---
Req Eb Nt Req CI
– Q TCH – DL M TCH – DL . Each
N t TCH – DL I TCH – DL
layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
• Required Power (dBm)
Atoll calculates the downlink required power on each pixel of the TX i ic best server coverage area. The pixel colour
depends on the required power level. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the
workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties).
Req
Req Req Q TCH – DL
- P Max
For each layer, a pixel is covered if P TCH – DL Threshold , where P TCH – DL = --------------------------- TCH – DL Service or
TX ic
E b
----
i
-
N t TCH – DL
Req
Req Q TCH – DL Max
P TCH – DL = -------------------------
TX i ic
P TCH – DL Service . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections
C ---
I TCH – DL
between layers.
• Required Power Margin (dB)
Atoll calculates the downlink required power margin on each pixel of the TX i ic best server coverage area. The pixel
colour depends on the required power margin value. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility
in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction
Req Max
properties). For each layer, a pixel is covered if P TCH – DL – P TCH – DL Service M arg in , where
Req Req
Req Q TCH – DL Max Req Q TCH – DL Max
P TCH – DL = ---------------------------
TX i ic
- P TCH – DL Service or P TCH – DL = -------------------------
TX i ic
P TCH – DL Service . Each layer is assigned
E b
----- C
---
N t TCH – DL I TCH – DL
a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
633
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX i Term Eb Nt UL
Eb Nt UL L Path L L L Body L Indoor M Shadowing Term
LT = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- and P Max is the maximum power defined for the selected
TX i
Term
G G
terminal.
Eb Nt UL TX i TX i
SA SA Term
In L T ,G = G UL and L = L UL are calculated according to the smart antenna modelling method used, for P Max ,
TX i TX i
if a smart antenna is available in the uplink. Otherwise, G and L are read from the main antenna model.
Coverage Display
It is possible to colour the transmitter service areas using a unique colour per transmitter, or colour the pixels in the coverage
areas by any transmitter attribute or other criteria such as:
• Max Eb/Nt or Max C/I (dB)
Atoll calculates the Eb/Nt or C/I on each pixel of the TX i ic best server coverage area. The pixel colour depends on
the Eb/Nt or C/I level. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be
managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, a
TX i ic TX i ic
Eb
pixel is covered if ----- Threshold or ---
C
Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed
N t TCH – UL I TCH – UL
with intersections between layers.
• Effective Eb/Nt or Effective C/I (dB)
634
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
Atoll calculates the effective Eb/Nt or C/I on each pixel of the TX i ic best server coverage area. The pixel colour
depends on the effective Eb/Nt or C/I level. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the
workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties).
E b TXi ic
Min -----
Req
For each layer, a pixel is covered if Q TCH – UL Threshold or
N t TCH – UL
C TXi ic
Min ---
Req
Q TCH – UL Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between
I TCH – UL
layers.
• Eb/Nt Margin or C/I Margin (dB)
Atoll calculates the Eb/Nt or C/I margin on each pixel of the TX i ic best server coverage area. The pixel colour
depends on the Eb/Nt or C/I margin value. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the
workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties).
E TXi ic C i
TX ic
For each layer, a pixel is covered if ----b- – Q TCH – UL M TCH – UL or ---
Req Eb Nt Req CI
– Q TCH – UL M TCH – UL . Each
N t TCH – UL I TCH – UL
layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
• Required Power (dBm)
Atoll calculates the uplink required power on each pixel of the TX i ic best server coverage area. The pixel colour
depends on the required power level. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the
workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties).
Req
Term Term Q TCH – UL
For each layer, a pixel is covered if P Req Threshold , where - P Term
P Req = --------------------------- or
TX i ic Max
E
----b-
N t TCH – UL
Req
Term Q TCH – UL
- P Term
P Req = ------------------------- Max . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
TX ic
i
C ---
I TCH – UL
635
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
E b
---- or ---
C
- , and display the pixels where both downlink and uplink Eb/Nt or C/I are above the required quality
N t TCH – UL I TCH – UL
thresholds.
The coverage predictions are calculated for a given set of a terminal type, a mobility type, a service, a carrier, and for all the
6 timeslots. The best servers for the coverage predictions are determined according to the P-CCPCH RSCP from the carrier
with the highest P-CCPCH power, or from the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters.
Afterwards, the coverage predictions are calculated for the selected carrier. If the selected carrier does not exist on a
transmitter, there will not be any pixels covered by this transmitter. If you perform these coverage predictions for the best
carrier, Atoll calculates the Eb/Nt or C/I considering:
• the preferred carrier of the selected service, or
• the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, if no preferred carrier is defined for the service, or
• the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters.
The pixels in the TX i ic coverage area are covered and coloured according to the selected display option if all the following
conditions are satisfied:
TX i ic
Min
• RSCP P – CCPCH Max (TAdd P – CCPCH,RSCP P – CCPCH)
TX i ic
Req
• RSCP TCH – DL RSCP TCH – DL Service Mobility
TX i ic
Req
• RSCP TCH – UL RSCP TCH – UL Service Mobility
TX ic TX ic
E b i
---- C i
Q TCH – DL or ---
Req Req
• - Q TCH – DL for any of the 6 timeslots
N t TCH – DL I TCH – DL
TX i ic TX i ic
E b
---- Q TCH – UL or ---
Req C Req
• - Q TCH – UL for any of the 6 timeslots
N t TCH – UL I TCH – UL
TX jc TX jc
RSCPTCH – DL + RSCPOCCH
j j
TX ic TX ic
RSCPTCH – DL + RSCPOCCH + ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
j j TX
I C2C TX i TX j = j -
F IRF ic jc
TX j
TX j ic TX j jc
TX ic
j P TCH – DL TX jc
j P TCH – DL
Where RSCP TCH – DL = ---------------------------
- and RSCP TCH – DL = ---------------------------
- using a smart antenna, and
LT LT
TX j ic TX j TX j jc TX j
TX ic P TCH – DL G Ant TX jc P TCH – DL G Ant
j
RSCP TCH – DL - ---------- and RSCP TCHj – DL = -------------------
= ------------------- - ---------- otherwise.
LT TX
j LT TX j
L Ant L Ant
636
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
TX ic TX TX jc TX
j j j j
TX ic P OCCH G Ant TX jc P OCCH G Ant
j j
RSCP OCCH = ---------------- ----------
TX
- ---------- otherwise.
and RSCP OCCH = --------------- TX
LT j LT j
L Ant L Ant
TX TX
ITU526 – 5 j i
L T = L Path L TX L RX
ITU526 – 5
L Path is the path loss calculated using the ITU526-5 propagation model without antenna loss.
TX j
G Ant is the main antenna gain.
Atoll calculates the cell to cell interference on each pixel of the TX i ic best server coverage area. The pixel colour depends
on the cell to cell interference level. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be
managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, a pixel is
covered if I C2C TX i TX j Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
TX ic
i
• RSCP P – CCPCH TAdd P – CCPCH Mobility ,
637
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX ic
E C
----
i Req
• - Q HS – PDSCH , and
N t HS – PDSCH
TX i ic
E C
----
• - is enough to select a bearer for the pixels.
N t HS – PDSCH
For more information on HSDPA bearer selection, see "HSDPA Part of the Algorithm" on page 622.
Coverage Display
It is possible to colour the pixels in the coverage areas by criteria such as:
TX ic
i
• Min HS-PDSCH RSCP: On each pixel, Atoll calculates RSCP HS – SCCH for all timeslots and selects the lowest value.
TX i ic
• Average HS-PDSCH RSCP: On each pixel, Atoll calculates RSCP HS – SCCH for all timeslots and calculates the average of
these values.
TX i ic
• Max HS-PDSCH RSCP: On each pixel, Atoll calculates RSCP HS – SCCH for all timeslots and selects the highest value.
TX i ic
E
• Min HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt: On each pixel, Atoll calculates ----C- for all timeslots and selects the lowest value.
N t HS – PDSCH
TX i ic
E
• Average HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt: On each pixel, Atoll calculates ----C- for all timeslots and calculates the average
N t HS – PDSCH
of these values.
E TXi ic
• Max HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt: On each pixel, Atoll calculates ----C- for all timeslots and selects the highest value.
N t HS – PDSCH
• Peak RLC Throughput: After selecting the bearer, Atoll reads the corresponding RLC peak throughput. This is the
highest throughput that the bearer can provide on each pixel. The pixel colour depends on the peak RLC throughput.
Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many
layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed
with intersections between layers.
MAC
• Peak MAC Throughput: Atoll displays the Peak MAC throughput ( R DL ) provided on each pixel. The Peak MAC
throughput is calculated as follows:
MAC
R DL = S Block 500
Where, S Block is the transport block size (in kbits) of the selected HSDPA bearer; it is defined for each HSDPA bearer
in the related table. The value 500 corresponds to the number of blocks per second (there are 4 blocks per TTI and
2000
2000 TTI in one second, i.e ------------ blocks per second).
4
The pixel colour depends on the Peak MAC throughput. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose
visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab
(Prediction properties). Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
E b TXi ic TS
• Max DL A-DPCH Eb/Nt: Atoll displays the A-DPCH Eb/Nt at the receiver ( ----- ) for the best server and the
N t TCH – DL – Max
selected timeslot. No power control is performed as in simulations. Here, Atoll determines downlink traffic channel
quality at the receiver for a maximum traffic channel power allowed for the best server.
E b TX i ic TS
• Max UL A-DPCH Eb/Nt: Atoll displays the A-DPCH Eb/Nt at the best server ( ----- ) and the selected
N t TCH – UL – Max
timeslot. No power control is performed as in simulations. Here, Atoll determines uplink traffic channel quality for the
maximum terminal power allowed.
TX i ic
• HS-SCCH Power: On each pixel, Atoll calculates P HS – SCCH for the selected timeslot.
TX i ic
• HS-SCCH RSCP: On each pixel, Atoll calculates RSCP HS – SCCH for the selected timeslot.
E TX i ic
• HS-SCCH Ec/Nt: On each pixel, Atoll calculates ----c- for the selected timeslot.
N t HS – SCCH
Mi
• HS-SICH Power: On each pixel, Atoll calculates P HS – SICH for the selected timeslot.
638
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
M
i
• HS-SICH RSCP: On each pixel, Atoll calculates RSCP HS – SICH for the selected timeslot.
M
E i
• HS-SICH Ec/Nt: On each pixel, Atoll calculates ----c- for the selected timeslot.
N t HS – SICH
TX ic
i
• HS-PDSCH RSCP: On each pixel, Atoll calculates RSCP HS – PDSCH for the selected timeslot.
E c TXi ic
• HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt: On each pixel, Atoll calculates ----- for the selected timeslot.
N t HS – PDSCH
H V
Where G Beam , L Beam , and L Beam are the gains, horizontal, and vertical attenuations of the beams of the GOB. In words, the
best beam is the one among all the beams of a GOB that has the highest difference between gain, and horizontal and vertical
SA SA SA SA
attenuations. The gains and losses of the GOB ( G DL , G UL , L DL , and L UL ) are determined from the selected best beam.
The following example shows how Atoll calculates the GOB gains and losses.
Example:
Let us assume a GOB with 5 beams that have the same vertical patterns, and whose horizontal patterns are pointed towards
different directions as shown in the figure below:
639
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Let us assume that all the beams and the main antenna have the same 18 dBi gain, and the vertical attenuation at the user
location is 15 dB, which is also the same for all the beams because we assume that the vertical patterns are the same.
If the user is located at = 70 azimuth, as shown in the figure below, Atoll determines the best beam, which has the
highest gain towards , as follows:
Transmitter
In our example, the total gain of the beam at 60° is the highest. Therefore this beam is selected as the best beam.
If this beam has been selected in the downlink,
SA SA H V
G DL = 18 dB and L DL = L Beam + L Beam = 17.21 dB
640
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
The following example shows how Atoll calculates the adaptive beam gains and losses.
Example:
Let us assume an adaptive beam smart antenna selected for a transmitter along with a main antenna. Let us assume that the
adaptive beam and the main antenna have the same 18 dBi gain, and the vertical attenuation at the user location is 15 dB.
If the user is located at = 60 azimuth, as shown in the figure below:
Transmitter
If the adaptive beam smart antenna is selected in the downlink, the gain and losses of the adaptive beam at are:
SA SA H V
G DL = 18 dB and L DL = L Beam + L Beam = 15 dB
If the adaptive beam smart antenna is selected in the uplink, the gain and losses of the adaptive beam at are:
SA SA H V
G UL = 18 dB and L UL = L Beam + L Beam = 15 dB
H
In fact, as the ideal beam steering algorithm steers the beam towards the served user, L Beam = 0 . These values are used in
interference calculation to determine the downlink interfering signal due to transmission towards the served user, as well as
for calculating the uplink interfering signals received at transmitter when decoding signal received from the served user.
You can assign a spreading angle to each clutter class in your document. Atoll reads the clutter class in which the served user
is located to determine the spreading angle. Different clutter types have different spreading effects on the propagation of
radio waves. Urban and dense urban clutter types introduce more multipath and spread the signal at a wider angle than an
open or rural clutte type.
Once you have assigned the spreading angles to clutter classes, you can enter the C/I gains and their cumulative probabilities
for each spreading angle, in the smart antenna equipment based on the statistical model. For each smart antenna equipment
SA
based on statistical modelling, you can set a probability threshold, TProb .
To find the smart antenna gain, Atoll determines the clutter class of the served user, it reads the spreading angle from the
clutter class properties, it reads the probability threshold from the smart antenna properties, and reads the smart antenna C/
SA
I gain defined for the Probability = 1 – TProb corresponding to the spreading angle.
The following example shows how Atoll calculates the statistical C/I gains and losses.
641
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Example:
Let us assume that the served user is located at a an urban clutter class with Spread = 10 . The smart antenna equipment
SA SA
has TProb = 80 % . Atoll will read the smart antenna C/I gain G for Prob = 20 % . If a gain for the exact probability
value of 20% is not defined, Atoll linearly interpolates the gain value from the two surrounding values.
SA SA SA
If G Prob = 19%
= 4.6298 dB and G Prob = 20.4%
= 4.7196 dB , then G Prob = 20%
= 4.6941 dB
The smart antenna gains are the same for uplink and downlink. Their are no losses for this type of smart antenna equipment.
Negative values of C/I gains are considered as losses.
Example:
Let us assume a smart antenna equipment using adaptive beam modelling. The angular step defined for the simulations is
Step = 30 . Therefore, the results are calculated for each point located at regular steps of 30 , i.e., 12 points. The downlink
traffic power at the served user (W) with the adaptive beam pointing in the user’s direction is P W . The downlink traffic
powers, using the same adaptive beam pointed towards the served user, at the 12 other points are also determined.
642
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
The resulting geographic distribution is formed by linearly joining the obtained results.
The accuracy of the geographic distribution depends upon the value of the angular step. A radiation pattern created at a 1
step will be much more accurate than one created at 45 , for example. But, the latter will be computed 45 times faster than
the first. The value of the Angular Step should be the best possible compromise between calculation speed and accuracy.
643
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
The uplink load and the downlink traffic power at a given pixel are determined by calculating the angle of that pixel with
respect to the transmitter azimuth, and reading the uplink load and downlink traffic power from the geographic distribution
results. If an exact value for the angle is not available, the load and power are determined using linear interpolation for the
given angle between two available values.
For example, the figure below shows the distribution of downlink traffic power and uplink traffic load results from a
DL – 315 UL – 315
simulation. For a pixel located at = 315 , the downlink traffic power P Traffic and the uplink load X are read
DL – 315 UL – 315
from these results. In this example, P Traffic 30 dBm , and X = 2.75 % .
For each pixel, Atoll determines the downlink traffic powers and the uplink loads from all the transmitters.
Figure 9.8: Geographic Distribution of downlink traffic power and uplink load
Two options, available in Global Parameters, may be used to calculate Nt: option Without useful signal or option Total noise.
Therefore, we have:
644
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
TXi
-----
Ec- BTS RSCP P – CCPCH ic
Nt ic P – CCPCH = --------------------------------------------------------------------
DL
- for the total noise option,
N Tot ic
And
TXi
----- BTS RSCP P – CCPCH ic
ic
Ec-
= ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- for the without useful signal option.
Nt P – CCPCH DL TXi
N Tot ic – 1 – BTS RSCP P – CCPCH ic
With
DL DL DL DL Term
N Tot ic = I Intra ic + I Extra ic + I Inter – Carrier ic jc + N 0
DL
I Inter – Carrier ic jc is the inter-carrier interference from a carrier jc to another carrier ic on the downlink, which is reduced
by the interference reduction factor F IRF ic jc defined for the pair (ic, jc).
TXi P P – CCPCH ic
RSCP P – CCPCH ic = -------------------------------
-
LT
CI
L Path L TX L Term L Body L Indoor M Shadowing
L T = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
G TX G Term
Term
BTS , and N 0 are defined in "Definitions and Formulas" on page 595.
Let us assume the following notation: CQI P – CCPCH corresponds to the P-CCPCH CQI. CQIP – CCPCH is deduced from the table
CQIP – CCPCH = f ------ ic . This table is defined for the terminal reception equipment and the specified mobility.
Ec
Nt P – CCPCH
P HSDPA ic is the power available for HSDPA on the carrier ic. This parameter is a user-defined cell input.
Therefore, we have:
P HS – PDSCH ic = P HSDPA ic – n HS – SCCH P HS – SCCH ic
n HS – SCCH is the number of HS-SCCH channels and P HS – SCCH ic is the HS-SCCH power on carrier ic. It is either fixed by the
Req
user. P HS – SCCH ic is controlled so as to reach the required HS-SCCH Ec/Nt ( ------ ic
Ec
). It is specified in mobility
Nt HS – SCCH
properties.
We have:
TXi
----- BTS RSCP HS – SCCH ic
ic
Ec-
= ----------------------------------------------------------
- for the total noise option,
Nt HS – SCCH DL
N Tot ic
And
TXi
----- BTS RSCP HS – SCCH ic
ic
Ec-
= --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- for the without useful signal option.
Nt HS – SCCH DL DL Term TXi
N Tot ic – 1 – F Ortho 1 – F JD BTS RSCP HS – SCCH ic
With
DL DL DL DL Term
N Tot ic = I Intra ic + I Extra ic + I Inter – Carrier ic jc + N 0
DL
I Inter – Carrier ic jc is the inter-carrier interference from a carrier jc to another carrier ic on the downlink, which is reduced
by the interference reduction factor F IRF ic jc defined for the pair (ic, jc).
645
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
TXi P HS – SCCH ic
RSCP HS – SCCH ic = -------------------------------
-
LT
and
CI
L Path L TX L Term L Body L Indoor M Shadowing
L T = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
G TX G Term
Term Term
BTS , F Ortho , F JD and N 0 are defined in "Definitions and Formulas" on page 595.
Therefore,
Req
-----
Ec-
ic N Tot ic
DL
TXi Nt HS – SCCH
RSCP HS – SCCH ic = ------------------------------------------------------------------- L T for the total noise option,
BTS
And
Req
-----
Ec-
ic
DL
N Tot ic
TXi Nt HS – SCCH
RSCP HS – SCCH ic = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Req
L T for the without useful signal option.
1 + 1 – F DL 1 – F Term ----- Ec-
ic
BTS Ortho JD Nt HS – SCCH
Therefore, we have:
TXi
-----
Ec- BTS RSCP HS – PDSCH ic
Nt ic HS – PDSCH
= -------------------------------------------------------------
- for the total noise option,
DL
N Tot ic
And
TXi
----- BTS RSCP HS – PDSCH ic
ic
Ec-
= -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- for the without useful signal option.
Nt HS – PDSCH TXi
DL DL Term RSCP HS – PDSCH ic
N Tot ic – 1 – F Ortho 1 – F JD BTS ---------------------------------------------
n
Here, Atoll works on the assumption that five HS-PDSCH channels are used (n=5).
With
DL DL DL DL Term
N Tot ic = I Intra ic + I Extra ic + I Inter – Carrier ic jc + N 0
DL
I Inter – Carrier ic jc is the inter-carrier interference from a carrier jc to another carrier ic on the downlink, which is reduced
by the interference reduction factor F IRF ic jc defined for the pair (ic, jc).
TXi P HS – PDSCH ic
RSCP HS – PDSCH ic = ----------------------------------
-
LT
And
CI
L Path L TX L Term L Body L Indoor M Shadowing
L T = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
G TX G Term
Term Term
BTS , F Ortho , F JD and N 0 are defined in "Definitions and Formulas" on page 595.
The best bearer that can be used depends on the HS-PDSCH CQI. Let us assume the following notation: CQI HS – PDSCH
corresponds to the HS-PDSCH CQI. Atoll deduces CQI HS – PDSCH as follows:
646
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
Bearer Selection
Knowing the HS-PDSCH CQI, Atoll finds the best bearer that can be used in the table Best Bearer=f(HS-PDSCH CQI). This table
is defined for the terminal reception equipment and the specified mobility.
Then, Atoll checks if best bearer characteristics are compliant with cell and user equipment category capabilities. Atoll selects
the bearer which is the best bearer compliant with the cell and UE category capabilities.
Bearer characteristics are provided in the HSDPA Bearer table. Assuming the best bearer = 23. Characteristics of this bearer
are:
• Transport block size: 9719 Bytes
• Number of HS-PDSCH channels used: 7
• 16QAM modulation used: Yes
• Peak Throughput: 4.48 Mb/s
647
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Once the bearer selected, Atoll knows the number of HS-PDSCH channels. Therefore, when the method “Without useful
signal” is used, Atoll can recalculate the HS-PDSCH quality with the real number of HS-PDSCH channels (A default value of 5
was taken into account in the first HS-PDSCH quality calculation).
P HSDPA ic is the power available for HSDPA on the carrier ic. This parameter is a user-defined cell input.
Therefore, we have:
P HS – PDSCH ic = P HSDPA ic – n HS – SCCH P HS – SCCH ic
n HS – SCCH is the number of HS-SCCH channels and P HS – SCCH ic is the HS-SCCH power on carrier ic fixed by the user. The HS-
Req
SCCH power is controlled so as to reach the required HS-SCCH Ec/Nt ( ------ ic
Ec
) specified in mobility properties.
Nt HS – SCCH
We have:
TXi
-----
Ec- BTS RSCP HS – SCCH ic
Nt ic HS – SCCH = ----------------------------------------------------------
DL
- for the total noise option,
N Tot ic
And
TXi
-----
Ec- BTS RSCP HS – SCCH ic
Nt ic HS – SCCH
= --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- for the without useful signal option.
DL DL Term TXi
N Tot ic – 1 – F Ortho 1 – F JD BTS RSCP HS – SCCH ic
With
DL DL DL DL Term
N Tot ic = I Intra ic + I Extra ic + I Inter – Carrier ic jc + N 0
DL
I Inter – Carrier ic jc is the inter-carrier interference from a carrier jc to another carrier ic on the downlink, which is reduced
by the interference reduction factor F IRF ic jc defined for the pair (ic, jc).
TXi P HS – SCCH ic
RSCP HS – SCCH ic = -------------------------------
-
LT
i
And
CI
L Path L TX L Term L Body L Indoor M Shadowing
L T = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
G TX G Term
Term Term
BTS , F Ortho , F JD and N 0 are defined in "Definitions and Formulas" on page 595.
Therefore,
648
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
Req
-----
Ec-
DL
HS – SCCH N Tot ic
ic
Nt
P HS – SCCH ic = ------------------------------------------------------------------- L T for the total noise option,
BTS
And
Req
-----
Ec- DL
Nt ic HS – SCCH N Tot ic
P HS – SCCH ic = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Req
L T for the without useful signal option.
1 + 1 – F DL 1 – F Term ----- Ec-
ic
BTS Ortho JD Nt HS – SCCH
Two options, available in Global parameters, may be used to calculate Nt: option Without useful signal or option Total noise.
We have:
TXi
-----
Ec- BTS RSCP HS – PDSCH ic
Nt ic HS – PDSCH
= -------------------------------------------------------------
- for the total noise option,
DL
N Tot ic
And
TXi
----- BTS RSCP HS – PDSCH ic
ic
Ec-
= -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- for the without useful signal option.
Nt HS – PDSCH TXi
DL DL Term RSCP HS – PDSCH ic
N Tot ic – 1 – F Ortho 1 – F JD BTS ---------------------------------------------
n
Here, Atoll works on the assumption that five HS-PDSCH channels are used (n=5). Then, it deduces the HS-PDSCH CQI and the
bearer to be used. Once the bearer selected, Atoll exactly knows the number of HS-PDSCH channels and recalculates the HS-
PDSCH quality with the real number of HS-PDSCH channels.
With
DL DL DL DL Term
N Tot ic = I Intra ic + I Extra ic + I Inter – Carrier ic jc + N 0
DL
I Inter – Carrier ic jc is the inter-carrier interference from a carrier jc to another carrier ic on the downlink, which is reduced
by the interference reduction factor F IRF ic jc defined for the pair (ic, jc).
TXi P HS – PDSCH ic
RSCP HS – PDSCH ic = ----------------------------------
-
LT
And
CI
L Path L TX L Term L Body L Indoor M Shadowing
L T = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
G TX G Term
Term Term
BTS , F Ortho , F JD and N 0 are defined in "Definitions and Formulas" on page 595.
Let us assume the following notation: CQIHS – PDSCH corresponds to the HS-PDSCH CQI. CQI HS – PDSCH is deduced from the
table CQI HS – PDSCH = f ------ ic . This table is defined for the terminal reception equipment and the specified
Ec
Nt HS – PDSCH
mobility.
Bearer Selection
649
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
The above formula implies that two transmitters facing each other will have a shorter weighted distance between them than
the real distance, and two transmitters pointing in opposite directions will have a greater weighted distance.
650
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
Atoll assigns the same carriers to cells of each co-site Atoll assigns different carriers to cells of each co-site
transmitter. transmitter.
Atoll assigns one master carrier to each transmitter TXi, such that the master carrier of TXi is different from the master carrier
of TXj, where TXj belongs to the list of "near" transmitters. The master carrier is one of the cells defined in the transmitter. All
the other cells of the transmitter are assigned the carrier-type "slave".
For transmitters that support the N-frequency mode and have master carriers properly assigned, Atoll performs the
neighbour and scrambling code allocation for the master carrier only.
If no focus zone exists in the .atl document, Atoll takes into account the computation
zone.
651
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
• Force co-site cells as neighbours: This option enables you to force cells located on the same site as reference cell
in the candidate neighbour list. This constraint can be weighted among the others and ranks the neighbours
through the importance field.
• Force adjacent cells as neighbours: This option enables you to force cells geographically adjacent to the reference
cell in the candidate neighbour list. This constraint can be weighted among the others and ranks the neighbours
through the importance field.
• When this option is selected, adjacent cells are sorted and listed from the most
adjacent to the least, depending on the above criterion. Adjacency is relative to the
number of pixels satisfying the criterion.
• Force symmetry: This option enables you to force the reciprocity of a neighbourhood link. Therefore, if the
reference cell is a candidate neighbour of another cell, the later will be considered as candidate neighbour of the
reference cell.
If the neighbours list of a transmitter is full, the reference transmitter will not be added
as a neighbour of that transmitter and that transmitter will be removed from the
reference transmitter’s neighbours list. You can force Atoll to keep that transmitter in
the reference transmitter’s neighbours list by adding the following option in the Atoll.ini
file:
[Neighbours]
DoNotDeleteSymmetrics = 1
• Force exceptional pairs: This option enables you to force/forbid some neighbourhood relationships. Therefore,
you may force/forbid a cell to be candidate neighbour of the reference cell.
• Delete existing neighbours: When selecting the Delete existing neighbours option, Atoll deletes all the current
neighbours and carries out a new neighbour allocation. If not selected, the existing neighbours are kept.
3. If the Use Coverage Conditions check box is selected, there must be an overlapping zone ( S A S B ) with a given cell
edge coverage probability. Otherwise, only the distance criterion is taken into account.
The overlapping zone ( S A S B ) is defined as follows:
N-frequency handover is a baton handover. Assuming that the reference cell A and the candidate cell B are located
inside a continuous layer of cells:
SA is the area where the cell A is the best serving cell.
• The P-CCPCH RSCP from the cell A is greater than the P-CCPCH RSCP T_Add.
• The P-CCPCH RSCP from the cell A is greater than the P-CCPCH RSCP from all other cells.
652
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
SB is the area where the cell B can enter the handover set.
• The P-CCPCH RSCP from the cell B is greater than the P-CCPCH RSCP T_Drop.
• The P-CCPCH RSCP from the cell B is greater than the P-CCPCH RSCP from the cell A minus the P-CCPCH RSCP
T_Comp.
SA SB
- 100 ), which it compares with the % minimum covered
Atoll calculates the percentage of covered area ( -----------------
SA
area. If this percentage is not exceeded, the candidate neighbour B is discarded.
The coverage condition can be weighted among the others and ranks the neighbours through the importance field.
: Overlapping Coverages
653
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Importance values are used by the allocation algorithm to rank the neighbours according to the allocation reason.
Atoll lists all neighbours and sorts them by importance value so as to eliminate some of them from the neighbour list
if the maximum number of neighbours to be allocated to each transmitter is exceeded.
If we consider the case for which there are 15 candidate neighbours and the maximum number of neighbours to be
allocated to the reference cell is 8. Among these 15 candidate neighbours, only 8 (having the highest importance
values) will be allocated to the reference cell. Note that maximum numbers of neighbours can be defined at the cell
level (properties dialogue or Cells table). If defined there, this value is taken into account instead of the default one
available in the dialogue.
In the Results part, Atoll provides the list of neighbours, the number of neighbours, and the maximum number of neighbours
allowed for each cell. In addition, it indicates the importance (in %) of each neighbour and the allocation reason, i.e., a
neighbour may be marked as exceptional pair, co-site, adjacent, coverage, or symmetric. For neighbours accepted for co-site,
adjacency, and coverage reasons, Atoll displays the percentage of area that satisfies the coverage conditions and the
corresponding surface area (km2), the percentage of area that satisfies the adjacency conditions and the corresponding
surface area (km2). Finally, if cells have previous allocations in the list, neighbours are marked as existing.
• By default, the automatic neighbour allocation compares the defined Max inter-
site distance with the effective inter-transmitter distance. As a consequence,
there can be cases where the real distance between assigned neighbours is
higher than the Max inter-site distance, because the effective distance is
smaller. You can force Atoll to compare the Max inter-site distance with the real
inter-site distance by adding the following lines in Atoll.ini:
[Neighbours]
RealInterSiteDistanceCondition=1
• By default, the neighbour importance calculated with respect to distance is based
on the global Max inter-site distance setting for all neighbour candidates. As a
consequence, there can be cases where the calculated importance is different
when the global Max inter-site distance is modified. To avoid that, you can force
Atoll to prioritise the individual distances between reference transmitters and
their respective neighbour candidates by adding the following lines in Atoll.ini:
[Neighbours]
CandidatesMaxDistanceInImportanceCalculation=1
654
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
655
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Except the case of forced neighbours (importance = 100%), priority assigned to each neighbourhood cause is determined
using the Importance Function (IF). The IF considers the following factors for calculating the importance:
• The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d-
Di = 1 – ----------
d max
d is the effective distance (in m). It corresponds to the real inter-transmitter distance weighted by the azimuths of
antennas. For information on the effective distance calculation, see "Appendix: Calculation of the Inter-Transmitter
Distance" on page 656.
d max is the maximum distance between the reference transmitter and a possible neighbour.
Where:
Delta(X)=Max(X)-Min(X)
• Set Min(Di) and Max(Di) to 0% if you do not want to take into account the distance
factor in the importance calculation.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors do not overlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum and maximum importance fields, neighbours will be ranked in this order:
co-site neighbours, adjacent neighbours, and neighbours allocated based on coverage
overlapping.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
• The default value of Min(O) = 1% ensures that neighbours selected for symmetry will
have an importance greater than 0%. With a value of Min(O) = 0%, neighbours
selected for symmetry will have an importance field greater than 0% only if there is
some coverage overlapping.
d = D 1 + x cos – x cos
where x = 0.3% so that the maximum D variation does not exceed 1%.
656
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
The formula above implies that two cells facing each other will have a smaller effective distance than the real physical
distance. It is this effective distance that will be taken into account rather than the real distance.
If no focus zone exists in the .atl document, Atoll takes into account the computation
zone.
657
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Reuse Distance: It is a constraint on the allocation of scrambling codes. The same scarmbling code or SYNC_DL code
cannot be allocated to two sites that are not farther apart than the reuse distance. Scrambling code reuse distance
can be defined for each cell in the cell properties. If this value is not defined, Atoll uses the default reuse distance
defined in the Automatic Scrambling Code and SYNC_DL code Allocation dialogue. The reuse distance constraint is
used for clustered and distributed per cell allocation strategies.
3. The carrier for which you want to perform the automatic allocation
Carrier: You can select "All" or a specific carrier. If you select "All", Atoll allocates the same scrambling code to each
carrier of a transmitter.
4. The number of scrambling codes per SYNC_DL code
Each SYNC_DL code corresponds to a group of scrambling codes as defined in 3GPP specifications. 3GPP specifications
define 32 SYNC_DL codes with 4 corresponding scrambling codes each (SYNC_DL codes are numbered from 0 to 31).
However, it is possible to define a different value (e.g. if you set the number of scrambling codes per SYNC_DL codes
to 2, scrambling codes will be distributed among 64 SYNC_DL codes).
When the allocation is based on a Distributed strategy (Distributed per Cell or Distributed per Site), this parameter can
also be used to define the interval between the scrambling codes assigned to cells on a same site. The defined interval
is applied by adding the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[PSC]
ConstantStep=1
For more information about setting options in the atoll.ini file, see the Administrator Manual.
5. Atoll can use a maximum of codes
Use a Maximum of Codes: If you choose to use a maximum of codes, Atoll will try to spread the allocated spectrum of
scrambling codes as much as possible.
6. Existing allocation
Delete All Codes: If you select this option, Atoll will delete any existing scrambling code allocation and perform a fresh
allocation. Otherwise, Atoll keeps the existing allocation.
Same carriers must be assigned different scrambling codes. Different carriers of the same
site can be assigned the same scrambling code. Therefore, cells of a transmitter (i.e.
different carriers) are assigned the same scrambling code, if the scrambling code
domains associated with the carriers have a common cluster or enough codes in one
cluster.
• Distributed per site: This strategy allocates a group of adjacent clusters, i.e., consecutive SYNC_DL codes, to each site,
then one cluster, or SYNC_DL code, to each transmitter on the site according to its azimuth, and finally one scrambling
code from each cluster to each cell of each transmitter. The number of adjacent clusters, or consecutive SYNC_DL
codes, depends on the number of transmitters per site. When all the sites have been allocated adjacent clusters, and
there are still sites remaining to be allocated, Atoll reuses the adjacent clusters as far as possible at another site.
In the Results table, Atoll only displays scrambling codes and SYNC_DL codes allocated to TBA cells.
658
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
• The third order neighbours (options “Existing neighbours” and “Third Order”),
• The cells with distance from the TBA cell less than the reuse distance,
• The cells that make exceptional pairs with the TBA cell.
Additional constraints are considered when:
• The cell and its near cells are neighbours of a same GSM transmitter (only if the Transmitters folder of the GSM.atl
document is accessible in the TD-SCDMA.atl document),
• The neighbour cells cannot share the same cluster (for the "Distributed per site" allocation strategy only).
These constraints have a certain weight taken into account to determine the TBA cell priority during the allocation process
and the cost of the scrambling code plan. During the allocation, Atoll tries to assign different scrambling codes to the TBA cell
and its near cells. If it respects all the constraints, the cost of the scrambling code plan is 0. When a cell has too many
constraints and there are not anymore scrambling codes available, Atoll breaks the constraint with the lowest cost so as to
generate the scrambling code plan with the lowest cost. For information on the cost generated by each constraint, see "Cell
Priority" on page 660.
Atoll processes TBA cells according to their priority. It allocates scrambling codes starting with the highest priority cell and its
near cells, and continuing with the lowest priority cells not allocated yet and their near cells. For information on calculating
cell priority, see "Cell Priority" on page 660.
All sites which have constraints with the studied site are referred to as near sites.
Atoll assigns a cluster, i.e., a SYNC_DL code, to each site, starting with the highest priority site and its near sites, and continuing
with the lowest priority sites not allocated yet and their near sites. When all the clusters have been allocated but there are
still sites remaining, Atoll reuses the clusters at the other sites. When the Reuse Distance option is selected, the algorithm
reuses the clusters as soon as the reuse distance is exceeded. Otherwise, when the option is not selected, the algorithm tries
to assign reused clusters as spaced out as possible.
Then, Atoll allocates a scrambling code from the cluster to each cell located on the sites (codes belong to the assigned
clusters). It starts with the highest priority cell and its near cells and goes on with the lowest priority cells not allocated yet
and their near cells.
For information on calculating site priority, see "Site Priority" on page 663. For information on calculating cell priority, see
"Cell Priority" on page 660.
All sites which have constraints with the studied site are referred to as near sites.
Atoll assigns a group of adjacent clusters, i.e., SYNC_DL codes, to each site, starting with the highest priority site and its near
sites, and continuing with the lowest priority sites not allocated yet and their near sites. When all the sites have been allocated
adjacent clusters, and there are still sites remaining to be allocated, Atoll reuses the adjacent clusters at other sites. When
the Reuse Distance option is selected, the algorithm reuses the clusters as soon as the reuse distance is exceeded. Otherwise,
when the option is not selected, the algorithm tries to assign reused clusters as spaced out as possible.
Then, Atoll assigns each cluster of the group to each transmitter of the site according to the transmitter azimuth and selected
neighbourhood constraints (options "Neighbours in Other Clusters" and "Secondary Neighbours in Other Clusters"). Then,
Atoll allocates a scrambling code to each cell located on the transmitters (codes belong to the assigned clusters). It starts with
the highest priority cell and its near cells and goes on with the lowest priority cells not allocated yet and their near cells.
For information on calculating site priority, see "Site Priority" on page 663. or information on calculating cell priority, see "Cell
Priority" on page 660.
659
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
If the number of scrambling codes per cluster is set to 4 and the maximum number of transmitters per site in the network is
3, the theoretical groups of adjacent clusters will be:
Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 ... Group 11
Cluster 0 Cluster 3 Cluster 6 Cluster 9 Cluster 30
Cluster 1 Cluster 4 Cluster 7 Cluster 10 ... Cluster 31
Cluster 2 Cluster 5 Cluster 8 Cluster 11
If no domain is assigned to cells, Atoll can use all these groups for the allocation. On the other hand, if a domain is used, Atoll
compares adjacent clusters actually available in the assigned domain with the theoretical groups and only keeps adjacent
clusters common with the theoretical groups.
If we have a domain comprising 12 clusters: clusters 1 to 8 and clusters 12 to 15. In this case, Atoll will use the following groups
of adjacent clusters:
• Group 2 with cluster 3, 4 and 5
• Group 3 with cluster 6, 7 and 8
• Group 6 with cluster 12, 13 and 14
The clusters 1, 2 and 15 will not be used.
If a domain does not contain any adjacent clusters, Atoll displays a warning message in the Event Viewer.
When cells, transmitters or sites have the same priority, processing is based on an
alphanumeric order.
With
C i U = C i Dist + C i EP + C i N + C i N 2G + C i Cluster + C i CN
660
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
When no domain is assigned to cells, 128 scrambling codes are available and we have:
C i Dom = 0
When domains of scrambling codes are assigned to cells, each unavailable scrambling code generates a cost. The higher the
number of codes available in the domain, the less will be the cost due to this criterion. The cost is given as:
C i Dom = 128 – Number of scrambling codes in the domain
• Distance Criterion
The constraint level of any cell i depends on the number of cells (j) present within a radius of "reuse distance" from its centre.
The total cost due to the distance constraint is given as:
C i Dist = Cj Dist i
j
Each cell j within the reuse distance generates a cost given as:
C j Dist i = w d ij c dis tan ce
Where
w d ij is a weight depending on the distance between i and j. This weight is inversely proportional to the inter-cell distance.
For a reuse distance of 2000m, the weight for an inter-cell distance of 1500m is 0.25, the weight for co-site cells is 1 and the
weight for two cells spaced out 2100m apart is 0.
c dis tan ce is the cost of the distance constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
C i EP = cEP i – j
j
Where
c EP is the cost of the exceptional pair constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
• Neighbourhood Criterion
The constraint level of any cell i depends on the number of its neighbour cells j, the number of second order neighbours k and
the number of third order neighbours l.
Let’s consider the following neighbour schema:
Where
I j is the importance of the neighbour cell j.
c N1 is the cost of the first order neighbour constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
661
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Because two first order neighbours must not have the same scrambling code, Atoll considers the cost created by two first
order neighbours to be each other.
C j N1 i + C j N1 i
C j – j N1 i = -----------------------------------------------------
-
2
Each second order neighbour cell k generates a cost given as:
C k N2 i = Max ( C j N1 i C k N1 j , C j N1 i C k N1 j ) c N2
Where
c N2 is the cost of the second order neighbour constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
Because two second order neighbours must not have the same scrambling code, Atoll considers the cost created by two
second order neighbours to be each other.
C k N2 i + C k N2 i
C k – k N2 i = -------------------------------------------------------
-
2
Each third order neighbour cell l generates a cost given as:
C N1 i C k N1 j C l N1 k C j N1 i C k N1 j C l N1 k
C l N3 i = Max j c N3
C j N1 i C k N1 j C l N1 k C j N1 i C k N1 j C l N1 k
Where
c N3 is the cost of the third order neighbour constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
Because two third order neighbours must not have the same scrambling code, Atoll considers the cost created by two third
order neighbours to be each other.
C l N3 i + C l N3 i
C l – l N3 i = -----------------------------------------------------
-
2
Atoll considers the highest cost of both links when a neighbour relation is symmetric and
the importance value is different.
And
C k N2 i = Max (C j N1 i C k N1 j ,C j N1 k C i N1 j ) c N2
I + 1 – ----------- di – j
i–j Max
d CN
C i CN = ----------------------------------------- c CN
2
j
Where
c CN is the cost of the close neighbour constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
662
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
C i N 2G = cN2G j – Tx2G
j
Where
cN is the cost of the GSM neighbour constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
2G
• Cluster Criterion
When the "Distributed per Site" allocation strategy is used, you can consider additional constraints on allocated clusters (one
cell, its first order neighbours and its second order neighbours must be assigned scrambling codes from different clusters). In
this case, the constraint level of any cell i depends on the number of first and second order neighbours, j and k. The total cost
due to the cluster constraint is given as:
Where
c Cluster is the cost of the cluster constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
With C Tx U = Max C U and C Dom = 128 – Number of scrambling codes in the domain
i Tx i Tx
Here, the domain available for the transmitter is the intersection of domains assigned to cells of the transmitter. The domain
constraint is mandatory and cannot be broken.
With C S U = Max C U and C Dom = 128 – Number of scrambling codes in the domain
Tx S Tx S
Here, the domain considered for the site is the intersection of domains available for transmitters of the site. The domain
constraint is mandatory and cannot be broken.
663
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Let Site0, Site1, Site2, and Site3 be four sites, with 3 transmitters each using carrier 0, to whom scrambling codes have to be
allocated out of 6 clusters of 4 scrambling codes. This implies that the domain of scrambling codes for the four sites is from 0
to 23 (cluster 0 to cluster 5). The reuse distance is supposed to be less than the inter-site distance. Only co-site neighbours
exist.
The following section shows the results of each combination of options with explanations where necessary.
664
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
665
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
666
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
667
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
As indicated in the table below, the neighbour importance depends on the distance and on the neighbourhood cause;
this value varies between 0 to 100%.
Where d is the effective distance between the TD-SCDMA reference cell and the GSM neighbour and d max is the
maximum inter-site distance.
In the Results part, Atoll provides the list of neighbours, the number of neighbours and the maximum number of neighbours
allowed for each cell. In addition, it indicates the importance (in %) of each neighbour and the allocation reason. Therefore, a
neighbour may be marked as exceptional pair, co-site, or distance. For neighbours accepted for distance reasons, Atoll
displays the distance from the reference cell (m). Finally, if cells have previous allocations in the list, neighbours are marked
as existing.
3. There must be an overlapping zone ( S A S B ) with a given cell edge coverage probability.
• 1st case: SA is the area where the cell A is the best serving cell of the TD-SCDMA network.
• The pilot signal received from A is greater than the minimum pilot signal level and is the highest one.
• The margin is set to 0 dB.
• 2nd case: The margin is different from 0 dB and SA is the area where:
• The pilot signal level received from A exceeds the user-defined minimum pilot signal level and is within a
margin from the highest signal level.
Two different cases may be considered for SB:
• 1st case: SB is the area where the cell B is the best serving transmitter of the GSM network.
In this case, the margin must be set to 0 dB.
• The signal level received from B on the BCCH TRX type exceeds the user-defined minimum threshold and is the
highest one.
• 2nd case: The margin is different from 0 dB and SB is the area where:
• The signal level received from B on the BCCH TRX type exceeds the user-defined minimum threshold and is
within a margin from the best BCCH signal level.
668
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks
SA SB
- 100 ) and compares this value to the % minimum covered
Atoll calculates the percentage of covered area ( -----------------
SA
area. If this percentage is less than the minimum, the candidate neighbour B is discarded.
Candidate neighbours fulfilling coverage conditions are sorted in descending order with respect to percentage of
covered area.
4. The importance of neighbours.
Next, Atoll calculates the importance of the automatically allocated neighbours. Atoll sorts the neighbours by
decreasing importance in order to keep the ones with high importance. If the maximum number of neighbours to be
allocated to each cell is exceeded, Atoll keeps the ones with high importance.
As indicated in the table below, the neighbour importance depends on the distance and on the neighbourhood cause;
this value varies between 0 to 100%.
Except the case of forced neighbours (importance = 100%), priority assigned to each neighbourhood cause is determined
using the Importance Function (IF). The IF considers the following factors for calculating the importance:
• The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d-
Di = 1 – ----------
d max
d is the effective distance (in m). It corresponds to the real inter-transmitter distance weighted by the azimuths of
antennas. For information on the effective distance calculation, see "Appendix: Calculation of the Inter-Transmitter
Distance" on page 656.
d max is the maximum distance between the reference transmitter and a possible neighbour.
Where
Delta(X)=Max(X)-Min(X)
669
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 9: TD-SCDMA Networks ©Forsk 2015
• Set Min(Di) and Max(Di) to 0% if you do not want to take into account the distance
factor in the importance calculation.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors do not overlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum and maximum importance fields, neighbours will be ranked in this order:
co-site neighbours and neighbours allocated based on coverage overlapping.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
In the Results part, Atoll provides the list of neighbours, the number of neighbours and the maximum number of neighbours
allowed for each cell. In addition, it indicates the importance (in %) of each neighbour and the allocation reason. Therefore, a
neighbour may be marked as exceptional pair, co-site or coverage. For neighbours accepted for co-site and coverage reasons,
Atoll displays the percentage of area meeting the coverage conditions and the corresponding surface area (km2). Finally, if
cells have previous allocations in the list, neighbours are marked as existing.
9.9.1.3 Appendices
9.9.1.3.1 Delete Existing Neighbours Option
As explained above, Atoll keeps the existing inter-technology neighbours when the Delete existing neighbours option is not
selected. If a new TBA cell i is created in TD-SCDMA.atl, you can run the automatic allocation with the Delete existing
neighbours option not selected, in order to allocate neighbours to the new cell i only.
If you change some allocation criteria (e.g., increase the maximum number of neighbours or create a new GSM TBC
transmitter) and start a new allocation without selecting the Delete existing neighbours option, Atoll examines the neighbour
list of the TBA cells and checks allocation criteria only if there is still space left in their neighbour lists. A new GSM TBC
transmitter can enter the TBA cell neighbour list if allocation criteria are satisfied. It will be the first one in the neighbour list.
670
Chapter 10
WiMAX BWA Networks
672
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
• All the calculations are performed on TBC (to be calculated) transmitters. For the
definition of TBC transmitters please refer to "Path Loss Matrices" on page 103.
• A cell refers to a transmitter-carrier (TX-c) pair. The cell being studied during a
calculation is referred to as TXi(ic) in this chapter.
• All the calculation algorithms in this section are described for two types of cells.
• A studied cell (represented by the subscript "i") comprising the studied transmitter
TXi and its carrier ic. It is the cell which is currently the focus of the calculation. For
example, a victim cell when calculating the interference it is receiving from other
cells.
• Other cells (represented by the subscript "j") comprising the other transmitter TXj
and its carrier jc. The other cells in the network can be interfering cells (downlink)
or the serving cells of interfering mobiles (uplink).
• All the calculation algorithms in this section are described for two types of receivers.
• Mi: A pixel (coverage predictions), subscriber (calculations on subscriber lists), or
mobile (Monte Carlo simulations) covered/served by the studied cell TXi(ic).
• Mj: A mobile (Monte Carlo simulations) covered/served by any other cell TXj(jc).
• Logarithms used in this chapter (Log function) are base-10 unless stated otherwise.
10.1 Definitions
This table lists the input to calculations, coverage predictions, and simulations.
UL
O Fixed Global parameter SD Fixed time-domain overhead (UL)
DL
O Variable Global parameter % Variable time-domain overhead (DL)
UL
O Variable Global parameter % Variable time-domain overhead (UL)
673
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
TDD
D RTG Global parameter ms Receive Time Guard (TDD only)
674
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
Array
G SA Smart antenna parameter dB Array gain offset
Combining
G SA Smart antenna parameter dB Power combining gain offset
Div
G SA Smart antenna parameter dB Diversity gain (cross-polarisation)
675
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
N Users – Max Cell parameter None Maximum number of users per cell
Number of users connected to the
N Users – DL Cell parameter None
cell in downlink
Number of users connected to the
N Users – UL Cell parameter None
cell in uplink
SU DL Cell parameter % Downlink segmentation usage ratio
Inter – Tech
NR UL Cell parameter dB Inter-technology uplink noise rise
676
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
DL
G Div Clutter parameter dB Additional downlink diversity gain
677
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
a. Any interfering cell whose signal to thermal noise ratio is less than CNR Min will be discarded.
TX i ic – TX j jc
TX i ic – TX j jc W CCO
r CCO ----------------------------------- None Co-channel overlap ratio
TX i ic
W Channel
TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
r ACO r ACO + r ACO None Adjacent channel overlap ratio
L H
TDD
TX i ic – TX j jc
r DL – Frame
----------------------- if interferer uses a TDD frequency band and victim uses None FDD – TDD overlap ratio
r FDD – TDD 100
an FDD frequency band, 1 otherwise
TX ic
– f ACS – FB
i
TX ic – TX jc TX ic – TX jc ---------------------------- TX ic – TX jc
r i j i
+ r ACO
j
10
10 r i j
CCO FDD – TDD
TX i ic TX j jc
TX i ic – TX j jc if W Channel W Channel
rO None Total overlap ratio
TX ic
– f ACS – FB
i
TX ic
TX ic – TX jc TX ic – TX jc ---------------------------
- TX ic – TX jc W i
r i j i
+ r ACO
j
10
10
i j Channel
---------------------
CCO r FDD – TDD TX j jc
W Channel
TX i ic TX j jc
if W Channel W Channel
678
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
TX
L Path L Model + L Ant
i dB Path loss
TX i TX i Mi Mi
L Path + L + L Indoor + M Shadowing – Model – G +L –G
L Total Mi Mi
dB Total losses
+ L Ant + L Body
TX i ic
TX ic N SCa – Preamble Preamble
TX i ic i
n 0 + 10 Log F Sampling ---------------------------------
- f Segment dBm Preamble thermal noise for a cell
n 0 – Preamble TX i ic
N SCa – Total
Preamble 1
f Segment --- None Preamble segmenting factor
3
TX i ic TX i ic Mi
n Preamble n 0 – Preamble + nf dBm Preamble noise for a cell
679
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX ic
TXj jc n
i
TX i ic IPreamble -----------------------------
Preamble
---------------------------- Inter – Tech Inter – Tech
10
C Preamble – 10 Log 10 I + 10 + NR DL
TX i ic 10 DL
CINR Preamble All TXj jc dB Preamble C/(I+N) for a cell
Mi
DL
+ G Div – Preamble + G Div
TX ic
TXj jc n
i
TX ic IPreamble -----------------------------
Preamble
10 Log +I + NR Inter – Tech
i ---------------------------
- Inter – Tech 10 dBm Preamble Total Noise (I+N) for a cell
I + N Preamble 10
10
DL
+ 10
DL
All TXj jc
TX i ic TX i ic TX i TX i
Array Combining Div dBm Pilot EIRP of a cell
EIRP Pilot P Pilot + G + G SA + G SA + G SA – L
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
P Traffic P Preamble – P Traffic dBm Traffic transmission power of a cell
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
P Pilot P Preamble – P Pilot dBm Pilot transmission power of a cell
3 PSG + 2 SSG
f Segment – DL 1 without and --------------------------------------------- with downlink segmentation None Downlink segmenting factor
15
TX i ic TX i ic Mi
n DL n 0 – DL + nf dBm Downlink noise for a cell
680
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
TX jc TX jc
I j I
j
----------------------------
Non – AAS
- -------------------
Idle
Monte Carlo Simulations: 10 Log 10
10 10
+ 10
TX jc
I j
------------------
AAS
-
without smart antennas, or 10 Log 10
TX j jc 10 Total interference generated by an
with smart
I Total dBm
interfering cell
antennas
TX jc TX jc TX jc
I j I
j
I
j
----------------------------
Non – AAS
-
Idle
------------------- -------------------
AAS
Coverage Predictions: 10 Log 10
10 10 10
+ 10 + 10
Monte Carlo Simulations:
TX j jc Mi Mi Mi Mi
EIRP Traffic – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body
TX j jc Coverage Predictions: Traffic interference power of an
I Traffic dBm
TX j jc interfering cell
EIRP Traffic – L Path – M Shadowing – Model + M Shadowing – C I – L Indoor
Mi Mi Mi Mi
+G –L – L Ant – L Body
Monte Carlo Simulations:
TX jc M M M M
j i i i i
EIRP Pilot – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body
TX j jc Coverage Predictions: Pilot interfering power of an
I Pilot dBm
TX jc interfering cell
j
EIRP Pilot – L Path – M Shadowing – Model + M Shadowing – C I – L Indoor
Mi Mi Mi Mi
+G –L – L Ant – L Body
TX j jc TX j jc TX j TX j
EIRP Traffic P Traffic + G –L dBm Traffic EIRP of an interfering cell
TX j jc TX j jc TX j TX j
EIRP Pilot P Pilot + G –L dBm Pilot EIRP of an interfering cell
TX jc
I j TX j jc
TX jc TX jc -------------------
Traffic
- N SCa – Data
10 Log TL DL
j
1 – AU DL
j
10
10
------------------------
-+
TX j jc
Interference from the loaded part of
N SCa – Used
TX j jc dBm
the frame transmitted using the
I Non – AAS TX j jc transmitter antenna of an interfering
I Pilot TX j jc
------------------- N cell
1 – -------------------------
10 SCa – Data
10
TX j jc
N SCa – Used
Monte Carlo Simulations:
TX j jc Mi Mi Mi Mi
EIRP AAS – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body
TX j jc Coverage Predictions: Interference power of an interfering
I AAS dBm
TX j jc cell transmitted using smart antenna
EIRP AAS – L Path – M Shadowing – Model + M Shadowing – C I – L Indoor
Mi Mi Mi Mi
+G –L – L Ant – L Body
TX jc TX jc TX TX Traffic EIRP of an interfering cell
j j j j dBm
EIRP AAS P Traffic + G –L using smart antenna
681
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX jc
I j TX j jc
Interference from the empty part of
TX j jc
TX jc
Idle – Pilot-
----------------------------- the frame transmitted using the
N
10 Log 1 – TL DL 10 1 – ------------------------
SCa – Data
j 10
I Idle - dBm
TX j jc transmitter antenna of an interfering
N SCa – Used cell
TX k
P
--------------------------------------
-
Downlink inter-technology
Inter – Tech DL – Rec
I DL F TX i ic TX k
W
interference
TX k ICP DL
TX i ic TX i ic
TX i ic C Pilot – n DL
CNR Pilot dB Pilot C/N for a cell
TX i ic Mi
DL
With MIMO: CNR Pilot + G Div – DL + G Div
TXj jc TX i ic
TX i ic IDL n DL
------------------ + I Inter – Tech + -------------------- + NR Inter – Tech
- -
C Traffic – 10 Log 10 10
TX i ic 10 DL 10 DL
CINR Traffic All TX j jc dB Traffic C/(I+N) for a cell
TX i ic Mi
DL
With MIMO: CINR Traffic + G Div – DL + G Div
TX jc TX ic
I j n DL
i
TX i ic ------------------
DL
- ---------------------
+I + NR
10 Inter – Tech 10 Inter – Tech
C Pilot – 10 Log 10 +10
TX i ic DL DL
CINR Pilot All TXj jc dB Pilot C/(I+N) for a cell
TX ic M
i i DL
With MIMO: CINR Pilot + G Div – DL + G Div
TX jc TX ic
I j n DL
i
TX i ic ------------------
DL
- ---------------------
I + N DL 10 Log 10 10 + I Inter – Tech + 10 10 + NR Inter – Tech dBm Traffic Total Noise (I+N) for a cell
DL DL
All TXj jc
682
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
n UL n 0 – UL + nf dBm Uplink noise for a cell
TX i ic – TX j jc
SC Com Uplink segmentation collision
------------------
- None
p Collision – UL TX i ic
SC probability
IMj TX i ic
UL non-seg M n UL
TX i ic
--------------------------------------------i --------------------- TX i ic
10 Non-segmented zone uplink noise at
Inter – Tech
NR UL 10 Log 10 10 + 10 + NR UL – n UL dB
a cell without smart antennas
All M j
All TX j jc
IMj TX i ic
UL n UL
TX i ic
seg M
--------------------- TX i ic
i Segmented zone uplink noise at a
10 Log
10
--------------------------------- Inter – Tech
NRUL – Seg 10 10 + 10
+ NR UL – n UL dB
cell without smart antennas
All M j
All TX
j
jc
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
I + N UL NR UL + n UL or NR UL – Seg + n UL dBm Total Noise (I+N) for a cell
2
I UL + n I Uplink noise at a cell with smart
NR UL --------------------------------- dB
2
n I antenna
683
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX i ic 1
------------------- ms Useful symbol duration
D Sym – Useful TX i ic
F
TX i ic
TX i ic r CP
D CP --------------
- ms Cyclic prefix duration
F
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
D Symbol D Sym – Useful + D CP ms Symbol duration
D Used
Floor -----------------
TX i ic Frame Frame duration in terms of symbol
- SD
N SD – Used Frame TXi ic durations
D Symbol
684
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
TX ic
R DL
i
= M
i DL Total downlink cell resources, i.e.,
TXi ic PZ O Variable
Floor N SD – DL Subframe N SCa – Data 1 – --------------------
DL Symbols the number of symbols in the
TX ic
-
i 100 downlink subframe
N Sym – DL Subframe
If DL:UL ratio is defined in percentage:
TX ic
RoundDown N SD – Used Frame 1 – r DL – Frame – O Fixed
i TDD UL
TX i ic
R UL = M
i UL Total uplink cell resources, i.e., the
TXi ic PZ UL
O Variable
TX i ic
Floor N SD – UL Subframe N SCa – Data 1 – --------------------- Symbols number of symbols in the uplink
100 subframe
N Sym – UL Subframe
Max
With MIMO (AMS): Mi = Mi 1 + f SU – MIMO G SU – MIMO – 1
B DL B DL
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
if CNR Preamble T AMS or CINR Preamble T AMS
Mi Mi TX i ic
Cap P – DL CTP P – DL TL DL – Max kbps Downlink peak MAC cell capacity
M M M
Cap P – DL 1 – BLER BDL
i i i kbps Downlink effective MAC cell capacity
Cap E – DL
Mi
Mi Mif TP – Scaling Mi
Cap A – DL Cap E – DL ------------------------
- – TP Offset kbps Downlink application cell capacity
100
Mi
M Cap P – DL Downlink peak MAC throughput per
i
PUTP P – DL -----------------------
- kbps
TX i ic user
N Users – DL
685
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
M
Mi i Downlink application throughput per
f TP – Scaling
Mi Mi
kbps
PUTP A – DL PUTP E – DL ------------------------
- – TPOffset user
100
TX ic
i
R UL Mi
B UL
---------------------------------
D Frame
TX i ic
R UL Mi
B TX ic
UL i
For proportional fair schedulers: --------------------------------- G MUG – UL
D Frame
With MIMO (SU-MIMO):
Max
Mi M = M 1 + f SU – MIMO G SU – MIMO – 1 Uplink peak MAC channel
CTP P – UL i
B UL
i
B UL kbps
throughput
Max
With MIMO (AMS): Mi = Mi 1 + f SU – MIMO G SU – MIMO – 1
B B
UL UL
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
if CNR Preamble T AMS or CINR Preamble T AMS
With MIMO (MU-MIMO) in uplink throughput coverage predictions:
TX i ic
R UL Mi
B UL TX ic
--------------------------------- G MUi – MIMO
D Frame
Mi M M
Cap P – UL 1 – BLER B UL
i i kbps Uplink effective MAC cell capacity
Cap E – UL
M
M i
i Mif TP – Scaling Mi
kbps Uplink application cell capacity
Cap A – UL Cap E – UL ------------------------- – TP Offset
100
M
i
Mi N SC – UL
Mi CTP P – UL ----------------- M kbps
Uplink peak MAC allocated
ABTP P – UL i bandwidth throughput
PZ UL
N SC
Cap Mi M
Min -----------------------
- ABTP P –i UL
M
i P – UL Uplink peak MAC throughput per
PUTP P – UL TXi ic kbps
user
N Users – UL
Cap Mi M
Min -----------------------
- ABTP E –i UL
M
i E – UL Uplink effective MAC throughput per
PUTP E – UL TX i ic kbps
user
N Users – UL
686
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
Sel
M
Sel TPD Min – UL
i Resources allocated to a mobile to
M
i --------------------------- None satisfy its minimum throughput
R Min – UL M
Sel
i demand in uplink
CTP P – UL
Sel
TX i ic Mi Remaining downlink cell resources
TX i ic
R Rem – DL
TL DL – Max – R Min – DL None after allocation for minimum
Sel throughput demands
Mi
Sel
TX i ic Mi Remaining uplink cell resources after
TX i ic
R Rem – UL
TL DL – Max – R Min – UL None allocation for minimum throughput
Sel demands
M
i
Sel
M
i
Sel TPD Rem – UL Remaining resource demand for a
M
i ---------------------------- None
RD Rem – UL M
Sel mobile in uplink
i
CTP P – UL
687
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Sel TX ic
i
Mi R Rem – DL
Proportional Fair: Min RD Rem – DL --------------------
-
N
Sel
Mi
TX i ic
RD Rem – DL
Proportional Demand: R Eff – Rem – DL ----------------------------------
Sel
-
Mi
RDRem – DL
Sel
M
i
Sel Resources allocated to a mobile to
M TX i ic
i
Mi
Sel
R QoS – DL None satisfy its maximum throughput
R Max – DL
Biased (QoS Class): Min RD Rem – DL -------------------- demand in downlink
N QoS
Sel
Mi
TPD Rem – DL
Max Aggregate Throughput: ---------------------------
Sel
-
Mi
CTP P – DL
Sel TX i ic
Mi R Rem – DL
Round Robin: Min RD Rem – DL --------------------
-
N
Sel TX i ic
Mi R Rem – UL
Proportional Fair: Min RD Rem – UL --------------------
-
N
Sel
Mi
TX i ic
RD Rem – UL
Proportional Demand: R Eff – Rem – UL ----------------------------------
Sel
-
Mi
RDRem – UL
Sel
M
i
Sel Resources allocated to a mobile to
M TX i ic
i
R QoS – UL
Sel
Mi None satisfy its maximum throughput
R Max – UL
Biased (QoS Class): Min RD Rem – UL -------------------
- demand in uplink
N QoS
Sel
Mi
TPD Rem – UL
Max Aggregate Throughput: ---------------------------
Sel
-
Mi
CTP P – UL
Sel TX i ic
Mi R Rem – UL
Round Robin: Min RD Rem – UL --------------------
-
N
Sel
TXi ic Mi Effective remaining downlink
TX i ic
R Eff – Rem – DL
Min R Rem – DL
RD Rem – DL
None resources in a cell
M
Sel (Proportional Demand)
i
Sel
TX i ic Mi Effective remaining uplink resources
TX ic
i
R Eff – Rem – UL
Min R Rem – UL
RD Rem – UL
None in a cell
Sel
Mi (Proportional Demand)
r
1 QoS
N QoS --- Remaining downlink cell resources
TX i ic
TX i ic R Rem – DL ------------------------------------------------------- None
after allocation for minimum
R QoS – DL r throughput demands for a QoS class
1 QoS
N QoS --- (Biased (QoS Class))
All QoS
688
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
Mi
Sel
Mi
Sel
R Max – DL CTP E – DL
Sel
M i Site
Max 1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Site Site backhaul overflow ratio in
BHOF DL None
Sel Sel downlink
Mi Mi
Site
TP BH – DL – R Min – DL CTP E – DL
Sel
M i Site
Mi
Sel Sel
Mi
Max – UL
R CTP E – UL
Sel
Site
Max 1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Site M
i
BHOF DL None Site backhaul overflow ratio in uplink
Sel Sel
M M
Site i i
TP BH – UL – R Min – UL CTP E – UL
M
Sel
i
Site
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
Mi
Sel
Mi
Sel R
Max – DL CTP P – DL
Sel Sel R Min – DL CTP P – DL + ------------------------------------------------ Site
Total resources assigned to a mobile
Mi Mi BHOF DL None in downlink
TL DL = R DL ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sel (Downlink traffic load of the mobile)
Mi
CTP P – DL
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
Mi
Sel
Mi
Sel R
Max – UL CTP P – UL
Sel Sel R Min – UL CTP P – UL + ------------------------------------------------ Site
-
Total resources assigned to a mobile
Mi Mi BHOF UL None in uplink
TL UL = R UL ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sel (Uplink traffic load of the mobile)
Mi
CTP P – UL
Sel Sel
Sel
Mi M
i Mi Downlink effective MAC user
UTP E – DL UTP P – DL 1 – BLER B DL kbps
throughput
Sel
Sel Mi
M Sel Sel Downlink application user
i Mif TP – Scaling Mi kbps
UTP A – DL UTP E – DL ------------------------- – TP Offset throughput
100
Sel Sel Sel
Mi Mi Mi
kbps Uplink peak MAC user throughput
UTP P – UL R UL CTP P – UL
Sel Sel
Sel
Mi Mi Mi Uplink effective MAC user
UTP E – UL UTP P – UL 1 – BLER B UL kbps
throughput
Sel
Sel Sel Mi Sel
Mi Mif TP – Scaling Mi kbps Uplink application user throughput
UTP A – UL UTP E – UL ------------------------
- – TP Offset
100
689
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
M M M M
i i i i
L ,G , L Ant , and L Body are not used in the calculations performed for the profile view.
690
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
Atoll uses parameters entered in the Condition tab of the coverage prediction properties dialogue to determine coverage
areas to display. There are three possibilities.
• All Servers
The coverage area of each cell TXi(ic) corresponds to the pixels where.
TX ic TX ic TX ic
MinimumThreshold C Preamble or L Total or L Path MaximumThreshold
i i i
TX ic TX ic TX ic
MinimumThreshold C Preamble or L Total or L Path MaximumThreshold
i i i
AND
TX i ic TX j jc
C Preamble Best C Preamble – M
ji
Where M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received preamble signal level from TXi(ic) is the highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received preamble signal level from TXi(ic) is either the highest or
within a 2 dB margin from the highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received preamble signal level from TXi(ic) is 2 dB higher than the
received preamble signal levels from the cells which are 2nd best servers.
• Second Best Signal Level and a Margin
The coverage area of each cell TXi(ic) corresponds to the pixels where.
TX ic TX ic TX ic
MinimumThreshold C Preamble or L Total or L Path MaximumThreshold
i i i
AND
691
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX ic nd TX jc
C Preamble 2 Best C Preamble – M
i j
ji
Where M is the specified margin (dB). The 2nd Best function considers the second highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received preamble signal level from TXi(ic) is the second highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received preamble signal level from TXi(ic) is either the second highest
or within a 2 dB margin from the second highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received preamble signal level from TXi(ic) is 2 dB higher than the
received preamble signal levels from the cells which are 3rd best servers.
A pixel of a coverage area is coloured if the calculated value of the selected display parameter is greater than or equal to the
defined thresholds values. Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map.
It is possible to display the coverage predictions with colours depending on any transmitter or cell attribute, and other criteria
such as:
• Signal Level (dBm, dBµV, dBµV/m)
• Best Signal Level (dBm, dBµV, dBµV/m): Where cell coverage areas overlap, Atoll keeps the highest value of the signal
level.
• Path Loss (dB)
• Total Losses (dB)
• Best Server Path Loss (dB): Where cell coverage areas overlap, Atoll determines the best cell (i.e., the cell with the
highest preamble signal level) and evaluates the path loss from this cell.
• Best Server Total Losses (dB): Where cell coverage areas overlap, Atoll determines the best cell (i.e., the cell with the
highest preamble signal level) and evaluates the total losses from this cell.
• Number of Servers: Atoll evaluates the number of cells that cover a pixel (i.e., the pixel falls within the coverage areas
of these cells).
692
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
These coverage predictions are all best server coverage predictions, i.e., the coverage area of each cell comprises the pixels
where the cell is the best server. Best server for each pixel is calculated as explained in "Best Server Determination" on
page 713.
A pixel of a coverage area is coloured if the calculated value of the selected display type parameter is greater than or equal to
the defined thresholds values. Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map.
It is possible to display the Effective Signal Analysis (DL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following display
options:
• Preamble Signal Level (DL) (dBm)
• Pilot Signal Level (DL) (dBm)
• Traffic Signal Level (DL) (dBm)
• Preamble C/N Level (DL) (dB)
• Pilot C/N Level (DL) (dB)
• Traffic C/N Level (DL) (dB)
• Permutation Zone (DL)
• Segment
It is possible to display the Effective Signal Analysis (UL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following display
options:
• Signal Level (UL) (dBm)
• C/N Level (UL) (dB)
• Permutation Zone (UL)
693
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
These coverage predictions are all best server coverage predictions, i.e., the coverage area of each cell comprises the pixels
where the cell is the best server. Best server for each pixel is calculated as explained in "Best Server Determination" on
page 713.
A pixel of a coverage area is coloured if the calculated value of the selected display type parameter is greater than or equal to
the defined thresholds values. Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map.
It is possible to display the Coverage by C/(I+N) Level (DL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following display
options:
• Preamble C/(I+N) Level (DL) (dB)
• Preamble Total Noise (I+N) (DL) (dBm)
• Traffic C/(I+N) Level (DL) (dB)
• Traffic Total Noise (I+N) (DL) (dBm)
• Pilot C/(I+N) Level (DL) (dB)
It is possible to display the Service Area Analysis (DL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following display
options:
• Bearer (DL)
• Modulation (DL): Modulation used by the bearer
• Service
It is possible to display the Coverage by Throughput (DL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following display
options:
• Peak MAC Channel Throughput (DL) (kbps)
• Effective MAC Channel Throughput (DL) (kbps)
• Application Channel Throughput (DL) (kbps)
• Peak MAC Cell Capacity (DL) (kbps)
• Effective MAC Cell Capacity (DL) (kbps)
• Application Cell Capacity (DL) (kbps)
• Peak MAC Throughput per User (DL) (kbps)
• Effective MAC Throughput per User (DL) (kbps)
• Application Throughput per User (DL) (kbps)
It is possible to display the Coverage by Quality Indicator (DL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following
display options:
• Quality indicators available in the document (Quality Indicators table): Atoll calculates the downlink traffic C/(I+N)
levels received from the best serving cells at each pixel of their coverage areas. From the C/(I+N), Atoll determines the
best bearer available on each pixel. Then, for the calculated C/(I+N) and bearer, it determines the value of the selected
quality indicator from the quality graphs defined in the WiMAX equipment of the selected terminal.
It is possible to display the Coverage by C/(I+N) Level (UL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following display
options:
• C/(I+N) Level (UL) (dB)
• Total Noise (I+N) (UL) (dBm)
• Allocated Bandwidth (UL) (No. of Subchannels)
• C/(I+N) Level for 1 Subchannel (UL) (dB)
• Transmission Power (UL) (dBm)
It is possible to display the Service Area Analysis (UL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following display
options:
• Bearer (UL)
• Modulation (UL): Modulation used by the bearer
• Service
It is possible to display the Coverage by Throughput (UL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following display
options:
• Peak MAC Channel Throughput (UL) (kbps)
• Effective MAC Channel Throughput (UL) (kbps)
• Application Channel Throughput (UL) (kbps)
• Peak MAC Cell Capacity (UL) (kbps)
• Effective MAC Cell Capacity (UL) (kbps)
• Application Cell Capacity (UL) (kbps)
• Peak MAC Allocated Bandwidth Throughput (UL) (kbps)
• Effective MAC Allocated Bandwidth Throughput (UL) (kbps)
694
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
Atoll uses parameters entered in the Condition tab of the coverage prediction properties dialogue to determine coverage
areas to display. It is possible to determine the coverage area based on the best signal level. The coverage area of each cell
TXi(ic) corresponds to the pixels where:
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX j jc
MinimumThreshold C Preamble or L Total or L Path MaximumThreshold AND C Preamble Best C Preamble – M
ji
Where M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received preamble signal level from TXi(ic) is the highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received preamble signal level from TXi(ic) is either the highest or within
a 2 dB margin from the highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received preamble signal level from TXi(ic) is 2 dB higher than the
received preamble signal levels from the cells which are 2nd best servers.
A pixel of a coverage area is coloured if the calculated value of the selected display parameter is greater than or equal to the
defined thresholds values. Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map.
It is possible to display the coverage predictions with colours per cell or:
• Number of interferers
• Number of interferers per cell
695
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Atoll calculates the following parameters for each subscriber in the list that has a serving base station assigned and whose
Lock Status is set to None or Server.
• Azimuth ( ): Angle with respect to the north for pointing the subscriber terminal antenna towards its serving base
station.
• Mechanical Downtilt ( ): Angle with respect to the horizontal for pointing the subscriber terminal antenna towards
its serving base station.
Atoll calculates the remaining parameters for each subscriber in the list that has a serving base station assigned, using the
properties of the default terminal and service. For more information, see:
• "Preamble Signal Level Calculation" on page 707.
• "Preamble C/(I+N) Calculation" on page 712.
• "Permutation Zone Selection" on page 714.
• "Traffic and Pilot Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 715.
• "Traffic and Pilot C/(I+N) and Bearer Calculation (DL)" on page 727.
• "Traffic Signal Level Calculation (UL)" on page 729.
• "Noise Rise Calculation (UL)" on page 733.
• "Traffic C/(I+N) and Bearer Calculation (UL)" on page 737.
• "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, Allocated Bandwidth Throughput, and Per-User Throughput Calculation" on
page 743.
Atoll determines the total number of users attempting connection in each simulation
based on the Poisson distribution. This may lead to slight variations in the total numbers
of users in different simulations. To have the same total number of users in each
simulation of a group, add the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[Simulation]
RandomTotalUsers=0
10.3.4.1.1 Simulations Based on User Profile Traffic Maps and Subscriber Lists
User profile environment based traffic maps: Each pixel of the map is assigned an environment class which contains a list of
user profiles with an associated mobility type and a given density, i.e., number of users of a user profile per km².
User profile traffic maps: Each polygon or line of the map is assigned a density of users with a given user profile and mobility
type. If the map is composed of points, each point is assigned a number of users with given user profile and mobility type.
Fixed subscribers listed in subscriber lists have a user profile assigned to each of them.
User profiles model the behaviour of the different user categories. Each user profile contains a list of services and parameters
describing how these services are accessed by the user.
The number of users of each user profile is calculated from the surface area (SEnv) of each environment class map (or each
polygon) and the user profile density (DUP).
N Users = S Env D UP
696
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
• In case of user profile traffic maps composed of lines, the number of users of each
user profile is calculated from the line length (L) and the user profile density (DUP)
(users per km): N Users = L D UP
• The number of users is a direct input when a user profile traffic map is composed of
points.
Atoll calculates the probability for a user being active at a given instant in the uplink and in the downlink according to the
service usage characteristics described in the user profiles, i.e., the number of voice calls or data sessions, the average
duration of each voice call, or the volume of the data transfer in the uplink and the downlink in each data session.
N Call D Call
Calculation of the service usage duration per hour ( p 0 : probability of an active call): p 0 = ----------------------------
-
3600
The activity status of each user depends on the activity periods during the call, i.e., the uplink and downlink activity
UL DL
factors defined for the voice type service v, f Act and f Act .
UL UL DL
Probability of being active in the uplink: p Active = f Act 1 – f Act
DL DL UL
Probability of being active in the downlink: p Active = f Act 1 – f Act
UL + DL UL DL
Probability of being active in the uplink and downlink both: p Active = f Act f Act
UL UL
Number of users active in the uplink: n v – Active = n v p Active
DL DL
Number of users active in the downlink: n v – Active = n v p Active
UL + DL UL + DL
Number of users active in the uplink and downlink both: n v – Active = n v p Active
Therefore, a user can be either active on both links, inactive on both links, active on UL only, or active on DL only.
UL DL
UL N Session V 8 DL N Session V 8
Calculation of activity probabilities: f = ------------------------------------------
- and f = ------------------------------------------
-
UL DL
TP Average 3600 TP Average 3600
UL DL
Probability of being inactive: p Inactive = 1 – f 1 – f
697
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
UL UL DL
Probability of being active in the uplink: p Active = f 1 – f
DL DL UL
Probability of being active in the downlink: p Active = f 1 – f
UL + DL UL DL
Probability of being active in the uplink and downlink both: p Active = f f
UL UL
Number of users active in the uplink: n d – Active = N Users p Active
DL DL
Number of users active in the downlink: n d – Active = N Users p Active
UL + DL UL + DL
Number of users active in the uplink and downlink both: n d – Active = N Users p Active
Calculation of the number of active users trying to access the service d (nd):
UL DL UL + DL
n d = n d – Active + n d – Active + n d – Active
The user distribution per service and the activity status distribution between the users
are average distributions. The service and the activity status of each user are randomly
drawn in each simulation. Therefore, if you calculate several simulations at once, the
average number of users per service and average numbers of inactive, active on UL,
active on DL and active on UL and DL users, respectively, will correspond to calculated
distributions. But if you check each simulation, the user distribution between services as
well as the activity status distribution between users can be different in each of them.
UL DL
UL TP Cell DL TP Cell
N = ----------------------
- and N = ----------------------
-
UL DL
TP Average TP Average
UL
Where TP Cell is the total uplink throughput demand defined in the map for any service s for the coverage area of the
DL
transmitter, TP Cell is the total downlink throughput demand defined in the map for any service s for the coverage
UL DL
area of the transmitter, TP Average is the average uplink requested throughput of the service s, and TP Average is the
average downlink requested throughput of the service s.
• Sector Traffic Maps (# Active Users)
UL DL
Atoll directly uses the defined N and N values, i.e., the number of active users on UL and DL in the transmitter
coverage area using the service s.
At any given instant, Atoll calculates the probability for a user being active in the uplink and in the downlink as follows:
UL DL
Users active in the uplink and downlink both are included in the N and N values. Therefore, it is necessary to
UL DL UL + DL
accurately determine the number of active users in the uplink ( n Active ), in the downlink ( n Active ), and both ( n Active ).
As for the other types of traffic maps, Atoll considers both active and inactive users.
The activity status of each user depends on the activity periods during the call, i.e., the uplink and downlink activity
UL DL
factors defined for the service, f Act and f Act .
698
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
UL DL
Probability of being inactive: p Inactive = 1 – f Act 1 – f Act
UL UL DL
Probability of being active in the uplink: p Active = f Act 1 – f Act
DL DL UL
Probability of being active in the downlink: p Active = f Act 1 – f Act
UL + DL UL DL
Probability of being active in the uplink and downlink both: p Active = f Act f Act
Where, n is the total number of active users in the transmitter coverage area using the service.
Calculation of number of users per activity status:
UL UL + DL DL UL + DL
UL + DL N p Active N p Active
Number of users active in the uplink and downlink both: n Active = Min ---------------------------------------
UL + DL
---------------------------------------
+ DL
or
p Active + p Active p Active + p UL
UL DL
Active
UL + DL UL DL DL UL
simply, n Active = Min N f Act N f Act
UL UL UL + DL
Number of users active in the uplink: n Active = N – n Active
DL DL UL + DL
Number of users active in the downlink: n Active = N – n Active
UL DL UL + DL
And, n = n Active + n Active + n Active
nv
- p Inactive
Number of inactive users: n Inactive = ---------------------------
1 – p Inactive
The activity status distribution between users is an average distribution. In fact, in each
simulation, the activity status of each user is randomly drawn. Therefore, if you calculate
several simulations at once, average numbers of inactive, active on UL, active on DL and
active on UL and DL users correspond to the calculated distribution. But if you check each
simulation, the activity status distribution between users can be different in each of
them.
The simulation process can be summed up into the following iterative steps.
For each simulation, the simulation process,
1. Generates mobiles according to the input traffic data as explained in "User Distribution" on page 696.
2. Sets initial values for the following parameters:
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
• Cell transmission powers and reductions ( P Preamble , P Traffic , P Pilot , and P Idle – Pilot ) are set to the values
defined by the user.
Mi
• Mobile transmission power is set to the maximum mobile power ( P Max ).
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
• Cell loads ( TL DL , TL UL , NRUL , NR UL – Seg , SU DL , and AU DL ) are set to their current values in the
Cells table.
3. Determines the best servers for all the mobiles generated for the simulation as explained in "Best Server
Determination" on page 713.
699
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX i ic Mi TX i ic Mi
TL DL = RDL and TLUL = RUL
Mi Mi
700
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
MU – MIMO
TX ic M
i i
For uplink MU-MIMO, TL UL = RC UL
MU – MIMO
M
i
M
i
Where R DL is the sum of the percentages of the downlink cell resources allocated to mobiles
M
i
Mi PZ DL = Seg
Mi
PZ DL = Seg
Mi
Where R DL
AAS
is the sum of the percentages of the downlink cell resources allocated to mobiles served by the
M
i
AAS
smart antennas.
Calculation of Uplink MU-MIMO Gain:
Atoll calculates the uplink MU-MIMO gain for all the cells as follows:
MU – MIMO
Mi
R UL
TX i ic MU – MIMO
Mi
G MU – MIMO = -------------------------------------------------------------
-
MU – MIMO
Mi
RC UL
MU – MIMO
M
i
MU – MIMO
Mi
Where R UL is the sum of the percentages of the uplink cell resources allocated to MU-MIMO
MU – MIMO
Mi
MU – MIMO
Mi
mobiles and RC UL is the sum of the real resource consumption of MU-MIMO mobiles.
MU – MIMO
Mi
11. Performs the convergence test to see whether the differences between the current and the new loads are within the
convergence thresholds.
The convergence criteria are evaluated at the end of each iteration k, and can be written as follows:
TX i ic TX ic TX i ic
Max TL DL
i
TL DL = – TL DL
k All TX ic k k – 1
i
701
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX ic TX ic TX ic
Max TL UL
i i i
TL UL = – TL UL
k All TX ic k k – 1
i
TX ic TX ic TX ic
Max NR UL
i i i
NR UL = – NR UL
k All TX ic k k – 1
i
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
If TL DL , TL UL , and NR UL are the simulation convergence thresholds defined when creating
Req Req Req
the simulation, Atoll stops the simulation in the following cases.
Convergence: Simulation has converged between iteration k - 1 and k if:
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
TL DL TL DL AND TL UL TL UL AND NR UL NR UL
k Req k Req k Req
No convergence: Simulation has not converged even after the last iteration, i.e., k = Max Number of Iterations defined
when creating the simulation, if:
TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic
i i i i i i
TL DL TL DL OR TL UL TL UL OR NR UL NR UL
k Req k Req k Req
12. Repeats the above steps (from step 3.) for the iteration k+1 using the new calculated loads as the current loads.
Simulation Results
At the end of the simulation process, the main results obtained are:
• Downlink traffic loads
• Uplink traffic loads
• Uplink noise rise received at the main antenna
• Ssegmented zone uplink noise rise received at the main antenna
• Angular distributions of downlink traffic power density for cells with smart antennas
• Angular distributions of uplink noise rise for cells with smart antennas
• Downlink AAS usage
• Downlink segmentation usage
• Uplink MU-MIMO capacity gain
These results can be used as input for C/(I+N)-based coverage predictions.
In addition to the above parameters, the simulations also list the connection status of each mobile. Mobiles can be rejected
due to:
• No Coverage: If the mobile does not have any best serving cell (step 3.) or if the mobile is not within the service area
of its best server (step 4.).
• No Service: If the mobile is not able to access a bearer in the direction of its activity (step 6.), i.e., UL, DL, or DL+UL.
• Scheduler Saturation: If the mobile is not in the list of mobiles selected for scheduling (step 8.)
• Resource Saturation: If all the cell resources are used up before allocation to the mobile or if, for a user active in
uplink, the minimum uplink throughput demand is higher than the uplink allocated bandwidth throughput (step 8.)
• Backhaul Saturation: If allocating resources to a mobile makes the effective MAC aggregate site throughputs exceed
the maximum backhaul throughputs defined for the site. This condition is only verified if the simulation was created
with the Backhaul capacity check box selected (step 8.)
Connected mobiles (step 8.) can be:
• Connected UL: If a mobile active in UL is allocated resources in UL.
• Connected DL: If a mobile active in DL is allocated resources in DL.
• Connected DL+UL: If a mobile active in DL+UL is allocated resources in DL+UL.
702
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
The following sections describe how the co- and adjacent channel overlaps are calculated between the channels used by any
studied cell TXi(ic) and any other cell TXj(jc) of the network. In terms of interference calculation, the studied cell can be
considered a victim of interference received from the other cells that might be interfering the studied cell.
TX i ic
If the studied cell is assigned a channel number N Channel , it receives co-channel interference on the channel bandwidth of
TX i ic TX i ic
N Channel , and adjacent channel interference on the adjacent channel bandwidths, i.e., corresponding to N Channel – 1 and
TX i ic
N Channel + 1 .
In order to calculate the co- and adjacent channel overlaps between two channels, it is necessary to calculate the start and
end frequencies of both channels (explained in "Conversion From Channel Numbers to Start and End Frequencies" on
page 703). Once the start and end frequencies are known for the studied and other cells, the co- and adjacent overlaps and
the total overlap ratio are calculated as respectively explained in:
• "Co-Channel Overlap Calculation" on page 704.
• "Adjacent Channel Overlap Calculation" on page 705.
• "Total Overlap Ratio Calculation" on page 706.
TX i ic TX j jc
• F Start – FB and F Start – FB : Start frequency of the frequency band assigned to the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
F Start – FB can be the start frequency of a TDD frequency band ( F Start – FB – TDD ), or the uplink or the downlink start
frequency of an FDD frequency band ( F Start – FB – FDD – UL or F Start – FB – FDD – DL ).
First – TX ic First – TX jc
i j
• N Channel and N Channel : First channel numbers the frequency band assigned to the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
TX i ic TX j jc
• N Channel and N Channel : Channel numbers assigned to cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
For FDD networks, Atoll considers that the same channel number is assigned to a cell in the downlink and uplink, i.e.,
the channel number you assign to a cell is considered for uplink and downlink both.
TX i ic TX j jc
• W Channel and W Channel : Bandwidths of the channels assigned to cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
TX i ic TX j jc
• ICS FB and ICS FB : Inter-channel spacing of the frequency bands assigned to cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
TX i ic TX j jc
• CN FB and CN FB : Channel number step of the frequency bands assigned to cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
703
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Calculations
Channel numbers are converted into start and end frequencies as follows:
For cell TXi(ic):
TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic TXi ic – N First – TX i ic
i
F Start =
i
F Start – FB + W Channel + ICS FB
i i N Channel Channel
-
-------------------------------------------------------
TX i ic
CN FB
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
F End = F Start + W Channel
TX j jc TX j jc TX jc TX jc N TXj jc – N First – TX j jc
= F Start – FB + W Channel + ICS FB -------------------------------------------------------
-
j j Channel Channel
F Start TX ic
i
CN FB
TX j jc TX j jc TX j jc
F End = F Start + W Channel
Output
TX ic TX jc
i j
• F Start and F Start : Start frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
TX i ic TX j jc
• F End and F End : End frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
TX i ic TX j jc
• F Start and F Start : Start frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Conversion From Channel
Numbers to Start and End Frequencies" on page 703.
TX i ic TX j jc
• F End and F End : End frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Conversion From Channel
Numbers to Start and End Frequencies" on page 703.
TX ic
i
• W Channel : Bandwidth of the channel assigned to the studied cell TXi(ic).
Calculations
Atoll first verifies that co-channel overlap exists between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
Co-channel overlap exists if:
TX i ic TX j jc TX i ic TX j jc
F Start F End AND F End F Start
TX i ic – TX j jc TX jc TX ic TX jc TX ic
= Min F End F End – Max F Start F Start
j i j i
W CCO
The co-channel overlap ratio is given by:
TX ic – TX jc
TX i ic – TX j jc i j
W CCO
r CCO = ----------------------------------
-
TX i ic
W Channel
Output
TX i ic – TX j jc
• r CCO : Co-channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
704
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
TX ic TX jc
i j
• F Start
and F Start : Start frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Conversion From Channel
Numbers to Start and End Frequencies" on page 703.
TX i ic TX j jc
• F End and F End : End frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Conversion From Channel
Numbers to Start and End Frequencies" on page 703.
TX i ic
• W Channel : Bandwidth of the channel assigned to the studied cell TXi(ic).
Calculations
Atoll first verifies that adjacent channel overlaps exist between (the lower-frequency and the higher-frequency adjacent
channels of) the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
Adjacent channel overlap exists on the lower-frequency adjacent channel if:
TX i ic TX i ic TX j jc TX i ic TX j jc
F Start – W Channel F End AND F Start F Start
TX i ic – TX j jc TX jc TX ic TX jc TX ic TX ic
= Min F End F Start – Max F Start F Start – W Channel
j i j i i
W ACO
L
TX i ic – TX j jc TX j jc TX i ic TX ic TX jc TX ic
= Min F End F End + W Channel – Max F Start F End
i j i
W ACO
H
Output
TX ic – TX jc
i j
• r ACO : Adjacent channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
705
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Input
TDD
• r DL – Frame : Downlink subframe ratio defined in the global network settings.
Calculations
The FDD – TDD overlap ratio is calculated as follows depending on the frequency bands assigned to the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc):
Frequency Band TX i ic – TX j jc
TXi(ic) TXj(jc) Overlap Ratio r FDD – TDD
TDD TDD 1
TDD FDD 1
TDD
r DL – Frame
FDD TDD -----------------------
100
FDD FDD 1
Output
TX ic – TX jc
i j
• r FDD – TDD : FDD – TDD overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
TX i ic – TX j jc
• r CCO : Co-channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Co-Channel Overlap
Calculation" on page 704.
TX i ic – TX j jc
• r ACO : Adjacent channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Adjacent Channel
Overlap Calculation" on page 705.
TX i ic – TX j jc
• r FDD – TDD : FDD – TDD overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "FDD – TDD Overlap Ratio
Calculation" on page 705.
TX i ic
• f ACS – FB : Adjacent channel suppression factor defined for the frequency band of the cell TXi(ic).
TX ic TX jc
i j
• W Channel and W Channel : Bandwidths of the channels assigned to the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
Calculations
TX ic
–f
i
TX ic – TX jc TX ic – TX jc ACS – FB-
--------------------------- TX ic – TX j jc TX i ic TX j jc
r i j i
+ r ACO
j
10
10 r i if W Channel W Channel
CCO FDD – TDD
TX i ic – TX j jc
rO =
TX ic
–f
i TX i ic
TX ic – TX jc TX ic – TX jc ----------------------------
ACS – FB
TX ic – TX j jc W TX i ic TX j jc
r i j
+ r
i j
10
10 r i
Channel
--------------------- if W Channel W Channel
CCO ACO FDD – TDD TX j jc
W Channel
TX i ic
W Channel
The multiplicative factor ---------------------
TX j jc
is used to normalise the transmission power of the interfering cell TXj(jc). This means that
W Channel
TX j jc TX j jc
if the interfering cell transmits at X dBm over a bandwidth of W Channel , and it interferes over a bandwidth less than W Channel ,
706
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
TX ic
i
W Channel
the interference from this cell should not be considered at X dBm but less than that. The factor ---------------------
TX jc
converts X dBm over
j
W Channel
TX jc TX jc
j j
W Channel to Y dBm (which is less than X dBm) over less than W Channel .
Output
TX i ic – TX j jc
• rO : Total co- and adjacent channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
TX i ic
• P Preamble : Preamble transmission power of the cell TXi(ic).
TX i
• E SA : Number of antenna elements defined for the smart antenna equipment used by the transmitter TXi.
Combining
• G SA : Smart power combining gain offset defined per clutter class.
Div
• G SA : Smart antenna diversity gain (for cross-polarised smart antennas) defined per clutter class.
TX i
• G : Transmitter antenna gain for the antenna used by the transmitter TXi.
TX TX
i i
• L : Total transmitter losses for the transmitter TXi ( L = L Total – DL ).
• L Model : Loss on the transmitter-receiver path (path loss) calculated using a propagation model.
TX
i
• L Ant : Antenna attenuation (from antenna patterns) calculated for the antenna used by the transmitter TXi.
• M Shadowing – Model : Shadowing margin based on the model standard deviation.
In coverage predictions, shadowing margins are taken into account when the option "Shadowing taken into account"
is selected.
• L Indoor : Indoor losses taken into account when the option "Indoor coverage" is selected.
Mi
• L : Receiver terminal losses for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• G : Receiver terminal’s antenna gain for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• L Ant : Receiver terminal’s antenna attenuation calculated for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
For calculating the useful signal level from the best serving cell, L Ant is determined in the direction (H,V) = (0,0) from
Mi
the antenna patterns of the antenna used by Mi. For calculating the interfering signal level from any interferer, L Ant
is determined in the direction of the interfering cell from the antenna patterns of the antenna used by Mi, while the
antenna is pointed towards Mi’s best serving cell.
Mi
• L Body : Body loss defined for the service used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
707
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
M M M M
i i i i
L , G , L Ant , and L Body are not used in the calculations performed for the point
analysis tool’s profile tab and the preamble signal level based coverage predictions.
Calculations
The received preamble signal level (dBm) from any cell TXi(ic) is calculated for a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as follows:
TX i ic TX i ic Mi Mi Mi Mi
C Preamble = EIRP Preamble – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body
Where EIRP is the effective isotropic radiated power of the cell calculated as follows:
TX ic TX ic TX TX
i i i i
• Without smart antennas: EIRP Preamble = P Preamble + G –L
TX i ic TX i ic TX i TX i TX i
+ 10 Log E SA + G SA
Combining Div
• With smart antennas: EIRP Preamble = P Preamble + G –L + G SA
TX i
L Path = L Model + L Ant
Furthermore, the total losses between the cell and the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi can be calculated as follows:
TX TX M M M M
i i i i i i
L Total = L Path + L + L Indoor + M Shadowing – Model – G +L –G + L Ant + L Body
If you wish to exclude the the energy corresponding to the cyclic prefix part of the total
symbol duration from the useful signal level, you must add the following lines in the
Atoll.ini file:
[WiMAX]
ExcludeCPFromUsefulPower = 1
TX i ic
When this option is active, the cyclic prefix energy is excluded from C Preamble . In other
TX ic TX ic
words, the factor 10 Log 1 – r CP is added to C i
i
Preamble .
Independant of the option, interference levels are calculated for the total symbol
durations, i.e., the energy of the useful symbol duration and the cyclic prefix energy.
Output
TX i ic
• C Preamble : Received preamble signal level from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
• L Path : Path loss between the cell TXi(ic) and the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
• L Total : Total losses between the cell TXi(ic) and the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Input
• K: Boltzmann’s constant.
• T: Temperature in Kelvin.
TX i ic
• N SCa – Preamble : Number of subcarriers used by the preamble defined for the frame configuration of the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• N SCa – Total : Total number of subcarriers defined for the frame configuration of the cell TXi(ic).
708
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
TX ic
i
• F Sampling : Sampling frequency for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Calculation of Sampling Frequency" on page 740.
M
i
• nf : Noise figure of the terminal used for calculations by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Calculations
The thermal noise over the preamble for a cell is calculated as:
TX i ic
TX i ic TX ic N SCa – Preamble Preamble
n 0 – Preamble i
= n 0 + 10 Log F Sampling ---------------------------------
- f Segment
TX i ic
N SCa – Total
Effect of Segmentation:
The preamble is segmented and one of the three preamble carrier sets is used for transmission. Each preamble carrier
set uses 1/3rd of the total number of preamble subcarriers. The power transmitted over the preamble has higher
spectral density than the power transmitted over the entire channel bandwidth. This power concentration due to
segmentation on the C/N and C/(I+N) results in an increase in the coverage footprint of the preamble. Hence, the
thermal noise at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the preamble is reduced by a factor of f Segment = 1
Preamble
--- .
3
The following table shows the different types of subcarriers and their numbers for preamble transmission in WiMAX.
The preamble noise is the sum of the thermal noise and the noise figure of the terminal used for the calculations by the pixel,
subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ic TX i ic Mi
n Preamble = n 0 – Preamble + nf
Output
TX i ic
• n Preamble : Preamble noise for the cell TXi(ic).
709
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Input
TX j jc
• C Preamble : Preamble signal level received from an interfering cell TXj(jc) as calculated in "Preamble Signal Level
Calculation" on page 707 at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the cell TXi(ic).
• M Shadowing – Model : Shadowing margin based on the model standard deviation.
• M Shadowing – C I : Shadowing margin based on the C/I standard deviation.
In Monte Carlo simulations, interfering signal levels already include M Shadowing – Model , as explained in "Preamble
Signal Level Calculation" on page 679.
In coverage predictions, the ratio M Shadowing – Model – M Shadowing – C I is applied to the interfering signals (for more
information, see "Shadow Fading Model" on page 90). As the received interfering signal levels already include
M Shadowing – Model , M Shadowing – C I is added to the received interfering signal levels in order to achieve the ratio
M Shadowing – Model – M Shadowing – C I :
TX jc TX jc
j j
C Preamble = C Preamble + M Shadowing – C I
In coverage predictions, shadowing margins are taken into account when the option "Shadowing taken into account"
is selected.
TX i ic – TX j jc
• rO : Total channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Co- and Adjacent
Channel Overlaps Calculation" on page 702.
TX i ic TX j jc
• N Seg and N Seg : Segment numbers assigned to the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) calculated from their respective
TX i ic TX j jc
preamble indexes ( n Preamble and n Preamble ) as follows:
n Preamble N Seg
Inter – Tech
• f IRF : Inter-technology interference reduction factor.
Calculations
The received preamble interference (dBm) from any cell TXj(jc) is calculated for a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as follows:
TX j jc TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
Inter – Tech
I Preamble = C Preamble + f O + f Seg – Preamble + I DL
TX ic – TX jc
i j
Where f O is the interference reduction factor due to channel overlap between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc),
calculated as follows:
TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
fO = 10 Log r O
TX i ic – TX j jc
f Seg – Preamble is the interference reduction factor due to preamble segmentation, calculated as follows:
TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
f Seg – Preamble = 10 Log p Collision
710
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
TX ic – TX jc TX ic TX jc
i j i j
The probability of preamble subcarrier collision p Collision between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) is 0 if N Seg N Seg and
TX ic TX jc
i j
1 if N Seg = N Seg .
TX jc TX jc
j j
In case of smart antennas, C Preamble in I Preamble already includes the effect of the
TX
j
number of antenna elements ( E SA ). If you wish to include the effect of the number of
antennas in case of MIMO, you must add the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[WiMAX]
MultiAntennaInterference
When the multi-antenna interference option is active, and TXj(jc) does not have a smart
antenna equipment assigned, the interference is incremented by
TX jc
+ 10 Log N Ant – TX .
j
TX j jc
Where N Ant – TX is the number of MIMO transmission (downlink) antennas defined for
the cell TXj(jc).
Inter – Tech
I DL is the inter-technology downlink interference from transmitters of an external network (linked document of any
technology) calculated as follows:
Mi Mi Mi Mi
Inter – Tech TX – External Inter – Tech
I DL = EIRP DL – L Path – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body – f IRF
All External TXs
TX – External
Where EIRP DL is the downlink EIRP of the external transmitter, L Path is the path loss from the external transmitters
to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile location, L Indoor is the indoor losses taken into account when the option "Indoor coverage"
Mi Mi
is selected, L is the receiver terminal losses for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi, G is the receiver terminal’s antenna
Mi
gain for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi, L Ant is the receiver terminal’s antenna attenuation calculated for the pixel,
Mi
subscriber, or mobile Mi, and L Body is the body loss defined for the service used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX k
Here P DL – Rec is the received downlink power from an interfering cell TXk belonging to another technology, and
F TX i ic TX k
ICPDL is the inter-technology downlink channel protection ratio for a frequency offset F between the interfered
and interfering frequency channels of TXi(ic) and TXk.
TX k
P DL – Rec is calculated based on the EIRP from GSM cells, total power from UMTS, CDMA2000, and TD-SCDMA cells, maximum
power from LTE cells, preamble power from WiMAX cells, and downlink cell power from Wi-Fi cells.
Output
TX j jc
• I Preamble : Preamble interference received from any interfering cell TXj(jc) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi
covered by a cell TXi(ic).
Inter – Tech
• I DL : Downlink inter-technology interference.
711
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX ic
i
• C Preamble : Received preamble signal level from the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Preamble Signal Level Calculation" on
page 707.
TX i ic
• n Preamble : Preamble noise for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Preamble Noise Calculation" on page 708.
Mi
• G Div – Preamble : Preamble diversity gain defined in the WiMAX equipment of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
DL
• G Div : Additional downlink diversity gain defined for the clutter class where the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is
located.
Calculations
The preamble C/N for a cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi:
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic Mi
DL
CNR Preamble = C Preamble – n Preamble + G Div – Preamble + G Div
The preamble diversity gain is applied to the preamble C/N when the cell and the terminal both support any form of MIMO in
downlink. The additional downlink diversity gain defined per clutter is also applied.
Output
TX i ic
• CNR Preamble : Preamble C/N from the cell TXi(ic) at any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Input
TX i ic
• C Preamble : Preamble signal level received from the cell TXi(ic) at a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated in
"Preamble Signal Level Calculation" on page 707.
TX i ic
• n Preamble : Preamble noise for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Preamble Noise Calculation" on page 708.
TX j jc
• I Preamble : Preamble interference received from any cell TXj(jc) at a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by a cell
TXi(ic) as calculated in "Preamble Interference Calculation" on page 710.
Inter – Tech
• NRDL : Inter-technology downlink noise rise.
M
i
• G Div – Preamble : Preamble diversity gain defined in the WiMAX equipment of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
DL
• G Div : Additional downlink diversity gain defined for the clutter class where the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is
located.
Inter – Tech
• I DL : Downlink inter-technology interference as calculated in "Preamble Interference Calculation" on page 710.
712
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
Calculations
The preamble C/(I+N) for a cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows at any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi:
TX ic
TX j jc n
i
TX ic TX ic IPreamble -----------------------------
Preamble M
= C Preamble – 10 Log ---------------------------
- + NR Inter – Tech + G i
i i Inter – Tech 10 DL
CINR Preamble
10
10
+ I DL + 10
DL Div – Preamble + G Div
All TX j jc
The preamble diversity gain is applied to the preamble C/(I+N) when the cell and the terminal both support any form of MIMO.
The additional downlink diversity gain defined per clutter is also applied.
The preamble total noise (I+N) for a cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi:
TX ic
TXj jc n Preamble
i
TX i ic IPreamble -----------------------------
= 10 Log ---------------------------
- + NRInter – Tech
Inter – Tech 10
I + N Preamble 10 +I + 10
10 DL DL
All TXj jc
Output
TX i ic
• CINR Preamble : Preamble C/(I+N) from the cell TXi(ic) at a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ic
• I + N Preamble : Preamble total noise from the interfering cells TXj(jc) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered
by a cell TXi(ic).
Input
TX i ic
• C Preamble : Preamble signal level received from any cell TXi(ic) at a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated in
Mi Mi Mi
"Preamble Signal Level Calculation" on page 707 using the terminal and service parameters ( L , G , L Ant , and
M
i
L Body ) of Mi. "Preamble C/(I+N) Calculation" on page 712
TX i ic
• CINR Preamble : Preamble C/(I+N) received from any cell TXi(ic) at a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated in
"Preamble C/(I+N) Calculation" on page 712.
Calculations
The best server of any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi, BS M , is the cell from which the received preamble signal level or C/
i
(I+N) is the highest among all the cells. The best server is determined as follows:
BSM = TX i ic or BS M = TX i ic
i TX i ic TX i ic
i TX i ic TX i ic
C Preamble = Best C CINR Preamble = Best CINR Preamble
All TX i ic Preamble All TX i ic
Here ic is the cell of the transmitter TXi with the highest preamble power. However, if more than one cell of the same
transmitter covers the pixel, subscriber, or mobile, the final reference cell ic might be different from the initial cell ic (the one
with the highest power) depending on the serving cell selection method:
• Random: In coverage prediction calculations and in calculations on subsriber lists, the cell of the highest priority layer
is selected as the serving (reference) cell. In Monte Carlo simulations, a random cell is selected as the serving
(reference) cell.
• Distributive: In coverage prediction calculations and in calculations on subsriber lists, the cell of the highest priority
layer is selected as the serving (reference) cell. In Monte Carlo simulations, mobiles are distributed among cell layers
one by one, i.e., if more than one cell layer covers a set of mobiles, the first mobile is assigned to the highest priority
layer, the 2nd mobile to the second highest priority layer, and so on.
713
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
When using either the Random or the Distributive cell selection method, the reference cell once assigned to a mobile
does not change during Monte Carlo simulations.
Output
Input
TX i ic
• CNR Preamble : Preamble C/N from the cell TXi(ic) at a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated in "Preamble C/N
Calculation" on page 712.
TX i ic
• T Preamble : Preamble C/N threshold defined for the cell TXi(ic).
Calculations
A pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is within the service area of its best serving cell TXi(ic) if:
TX ic TX ic
i i
CNR Preamble T Preamble
Output
Input
TX i ic
• d Max – PZ : Maximum distance covered by a permutation zone of a cell TXi(ic).
TX ic
i
• QT PZ : Minimum preamble C/N or C/(I+N) required at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi to connect to a
permutation zone of a cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• Speed Max – PZ : Maximum speed supported by a permutation zone of a cell TXi(ic).
M – TX ic
i i
• d : Distance between the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi and a cell TXi(ic).
TX ic
i
• CNR Preamble : Preamble C/N from the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Preamble C/N Calculation" on page 712.
TX i ic
• CINR Preamble : Preamble C/(I+N) from the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Preamble C/(I+N) Calculation" on page 712.
• Mobility M i : Speed of the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Calculations
Mi is assigned the permutation zone with the highest priority among the permutation zones whose selection criteria Mi
satisfies. Mi satisfies the selection criteria of a permutation zone if:
• The distance between Mi and TXi(ic) is less than or equal to the maximum distance covered by the permutation zone:
714
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
M – TX ic TX ic
i i i
d d Max – PZ
• The preamble C/N or C/(I+N) at Mi is better than or equal to the quality threshold defined for the permutation zone:
TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic
i i i i
CNR Preamble QT PZ or CINR Preamble QT PZ
• The mobility of Mi is less than or equal to the maximum mobile speed supported by the permutation zone:
TX i ic
Mobility M i Speed Max – PZ
Therefore, the permutation zones assigned to a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the downlink and uplink are:
Mi TX ic
= Highest Priority PZ DL
i
PZ DL
TX i ic TX i ic
CNR QT
M i – TX i ic TX i ic Preamble PZ TX i ic
d d Max – PZ AND OR AND Mobility M i Speed Max – PZ
TX i ic TX i ic
CINR
QT
Preamble PZ
Mi TX ic
= Highest Priority PZ UL
i
PZ UL
TX i ic TX i ic
CNR QT
M i – TX i ic TX i ic Preamble PZ TX i ic
Max – PZ
Max – PZ
d d AND OR AND Mobility M Speed
i
TX ic TX ic
CINR i
QT
i
Preamble PZ
If more than 1 permutation zone satisfies the distance, speed, and quality threshold criteria, and all have the same priority,
the permutation zone assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile will be the first in the list of permutation zones (frame
configuration) among these zones.
Output
Mi Mi
• PZ DL and PZ UL : Downlink and uplink permutation zones assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ic
• P Preamble : Preamble transmission power of the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• P Traffic : Traffic power reduction of the cell TXi(ic).
715
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX ic
i
• P Pilot : Pilot power reduction of the cell TXi(ic).
TX
i
• G : Transmitter antenna gain for the antenna used by the transmitter TXi.
TX TX TX
i i i
• Without smart antennas: G is the transmitter antenna gain, i.e., G = G Ant .
TX i
• With smart antennas: G is the smart antenna gain in the direction of the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi, i.e.,
TX i
G = G SA . Where is the direction in which Mi is located. For more information on the calculation of
G SA , refer to section "Beamforming Smart Antenna Models" on page 43.
Array
• G SA : Smart antenna array gain offset defined per clutter class.
Combining
• G SA : Smart power combining gain offset defined per clutter class.
Div
• G SA : Smart antenna diversity gain (for cross-polarised smart antennas) defined per clutter class.
TX i TX i
• L : Total transmitter losses for the transmitter TXi ( L = L Total – DL ).
TX
i
• L Path : Path loss ( L Path = L Model + L Ant ).
• L Model : Loss on the transmitter-receiver path (path loss) calculated using a propagation model.
TX i
• L Ant : Antenna attenuation (from antenna patterns) calculated for the antenna used by the transmitter TXi.
• M Shadowing – Model : Shadowing margin based on the model standard deviation.
In coverage predictions, shadowing margins are taken into account when the option "Shadowing taken into account"
is selected.
• L Indoor : Indoor losses taken into account when the option "Indoor coverage" is selected.
Mi
• L : Receiver terminal losses for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• G : Receiver terminal’s antenna gain for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• L Ant : Receiver terminal’s antenna attenuation calculated for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
For calculating the useful signal level from the best serving cell, L Ant is determined in the direction (H,V) = (0,0) from
Mi
the antenna patterns of the antenna used by Mi. For calculating the interfering signal level from any interferer, L Ant
is determined in the direction of the interfering cell from the antenna patterns of the antenna used by Mi, while the
antenna is pointed towards Mi’s best serving cell.
Mi
• L Body : Body loss defined for the service used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Calculations
The received traffic and pilot signal levels (dBm) from any cell TXi(ic) are calculated for a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as
follows:
TX i ic TX i ic Mi Mi Mi Mi
C Traffic = EIRP Traffic – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body and
TX i ic TX i ic Mi Mi Mi Mi
C Pilot = EIRP Pilot – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body
Where EIRP is the effective isotropic radiated power of the cell calculated as follows:
TX i ic TX i ic TX i TX i
Array Combining Div
EIRP Traffic = P Traffic + G + G SA + G SA + G SA – L and
TX i ic TX i ic TX i TX i
Array Combining Div
EIRP Pilot = P Pilot + G + G SA + G SA + G SA – L
TX ic TX ic
i i
With P Traffic and P Pilot being the traffic and pilot transmission powers of the cell TXi(ic) calculated as follows:
TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic
i i i i i i
P Traffic = P Preamble – P Traffic and P Pilot = P Preamble – P Pilot
716
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
If you wish to exclude the the energy corresponding to the cyclic prefix part of the total
symbol duration from the useful signal level, you must add the following lines in the
Atoll.ini file:
[WiMAX]
ExcludeCPFromUsefulPower = 1
TX i ic
When this option is active, the cyclic prefix energy is excluded from C Preamble . In other
TX i ic TX ic
words, the factor 10 Log 1 – r CP is added to C i
Preamble .
Independant of the option, interference levels are calculated for the total symbol
durations, i.e., the energy of the useful symbol duration and the cyclic prefix energy.
Output
TX i ic
• C Traffic : Received traffic signal level from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ic
• C Pilot : Received pilot signal level from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Input
• K: Boltzmann’s constant.
• T: Temperature in Kelvin.
M
i
PZ DL
• N SCa – Used : Number of subcarriers used by the downlink permutation zone of a cell TXi(ic) assigned to Mi.
TX i ic
• N SCa – Total : Total number of subcarriers defined for the frame configuration of a cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• F Sampling : Sampling frequency for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Calculation of Sampling Frequency" on page 740.
M
i
• nf : Noise figure of the terminal used for calculations by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Calculations
The downlink noise is the sum of the thermal noise and the noise figure of the terminal used for the calculations by the pixel,
subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ic TX i ic Mi
n DL = n 0 – DL + nf
Effect of Segmentation:
If you select downlink segmentation support for the frame configuration used by the cell, it means that the first
downlink PUSC permutation zone is segmented. All other zones are pooled together to form a non-segmented zone.
The downlink segmenting factor, f Segment – DL , is calculated from the number of secondary subchannel groups
assigned to the permutation zone in the Permutation Zones table.
717
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
PSG + 2 SSG-
f Segment – DL = 3
--------------------------------------------
15
Where, PSG is the number of primary subchannel groups and SSG is the number of used secondary subchannel groups.
The multiplicative coefficients of 3 and 2 are derived from the ratio of the numbers of
subchannels that belong to the primary and to the secondary subchannel gourps. For
example, for the FFT size of 1024 (or 2048), each primary subchannel group contains 6
(or 12) subchannels, and each secondary subchannel group contains 4 (or 8)
subchannels, which gives the ratio of 3:2. And, the denominator of 15 = 3 x 3 + 2 x 3.
f Segment – DL represents the fraction of the channel bandwidth used by a downlink segment. The power transmitted
1
over a segment has ---------------------------- times the spectral density of the power transmitted over the entire channel
f Segment – DL
1
bandwidth. When calculating the downlink C/N and C/(I+N) ratios, the increase in power by ---------------------------- due to this
f Segment – DL
power concentration is equivalent to a reduction in the noise level by f Segment – DL . Hence, if downlink segmentation
is used, the thermal noise power at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the downlink segmented
permutation zone is reduced by the factor f Segment – DL . Which means that the thermal noise for the a segment of the
channel used by a cell is calculated as:
Mi
PZ DL
TX i ic TX i ic N SCa – Used
n 0 – DL = n 0 + 10 Log FSampling -------------------------
TX i ic
f Segment – DL
N SCa – Total
Output
TX i ic
• n DL : Downlink noise for the cell TXi(ic).
Input
TX j jc
• P Preamble : Preamble transmission power of the cell TXj(jc).
TX j jc
• P Pilot : Pilot power reduction of the interfering cell TXj(jc).
TX j jc
• P Traffic : Traffic power reduction of the interfering cell TXj(jc).
TX j jc
• P Idle – Pilot : Idle pilot power reduction of the interfering cell TXj(jc).
TX TX
j j
• L : Total transmitter losses for the transmitter TXj ( L = L Total – DL ).
TX j
• L Path : Path loss ( L Path = L Model + L Ant ).
• L Model : Loss on the transmitter-receiver path (path loss) calculated using a propagation model.
718
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
TX
j
• L Ant : Antenna attenuation (from antenna patterns) calculated for the antenna used by the transmitter TXj.
• M Shadowing – Model : Shadowing margin based on the model standard deviation.
• M Shadowing – C I : Shadowing margin based on the C/I standard deviation.
In coverage predictions, shadowing margins are taken into account when the option "Shadowing taken into account"
is selected.
• L Indoor : Indoor losses taken into account when the option "Indoor coverage" is selected.
Mi
• L : Receiver terminal losses for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• G : Receiver terminal’s antenna gain for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• L Ant : Receiver terminal’s antenna attenuation calculated for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
M
i
L Ant is determined in the direction of TXj(jc) from the antenna patterns of the antenna used by Mi while the antenna
is pointed towards TXi(ic).
Mi
• L Body : Body loss defined for the service used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX jc
j
• TL DL : Downlink traffic load of the interfering cell TXj(jc).
Traffic loads can either be calculated using Monte Carlo simulations, or entered manually for each cell. Calculation of
traffic loads is explained in "Simulation Process" on page 699.
TX jc
j
• AU DL : Downlink AAS usage ratio of the interfering cell TXj(jc).
Downlink AAS usage ratios are calculated using Monte Carlo simulations as explained in "Simulation Process" on
page 699.
TX j jc
• N SCa – Used : Number of used subcarriers defined for the first downlink permutation zone in the frame configuration
assigned to the interfering cell TXj(jc).
TX j jc
• N SCa – Data : Number of data subcarriers defined for the first downlink permutation zone in the frame configuration
assigned to the interfering cell TXj(jc).
Calculations
WiMAX cells can transmit different powers on pilot (NUsed – NData) and data (NData) subcarriers for the part of the frame with
traffic, and a different pilot power for the part of the frame that does not have traffic bursts. Data subcarriers are off during
the empty part of the frame. Therefore, the interference received from a cell depends on the traffic load and the different
powers of the cell, i.e., pilot, traffic, and idle pilot powers.
Monte Carlo simulations and coverage prediction calculations present different scenarios for interference calculations in the
case of smart antennas.
• Monte Carlo Simulations:
In the case of Monte Carlo simulations, the interferer is either using the transmitter antenna or the smart antenna at
any given moment. So, for each interfered pixel, subscriber, or mobile, Atoll already knows the type of the
interference source. Therefore, the interference received from any cell TXj(jc) can be given by:
TX jc TX jc
I j I
j
TX j jc ----------------------------
Non – AAS
- -------------------
Idle
Without smart antennas: I Total
= 10 Log 10
10
+ 10
10
TX jc
I j
TX jc ------------------
AAS -
With smart antennas:
j
I Total
= 10 Log 10
10
• Coverage Predictions:
719
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
In the case of coverage prediction calculations, the interferer could either be transmitting using the transmitter
antenna, or using the smart antenna, or it could be empty, or not transmitting.Therefore, the interference received
from any cell TXj(jc) can be given by:
TX jc TX jc TX jc
I j I
j
I
j
TX jc ----------------------------
Non – AAS
-
Idle
------------------- -------------------
AAS
= 10 Log 10
j 10 10 10
I Total + 10 + 10
TX j jc TX j jc Mi Mi Mi Mi
I Pilot = EIRP Pilot – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body
In coverage prediction:
TX j jc TX j jc Mi Mi Mi Mi
I Traffic = EIRP Traffic – L Path – M Shadowing – Model + M Shadowing – C I – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body
TX j jc TX j jc Mi Mi Mi Mi
I Pilot = EIRP Pilot – L Path – M Shadowing – Model + M Shadowing – C I – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body
Where EIRP is the effective isotropic radiated power of the cell calculated as follows:
TX j jc TX j jc TX j TX j TX j jc TX j jc TX j TX j
EIRP Traffic = P Traffic + G –L and EIRP Pilot = P Pilot + G –L
TX j jc TX j jc
With P Traffic and P Pilot being the traffic and pilot transmission powers of the cell TXj(jc) calculated as follows:
TX jc TX jc TX jc TX jc TX jc TX jc
j j j j j j
P Traffic = P Preamble – P Traffic and P Pilot = P Preamble – P Pilot
TX j TX j
And G = G Ant , i.e., the transmitter antenna gain for the antenna used by the transmitter TXj.
The interference from the loaded part of the frame transmitted using the main antenna is given as:
TX jc TX jc
I j TX j jc I Pilot
j
TX j jc
TX j jc TX jc TX jc -------------------
Traffic
- N -
------------------
N
= 10 Log TL DL 1 – AU DL 10 1 – -------------------------
j j 10 SCa – Data 10 –
I Non – AAS ------------------------
- + 10 SCa Data
TX j jc TX j jc
N SCa – Used N SCa – Used
If you wish to include the effect of the number of antennas in case of MIMO, you must
add the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[WiMAX]
MultiAntennaInterference = 1
When the multi-antenna interference option is active, the interference is incremented by
TX jc TX jc
+ 10 Log N Ant – TX . Where N Ant – TX is the number of MIMO transmission
j j
(downlink) antennas defined for the cell TXj(jc).
720
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
The interference from the loaded part of the frame transmitted using the smart antenna is calculated as follows:
The received interfering traffic signal level (dBm) from any cell TXj(jc) is calculated for a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi
as follows:
In Monte Carlo simulations:
TX j jc TX j jc Mi Mi Mi Mi
I AAS = EIRPAAS – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body
In coverage prediction:
TX j jc TX j jc Mi Mi Mi Mi
I AAS = EIRPAAS – L Path – M Shadowing – Model + M Shadowing – C I – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body
Where EIRP is the effective isotropic radiated power of the cell calculated as follows:
TX j jc TX j jc TX j TX j
EIRP AAS = P Traffic + G –L
TX j jc
With P Traffic being the traffic transmission power of the cell TXj(jc) calculated as follows:
TX j jc TX j jc TX j jc
P Traffic = P Preamble – P Traffic
TX j
And, G = G SA is the smart antenna gain in the direction of the victim mobile Mi, calculated from the angular
distributions of the downlink traffic power density of the interfering cells. The angular distribution of the downlink
traffic power density is determined from the array correlation matrices calculated during Monte Carlo simulations.
is the direction in which the victim pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is located. For more information on the
calculation of G SA , see "Beamforming Smart Antenna Models" on page 43.
The gain of the interfering signal, G SA , transmitted in the direction of each pixel is given by:
H
G SA = g n S R Avg S
Where S is the steering vector in the direction (probe mobile/pixel), H denotes the Hilbert transform, R Avg is the
average array correlation matrix, and g n is the gain of the nth antenna element in the direction .
The interference from the empty, or idle, part of the frame transmitted using the transmitter antenna is calculated
as follows:
The received interfering pilot signal level (dBm) from any cell TXj(jc) is calculated for a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi
as follows:
TX j jc TX j jc Mi Mi Mi Mi
I Idle – Pilot = EIRP Idle – Pilot – L Path – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body
Where EIRP is the effective isotropic radiated power of the cell calculated as follows:
TX j jc TX j jc TX j TX j
EIRP Idle – Pilot = P Idle – Pilot + G –L
TX j jc
With P Idle – Pilot being the idle pilot transmission power of the cell TXj(jc) calculated as follows:
TX j jc TX j jc TX j jc
P Idle – Pilot = P Preamble – P Idle – Pilot
TX j TX j
And, G = G Ant , i.e., the transmitter antenna gain for the antenna used by the transmitter TXj.
The interference from the empty, or idle, part of the frame transmitted using the transmitter antenna is given as:
TX jc
I j TX j jc
TX j jc TX j jc -----------------------------
Idle – Pilot
-
N
= 10 Log 1 – TL DL 10 1 – ------------------------
SCa – Data
10
I Idle -
TX j jc
N SCa – Used
721
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
If you wish to include the effect of the number of antennas in case of MIMO, you must
add the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[WiMAX]
MultiAntennaInterference = 1
When the multi-antenna interference option is active, the interference is incremented by
TX jc TX jc
+ 10 Log N Ant – TX . Where N Ant – TX is the number of MIMO transmission
j j
(downlink) antennas defined for the cell TXj(jc).
Output
TX j jc
• I Total : Interference received at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi from any interfering cell TXj(jc).
Input
TX j jc
• I Total : Interference received at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi from any interfering cell TXj(jc) as calculated in
"Traffic and Pilot Interference Signal Levels Calculation (DL)" on page 718.
TX i ic – TX j jc
• rO : Total channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Co- and Adjacent
Channel Overlaps Calculation" on page 702.
TX i ic TX j jc
• SU DL and SU DL : Downlink segmentation usage ratios defined for cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
Calculations
The total traffic and pilot interference (dBm) from any cell TXj(jc) is calculated for a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as follows:
TX j jc TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
Inter – Tech
I DL = I Total + f O + f Seg – DL + I DL
Calculations for the interference reduction factors due to channel overlapping and downlink segmentation are explained
below:
Interference reduction due to the co- and adjacent channel overlap between the studied and the interfering cells:
Interference reduction due to the co- and adjacent channel overlap between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) is calculated
as follows:
TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
fO = 10 Log r O
722
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
interference by f Segment – DL . Hence, if downlink segmentation is used, the interference received at the pixel,
subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the segmented zone is reduced by a factor of f Segment – DL .
2. Collision probability between the subcarriers used by the subchannels belonging to the segment of the studied cell
and the subcarriers used by other sectors, segmented or not. The following paragraphs explain how the collision
probability is calculated.
The downlink segmentation usage (SU) ratio is the percentage of the total downlink traffic load present in the
segmented downlink PUSC zone. For example, if the downlink traffic load is 80 %, and the downlink segmentation
usage ratio is 50 %, then this means that the downlink traffic load of the segmented zone is 40 % (i.e., 50 % of 80 %),
and the downlink traffic load of the non-segmented zones is 40 %.
In coverage predictions, Atoll uses the downlink segmentation usage ratios stored in the cell properties for
determining the interference. In simulations, Atoll resets the downlink segmentation usage ratios for all the cells to
0, and then calculates the downlink segmentation usage ratios according to the traffic loads of the mobiles allocated
to the segmented zone and in the non-segmented zones.
Atoll determines the switching point between the segmented and the non-segmented zones using the downlink
segmentation usage ratio. The switching points between the segmented and non-segmented zones of the victim and
interfering cells, TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) respectively, are calculated as follows:
TX i ic
TX i ic SU DL
SP = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- and
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
SU DL + f Segment – DL 1 – SU DL
TX jc
TX j jc j
SU DL
SP = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX j jc TX j jc TX j jc
SU DL + f Segment – DL 1 – SU DL
Where, SP is the switching point between the segmented and the non-segmented zones, SU is the downlink
segmentation usage ratios of the cells, and f Segment – DL is downlink segmenting factor, which gives the bandwidth
used by a segment.
The downlink segmenting factor, f Segment – DL , is calculated from the number of secondary subchannel groups
assigned to the first downlink PUSC permutation zone in the Permutation Zones table.
PSG + 2 SSG-
f Segment – DL = 3
--------------------------------------------
15
Where, PSG is the number of primary subchannel groups and SSG is the number of secondary subchannel groups.
The multiplicative coefficients of 3 and 2 are derived from the ratio of the numbers of
subchannels that belong to the primary and to the secondary subchannel gourps. For
example, for the FFT size of 1024 (or 2048), each primary subchannel group contains 6
(or 12) subchannels, and each secondary subchannel group contains 4 (or 8)
subchannels, which gives the ratio of 3:2. And, the denominator of 15 = 3 x 3 + 2 x 3.
723
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
If the downlink segmentation usage ratio is set to 0, it means that the segmented zone does not exist. Setting SU to 0
gives SP = 0, and setting SU to 1 gives SP = 1 (or 100%), which shows how the switching point varies with the downlink
segmentation usage ratio.
Derivation of the switching point formula: The downlink segmentation usage ratio is used
to partition the total downlink traffic load into segmented and non-segmented zones.
Therefore, the switching point formula is derived from the equation:
SU DL TL DL 1 – SU DL TL DL
--------------------------------------------------------------------
- = -----------------------------------------------
-
SP fSegment – DL W Channel 1 – SP W Channel
With cells using downlink segmentation, there can be four different interference scenarios.
• Between the segmented zone of the victim and the segmented zone of the interferer.
• Between the segmented zone of the victim and the non-segmented zone of the interferer.
• Between the non-segmented zone of the victim and the segmented zone of the interferer.
• Between the non-segmented zone of the victim and the non-segmented zone of the interferer.
Therefore, Atoll calculates the probabilities of collision for each scenario and weights the total interference according
to the total collision probability. The probability of collision p Coll for each scenario is given by the following formula:
Where, PSGCom is the number of primary subchannel groups common in TXi(ic) and TXj(jc), SSGCom is the number of
TX i ic
secondary subchannel groups common in TXi(ic) and TXj(jc), PSG is the number of primary subchannel groups
TX i ic
in the cell TXi(ic), and SSG is the number of secondary subchannel groups in the cell TXi(ic).
The segment numbers and the cell permutation base numbers (Cell PermBase) are determined from the cell’s
preamble index. The mapping between the preamble index, the segment number, and Cell PermBase is available in
the IEEE specifications. This mapping is performed in Atoll as follows:
Preamble Index ( PI )
PI 96 96 PI 114
Range: 0 to 113
Cell PermBase ( PB )
PI Modulo 32 PI – 96
Range: 0 to 31
Segment Number ( N Seg )
Floor ------
PI
PI – 96 Modulo 3
Range: 0, 1, 2 32
724
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
• Case 1: If the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is covered by the segmented zone of TXi(ic), the total collision
probability for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is calculated as follows:
TX jc TX ic
SS
p Coll If SP
j
SP
i
TX ic – TX jc
i j TX jc TX ic TX jc
p Collision – DL = SS
+ p Coll SP
j SN i j
p Coll SP
– SP
TX j jc TX i ic
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX i ic
If SP SP
SP
• Case 2: If the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is covered by the non-segmented zone of TXi(ic), the total collision
probability for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is calculated as follows:
NN
TX j jc TX i ic
p Coll If SP SP
TX i ic – TX j jc TX j jc TX jc TX ic
= p NN + p NS SP j – SP i
Coll 1 – SP
p Collision – DL
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- If SP j SP i
Coll TX jc TX ic
TX ic
1 – SP i
The interference reduction factor due to downlink segmentation for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is calculated
as follows:
TX i ic – TX j jc TX ic – TX jc
= 10 Log p Collision – DL
i j
f Seg – DL
Inter – Tech
I DL is the inter-technology downlink interference from transmitters of an external network (linked document of any
technology) calculated as follows:
M M M M
Inter – Tech TX – External i i i i Inter – Tech
I DL = EIRP DL – L Path – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body – f IRF
All External TXs
TX – External
Where EIRP DL is the downlink EIRP of the external transmitter, L Path is the path loss from the external transmitters
to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile location, L Indoor is the indoor losses taken into account when the option "Indoor coverage"
Mi Mi
is selected, L is the receiver terminal losses for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi, G is the receiver terminal’s antenna
Mi
gain for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi, L Ant is the receiver terminal’s antenna attenuation calculated for the pixel,
Mi
subscriber, or mobile Mi, and L Body is the body loss defined for the service used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX
k
Here P DL – Rec is the received downlink power from an interfering cell TXk belonging to another technology, and
F TX i ic TX k
ICPDL is the inter-technology downlink channel protection ratio for a frequency offset F between the interfered
and interfering frequency channels of TXi(ic) and TXk.
TX k
P DL – Rec is calculated based on the EIRP from GSM cells, total power from UMTS, CDMA2000, and TD-SCDMA cells, maximum
power from LTE cells, preamble power from WiMAX cells, and downlink cell power from Wi-Fi cells.
Output
TX j jc
• I DL : Effective downlink traffic and pilot interference received at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi from any
interfering cell TXj(jc).
Inter – Tech
• I DL : Downlink inter-technology interference.
725
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX ic
i
• C Traffic : Received traffic signal level from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated in "Traffic
and Pilot Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 715.
TX i ic
• C Pilot : Received pilot signal level from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated in "Traffic
and Pilot Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 715.
TX i ic
• n DL : Downlink noise for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Traffic and Pilot Noise Calculation (DL)" on page 717.
TX i ic
• T AMS : AMS threshold defined for the cell TXi(ic).
M
i
• T B : Bearer selection thresholds of the bearers defined in the WiMAX equipment used by Mi’s terminal.
Mi
• B DL – Highest Service : Highest downlink bearer defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
M
i
• B DL – Lowest Service : Lowest downlink bearer defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
TX i ic
• N Ant – TX : Number of MIMO transmission (downlink) antennas defined for the cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• N Ant – RX : Number of MIMO reception (downlink) antennas defined for the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi.
• Mobility M i : Mobility used for the calculations.
Mi
• Subchannel allocation mode used by the downlink permutation zone PZ DL assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile
Mi as calculated in "Permutation Zone Selection" on page 714.
M
BLER BDL : Downlink block error rate read from the graphs available in the WiMAX equipment assigned to the
i
•
terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Calculations
The traffic and pilot C/N for a cell TXi(ic) are calculated as follows for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi:
TX ic TX ic TX ic
i i i
CNR Traffic = C Traffic – n DL
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
CNR Pilot = C Pilot – n DL
Bearer Determination:
The bearers available for selection in the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi’s WiMAX equipment are the ones:
• Which are common between Mi’s and TXi(ic)’s equipment (bearer indexes for which selection thresholds are
defined in both equipment), if the corresponding option has been set in the Atoll.ini file. For more information,
see the Administrator Manual.
• Whose indexes are within the range defined by the lowest and the highest bearer indexes defined for the service
being accessed by Mi.
Mi TX i ic Mi TX i ic
• Whose selection thresholds are less than the traffic or pilot C/N at Mi: T B CNR Traffic or T B CNR Pilot
Mi
If the cell supports MIMO, the STTD/MRC or SU-MIMO diversity gain, G Div – DL , corresponding to the bearer is
applied to its selection threshold. The gain is read from the properties of the WiMAX equipment assigned to the
TX i ic Mi Mi
pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi for N Ant – TX , N Ant – RX , the subchannel allocation mode of PZ DL , Mobility M i ,
M
BLER B DL .
i
726
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
DL
The additional diversity gain defined for the clutter class of the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi G Div is also
applied. Therefore, the bearers available for selection are all the bearers defined in the WiMAX equipment for
which the following is true:
M M TX ic
i i DL i
T B – G Div – DL – G Div CNR Traffic
Mi Mi TX i ic
DL
T B – G Div – DL – G Div CNR Pilot
The bearer selected for data transfer depends on the bearer selection criterion of the scheduler used by the cell TXi(ic).
• Bearer Index
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest index.
• Peak MAC Throughput
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest downlink peak
MAC channel throughput as calculated in "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, Allocated Bandwidth Throughput,
and Per-User Throughput Calculation" on page 743.
• Effective MAC Throughput
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest downlink effective
MAC channel throughput as calculated in "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, Allocated Bandwidth Throughput,
and Per-User Throughput Calculation" on page 743.
MIMO – STTD/MRC and SU-MIMO Diversity Gain:
Once the bearer is known, the traffic and pilot C/N calculated above become:
TX i ic TX i ic Mi
DL
CNR Traffic = CNR Traffic + G Div – DL + G Div
TX i ic TX i ic Mi
DL
CNR Pilot = CNR Pilot + G Div – DL + G Div
Mi
Where G Div – DL is the STTD/MRC or SU-MIMO diversity gain corresponding to the selected bearer.
Output
TX ic
i
• CNR Traffic : Traffic C/N from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ic
• CNR Pilot : Pilot C/N from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Input
TX ic
i
• C Traffic : Received traffic signal level from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated in "Traffic
and Pilot Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 715.
TX ic
i
• C Pilot : Received pilot signal level from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated in "Traffic
and Pilot Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 715.
TX ic
i
• n DL : Downlink noise for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Traffic and Pilot Noise Calculation (DL)" on page 717.
727
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX jc
j
• I DL : Effective downlink traffic and pilot interference from any cell TXj(jc) calculated for a pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi covered by a cell TXi(ic) as explained in "Traffic and Pilot Interference Calculation (DL)" on page 718.
Inter – Tech
• NRDL : Inter-technology downlink noise rise.
TX ic
i
• T AMS : AMS threshold defined for the cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• T B : Bearer selection thresholds of the bearers defined in the WiMAX equipment used by Mi’s terminal.
M
i
• B DL – Highest Service : Highest downlink bearer defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
Mi
• B DL – Lowest Service : Lowest downlink bearer defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
TX i ic
• N Ant – TX : Number of MIMO transmission (downlink) antennas defined for the cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• N Ant – RX : Number of MIMO reception (downlink) antennas defined for the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi.
• Mobility M i : Mobility used for the calculations.
Mi
• Subchannel allocation mode used by the downlink permutation zone PZ DL assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile
Mi as calculated in "Permutation Zone Selection" on page 714.
M
BLER BDL : Downlink block error rate read from the graphs available in the WiMAX equipment assigned to the
i
•
terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Inter – Tech
• I DL : Downlink inter-technology interference as calculated in "Traffic and Pilot Interference Calculation (DL)"
on page 718.
Calculations
The traffic and pilot C/(I+N) for a cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi:
TXj jc TX i ic
TX i ic
TX i ic IDL n
DL
------------------- --------------------- Inter – Tech
Inter – Tech
CINR Traffic = C Traffic – 10 Log 10 + I DL + 10 + NR DL and
10 10
All TXj jc
TXj jc TX i ic
TX i ic TX i ic IDL n DL
------------------- --------------------- Inter – Tech
Inter – Tech
CINR Pilot = C Pilot – 10 Log 10 + I DL + 10 + NR DL
10 10
All TXj jc
The Traffic Total Noise (I+N) for a cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi:
TX ic
TX j jc n DL
i
TX i ic I DL ---------------------
= 10 Log ------------------
10 + I DL + NR Inter – Tech
- Inter – Tech 10
I + N DL + 10
10 DL
All TX j jc
Bearer Determination:
The bearers available for selection in the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi’s WiMAX equipment are the ones:
• Which are common between Mi’s and TXi(ic)’s equipment (bearer indexes for which selection thresholds are
defined in both equipment), if the corresponding option has been set in the Atoll.ini file. For more information,
see the Administrator Manual.
• Whose indexes are within the range defined by the lowest and the highest bearer indexes defined for the service
being accessed by Mi.
Mi TX i ic Mi TX i ic
• Whose selection thresholds are less than the traffic or pilot C/(I+N) at Mi: T B CINR Traffic or T B CINR Pilot
728
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
M
i
If the cell supports MIMO, the STTD/MRC or SU-MIMO diversity gain, G Div – DL , corresponding to the bearer is
applied to its selection threshold. The gain is read from the properties of the WiMAX equipment assigned to the
TX ic M M
i i i
pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi for N Ant – TX , N Ant – RX , the subchannel allocation mode of PZ DL , Mobility M i ,
M
BLER B DL .
i
DL
The additional diversity gain defined for the clutter class of the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi G Div is also
applied. Therefore, the bearers available for selection are all the bearers defined in the WiMAX equipment for
which the following is true:
Mi Mi TX i ic
DL
T B – G Div – DL – G Div CINR Traffic
Mi Mi TX i ic
DL
T B – G Div – DL – G Div CINR Pilot
The bearer selected for data transfer depends on the bearer selection criterion of the scheduler used by the cell TXi(ic).
• Bearer Index
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest index.
• Peak MAC Throughput
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest downlink peak
MAC channel throughput as calculated in "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, Allocated Bandwidth Throughput,
and Per-User Throughput Calculation" on page 743.
• Effective MAC Throughput
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest downlink effective
MAC channel throughput as calculated in "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, Allocated Bandwidth Throughput,
and Per-User Throughput Calculation" on page 743.
MIMO – STTD/MRC and SU-MIMO Diversity Gain:
Once the bearer is known, the traffic and pilot C/(I+N) calculated above become:
TX i ic TX i ic Mi
DL
CINR Traffic = CINR Traffic + G Div – DL + G Div
TX i ic TX i ic Mi
DL
CINR Pilot = CINR Pilot + G Div – DL + G Div
M
i
Where G Div – DL is the STTD/MRC or SU-MIMO diversity gain corresponding to the selected bearer.
Output
TX i ic
• CINR Traffic : Traffic C/(I+N) from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ic
• CINR Pilot : Pilot C/(I+N) from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ic
• I + N DL : Traffic Total noise from the interfering cells TXj(jc) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by a cell
TXi(ic).
Mi
• B DL : Bearer assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the downlink.
M
i
• P Max : Maximum transmission power of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi without power
control.
Mi
• P Eff : Effective transmission power of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi after power control as
calculated in "Traffic C/(I+N) and Bearer Calculation (UL)" on page 737.
729
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX
i
• E SA : Number of antenna elements defined for the smart antenna equipment used by the transmitter TXi.
TX
i
• G : Transmitter antenna gain for the antenna used by the transmitter TXi.
TX TX TX
i i i
• Without smart antennas: G is the transmitter antenna gain, i.e., G = G Ant .
TX i TX i TX i
• With smart antennas: G is the uplink smart antenna beamforming gain, i.e., G = G SA = 10 Log E SA .
For more information on the calculation of G SA , refer to section "Beamforming Smart Antenna Models" on
page 43.
TX i TX i
• L : Total transmitter losses for the transmitter TXi ( L = L Total – UL ).
TX i
• L Path : Path loss ( L Path = L Model + L Ant ).
• L Model : Loss on the transmitter-receiver path (path loss) calculated using a propagation model.
TX i
• L Ant : Antenna attenuation (from antenna patterns) calculated for the antenna used by the transmitter TXi.
• M Shadowing – Model : Shadowing margin based on the model standard deviation.
In coverage predictions, shadowing margins are taken into account when the option "Shadowing taken into account"
is selected.
• L Indoor : Indoor losses taken into account when the option "Indoor coverage" is selected.
Mi
• L : Receiver terminal losses for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• G : Receiver terminal’s antenna gain for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• L Ant : Receiver terminal’s antenna attenuation calculated for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
M
i
For calculating the useful signal level from the best serving cell, L Ant is determined in the direction (H,V) = (0,0) from
Mi
the antenna patterns of the antenna used by Mi. For calculating the interfering signal level from any interferer, L Ant
is determined in the direction of the interfering cell from the antenna patterns of the antenna used by Mi, while the
antenna is pointed towards Mi’s best serving cell.
Mi
• L Body : Body loss defined for the service used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Calculations
The received traffic signal level (dBm) from a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi at its serving cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows:
Mi Mi TX i TX i Mi Mi
C UL = EIRP UL – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body
Where EIRP is the effective isotropic radiated power of the terminal calculated as follows:
Mi Mi Mi Mi
EIRP UL = P +G –L
Mi Mi Mi Mi
With P = P Max without power control at the start of the calculations, and is the P = P Eff after power control.
Output
Mi
• C UL : Received uplink signal level from the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi at a cell TXi(ic).
730
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
Input
• K: Boltzmann’s constant.
• T: Temperature in Kelvin.
M
i
PZ
UL
• N SCa – Used : Number of subcarriers used by the uplink permutation zone of a cell TXi(ic) assigned to Mi.
TX i ic
• N SCa – Total : Total number of subcarriers defined for the frame configuration of a cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• F Sampling : Sampling frequency for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Calculation of Sampling Frequency" on page 740.
TX ic
i
• nf : Noise figure of the cell TXi(ic).
Calculations
The uplink noise is the sum of the thermal noise and the noise figure of the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
n UL = n 0 – UL + nf
Output
TX i ic
• n UL : Uplink noise for the cell TXi(ic).
Mj
• C UL : Uplink signal level received at a cell TXi(ic) from an interfering mobile Mj covered by a cell TXj(jc) as calculated in
"Traffic Signal Level Calculation (UL)" on page 729.
• M Shadowing – Model : Shadowing margin based on the model standard deviation.
• M Shadowing – C I : Shadowing margin based on the C/I standard deviation.
In Monte Carlo simulations, interfering signal levels already include M Shadowing – Model , as explained in "Traffic Signal
Level Calculation (UL)" on page 729.
In coverage predictions, the ratio M Shadowing – Model – M Shadowing – C I is applied to the interfering signals (for more
information, see "Shadow Fading Model" on page 90). As the interfering signal levels already include
731
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
M Shadowing – Model , M Shadowing – C I is added to the received interfering signal levels in order to achieve the ratio
M Shadowing – Model – M Shadowing – C I :
M M
j j
C UL = C UL + M Shadowing – C I
In coverage predictions, shadowing margins are taken into account when the option "Shadowing taken into account"
is selected.
TX i ic – TX j jc
• rO : Total channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Co- and Adjacent
Channel Overlaps Calculation" on page 702.
Mj
• TL UL : Uplink traffic load of the interfering mobile Mj.
Traffic loads are calculated during Monte Carlo simulations as explained in "Scheduling and Radio Resource
Allocation" on page 748.
Calculations
The uplink interference received at a cell TXi(ic) from an interfering mobile Mj covered by a cell TXj(jc) is calculated as follows:
Mj Mj TX i ic – TX j jc Mj TX i ic – TX j jc
I UL = C UL + f O + f TL – UL + f Seg – UL
Calculations for the interference reduction factors due to channel overlapping, uplink traffic load, and uplink segmentation
are explained below:
Interference reduction due to the co- and adjacent channel overlap between the studied and the interfering cells:
Interference reduction due to the co- and adjacent channel overlap between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) is calculated
as follows:
TX i ic – TX j jc TX i ic – TX j jc
fO = 10 Log r O
M M
f TL – UL = 10 Log TL UL
j j
TX ic – TX jc TX ic – TX jc
= 10 Log p Collision – UL
i j i j
f Seg – UL
TX i ic – TX j jc
Where p Collision – UL is the collision probability between the subcarriers of the uplink segments being used by the
interfered and interfering cells. It is determined during Monte Carlo simulations as follows:
TX i ic – TX j jc SC Com
p Collision – UL = ------------------
-
TX i ic
SC
TX i ic
Where, SCCom is the number of subchannels common in TXi(ic) and TXj(jc), SC is the number of subchannels in
the cell TXi(ic).
The segment numbers and the cell permutation base numbers (Cell PermBase) are determined from the cell’s
preamble index. The mapping between the preamble index, the segment number, and Cell PermBase is available in
the IEEE specifications. This mapping is performed in Atoll as follows:
Preamble Index ( PI )
PI 96 96 PI 114
Range: 0 to 113
Cell PermBase ( PB )
PI Modulo 32 PI – 96
Range: 0 to 31
732
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
In Monte Carlo simulations, Atoll calculates two separate noise rise values; for the mobiles served by the segmented
zone of the interfered cell Atoll calculates the uplink segmented noise rise, and for the mobiles served by the non-
segmented zones of the interfered cell Atoll calculates the uplink noise rise.
In coverage predictions, point analysis, and calculations on subscriber lists, according to the zone, segmented or non-
segmented, that covers the pixel, receiver, or subscriber, Atoll uses either the uplink segmented noise rise or the
uplink noise rise to calculate the C/(I+N). For more information on the calculation of the uplink noise rise, see "Noise
Rise Calculation (UL)" on page 733.
Output
Mj
• I UL : Uplink interference signal level received at a cell TXi(ic) from an interfering mobile Mj covered by a cell TXj(jc).
Input
Mj
• I UL : Uplink interference signal levels received at a cell TXi(ic) from interfering mobiles Mj covered by other cells TXj(jc)
as calculated in "Traffic Interference Signal Levels Calculation (UL)" on page 731.
TX i ic
• n UL : Uplink noise for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Traffic Noise Calculation (UL)" on page 730.
Inter – Tech
• NR UL : Inter-technology uplink noise rise.
Calculations
The uplink noise rise and total noise (I+N) for the cell TXi(ic) are calculated as follows:
• Without smart antennas:
For any mobile Mi covered by a non-segmented zone in the interfered cell TXi(ic), Atoll calculates the UL noise rise as
follows:
IMj TX i ic
UL n
TX i ic non-seg M i
UL -
-------------------- TX i ic
= 10 Log
10
-------------------------------------------- Inter – Tech
NR UL
10 10 + 10
+ NRUL – n UL
All Mj
All TX
j
jc
For any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the non-segmented zone in the interfered cell TXi(ic), Atoll
calculates the uplink total noise (I+N) as follows:
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
I + N UL = NR UL + n UL
For any mobile Mi covered by the segmented zone in the interfered cell TXi(ic), Atoll calculates the segmented zone
UL noise rise as follows:
IMj TX i ic
UL n UL
TX i ic seg M i
--------------------- TX i ic
= 10 Log
10
--------------------------------- Inter – Tech
NR UL – Seg 10 10 + 10 + NR UL – n UL
All M j
All TX
j
jc
For any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the segmented zone in the interfered cell TXi(ic), Atoll calculates
the uplink total noise (I+N) as follows:
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
I + N UL = NR UL – Seg + n UL
733
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
TX i ic
2
I + N UL = I UL + n I
Output
TX i ic
• NRUL : Non-segmented uplink noise rise for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• NRUL – Seg : Segmented uplink noise rise for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• NRUL : Angular distribution of the uplink noise rise for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic TX i ic
• I + N UL or I + N UL : Total Noise for a cell TXi(ic) calculated for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
M
i
• C UL : Received uplink signal level from the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi at its serving cell TXi(ic) as calculated in
"Traffic Signal Level Calculation (UL)" on page 729.
TX i ic
• n UL : Uplink noise for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Traffic Noise Calculation (UL)" on page 730.
TX i ic
• T AMS : AMS threshold defined for the cell TXi(ic).
TX ic
i
• T B – Lowest : Bearer selection threshold of the lowest bearer in the WiMAX equipment assigned to the cell TXi(ic).
Mi
PZ UL
• N SC : Number of subchannels per channel defined for the uplink permutation zone assigned to the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi as calculated in "Permutation Zone Selection" on page 714.
Mi
PZ UL = 8
• N SC Seg : Number of subchannels per segment for the first uplink PUSC permutation zone.
Mi
• P Max : Maximum transmission power of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• P Min : Minimum transmission power of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
• M PC : Power control margin defined in the global network settings.
M
i
• T B : Bearer selection thresholds of the bearers defined in the WiMAX equipment used bythe cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• B UL – Highest Service : Highest downlink bearer defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
M
i
• B UL – Lowest Service : Lowest downlink bearer defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
Mi
• N Ant – TX : Number of MIMO transmission (uplink) antennas defined for the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi.
TX i ic
• N Ant – RX : Number of MIMO reception (uplink) antennas defined for the cell TXi(ic).
• Mobility M i : Mobility used for the calculations.
M
i
• Subchannel allocation mode used by the uplink permutation zone PZ UL assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile
Mi as calculated in "Permutation Zone Selection" on page 714.
734
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
M
BLER B UL : Uplink block error rate read from the graphs available in the WiMAX equipment assigned to the cell
i
•
TXi(ic).
Calculations
The uplink C/N from a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi at its serving cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows:
M M TX ic
i i i
CNR UL = C UL – n UL
Bearer Determination:
The bearers available for selection in the cell TXi(ic)’s WiMAX equipment are the ones:
• Which are common between Mi’s and TXi(ic)’s equipment (bearer indexes for which selection thresholds are
defined in both equipment), if the corresponding option has been set in the Atoll.ini file. For more information,
see the Administrator Manual.
• Whose indexes are within the range defined by the lowest and the highest bearer indexes defined for the service
being accessed by Mi.
Mi Mi
• Whose selection thresholds are less than the uplink C/N at Mi: T B CNR UL
TX i ic
If the cell supports MIMO, the STTD/MRC, SU-MIMO diversity or MU-MIMO diversity gain, G Div – UL ,
corresponding to the bearer is applied to its selection threshold. The gain is read from the properties of the
Mi TX i ic Mi
WiMAX equipment assigned to the cell TXi(ic) for N Ant – RX , N Ant – TX , the subchannel allocation mode of PZ UL ,
M
Mobility M i , BLER B UL .
i
UL
The additional diversity gain defined for the clutter class of the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi G Div is also
applied. Therefore, the bearers available for selection are all the bearers defined in the WiMAX equipment for
which the following is true:
Mi TX i ic Mi
UL
T B – G Div – UL – G Div CNR UL
The bearer selected for data transfer depends on the bearer selection criterion of the scheduler used by the cell TXi(ic).
• Bearer Index
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest index.
• Peak MAC Throughput
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest uplink peak MAC
channel throughput as calculated in "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, Allocated Bandwidth Throughput, and
Per-User Throughput Calculation" on page 743.
• Effective MAC Throughput
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest uplink effective
MAC channel throughput as calculated in "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, Allocated Bandwidth Throughput,
and Per-User Throughput Calculation" on page 743.
MIMO – STTD/MRC, SU-MIMO Diversity, and MU-MIMO Diversity Gain:
Once the bearer is known, the uplink C/N calculated above becomes:
Mi Mi TX i ic
UL
CNR UL = CNR UL + G Div – UL + G Div
TX i ic
Where G Div – UL is the STTD/MRC, SU-MIMO diversity, or MU-MIMO diversity gain corresponding to the selected
bearer.
Uplink Subchannelisation:
The uplink subchannelisation depends on the uplink bandwidth allocation target defined for the scheduler used by the
cell TXi(ic). The uplink C/N calculated above is given for the total number of subchannels associated with the
735
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
M
i
PZ
UL
permutation zone, i.e., N SC . Subchannelisation is performed for all the pixels, subscribers, or mobiles in the uplink,
and may reduce the number of used subchannels in order to satisfy the selected target.
• Full Bandwidth
Full channel width is used by each mobile in the uplink. As there is no reduction in the bandwidth used for
transmission, there is no gain in the uplink C/N.
• Maintain Connection
The bandwidth used for transmission by a mobile is reduced only if the uplink C/N is not enough to even access
the lowest bearer. For example, as a mobile moves from good to bad radio conditions, the number of subchannels
used by it for transmission in uplink are reduced one by one in order to improve the uplink C/N. The calculation of
the gain introduced by the subchannelisation is explained below.
• Best Bearer
The bandwidth used for transmission by a mobile is reduced in order to improve the uplink C/N enough to access
the best bearer. For example, if using 5 subchannels, a mobile is able to access the best bearer, and using 6 it would
only get access to the second best, it will be assigned 5 subchannels as the used uplink bandwidth. Although using
4 subchannels, its uplink C/N will be better than when using 5, the uplink bandwidth is not reduced to 4 because
it does not provide any gain in terms of the bearer, i.e., the mobile already has the best bearer using 5
subchannels. The calculation of the gain introduced by the bandwidth reduction is explained below.
The definition of the best bearer depends on the bearer selection criterion of the scheduler used by the cell TXi(ic),
i.e., bearer with the highest index, with the highest peak MAC throughput, or with the highest effective MAC
throughput.
The uplink subchannelisation may result in the use of a number of subchannels which is less than the total number of
subchannels associated with the permutation zone. The gain related to this bandwidth reduction is applied to the
uplink C/N:
Mi
PZUL
Mi Mi N SC
CNR UL = CNR UL+ 10 Log -----------------
Final All SC N Mi
SC – UL
Mi
M PZ
Min i UL
Where N SC – UL Service N SC – UL N SC for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by a non-segmented
Mi
Mi PZ UL = 8
Min
permutation zone in the interfered cell TXi(ic), and N SC – UL Service N SC – UL N SC Seg for any pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi covered by the segmented uplink PUSC zone in the interfered cell TXi(ic).
The pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi reduces its transmission power so that the uplink C/N from it at its cell is just
enough to get the selected bearer.
Mi Mi Mi TX i ic TX i ic
If with P = P Max AND CNR UL T Mi + M PC , where T Mi is the bearer selection threshold, from the WiMAX
B UL B UL
equipment assigned to the cell TXi(ic), for the bearer selected for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
The transmission power of Mi is reduced to determine the effective transmission power from the pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi as follows:
Mi Mi M i TX i ic Mi
P Eff = Max PMax – CNR UL – T M + M PC P Min
B i
UL
Mi Mi
CNR UL is calculated again using P Eff .
736
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
Output
M
i
• CNR UL : Uplink C/N from a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi at it serving cell TXi(ic).
Input
Mi
• CNR UL : Uplink C/N from a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi at it serving cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Traffic C/N
Calculation (UL)" on page 734.
TX i ic
• NR UL : Non-segmented uplink noise rise for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Noise Rise Calculation (UL)" on
page 733.
TX i ic
• NR UL – Seg : Segmented uplink noise rise for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Noise Rise Calculation (UL)" on page 733.
TX i ic
• NR UL : Angular distribution of the uplink noise rise for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Noise Rise Calculation
(UL)" on page 733.
TX ic
i
• T AMS : AMS threshold defined for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• T B – Lowest : Bearer selection threshold of the lowest bearer in the WiMAX equipment assigned to the cell TXi(ic).
Mi
PZ UL
• N SC : Number of subchannels per channel defined for the uplink permutation zone assigned to the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi as calculated in "Permutation Zone Selection" on page 714.
M
i
PZ UL = 8
• N SC Seg : Number of subchannels per segment for the first uplink PUSC permutation zone.
Mi
• P Max : Maximum transmission power of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• P Min : Minimum transmission power of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
• M PC : Power control margin defined in the global network settings.
Mi
• T B : Bearer selection thresholds of the bearers defined in the WiMAX equipment used bythe cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• B UL – Highest Service : Highest downlink bearer defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
Mi
• B UL – Lowest Service : Lowest downlink bearer defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
M
i
• N Ant – TX : Number of MIMO transmission (uplink) antennas defined for the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi.
TX i ic
• N Ant – RX : Number of MIMO reception (uplink) antennas defined for the cell TXi(ic).
• Mobility M i : Mobility used for the calculations.
Mi
• Subchannel allocation mode used by the uplink permutation zone PZ UL assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile
Mi as calculated in "Permutation Zone Selection" on page 714.
737
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
M
BLER BUL : Uplink block error rate read from the graphs available in the WiMAX equipment assigned to the cell
i
•
TXi(ic).
Calculations
The uplink C/(I+N) for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi at a cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows:
• Without smart antennas:
For any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the non-segmented zone in the interfered cell TXi(ic):
Mi Mi TX i ic
CINR UL = CNR UL – NRUL
For any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the segmented zone in the interfered cell TXi(ic):
Mi Mi TX i ic
CINR UL = CNR UL – NRUL – Seg
Bearer Determination:
The bearers available for selection in the cell TXi(ic)’s WiMAX equipment are the ones:
• Which are common between Mi’s and TXi(ic)’s equipment (bearer indexes for which selection thresholds are
defined in both equipment), if the corresponding option has been set in the Atoll.ini file. For more information,
see the Administrator Manual.
• Whose indexes are within the range defined by the lowest and the highest bearer indexes defined for the service
being accessed by Mi.
Mi Mi Mi Mi
• Whose selection thresholds are less than the uplink C/(I+N) at Mi: T B CINR UL and T B CINR UL
TX ic
i
If the cell supports MIMO, the STTD/MRC, SU-MIMO diversity or MU-MIMO diversity gain, G Div – UL ,
corresponding to the bearer is applied to its selection threshold. The gain is read from the properties of the
M TX ic M
i i i
WiMAX equipment assigned to the cell TXi(ic) for N Ant – RX , N Ant – TX , the subchannel allocation mode of PZ UL ,
M
Mobility M i , BLER B UL .
i
UL
The additional diversity gain defined for the clutter class of the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi G Div is also
applied. Therefore, the bearers available for selection are all the bearers defined in the WiMAX equipment for
which the following is true:
Mi TX i ic Mi
UL
T B – G Div – UL – G Div CINR UL and
Mi TX i ic Mi
UL
T B – G Div – UL – G Div CINR UL
The bearer selected for data transfer depends on the bearer selection criterion of the scheduler used by the cell TXi(ic).
• Bearer Index
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest index.
• Peak MAC Throughput
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest uplink peak MAC
channel throughput as calculated in "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, Allocated Bandwidth Throughput, and
Per-User Throughput Calculation" on page 743.
• Effective MAC Throughput
738
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest uplink effective
MAC channel throughput as calculated in "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, Allocated Bandwidth Throughput,
and Per-User Throughput Calculation" on page 743.
MIMO – STTD/MRC, SU-MIMO Diversity, and MU-MIMO Diversity Gain:
Once the bearer is known, the uplink C/(I+N) calculated above becomes:
Mi Mi TX i ic
UL
CNR UL = CNR UL + G Div – UL + G Div
Mi Mi TX i ic
UL
CINR UL = CINR UL + G Div – UL + G Div and
Mi Mi TX i ic
UL
CINR UL = CINR UL + G Div – UL + G Div
TX i ic
Where G Div – UL is the STTD/MRC, SU-MIMO diversity, or MU-MIMO diversity gain corresponding to the selected
bearer.
Uplink Subchannelisation:
The uplink subchannelisation depends on the uplink bandwidth allocation target defined for the scheduler used by the
cell TXi(ic). The uplink C/(I+N) calculated above is given for the total number of subchannels associated with the
Mi
PZ UL
permutation zone, i.e., N SC . Subchannelisation is performed for all the pixels, subscribers, or mobiles in the uplink,
and may reduce the number of used subchannels in order to satisfy the selected target.
• Full Bandwidth
Full channel width is used by each mobile in the uplink. As there is no reduction in the bandwidth used for
transmission, there is no gain in the uplink C/(I+N).
• Maintain Connection
The bandwidth used for transmission by a mobile is reduced only if the uplink C/(I+N) is not enough to even access
the lowest bearer. For example, as a mobile moves from good to bad radio conditions, the number of subchannels
used by it for transmission in uplink are reduced one by one in order to improve the uplink C/(I+N). The calculation
of the gain introduced by the subchannelisation is explained below.
• Best Bearer
The bandwidth used for transmission by a mobile is reduced in order to improve the uplink C/(I+N) enough to
access the best bearer. For example, if using 5 subchannels, a mobile is able to access the best bearer, and using
6 it would only get access to the second best, it will be assigned 5 subchannels as the used uplink bandwidth.
Although using 4 subchannels, its uplink C/(I+N) will be better than when using 5, the uplink bandwidth is not
reduced to 4 because it does not provide any gain in terms of the bearer, i.e., the mobile already has the best
bearer using 5 subchannels. The calculation of the gain introduced by the bandwidth reduction is explained below.
The definition of the best bearer depends on the bearer selection criterion of the scheduler used by the cell TXi(ic),
i.e., bearer with the highest index, with the highest peak MAC throughput, or with the highest effective MAC
throughput.
The uplink subchannelisation may result in the use of a number of subchannels which is less than the total number of
subchannels associated with the permutation zone. The gain related to this bandwidth reduction is applied to the
uplink C/(I+N):
Mi
PZUL
Mi Mi N SC
CINR UL = CINR UL+ 10 Log -----------------
Final All SC NMi
SC – UL
Mi
M PZ
Min i UL
Where N SC – UL Service N SC – UL N SC for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by a non-segmented
Mi
Min Mi PZ UL = 8
permutation zone in the interfered cell TXi(ic), and N SC – UL Service N SC – UL N SC Seg for any pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi covered by the segmented uplink PUSC zone in the interfered cell TXi(ic).
739
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Once the subchannelisation is performed, Atoll continues to work with the C/(I+N) given by the subchannelisation,
M M
i i
i.e., CINR UL = CINR UL .
Final
The pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi reduces its transmission power so that the uplink C/(I+N) from it at its cell is just
enough to get the selected bearer.
Mi Mi Mi TX i ic TX i ic
If with P = P Max AND CINR UL T Mi + M PC , where T Mi is the bearer selection threshold, from the WiMAX
B UL B UL
equipment assigned to the cell TXi(ic), for the bearer selected for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
The transmission power of Mi is reduced to determine the effective transmission power from the pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi as follows:
Mi Mi M i TX i ic Mi
P Eff = Max PMax – CINR UL – T M + M PC P Min
B i
UL
Mi Mi
CINR UL is calculated again using P Eff .
Output
Mi Mi
• CINR UL or CINR UL : Uplink C/(I+N) from a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi at it serving cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• N SC – UL : Number of subchannels used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the uplink after subchannelisation.
Mi
• P Eff : Effective transmission power of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
M
i
• B UL : Bearer assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the uplink.
TX ic
i
• f Sampling : Sampling factor defined for the frequency band of the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• W Channel : Channel bandwidth of the cell TXi(ic).
Calculations
Output
TX i ic
• F Sampling : Sampling frequency for the cell TXi(ic).
740
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
TX ic
i
• F Sampling : Sampling frequency for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Calculation of Sampling Frequency" on page 740.
TX i ic
• N SCa – Total : Total number of subcarriers defined for the frame configuration of a cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• r CP : Cyclic prefix ratio defined for the frame configuration of TXi(ic) or, otherwise, in the global network settings.
Calculations
Output
TX i ic
• D Symbol : Total symbol duration of one modulation symbol for a cell TXi(ic).
741
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Calculations
The downlink and the uplink subframes of a TDD frame are separated in time by the TTG and the RTG time guards.
First of all, Atoll calculates the useful frame duration by removing the TTG and RTG from the frame duration:
Used TDD TDD
D Frame = D Frame – D TTG – D RTG
Then, Atoll calculates the frame duration in terms of number of symbol durations:
TX ic D Used
N SD – Used Frame = Floor -----------------
i Frame
-
TX i ic
D Symbol
Next, Atoll calculates the downlink and uplink cell capacities as follows:
Downlink Subframe:
Atoll calculates the number of symbol durations in the downlink subframe excluding the fixed overhead defined in the
global network settings:
TX ic TX ic
N SD – DL Subframe = RoundUp N SD – Used Frame r DL – Frame – O Fixed if DL:UL ratio is defined in percentage.
i i TDD DL
TDD
TX i ic TXi ic N SD – DL DL
Or N SD – DL Subframe = RoundUp N SD – Used Frame ------------------------------------------
TDD TDD
– O Fixed if DL:UL ratio is defined in
N SD – DL + N SD – UL
fraction.
The RoundUp function rounds a float value up to the nearest integer value.
The total number of symbols in the downlink subframe after removing the variable overhead is:
Mi
DL
TX i ic TX i ic TXi ic PZ DL O Variable
R DL = N Sym – DL Subframe = Floor N SD – DL Subframe N SCa – Data 1 – --------------------
-
100
Uplink Subframe:
Atoll calculates the number of symbol durations in the uplink subframe excluding the fixed overhead defined in the
global network settings:
TX ic TX ic
N SD – UL Subframe = RoundDown N SD – Used Frame 1 – r DL – Frame – O Fixed
i i TDD UL
if DL:UL ratio is defined in
percentage.
TDD
TX i ic TX i ic N SD – UL UL
Or N SD – UL Subframe = RoundDown N SD – Used Frame ------------------------------------------
TDD TDD
– O Fixed if DL:UL ratio is defined in
N SD – DL + N SD – UL
fraction.
The RoundDown function rounds a float value down to the nearest integer value.
The total number of symbols in the uplink subframe after removing the variable overhead is:
Mi
UL
TX ic
i
TX ic
i TX i ic PZ
UL O Variable
R UL = N Sym – UL Subframe = Floor N SD – UL Subframe N SCa – Data 1 – ---------------------
100
Output
TX i ic TX i ic
• R DL = N Sym – DL Subframe : Amount of downlink resources in the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic TX i ic
• R UL = N Sym – UL Subframe : Amount of uplink resources in the cell TXi(ic).
742
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
Input
Calculations
There are no transmit and receive time guards in FDD systems. Therefore, the downlink and the uplink subframe durations
are the same as the frame duration.
X
D Subframe = D Frame
The subframe durations in terms of the number of symbol durations excluding the fixed overheads are:
TX ic DX
N SD – X Subframe = Floor ----------------------
i Subframe
- – O XFixed
TX i ic
D Symbol
The total numbers of symbols in the downlink or uplink subframes after removing the variable overheads are:
Mi
X
TX i ic TX i ic TXi ic PZ X O Variable
RX = N Sym – X Subframe = Floor N SD – X Subframe N SCa – Data 1 – --------------------
-
100
Output
TX i ic TX i ic
• RX = N Sym – X Subframe : Amount of downlink or uplink resources in the cell TXi(ic).
Input
TX i ic
• TL DL – Max : Maximum downlink traffic load for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• TL UL – Max : Maximum uplink traffic load for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• R DL : Amount of downlink resources in the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Calculation of Total Cell Resources" on
page 740.
TX i ic
• R UL : Amount of uplink resources in the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Calculation of Total Cell Resources" on
page 740.
• M : Bearer efficiency (bits/symbol) of the bearer assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the downlink in
i
B DL
"Traffic and Pilot C/(I+N) and Bearer Calculation (DL)" on page 727.
• M : Bearer efficiency (bits/symbol) of the bearer assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the uplink in
i
B UL
743
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Calculations
Downlink:
TX i ic
R DL M
Mi i
B DL
• Peak MAC Channel Throughput: CTP P – DL = ---------------------------------
D Frame
In the above formula, the actual value of D Frame is used to calculate the channel throughput for coverage predictions,
while D Frame = 1 sec for Monte Carlo simulations.
TX ic
i
For proportional fair schedulers, the channel throughput is increased by the multi-user diversity gain G MUG – DL read
from the scheduler properties for the Mobility M i and the number of users connected to the cell in downlink.
TX i ic
R DL M
i
Mi B TX ic
i
DL
CTP P – DL = --------------------------------- G MUG – DL
D Frame
TX ic M
i i Max
G MUG – DL = 1 if CINR Traffic CINR MUG
If the multi-user diversity gain for the exact value of the number of connected users is not available in the graph, it is
interpolated from the gain values available for the numbers of users just less than and just greater than the actual
number of users.
Downlink Segmentation:
M
i
If the permutation zone assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is the first downlink PUSC zone ( PZ DL = 0 )
and it is segmented, the channel throughput is calculated as:
744
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
M M
i i
CTP P – DL = CTP P – DL f Segment – DL
TX ic
i
• N Ant – TX : Number of MIMO transmission (downlink) antennas defined for the cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• N Ant – RX : Number of MIMO reception (downlink) antennas defined for the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
• Mobility M i : Mobility used for the calculations.
Mi
• Subchannel allocation mode used by the downlink permutation zone PZ DL assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi as calculated in "Permutation Zone Selection" on page 714.
M
i
• B DL : Bearer assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the downlink as explained in "Traffic and Pilot C/
(I+N) and Bearer Calculation (DL)" on page 727.
M
BLER B DL : Downlink block error rate read from the graphs available in the WiMAX equipment assigned to the
i
•
TX ic
i
terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi. BLER is determined for CINR Traffic .
Atoll also takes into account the SU-MIMO Gain Factor f SU – MIMO defined for the clutter class where the pixel,
subscriber, or mobile Mi is located.
Max
In case of SU-MIMO: Mi = Mi 1 + f SU – MIMO G SU – MIMO – 1
B DL B DL
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
Max
In case of AMS: Mi = Mi 1 + f SU – MIMO G SU – MIMO – 1 if CNR Preamble T AMS or CINR Preamble T AMS
B DL B DL
If the Max SU-MIMO Gain for the exact value of the C/(I+N) is not available in the table, it is interpolated from the gain
values available for the C/(I+N) just less than and just greater than the actual C/(I+N).
M M M
Effective MAC Channel Throughput: CTP E – DL = CTP P – DL 1 – BLER B DL
i i i
•
Mi
M
i i
M f TP – Scaling M
i
• Application Channel Throughput: CTP A – DL = CTP E – DL ------------------------
- – TP Offset
100
Mi Mi TX i ic
• Peak MAC Cell Capacity: Cap P – DL = CTP P – DL TL DL – Max
M M M
Effective MAC Cell Capacity: Cap E – DL = Cap P – DL 1 – BLER B DL
i i i
•
Mi
i
M
i
M f TP – Scaling M
i
• Application Cell Capacity: Cap A – DL = Cap E – DL ------------------------
- – TP Offset
100
Mi
Mi Cap P – DL
• Peak MAC Throughput per User: PUTP P – DL = -----------------------
-
TX i ic
N Users – DL
Mi
Mi Cap E – DL
• Effective MAC Throughput per User: PUTP E – DL = -----------------------
-
TX i ic
N Users – DL
Mi
Mi f TP – Scaling
Mi Mi
• Application Throughput per User: PUTP A – DL = PUTP E – DL ------------------------
- – TP Offset
100
745
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Uplink:
TX ic
i
R UL M
M i
i B
UL
• Peak MAC Channel Throughput: CTP P – UL = ---------------------------------
D Frame
In the above formula, the actual value of D Frame is used to calculate the channel throughput for coverage predictions,
while D Frame = 1 sec for Monte Carlo simulations.
TX i ic
For proportional fair schedulers, the channel throughput is increased by the multi-user diversity gain G MUG – UL read
from the scheduler properties for the Mobility M i and the number of users connected to the cell in uplink.
TX i ic
R UL Mi
Mi B TX ic
UL i
CTP P – UL = --------------------------------- G MUG – UL
D Frame
TX i ic Mi
Max
G MUG – UL = 1 if CINR UL CINR MUG
If the multi-user diversity gain for the exact value of the number of connected users is not available in the graph, it is
interpolated from the gain values available for the numbers of users just less than and just greater than the actual
number of users.
MIMO – SU-MIMO Gain:
If the permutation zone assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi supports SU-MIMO or AMS, SU-MIMO gain
Max
G SU – MIMO is applied to the bearer efficiency. The gain is read from the properties of the WiMAX equipment assigned
to the cell TXi(ic) for:
Mi
• N Ant – TX : Number of MIMO transmission (uplink) antennas defined for the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
TX ic
i
• N Ant – RX : Number of MIMO reception (uplink) antennas defined for the cell TXi(ic).
• Mobility M i : Mobility used for the calculations.
Mi
• Subchannel allocation mode used by the uplink permutation zone PZ UL assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi as calculated in "Permutation Zone Selection" on page 714.
Mi
• B UL : Bearer assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the uplink as explained in "Traffic C/(I+N) and Bearer
Calculation (UL)" on page 737.
M
BLER B UL : Uplink block error rate read from the graphs available in the WiMAX equipment assigned to the cell
i
•
Mi
TXi(ic). BLER is determined for CINR UL .
Atoll also takes into account the SU-MIMO Gain Factor f SU – MIMO defined for the clutter class where the pixel,
subscriber, or mobile Mi is located.
Max
In case of SU-MIMO: Mi = Mi 1 + fSU – MIMO G SU – MIMO – 1
B UL B UL
TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic TX i ic
Max
In case of AMS: Mi = Mi 1 + f SU – MIMO G SU – MIMO – 1 if CNR Preamble T AMS or CINR Preamble T AMS
B UL B UL
If the Max SU-MIMO Gain for the exact value of the C/(I+N) is not available in the table, it is interpolated from the gain
values available for the C/(I+N) just less than and just greater than the actual C/(I+N).
MIMO – MU-MIMO Gain (for uplink throughput coverage predictions only):
If the permutation zone assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi supports MU-MIMO and
TX ic TX ic TX ic TX ic
i i i i
CNR Preamble T MU – MIMO and N Ant – RX 2 , the MU-MIMO gain G MU – MIMO is applied to the channel throughput.
The MU-MIMO gain is read from the properties of the cell TXi(ic).
746
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
M M TX ic
i i i
CTP P – UL = CTP P – UL G MU – MIMO
M M M
Effective MAC Channel Throughput: CTP E – UL = CTP P – UL 1 – BLER B UL
i i i
•
M
i
Mi Mif TP – Scaling Mi
• Application Channel Throughput: CTP A – UL = CTP E – UL ------------------------
- – TP Offset
100
Mi Mi TX i ic
• Peak MAC Cell Capacity: Cap P – UL = CTP P – UL TL UL – Max
M M M
Effective MAC Cell Capacity: Cap E – UL = Cap P – UL 1 – BLER B UL
i i i
•
Mi
Mi Mi f TP – Scaling Mi
• Application Cell Capacity: Cap A – UL = Cap E – UL ------------------------
- – TP Offset
100
Mi
Mi Mi N SC – UL
• Peak MAC Allocated Bandwidth Throughput: ABTP P – UL = CTP P – UL -----------------
M
i
PZ
UL
N SC
M M M
Effective MAC Allocated Bandwidth Throughput: ABTP E – UL = ABTP P – UL 1 – BLER B UL
i i i
•
Mi
Mi Mif TP – Scaling Mi
• Application Allocated Bandwidth Throughput: ABTPA – UL = ABTP E – UL ------------------------
- – TPOffset
100
Mi Cap M i M
= Min -----------------------
- ABTPP –i UL
P – UL
• Peak MAC Throughput per User: PUTP P – UL TX i ic
N Users – UL
Mi Cap Mi M
= Min -----------------------
- ABTP E –i UL
E – UL
• Effective MAC Throughput per User: PUTP E – UL
TXi ic
N Users – UL
Mi
Mi Mi f TP – Scaling Mi
• Application Throughput per User: PUTP A – UL = PUTP E – UL ------------------------
- – TP Offset
100
Output
Mi
• CTP P – DL : Downlink peak MAC channel throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• CTP E – DL : Downlink effective MAC channel throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
M
i
• CTP A – DL : Downlink application channel throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• Cap P – DL : Downlink peak MAC cell capacity at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• Cap E – DL : Downlink effective MAC cell capacity at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• Cap A – DL : Downlink application cell capacity at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• PUTP P – DL : Downlink peak MAC throughput per user at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
M
i
• PUTP E – DL : Downlink effective MAC throughput per user at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• PUTP A – DL : Downlink application throughput per user at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• CTP P – UL : Uplink peak MAC channel throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• CTP E – UL : Uplink effective MAC channel throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• CTP A – UL : Uplink application channel throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
M
i
• Cap P – UL : Uplink peak MAC cell capacity at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
747
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
M
i
• Cap E – UL : Uplink effective MAC cell capacity at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
M
i
• Cap A – UL : Uplink application cell capacity at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
M
i
• ABTP P – UL : Uplink peak MAC allocated bandwidth throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• ABTP E – UL : Uplink effective MAC allocated bandwidth throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• ABTP A – UL : Uplink application allocated bandwidth throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• PUTP P – UL : Uplink peak MAC throughput per user at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• PUTP E – UL : Uplink effective MAC throughput per user at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• PUTP A – UL : Uplink application throughput per user at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ic
• TL DL – Max : Maximum downlink traffic load for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• TL UL – Max : Maximum uplink traffic load for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ic
• N Users – Max : Maximum number of users defined for the cell TXi(ic).
M
i
• QoS : QoS class of the service (UGS, ErtPS, rtPS, nrtPS, or Best Effort) accessed by a mobile Mi.
M
i
• p : Priority of the service accessed by a mobile Mi.
M
i
• TPD Min – DL : Downlink minimum throughput demand for the service accessed by a mobile Mi.
M
i
• TPD Min – UL : Uplink minimum throughput demand for the service accessed by a mobile Mi.
Mi
• TPD Max – DL : Downlink maximum throughput demand for the service accessed by a mobile Mi.
Mi
• TPD Max – UL : Uplink maximum throughput demand for the service accessed by a mobile Mi.
M TX ic
BLER BDL : Downlink block error rate read from the BLER vs. CINR Traffic graph available in the WiMAX equipment
i i
•
assigned to the terminal used by the mobile Mi.
M M
BLER BUL : Uplink block error rate read from the BLER vs. CINR UL graph available in the WiMAX equipment assigned
i i
•
to the cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• f TP – Scaling : Throughput scaling factor defined in the properties of the service used by the mobile Mi.
Mi
• TP Offset : Throughput offset defined in the properties of the service used by the mobile Mi.
Mi
• CTP P – DL : Downlink peak MAC channel throughput at the mobile Mi as calculated in "Throughput Calculation" on
page 740.
Mi
• CTP E – DL : Downlink effective MAC channel throughput at the mobile Mi as calculated in "Throughput Calculation" on
page 740.
748
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
M
i
• CTP P – UL : Uplink peak MAC channel throughput at the mobile Mi as calculated in "Throughput Calculation" on
page 740.
M
i
• CTP E – UL : Uplink effective MAC channel throughput at the mobile Mi as calculated in "Throughput Calculation" on
page 740.
Mi
• ABTP P – UL : Uplink peak MAC allocated bandwidth throughput at the mobile Mi as calculated in "Throughput
Calculation" on page 740.
QoS
• f Bias : Bias factor defined for the Biased (QoS Class) scheduling method.
Calculations
The following calculations are described for any cell TXi(ic) containing the users Mi for which it is the best server.
Mobile Selection:
TX ic
i
The scheduler selects N Users mobiles for the scheduling and RRM process. If the Monte Carlo user distribution has generated
TX i ic
a number of users which is less than N Users – Max , the scheduler keeps all the mobiles generated for the cell TXi(ic).
TX ic TX ic TX ic
N Users = Min N Users – Max N Users – Generated
i i i
TX ic
Sel i
For a cell, mobiles M i N Users are selected for RRM by the scheduler.
Sel Sel
M
i M
i
M
i
Uplink: TPD Min – UL , Min TPD Max – UL ABTP P – UL
Sel
Sel Mi Mi
Sel Mi Sel Min TPD Max – UL ABTP P – UL
Mi TPD Min – UL Mi
Uplink: TPD Min – UL = ---------------------------------------------
- , TPD Max – UL = -------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
1 – BLER BUL 1 – BLER B UL
Sel
Sel Mi Mi
Mi TPD Min – UL + TP Offset
Uplink: TPD Min – UL = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-,
Sel
Mi Mi
1 – BLER BUL f TP – Scaling
749
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Sel
M
i
M
i
M
i
Sel Min TPD Max – UL ABTP P – UL + TP Offset
M
i
TPD Max – UL = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sel
Mi Mi
1 – BLER BUL f TP – Scaling
The Min() function selects the lower of the two values. This calculation is performed in order to limit the maximum uplink
throughput demand to the maximum throughput that a user can get in uplink using the allocated bandwidth (number of used
subchannels) calculated for it in "Traffic C/(I+N) and Bearer Calculation (UL)" on page 737.
Resource Allocation for Minimum Throughput Demands:
TX i ic
Sel
1. For the QoS classes UGS, ErtPS, rtPS, and nrtPS, Atoll sorts the M i N Users in order of decreasing service priority,
Sel
Mi
p :
TX i ic TX i ic
Where N N Users , if there are some Best Effort users, or N = N Users if there are no Best Effort users selected.
Sel Sel
2. Starting with M i = 1 up to M i = N , Atoll allocates the downlink and uplink resources required to satisfy each
user’s minimum throughput demands in downlink and uplink as follows:
Sel Sel
Sel Mi Sel Mi
Mi TPD Min – DL TPD Min – UL
Mi
R Min – DL = --------------------------
- and R Min – UL = --------------------------
-
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
CTP P – DL CTP P – UL
750
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
Sel
M TX ic
i i
• When/If in downlink R Min – DL = TL DL – Max , i.e., the resources available in downlink have been used up for
Sel
M
i
satisfying the minimum throughput demands of the mobiles.
Sel
M TX ic
i i
• When/If in uplink R Min – UL = TL UL – Max , i.e., the resources available in uplink have been used up for
Sel
Mi
Sel Sel
Mi TX i ic Mi TX i ic
6. If RMin – DL TLDL – Max or RMin – UL TLUL – Max , and all the minimum throughput resources demanded by
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
the mobiles have been allocated, Atoll goes to the next step for allocating resources to satisfy the maximum
throughput demands.
Backhaul Saturation:
If at this stage, a site’s downlink or uplink effective MAC aggregate throughput exceeds its maximum downlink or uplink
backhaul throughput, respectively, mobiles are rejected one by one due to Backhaul Saturation, starting from the mobile with
the lowest priority service, among all the cells of the site in order to reach a downlink or uplink effective MAC aggregate site
throughput ≤ the site’s maximum downlink or uplink backhaul throughput.
Resource Allocation for Maximum Throughput Demands:
For each cell, the remaining cell resources available are:
Sel
TX ic TX ic M
i i i
Downlink: R Rem – DL = TL DL – Max – R Min – DL
Sel
Mi
Sel
TX i ic TX i ic Mi
Uplink: R Rem – UL = TL UL – Max – R Min – UL
Sel
M
i
For each mobile, the throughput demands remaining once the minimum throughput demands have been satisfied are the
difference between the maximum and the minimum throughput demands:
Sel Sel Sel
M M M
i i i
Downlink: TPD Rem – DL = TPD Max – DL – TPD Min – DL
For the remaining throughput demands of the mobiles belonging to the QoS classes ErtPS, rtPS, nrtPS, and Best Effort, the
following resource allocation methods are available:
• Proportional Fair:
The goal of this scheduling method is to distribute resources among users fairly in such a way that, on the average,
each user gets the highest possible throughput that it can get under the radio conditions at its location.
751
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
Sel
Let the total number of users belonging to the QoS classes ErtPS, rtPS, nrtPS, and Best Effort, be N M i .
TX ic TX ic
i i
a. Each user’s channel throughput is increased by the multi-user diversity gain G MUG – DL or G MUG – UL read from the
Sel
scheduler properties for the Mobility M i assigned to mobile M i and the number of connected users, DL or
UL, in the cell TXi(ic) in the iteration k-1.
Sel Sel Sel Sel
Mi Mi TX i ic Mi Mi TX i ic
CTP P – DL = CTP P – DL G MUG – DL and CTP P – UL = CTP P – UL G MUG – UL
Without MUG Without MUG
Sel Sel
TX i ic Mi TX i ic Mi
Max Max
G MUG – DL = 1 if CINR Traffic CINR MUG and G MUG – UL = 1 if CINR UL CINR MUG .
If the multi-user diversity gain for the exact value of the number of connected users is not available in the graph,
it is interpolated from the gain values available for the numbers of users just less than and just greater than the
actual number of users.
b. Atoll divides the remaining resources in the cell into equal parts for each user:
TX i ic TX i ic
R Rem – DL R Rem – UL
--------------------- and --------------------
-
N N
c. Atoll converts the remaining throughput demands of all the users to their respective remaining resource
demands:
Sel Sel
Sel M Sel M
i i
Mi TPD Rem – DL Mi TPD Rem – UL
RD Rem – DL = ---------------------------
- and RD Rem – UL = ---------------------------
-
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
CTP P – DL CTP P – UL
Remaining resource demands of a user are given by the ratio between its remaining throughput demands and the
peak channel throughputs at the user’s location.
d. The resources allocated to each user by the Proportional Fair scheduling method for satisfying its maximum
throughput demands are:
Each user gets either the resources it needs to achieve its maximum throughput demands or an equal share from
the remaining resources of the cell, whichever is smaller.
e. Atoll stops the resource allocation in downlink or uplink,
Sel
Mi TX i ic
• When/If in downlink R Max – DL = R Rem – DL , i.e., the resources available in downlink have been used up
Sel
M
i
for satisfying the maximum throughput demands of the mobiles.
Sel
Mi TX i ic
• When/If in uplink RMax – UL = R Rem – UL , i.e., the resources available in uplink have been used up for
Sel
Mi
Sel Sel
TX i ic TX i ic Mi Mi
R Rem – UL = TL UL – Max – RMin – UL – RMax – UL
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
752
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
AT330_TRR_E1 Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks
h. Atoll repeats the all the above steps for the users whose maximum throughput demands have not been satisfied
TX ic TX ic
i i
until either R Rem – DL = 0 and R Rem – UL = 0 , or all the maximum throughput demands are satisfied.
• Proportional Demand:
The goal of this scheduling method is to allocate resources to users weighted according to their remaining throughput
demands. Therefore, the user throughputs for users with high throughput demands will be higher than those with low
throughput demands. In other words, this scheduler distributes channel throughput between users proportionally to
their demands.
a. Atoll converts the remaining throughput demands of all the users to their respective remaining resource
demands:
Sel Sel
Sel Mi Sel Mi
Mi TPD Rem – DL Mi TPD Rem – UL
RD Rem – DL = ---------------------------
- and RD Rem – UL = ---------------------------
-
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
CTP P – DL CTP P – UL
Remaining resource demands of a user are given by the ratio between its remaining throughput demands and the
peak channel throughputs at the user’s location.
b. Atoll calculates the amount effective remaining resources for the cell of each user to distribute among the users
as follows:
Sel Sel
TX i ic TXi ic Mi TX i ic TXi ic Mi
R Eff – Rem – DL = Min R Rem – DL
RD Rem – DL and R Eff – Rem – UL = Min R Rem – UL
RD Rem – UL
Sel
Mi Sel
Mi
c. The resources allocated to each user by the Proportional Demand scheduling method for satisfying its maximum
throughput demands are:
Sel Sel
Sel Mi Sel Mi
Mi TX i ic RD Rem – DL Mi TX i ic
RD Rem – UL
R Max – DL = R Eff – Rem – DL ----------------------------------
Sel
- and R Max – UL = R Eff – Rem – UL ----------------------------------
Sel
-
Mi Mi
RDRem – DL RDRem – UL
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
ErtPS 1
rtPS 2
nrtPS 3
Best Effort 4
The resources available for the users of each QoS class from among the remaining resources is calculated as follows:
753
Atoll 3.3.0 Technical Reference Guide for Radio Networks
Chapter 10: WiMAX BWA Networks ©Forsk 2015
r r
1 QoS 1 QoS
N QoS --- N QoS ---
TX ic
i
TX ic
i TX ic
i
TX ic
i
R QoS – DL = R Rem – DL ------------------------------------------------------- and R QoS – UL = R Rem – UL -------------------------------------------------------
r r
1 QoS 1 QoS
N QoS ---
N QoS ---
All QoS All QoS
Resource Allocation:
Once the remaining resources available for the users of each QoS class have been determined, the allocation of
resources within each QoS class is performed as for the proportional fair scheduler.
Sel
Let the number of users belonging to a QoS class N QoS M i .
a. Atoll divides the remaining resources of the QoS class into equal parts for each user:
TX i ic TX i ic
R QoS – DL R QoS – UL
-------------------- and -------------------
-
N QoS N QoS
b. Atoll converts the remaining throughput demands of all the users to their respective remaining resource
demands:
Sel Sel
Sel Mi Sel Mi
Mi TPD Rem – DL Mi TPD Rem – UL
RD Rem – DL = ---------------------------
- and RD Rem – UL = ---------------------------
-
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
CTP P – DL CTP P – UL
Remaining resource demands of a user are given by the ratio between its remaining throughput demands and the
peak channel throughputs at the user’s location.
c. The resources allocated to each user by the Biased scheduling method for satisfying its maximum throughput